a eras TESS Sean My in Henin a Ne reewe SCIENCE A WHEKLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. EDITORIAL COMMITTEE: S. NEwcomsB, Mathematics; R. 8S. Woopwarp, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING, Astronomy ; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THURSTON, Engineering ; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry ; J. LE ConTE, Geology ; W. M. DAvis, Physiography ; HENRY F. OsBorN, Paleontology ; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; 8. H. SCUDDER, Entomology ; C. E. BessEy, N. L. BRITTON, Botany ; C. 8S. Minot, Embryology, Histology ; H. P. Bowpitcn, Physiology ; J. S. Bruurnes, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology ; DANIEL G. BRIN- TON, J. W.. POWELL, Anthropology. NEW SERIES. VOLUME IX. JANUARY-JUNH, 1899. ae Z NATIONAL NWS: / — NEW YORK THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 1899 THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPANY, 41 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, Pa. CONTENTS AND INDEX. N.S. VOL, [x.—JANUARY TO JUNE, 1899. The Names of Contributors are Printed in Small Capitals. ABBE, CLEVELAND, Catalogue for Meteorology, 871 ADLER, Cyrus, The International Catalogue of Scien- tific Literature 761, 799 Age of the Earth, Lorp KELVIN, 665, 704; T. C. CHAMBERLIN, 889 Allen, Alfred H., Commercial Organic Analysis, W. A. NOYES, 63, 818 ALLEN, J. A., Birds, A. H. Evans, 647 ‘American Association for the Advancement of Science, 28, 628, 881 Amerind— A Designation for the Aboriginal Tribes of the American Hemisphere, 795 Ames, J. S., Text-book of Physics, Charles S. Hast- ings and F. E. Beach, 545 ; Catalogue for Physics, 864 Anatomists, American, Association, D. S. LAMB, 320 Angot, Alfred, Météorologie, FRANK WALDO, 743 Anschiitz, R., Organic Chemistry, E. RENOUF, 749 Anthropological, Section of the American Association, 145 ; Society of Washington, J. H. McCoRMIcK, 218, 590 Anthropology, Current Notes on, D. G. BRINTON, 37, 117, 156, 185, 227, 266, 299, 338 ; Advances in Methods of Teaching, FRANZ Boas, 93 Arc of Peru, Remeasurement of, 916 Astronomical Notes, WINSLOW UPTON, 36, 224; E. C. PICKERING, 417, 456 Atomic Weights, FERDINAND G. WIECHMANN, 23 ; Quarter Century’s Progress, F. P. VENABLE, 477 B., H. C., The Statistical Method in Zoology, 74 Bailey, L. H., The Principles of Agriculture, ELISHA WILSON MORSE, 328 Bailey, Solon I., Peruvian Meteorology, R. DeC. WARD, 715 BARROWS, FRANKLIN W., New York State Science Teachers Association, 811 BaRus, CARL, The Objective Presentation of Har- monic Motion, 385 BatTuHer, F. A., Zoological Bibliography, 154 ; The Storage of Pamphlets, 720; Some Smithsonian Publications, 775 BAvER, L. A., Trowbridge’s Theory of the Earth’s Magnetism, 264 BEAN, TARLETON H., Fishes of the South Shore of Long Island, 52; Identity of Common and Lab- rador White Fish, 416 Beddard, F. E., Structure and Classification of Birds, F. A. Lucas, 212; Elementary Zoology, CHAS. WRIGHT DODGE, 329 Bell, Alexander Graham, on the Development by Se- lection of Supernumerary Mamme in Sheep, 637 BERKEY, CHARLES P., Minnesota Academy of Nat- ural Sciences, 623 Berry, Arthur, A Short History of Astronomy, DAvrp P. Topp, 682 BESSEY, CHARLES E., 74, 226, 555, 689, 880; The North American Potentillez, per Axel Rydberg, 548 ; The Evolution of Plants, D. Campbell, 618 Binet, Na L’ Année psychologique, 292 Biological, Stations of Brittany, JoHN H. GER- OULD, 165 ; Society of Washington, O. F. Coox, 257, 486, 847; Fresh Water Stations of the World, Henry B. WARD, 497; Text-Books and Teachers, O. F. Cook, 541 ; Bulletin, 652 Biology, Section of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., GARY N. CALKINS, 718 ; FRANCIS E. Luoyn, 912 ; of the Great Lakes, JACOB REIGHARD, 906 BLACKFORD, EUGENE G., Note on the Spawning Season of the Eel, 740 Biss, C. B., Section of Psychology and Anthropology, New York Academy of Sciences, 219, 376 Boas, FRANZ, Teaching of Anthropology, 93 Botton, H. CARRINGTON, and W. P. CUTTER, Cata- logue for Chemistry, 867 Boston. Society of Natural History, SAMUEL HEN- SHAW, 624 Botanical Club, Torrey, E. S. BURGESS, 33, 295, 520, 591, 819, 876; of Washington, CHARLES LoUIs POLLARD, 291, 914 ; of the University of Chi- cago, 413 ; Notes, CHARLES E. BESSEY, 74, 226, 555, 689, Bee Gazette, 376, 589, 620 BouTWELL, Ap , Geological Conference and Stu- dents’ weer aif Harvard University, 33, 113, 335, 519, 591, 719, 752, 786 BRIGHAM, A. IRS Physical Geography, W. M. Davis and H. W. Snyder, 410 BRINTON, D. G., Current Notes on Anthropology, 37, 76, 117, 156, 185, 227, 266, 299, 338 BRITCHER, H. W., Onondaga Academy, 114, 376 Brooks, W. K., Truth and Error, 121 ; The Wonder- ful Century, A. R. Wallace, 511 Brunissure of the Vine, ALBERT F. Woops, 508 Bumpus, H. C., Marine Biological Laboratory, 228 BurGess, E. 8., Torrey Botanical Club, 33, 295, 520, 591, 819, 876 Burnside, W., Theory of Groups of Finite Order, F N. CoLe, 106 Butler, A. W., Birds of Indiana, F. M. C., 66 C., C. G., Practical Astronomy, W. W. Campbell, 842 Oly F.C., ’ Physical Notes, 116, 378, 493, 555 C., F. M., Birds of Indiana, A.W. Butler, 66 C., H. W., Bacteriology, Ferdinand Hueppe, 513 Casont, FLORIAN, Carl Friedrich Gauss and his Children, 697 CALKINS, GARY N., Biological Section of the New York Academy of Sciences, 718 Iv SCIENCE. CHAMBERLIN, T. C., Lord Kelvin’s Address on the Age of the Earth as an Abode fitted for Life, 889 Campbell, D. H., The Evolution of Plants, CHARLES E. BESSEY, 618 Campbell, W. W., Astronomy, G. C. C., 842 Card, Fred. W., Bush Fruits, B. D. HALSTED, 109 Catalogue, International of Scientific Literature, 187 ; Cyrus ADLER, 761, 799; J. VicrToR CARUvSs, 825, Physics, J. S. AMEs, 864, Chemistry, H. CAr- RINGTUN BOLTON, W. P. CUTTER, 867 ; CLEVE- LAND ABBE, 871; N.S. SHALER, 907 ; JACQUES Lors, 908 CATTELL, J. MCKEEN, Degrees in Science in Harvard University, 522 Cayley, Arthur, Collected Mathematical Papers, GEORGE BRUCE HALSTED, 59 Chemical, Society of Washington, WILLIAM H. Krue, 32, 517, 622, 751; Society, American, DURAND WoopMAN, General Meeting, 58 ; N. Y. Section of, 258, 487, 654, 820, 913; Journal American, 151, 257, 451, 620, 718, 712 Chemistry, Notes on Inorganic, J. L. H., 71, 155, 185, 266, 297, 337, 457, 595, 623, 652, 656, 688 ; Phys- ical, Journal of, 151, 293 ; Organic, The Revival of, H. N. STOKES, 601 CLARK, WILLIAM BULLOCK, Geology, James D. Dana, 147; Report of Official State Bureaus, 162 CLEMENT, FREDERIC E., Pflanzengeographie, A. F. W. Schimper, 747 Climatological Ass. Amer., GUY HINSDALE, 774 CocKERELL, T. D. A., The Chinch Bug, F. M. Web- ster, 175; North American Rhopalocera, Henry Skinner, 373; A Date-palm Scale Insect, 417 ; Color in Nature, Marion J. Newbiggin, 448 Cor, W. R., The Time of Breeding of some Common New England Nemerteans, 167 CoE, F. N., The American Mathematical. Society, 57, 322, 684 ; Theory of Groups of Finite Order, W. Burnside, 106 Cole, R. S., Photographic Optics, FRANK WALDO, 874 Collins, Joseph, Faculty of Speech, E. W. F., 745 Congdon, Ernest, A Qualitative Analysis, W. A. NOYES, 26 CONKLIN, EDWIN G., Advances in Methods of Teach- ing Zoology, 81 Cook, O. F., Biological Society of Washington, 257, 332, 468, 847; Biological Text-books and Teachers, 541 CRANDALL, CHARLES §., Storing Pamphlets, 115 CREIGHTON, J. E., The Groundwork of Science, St. George Mivart, 147 Creighton, J. E., Logic, GEORGE REBEC, 779 Cummings John, WM. H. NILES, 24 CuTTER, W. P., and H. CARRINGTON BOLTON, Cata- logue for Chemistry, 867 D., A. St. C., Notes on Physics, 225, 419, 655, 687 D., T., The Choice of Elements, 418 DALL, WM. H., Zoological Nomenclature, 221 Dana, James D., Revised Text-book of Geology, W. B. CLARK. 147 DAVENPORT, CHAS. B., Specific Place Modes, 415 Davenport, Charles B., Experimental Morphology, T. H. MorGAN, 648 Davis, W. M., and H. W. Snyder, Physical Geogra- phy, ALBERT PERRY BRIGHAM, 410 DAWSON, GEORGE M., Duplication of Geologic For- mation Names, 592 CONTENTS AND INDEX. Day, WM. S., Section of Astronomy and Physics of the New York Academy of Sciences, 653, 850 DEAN, BASHFORD, Amer, Morphological Soc., 311, 364 ; Lamprey Macrophthalmia Chilensis, 740 DEARBORN, G. V. N., The Origin of Nightmare, 455 DEGARMO, CHARLES, Talks to Teachers on Psychol- ogy, William James, 909 Delage, Ives, L’ Année biologique, 292 Derventer, Ch. van, Physical Chemistry for Beginners, Harry C. JONES, 750 Dewar, on Liquid Hydrogen, 914 DILLER, J. 8., Stalactites of Sand, 371 ; Latest Vol- canic Eruptions of the Pacific Coast, 639 Discussion and Correspondence, 34, 70, 114, 154, 184, 221, 259, 297, 376, 415, 455, 488, 520, 553, 592, 624, 686, 720, 752, 787, 820, 850, 877 DODGE, CHARLES WRIGHT, Elementary Zoology, Frank E. Beddard, 329 DopGE, RicHArD E., Rivers of North America,- Israel C. Russell, 214; New York Academy of Sciences, 452 ; Suggestions for Scientific Semin- ars, 520 Doo.uitrxe, C. L., National Observatory, 471 Durand, J. P., Taxonomie générale, F. A. L., 150 DwiGut, THoMAs, Human Anatomy, Henry Morris, 27 EASTMAN, C. R., Plastiline, 211; Some New Amer-- ican Fossil Fishes, 642 Eel, Spawning Season of the, EUGENE G. BLACKFORD, 740 ; Larval Stage of the THEO. GILL, 820 EIGENMANN, CARL H., A Case of Convergence, 280 ELKIN, W. L., National Observatory, 475 Embouchure, N. A. Indian Flageolets, E. H. Haw- LEY, 742 Entomological Society of Washington, L.O. Howarp, 181, 413 Evans, A. H., Birds, J. A. Allen, 647 Explosions caused by commonly occurring Substan- ces, CHARLES E. MUNROE, 345 F., W. H., Industrial Electricity, Henry de Graffig- ny, 374 F., W. S., Notes on Physics, 336, 378, 418, 457 FARRAND, LIVINGSTON, American Psychological As- sociation, 249 ; Indians of Western Washington, 533 FARRINGTON, OLIVER C., Moon Model, 35 Fatigue, Mental, EDWARD THORNDIKE, 712 Furnt, A. 8., Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, 179 Folwell, A. P., Sewerage, M. M., 64 Food Adulteration, Senatorial Investigation of, 793 FOWKE, GERARD, Archeological Investigations on the Amoor River, 539 FRANKLIN, W.S., The Sensation of Motion and its Reversal, 70; Etherion, 297 ; Fundamental Law of Temperature for Gaseous Celestial Bodies, 594 Fuertes, E. A., National Observatory, 475 FULLER, M. L., Rapidity of Sand-plain Growth, 643 G., J. E., Freezing-point, Boiling-point and Conduct- ivity Methods, Harry C. Jones, 150 GALLOWAY, B. T., Enzymes as Remedies in Infec- tious Diseases, 379 Ganona, W. F., Methods of Teaching Botany, 96 ; Columbia Meeting of the Society for Plant Mor- phology and Physiology, 169 GARDINER, Epw. G., Plymouth, England, and its Marine Biological Laboratory, 488 NEw SERIES. VoL. IX. Gauss, Carl F iedrich and his Children, FLORIAN CAJoRI, 697 Geological, Conference and Student’s Club of Harvard University, J. M. BOUTWELL, 33, 113, 335, 519, 591, 719, 752, 786; Soc. of ‘Amer., J. F, KEMP, 100, 138 ; Soc, of Washington, Wm. F. MorseEtu, 152, 454, 551, 622; Survey, Publications, 177; of Maryland, BAILEY WILLIS, 252; In Alaska, W.F. M., 628; Club, University of Minnesota, F. W. Sardeson, 412; Expedition to the Philip- pines, W. F. M., 722° Geologist, American, 111, 517. Geology, ‘Journal of, 375, 783, 911; and Mineralogy, Section of the 'N. Y. Acad. of Sci., ALEXIS A. JULIEN, 719, 818. GEROULD, JOHN pe The Biological Stations of Brit- tany, 165 GIDDINGS, FRANKLIN H., The Psychology of So- ciety, 16 GILL, THEO., Larval Stage of the Eel, 820 Gorvon, REGINALD, Section of ‘Astronomy and Physics of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., 219, 488 GRAFFIGNY, HENRY DE, Industrial Electricity, W. H. F., 374 Groos, Karl, Die Spiele der Menschen, HrrRAm M. STANLEY, 619 Guyer, MICHAEL F., Ovarian Structure in an Ab- normal Pigeon, 876 H. J. L., Notes on Inorganic Chemistry, 71, 155, 185, 266, 297, 337, 457, 595, 623, 652, 656, 688 Hagen, J. G., Atlas of Variable Stars, 29 Hacun, ARNOLD, The Early Tertiary Volcanoes of the Absaroka’ Range, 425 HALL, ASAPH, National Observatory, 468 HALuock, WILLIAM, Kirchoff’s Principle, 210 ; Re- ception and Exhibition of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., 616 HALsteD, B. D., Bush Fruits, Fred. W. Card, 109 HALSTED, GEORGE BRUCE, Mathematical Papers, 59 ; La vie sur les hauts plateaux, A. L. Herrera and D. V. Lope, 255 ; Sophus Lie, 447 ; N. I. Lobat- schefski, 813 HARSHBERGER, JOHN W., Transmitted Characteris- tics in a White Angora Cat, 554 Hastings, Charles, 8.. and F. E. Beach, Text-Book of General Physics, J.S. AMES, 545 Hawley, E. H., Embouchure in N. A. Indian Flageo- lets, 742 Hay, O. P., Fossil Vertebrates, 593 Hellmann G., Wetter Prognosen, A. L. Rotcn, 910 Helmholtz, Hermann von, Brain of, 557 HENSHAW, SAMUEL, Boston Society of Natural His- tory, 624 Herrera, A. L., and D. V. Lope, La vie sur les hauts plateaux, GEORGE BRUCE HALSTEAD, 255 Hill, Robert T., Cuba and Porto Rico, WJ M., 65; and T. W., Vaughan, The Lower Cretaceous Grypheeas of the Texas Region, F. W. SIMONDs, 110 ; Geology of the Edwards Plateau and Rio Grande Plain, FREDERIC W. Simonps, 481 HINSDALE, Guy, Medical Climatology, S. Edwin Solly, 485 ; Amer. Climatological Association, 774 Hopes, WM. H., Science Club of the University of Wisconsin, 875 Holland, W. J, The Butterfly Book, SAMUEL H. SCUDDER, 66 HOLMAN, Siias W., Work, 154 Matter, Energy, Force and SCIENCE. Vv Holman, Silas W., Matter, Energy, Force and Work, T. C. M., 24 Howarp, L. O., Entomological Soc. of Washing- ton, 181, 413 ; Economic Status of Insects, 233 Hueppe, Ferdinand, Principles of Bacteriology, H. W.C., 513 Huntington, Geo. S., Teaching of Anatomy, 85 JAMES, WILLIAM, Lehmann and Hansen on Tele- pathy, 654 ; Telepathy Once More, 752 James, William, Talks to Teachers on Psychology, CHARLES DEGARMO, 909 Jesup, North Pacific Expedition, L. FARRAND, 533; HARLAN I. SMITH, 535 ; GERARD FOWKE, 539, 732 JOHNSON, ROSWELL, H., Two-headed snakes, 625 Jones, HArRy C., Physical Chemistry, J. L. R. Morgan, 717; Physical Chemistry Ch. van Der- venter, 750 Jones, Harry C., Freezing Point, Boiling Point and Conductivity Methods, J. E. G., 150 JORDAN, DAvip STarr, A Sage in Science, 529 ; A Posthom Phantom, a Study in the Spontan- eous Activity of Shadows, 674 JORDAN, EDWIN O., Examination of Water, William P. Mason, 548 Jupp, CHas. H., Sub-Section of Anthropology and Psychology of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., 553, 685 JUDD, SYLVESTER D., Birds as Weed Destroyers, 905 JULIEN, ALEXIS A., Section of Geology and Miner- alogy of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., 719, 818 KEELER, JAMES E., National Observatory, 476 KELVIN, Lorp, The Age of the Earth, 665, 704 Kelvin, Lord, Address on the Age of the Earth, Pro- FEssoR T. C. CHAMBERLIN, 889 Kemp, J. F., Geological Society of America, 100, 138 KEYSER, C. J., Infinitesimal Analysis, W. B. Smith, 844 KRoEBER, A. L., Anthropological Section of the American Association, 145 KRuG, WILLIAM H., Chemical Society of Washing- ton, 32, 333, 517, 622, 751 i L., F. A., The New York Zoological Park, 73 ; Taxo- nomie, J. P. Durand, 150; Neomylodon Listai, 459 — LAmp, D.8., Association of Amer. Anatomists, 320 LAWRENCE, RALPH E., Mercury Pump, 510 LEE, FREDERIC’S., Amer. Physiological Society, 286; Laboratory Exercises in Anatomy and Physiology, J. E. Peabody, 331 Leland Stanford Jr. University, 916 Leroux, Ernest, Codex Borbonicus, M. H. SAVILLE, 746 Lie, Sophus, GEORGE BRUCE HALSTED, 447 LITTLEHALES, G. W., The Prospective Place of the Solar Azimuth Tables in the Problem of Ac- celerating Ocean Transit, 640 Lioyp, FRANCIS E., Section of Biology of the N. Y. Acad. of Sci., 913 Lobatschefski, Nikolai Ivanovitsch, HALSTED, 813 Lockwoop, M. H., and E. B. WHEPLER, On the Action of the Coherer, 624 f Locy, Wm. A., Northwestern University Science Club, 31 ; Logs, JACQUES, Catalogue for Physiology, 908 Loew, OSCAR, ‘What is the Cause of the so- -called™ Tobacco Fermentation, 376 GEORGE BRUCE vi SCIENCE. Loew, Oscar, Die chemische Energie der Lebenden Zellen, ALBERT F. Woops, 409 LorinG, J. ALDEN, Virginia Opossum, 71 Lucas, F. A., Structure and Classification of Birds, F. E. Beddard, 212; Nomenclature of the Hyoid in Birds, 323 ; Biological Society of Wash- ington, 785 Lusk, GRAHAM, Physiology, E. A. Schiifer, 291 M., F., Sanitary Engineering, Mansfield Merriman, 109 M. M., Sewerage, A. P. Folwell, 64 M., T.C., Metric System, 377 ; Matter, Energy, Force and Work, Silas W. Holman, 24 M., W. F., Geological, Survey Work in Alaska, 628; Expedition to the Philippines, 722 M., W J, Cuba and Porto Rico, Robert T. Hill, 65 MacDouaat, D. 'T., Physiology, Max Verworn, 650 MACFARLANE, ALEXANDER, Algebra, A. N. White- head, 324 MACLOSKIE, GEORGE, Physiological Osmosis, 206 ; Osmotic Solutions, 554 Marine Biological Laboratory, H. C. Bumpus, 228 ; of Plymouth, Eng., Epw. G. GARDINER, 488; A New, HuGH M SmiruH, 658; Wood’s Holl, 721 MARLATT, C. L., Some Common Sources of Error in recent Work on Coccidze, 825 Marr, J. E., Stratigraphical Geology, HENRY S. WIL- _ LIAmMs, 547 Mars, the Planet, G. SCHTAPARELLI, 633 Marsh, Othniel Charles, J. L. WorTMAN, 561 Mason, William P., The Examination of Water, EDWIN O. JORDAN, 548 Mathematical Society, The American, F. N. Cone, 57, 322; Transactions of, 375; Bulletin, 412, 450, 751 McCLENAHAN, Howarp, On the Wehnelt Current Breaker, 753 McCormick, J. H., Anthropological Society of Washington, 218, 590 MENDENHALL, T. C., National Observatory, 469 MERCER, HENRY C., Men of Science and Anti-Vivi- section, 221 Mercury Pump, Ralph R. Lawrence, 510 MERRIAM, C. Hart, Zone Temperatures, 116 Merriman, Mansfield, Sanitary Engineering, M., 109 MERRITT, ERNEST The Discharge of Electricity through Gases, J. J. Thomson, 289 Meteorology, Current Notes on, R. DE C. WARD, 72, 116, 298, 458, 627, 657, 787, 878 ; Catalogue of, CLEVELAND ABBE, 871 Minnesota Academy, CHARLES P. BERKEY, 623 MINoT, CHARLES S., Anatomy and Histology of the Mouth and Teeth, J. Norman Broomall, 216 Mivart, St. George, The Groundwork of Science, J. E. CREIGHTON, 147 Morgan, J. L. R., Elements of Physical Chemistry, HARRY C. JONES, 717 MorGan, T. H., Experimental Morphology, Charles B. Davenport, 648 Morris, Henry, Human Anatomy, THomMas Dwiaut, 27 Morse, ELISHA WILSON, The Principles of Agricul- ture, L. H. Bailey, 328 MOoRSELL, W. F., Geological Society of Washington, 152, 454, 551, 622 MUNROE, CHARLES E., Explosions Caused by Com- monly Occurring Substances, 345 CONTENTS AND INDEX. MUNSTERBERG, HuGo, Methods of Teaching Psychol- ogy, 91; Physiological Basis of Mental Life, 442 Myers, G. W., National Observatory, 474 National Academy of Sciences, 621 Newbiggin, Marion J., Color in Nature, T. D. A. COCKERELL, 448 NEWcomB, Simon, National Observatory, 467 Newcomb, Professor Simon, 851 NEWELL, W. W., American Folk-lore Society, 173 Newth, G. S., Quantitative and Qualitative Chemical Analysis, HENRY Fay, 176 New York Acad. of Sci., Section of Astronomy and Physics, W. S. Day, 653, 850; R. GorDoN, 219, 488; of Psychology and Anthropology, C. B. Briss, 219, 376; C. H. Jupp. 553, 685 ; of Biology, G. N. CALKINS, 718; FRANCIS E. Lioyp, 912; of Geology and Mineralogy, A. A. JULIEN, 719, 818; Annual Meeting R. E. Dopar, 452; Reception and Exhibition, W1L- LIAM HALLOCK, 616 Nives, Wo. H., John Cummings, 24 NoLan, EDWARD J., Philadelphia Academy of Nat- ural Sciences, 68, 181, 336 Norris, JAMEs F., The Spirit of Organic Chemistry, Arthur Lachman, 817 Noyes, W. A., Qualitative Analysis, Ernest A. Cong- don, 26; Commercial Organic Analysis, Alfred H. Allen, 63, 818; Industrial Chemistry, 160 O., C. A., Defective Eyesight, St. Jonn Roosa, 846 O., H. F., The Removal of Dr. Wortman to the Car- negie Museum, 755 Observatory, The United States Naval, A. N. SKIN- NER, 1, 857; A National, 465; Discussion of a, 467; Stmon Nrewcomp, 468; ASAPH HALL, 468; C. A. YouneG, 468; T. C. MENDENHALL, 469; R. S. WoopwarD, 470 ; C. L. DooLirTLE, 471; W. H. PICKERING, 472 ; ARTHUR SEARLE, 472 ; FRANK W. Very, 473; Davip P. Topp, 473; G. W. Myers, 474; E. A. Fuertes, 475; W. L. ELKIN, 475 ; JAMES E. KEELER, 476 Opossum, Virginia, J. ALDEN LorIN@, 71 OsBoRN, HENRY F., Frontal Horn on Aceratherium Incisivum, 161 OsBorN, H. L., A Remarkable Sun-dog, 521 OsBURN, R. C., Ohio Academy of Science, 180 P., T. S., Wild Animals I have known, Ernest Seton Thompson, 26 PATRICK, G. T. W., Degeneracy, Eugene S. Talbot, 372 Patten, Simon N., The Development of English Thought, R. M. WENLEY, 713 PEARSON, KARL, Reproductive Selection, 283 Philadelphia, Academy of Natural Sciences, EDWARD J. NOLAN, 68 ; Exposition of 1900, 649 Philosophical Society of Washington, E. D. PRESTON, 218, 296, 454, 621, 652, 686, 846 Physical Society, American, A. G. WEBSTER, 784 Physics, Notes on, 116, 225, 336, 377, 378, 418, 456, 493, 555, 655, 687; Club of New York, A. T. SEYMOUR, 553 ; Catalogue for, J. S. AMES, 864 Physiological, Society, American, The N. Y. Meeting of, FREDERIC S. LEE, 286 ; Basis of Mental Life, HuGo MUNSTERBERG, 442 PICKERING, E. C., Astronomical Notes, 417, 456 PICKERING, W. H., National Observatory, 47 NEw SERIES VoL. IX. PIERPONT, JAMES, Analytic Functions, J. Harkness and F. Morley, 586 Plant Morphology, and Physiology, The Society of, W. F. GANONG, 169 POLLARD, CHARLES Louis, Botanical Club of Wash- ington, 294, 487, 652, 914 PorTER, Wo. T., Methods of Teaching Physiology, 87 PoWELL, J. W., Reply to Critics, 259 Powell, J. W., Truth and Error, W. K. Brooks, 121 ; Lester F. WARD, 126 PRESTON, E. D., Philosophical Society of Washing- ton, 218, 621, 296, 454,652, 686, 846 ; Geodetic Operations in the United States, 305 PritcHETT, HENRY S., Magnetic Survey of the United States by the Coast and Geodetic Survey, 729 Pumas of Western United States, WITMER STONE, 34 RAMALEY, FRANCIS, Scientific Society of the Uni- versity of Colorado, 720 RAMSAY, WILLIAM, The Recently Discovered Gases and their Relation to the Periodic Law, 273 Rauh, F., La psychologie des sentiments, H. M. STAN- LEY, 683 REBEC, GEORGE, Introductory Logic, 779 REIGHARD, JAcoB, Biology of the Great Lakes, 906 RENovrF, E., Organic Chemistry, R. Anschitz, 749 Roosa, St. JOHN, Defective Eyesight, C. A. O., 846 Rorcn, A. L., Wetterprognosen und Wetterberichte, G. Hellmann, 910 Russell, Israel C., Rivers of North America, RICHARD E. DopGE, 214 SAFFORD, TRUMAN HeEnRy, On the Total Solar Eclipse of May 28, 1900, 115 SARDESON, F. W., Geological Club of the University of Minnesota, 412 SAVILLE, M. H., Codex Borbonicus, Ernest Leroux, 746 Schafer, E. A., Physiology, GRAHAM LUSK, 291 SCHIAPARELLI, G., Observations of Planet Mars, 633 Schimper, A. F. W., Pflanzengeographie, FREDERIC E. CLEMENTS, 747 Schnabel, Carl, Metallurgy, J. STRUTHERS, 588 Science, Nebraska Academy of, 29; Club of North- western University, WM. A. Locy, 31; and poli- tics, S. W. WILLISTON, 114; Academy of St. Louis, WILLIAM TRELEASE, 114, 220, 415, 488, 624, 720, 786; Onondaga Academy of, H. W. BRITCHER, 114 ; Work, 152 ; Natural, 152 ; Ohio Academy of, R. C. OsBuRN, 180; American Journal of, 517, 652; Degrees in, at Harvard University, J. MCKEEN CATTELL, 522; A Sage in, DAVID STARR JORDAN, 529; American As- sociation for the Advancement of, 628: Ab- stracts, 784 ; Teachers Association of N. Y. State, FRANKLIN W. BaArrkows, 811; Club of the University of Wisconsin. WM. H. Hopss, 875. Sciences, Natural, Philadelphia Academy of, EDWARD J. NOLAN, 68; Minnesota Academy of, CHARLES P. BERKEY, 623; Arts and Letters, Wisconsin Academy of, A. S. FLINT, 179 ; Texas Academy of, FREDERIC W. SIMONDS, 217 ; National Acad- emy of, 621; New York Academy of ; Section of Astronomy and Physics, R. GoRDON, 219, 488 ; W.S. Day, 653, 850 ; of Psychology and Anthro- pology, C. B. BLIss, 219, 376; C. H. JUDD, 553, 685 ; of Geology and Mineralogy, A. A. JULIEN, SCIENCE. vii 719, 818; of Biology, G. N. CALKINS, 718; An- nual Meeting, RICHARD EH. DopGE, 452 ; Recep- tion and Exhibition, WILLIAM HALLOCK, 616 Scientific, Books, 24, 59, 106, 147, 174, 212, 252, 289, 324, 372, 409, 448, 481, 511, 545, 586, 618, 682, 713, 743, 755, 813, 842, 872, 909 ; Journals and Articles, 29, 67, 111, 151, 178, 217, 257, 293, 375, 450, 485, 517, 549, 589, 620, 718, 750, 783, 911; Notes and News, 38, 76, 118, 157, 188, 267, 300, 339, 379, 420, 460, 494, 524, 557, 597, 628, 692, 724, 755, 788, 820, 851, 883, 917; Seminars and Conferences, RICHARD E. DODGE, 520 ; Appoint- ments under the Government, 523; Alliance of New York, 550, 629 ; Society of the University of Colorado, FRANCIS RAMALEY, 720 ScRIPTURE, E W., The Anesthetic Effects of a Sinusoidal Current of High Frequency, 377; Color-Weakness and Color-Blindness, 771 ; Cere- bral Light, 850; Arousal of Instinct by Taste, 878 SCUDDER, SAMUEL H., The Butterfly Book, W. J. Holland, 66 SEARLE, ARTHUR, National Observatory, 472 Seg, T. J. J., An Extension of Helmholtz’s Theory of the Heat of the Sun, 737 SEyMmourR, A. T., Physics Club of New York, 553 SHALER, N.S8., Geology and Geography in the Inter- national Catalogue of Scientific Literature, 907 SHARPE, B. F., A Double Instrument and a Double Method for the Measurement of Sound, 808 Stmonps, F. W., The Lower Cretaceous Gryphzas of the Texas Region, 110; Texas Academy of Sciences, 217 ; Geology of the Edwards Plateau and Rio Grande Plain, Robt. T. Hill and W. T. Vaughan, 481 SKINNER, A. N., The U. S. Naval Observatory, 1 SMITH, EuGENE A., Alabama Industrial and Scien- tific Society, 296 SmirH, Haran I,, Collections of the Provincial Museum of Victoria, British Columbia, 156 ; Archeological Investigations on the North Pacific Coast of America, 535 SmitH, HuaH M., A New Marine Biological Labora- tory, 658; Exploring Expedition to the Md- Pacific Ocean, 796 Smith, W. B., Infinitesimal Analysis, C. J. KEYSER, 844 Societies and Academies, 29, 68, 112, 152, 179, 217, 257, 294, 332, 376, 412, 452, 486, 517, 550, 590, 621, 684, 718, 751, 784, 818, 847, 875, 912 Solly, S. Edwin, Medical Climatology, Guy H1ns- DALE, 485 Solutions, M. A. W1ILLcox, 455 ; Osmotic, G. Ma- CLOSKIE, 554 ' Sound, A Double Instrument and a Double Method for the Measurement of, B. F. SHARPE, 808 Specific Place Modes, CHARLES B. DAVENPORT, 415 STANLEY, Hiram M., Artificial Dreams, 263 ; Evo- lution of Modesty, 553; Die Spiele der Men- schen, 619 ; La psychologie des sentiments, 683 ; Totemism, 877 Steam-Engine, Theory of the, R. H. THURSTON, 659 ‘Steam-gas,’ R. H. THURSTON, 753 StEvENS, W. LE Conte, Physics—Sound, J. H. Poynting and J. J. Thomson, 872 STEVENSON, J. J., Our Society, 41 STILEs, CH. WARDELL, Tuberculosis Conference, 491 St. Louis Academy of Science, WILLIAM TRELEASE, 114, 220, 415, 488, 624, 720, 786 SrokeEs, H. N., Revival of Inorganic Chemistry, 601 vill Srone, WitMER, Pumas of the Western United States, 34 STRUTHERS, J., Schnabel, 588 Handbook of Metallurgy, Carl T., E. W., Faculty of Speech, Joseph Collins, 745 T., Kk. H., Anti-Friction Alloys, 247; Automatic Ship Propulsion, 915 Talbot, Eugene S., Degeneracy, G. T. W. PATRICK, 372 Thompson, Ernest Seton, Wild Animals Known, T. 8. P., 26 TuHomeson, M. T., Breeding of Animals at Wood’s Hole during the Month of September, 1898, 581 Thomson, J. J., The Dis:harge of Electricity through Gases, ERNEST MERRITT, 289 THORNDIKE, EDWARD, The Dawn of Reason, James Weir, 450; Mental Fatigue, 712; The Mental Fatigue due to School Work, 862 Thorp, Frank, Industrial Chemistry, W. A. NoYEs, 150 Tuurston, R. H., The Suppression of Smoke, 55 ; Professional Schools vs. Business, 207; Engineer- ing and the Professions in Education, 407 ; Agri- cultural Electro-technics, 480; Economics in Manufactures, 583; Theory of the Steam Engine, 659; Thermodynamic Action of Steam Gas, 753 TITCHENER, E. B., Lehmann and Hansen on ‘the T: I- epathic Problem,’ 36 ; Professor James on Tele- pathy, 686 ; The Telepathic question, 787 Topp, Davip P., Discussion of a National Observa- tory, 473; A Short History of Astronomy, Ar- thur Berry, 682 Torrey Botanical Club, E. 8. BURGESS, 33, 295, 520, 591, 819, 876 'TRELEASE, WILLIAM, Academy of Science of St. Louis, 114, 220, 415, 488, 624, 720, 786 Trowbridge’s Theory of the Earth’s Magnetism, L. A. BAUER, 264 ; JOHN TROWBRIDGE, 265 True, A. C., Agricultural Experiment Stations, 199 ; The Scientific Study of Irrigation, 798 I have University and Educational News, 40, 80, 120, 160, 192, 271, 304, 341, 383, 424, 464, 496, 528, 559, 600, 631, 695, 728, 759, 791, 824, 856, 887 Upton, WINSLOW, Astronomical Notes, 36, 224, 492; The Storing of Pamphlets, 184 VENABLE, F. P., Atomic Weights, A Quarter Cen- tury’s Progress, 477 Verworn, Max, General Physiology, D. T. Mac- Dougal, 650 VERY, FRANK, W., National Observatory, 473 WaALpo, FRANK, Météorologie, Alfred Angot, 743 ; Photographie Optics, R. S. Cole, 874 Wallace, A. R., The Wonderful Century, W. K. Brooks, 511 SCIENCE. CONTENTS AND INDEX. Warp, Henry B., The Fresh-water Biological Sta- tions of the World, 497 WARD, LESTER F., Truth and Error, 126 WARD, R. DEC., Current Notes on Meteorology, 72, 116, 298, 458, 627, 657, 787, 878; Peruvian Meteorology. Solon I. Bailey, 715 WASHBURN, F. L., Hermaphroditism in Ostrea Lurida, 478 Webster, F. M., The Chinch Bug, T. D. A. Cock- ERELL, 175 WEEKS, F. B., Duplication of Geologic Formation names, 490, 625 Weir, James, The Dawn of Reason, EDWARD THORN- DIKE, 450 WENLEY, R. M., The Development of English Thought, Simon N. Patten, 713 Whitehead, A. N., A Treatise on Universal Algebra, ALEXANDER MACFARLANE, 324 WHITMAN, FRANK P., On the Brightness of. Pigments by Oblique Vision, 734 WIECHMANN, FERDINAND, G., Atomic Weights, 23 WILDER, BurT G., Some Misapprehensions as to the simplified Nomenclature of Anatomy, 566; Two Corrections, 655 Willcox, M. A., The Making of Solutions, 455 Williams, Talcott, The Primitive Savage, 37 WILLIAMS, HENRY §., Stratigraphical Geology, J. E. Marr, 547 WILLIs, BAILEY, Geological Survey of Maryland, 252 WILLISTON, S. W., Science and Politics, 114; Red- Beds of Kansas, 221 WILLSON, FRED’K N., The Elements of Graphic Statics, 515 Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, A. S. FLINT, 179 Woop, R. W., The Diffraction Process of Color Pho- tography, 859 WoopMAN, DURAND, The American Chemical So- ciety, 58; N. Y. Section of the American Chem- ical Society, 258, 487, 654, 820, 913 Woops, ALBERT F., Die chemische Energie der leben- den Zellen, Oscar Loew, 409 ; Brunissure of the Vine and other Plants, 508 WOODWARD, R. S., National Observatory, 470 WoopwortH, J. B., Kalendar fiir Geologen, K. Keil- hack, 174 WortTMAN, J. L., Othniel Charles Marsh, 561 Wortman, Dr., H. F. O., 755 Youna, C. A., National Observatory, 468 Zone Temperatures, C. HART MERRIAM, 116 Zoological, Notes, F. A. L., 73; H. C. B., 73, 156, 266, 459; Bibliography, F. A. BATHER, 154; Club, University of Chicago, MARY M. STURGES, 183; R.S. LILLIe, 183; MIcHAEL F. GUYER, 876 ; Station at Naples, 596 Zoo'ogy, Methods of Teaching, EDWIN G. CONKLIN, 81 SCIENCE EDITORIAL COMMITTEE: S. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WooDWARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING, Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THuRSTON, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE ContE, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; O. C. MArsH, Paleontology; W. K. Brooks, C. Hart MERRIAM, Zoology; 8S. H. ScupDER, Entomology; C. E. Bessey, N. L. Brirron, Botany; HENRY F. OsBorRN, General Biology; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bownitcu, Physiology; J. S. Brnuinas, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRINTON, J. W. POWELL, Anthropology. Fripay, JANUARY 6, 1899. CONTENTS: The United States Naval Observatory: PROFESSOR PAVE NGG OKUUNINEDR irasncsteesscesesesestercsttceresssecscseas 1 The Psychology of Society: PROFESSOR FRANKLIN Tay (GSUDDIENCIS) cedooababobslcascHoonbucaadeicn oosdcadacoc sere 16 Atomic Weights: DR. FERDINAND G. WIECH- RVLAIIRY 9 nepsocsonsdoboppSudndoboenacoobdaconiEscqnn6sceqqn9H00 23 John Cummings: PROFESSOR Wm. H. NILEs...... 24 Scientific Books :— Holman on Matter, Energy, Force and Work: T. C. M. Congdon’s Qualitative Analysis; Muter’s Manual of Analytical Chemistry: PROFESSOR W. A. Noyes. Thompson’s Wild Animals I have known: T. 8. PP. Morris’s Human Anatomy: PROFESSOR THOMAS DWIGHT. Generdl.......... 24 Scientific Journals and Articles :.....sccceceeeeeeseeeeeeees 29 Societies and Academies :— The Nebraska Academy of Sciences; Science Club of Northwestern University: PROFESSOR W. A. Locy. The Chemical Society of Washington: WintiAM A. Krua@. Students’? Geological Club and Conference of Harvard University: J. M. BoOUTWELL. Torrey Botanical Club: E. 8. BuR- GHUES) ccoscocodbandodasd daobegsdedadassndano snobagedecoougbo0d 29 Discussion and Correspondence :— The Pumas of the Western United States: Wu1t- MER STONE. The Schmidt-Dickert Moon Model: OLIVER C. FARRINGTON. Lehmann and Hansen on ‘the Telepathic Problem’: PROFESSOR E. B. ALETENQORS TOAST, hoon denqnconsodpaddonooxdeasebocdonobadseds56060 34 Astronomical Notes :— The November Meteors; Chase’s Comet (J. 1898) ; Stellar Motions : PROFESSOR WINSLOW UPTON... 36 Current Notes on Anthropology :— The American Hero-Myth ; The Primitive Savage ; A Booklet on Ethnology: PROFESSOR D. G. TSISVENEORT coocggonancadcosaabansosbbddossbooncoadseqcoonbqdes 37 ScientaficrNotesand News mcsssenaisvectsccsececsesss ene sees 38 University and E.lucational News........cscsceeeeeeeeeeees 40 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be sent to the responsible editor, Profes- zor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson N. Y. THE UNITED STATES‘NAVAL OBSERVATORY. ALTHOUGH much interest was shown by individuals in the science of astronomy in the early history of our country, this in- terest did not culminate in the founding of any astronomical observatories until the third and fourth decades of the present century. About 1835 Professors Olmsted and Loomis observed Halley’s comet with a five-inch telescope placed in the steeple of one of the buildings of Yale College at New Haven, Connecticut, but the observa- tory erected by Professor Albert Hopkins of Williams College, in 1836, was probably the earliest establishment of the kind in the United States. It was 48 feet long by 20 in breadth, and*consisted of acentral apart- ment surmounted by a revolving dome and flanked by two wings. The dome con- tained an equatorially mounted Herschelian telescope of 10-feet focus, and a 3.5-inch transit instrument was set up in one of the wings. Only two years later Professor Loomis built a small observatory at Hud- son, Ohio, and furnished it with a 4-inch equatorial telescope and a 2.7-inch transit circle. The longitude and latitude of this observatory was determined by Professor Loomis, and he observed five comets and sixteen occultations in the brief intervals of leisure left from his regular class work in the Western Reserve College. Another indication of the zeal of individuals in the advancement of science by actual astro- 2 SCIENCE. nomical observation is shown by a paper published in the ‘Transactions’ of the American Philosophical Society, New Series, Vol. VII., pp. 165-213, detailing observa- tions of nebulze made by H. L. Smith and E. P. Mason at New Haven, Connecticut, with a 12-inch reflector. This memoir contains carefully executed plates of several nebule, on which the stars are accurately plotted. Among those in our country who re- peatedly urged the foundation of an astro- nomical observatory in the United States was John Quincy Adams. While Secre- tary of State, as early as 18238, he offered personally to contribute $1,000 towards the establishment of an astronomical observa- tory in connection with Harvard College, provided the requisite amount for complet- ing the work should be raised within two years, but this effort failed. In 1825, in his first message to Congress after becoming President of the United States, he made recommendations for the establishment of a national observatory, a uniform standard of weights and measures, a naval academy, a nautical almanac and a national univer- sity. Party rancor prevented the carrying- out of any of these far-reaching plans at that time, but all of them) except that of a national university, were executed by our government at a later date. It was some years after this notable message of Presi- dent Adams before Emperor Nicholas, of Russia, entered upon the preliminary steps which culminated in the creation of the celebrated Pulkowa Observatory. Even after leaving the Presidential chair, President Adams never once relaxed his efforts towards the founding of a national observatory. In 1838 our England announced that he had received the money bequeathed to the American peo- ple by James Smithson for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men. Mr. Adams immediately urged that this fund should be devoted to the founding of an Minister to. [N. S. Vou. 1X. No. 210. astronomical observatory and a nautical almanac, and, as chairman of the select com- mittee on the Smithson fund, he advocated that plan on three different occasions be- tween 1838 and 1842. It is interesting to note that Senator Preston, of South Caro- lina, violently opposed these recommenda- tions of Mr. Adams, but that in 1842 Mr. Preston gave the weight of his influence in favor of the bill which finally created a national observatory under the name of ‘ A Depot of Charts and Instruments of the Navy of the United States.’ Let us trace the circumstances leading up to this event. In 1830, under orders from the Navy De- partment, Lieutenant Goldsborough estab- lished a depot of charts and instruments in the western part of the City of Washington, in the square bounded by 24th and 25th Streets, Pennsylvania Avenue and K Street Northwest. Here, in a small circular build- ing, on a brick pier with a foundation 20 feet below the surface, he mounted a 30- inch transit instrument made by R. Patten, of New York City. Goldsborough was suc- ceeded in 1833 by Lieutenant Wilkes, who removed the depot to a site on Capitol Hill, on the west side of North Capitol Street, between B and C Streets north, about 1,200 feet, north, 5° west, from the center of the Capitol. The dimensions of the small ob- servatory erected by Lieutenant Wilkes were 14 feet by 185 feet, and 10 feet from the floor to the eaves, and its outfit was as follows: ses ajels = ste!sl* 0/’.84 And 55 per cent. of the corrections are less than. .0 .25 The probable error of the side Ibepah- Nebo, depending on angular measures only, is 1/280,000 of its length. Heliotropes were continually employed, and the angles were measured with a the- odolite having a horizontal circle of 20” diameter and a magnifying power of 83. ASTRONOMICAL WORK. Aside from the work in practical astron- omy incident and necessary to the opera- tions of every trigonometrical survey, at- tention has been given to various other phases of the subject. It has not alone sufficed to point out and demonstrate the utility of the method of equal zenith dis- tances for latitude, and of the application of the telegraph to longitudes. The Coast and Geodetic Survey feeling the necessity of better star places, arising from the use of the methods just mentioned, has devoted some of its energy to the perfection of star cata- logues. It is probably no exageration to say that the declinations given in our field lists are the best attainable anywhere. More than fifty of the best modern cata- logues are corrected for their systematic errors, and each is given weight depending on the value of the work and number of observations. A collection of all these data, and their consolidation into one homoge- neous result, eliminates as far as possible all known sources of inaccuracy, and gives us finally the most reliable positions. A list so constructed of several thousand stars has been already published, many of which are especially adapted to southern work. The average probable error of a declination may be given as rather less than + of a second; a degree of precision, which enables an ob- server to determine his latitude from 20 pairs, in one evening, with an uncertainty of only + 10 feet. Thisis sufficient for the SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 218. purposes of geodesy. Incidental to regular astronomic work, the Survey has equipped and sent out no less than 35 parties for the observation of solar eclipses and transits of the inferior planets,which work has required the occupation of stations in every conti- nent and Polynesia. The variations of latitude have been determined at three sta- tions, each one having been occupied more than a year. MISCELLANEOUS OPERATIONS. The legitimate field of investigation in a geodetic service embraces many subjects outside of those already specified. In the execution of the task before us a free inter- pretation has been given to the law author- izing the work, and the kindred subjects of Hypsometry, Magnetism, Gravity and Phys- ical Hydrography have been pursued along with others more strictly within our prov- ince. Five thousand miles (8,047 kilometers) of precise levelling have been executed, in- cluding four independent determinations of the height of St. Louis. Two have been made from the Atlantic at Sandy Hook, and two from the Gulf of Mexico at Biloxi. A comparison indicates that the surface of the Gulf is somewhat higher than the sea level at New York, and this has been verified in character, although not precisely in amount, by a line across the peninsula of Florida, three times repeated. Other sub- sidiary lines have been observed. The limit of error has been that usually adopted in similar work, viz..5mm../K. The heights by spirit level have been supplemented and controlled. by micrometric measurements of zenith distances. In the determination of elevations necessary to reduce the base lines along the transcontinental arc to sea level the latter method has been employed across the Allegheny and Rocky Mountains. The spirit levels are continuous from Sandy Hook to Denver and Colorado Springs. Marcu 3, 1899.] They are checked by zenith distances from the Chesapeake Bay to the Ohio River, and supplemented by the same method from Denver to the Pacific coast, where the spirit levels are not yet completed. Permanent magnetic observations have been in operation at Philadelphia, Key West, Madison, Los Angeles, and each one has furnished records for five consecutive years; with one exception a self-registering apparatus has been continuously and ex- cclusively employed in each locality. These data added to records from 1,100 widely distant points, many of which are secular variation stations, furnish precious ma- terial for the study of the earth’s magnet- ism. The work of the Survey in the inves- tigation of the force of gravity has been carried on both within and without the limits of the United States. Twenty-eight foreign stations have been occupied, includ- ing points in Europe, Asia, Africa, Aus- tralia and many islands in both the At- lantic and Pacific. New light on the subject of volcanic formation, as well as on the constitution of the earth’s crust, has come from this work. Fifty nine-stations have been observed at home, including a line across the continent. Half-second pendulums are now exclusively employed, and the determinations are purely differen- tial. The period of oscillation is usually known to within a few millionths of a sec- -ond. In the field of Physical Hydrography most comprehensive studies have been made. The exploration of the Gulf Stream, in- cluding a study of its density, temperature and currents, the geology of the sea bottom, the establishment of cotidal lines, the de- termination of the ocean depth from earth- quake waves and other specialties in the domain of hydrography, have been made a part of the regular work. The hydrog- raphy of the coast, to the head of tide- SCIENCE. 309 water, has been developed side by side with the triangulation and topography. The practical results of the Survey are shown in the publication of the annual re- ports, the issue of charts, notice to mari- ners (corrected monthly), coast pilots for Atlantic, Pacific and Alaskan waters, tide tables (now extended to foreign ports) and various miscellaneous publications in special lines of research. PRESENT AND FUTURE OPERATIONS. A resurvey of Chesapeake Bay, the meas- urement of an are through the United States on the 98th meridian, and the development of Alaskan geography, are among the proj- ects of Dr. Pritchett, the present superin- tendent of the organization. All these have been carried on during the last two years. The line of transcontinental precise levels is being pushed westward with all available means. Primary triangulation on the Pacific coast has been resumed, and will soon be completed from San Francisco to the Mexican boundary. Hydrographic sur- veys are in progress along the Atlantic sea- board, on the Pacific, and at the mouth of the Yukon in Alaska. Numerous topo- graphic, astronomic and magnetic parties, are employed in the interior. An extension of the great arcs_of the United States into Mexico and the British possessions has been proposed by Dr. Pritchett, and diplomatic representations between the interested governments look- ing towards concerted action in the near future have already been made. This will give to North America an additional me- ridian are of about 55° and an oblique one of 88°. Together with existing arcs, the proposed material will practically exhaast our contribution to the determination of the earth’s figure. In the ordinary prosecution of the field work since 1895 about fifty parties have been employed during the course of each 310 year. Added to this, the purely hydro- graphic work has been carried on by a fleet of sixteen vessels, of which ten are steamers. The operations have been widely distribu- ted, extending as far as the Pribilof Islands in the Bering Sea. A longitude determi- nation was made from Sitka, of Kadiak and Unalaska, in which twenty-one chro- nometers were carried on four successive trips. The probable error of the resulting longitudes was 0°.20 for the former and 0.21 for the latter. A tidal indicator, similar to the one in New York, has been erected at Philadelphia, and one is in proc- ess of construction at San Francisco. The mechanism, actuated by the tide, furnishes the navigator at any moment, at a dis- tance of one mile, with necessary informa- tion as to the character and amount of the tide. Among the auxiliary duties of the service may be mentioned the establishment of trial speed courses for ships of the Navy (a num- ber of which have been recently laid out); the exploration of oyster beds; the fauna of the Gulf Stream ; the administration of an Office of Standard Weights and Measures, from which prototypes are issued to the dif- ferent States ; meteorological researches for the use of the coast pilot; the study of as- tronomical refraction ; mathematical inves- tigations on the theory of projections, on the equations of steady motion, on errors of observations ; and finally, in experimental researches in engraving, electrotyping and lithography ; all of which knowledge finds application in the various fields of activity now covered by the Coast and Geodetic Survey. WORK OF THE UNITED STATES ENGINEERS. Geodetic surveys have also been carried on by the Corps of Engineers of the United States Army. That of the Great Lakes was completed in 1882. The work was reor- ganized in 1892, and resurveys and exten- SCIENCE. [N. &. Vou. IX. No. 218. sions thereto are now in progress. Changes in the original plan have been introduced, chiefly in the direction of rapidity of execu- tion. Fewer positions on the circle are now used for horizontal angles, and adjustment is effected by separate small figures, rather than through any extended scheme. In the measure of the Mackinaw base three tapes were used, each a kilometer in length. Each section of the tape was compared with a standard length of 100 meters established on the ground. This standard length was determined by means of an 8-meter bar packed in ice, which in turn was compared with the Repsold meter, R 1878. The Engineer Corps of the Army has also had charge of the Mexican boundary survey, and of the work done by the Missouri and Mississippi River Commis- sions. The report on the Mexican bound- ary is already in type, but is not ready for distribution. The Missouri River Commission has completed a triangulation from St. Louis to Three Forks, in Montana, a distance of 2,551 miles. The work follows the river and covers the valley from bluff to bluff. Precise levels have been run over 807 miles of it, and ordinary levels cover the remain- der. Ten base lines have been measured with a standardized steel tape. The Mississippi River Commission, utiliz- ing some work already done by the Lake Survey and the Coast and Geodetic Survey, has now a complete connection from the Gulf of Mexico to St. Paul,in Minnesota. The total distance is about 1,600 miles. Twenty-seven bases have been used, of which eighteen have been measured by the Commission with a steel tape 300 feet long. The work has been adjusted by quadri- laterals employing the method of least squares. E. D. Preston. EXECUTIVE OFFICER TO SUPERINTENDENT U. S. Coast AND GEODETIC SURVEY. MARrcH 3, 1899. ] THE AMERICAN MORPHOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Te Tue ninth meeting of the Society was held at Columbia University, New York City, on December 28th, 29th and 380th. Pro- fessor H. F. Osborn was in the chair; Dr. G. H. Parker, Secretary. In the course of his introductory remarks, Professor Osborn welcomed the Morphologists to the new zoological laboratories at Columbia, and es- pecially congratulated the Society upon the rapid progress which morphology in all its branches is making in this country. He spoke of theimportant part which had been played by the Jowrnal of Morphology during the past eleven years, and the debt owed by American zoologists to Mr. Allis for his generous support. This journal now re- quires for its maintenance the financial support of all morphologists of this country, all of whom should assist by subscribing. One of the marked features of recent progress is the rapid development of fresh- water and marine biological stations, all of which are contributing to our detailed knowledge of American fauna, and in some cases extending even tothe study of impor- tant foreign types. The greatest defect in recent work is the tendency to prolixity. ‘ Brevity is the soul of wit,’ and the very expansion of zoological literature necessi- tates as condensed a style of writing as is consistent with completeness and clearness. The recently collected papers of Huxley prove that it is possible to present the most important results in very condensed form. In the business session the following are the more important transactions : A resolu- tion expressing the grateful acknowledg- ments of the Society to Mr. Edward Phelps Allis, Jr., for his munificent gifts towards the founding and maintenance of the Journal of Morphology during the first ten years of its existence; the election to membership of F. W. Bancroft, C. L. Bristol, G..N. Cal- kins, J. J. Hamaker, Samuel Henshaw, C. SCIENCE. 311 F. W. McClure, C. B. Wilson and M. A. Wilcox; and the election of officers: Pres- ident, E. G. Conklin ; Vice-President, W. M. Wheeler; Secretary and Treasurer, Bashford Dean; Executive Committee, J. P. MeMurrich and G. H.Parker. Forty-five papers were presented before the scientific sessions, of which the greater number are here given in summary in the order in which they were read. Notes on the Development of a Myxinoid. Basurorp DEAN. PARTICULAR reference was made to the horn-like egg membrane as maternal in origin ; it is traversed by pore-canals analo- gous to those of the radiata of teleostomes. The anchor filaments represent the greatly specialized end-bulbs of the radial elements of theshell. Early segmentation is confined to a small but definite hillock of germinal protoplasm subjacent to the micropylar canal. In early blastula stages the cell cap extends downward to the region of the opercular ring. Gastrulation is noted when a downgrowth takes place on one side ; here the head of the embryo shortly appears, and the trunk is laid down longitudinally as the blastoderm progresses, now symmetrically, toward the vegetative pole. Neural folds are early apparent, and the brain is tubu- lar and relatively of great length. In some cases the tail buds out when the downgrowth of the blastoderm has enveloped scarcely more than the anterior half of the egg. In others the outgrowth of the tail is notably retarded. A primitive streak is present, terminating behind in an ovate yolk plug; the latter is latest apparent near the vege- tative pole. There is no evidence of a greater number of gill slits than the normal number. On the Reproductive Habits and Development of the Californian Land Salamander, Autodax. W. E. Rirrer. (Presented by G. H. Parker. ) 312 Tur subterranean egg-burrow of this sal- tatory urodeles resembles somewhat closely that of Ichthyophis. The eggs are retained in a cluster and attended and kept moist- ened, probably with urine, by the female. A series of embryos taken from a single bur- row will shortly be described. New Facts regarding the Development of the Ol- factory Nerve. W. A. Locy. Tue early embryonic history of the olfac- tory nerve is known. ‘There has been little advance in this direction since the appear- ance of Marshall’s paper in 1878, who gave the history of the nerve prior to the forma- tion of the lobe and anticipated by sugges- tion most of the views since expressed re- garding its nature and relationships. The chief advances have been made. in deter- mining the source of the fibers (His, Disse and others), and in the minute structure of the olfactory lobe, ganglion, ete. (Cajal, Retzius and others). But, in the meantime, the early embryonic history has not been elucidated, and, even to-day, we do not possess the complete history of this nerve in any one animal. This paper presented in outline the his- tory of the olfactory nerve in Acanthias from its earliest appearance to adult condi- tions, embracing (a) the embryonic history of the olfactory nerve prior to the formation of the lobe, and (b) the formation of the olfactory lobe, its various transformations, and the subsequent history of the nerve. The chief point of interest consists in dem- onstrating a hitherto unrecognized olfac- tory nerve, and determining its history and relationships to the olfactory bundle. The new nerve arises from the summit of the forebrain near the median plane, and passes laterally into communication with the main olfactory and thence into the olfactory cup. It is the first one to appear and may, there- fore, be primitive. It is ganglionated. It was discovered by dissections of very small SCIENCE, [N. S.. Vou. IX. No. 218. embryos—it lies in such a position that its relationships would not be appreciated by study of sections made in any of the con- ventional planes. There are two distinct, widely separated connections existing simultaneously be- tween the olfactory epithelium and _ the brain-wall, one is dorsal and median (the new nerve) and the other is lateral. The latter is complex, consisting of two main divisions. The new nerve can be demon- strated in specimens, as early as 6-8 mm. in length. The two brain connections are well seen in embryos 16 mm. and upwards ; they are very evident from 20mm. forwards, The lobe begins in specimens about 25mm. long; it is still small at 38mm., but well de- veloped at 44 mm. and upwards. The fibers of the new nerve were traced into the ol- factory epithelium. It was also shown to perish in the adult. Review of Recent Evidence on the Segmentation of the Primitive Vertebrate Brain. W. A. Locy. (Read by title.) The Metameric Value of the Sensory Compo- nents of the Cranial Nerves. C. JUDSON HERRICK. THE primary segmental or branchiomeric nerve is conceived as comprising four com- ponents : somatic motor, viscero-motor, so- matic sensory (general cutaneous) and viscero-sensory (communis). No cranial nerve of any gnathostome vertebrate has retained all these components. In the head each sensory component, as a physiological adaptation, has been con- centrated so that all its fibers tend to be related to a single center in the brain—the fasciculus communis (f. solitarius) and chief vagus nucleus in the ease of the vis- ceral sensory and the spinal fifth tract and related nuclei, chief sensory trigeminal n. and n. funiculi, in the case of the somatic sensory. This involves reduction of each component in some segments and hyper- Marci 3, 1899. ] trophy in others. Thus, the somatic sen- sory is represented only in the V and X nerves and the visceral sensory in the typ- ical branchiomeric nerves, X, IX, VII. Now when in course of vertebrate evolu- tion specialized sense organs appear in ad- dition to the two primary components, their nerves and intra-cranial centers will appear sporadically, depending upon the distribu- tion of the specialized sense organs in ques- tion. These nerves will in general follow the courses of the previously existing so- matic or visceral nerve trunks wherever possible, hence the formation of complex nerve trunks containing several of the com- ponents. Each of these cenogenetic systems of sense organs, like the palingenetic sys- tems, tends to be related to a single intra- cranial center. At present we may enu- merate the following such systems: 1. Taste buds related to the fasciculus communis (f. solitarius) and its associated nuclei, the chief vagus nucleus (lobus vagi of fishes). 2. Terminal buds of the outer skin; ter- minal relations as in the last case, plus in some fishes the lobus facialis. 3. Lateral line organs, or neuromasts, related to the tuberculum acusticum and cerebellum, plus in some fishes the ‘lobus lineze lateralis.’ 4, Ear; central connection as in the last case. 5. Eye; related to the mesencephalon. 6. Nose; related to the primary prosen- cephalon. 7. Pineal organ; related to the dien- cephalon ? Diagrams were exhibited illustrating the actual relations of these components as de- termined by reconstruction from serial sec- tions in the bony fish, Menidia; and em- phasis was laid upon the necessity of taking these qualitative differences in the nerves into account before trying to work out their metamerism. SCIENCE. 313 The Maxillary and Mandibular Breathing Valves of Teleost Fishes. Utric DAHLGREN. Tue discovery of a pair of membranous valves placed just inside of the teeth and working automatically to prevent water from leaving by the mouth while they per- mit its free entrance, has enabled the act of breathing in fishes to be clearly described. These valves complete the pump-like struc- ture of the oral cavity, the other pair, or posterior valves, being the branchiostegal membranes. In breathing, but two muscular forces must be applied, one to expand the oral cavity by moving the opercular frames out- ward and another to contract the oral cav- ity by moving them inward ; when expand- ing, water comes in through the mouth, being prevented from entering through the gill clefts by the branchiostegal membranes, which act automatically and independently of and contrary to the opercular frames to which they are attached ; when contracting, water is forced out of the gill clefts, but is prevented from leaving through the mouth by the valves in question, which act automat- ically. While breathing, itis true, the fish opens and shuts its mouth somewhat, but this is due not to its effort to prevent a regurgitation of the respiratory stream, but to the relation of its mandible to the oper- cular frames. When the valves are cut, the fish is com- pelled to use muscular force to prevent re- gurgitation. On the Early Development of the Catfish (.No- turus). FF. B. SuMNER. 1. No horizontal cleavage takes place till the 64-cell stage or after, and, when it oc- curs, does not result in a definite two-layered condition of whole germ-disc. 2. The blastomeres resulting from the early cleavages retain their continuity with the protoplasmic network of the yolk. No sharp line of separation, such as Sobotta, ol4 Behrens and Samassa describe for the Sal- monidze, exists in the egg of the catfish. 3. After horizontal cleavage occurs, the lower cells resulting from this division re- tain their continuity with the yolk, as has been described by Kowalewski, Hoffman and Berent (Teleosts) and Dean (Ganoids). These partial cells (merocytes) continue to divide by mitosis both horizontally and ver- tically. In the former case, the upper of the products of division is added to the germ-dise. This process of supplementary cleavage continues until a late segmentation stage, cells being added to the whole lower surface of the germ-dise. 4. The periblast arises from the resid- ual portion of the merocytes after supple- mentary cleavage has ceased, being thicker under the margin of the germ-disc, but present elsewhere from the beginning. 5. The periblast is trophic in its function, playing only an indirect part in cell-forma- tion. Normal mitosis soon gives place to abnormal and this in turn to amitosis. Transitional forms occur. 6. The subgerminal space (segmentation cavity) does not appear till about time of origin of germ-ring. At close of segmenta- tion, yolk and blastodise are in close con- tact in well-preserved specimens, although no longer continuous with one another. Clefts which early appear between blasto- meres or below them are probably artifacts. If not, they disappear later. 7. The germ-ring (mesentoderm) arises primarily as a marginal ingrowth due to cell-proliferation from germ-wall (Rand- wulst). The germ-ring also receives abun- dant additions from the overlying primary germ-layer, even at considerable distance from the periphery. (See Reinhard, Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., 1898.) 8. The whole germ-ring, extra-embryonic as well as embryonic, contains both ento- dermal and mesodermal elements (contra H. V. Wilson and Samassa). SCIENCE. [N. S. Vou. IX. No. 218: 9. Kupffer’s vesicle arises, as in the Salmonide, as a cavity completely shut in by cells from the first. It is at first much compressed horizontally and distinctly bi- lobed. Inembryos with a short tail it is still to be seen near tip of the latter, strongly suggesting neurenteric canal of Selachii. A second vesicle, situated in yolk under the posterior end of the embryo, appears slightly in advance of Kupffer’s vesicle and reaches a size exceeding the latter. It is bounded by periblast and perhaps contains more fluid yolk for service of the growing end of em- bryo. Respiratory and Breeding Habits of Polypterus Bichir. N. R. Harrineton. On physiological grounds Polypterus is as fully qualified for a ‘lung-fish’ as are any of the Dipnoans; it has also striking resem- blances in its circulatory and respiratory system to the Urodela. These points were demonstrated by means of mounted prepara- tions, the injecting of which had been done in the field principally by Dr. Reid Hunt. Beside the blood-supply to the lungs (which is from the last branchial arch), the dissections showed the very large glottis, or ductus pneumaticus, by which the lungs open ventrally from the cesophagus. Un- like the swimming-bladder of fishes in an- other respect, both the lungs are entirely invested with peritoneum, although one of them, the right, does occupy the normal position for an air-bladder, viz., between the aorta and kidneys, on the one hand, and the alimentary canal, on the other. The mesentery, however, in which the left lobe should be suspended, has almost entirely degenerated, and this somewhat smaller lobe lies entirely free in the body-cavity. Tt was pointed out that, while the strong- est disproof of the Dipnoan ancestry of the Amphibia lies in the paleontological evi- dence which indicates that they are a par- allel line, the same conclusion may be in- Marcu 3, 1899. ] ferred from the life habits of a form which encysts during periods of drought. For the ability to undergo suspended anima- tion necessitates such specialization that it is improbable that evolution operated through such an encysting form (which is absolutely helpless and inactive until it is set free into the water), in bringing about a vertebrate which breathed air the year around. ‘ Reference was also made to the breeding habits of Polypterus, and an accessory copula- tory organ in the male—a modified anal fin —was described. The breeding season fol- lows the inundation of the Nile. The general collections, some of which were exhibited, brought back by the Senff zoological expedition, are intended for general distribution to qualified investiga- tors, who can work up the material within a reasonably short time. Aside from a large collection of Nile fishes, there is ma- terial preserved for researches in embryol- ogy, electric organs, pseudo-electric organs, neurology and Plankton. The Coronary Vessels in the Hearts of Fishes. G. H. Parker and F. K. Davis. THE muscular substance of the heart in mammals receives its blood from a pair of coronary arteries which connect with coronary veins opening into the right auricle. The inner surfaces of the four chambers of the mammalian heart have upon them openings which lead into vessels connecting with the coronary capillaries, and especially with the veins. These ves- sels are the veins of Thebesius. Is there a similar system of vessels in fishes? Cor- onary arteries were identified in the com- mon skate, the sand shark and the mud- fish (Amia). In the skate they may come from various combinations of the efferent branchial arteries of the second to the fifth gill cleft; in the sand shark, from combina- tions reaching from the first to the fifth SCIENCE. 3) md olo clefts ; in the mudfish, from the second bran- chial arch. In these three species coronary veins occur, all of which open into the venous sinus. On inflating these, bubbling was observed from the natural inner sur- faces of the auricles and sometimes from those of the ventricles. These fishes, there- fore, have veins of Thebesius. Longitudinal Fission in Metridium margina- tum. G. H. PARKER. Ten animals with double mouths were studied. Two had each two mouths on one oral disc, and the pedal ends of their cesophageal tubes were united. Eight had each completely separate oral dises and csophageal tubes. In six the mouths were monoglyphic ; in three one mouth was mon- oglyphic and one diglyphic, and in one one mouth was monoglyphic and one aglyphic. There were about twice as many pairs of complete mesenteries as in single mouthed individuals. Double specimens are not the result of fusion, for the two partial indi- viduals are strikingly similar in color, etc., a condition unlikely of occurrence in chance combinations of so variable a species. They may be monstrosities or dividing animals. One specimen nearly divided was kept un- der observation two months, but showed no advance in the process. In good collecting localities isolated pairs agreeing in color, marking and sex may be found. This evidence favors the view that IZ. margina- tum reproduces, by longitudinal fission, a process slowly accomplished, but it does not exclude the possibility of some double speci- mens being monstrosities. Additional Characters of Diplodocus, HENRY F. Osgorn. Tuts is one of the three types of herbivo- rous Sauropoda or Cetiosauria, represented by a very considerable portion of the skele- ton of one individual found by Barnum Brown and the writer in 1897. Thescapula, ilium, ischium and femur are associated with 316 a remarkable vertebral series extending from the 5th dorsal to the end of the tail: (1) The center of motion is the sacrum, where three vertebree are completely coa- lesced to the summits of the spines, besides a fourth rib-bearing sacral with a free spine. The sacro-iliac union is by means of both ribs and neuropophysial plates. The presence of such plates in all the anterior caudals, as first described by the writer, proves that the sacrum is reenforced by additions from the anterior caudals. (2) There are more than thirty caudals and three distinct types of chevron, instead of the single type to which Marsh ap- plied the generic name Diplodocus. The tail was undoubtedly a powerful swimming organ and also a lever by means of which the anterior portion of the body was ele- vated, the acetabulum serving as a fulcrum, while the trunk was immersed in water. This power did not exist upon land as in the Iguanodontia. The Ossicula Auditus of the Mammalia. Kinestey and W. H. Ruppics. Srupies on embryo pigs and rats show that the incus is the quadrate, the malleus, the proximal end of Meckel’s cartilage. These cannot be homologized with the columellar chain of Sauropsida, since they are in front of the spiracular cleft and in front of the chorda tympani, while the columella is behind the spiracle and chorda tympani. The incus (quadrate) articulates with the stapes in the mam- mals, exactly as is the case in the urodeles. Nothing similar occurs in the Saurop- sida. Thisis regarded as additional evi- dence that the mammals have had an am- phibian ancestry. The quadrate cannot have disappeared in the glenoid fossa, as maintained by Albrecht and Cope, as this would involve a translation of parts impos- sible to explain. The mammalian lower jaw articulates by means of the dentary J.S. SCIENCE. [N. S. Von. IX. No. 218. rather than by means of the articulalare, i. €., its articulation is not homologous with that in lower groups. A. longer summary of the paper will appear in the American Naturalist for March. Notes on Mammalian Embryology. C. 8. M1- not. (Read by title.) Professor O. van der Stricht’s Researches on the Human Ovum. C.S. Minor. (Read by title.) ; Notes on the Morphology of the Chick Brain. 5. P. Gace. A Specific Case’ of the Elimination of the Unfit. H. C. Bumpus. THE results of a comparative study of one hundred and thirty-six English sparrows, which were rendered helpless or actually perished during the severe storm of Feb- ruary last, was numerically expressed, and it was shown that there was not only a measurable but a striking physical differ- ence between the birds which actually suc- cumbed and those which survived the storm. The birds which perished were longer, heavier, possessed of shorter heads, shorter leg bones, of less breadth of skull and of reduced sternum, while those which sur- vived tended toward the possession of char- acters opposite to these. While these average differences between the two groups of birds were emphasized, attention was also called to the fact that the individuals of extreme variability occurred most frequently among the birds which per- ished. The longest bird and the shortest bird in the entire collection perished. The same is true of the one having the greatest and the one having the least alar extent. The heaviest bird died; the one with the longest and the one with the shortest head died, and the one with the shortest humerus, the one with the longest femur, the one with the longest and the one with the shortest skull, and the one with the shortest keel to / MARCH 3, 1899. ] its sternum—all died. The average oscilla- tion of variation around an ideal mean was also shown to be almost invariably in excess for the birds which perished, and the con- clusions arrived at were as follows: The birds which perished were not simply accidental sufferers from the severity of the storm, but were birds which were physically disqualified for enduring the intensity of the New England climate, as expressed by the storm of February Ist, and they were con- sequently eliminated by natural agents. The result of this elimination produced in this particular locality a colony of birds measurably different from those existing be- fore the storm, that is, the action of natural selection resulted in the elimination of the unfit and the survival of the fit. On the Anatomy of the Spermatozoon of In- vertebrates. G. W. Fretp. (With demon- stration of the apical body.) Tue widest diversity in the form of the spermatozoon is found among the different groups of the invertebrated animals. Closer examination shows that there is, however, one type of form which obtains in by far the greater majority of species, and that the aberrant forms are peculiar to those species which have either become parasitic, e. g., certain worms and arthropods, or which have acquired specially modified secondary sexual organs, e. g., lobster, crayfish, Lim- ulus. The common type is the familiar tailed form, prevalent one in the groups Ccelen- terata, Vermes, Echinoderma, Mollusca, Ar- thropodaand Tunicata. The three general divisions are usually distinct and readily recognizable Rarely the spermatozoa of all the species studied have a special struc- ture or apical body at the anterior tip of the head. It has been variously described as (1) an adaptation for boring into the egg; (2) a remnant of the cytoplasm ; (3) fluid expressed from the nucleus upon SCIENCE. 317 shrivelling; (4) a micropore surrounded by ‘ Ringkorper;’ (5) an apical button present in the unripe spermatozoon ; (6) the sperm centrosome. The first five opin- ions seem to have little importance when considered in connection with the origin of this apical body. While the opinion of myself and others that it is the sperm cen- trosome is refuted by the weight of evidence that the sperm centrosome comes from the middle piece of the spermatozoon, yet, so far as I know, the function of this apical body has not been noted by any of those who have studied so successfully the fertiliza- tion process. Since it has the same micro- chemical reactions and the same. origin as as the middle piece, it would appear as if its fate must be of considerable consequence. T have found this apical body in more than forty species, representing all the groups from the Celenterates to Amphioxus (in- cluding Toxopneustes). By others it has been found in upwards of twenty additional species. The fact that the apical body is present in the spermatozoon of well-nigh every species studied indicates that it has some very special significance which should not be overlooked by workers on the phenomena of fertilization. The Middle Piece of the Urodele Spermato- J.H. McGrecor. (Read by title.) The Origin of the Yolk in the Egg of Molqula. Henry E. Crampron, JR. Tue author presented the principal re- sults of an extended study upon the early history of the ascidian odcyte, considered from a chemical as well as from a purely morphological aspect, made by means of carefully controlled aniline staining sup- ported by artificial digestion and other tests. It was found that the cell-body at the beginning of enlargement of the primary odcyte presents no albumen reaction. There is, however, a small albuminous gran- Zz00n, O18 ular body formed just outside the nucleus, which enlarges by the addition of granules similar to those found in the nucleus, until it becomes first a cap-shaped mass and finally surrounds the nucleus.» Zst Period : Forma- tion of the ‘ yolk-mass.’ This body then dis- integrates, the constituent granules being spread evenly throughout the now highly vacuolated cell-body. The latter was shown to be composed probably ofa pseudo-nuclein. 2d Period : Disintegration of the yolk-mass. The ovum assumes its final character by the progressive vacuolization of the cell-body, and by the enlargement of the products of disintegration of the ‘yolk-mass’ to form the definite ‘deutoplasm’ spheres. 3d Period: The original was considered to be of nuclear origin, and is probably what has been loosely homologized in some cases with the “corps vitellin de Balbiani,’ ete. Protoplasmic Movement as a Factor of Differen- tiation. Epwin G. ConkKLIN, Various factors have been suggested by different persons as the causes of differen- tiation, but so far no one has shown that the active movements of protoplasm constitute such a factor. The polarity of the egg and the speciali- zations of cleavage are two of the earliest differentiations of the developing organ- ism. In the gasteropod Crepidula both of these differentiations are associated with definite and orderly movements of the pro- toplasm. Before the maturation the germinal ves- icle lies near the center of the egg and the yolk is uniformly distributed. With the appearance of the centrosomes and the for- mation of the first maturation spindle the nuclear membrane is broken opposite the poles of the spindle, nuclear sap escapes into the cell and at the same time the nu- cleus, spindle and surrounding cytoplasm are carried bodily toward the surface of the egg. Coincidently with this migration of the SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. 1X No. 218. nuclear constituents there is a segregation of the cytoplasm at one pole (the animal) and of yolk at the other (the vegetal). This separation of yolk and cytoplasm goes on during the second maturation division and throughout all the stages of fertilization. The movements of the germinal vesicle and of the maturation spindles, the separa- tion of yolk and cytoplasm and also the ap- proach of the pronuclei during fertilization seem to be due to protoplasmic currents. In the cleavage of the egg the evidence for such currents is much more abundant and complete. Centrosomes and Zwischen- korpern are preserved throughout the rest- ing period following division, and by means of the relative positions of these bodies at different stages, as well as the relative po- sitions of the nuclei, yolk and cytoplasm, the direction and extent of these movements can be accurately determined. During the anaphase of the first cleavage the spindle lies at right angles to the egg axis, and the centrosomes, chromatic plates and Zwischen- korper arein a straight line. In later stages the Zwischenkdrper is carried down to the center of the egg, the centrosomes are car- ried up to the surface and move toward each other until they come to lie on each side of the first cleavage plane and imme- diately under the polar bodies; the nuclei are also moved upward and toward each other until they are almost in contact on opposite sides of the first cleavage wall, and the cytoplasm moves down into the center of the egg, the yolk at the same time moy- ing up atthe periphery. Such movements could be caused only by vortical currents in the daughter cells moving up at the sur- face and down through the center of the egg; the cell wall forms where these oppo- site currents meet. Similar vortical currents occur in every cleavage up to a late stage,and they offer most important evidence not only as to the mechanics of cleavage, but also as to the me- Marcu 3, 1899. ] chanics of differentiation. Of the four commonly recognized features of differen- tial cleavage—viz.: (1) inequality, (2) non- alternation of directions, (3) qualitative dif- ferentiation and (4) lack of rhythm—the first three may be correlated with these movements. Unequal cleavages are due to movements which, beginning with the early anaphase, carry the nucleus out of the center of the cell. Non-alternation is due to the absence of currents, alternation to the regu- lar reversal of currents during each succes- sive division. Certain qualitative differences of the two daughter cells of every cleavage are also due to these movements. The re- mains of the centrosphere (idiosome of Meves, mother periplast of Vejdovski) in each blastomere is carried by definite rota- tions of the protoplasm into one only of the two daughter cells into which the blasto- mere divides; there is thus produced by protoplastic movement a visible qualitative difference in the two daughter cells formed at every division. The Characteristics of Mitosis and Amitosis. S. W ATASE. On Hematococcus. F. H. Herrick. OBSERVATIONS on Heematococcus began with Girod-Chantrans in 1797 and have been continued during the present century by Agardh, Cohn, Braun, Rostafinski, Butschli and others. The chief points of contention lie in the supposed sexual char- acter of this organism-and in the structure and functions of the zoospores. The following summary of results was presented: (1) Resting cells after long sub- mergence in water lose the power of devel- opment. In one case, after being submerged for two years, the cells have greatly thick- ened walls, but no zoospores are formed. If these cells are now dried, even for a short time, and then returned to water develop- ment rapidly follows. Hzematococcus has thus become adapted to the alternation of SCIENCE. 319 drought and moisture, so that desiccation or something equivalent to this has become necessary to bring about a normal response. (2) Great variation not only occurs in the form and size of the sporangium (developing mother cell wall) and in the number of the zoospores, but in the size of the zoospores produced in the same sporangium. In re- spect to size at least the terms ‘ macrozoo- spore’ and ‘ microzoospore’ have no signifi- eance. (3) The zoospores imbibe water after liberation and undergo marked changes in appearance. Before maintaining that all zoospores have a similar structure, it may be necessary to repeat and extend certain experiments, but we are convinced that no sexuality can be attributed to this form, and that no true copulation has ever been ob- served. (4) Monstrosities frequently occur in the motile stage, such as twins and cells with four or more ‘ heads’ (pairs of flagella) in all cases due not to fusion, but to incom- plete division of the mother cell. (5) Re- production by internal cell division has been observed in the motile stage in a few cases, in one of which the zoospore-colony consisted of four small cells freely moving in the sac of the mother zoospore, which was itself distinctly propelled by its own cilia. The mother capsule soon burst setting the young free. (6) When a motile cell comes to rest its protoplasmic sac contracts and a spherical resting cell is formed which secretes its proper wall while still enclosed in the evanescent wall of the zoospore. The flagella break at the ‘beak,’ leaving two slender rods united with the wall of the metamor- phosed zoospore. These are probably elastic cellulose tubes which serve to sustain the flagella at the points where they pierce the sac. (7) In the course of zoospore-forma- tion in large cells endosmosis is very great and the surface tension of the wall unequal. The transparent sphere is blown out in a ‘form often resembling that of an incandes- cent light bulb, with abundant room for the 320 active cells. The wall at the small end of the bulb is still very thick, and at the mo- ment of bursting suddenly contracts and scatters the zoospores with a rush. (8) Under various conditions direet develop- ment of resting cell from resting cell seems to occur. This looks like a process of ar- rested development of zoospores, in which cell division is complete, but the character- istics of the motile cell do not appear. Basurorp DEAN, Secretary. CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. (To be concluded. ) ASSOCIATION OF AMERICAN ANATOMISTS. Tue eleventh annual session was held in New York City, December 28th-30th, in conjunction with the ‘Naturalists’ and other affiliated societies. Most of the meetings were held at the Medical Department of Columbia University. Forty-one members attended and 20 new members joined, mak- ing a total of 141, of whom 10 are honorary. The localities and names of the new mem- bers are as follows: From Ann Arbor, Pro- fessor J. P. McMurrich, University of Michi- gan; from Baltimore, Professors F. P. Mall and L. F. Barker and associate R. G. Har- rison, of the Johns Hopkins University ; from Buffalo, Dr. N.S. Russell, assistant in anatomy, University of Buffalo; from Ithaca, Dr. L. Coville, lecturer and demon- strator in anatomy, Cornell University Med- ical College; from Montreal, Dr. J. G. Mac- Carthy, senior demonstrator of anatomy, McGill University; from New York City, Professor J. D. Erdmann, of Bellevue Med- ical College; Dr. Evelyn Garrigues, assist- ant demonstrator of anatomy, Woman’s Medical College; Dr. Ales Hrdlicka, asso- ciate in anthropology, Pathological Insti- tute of New York Hospitals ; and the fol- lowing assistant demonstrators of anatomy in Columbia University: Doctors G. E. Brewer, C. Carmalt, H. D. Collins, G. W. SCIENCE. [N. Sv Von. IX. No. 218. Crary, W. Martin, W. H. Rockwell and A. 8. Vosburgh ; from Philadelphia, Professor J. C. Heisler, of the Medico-Chirurgical College; from Savannah, Dr. E. R. Corson ; from Washington, D. C., Dr. C. I. West, demonstrator and lecturer in topographical anatomy, Howard University. The address of the President, Dr. Burt G. Wilder, discussed, ‘ Misapprehensions as to the Simplified Nomenclature ;’ the speaker urged especially a fuller recognition of what had been done by the English anatomists, Barclay, Owen, Pye-Smith and T. Jeffery Parker, and hoped the nomenclature of the future would be called the ‘ Anglo-Ameri- can.’ The Association voted that abstracts of papers be required in advance, and that brief abstracts be included in the program, that the time for reading papers be limited to thirty minutes; that the Secretary-Treas- urer be allowed his railroad fare and ten dollars toward his hotel expenses at each meeting. The Association also accepted the propositions of the editors of the (English) Journal of Anatomy and Physiology as to making that journal the official organ of the Association, and nominated Professor George S. Huntington as the American editor. The details of the arrangement will be given in a circular to be issued by the Secretary of the Association. Dr. E. W. Holmes, of Philadelphia, was elected mem- ber of the Executive Committee, and the President was authorized to fill the vacancy in the Committee on Anatomical Nomen- clature caused by the resignation of Dr. Dwight.* ‘The subject assigned for discussion, ‘ The Teaching of Anatomy in Our Medical Schools,’ was opened by Dr. Holmes; ‘ The Defects of our Present Methods,’ and further considered under ten divisions, viz: (1) Pre- paratory education. (2) The value and place *Dr. E. C. Spitzka, of New York City, has since been selected. Marcu 3, 1899.] of General Biology and Comparative Anat- omy. (8) Histology and Embryology in the medical course. (4) The relative value of didactic methods. (5) Practical Anatomy and how to teach it. (6) The order of topics. (7) The correlation of structure and function in teaching. (8) The use of charts and black- boards. (9) The qualifications requisite for a teacher of anatomy. (10) The desirability of terminologic consistency ; by Dr. Gerrish (4, 6 and 8), by Dr. Huntington (2, 3,5 and 6), and by Dr. Wilder (10). In view of the extent and importance of the subject it was suggested that at future meetings a smaller number of divisions be more fully con- sidered. The following papers were read and dis- cussed ; all were illustrated by specimens and charts or photographs, and several by lantern-slides or enlarged photographic projections: By J. A. Blake, ‘ The roof and lateral recesses of the fourth ventricle con- sidered morphologically and embryolog- ically ;’ by G. E. Brewer, ‘ Preliminary re- port on the surgical relations of the duodenal orifice of the common bile-duct ;’ by E. R. Corson, ‘An X-ray study of the normal movements of the carpal bones and wrist ;’ by F. Dexter, ‘ Morphology of the digestive tract of the cat;’ by T. Dwight, ‘The origin of numerical variations of the verte- bree,’ and ‘The living model showing the platysma in contraction ;’ by 8. H. Gage, ‘Further notes on the relation of the ureters and great veins;’ by I. S. Haynes, ‘An explanation of a new method of cutting gross sections of the cad- aver, with demonstration of the technique ;’ by Ales Hrdlicka, ‘The normal human tibia ;’ by G. S. Huntington, ‘ Morphology and phylogeny of the vertebrate ileo-colic junction,’ ‘ Visceral and vascular variations in human anatomy,’ and ‘the sternalis muscle ;’ by W. Martin, ‘The czecum and appendix in 100 subjects ;’ by J. J. Mac- Carthy, ‘ The internal structure of the hip- SCIENCE. 321 pocampus ;’ by B. B. Stroud, ‘ Note on the staining of isolated nerve-cells,’ and ‘ Pre- liminary account of the degenerations in the central nervous system of frogs deprived of the cerebrum ;’ by B. G. Wilder, ‘Some current misapprehensions as to the objects of the Cornell collection of brains.’ For lack of time there were read by title only Dr. Wilder’s paper, ‘Further tabulation and interpretation of the paroccipital fissure (occipital division of the intraparietal com- plex);’ three papers by Dr. Huntington, ‘The genito-urinary system of the American pit-viper,’ ‘ Contribution to the anatomy of the reptilian vascular system,’ ‘ Cerebral fissures and visceral anatomy of the Eskimo from Smith’s Sound;’ and Dr. Haynes’ dis- cussion of teaching. Atits closing session, December 30th, the Association adopted, without dissent, the report of the Committee on Anatomical No- menclature presented by the majority (Ger- rish, Huntington and Wilder). It com- prises four divisions, viz : A. Brief statement of reasons for prefer- ring certain terms (about fifty in number) already adopted by the Association. B. Recommendation of mesocelia as a name for the cavity of the mesencephalon, with reasons therefor. C. Recommendation of 181 names of bones (120) and muscles (61) identical with those in the B. N. A. (Basel Nomina anatomica ).* D. Recommendation of 17 names of bones and muscles differing from those of the B. N. A. D. S. Lams, Secretary. * Die anatomische Nomenclatur. Nomina anatom- ica, Verzeichniss der von der Anatomischen Gesell- schaft auf ihrer 1X. Versammlung in Basel angenom- menen Namen. LEingeleitet und im Einverstindniss mit dem Redactionsausschuss erlatitert von Wilhelm His. Archiv. fiir Anatomie und Physiologie. Anat. Abth., Supplement Band, 1895. O, pp. 180; 27 Figs., 2 plates. 322 SCIENCE. AMERICAN MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY. Tue regular meetings of the Amer- ican Mathematical Society were formerly held at monthly intervals from Octo- ber to May, the program being readily disposed of ina single afternoon session. | : | ——— <= A th Same Phases. +0 +0 +m +m —0 —0 | —™m mee ea eae wash ie i oe | ae Opposite Phases. On Ole ta 20e. —m || —0 +0 | —m +m A as Paes i <= |<= , => | SS AN Hi Y pee + 90°, Beas | +270° ceo ea ia OH Oba) eon t—me ety EE EL Soest ve | tenes Eo oe ea || —_——|-_—||— | a Front 70) eaL a | it _ = = — iAGcle \ + 270°, ee + 90° ||} +0 +m +m 0 0 m m +0 Opposite Phases. +0 —0 +m —m —0 +0 —m +m pound harmonic leave the origin with a descending node, the head of the wave (right semi-wave) being a crest. Absence of phase difference in the component har- monics of the particle at the origin will occur for other cardinal positions of the pointers, viz: front and rear pointers re- spectively up and down (maxima, marked +m), right and left or towards each other (mean position marked — 0), and down and up (minima, marked —m). These follow each other on like clockwise rotation corresponding particles of the front wave. The pointers in their cardinal positions will now be respectively left and down, up and left, right and up, down and right to the operator, etc., for successive additional rota- tions of 90° each. Beginning again with pointers away from each other, 7. e., with both component, 8. H. motions starting at the first particle, let the front axle be rotated clockwise 90° rela- tively to the other. The pointers in their cardinal positions will now be up and right, MARkcH 17, 1899. ] right and down, down and left, left and up, while the particles at the origin run through all phases together. This case corresponds to the preceding for 270°, ete. All this is evident enough; but it is, nevertheless, advisable to make a diagram of the position of the pointers as here shown, in order instantly to discern the phases in which the initial particles meet in any case. In the table the positions of the pointers are designated by arrows; + m de- notes maximum displacement, etc. Further explanation will be given presently. 11. Space Waves.—The composition of two simple harmonics at right angles to each other will necessarily require special treat- ment, for here the rear riders are at right angles to those of the former case, and the S. H. motion of the rear axle is not reversed at the balls. If displacement up and for- ward from the observer’s view be consid- ered positive, then the null position or zero of phase of the particles at the origin corre- sponds to pointers left for the front axle and up for the rear axle, as seen by the operator. The compound simple harmonic of these components is thus a linear vibration with amplitude “2, as regards the equal com- ponents, and making an angle of 45° to the horizontal from the observer to the machine. It thus lies in the first quadrant, as seen by the operator at the crank. Both component S. H. curves leave the origin with a descending node. Hence, if in the above table we shove the first column of entries one row ahead, 7. e., if we begin for no phase difference with the second row and continue in cyclical order, the table will be adapted to the present case. Pointers in opposite directions will thus correspond to counter-clockwise circular motion in the compound wave; pointers in the same direction to clockwise circular motion, as seen by the operator at the crank. The first of these cases will, however, cor- respond to a right-handed, the second to a SCIENCE. 393 left-handed, screw when seen from the ori- gin, since all waves move from left to right. The table contains an entry relative to the present case. It thus indicates 16 car- dinal phase differences for plane and the same number for space waves. 12. Effective Circles of Reference.—Finally, a word may be said as to the position of the circles of reference corresponding to the two component §. H. motions. Clearly, the cen- ters of the eccentrics (marked in Fig. 1) de- termine the amplitude of theS. H. M. In all phases, however, the riders are nearly normally above or else to the rear of these centers by a distance equal to the radius of the eccentric, and, therefore, always in the same kind of reciprocating motion which corresponds to the amplitude and period of the eccentric. Hence the circle of reference of the ver- tical 8. H. M. is on a vertical diameter and tangent to the highest and lowest positions of the edge of the eccentric on the same side of the axle. The diameter prolonged passes vertically through the cam axis, and its length is twice the throw of the center of eccentric. This circle of reference for the horizontal S. H. M. of the riders (displace- ment + rearward) is on a horizontal diam- eter and tangent to the extreme right and left positions of the edge of the eccentric on the same side of the axle. The amplitude of tbe vertical vibrations is modified by the lengths given to the ex- tensible levers. If 1 be the lever length between the axles and /’ that beyond the axles, and if a, a denote the front ‘and rear amplitude at the eccentrics, then the effective amplitude at the particles will be a(l+l’) /Land al'/l, and their ratio aati a) UE may be varied at pleasure from zero to about 9/8, since U is the extensible part. Usually the ratio one is desirable. 394 The amplitudes of the horizontal vibra- tions do not admit of change without giving useless complexity to the machine. Ad- vantageous lever ratios will be given with the experiments. I. Component S. H. Motions Coplanar, of the same Wave-Length. 13. Plane Polarization.— Let cam axles each with two complete turns be selected and the rear plate adjusted to the vertical (Fig.3). For harmonic curves this implies the same wave-length for the coexisting 8. H. motions. With the cams swinging nearly as 2:3, and lever ratios (+l and U ($12) as 3:2, the occurrence of no displacement along the line of parti- cles may be looked for in case of opposite phases. This furnishes a method of adjust- ing the particles at the outset. Practically the condition of no displacement is reached with relatively short levers, say a meter long. When the pointers on the initial cams are away from each other the com- ponents meet in the same phase, with the first particle in the axis of motion just about to start vibrating. The double amplitude given by the machine to this compound harmonic (25” long) of maximum displace- ment is about 9’. Ifa beam of parallel rays (sun light) be shot along the axis of the wave, the shadow of the balls on a screen normal to the axis necessarily be- trays slight curvature ; the double ampli- tude, instead of being vertical and straight, is coneave toward the cams. But the chord deviates from the are (9’’) by less than 1/2” at the center, and hence with balls 1/2’ in diameter the curvature is negligible to the eye of an observer in front. It must be remembered, however, that curvature is Superimposed in all subsequent higher figures. If the front cam axle be dephased 90° clockwise the amplitude of the compound curve is diminished, the curve remaining sinusoidal but beginning with 1/8 wave- length. If the rear cam axle is also de- SCIENCE. [N. 8S. Von. IX. No. 220. phased 90° clockwise the compound curve of the first case is restored in the shadow (maximum amplitude), but the phase of the first particle has advanced 1/4 period and the curve itself 1/4 wave-length, etc. I allude to these points because of their value ininstruction. (Cf. table,$10.) By the very make-up of the machine a 8. H. curve is seen to result when the phase dif- ference of two particles varies as their dis- tance apart. In drawing such a curve it is simpler to place the circle of reference in the plane of the harmonic; in the machine the circle of reference is preferably placed at right angles to the curve. The addition of two such curves is another S. H. curve of the phase and amplitude directly specified by the machine. 14. Waves of Constant Amplitude.—Belting the two equal pulleys and rotating uni- formly, waves corresponding to each of the harmonic curves produced in §13 may be sent along the axis of motion. Thus making the phase difference between two particles proportional to their distance apart, and then setting each particle in 8. H. M. ofa common period and amplitude, is object- ively seen to be the realization of simple wave motion. The wave-length being fixed by the apparatus, velocity and period must vary reciprocally. Particularly striking is the case for oppo- site phases in the two wave cams. Both component waves are seen travelling in the same direction along the axes with full vigor, whereas the compound effect at the line of particles is permanently nil. The warped surface of the levers now has a linear directrix at the particle edge and a sinusoidal directrix at the roller edge. It should be noted that the case of maximum amplitude in the compound harmonic pre- sents an approach to a similar linear direc- trix between the cam axles. 15. Waves of Vurying Amplitude.—Change of amplitude is given to the levers by draw- MARCH 17, 1899. ] ing out the front tube (§12). Additional change may be obtained by allowing colored balls to ride on the levers. In case of equal periods the result is chiefly interesting when the amplitude varies from particle to parti- ele. A linear variation is well represented by a plane wave oblique to the direction of the axles, and in action is very striking. The more important wave with an ex- ponentially varying amplitude is only given when the axis of motion is along the corre- sponding exponential curve horizontally, but the effect to an observer at a little dis- tance in front is none the less good. II. Preceding Case (1) with Additional Ve- locity Superimposed on Either Wave Train. 16. Beats.—If the component waves are trans- mitted in like periods or velocities* and amplitudes, the compound wave is trans- mitted unchanged in form; but if any of these quantities vary, the compound wave continually changes form. With the ap- paratus as here adjusted the last case is readily realized by sending on one wave faster than the other. For instance, if the component wave velocities be as 3:4 (rear wave of greater speed), then in 4 complete turns at the crank the original wave will be reproduced, while all intermediate phase differences between corresponding particles are passed continuously in turn. All pairs of cams are undergoing like continuous change of phase. The shadow picture of this case (sun- light) shows a line elongating to maximum displacement and then contracting to a point in §. H. M. The slow change at maximum elongation is in strong contrast to the rapid change of length on passing through the position of equilibrium. Sim- ilarly in §14 the speed ratio must be care- fully adjusted if the linear compound wave is to persist. *In the present ‘special case variation of one im- plies the other ;,in the sequel, period and velocity must be carefully distinguished. SCIENCE. - 395 The wave corresponding to this present experiment is an excellent example of an infinite beating wave train, two wave- lengths of which are accessible at a given place. The beats are due to a difference of wave velocity and frequency together. Though the two cases are usually gener- ically different, the gross effect is here coin- cident. Asa luxury a cam axle containing a small fraction of a wave-length more than two complete wave-lengths might be sup- plied. This would then show beats due to difference of wave velocity for the same period or (with the proper pulley) beats due to difference of period for the same wave velocity. The specific difference is this, that, whereas in one case (equal compo- nent wave-lengths) the compound harmonic is at every instant (for all pulley ratios) sinusoidal, in the other case (slightly dif- ferent component wave-lengths) it is at no instant strictly so. The latter adjustment thus admits of beats either when the com- ponent periods alone or the component wave velocities alone are not the same. In the former both necessarily change together. 17. Déppler’s Principle.—If the beats are obtained by a difference of wave velocity the faster wave may be treated as having an additional linear velocity virtually im- pressed upon it in the direction of motion from without. Its interference with the wave not so affected is then an illustration of Doppler’s principle. III. Preceding Cases (I and IT) with the Ve- locity of Hither Wave Train Reversed. 18. Equal Velocities. Stationary Waves.—If one of the component waves be passed along the axis positively and the other in a negative di- rection, 7. ¢., if one axle be rotated clock- wise and the other counter clockwise by cross-belting equal pulleys, the compound wave is of the stationary type, since ampli- tudes were made effectively equal and periods are necessarily equal. The effect on the machine is striking, since the nodes are 396 ° SCIENCE. here indicated by stationary particles half a wave-length apart, while the antinodes vibrate 9’. In all positions the form of the compound harmonic curve is at all times a simple sinusoid, but its mode of motion as compared with the same curve while both components are direct is totally different. Again, if the first pair of cams are in the same null phase (pointers away from each other) the first particle is a node, suc- ceeded by four other nodes one-half wave- length apart, and the wave is initially at maximum amplitude. If the first pair of cams are in opposite null phases (+0) the initial harmonic curve is linear, the first of four nodes one-fourth wave-length ahead, ete. Reflection.—The first of these cases cor- responds to reflection from a denser, the second to reflection from a rarer, medium at the origin. Itis worth while to examine the interpretation of both cases* for trans- verse waves first, and thereafter, $26, to sim- ilarly treat longitudinal waves. If the direction of a wave is reversed, particles without displacement (-- 0) are changed half a period in phase (becoming =. 0); particles at maxima or minima (+ m) are not changed in phase at all, while the phases of intermediate particles are changed in the corresponding harmonic ra- tio. This may be tested at once by sup- posing the full wave, Fig. 12, to advance first in direction d, thereafter in direction 7, when the particles vibrating in the line ea will respectively rise and fall, thus passing between opposed phases ; etc. The transverse wave advances through a given medium at rest, with the zero of dis- placement (=E0) in the wave front, so under- stood. Hence to reverse the direction of a wave is to reverse the phaseof the wave front. If the transverse wave encounters a denser medium this implies that the particles therein situated are capable of reacting with *Waves as here considered are essentially steady. [N.S. Von. 1X. No. 220. forces in excess of those corresponding to the original medium. If the medium is quite impermeable (as when the wave on an elastic cord meets the peg) the reaction is exactly equal and opposite to the action. Thus if a wave advances toward the dense medium with a crest or group of pulls up- ward the medium itself must at every in- stant react with equal pulls downward. This reaction, which in its succession is bound to be rythmic like the impinging wave, is the impulse of the reflected wave, which must all be returned into the first medium (i.e., be reversed in direction) if none can enter the new medium. Now, let the particle in the wall aa (Fig. 12) be in the zero of phase (+0). The direct wave advancing, as shown by d, is in the act of increasing the displacement. It is developing an increasing pull up. The reflected wave (prolonged) r is simultane- ously in the act of developing the counter pull down ; it is,in like degree, tending to decrease displacement: but, though the phases impressed by the direct and reflected wave are thus initially quite opposite, both waves d and r momentarily constitute con- tiguous parts of the same harmonie curve. If this curve separates at aa, with the parts d and r moving with equal velocity in op- posite directions the condition for action equilibrated by reaction at aais maintained throughout all time. The explanation is essentially the same if the reaction is not complete (permeable dense medium). In this case the amplitude of 7 will be smaller, other conditions re- maining the same. Hence in the machine the pointers are to be set for equal and opposite displacements at the origin, beginning with the null phases of each component wave—the case of Fig. 12, where if d and r were moving in the same direction, or the pulleys not cross-belted, the two components would meet in the same place. = ee MaARkcH 17, 1899.] On the other hand, if the direct wave meets a rarer medium at aa the reaction is less than that of the original medium. The pull up developed by the wave d in Fig. 12 is not resisted by an excessive pull down as before. The reaction (which from its rhythmic character develops the reflected wave) is an additional pull up, such as would correspond to a wave 7’ in Fig. 12. Both waves r’ and d are in the same phase as regards their effect on the initial particle at aa, but they differ in direction of motion. In other words, the direct wave d and the reflected wave prolonged 7’, are not initially contiguous parts of one and the same wave, meeting without displacement at the wall. Half a wave-length is necessarily lost at the inception. This determines the method of setting the pointers of the machine for equal dis- placements of the same sign at the origin, beginning with opposite null displacements ; for the two waves d and 1’ if traveling in the same direction (cf. Fig. 12) would then annul each other. Summarizing; the reflected wave from a denser plane boundary normal to the axis is obtained from the incident wave by two rotations of 180° each; one around the axis of motion, the other around the trace of the wave plane on the plane of the obstacle ; these correspond respectively to the substi-. tution of reaction for action, and of an op- posed direction for the given direction of motion—two reasons for change of phase. The wave advancing crest on (crest fore- most) returns trough on and vice versa. The reflected wave from a rarer plane boundary is obtained from the incident wave by a single rotation around the trace in question. The only reason for change of phase is change of direction. The wave advancing crest on returns crest on, and the trough returns a trough. Cf. §26. If the component amplitudes are made unequal the nodes show a correspondingly SCIENCE. 397 slight vibration, the case corresponding toa medium at the origin neither absolutely im- permeable nor absolutely rare. 19. Wandering Nodes.—If with equal am- plitudes the velocities or periods of the com- ponents be unequal in value and opposite in sign the case becomes one of stationary waves with continually drifting nodes. Thus if the 3:4 pulley be cross-belted four turns of the rear or faster cam axle will continuously move the node half a wave- length onward. The stationary character is, nevertheless, very thoroughly retained. In the extreme and transitional case where the velocity of one wave is zero and the other of any value a single turn at the crank moves the nodes half a wave-length and thus reproduces the original curve. IV. Component S. H. Motions at Right Angles to Each Other of the Same Amplitude and Wave-Length. 20. Elliptie Polarization.— Using cam axles with two waves each and adjusting rear ends of levers (Fig. 4), while the vertical riders Z engage the cams, two simple harmonic curves are available to be compounded at the particles. This is usu- ally an elliptic helix. It is advisable to tip the machine up in front with the object both of relieving the work of the springs and of exhibiting the wave symmetrically with reference to a horizontal plane through the axis. In order that circular polarization may be obtained, the amplitudes of the particles must be equal. The rear cams contribute their full swing independent of the levers. The fore cams enter with an amplitude which may be more than doubled, though the fulerum of the levers is now at the rollers. Thus the levers are to be shortened from 1 meter to about 70 cm. to obtain cir- cular paths 3” in diameter for the single particles. Shorter levers would give oblate ellipses, larger levers prolate ellipses, for their central figures. Cf. §36. The two 8S. H. motions will meet and 398 SCIENCE. exist throughout in the same phase if the pointer on the rear eccentric is 90° ahead of the other, supposing, in accordance with the above table, that directions upward and rearward are positive. The zero of phase thus begins with front pointer left and rear pointer up. If the pointers are parallel and in the same direction the front harmonic is 90° in phase ahead of the other. The com- pound harmonic is circularly polarized and the corresponding wave advances with counter-clockwise rotation if seen in the direction of advance, 7. e., from left to right to the observer in front. Dephasing the front axle 90° farther (180° advance) pro- duces plane polarization at 135° to the hori- zontal; 90° farther (total advance 270°) finally a circularly polarized harmonic curve with a wave advancing in the direc- tion of the components with clockwise rota- tion, as seen from the origin. All interme- diate cases are elliptically polarized with intermediate rotation. The sunshine picture on a screen normal to the axis with rays parallel thereto is in general an ellipse with the appropriate rotation discernible with remarkable clear- ness. V. Preceding Case (IV) with Component Velocities or Periods Unequal. 21.—If the com- ponent waves do not advance with the same velocity (necessarily implying difference of period in the present case) the differ- ence of phase of the first pairs of cams is continually changing, and the phase differ- ence of all succeeding cams is changed in like measure. Hence the compound wave passes continuously through all the differ- ent harmonic curves in turn. If the belt be placed on the 3:4 pulleys four turns of the rear axle restores the original form through all intermediate forms, beginning, for instance, with plane polarization at 45°, passing through circular clockwise polarization (seen from the origin) into plane polarization at 135°; then back with [N.S. Von. 1X. No. 220. counter-clock wise rotation into plane polar- ization at 45°. The sunshine shadow of this case is identical with the Lissajous figures from two tuning forks slightly different in pitch but of the same amplitude. The directions of rotation are particularly evident, en- hancing the instructivenes of the figure. VI. Preceding Case (IV.) with Hither Compo- nent Velocity Reversed. 22.—If with equal am- plitudes and wave-lengths the component waves travel in opposite directions (pulleys cross-belted) the compound wave is a pecu- liar form of stationary wave in which the form of vibration of all particles is sustained, but in which the motion of each particle differs uniformly in regard to the phase dif- ference of its components, 7. ¢., in ellipticity, from its neighbors. Thus a group of parti- cles a wave-length apart are plane polarized at 45°; particles midway between plane polarized at 135° ; particles midway between both groups circularly polarized with alter- nately opposite rotations and all other par- ticles correspondingly elliptically polarized. The envelope of the harmonic curve would be given by a thin tube 3” in diameter, com- pressed at equal distances by a pair of shears to lines at right angles to each other, but alternately in the same direction. The case is thus thoroughly different from the case of unequal velocities in the same direction, where all the particles under ob- servation are instantaneously in the same ellipticity. 23. Velocities Reversed and Unequal.—lIf the two component waves of the same wave- length have unequal velocities (and periods) of opposite sign the plane polarized groups wander. Thus if the 3:4 pulleys be taken 4 turns of the rear crank reproduces the original wave. The transitional case is again that in which one cam axle is sta- tionary (wave velocity zero) while. the other rotates. A single turn reproduces the original figure. MARCH 17, 1899. ] / VIL. Preceding Case (IV.) Adjusted for Ro- tary Polarization. 24.—If a special axle be provided with the cams alternately in op- posite phase tothe normal occurrence, but otherwise equal in amplitude and wave- length, and if the corresponding balls be painted red and white, the two circu- larly polarized waves occur simultaneously. Similarly, the two plane polarizations at 45° and at 135° occur simultaneously; ete. The former case is interesting in relation to ro- tary polarization, as will be more fully indi- cated below ; for the two circular motions may be compounded by the device shown in Fig. 10, and a harmonic curve plane po- larized in the vertical or the corresponding wave will result (ef. S40 et seq.). To obtain rotation of the plane of polari- zation by this method the alternate cams on both the front and rear axle would have to be set for some other wave-length in the manner stated. SCIENCE. 399 (vertical) axles of which are at the angles of the cranks, as far apart as the cams, and allarranged along a straight line paral- lel to the cam axle. The short shanks of the bell cranks now carry a series of 1’ balls, which, under present conditions,must, therefore, vibrate nearly parallel to the cam axles, i. e., longitudinally right and left in the line of advance of the wave, whereas the thrust of the levers* is harmonically to and fro. In practice the long shanks are open sec- tors of wire, swung so as to clear each oth- er’s axles. / In this way the alternate compression and rarefactions of such a wave are re- markably well shown (cf. Fig. 11), the sinuosity in the line of particles being negligible at least to the observer in front. The balls approach each other to about 5/8’’ between centers (all but contact in the compressional phases), while they sepa- Diagram. Wave advances from left to Lever displacements positive rearward. Ball displacements necessarily re- Fic. 11. Adjustment for compressional waves, seen from above. right to an observer in front. versed. ° VIII. Waves of Compression and Refraction. 25. Longitudinal VibrationWith the ap- paratus arranged as in Fig. 4, let the levers all be raised at the front ends, so as quite to disengage them from the front cam axle. This being, therefore, out of action, the rear or horizontal harmonic of 3’ double ampli- tude forward and rearward thrust is alone in play, as shown in plan by the parallel lines normal to theaxis in Fig. 11. Now, let the ball ends of the levers (eylets) engage the long shanks (6) of a series of horizontal, rvight-angled bell cranks, the equidistant rate to morethan about 12’’ in the rarefied phases. The great advantage of an arrangement of this kind from the kinetic point of view is the direct evidence furnished that each ball in the first instance is actually inS. H. M., and that the phase difference between balls is proportional to their distance * The reader should remember that Fig. 11 is seen from above and that direction rearward in the trans- verse harmonic (down in figure) is positive wave ve- locity left to right in the machine, becomes right to left in figure. Balls in front reverse their positive motion, 400 SCIENCE. apart, while the compression and rarefac- tion of such a wave is an incidental phenom- enon. This essential structural character of the acoustic wave is not generally enough insisted on. In the same way any of the above or the following complex plane polarized waves may be converted into compressional waves by using vertical bell cranks (horizontal axes). For the case of stationary waves this would be of some interest, but I have not carried out the construction. Since small displacements are wanted, the en- gagement of levers should be located be- tween the axles. 26. Reflection.—There is bound to be con- fusion if the reflection of a compressional wave from a denser or a rarer medium is to be explained without reference to the elementary S. H. M. of the particles of such a wave. Relatively to § 12 and Fig. 12 it follows that the explanation there given is at once applicable to 8. H. M. in sound waves, the only difference being that for pulls up and’ reactions down we have now pulls toward the right and reactions toward the left, ete., which in no way modifies the reasoning. A wave advancing toward the dense medium ‘crest on’ returns ‘ trough on’; advancing toward the rare medium with a crest returns a crest. Let no one suppose, however, that crest and trough. mean compression and rarefaction. For it is just here that a slough of despond awaits the incautious interpreter. A glance at Fig. 11, where the oscillations of particles have all been marked, shows that the centers of compression and of rarefaction are without simple harmonic displacement (phases + 0) ; that the maxima and minima of displacement (=m) lie in air of normal density. If the wave is to advance with particles in the wave front in the zero of displacement it must advance the center of a compression . or the center of a rarefaction sharply into normal air. Thus, the particles on one [N. 8. Vou. IX. No. 220. side only of the balls marked + 0 in Fig. 11 must indicate the status of an advanc- ing sound wave; moreover, if the former begins a crest, the latter (particles on the other side of + 0) begin a trough, and vice versa. In this structural fact lies the gist of the true explanation : If a compression meets a denser medium it is reflected as a com- pression surely enough, but the two com- pressions are not the same. The sym- metrical half of the incident compression is returned. The two halves lie on opposite sides of no displacement, and are the con- tiguous halves of crest and trough required by Fig. 12. So the two symmetrical halves of a rarefaction become incident and re- flected wave, initially meeting the plane of reflection as contiguous trough and crest. In both cases crest returns trough, and trough crest, even though two compressions or two rarefactions are in question. If reflection takes place from a rarer medium a compression returns a rare- faction ; this, however, is the rarefaction ending in a crest, while the given com- pression begins one, and vice versa. In other words, there are two crests advancing in opposite directions ; or crest returns crest, even though a half wave-length is initially lost and though a compression returns a rarefaction. The agreement with $12 is thus complete and the whole explanation logically simple throughout. IX. Component Simple Harmonics Coplanar, with Wave-Length Ratio, 1:2. Harmonic Curves. 27.—Replacing the front cam axle by another containing a single wave-length and 2” double amplitude, the plane com- pound harmonics for period ratio 1:2, for the same or different amplitudes and for any difference of phase, may be exhibited in succession. The cams are exchanged by lifting all the levers above the front axle, by aid of the notched swivelled cross-lath Maxrcw 17, 1899. ] (when an opportunity to show the rear har- monic alone is afforded as the levers now ride on a common fixed axle in front), after which the single wave axle is easily inserted and the levers dropped down upon it by lowering the cross-lath. Reference to the scheme of phases com- piled in §10 shows that 16 generically dis- tinct compound harmonies with an indefi- nite number of intermediate curves are obtainable. The variation is further en- hanced by changing the component ampli- tudes by drawing out the levers. Among forms for equal amplitude the symmetric types are distinctive. They are obtained concave upward more or less W-shaped for components meeting at the origin both at maximum displacement (-++m), and more or less M-shaped when both components meet at the origin at minimum displacement (—m). Similarly symmetrical forms are seen when the components at the origin are in opposite phases, viz., V-shaped when the front harmonic is at +m and the rear har- monic at —m, and ,4-shaped when the front harmonic is at —m and the rear at +m. 28. Waves. If these curves are to be transmitted in a compound wave which does not changeits form each component must travel equally fast. Hence the rear axle with two wave-lengths must be rotated twice as fast as the front axle with one wave- length (pulleys 2:1) The periods are now also in the ratio of 1:2. Thus it appears, that it takes two rotations of the rear axle to exhibit the complete wave, or beginning with a symmetric type, for instance, the W and 4 curve together make a single har- monic curve; whereas the Mand V curve make another, in relation to waves; etc., for non-symmetrical forms. The character of the wave is markedly progressive, each little kink as well as large elevations or de- pressions running along the axis in turn. Referring again to the above table §10, SCIENCE. 401 the present succession of phases is a march along a diagonal passing from left to right downward across the diagram. 29. Case LX. with Component Velocities Un- equal.—If the component waves are trans- mitted unequally fast the compound wave continually changes form. Thus, ifthe 2:35 pulleys be used, it takes 3 turns of the rear axle to reproduce the original form ; in 3: 4 pulleys, four turns; in 1:1 pulleys, but a single turn. In the last instance the waves produced are much like stationary waves, with two nodes at the ends if the compo- nents meet at the origin in opposite phases, and one node in the middle if they meet in the same phase, phase difference being maintained constant at each cam. The table, §10, shows that the passage is now from left to right across the diagram, along a single row. If one axle alone rotates a single turn again reproduces the original form, but the wave has now a progressive character, which is an inversion of the result in $28. In other words, the Vand V types or the M and 4 types of curvearesuccessive. Inthe table of phases, §10, the present succession for any single cam is given by a column passed from top to bottom. 30. Case LX. with One Component Velocity Reversed.—If the axles rotate with equal velocity in opposite directions the wave presents the succession of forms of the first (normal) case, but its character is now non- progressive, each particle retaining its pecu- liar form of vibration, which differs regu- larly from that of neighboring particles. But half the full wave is represented at once. No particle is permanently at rest and the stationary character is less pro- nounced than for the case in §29 with equal pulleys. Particles at the end of the curve in view are in like figures of vibration. In the above table, $10, the passage for any single pair of cams is now diagonally across the diagram, but from right to left, downward. 402 X. Components Simple Harmonics at Right Angles to Each Other, with Wave-Length Ratio, 1:2. Transverse Space Wave. 31. Harmonic Curves.—With the preceding cam axles, let the rear ends of the leaves be lifted upon the horizontal back plate and adjusted for the same component amplitude (Fig. 4). Space waves of this and the following kind may be conveniently termed Lissajous waves, since their sunshine shadow on a screen normal to the axis of motion is al- ways the appropriate Lissajous figure. Starting the waves with the initial eccen- trics towards each other, the harmonic curve has a meandering space form, char- acterized, however, by its sunshine shadow, which is the specific bow-shaped 1:2 Lissa- jous, concave toward the cams. Dephas- ing the rear axle +90° produces the sym- metrical 8-shaped figure ; +90° farther the bow-shape again, this time, however, convex toward the axles of the cams; +90° far- ther returns the 8-shape described in a di- rection opposite to the preceding. The intermediate cases are assymmetrical 8’s, but not well given unless the balls are small enough. The harmonic curves themselves present no marked complexity. Seen from above they contain two wave-lengths ; seen from the front but one wave, each in the appro- priate phase at the origin. This gives a very clear analysis of the occurrences. The wave envelope in the bow-shaped cases is a gutter. 32. Waves.—The waves corresponding to the above space harmonics are instructive. If the figure of the compound wave is to be preserved, 7. ¢., if its shadow Lissajous is to remain fixed, both component waves must advance with rigorously the same velocity. This implies double rotation (double fre- quency ) for the rear waves of shorter wave- length. The direction of rotation in the shadow is particularly well marked. For initially opposite or for like phases at the SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. EX. No. 220. origin the figure is alike 8-shaped, but when horizontal pointers on the front axle correspond to down on the rear or up on the rear the rotation is clockwise or coun- ter-clockwise respectively in its upper half; ete. 33. Case X. with Component Velocities Un- equal.—lIf the velocities of the component waves are unequal, but of the same sign (pulley 2:3, for instance), the compound wave continually changes form, as is best shown by the sunshine shadow. This is identical with the Lissajous curve for two tuning forks of the same amplitude, but with period ratios slightly different from 1:2. If the speeds of the two axles are equal (pulleys 1:1) a single rotation of the erank produces all the Lissajous between two occurrences of the same figure. If the component periods are equal, but of opposite sign, stationary wave conditions appear for this case. Particles at the ends of the compound wave oscillate in any fixed Lissajous; the intermediate particle has the inverse figure. In general the perma- nent vibration figures vary proportionally to the distance apart of the particles. The sunshine figure is reproduced for 1/2 rota- tion at the crank. One may note the con- trast that, whereas the particles themselves vibrate in the elliptical Lissajous series, the sunshine shadow produces the 2: 1 series. If the component periods are unequal and opposite in sign the figures drift as above. The transitional case is given when but one axle rotates. XI. Component S. H. Motions Coplanar with Wave-Length Ratio, 2:3. 34. Plane Harmonics and Waves.—The front cam axle is replaced by one containing 38 wave- lengths, with adjustments as above (Fig. 3). The curves of this series are more complex than the preceding, and if the de- phasing be effected in steps of 90° each, 16 marked forms of curves may be exhibited. Among these the symmetrical types are Marcu 17, 1899. ] best adapted for recognition. They corre- spond respectively to like phases at the origin with maximum or miminum dis- placement of both components (JW- and M- shaped forms), or to opposite phases at the origin with maximum and minimum, mini- mum and maximum displacements of the components ( V- and 4-shaped forms). If the component waves are to advance with the same velocity the rear cam axle rotates twice while the fore axle rotates thrice, thus establishing a period ratio of 3:2. Hence each wave contains two of the specified harmonic curves in succession, or only one-half of it is seen at once. The progressive character of these waves as they dash along is singularly pronounced. If the axles rotate equally fast in the same direction the wave assumes a station- ary type, with one node at the middle of the component harmonics meeting at the origin in the same phase. If the latter meet at the origin in opposite phases, nodes occur at the two ends with marked vibration for intermediate parts of the compound wave. If the cam axles rotate equally fast, but in opposite directions, the compound wave shows 6 nodes if the components meet in opposite phases at the origin, and 5 nodes under other conditions. Finally, if the wave velocities are equal, but opposite in sign, there is permanence in the vibration form of each particle, with dif- ference of phase between them, but no nodes. XII. Component Simple Harmonics at Right Angles to Each Other, with Wave-Length Ratio 2:3, 35. Transverse Space Waves.—The results are similar to the above cases, only more complex. Thesunshine shadow on the nor- mal screen shows the 2:3 Lissajous figure in permanent form if the axes are rotated at angular velocities of 3:2. The compo- nent waves are then transmitted with equal velocity and the period ratio becomes 2: 3. If the component waves are transmitted with other velocities the compound wave SCIENCE. 403 continually changes form, as does also the Lissajous shadow curve. The rotation within it is here again exhibited as to di- rection, etc., with remarkable clearness. To obtain steady results for this case the balls must be small and the ratio workman- ship of the machine accurate, otherwise the inconmensurable cases supervene. Experi- ments are made as above. XIII. Component Harmonics Circular and Vertically Simple Harmonic of any Wave-Length Ratio. 36. Harmonie Curves for Equal Com- ponent Wave-Lengths.—The present curves are interesting, inasmuch as they present an intermediate stage between the above cases of S. H. composition and the next cases relating to the composition of circular motions. The wave machine is put into adjustment, as shown in Fig. 5, with cam axles and pulley ratios 1:1. The machine~ is tipped up in front. Inasmuch as the 8. H. M. of the front axle interferes with the vertical component of the circular motion of the rear axle, the phase difference is best specified in terms of these coplanar vibrations. For like phases, therefore, the Lissajous figure of the compound curve is a tall vertical ellipse, say 9” high and 3” broad. Advancing the front phase +90° inclines this ellipse -to the rear, shrinking it throughout. Advanc- ing the front axle +90° farther produces the simple harmonic curve in the ,horizon- tal with a double amplitude of 3”. The further advance of the front phase of +90° expands the Lissajous figure into an oblique ellipse inclining to the front, etc. 37. Waves.—The rotation in the waves is always clockwise for a clockwise circular component. In this and other respects (pronounced prolateness combined with horizontal plane polarization) they differ from §20. 4 38. Waves and Curves for Other Component Wave-Lengths—On replacing the front cam axle with one of one or three waves to the 404 two of the rear axle, peculiar apparently beknotted wave forms are obtained, well adapted to give a notion of the complexity resulting from simple compounding ; but it is needless to refer to them further. XIV. Component Harmonics Both Circular, of any Wave-Length Ratio and Opposite in Direction. 39. Remarks on the Machine-— After the description of the machine and the remarks already made in the successive paragraphs above, it is not necessary to enter at length into a consideration of the present experiments. As to matters of ad- justment in Fig. 6, I may note that the common horizontal locus of the centers of the approximate circles described by the free ends of the levers (they are really curves of the 6th degree), and the respec- tive cam axles, must be equidistant from the perforated cross laths, Uand V. In the given apparatus the effective lever length is about 18”. In this case the lever ends describe curves which do not differ more than 1/8’ from circular circumfer- ence, a departure not discernible with 1/2” balls. Nevertheless, the angular velocity in the quasi-circles is not uniform, a circum- stance which from symmetry is without bearing on the vertical compound vibra- tions, but becomes more marked in propor- tion as the vibration is twisted around into the horizontal. The latter, therefore, ap- pears somewhat convex downward unless very long levers are chosen. The adjust- ment in § 24, where the circles are nearly quite perfect, is thus in many respects to be preferred, though the levers are necessarily farther apart and the lever ends incapable of resisting much tension. There is incon- venience, however, in constructing special pairs of front and rear cam axles. To find whether the circles at the lever ends have a common cylindric envelope the cam axles should be rotated in like di- rection. Coincident ends should then re- main nearly coincident throughout. The SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 220. cross laths, U and V, are adjustable with this test in view. 40. Rotary Polarization. Equal Component Wave-Lengths.—Let the front cam axle be a left-handed, the rear axle a right-handed, screw (Fig.6). Let them be equal in wave- length and amplitude. Then the compo- nent harmonics (loci of the lever ends or eyelets) will be respectively right and left circular helices, otherwise equal. The vibra- tion lines of the particles, W, in Fig. 10, will all be coplanar, the plane being parallel to the cam axles at any angle to the hori- zontal depending on the phase difference of the initial cams. The compound harmonice, or longitudinal arrangement of the particles in the plane stated, is a simple harmonic, curve whose amplitude is the common diameter of the component circular har- monics. This case has already been referred to in $24 and there exemplified. The compound curve, as constructed by the machine, is on a scale of one-half. If the cam axles are rotated with the same velocity, opposite in direction (cross- belt), the corresponding plane-wave will result, unchanged in obliquity. One may note in passing that, whereas, in all the above compounding, plane-waves were ob- tainable in one or two special altitudes merely, they may now be obtained in all altitudes. 41. If the axles are rotated with un- equal velocities, components of equal wave- length differ in period and velocity. The plane of the compound wave will, there- fore, rotate about the axis of the component circles. Hence, if the oscillation of the first particle be put back into the same line after each oscillation (in general, continu- ously), 7. ¢., if oscillation is continually supplied at the origin in this line, the amount of rotation resulting will be proportional to the distances between particles. The rotary polarization so produced is due toa MARCH 17, 1899. ] difference both in the period and the velocity of the component circular waves of like wave-lengths. 42. Unequal Component Wave-Lengths.— With the front and rear cam axles still respectively left and right, if more turns be put on one than on the other, the harmonic curves will become helical. In other words, the compound of two plane simple har- monic curves of the same wave-length ratio and phase difference at the origin will now be inscribed on a regular helix. If the axles be rotated with the same angular velocity in opposite directions the compo- nent harmonics have the same period, but differ in velocity. The vibration lines in the compound wave remain fixed for each particle, but their directions differ in alti- tude proportionally to their distance apart. The rotary polarization so obtained is due to a difference in the velocities of the circular components. The helix may be rotated as a whole by dephasing the initial particles. 43. If the axles are turned with unequal velocities the helical compound wave must rotate as a whole about the common axis of the component circles, in consequence of the continuous and like dephasing at all cam pairs. Rotary polarization is again due both to difference of velocity and of period, as in § 41. If, however, the period of rotation at the cam axles is proportional to the wave-lengths of the helices the velocities of the components will be tlie same and the continuous rotation occurring due merely to difference in the periods of the components. Hence,if the oscillation in the first particle of the compound wave is always supplied parallel to a given line the rotary polarization obtained will be due simply to the difference in the periods of the components. 44, Right-Handed Circular Component Har- monics.—The same amount of rotation as in the last cases will be obtained when the wave-length of one of two equal right and SCIENCE. 405 left cam axles is increased and that of the other decreased by half the stated increase of the single axle in § 42. It will even be obtained when both cam axles are right- handed screws or both left-handed screws, alike in all respects but differing in phase by 180°, subject as before to counter rotation (cross-belted). But, whereas the rotary polarization in the preceding case, § 42, is due solely to normal advance of the circular waves, it is now due to the independent counter rotations impressed by outsideagency. The two right-hand helices specified, being opposite in phase, constitute a series of stresses in equilibrium and pro- duce no displacement. If the cam axles of equal wave-lengths rotate with the same velocity the compound wave is a helix, but with each of its par- ticles in thesame phase. The neutral posi- tion is thus a line of balls in the common axis encircled by the lever ends, and this may be used as a test on the adjustment. Each particle persists in its line of vibration, and their locus is a helix which expands and contracts in diameter rhythmically. 45. If the two axles rotate unequally swiftly the component circular waves ad- vance unequally swiftly and the line of vi- bration of each particle or the contractile helix as a whole rotates around the common axis. 46. Finally, in two right-handed cam axles of equal amplitude, but different wave-length, the resultant harmonic curve will be the compound of corresponding plane harmonics, but inscribed on the cor- responding helix. For rotations of the same angular velocity (equal periods) the helical wave will not rotate as a whole. For un- equal periods it will so rotate. Some of these cases are more important than others. Their application is a question of optics. Cary Barus. BROWN UNIVERSITY, PROVIDENCE, R. I. 406 THE WORK OF THE U. 8S. FISH COMMISSION. THE report of the U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for the year ending June 30, 1898, shows an increase in the propaga- tion and distribution of food-fishes of about 40 per cent. over the work of any previous year. The number of adult and yearling fishes, fry and eggs distributed in public and private waters or transferred to the State authorities was about 857,000,000, of which the largest number represented important commercial species, like the shad, cod, whitefish and salmon. There were thirty- three hatching stations and sub-stations in use, the steamer Fish Hawk being also uti- lized for shad-hatching in Albemarle Sound and the Delaware River. The extension of the salmon-hatching work on the Pacific coast was especially gratifying, as the enormous annual drain on the salmon streams of that region makes it very important that the supply should be kept up by artificial means. At the sub- station situated on Battle Creek, a tributary of the Sacramento River, the largest collec- tion of the salmon egg (48,000,000) in the history of fish-culture was made in the fall of 1897. Particular attention was also paid to the hatching of young lobsters, owing to the steady decline in the lobster fishery, and as a result of these efforts no less than 95,- 000,000 fry were turned loose. There is little doubt but that the future success of the lobster industry depends on the possibility of artificial propagation, and the same may be said of the salmon fisheries of the Pacific coast. What may be hoped for is shown in the steady increase of shad in the eastern United States. In 1880 the catch was only about 18,000,- 000 pounds, and the catch steadily decreased until 1885, when the results of artificial propagation became observable. By 1888 the catch had doubled, and in 1896, the SCIENCE. [N. 8. Von. IX. No. 220. last year for which there are accurate data, the catch amounted to 50,866,368 pounds, with a market value of $1,656,711, the value of the increased catch for that year alone being something like $800,000 in ex- cess of the total cost of all shad propaga- tion up to that date. Extended tables show the output of the different hatcheries and the details of the distribution of the eggs and fry of the various species. The Division of Inquiry respecting food- fishes has made various investigations re- garding the oyster, including a survey of the oyster grounds of Louisiana and a re- examination of the much-vexed question as to the origin of the color of green oysters. In regard to this the report states that in the United States it has been repeatedly demonstrated by the Commission that the green color is due to vegetable matter which serves as food, and that there is no impair- ment of the edible qualities of the oyster. The reason for the color of the ‘ red oysters’ noted during the season of 1896-97 is un- known, as no opportunity was given to in- vestigate the problem, but it is suggested that it may be due to the presence of the infusorian Peridiniwm. In view of the scarcity of mackerel, which has extended over a longer period than ever before in the history of this fish- ery, special study has been given to the em- bryology, natural spawning and artificial propagation of this species. Its practical propagation is still an unsolved problem, and it is noted that under existing condi- tions the number of eggs obtainable is too small to produce any appreciable effect, while suggestions are given for enlisting the aid of the fishermen. The principal work of the Division of Statistics has consisted of canvasses of the more important fisheries of certain of the New England and Middle Atlantic States and of the Great Lakes, the information thus collected being made im- mediately available by the publication of Marcu 17, 1899. ] single-sheet bulletins. It is proposed to continue the issue of these from time to time whenever there is information of special interest. Attention is called to the fishery resources of the Yukon River, which so far have been utilized only by the Indians for their immediate needs, but which it is be- lieved may afford a food supply to the miners and traders who have been attracted to that region, and ultimately to the coun- try at large. Full statistics are given of the sections covered by the report, and it may be noted that at Gloucester and Boston there has been a falling-off in the aggregate receipts of fish since 1896, while the South Atlantic States as a whole show an increase in the product, the amount of capital in- vested and the number of persons em- ployed in the fisheries. What strikes one very forcibly in glanc- ing over this report is the many discourage- ments the fish culturist is called upon to face and the large number of serious losses due to unavoidable, often seemingly trivial and sometimes inexplicable, accidents. A few degrees of temperature, more or less, a heavy shower, the lingering of ice or an unfavorable wind may cause heavy damage and almost bring to naught the labor of weeks. Another thought is to what extent should the general government undertake the propagation and distribution of the more strictly game fishes, such, for example, as black bass and trout? The investiga- tion of the best methods for the accomplish- ment of such work should undeniably lie with the United States, but these once dis- covered, its continuance should rest with States and individuals. What may be done by individual effort is shown by the fact that a large number of the many ponds of Plymouth county, Mass., have been stocked with black bass by the simple process of carrying a few fish in pails from one pond to another. It may be said that the estab- lishment of many of the trout hatcheries has SCIENCE. 407 been due to the efforts of members of Con- gress and not to any desire of the Commis- sioner of Fisheries. The propagation of such widely-spread and all-important species as cod, shad, the Pacific salmon and the lobster is quite another matter and should properly be carried on by the United States. The statistical as well as the strictly scien- tifie work of the Fish Commission is again of national importance, and the special omission of fishery statistics from the com- ing census bears testimony to the value of the work done by this division. Tt is gratifying to learn that the appro- priation for scientific work has this year been materially increased, for, from past ex- perience, we know that what to-day appears to be a purely scientific problem to-morrow becomes an all-important practical matter. In this connection Dr. Smith urges the ap- pointment of an expert in fish pathology, calling attention to the large mortality which often prevails among fish, both under natural and artificial conditions, and for which there is at present no known cause or remedy. Theannnal losses at the hatcheries of the Commission, while not excessive, are still great enough to demonstrate the need of skilled investigation, and the present ex- penditure of a few thousand dollars may yield subsequent returns of millions. Last, but not least, it may be again noted that under the present Commissioner it has been arranged to keep the laboratory at Wood’s Hole under the scientific direction of Professor Bumpus open throughout the year. ENGINEERING AND THE PROFESSIONS IN EDUCATION. Tue receipt of the annual volume of Pro- ceedings of the ‘ Society for the Promotion of Engineering Education’ * is a reminder of * Proceedings of the Sixth Annual Meeting of the Society for the Promotion of Engineering Education, Vol. VI. Published by the Society. 1898. 8vo. Pp. xxvii + 324 408 the extent to which all departments of edu- cation are becoming systematized and or- ganized in the United States. Hitherto, in all countries, there had been observable a very serious lack in this respect, even in Germany, where the central government, and the authorities of every kingdom alike, control and direct the education of all classes from central organized bureaux. With us primary and secondary educa- tion have had consistent and authoritative direction, not always wise or expert, but al- ways earnest and well-intended ; for the common school has been recognized, from the first, as the strongest bulwark of our institutions, political and social. Profes- sional education and training, however, have, like all higher learning, been sustained mainly by private, sporadic and unsystem- atic, unauthoritative, support and aid. Education, in a true sense and on the lower levels, has been fairly well-cared for; pro- fessional training, that education which is rather a noble form of apprenticeship to a noble vocation, finds even yet almost no public and little private recognition. Of late the schools of engineering are secur- ing some attention from investors in this form of higher security and from the State Legislatures and expert educators and pro- fessionals. In the West, particularly, the schools of the vocations are attracting more and more attention as their relation to and bearing upon the social condition of the people is coming to be generally appre- ciated. The volume before us contains the pro- ceedings of a single meeting of a representa- tive association of this class, and presents a very excellent picture of the purposes and methods of such an institution. The So- ciety, about five years old, numbers 244 and includes practically all of the leaders in the development of this branch of tech- nical educational work in the country, and representatives from nearly all recognized SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX No. 220. professional schools in this field. Twenty- nine papers are published, together with lists of officers and members, the constitu- tion of the Society, its rules and its pro- ceedings at the Boston meeting of 1898. The leading paper is the address of Presi- dent Johnson, a discussion of the topic: ‘A Higher Industrial and Commercial Education as an Essential Condition of our Future Material Prosperity.’ This is a most interesting and impressive statement of the needs of the United States in this direction, and of the dangers that threaten a nation neglecting to systematize its indus- trial system and the education of the ‘ In- dustrial Classes’ for their life and work in presence of a competition which is coming to be more constant and more dangerous as the means of communication and of transportation become more extended and more perfect. The foreign ‘ Mono-technic Schools’ are held up to our view as models of a type of school which is almost unknown in this country, and as having proved the salvation of the Germanic peoples. The establishment of high-grade mono-technic and commercial schools is urged as the most promising and desirable of all visible modern improvements in education and training for the industrial classes. A full evening was given to a paper ‘On the Organization of Engineering Courses and on Entrance Requirements for Profes- sional Schools,’ in which the writer, follow- ing a somewhat similar line of thought, developed the theory of professional educa- tion, exhibited the logical differences be- tween the real ‘education’ of the academic colleges and the primarily vocational train- ing, the ‘ higher apprenticeship’ of the pro- fessional schools ; showing that while the one should offer a ‘ladder from the gutter to the university,’ as Huxley said, the other lets down a ladder from the profession to the people, the two thus demanding radi- cally different methods of construction of MARCH 17, 1899. ] their curricula, as well as different methods of prescription of entrance requirements. The one supplements the schools, and must build smoothly up from below; the other builds down from the profession, and must, at all hazards, make its junction at the upper end effective, while its entrance re- quirements must be such as will least em- barrass the aspirant while satisfying the proper demands of the profession. Each curriculum, however, must be constructed by experts in its own field, and the profes- sional must be relied upon to perfect the courses and prescribe the requirements of the technical school, as must the expert in academic education be expected to be given a free hand in the upbuilding of general education. Shorter papers on laboratory work, on details of educational apparatus, ‘ thesis work,’ courses of instruction in various departments and reports of committees, fill the volume with a mass of material hitherto unparalleled in this line, and which must deeply interest, not only workers in this field, but all educators, and particularly all who are interested in the promotion and improvement of our still defective and in- adequate educational provision for the best interests of the industrial classes, and in the advancement to still higher planes of our professional schools. The careful study, not of this volume only, but of the series, be- ginning with the organization of the As- sociation at the Educational Congress at Chicago, in 1893, in connection with the Columbian Exhibition, cannot but well re- ward every one interested in the modern and current movements in this politically, as well as socially, important department of the scheme of national education, the per- fection of which is so vital an element in determining what shall be the political and the moral and intellectual status of our country in coming generations. R. H. Tuurston. SCIENCE. 409 SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. Die chemische Energie der lebenden Zellen. DR. OscaR LoEw. Munich, Dr. E. Wolff, pub- lisher. 1899. Pp. 170. This publication gives the results of a series of observations on the chemical characteristics of living matter. It is proved that the proteids of living matter are of very labile nature and different from those of the dead matter, into which they are transformed by atomic migra- tions in the molecules. It is also demonstrated that in many plants a labile reserve-protein occurs which is not yet organized, but is changed by the same conditions as kill the cells. The book contains the following chapters : 1. Views on the causes of the vital activity. 2. General characteristics of living matter. 3. Chemico-physiological characteristics of living matter. 4. The essential concomitants of protoplasm. . The character of the biochemical work. . On the formation of protein in the lower fungi. On the formation of protein in the green plants. . Theory of protein formation. . A labile protein as reserve material in plants. 10. Chemical characteristics of the labile proto- protein. 11. Lability and activity in the protoplasm. 12. Theory of respiration. Chapters 9 and 10 give the results obtained in conjunction with Th. Bokorny. CO DIADM The most modern progress of theoretical chemistry has been brought to bear in this work. The theories advanced in the work and the suggestions which they contain will make the book invaluable to students of bio-chemistry and physiology. Doctor Loew has concluded his work with the following brief summary : “It may be briefly recapitulated in a few words how much the theses put forth corre- spond or coincide with the observations made. In the first place, it should be remembered that the living substance shows a great resemblance to a chemically labile body and that the dying process of the protoplasm is suggestive of the transition of a labile into a stable modification of organic compounds. According to the theory developed in the eighth chapter con- cerning the formation of albumin, the lability of the plasma-protein is due to the simultaneous presence of aldehyde and amido groups. The 410 toxicological facts reported in the eleventh chapter, indeed, support this view. The further inference from the theory, that very labile but not yet organized protein sub- stances possibly occur in plants, has also been verified. An exceeding labile reserve protein of an aldehyde nature was proved by Bokorny and myself to exist in many kinds of plants ; its characteristics are described in the ninth and tenth chapters. Labile substances contain kinetic chemical energy; they contain certain loosely bound atoms, which under the influence of heat be- come more mobile than in case of a more stable arrangement. As a result chemical reactions are caused, the energy of these atoms being transferred to certain susceptible substances (sugar, fatty acids), which are thus drawn into a state of higher reactive power, especially with the otherwise indifferent oxygen of the atmos- phere. In other words, catalytic actions are produced through a charge with chemical en- ergy. The proteins of living substances ap- pear as relatively firm structures in which sepa- rate labile atoms perform great oscillations. This conception is essentially different from that of Pfliger and Detmer, both of whom as- cribe to all atoms in the plasma-proteins such an intense state of motion that a dissociation results, to be followed by a similarly energetic regeneration. Pfligersays:* ‘‘I do not ex- pect to meet with any opposition if I consider the living matter as not only being astonish- ingly changeable, but steadily decomposing.’’ Yet, when we consider that a minimal attack of extremely small quantities of a poison will produce the death of a cell, one may well doubt whether such a metabolism as Pfluger assumes would not sooner lead to death than to a possibility of regeneration. Neither can we, therefore, agree with Verworn when he says: + ‘“‘The life process is the sum-total of all pro- cesses connected with the building-up and de- struction of the ‘biogens,’ or, ‘‘ life consists in the metabolism of the albuminous bodies.’? A more correct definition would be the following: Life is the sum-total of the effects made possible by the labile nature of the plasma-proteins and * Pfliger’s Archiv 10, p. 311. } Allgemeine Physiologie, 2d edition, p. 509. SCIENCE. [N. S. Von. IX. No. 220. their respiratory activity, and governed by the specifie tectonic of the energides and of the ac- tive paraplastic structures. * The nature of the living matter is in the first place determined by lability and organization, that is, by a systematic kind of motion in a structure (tectonic) of labile proteins. The principle of organization is not yet known. Even if we assume with Pfluger that the pro- cess of organization consists merely in a poly- merization, the complicated details in genera- tion and karyokinesis, would still defy explana- tion, and the genetic differentiation would not become better intelligible. Difficult problems are here facing us.. Still it may be considered a slight advance to know at least a little more about the cause of respiration and the chemical energy of the cells than formerly. It is the lability of the plasma-proteins, which, sup- ported by the effects of light, leads to the build- ing-up of the carbohydrates in the green plants out of carbon dioxide and water with separa- tion of oxygen. It is also this lability which assists in combining the organic substances with oxygen and renders the obtained energy applicable to physiological work. In addition to the well-known fact that all life functions are based upon the energies of the sun, it must be inferred that the lability of the plasma-proteins is necessary to transform this sun energy into vital action. ALBERT F, Woops. DIVISION OF VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY AND PA- THOLOGY, U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE. Physical Geography. By WuILuLIAM MorRIs DAVIs, assisted by WILLIAM HENRY SNYDER. Boston, Ginn & Company. 1898. Pp. 431. Professor Davis well states in his preface the central principle of this volume: ‘‘ Physio- graphic facts should be traced back to their causes and forward to their consequences.’’ We find thus the widest departure from the piecemeal description and recital of facts, of most works in physical geography. We should expect this from one who has long been eminent as a student and teacher of the science and who * Kupfter designates ‘the contractile substance of the muscular fibrille, the nervous fibre and the red blood corpuscles as ‘ paraplastic’ formations. Marcu 17, 1899.] has not ceased to magnify the causal notion and the consequent educational value of geography. It cannot hereafter be said that the materials of the new geography are not available to the rank and file of teachers, as was conceded in the report of the Committee of Ten. The limits of a secondary text-book forbid anything like a full discussion, and it is to be hoped that a manual or college text-book may come from the author’s hand. He has discarded, for the most part, technical terms. Thus the doctrine of the peneplain is elucidated in the text, but the name appears only once, and that in a foot- note. of geology, but this has been done in a simple fashion which obviates the necessity of a pre- vious course in that subject for the pupil, though the teacher would find such knowledge all but indispensable. T'o dwell for a moment longer on the pedagogical aspects of the volume, the vital teacher need not hesitate to use it, though he be deficient in preparation, but it is emphatically a book for the best, and only such can wholly do it justice. It wisely joins itself to the present state of knowledge, but leads well out among the ideals and possibilities of the science. The illustrations are profuse and well se- lected. Especially useful are many diagrams which combine surface relief and vertical sec- tion, thus relating geographic form and geolog- ical structure. The appendix contains valuable bibliographic lists and a short catalogue of the best maps, whose use and importance are every- where emphasized. The Earth as a Globe, the Atmosphere, the Ocean and the Lands are the four main sub- divisions of the book. All but the last are briefly treated, offering an outline of the chief facts in mathematical geography, meteorology and oceanography, terms which we think, for the present purpose, wisely discarded. The lands are treated with greater fullness, the discussion occupying 273 pages. The chap- ter headings will best show the general charac- ter of this section. They are: The Lands, Plains and Plateaus, Mountains, Volcanoes, Rivers and Valleys, The Waste of the Land, Climatic Control of Land Forms, and Shore- lines. The origin of these forms and their con- The rational geography makes large use SCIENCE. 411 sequences upon organic and especially human life are never lost from view, and thus is real- ized the highest definition of geography as a study of the ‘physical environment of man.’ No separate sections are devoted to the races of man or the distribution of animals, but a reader of the whole volume will discover that these subjects have not been neglected, but have been treated in an intimate and educa- tional fashion. The principle of change of form by erosion and by change of relation to sea-level is early stated and receives manifold elucidation to the end. The Plain offers a good example of the author’s method. We have first the formation of a coastal plain by deposition of land waste and uplift of marginal sea-bottom, with subse- quent dissection by land streams. There log- ically follows the broader, higher, older and more dissected coastal plain, the eastern Caro- linas serving as an example. The favorable conditions for artesian wells form here a natu- rally related topic. Embayed coastal plains show the effect of the later, partial submergence, the Chesapeake being used asa type. Such use of physiographic types, as a means of seeking and classifying examples in all parts of the world, is a favorite and important principle with our author. Similar plains of very ancient origin, as in central-southern Wisconsin and western New York, are then described and connected with the younger, less modified types, but with- out involving the difficult ideas or nomencla- ture of historical geology. The plateau, or uplifted plain, appropriately follows. Thus we have young plateaus, as in Arizona; mature and well-dissected plateaus, as in the Catskill-Allegheny-Cumberland belt, and old plateaus, as recognized in the buttes, mesas and table-topped mountains of the West. The treatment of mountains is, for the space, equally thorough and interesting. The various kinds are described—block mountains in various stages of maturity ; folded and domed moun- tains, with such fruitful subtopics as climate of mountains, mountains as barriers, valleys among mountains, and inhabitants of lofty mountains. The chapter on Rivers and Valleys well illus- trates the strides of physiographic science dur- 412 ing the last score of years, as will appear from an outline of the chief topics. Thus we have young rivers, with lakes, falls and rapids as marks of immaturity ; graded rivers and the development of valleys; meanders and the shifting of divides ; mature and old rivers; re- vived, antecedent, engrafted and dismembered rivers, the causal or historical notion appearing at every stage of the discussion. The general reader who desires to cultivate an appreciation for natural scenery will find help in Professor Davis’s volume, and the stu- dent to whom most of the materials are familiar will find a convenient and systematic summary of the important facts and doctrines of a great and growing science. ALBERT PERRY BRIGHAM. COLGATE UNIVERSITY, February, 1899. GENERAL. The Bulletin of the American Mathematical So- ciety states that advices from the Vatican an- nounce that Abbé Cozza Luzzi, assistant libra- rian, has found Galileo’s original manuscript treatise on the tides. The manuscript is in Galileo’s handwriting and concludes with the words: ‘Written in Rome in the Medici Gar- dens on January 8, 1616.’ The currently ac- cepted text, the original of which was supposed to have been lost, differs considerably from that of the manuscript just found. Pope Leo XIII. has taken the greatest interest in the discovery and has ordered the manuscript to be published in an elegant edition at the expense of the Vatican. THE London Times announces that it will pre- pare a supplementary volume to the ninth edi- tion of the Encyclopedia Britannica. This edi- tion was published between 1875 and 1889. It is well known that the treatment of scientific subjects are in many cases the best accessible to English students, being prepared by leading English men of science. It is unfortunate that a new edition of the Encyclopedia cannot be prepared, as the last twenty-five years have brought many changes in all the sciences, but a supplementary volume will be of some service. BOOKS RECEIVED. A Handbook of Medical Climatology. S. EDWIN SOLLY. Philadelphia and New York. 1897. Pp. xii + 470. SCLENCE, [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 220. Minerals in Rock Sections, LEA MCILVAINE LUQUER. New York, D. Van Nostrand Co. Pp. vii + 117. Die Medial-Fernrohre. UL. SCHUPMANN. Tuebner. 1899. Pp. iv + 145. Leipzig, Mark 4.80. Die Lehre vom Organismus und ihre Beziehung zur Sozialwissenschaft. OSCAR HERTWIG. Jena, Fischer. 1899. Pp. 36. Mark 1. Regeneration und Entwicklung. HH. STRASSER. Jena, Fischer. 1899. Pp. 29. Mark 1. Elementary Physiology. BENJAMIN MoorRE. New York, London and Bombay, Lorgmans, Green & Co. 1899. Pp. ii + 295. Primer of Geometry. JAMES SUTHERLAND. London, New York and Bombay. 1898. Pp. 117. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. THE GEOLOGICAL CLUB OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA. AT a meeting of the Club on February 25th Professor C. W. Hall discussed the extent and distribution of the Archean in Minnesota. First, accepting the Archean as that original ‘crust,’ or solidified portion of the earth, which is postulated in every existing view of the be- ginning of the geological record, he defined it as an era of igneous origins whose rocks repre- sent the original crystallization of earth matter added to from below by successive solidifica- tion and many subsequent intrusions. By this definition all overlying clastics or irrup- tions into or through the clastics are excluded from the Archean. If the base of the clastics can be found there certainly should be found, locally, at least, the rocks upon which they lie. Such underlying rocks, the Archean, are be- lieved to occur in Minnesota in two quite sep- arated districts, the northern and the south- western. Along the international boundary most geol- ogists have grouped all the rocks from Bass- wood Lake to Lake of the Woods as Archean, even when clastics have been clearly recognized and eruptives found breaking through them. Lack of care in delimiting the Archean up- wards has caused much confusion. Lawson set an example in distinguishing between clas- ties, ‘agglomerate schists’ and the rocks under- lying, though not necessarily those from which the clastics are derived. Structurally the Marcu 17, 1899. ] Archean of the Lake of the Woods forms a series of troughs—four is the number given— in which the Keewatin schists now lie. [Com- pare Geol. and Nat. Hist. Sur., Canada, N. Ser., Vol. I., 1885, C. C., pp. 10 et seq.] Al- though there are no sharp unconformities to be seen, yet, as Lawson observes, ‘‘ the fact that we find in the Keewatin series the first un- doubted evidences for this region of aqueous sedimentation and also of volcanic action, while in the underlying Laurentian gneiss of the re- gion we find evidence of neither, more than suggests that the Keewatin series had a totally different kind of origin from that of the gneisses and must, therefore, be in unconform- able relation to them”’ [Ibid., p. 84]. At Rainy Lake H. V. Winchell and Grant found a series of granites and granite gneisses beneath the other rocks (i. e., Archean) and eruptive into them. Since these authors did not think best to distinguish between under- lying and eruptive granite rocks their work is of but little taxonomic value. [Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surv., Minn., 23d An. Rep., 1895, p. 53.] Between Rainy Lake and Lake Superior there are several belts of schists with alternating granites and other rocks having a general northeast-and-southwest trend. Concerning one of these, Irving noted in 1886 ‘‘ that we have among the rocks * * * two types, in one of which the crystalline structure is com- plete and in which there is little or none of an original fragmental structure, while in the other the fragmental texture is still distinct and the alteration has progressed to a smaller degree.’’ He then adds ‘‘ that the supposed older one of the two groups of schists in the Vermilion Lake belt is intricately penetrated by the granites of the great areas north and south of the belt.’’ [7th An. Rep. Director U. 8. Geol. Sur., 1885- 86, p. 437.] Hence areas of Archean lie north and south of these older schists. In the Minnesota River Valley lies the most carefully studied series of granite gneisses, gneisses and gabbro schists of the State. These rocks occur quite continuously from New Ulm to Ortonville and beneath the glacial drift stretch westward into South Dakota and disap- pear beneath the Dakota sandstone. At New SCIENCE. 413 Ulm they clearly underlie a quartzite conglom- erate regarded as Huronian (whether lower or upper is not determined). This Archean series is divided, for purposes of study, into a lower and upper; the former is named the Ortonville group of augite, hornblende and biotite granite- gneisses, and the latter the Granite Falls group of hornblende and biotite gneisses and asso- ciated gabbro schists. [Hall, Syllabus of Geol- ogy, 1897, p. 83. ] F. W. SARDESON, Secretary. THE BOTANICAL CLUB OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO. AT a recent meeting of the Club, Dr. Otis W. Caldwell gave the results of his study of Lemna minor. The following is an abstract of his paper: Owing to the greatly reduced body of the sporophyte of the Lemnacee there has been much interest in its morphology, and in the question as to the effect of the reduction upon the gametophyte. The investigations show that the sporophyte body is neither stem nor leaf, as often contended, but a shoot undiffer- entiated except at the basal or foot region and at the nodal region from which the root, the new shoots and the flowers arise. The root originates from a small group of hypodermal cells on the lower side of the node. The epi- dermis develops a temporary root sheath, while the persistent root cap is developed from the meristem, which is never many-celled and in a few cases was seen to be unicellular. Flowers are rarely formed, and frequently when they have begun to develop they are crowded out by vegetative buds which are produced in great abundance. Even when not encroached upon by vegetative shoots the flowers do not often sueceed in forming seeds. The pollen grains usually become fully formed, but the structures of the ovule and embryo-sac may disorganize at any stage in their growth. Although the chief stages in ordinary embryo-sac development were found, such were shown by very few preparations ; while in most of the preparations embryo-sacs were disorganizing, the disorgani- zation first affecting the antipodals, then the polar nuclei or primary endosperm nucleus, the ege being the last to succumb to the unfavor- 414 able conditions. Cases were observed in which the upper polar nucleus, failing to fuse with the lower one, had proceeded unassisted to the production of endosperm. Few embryos were found. In the young stamen but one archesporial mass appears. After this has enlarged some- what a plate of sterilized tissue divides it into two regions, each of which is again divided in a similar manner, thus constituting the four archesporial masses of the anther. The four loculi of the anther are four parts of one spo- rangium, and not four sporangia, as reported usually for other spermatophytes. The primary tapetal layer is not differentiated until after the archesporium is separated into four masses. The tapetum may be derived either from the sporogenous tissue or from the adjacent sterile tissue. The cells of the tapetum frequently di- vide and push out into the cavity of the loculus, where they assist in nourishing the spore mother cells. Some of the latter are nourished also by other mother cells whose growth has ceased. The microspore germinates while within the sporangium. The generative cell remains closely applied to the wal] of the spore for a considerable time before dividing to pro- duce the male gametes. The ‘winter buds’ seem to be summer buds which are not sufficiently vigorous to develop the necessary air spaces to keep them afloat. When conditions become favorable growth is renewed, air spaces develop in abundance, and the buds rise again to the surface. It seems clear that Lemna minor has de- scended from terrestrial forms. The entire body of the diminutive plant, as evidenced by the disappearing root, the system for aeration, and the devices properly to relate the chloro- plastids to the light, indicates attempts toward adaptation to the water habitat. It has not succeeded in working out such appropriate de- vices for pollination as are found in most water plants. The water environment also seems es- pecially injurious to the embryo-sac structures of this plant, and the ease with which vegetative buds are produced, and the fact that some of these buds may serve to perpetuate the plant from year to year, reduces the necessity of seed production. SCIENCE. [N. Ss. Vou. IX. No. 220. ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. UNDER the head of ‘Short Notes and Ex- hibition of Specimens,’ Mr. Benton stated that on January 22d he had found brood honey bees in all stages of growth and new adults, indi- cating egg laying the last of December. This is a very early instance. Mr. Matthis exhibited specimens of what he takes to be Boreus brumalis Fitch, which he had caught upon the snow in the Rock Creek Val- ley after the recent blizzard. He showed for comparison specimens of a Boreus which he had caught last October at a high elevation on the Big Horn Mountains. This was a larger and darker form than B. brumalis and has not been specifically identified. Dr. Dyar showed a blown larva of Apatela clarescens Gn., previously undescribed. The larva nearly resembles that of A. hamamelis ; indeed, from the mature larva alone no constant differences can be pointed out, but Dr. Dyar has observed certain differences in the earlier stages of these larvee, which will be more fully worked out at the next opportunity. In this connection, he also presented a list of Apatela by Professor A. R. Grote, with generic and sub- generic types, which had been prepared by Professor Grote on request, and which is sup- plemental to the monograph of the genus re- cently published by Smith and Dyar. Dr. Dyar stated that he was pleased with Professor Grote’s erection of a subgenus for A. funeralis, since this was definable on larval character, as are all the other subgenera of Apatela, except Tricholonche as compared with Lepitoreuma. Mr. Schwarz exhibited some very dry and hard pulp of the giant cactus, taken by Mr. Hubbard in the autumn of 1897 and containing specimens of the extraordinary Scolytid, Cacto- pinus hubbardi Schwarz. He had examined this pulp in January, 1897, and found the bee- tles alive, with no indication of oviposition. He moistened it somewhat at that time and showed the same beetles still alive, thus indicating that they may live in the adult condition for two years. Mr. Howard showed a remarkably clear and beautiful photograph of Phasgonophora sulcata Westwood, which had been taken by Mr. M. V. Slingerland, and spoke briefly of the ad- Marc#H 17, 1899.] vantage of photography in entomological illus- tration, expressing the opinion that a fair photo- graph reproduced by the half-tone process is in many instances better than a poor drawing, but that the best photographs he had seen re- produced in this way were by no means equal to drawings made by competent artists. Such a photograph as the one exhibited, however, marks a great advance on previous efforts of the kind and would be invaluable at least as an aid to the artist, and if transferred by photog- raphy to a wood block and then handled by a competent wood engraver would obviate all necessity for drawing and would produce the most satisfactory results which could be ob- tained, since the slight failures in details could be easily rectified by the engraver. Dr. Gill mentioned the resemblance of cer- tain coleopterous larvze to certain Trilobites, especially among the Staphylinide. He said he had been struck by this resemblance in a figure of a Silpha larva, even the antenne re- sembling the antennae of Trilobites as recently discovered by Beecher. He mentioned the figure of Fluvicola, an Isopod crustacean, in De Kay’s volume on the ‘Crustacea of New York, and Le Conte’s conclusion that it was the larva of Psephenus, and asked for further in- formation as to this resemblance. Mr. Schwarz said that this wonderful resem- blance extends through several families of Coleoptera. He instanced Micropeplus among the Staphylinide, a genus of Scydmenide fig- ured by Meinert, various genera of Endomy- chide, groups of species in the old genus Silpha Psephenus and Helichus among the Elmide, and various genera of the Dascyllide and Lam- pyride. The resemblance is largely caused by the exfoliation of the sides of the body. What its function is he did not know, some of the larvee possessing it being aquatic, some sub- aquatic and some terrestrial. The first paper of the evening, by Dr. Dyar, was entitled ‘On the Fluctuations of the Post- spiracular Tubercle in Noctuid Larvee.’ The second paper included a continuation of Mr. Hubbard’s letters from the Southwest, pre- sented with notes and comments by Mr. Schwarz. The letters read at this time related to the Colorado Desert and to Salton Lake and SCIENCE. 415 its insect fauna. Some discussion ensued on the question as to whether the Colorado Desert has been occupied at any modern period by an arm of the sea, Messrs. Vaughan, Schwarz and Gill taking part. L. O. Howarp, Secretary. THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCE OF ST. LOUIS. At the meeting of the Academy of Science of St. Louis of March 6, 1899, Professor J. H. Kinealy described some experiments on lifting water by means of compressed air, as is done by the Pohle air-lift pump, and discussed the efficiency problems of the use of apparatus of this description. Three persons were elected to active membership. WILLIAM TRELEASE, Recording Secretary. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. THE IMPORTANCE OF ESTABLISHING SPECIFIC PLACE- MODES. To THE EDITOR OF SclENCE—(Sir: I use the word ‘place-mode’ to embody a well-known idea, namely, that a species has a different mode (i. e., a different prevailing condition of size, color, etc.) in different localities. The person who seeks to determine a place-mode determines the prevailing dimension of the principal measurable qualities (and practically all qualities of organisms are measurable) of a species as it occurs in the locality in question. The importance of this work is as follows: It fixes the condition of a species in a particular locality at a particular time ; it affords a base from which we may measure any change which the species has undergone in the same locality after a certain number of years. That species in nature do undergo changes within a man’s lifetime is recognized by some conchologists who find that certain shells of the seashore have undergone within a half century an evident change of index (ratio of length to breadth). A case of especial interest because of the exact measurements which have been made is that of the rock crab of Plymouth, England, the frontal breadth of whose carapace has diminished year by year at a measurable rate (1 to 2 per cent. in five years), a result explained by certain 416 changes in the physiography of the region (Weldon). Such facts indicate that species are changing in essential specific characters and sometimes rather rapidly changing. The changes are not sufficient to be detected in cases where the descriptions are wholly qualitative or based upon the observation of a few indi- viduals. But where a large number of. in- dividuals, taken at random, are measured the modes may be used as standards for reference. With the aid of such standards we can observe not only the fact of change, but the rate and the direction, and draw conclusions concerning the causes of specific change. If two modes occur in a species in one locality we can determine whether they separate farther and farther from each other, and the rate of such separation. A careful correlation of the facts of separation of modes with changes in environment will give us an insight into the causes of specific differ- entiation. In a word, the establishment of these place-modes for various species in various localities is the first sure step toward the solu- tion of the problem of the Origin of Species. The methods of this work are very simple. They involve the measurement of size, of pro- portions and other elements of form, and of color, by the color wheel;* they involve also counting repeated organs. The measurements, or counts, are to be grouped into classes on the basis of size. The means of measurement will naturally be fonnd ; but, most important of all, far more significant than the mean, is the mode or the most frequented class. The mode gives the typical condition of the lot of individuals measured, The end of the old century or the beginning of the new one is a convenient time for making a number of these determinations, and it is on this account that I write to suggest to field naturalists that for a year or two they bend their efforts to the determination of place-modes. I am so convinced of the importance of this work that Iam planning, with the cooperation * The color wheel is an instrument for determining the percentage of constituent elementary colors in any compound color. A small, cheap and convenient form of this instrument—called the color top—with standard colors may be bought for six cents of The Milton Bradley Company, Springfield, Mass. SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. 1X. No. 220. of students, to work on this subject at the labo- ratory at Cold Spring Harbor during the com- ing summer, and I hope that simultaneous co- operative observations may be made at Woods Holl and other marine laboratories as well as at the various inland stations and by private col- lectors elsewhere. There is no fear of duplica- tion of work, for two persons will hardly study the same species in one and the same locality. Cuas. B. DAVENPORT. HARVARD UNIVERSITY, March 2, 1899. IDENTITY OF COMMON AND LABRADOR WHITE- FISH. THE Common Whitefish of the Great Lakes was first very imperfectly described by Dr. Samuel L. Mitchill, in The American Monthly Magazine and Critical Review for March, 1818. The description, in fact, is so unsatisfactory that his contemporaries and later ichthyologists for more than fifty years supposed it to refer to the Cisco, or Lake Herring, Argyrosomus artedi. A good account of the Whitefish was published by Richardson in 1836, under LeSueur’s name of Coregonus albus, a name published only a few weeks later than that of Mitchill; but, like Mitchill’s, unaccompanied by a sufficient de- scription. In 1836 Richardson established a new species of Coregonus upon a dried specimen which he received from Musquaw River, that falls into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, near the Mingan Islands, giving it the name Salmo (Coregonus) labradoricus. This has been retained in the literature as a distinct species up to the present time, although its close relationship to the Common Whitefish has sometimes been ob- served without recorded comment. Systematic ichthyologists have found it diffi- cult to show clearly the differences between\the Common Whitefish and the Labrador Whitefish, as may be seen by referring to the monographs upon the Whitefishes by Jordan and Gilbert, Bean, and Evermann and Smith. They have been forced to rely, finally, upon a single char- acter, the presence of several rows of teeth on the tongue to distinguish the two forms, and this was supposed to be constant and in- fallible. The writer has recently had occasion, while Marco 17, 1899. ] studying the fishes of the State of New York, to examine numerous specimens of the Common Whitefish from the Great Lakes and interior lakes of New York and of the so-called Labra- dor Whitefish from lakes of New York and New Hampshire and from rivers in New Brunswick and Labrador. As a result of these investiga- tions he is forced to the conclusion that Rich- ardson’s species, Coregonus labradoricus, is identical with the Common Whitefish, Core- gonus clupeiformis, there being no characters by which the two can be distinguished. Every individual of the Common Whitefish, young and old, was found to have teeth on the tongue and to possess the other characters by which Richardson’s species has hitherto been sep- arated. This conclusion has an important bearing upon fish cultural operations by the States and the United States, as it will tend to simplify the work of artificial propagation and, perhaps, extend its scope. TARLETON H,. BEAN. WASHINGTON, D. C., March 3, 1899. A DATE-PALM SCALE INSECT. Dr. A. 8. PACKARD writes from Biskra, Al- geria, January 23,1899: ‘‘I find myself in this oasis of the northern edge of the Sahara, where there are 170,000 date palms. In a beautiful garden I found a date palm, indeed several, af- fected by Coccids, which I enclose.’? The Coc- cids are crowded on the pieces of leaf and prove to be Aonidia blanchardi, Targioni-Tozzetti, Mém. Soc. Zool. France, 1892, Vol. V., p. 69. The insect, however, is not an Aonidia, but be- longs to Parlatoria, and must’be called Parlatoria blanchardi. It was originally found in the oasis of Ourir, and has never, I believe, been noticed since its original description until now redis- covered by Dr. Packard.* The figures of Tar- gioni-Tozzetti represent it well, except that in one of them (Fig. 3) there is an impossible lobule between the median interlobularsquames. The female turns bright olive green on being boiled in caustic soda. There are four small groups of circumgenital glands. This insect is likely to * Unless Maskell’s P. proteus var. Palme, found in Australia on date palms imported from Algeria, is the same, as indeed seems likely. SCIENCE. 417 be of some economic importance, as it is allied to, though easily distinguished from, Parlatoria victriz, Ckll.; which, introduced from Egypt, has proved a pest on date palms in Arizona, California and Queensland. The manner of the infestation is quite the same in the two species. T. D. A, CoCKERELL. MESILLA PARK, N. M., February 16, 1899. THE CHOICE OF ELEMENTS. To THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: Once upon a time, according, I believe, to Messrs. Gilbert and Sullivan, a magnet hanging in a shop win- dow fell in love with a silver churn, but, to its great distress, was unable to awaken any re- sponse. Its pathetic plaint ran : “Tf I can wheedle A nail or aneedle Why not a silver churn.”’ T used to think the magnet very unreasonable, because I supposed the atoms of iron and steel were necessarily drawn to it willy nilly, while there was no such tendency in the silver atoms, which were consequently quite unable to re- spond toits call. Major Powell (SctENcE, Feb- ruary 17th) puts the matter in a new light, which awakens my sympathy for the magnet. It appears that the particles have choice. Both common sense and the dictionary tell us that choice is the power of choosing. Thus it was not of necessity, but of their free will, that the nails and needles were so responsive. The silver churn evidently considered the mag- net ineligible. The case of the latter is a truly sad one, worthy of all serious commiseration, for if,as Major Powell tells us, the particles have intelligence, why should they not have love also? True, the magnet as a whole does not know, but what can assuage the grief of each of its myriad particles? Is there any hope that in time the silver will think better of it? ARDY, HARVARD MEDICAL SCHOOL, February 27th. ASTRONOMICAL NOTES. TUTTLE’S COMET. THIS comet was discovered by Méchain at Paris in 1790. Only a few observations were 418 taken, however, and the comet was rediscovered by Horace P. Tuttle at the Harvard College Observatory, January 4, 1858. Johannes Rahts, of Koénigsberg, made the most complete discussion of the orbit, combin- ing the observations of 1858 and 1871-2, having regard also to the perturbations. His value of the period is 18.7 yrs. The comet was next seen in 1885, and was expected during the pres- ent year. An ephemeris was accordingly dis- tributed from Kiel, and it was probably by means of this that a faint comet, supposed to be Tuttle’s, was discovered March 5th, by Dr. Wolf, as already announced. This ephemeris, as corrected by Dr. Wolf’s observation, is given below. Ephemeris. G. M. T. R. A. Dec. 1899. Mar) 5.5° 12 16™. 397 + °31° 36" CHa a Sib Gili Sali tis) 135i 46 St 30 AG aly aye eyes Absa bys reeds) iesth) HARVARD COLLEGE OBSERVATORY, March 8, 1899. A NEW STAR IN SAGITTARIUS. From an examination of the Draper Memorial photographs, Mrs. Fleming has discovered a new star in the constellation Sagittarius. Its position for 1900 is: R. A. = 18"56.2™, Dec. = —13°18’. It was too faint to be photographed on eighty plates taken between October 18, 1888, and October 27, 1897, although stars as faint as the fifteenth magnitude appear on some of them. It appears on eight photographs taken while it was bright. On March 8, 1898, it was of the fifth magnitude, and on April 29, 1898, of the eighth magnitude. A plate taken this morning, March 9, 1899, shows that the star is still visible, and is of the tenth magni- tude. Two photographs show that its spectrum resembles those of other new stars. Fourteen bright lines are shown, six of them due to hy- drogen. The entire number of new stars dis- covered since 1885 is six, of which five have been found by Mrs. Fleming. KE. C. PICKERING. HARVARD COLLEGE OBSERVATORY, March 9, 1899. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 220. NOTES ON PHYSICS. ELECTRIC WIRE WAVES. THE theory of electric waves along wires has been worked out very completely by J. J. Thomson for the case of a wire surrounded by a cylindrical conducting shell. candle per square centimeter. Instead of determining the brilliancy of a light source by dividing its measured brightness (candle power) by the measured area of its luminous surface, making due allowance, of course, for irregular distribution in so far as this is possible, Mr. Jenko illuminates a screen of known area by a light of measured brightness, distance being measured. The intensity of the illumination of this screen is then known. He then compares upon a photometer bar the light given off by this screen with the light given off by the source of which the brilliancy is to be determined. He then measures the luminous area of the source and calculates its brilliancy in terms of the brilliancy of the illuminated screen, using an obvious relation between brill- iancies, brightnesses and distances along the photometer bar ! W.S. F. THE MAGNETIZATION OF IRON. In Wied. Ann., Band 66, No. 18, pp. 859-953, Max Wien communicates the results of a most careful and elaborate investigation upon ‘The Magnetization of Iron by Alternating Currents.’ The first part of the paper contains a general résumé of the literature of the subject, with a useful set of references to the original articles. Following this comes a discussion of the mag- netization of iron by alternating currents, in which it is shown that for a coil containing an iron core and having a purely sinusoidal E. M. F. applied to it, neither the induction nor the magnetizing force will be a simple sine function of the time, but will contain higher harmonics, on account of the varying permeability of the core, and that also the apparent resistance of such an electro-magnet is greater than the re- sistance of its windings, while its apparent is less than its true self inductance. A full description of the experimental ar- rangements and necessary corrections for Fou- cault currents, upper harmonics, etc., is then given together with the values obtained for the induction and hysteresis for irons of various qualities, using magnetizing currents having frequencies of 128, 256 and 520 per second. 420 The paper concludes with a general discus- sion of the experimental data, which may be summarized as follows: The permeability and induction are always smaller for an alternating field than for a steady one, the difference reaching a maximum for low values of the magnetizing force, while near saturation the difference is small. For low values of the magnetizing force the differences are the same for all frequencies. The softer and less subdivided the iron, and the higher the frequency, the greater the difference (amount- ing in one case for very soft iron to 40%). Tn moderate and strong fields, for equal values of the induction, the hysteresis is greater for alternating magnetization, than the value ob- tained by the usual static methods, the increase being greater the nearer saturation is ap- proached, the higher the frequency and the softer the iron. The opposite is true for weak fields. The only explanation which can be given is that the magnetism of the iron is unable to keep up with a rapidly varying field and consequently the hysteresis loop is broader and lower than it would be if determined for slow changes of the field. AGES Tar Cre. GENERAL. H. BECQUEREL (Comptes Rendus, t. CX XVIL., p. 899 and t. CXXVIII., p. 145) has been able to prove and study the existence of abnormal dis- persion in sodium vapor. He finds that the effects of the D, and D, lines in causing ab- normal dispersion are superposed and that for certain rays the refractive indices are less than unity. On account of its importance in the theory of atmospheric electricity the question as to whether the vapor of an electrified liquid is itself electrified is of great interest. It cannot be said that the subject has not received atten- tion, but the results obtained by different inves- tigators are not in accord. Pellat (Comptes Rendus, t. CXXVIII., p. 169) has lately re- investigated the subject and finds that the rate of loss of charge from an_ insulated, electrified, metal vessel is greater when it contains water than when empty. Applying this result to the phenomena of atmospheric electricity he comes to the conclusion that it can SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 220. only explain a part of the observed facts and further knowledge will reveal some as yet un- known cause acting. A. Sr. C. D. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. Mr. Henry GANNETT, Geographer of the Geological Survey, who was the political and statistical geographer of the last census, has been asked to take charge of the same work for the coming census. The Director of the Census, Mr. Merriam, has announced that all applica- tions for positions will receive consideration, and that examinations will be held as rigid as those before the Civil Service Commission. The 300 Supervisors are to be appointed after consulta- tion with Senators and Representatives of the separate States, but without regard to party affiliations. THE professors of geology in the University of California and in Stanford University have or- ganized a geological club, to be called the ‘Cor- dilleran Geological Club.’ It is intended to include all the geologists of the Pacific and ad- jacent States, and its object is by occasional meetings to stimulate geological work. Whether it shall remain an independent organization or shall be affiliated with any other scientific body is left for future decision. PROFESSOR RAY LANKESTER has been elected Foreign Correspondent of the Paris Academy of Sciences for the Section of Anatomy and Zo- ology. Twenty-seven votes were cast for Pro- fessor Lankester and eight for Professor Van Beneden, of Liége. M. Lortet, professor of medicine, of Lyons, has been elected National Correspondent for the same Section. Lorp Lister, London, and Professor Koch, Berlin, have been elected Foreign Associates of the Paris Academy of Medicine. PROFESSOR RAY LANKESTER, London ; Pro- fessor L. Cremona, Rome, and M. Alexander Karpinsky, St. Petersburg, have been elected Associates of the Belgian Academy of Sciences. THE address in medicine at the next Yale commencement exercises is to be delivered by Professor Charles Sedgwick Minot, of the Har- vard Medical School. The title of the address has not yet been announced, but we are in- MAnc# 17, 1899.] formed that Dr. Minot will present some new aspects of medical education. PROFESSOR GEORGE T. LADD, of Yale Univer- sity, will be given a year’s leave of absence at the close of the present academic year, and will lecture on philosophical subjects before the Uni- versities of Japan and India. Dr. WittiAM T. Harris, United States Commissioner of Education, has been given an honorary doctorate of philosophy by the Uni- versity of Jena. Mr. W. E. D. Scotr has been appointed curator of the ornithological collection in the School of Science of Princeton University. Mr. A. KE. Bostwick, Librarian of the New York Free Circulating Library, has been elected Librarian of the Brooklyn Public Library. THE Permanent Secretary of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dr. L. O. Howard, Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C., would be glad to receive information of the present addresses of the following: Mr. William J. Lewis, Mr. Frank McClintock, Miss Mary A. Nichols, Mr. Charles M. Rolker and Mr. Carl H. Schultz. Stenor Ropotro LANcIANI, D.C.L., LL.D., professor of ancient topography in the Uni- versity of Rome and Director of the Italian School of Archeology, has been appointed Gifford lecturer in the University of St. An- drews for the next two academical years. The subject of his lectures will be the ‘ Religion of Rome.’ WE learn from Nature that at the anniversary meeting of the Royal Astronomical Society, Mr. Frank McClean, F.R.S., was awarded the gold medal of the Society for his photographic survey of stars in both hemispheres, and other contributions to the advancement of astron- omy. A prize of 500 frances, founded by Augustin-Pyramus de Candolle for the best monograph on a genus or family of plants, is offered in competition by the Société de physique et d’histoire naturelle de Genéve. The mono- graphs may be composed in Latin, French, German, Italian or English, and must be sent to M. Pictet, the President of the Society, be- fore January 15, 1900. Members of the Society SCIENCE. 421 are not permitted to compete. The Belgian Royal Academy has awarded prizes of 600 franes to M. Georges Clautriau, of Brussels, for his memoir, on the macro- and micro-chemistry of digestion in carnivorous plants, and to Professor L. Cuénot, of Nancy, for his essay on the ex- cretory organs of Mollusca. WE regret to record the death of Sir Douglas Galton, F.R.S., the eminent sanitary engineer. Born in 1822, he was educated at Rugby and Woolwich, and received a commission in the Royal Engineers in 1840. He subsequently served in many important capacities as Inspec- tor of Public Works, visiting the United States to inspect the railways in 1856. He was the author of books on ‘Healthy Dwellings’ and ‘Healthy Hospitals.’ Sir Douglas Galton was for twenty-five years the General Secretary of the British Association, and on his retirement, in 1895, was elected President. It will be remembered that his presidential address at Ipswich was published in this JouRNAL. Str JOHN STRUTHERS, emeritus professor of anatomy in the University of Aberdeen, died on February 24th, aged 75 years. He was the author of numerous papers on human and com- parative anatomy, and exercised much influence on the improvement of anatomical teaching in Scotland. THE deaths are also announced of Dr. Dareste de la Chavanne, the French anthropologist, and Dr. Franz Lang, a Swiss zoologist and geolgist. A GRANT of £300 from the Worts Travelling Scholars’ Fund, Cambridge University, has been made to Mr. W. W. Skeat, M.A., towards defraying the expenses of his scientific expedi- tion to the Malay peninsula, on the condition that the results of the investigations made by the expedition be reported by him to the Vice- Chancellor in a form that may hereafter be published. Mr. Skeat is accompanied by two zoologists, Messrs. Evans and Annandale, of Oxford, and by Mr. Gwynne-Vaughan, bot- anist. News of the safety of M. Bonin, the French explorer, who has been missing in Thibet and the interior of China, has reached Shanghai. He arrived at Yachow, Sye Chuen district, after many exciting experiences, and will make his 4 or) a4 way to the coast by the river route. Witha few Chinese companions he has travelled through the greater portion of Thibet and made a trip from the Siberian line to Tong King. Srpps have been taken by the British gov- ernment to guard against undue destruction of wild animals in Africa, by the issue of game regulations. The German government has been consulted, and it is proposed to hold an in- ternational conference on the subject in London in the spring. THE New York Post-Graduate Hospital has received $100,000 from Mr. Harris Fahenstock for a training school for nurses. PROFESSOR R. W. Woop, of the University of Wisconsin, has discovered a new method of pho- tographing in natural colors. He reproduces the colors by diffraction, and, though at present the production of the first finished picture is somewhat tedious, duplicates can be printed as easily as ordinary photographs are made The pictures are on glass, and are not only color- less, but almost invisible when viewed in ordi- nary lights, but when placed in a viewing apparatus, consisting of a convex lens ona light frame, show the colors of nature with great brill- iancy. The principle is that the picture and the lens form spectra which overlap and the eye placed in the overlapping portion sees the different portions of the picture in color depend- ing on the distance between the grating lines at that place. Professor Wood says the finished picture isatransparent film of gelatine with very fine lines on it, about 2,000 to the inch on the average. The colors depend solely on the spacing between the lines, and are pure spectrum colors, or mixtures of such, the necessity of colored screens or pigments, used in all other processes except that of Lippman, having been overcome. The pictures can be projected on a screen by employing a suitable lantern, or can be viewed individually with a very simple piece of apparatus consisting of a lens and perforated screen mounted ona frame. A peculiarity of the process is that there is no such thing asa negative in it. Half-a-dozen pic- tures have been printed in succession, one from another, and all are positive and indistinguish- able from each other. SCIENCE. [N. 8. Von. 1X. No, 220. THE record for kite-flying for scientific pur- poses has again been broken at the Blue Hill Observatory ; 12,440 feet above the sea-level was reached on February 28th by a recording instrument attached toa string of tandem kites. This is 366 feet higher than the preceding best record, made at the same place on August 26th. The flight was begun at 3:40 p. m., Tuesday, the temperature at the surface being 40° and the wind seventeen miles an hour. At the high- est degree the temperature was 12° and the wind velocity fifty miles an hour. Steel wire was used as a flying line, and the kites, four in number, were of an improved Hargreave pat- tern, with curved surfaces, made after the pat- tern of soaring birds’ wings. The upper kite carried an aluminum instrument weighing four pounds, which recorded graphically tempera- ture, wind velocity, humidity and atmospheric pressure. The combined kites had an area of 205 square feet and weighed twenty-six pounds, while the weight of the wire was seventy-six pounds. The upper kite remained above two miles for about three hours, and was reeled in by a steam windlass, constructed for that pur- pose. When within half a mile of the ground the fastening on one of the kites slipped, and this carried it up to the one above, the added pull snapping the wire and sending three kites adrift. A search for the lost kites was begun on Wednesday, and two of them were found at the Milton town farm, about two miles away, but the third was not recovered until later, when it was found at Field’s Corner, over six miles north of the Observatory, or more than half the distance between that point and the State House. The recording instrument was found uninjured. This was the last of a series of five high flights made on successive days, Sunday excepted. The average height reached was 10,300 feet, or nearly two miles. The temperature at 10,000 feet on February 23d was 5°; on the 24th, 1°; on the 25th, 11°, and on the 28th, 20° above zero. THE British Iron Trade Journal attributes the remarkable expansion of the iron and steel in- dustries of the United States to the following favorable changes in economic conditions: (a) ‘Intensive’ production, reducing costs gener- ally; (0) Reduced costs of ores and develop- Marcu 17, 1899. ] ment of the deposits of fine mineral in the dis- trict adjacent to the Great Lakes ; (c) Reduction of salaries through technical progress and changes in systems of administration ; (d) Re- markably low cost of fuel; (e) Concentration of production with unlimited capital; (/) Mainly, however, to reduced cost of transpor- tation. This last factor more than all others together has brought about this great change and placed the United States in its present re- lation to the world’s markets. In a note by M. Considére, published in the Moniteur Industrielle, recently, there are given the data of tests of mortars and cements in structures, their resistance being reinforced by the introduction of iron straps and ‘ arma- tures,’ which show that, as he states, these sub- stances may be thus caused to sustain tensions twenty times as great as when not thus rein- forced. Ir appears that the Nernst light, the scientific principles of which we recently described, is likely to rival the are lamp for general use. Companies have been organized in Germany, Great Britain and America with capitals ex- tending into the millions of dollars. The English company values its rights at about $1,800,000, and it is to be hoped that Professor Nernst receives the greater part of this sum. Knowledge states that a site has been secured at Kemp Town, overlooking Queen’s Park, Brighton, for the Gardens of the recently founded Zoological Society for Brighton and Hove. Some sixty years ago Brighton possessed a small zoological garden situated north of The Level, on the Lewes Road. The institution did not flourish owing to the ignorance of its orig- inators, who had no notion of the proper method of dealing with captive specimens. The consequence was a very high death-rate and a brief career for the institution. The new garden will not be likely to fail from the causes which produced the collapse of its predecessor, for it will be managed by competent zoologists who have experience in the treatment of animals of all kinds. Moreover, the encouragement held out to the projectors by residents and per- sons of distinction in Brighton is such as to warrant us in believing that the undertaking SCIENCE. 423 will prove to be a success in all respects. A special feature in the new institution will be the regular delivery of courses of instructive popular lectures for the benefit of the numerous schools in Brighton and Hove. Among those who have enrolled their names as patrons of the Society are several of the foreign Ambassadors, the Duke of Fife, Sir John Lubbock, Sir Ed- ward Sassoon, the Earl of Chichester and the Hon. Walter Rothschild. The managing-di- rectors are the Earl of Landaff and Mr. F. W. Frohawk. THE New York Medical Record states that the Japanese parliament has passed a bill authoriz- ing the free distribution of vaccine virus and rendering vaccination compulsory. It is pro- vided that a child must be vaccinated within ten month of its birth, and that, if the vaccina- tion does not take, it must be repeated within a period of six months, and yet again within a similar period if it be again unsuccessful. Further, all children must be re-vaccinated at the age of six and once more at the age of twelve. Thereafter vaccination becomes occa- sional, and may be declared compulsory at any time of threatened or actual epidemic, the power to order it being vested in local goy- ernors. A CouRSE of nine lectures upon science and travel has been arranged by the Field Colum- bian Museum, Chicago, for Saturday afternoons in March and April at 3 o’clock. The lectures are as follows: March 4—‘ Cuba and the Cubans,’ Dr. R. 8. Mar- tin, Chicago. March 11—‘Blind Fishes of North American Caves,’ Dr. Carl H. Eigenmann, Director, Biological Station, Bloomington, Indiana. March 18—‘ Religious Ceremonies of the Hopi In- dians of Arizona,’ Dr. George A. Dorsey, Curator, Department of Anthropology, Field Columbian Mu- seum. March 25—‘Colors of Flowers and Fruits,’ Pro- fessor W. H. Dudley, Wisconsin State Normal School. April 1—‘ Russia and the Russians,’ Professor A. M. Feldman, Armour Institute of Technology. April 8—‘ The Bad Lands of South Dakota,’ Pro- fessor O. C. Farrington, Curator, Department of Geol- ogy, Field Columbian Museum. April 15—‘ Extinct Vertebrates of the Bad Lands,’ 424 Mr. E. S. Riggs, Assistant Curator of Paleontology, Field Columbian Museum. April 22—‘ Animal Messmates and Parasites,’ Pro- fessor H. M. Kelly, Cornell College, Mount Vernon, Towa. ; April 29—‘ Aboriginal Methods of Manufacturing Weapons and Implements,’ Professor George L. Collie, Beloit College, Wisconsin. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. Mr. W. F. R. WELDEN, F.R.S8., professor of zoology of University College, London, has been elected Linacre professor of comparative anatomy at Oxford, in succession to Profes- sor Ray Lankester. Professor Welden, Pro- fessor Love, whose appointment to the Sedleian chair of natural philosophy we announced last week, and Mr. Stout, recently appointed to the Wilde lectureship of mental philosophy, were all Fellows of St. Johns College, Cambridge. THE following promotions have been made at Princeton University: Assistant Professor Herbert S. S. Smith to be professor of applied mechanics in the School of Science; Assistant Professor Walter Butler Harris to be professor of geodesy in the School of Science, and In- structor Ulric Dahlgren to be assistant profes- sor of histology in the academic department. E. L. THORNDIKE, Pu. D. (Columbia), instruc- tor in Western Reserve University, has been appointed instructor in genetic psychology in Teachers College, Columbia University. THE Isaac Newton Scholarship of Cambridge University for the encouragement of study and research in astronomy has been awarded to Mr. G. W. Walker, B. A. Scholar of Trinity Col- lege. The scholarship is of the annual value of £200, and is tenable for three years. Miss CAROLINE HAZARD, of Peacedale, R. L., has been elected President of Wellesley College. PROFESSOR SNELLEN will retire at the close of the present semester from the chair of oph- thalmology at the University of Utrecht. AT a recent meeting of the Council of New York University Chancellor MacCracken re- ported that endowments amounting to nearly $50,000 had been received, of which $20,000 SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 220. will be devoted to the School of Applied Science. A CHAIR of English Literature has been en- dowed in Princeton University with $100,000, on condition that the Rev. Dr. Henry Van Dyke, of New York City, be the first incumbent. Princeton University has also received $65,000 for the academic department. THE German-American citizens of New York are collecting a fund of $20,000 in honor of Mr. Carl Schurz, whose seventieth birthday was re- cently celebrated. The money will be used to endow a fellowship and a Library of Germanic Literature in Columbia University. THE following further gifts have been made during the week to educational institutions : $50,000 to the Catholic University by the Na- tional Council, Knights of Columbus, to estab- lish a chair for historical research ; $20,000 to Hobart College for the foundation of scholar- ships by Miss Catherine L. Tuttle; $10,000 to University of Virginia for books on the history of Virginia, and $5,000 from various donors to Syracuse University. AT congregation at Cambridge University on March 2d the report of the General Board of Studies recommending the establishment of a department of agriculture in the University under the direction of a professor was approved. The offers made to the University by Sir Walter Gilbey, the Board of Agriculture, certain county and borough councils and the Drapers’? Com- pany were gratefully accepted. Tue plans for the Cornell Medical School, New York City, have been filed. The entire frontage on First avenue, between Twenty-sev- enth and Twenty-eighth streets, is to be occu- pied by the building, which will cost $500,000. Erratum: In the abstract (p. 312 above) of Profes- sor Wm. A. Locy’s paper before the American Morpho- logical Society, ‘New Facts Regarding the Develop- ment of the Olfactory Nerve,’ the first sentence should read: ‘The early embryonic history of the olfactory nerve is very imperfectly known,’ instead of ‘is known,’ and the closing sentence should read: ‘It was also shown to persist in the adult,’ instead of ‘ to per- ish in the adult.’ Credit should also be given to the Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund for providing the material upon which the research was conducted. OrunteL CHARLES MArsu, Professor of Paleontology in Yale University, President of the National Academy of Sciences from 1883 to 1896, President of the American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1878, and one of the editors of this JourNAL, died at New Haven on March the eighteenth, in his sixty-eighth year. SCIENCE EDITORIAL ComMITTEE: S. Newcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WooDWARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THurRston, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE ContE, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; S. H. ScuppER, Entomology; C. E. Brssry, N. L. Brirron, Botany; HENRY F. OsBoRN, General Biology; C. S. Minor, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bowpitcn, Physiology; J. S. Brutinas, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- TON, J. W. POWELL, Anthropology. Fripay, Marcu 24, 1899. CONTENTS: The Early Tertiary Volcanoes of the Absaroka Range: ARNOLD HAGUE.........0.:ecccsseceeeseee 4R5 The Physiological Basis of Mental Life: PROFESSOR HIUGO MUNSTERBERG.......0.cssceeecerenesescnsceeees 442 Sophus Lie: PROFESSOR GEORGE BRUCE HALSTED 447 Scientific Books :— Newbigin on Color in Nature : ‘Proressor T. D. A. COCKERELL. Weir on the Dawn of Reason : DR. EDWARD THORNDIKE........cc0ccceeeeescseees 448 Societies and Academies :— The Annual Meeting of the New York Academy of Sciences: PROFESSOR RICHARD E. DODGE. ~ The Philosophical Society of Washington: E. D. PRESTON. The Geological Society of Washing- ton: DR. WM. F. MORSELL..........:ecsceeeeeeees 452 Discussion and Correspondence :— On the Making of Solutions: PROFESSOR M. A. Wittcox. The Origin of Nightmare: G. Astronomical Notes :— A New Satellite of Saturn: PRoressor E. C. IPI CKWREN Gis cecccievacseccetanacciiseatiecsase suri astro 456. Notes on Physics :— The Nernst Lamp ; Pyroelectricity and Piézoelec- tricity ; The Rotary Converter; The Telescope- Mirror-Scale Method: W. 8. F......... ..- 456 Notes on Inorganic Chemistry: J. L. H...........000 457 Current Notes on Meteorology :— The Theory of Cyclones and Anticyclones ; Car- bonie Acid in Death Gulch: R. DEC. WARD... 458 Zoological Notes :— Neomylodon Listai: F. A. Lu..scececeeeseenee phono 459 Scientific Notes and News........s.sccooveseecseereeceseeees 460 University and Educational News . 464 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended tor review should be sent to the responsible editor, Profes- sor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson N. Y. THE EARLY TERTIARY VOLCANOES OF THE ABSAROKA RANGE.* Ir is, I suppose, accepted by many geol- ogists that volcanic energy has played an im- portant part not only in bringing about the present configuration of the Rocky Moun- tains, but in building up the entire northern Cordillera, stretching from the Front Range, along Colorado, Wyoming and Montana, westward to the Pacific Ocean. Over this wide area the volcanic phenomena of Ter- tiary time present a varied and complex mode of occurrence, offering from different points of view many problems of geological interest. These problems have been vigor- ously attacked both in the field and in the laboratory, and something has been accom- plished tending toward their final elucida- tion. The literature upon the subject is already voluminous, being scattered widely through the publications of official reports, both State and National, and in the pro- ceedings of scientific societies. While I de- sire to call your attention to some of these features, I do not propose to summarize the work that has already been done in this direction in a manner which is perhaps usual on occasions like the present. Neither do I wish to review the field from my own standpoint, possibly because, although much has been accomplished, such a vast amount of work remains to be done that the broad *Address of the President before the Geological Society of Washington, February, 1899. 426 field seems even yet scarcely explored. I prefer, therefore, to place before you some results of personal observation in a region in which I have worked for several years and in which I have become deeply inter- ested. The Absaroka Range lies along the east side of the Yellowstone Park. Several of its higher peaks and its long western spurs, sloping gradually toward the Park, lie within the national reservation. During several successive summers, while engaged in geological observations in the Park, I found it necessary to penetrate beyond its boundaries into the higher encircling moun- tains. My first excursion into the Absa- rokas was undertaken in the summer of 1885, and thereafter for several years I made long and protracted journeys into this rug- ged and at that time almost unknown re- gion, studying its geology, and returning each year more and more profoundly im- pressed by its many marvels. In the year 1893, and again in 1897, the greater part of the summer was occupied in exploration of the wild recesses of the Absarokas. The range, which lies wholly in the State of Wyoming, stretches from the Beartooth and Snowy ranges, on the north, southward to the Owl Mountains. In width it is less sharply defined, certain outlying plateau- like areas, such as Mirror and Two-Ocean plateaus, being separated from the main body by deep valleys. Geographically they may be considered as distinct physical fea- tures. Geologically, from their mode of oc- currence and the nature of the rocks, they are intimately associated with the central mass, and for the purposes of this address they may be considered as forming a part of the Absaroka Range. As thus defined, the range measures 80 miles in length by 50 miles in width, covering an area of nearly 4,000 square miles. From one end to the other the Absarokas present a high, imposing plateau, with ele- SCIENCE, (N.&. Von. IX. No. 221. vations ranging from 10,000 to over 12,000 feet above sea level. This entire mass is made up almost exclusively of Tertiary igneous rocks. Near the northern flanks Archean schists and gneisses crop out from beneath the overlying rocks. Resting upon the Archean, upturned Paleozoic limestones and sandstones having a considerable thick- ness come to the surface, and along the eastern borders of the range, exposed by erosion in the broader valleys, occur Cre- taceous rocks. With these exceptions, the range consists of a vast accumulation of ag- glomerates, tuffs, lava flows and intrusive masses. Degradation of the mass has taken place on a grand scale. Vast quantities of vol- canic ejectamenta have been removed from the summit, but no reliable data exist by which the amount can be estimated even approximately. All the higher portions have been sculptured by glacial ice. Enor- mous amphitheatres have been carved out of the loose agglomerates, and peaks, pin- nacles, and relics of great tablelands testify in some measure to the forces of erosion. The plateau is scored by a complete network of deep valleys and gorges, which dissect it in every direction and lay bare the structure of the vast volcanic pile. Nowhere in the northern Rocky Moun- tains do I know grander and more rugged scenery than ‘can be found in the Absarokas. But few natural passes lead across the mountainous tract, and these are high and difficult to scale. For years the range stood as an impassable barrier to the earlier ex- plorers in their attempts to reach the sources of the Yellowstone from the east; and even to-day the region is seldom penetrated to its inmost recesses except by those engaged in scientific exploration of the country, by the prospector in search of precious metals, or by a few adventurous sportsmen in pursuit of the big game of the Rockies. Much of this region is covered by a dense growth of Marcu 24, 1899. ] coniferous forest, and the greater part of the forests lying east of the Yellowstone Park belong to the Yellowstone timber re- serve, the first of the forest reservations set aside by proclamation of the President under the Act of Congress approved March 1, 1891. Rightly to understand the true position of this voleanic area it is necessary to re- view briefly the geological history of the surrounding region before the piling-up of the eruptive material. The Absarokas are hemmed in, both to the north and to the south, by high ranges with approximately east and west trends. On the north are the Beartooth Mountains, presenting a broad elevated Archean mass culminating in some of the highest peaks to be found in Montana; while to the south are the Owl Mountains, consisting of an Archean nucleus capped and for the most part concealed by an arch of Paleozoic beds highly inclined along the outer’ edges. Between these two ranges lies a depressed basin, and resting uncon- formably upon the Archean are sediments of great thickness, derived in large part from the earlier continental areas. These sediments,slowly deposited through- out a long period, represent nearly all the great divisions of Paleozoic and Mesozoic time. Beginning with the Cambrian, in their order of sequence, come the Silurian, Devonian, Trias, Jura and all the epochs of the Cretaceous recognized in Wyoming and Montana including the Dakota, Colo- rado, Montana and the Laramie standstone at the top, with its frequent fluctuations of sea level, foreshadowing changes in the de- velopment of the pre-existing continental area. With the close of the Laramie sandstone the long-continued deposition of Mesozoic and Paleozoic sediments finally came to an end. In this region unconformity of sedi- ments by deposition has not as yet been recognized, and in this sense alone they may be said to be conformable from Middle SCIENCE. 427 Cambrian time to the summit of the Lara- mie. Stupendous orogenic movements took place, and the surrounding country became one of mountain building on a grand scale, accompanied by plication, folding and faulting. The evidence all points in one direction—that this uplifting was con- temporaneous in all the ranges of the northern Rocky Mountains. For this reason, and owing to its great geological significance, being one of the most impor- tant in Rocky Mountain geological history, the uplifting has been designated as the post-Laramie movement. Along the west side of the Absarokas, and lying within the Yellowstone Park, ex- tend north and south ridges of faulted and crumbled strata consisting mainly of highly inclined Cretaceous sandstone, the Laramie, nearly 10,000 feet above present sea level. From this ridge region eastward for fifty miles stretches this broad volcanic mass, finally dying out upon the plain over which the earliest lavas spread, resting on hor- izontal sandstones at an elevation of about 6,000 feet above sea level. After a very considerable erosion of the uplifted Meso- zoic continental land area began the earliest of these volcanic eruptions, which later displayed such marvelous energy over this entire region of country, and which were closely related to the post-Laramie move- ment. This eruptive material, forcing its way upward, followed lines of least resist- ance along or near planes of faulting, or wherever the strain had been greatest upon the weakened strata. The Absaroka Range was formed by the piling-up of successive accumulations of volcanic ejectamenta, with occasional inter- bedded flows of lava, burying everything beneath them to a depth of several thous- and feet. Volcanic breccias, agglomerates and extrusive lavas, or those that have been poured out and cooled near the sur- face, constitute the bulk of the mountains. 428 These breccias and lavas were ejected from numerous fissures, vents and centers of ex- plosive energy. Infinite detail as regards mineral composition and texture, and great complexity in mode of occurrence, may be observed. Viewed in a broad way and re- duced to its simplest terms, the Absaroka Range consists of an uplifted volcanic region, presenting from one end to the other great uniformity, and even simplic- ity, in its main geological features. It is essentially a dissected plateau, deeply trenched by incisive gorges, offering ex- posures varying from 2,000 to 5,000 feet of nearly horizontal or only slightly inclined lavas. To this there are, of course, some exceptions, as is natural in any volcanic region. Notwithstanding the varied and complex manifestations of the eruptive breccias from many sources of outflow, this entire body of extrusive material has been divided broadly into six epochs, based upon their relative age and general sequence of lavas. They represent, in the geological history of the mountains, as many distinct phases of volcanic eruption. Beginning with the earliest in the order of eruption, they have been designated as follows: early acid breccia, early basic breccia, early basalt sheets, late acid breccia, late basic breccia, late basalt sheets. Briefly stated, the interpretation of this history, as I understand it, is somewhat as follows: So far as is known, the oldest volcanic rocks recognized in the Absarokas consist of a series of eruptives made up almost en- tirely of fragmental material, usually light in color, varying from grayish white to purple. In mineral composition they range from hornblende-andesite to hornblende- mica-andesite. Some of the siliceous varie- ties have developed phenocrysts of quartz in sufficient amount to be classed as dacites. These breccias appear to have been thrown out with violent explosive action from nu- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. 1X. No. 221. merous centers, but from none of them was any large amount of material piled up; at least if it was thrown out it was subse- quently worn down by atmospheric agencies. In no instance do they attain great eleva- tion, the exposures being due to extensive erosion and deep trenching of narrow can- yons. They are known only in the northern end of the range, and there in limited area, being buried beneath vast accumulations of still later material. These centers appear to be independent of later eruptions. Overlying these acid breccias is a vast amount of volcanic ejectamenta, with here and there interbedded basaltic flows, the en- tire body having accumulated in many places to a height of several thousand feet. They occur far more widely distributed over the mountains than any other group of breccias, stretching both in its length and breadth from one end of the range to the other. They constitute nearly all the northern portion of the Absarokas, as well as the northeast corner of the Park. Unlike the early acid breccia, they are usually dark colored, owing to the amount of ferro-mag- nesian minerals present. The material consists largely of hornblende-pyroxene- andesite, proxene-andesite and __ basalt. Constant modifications and transitions oc- cur, but over the entire area the prevailing rock is pyroxene-andesite, passing into. slightly less basic rocks carrying horn- blende on the one hand and into basaltic forms on the other. By far the greatest portion of this eruptive material is formed of coarse agglomerates, sombre in color, held together by varying amounts of ce- menting ash and silts of similar composi- tion. The prevailing colors are black and brownish gray, while the finer silts and mud flows free from large bowlders are light brown, in strong contrast to the mass of the breccia. It is difficult to describe in few words such volumes of volcanic material scattered Marcu 24, 1899.] over broad fields and thrown out under varying conditions. Frequently these basic breccias present a rough and ropy surface, like ordinrry scoria irregularly heaped to- gether, but the bulk of it indicates indistinct bedding. A tumultuous heaping-up of ag- glomerate by explosive action characterizes this breccia, which not infrequently carries andesitic and basaltic bowlders. measuring 5 and 6 feet in length and often double that size. In one or two localities huge bowlders of crystalline gneisses and schists are also embedded in the lavas. Scattered over the area occur the thin in- terbedded flows, apparently poured forth from numerous fissures and vents. These flows increased in frequency and thickness until finally massive outflows of basalt cov- ered a considerable portion of the earlier series of breccias. Over how large a field they at one time may have extended cannot now be told, erosion having certainly re- moved them from large tracts, but they may never have been spread over extensive re- gions. It is somewhat curious that this continuous broad field of basalt has a north- west-and-southeast trend and obliquely across the summit of the range from Mirror Plateau to Needle Mountain, whereas the body of the breccia in general has a north-and-south trend. The basalts lie upon the uneven surfaces of the breccia and occur piled up in a succession of flows, which in places near their sources have at- tained an aggregate thickness of 1,500 feet, although over large areas they measure about 1,000 feet, thinning out to a few hun- dred, while in certain places they appear to be wanting. Individual sheets range in thickness from 5 to 50 feet without showing any material change in the physical charac- ters of successive flows. The greatest accu- mulation of flows appears to be along the trend of the basaltic body, thinning out both to the northeast and to the southwest, indicating that the eruptions had followed stretches - SCIENCE. 429 a fissure or system of fissures. Of course, this can be said only in a general way, as basaltic outflows may occur anywhere along the range. As regards mineral composi- tion, they are usually fine grained, with but few well-developed megascopic constituents, mainly augite, olivine and plagioclase. In chemical composition they show within re- stricted limits considerable variation, with accompanying changes in mineral develop- ment, analyses determining a large amount of the alkalies and a correspondingly low percentage of silica. Numbers of these flows have built up, from vents, rounded bosses of basaltic rocks characterized by a development of orthoclase, in several in- stances associated with leucite. They are the extrusive equivalents of intrusive rocks, designated as absarokites in distinction from normal basalts. Reference will be made to them later, in speaking of certain intrusive masses. So far as our present knowledge goes, they belong chiefly to this period of eruptions. Many of these indi- vidual sheets stretch out for long distances, but others show great lack of continuity, thinning and thickening in different direc- tions and often overlapping one another, in- dicating numerous sources of eruption and varying force and duration of flows. In their topograpic configuration the ba- salts stand out in marked contrast to the loosely compacted breccias, owing to great uniformity of flows and to differences in weathering. To these basalts the name early basalt sheets has been given, and they are here treated as a geological unit, since they mark a distinct period in the history of voleanic eruption. It is quite possible, and even probable, that they covered this entire region and were subsequently removed by erosion, but of this there is no direct evi- dence. If they did, the country must at one time have presented a gloomy, sombre field of basalt, poured forth in a molten condition after a long period of fragmental 430 eruptions. How long the basalt period lasted cannot now be told. In determining the sequence of lavas these early basalt fields play an important part, as they over- lie the early series of acid and basic brec- cias and underlie a somewhat similar series of eruptive material designated late acid breccia and late basic breccia and flows. Following the basalts come the late acid breccias. They occur less widely distrib- uted than the early acid breccias, and for the most part lie within the Yellowstone Park. Unlike the earlier breccias, they are less deeply buried beneath later eruptive material, but are piled up in successive layers one upon another, forming the sum- mits of several prominent peaks and broad, plateau-like ridges. Over considerable areas they lie spread out in thin sheets over the basalt flows. Their centers of eruption occupy a restricted area and seem to be in every way quite independent of the earlier breccias and basalts. In mineral composi- tion they closely resemble the early acid breccias, consisting of hornblende-andesite and hornblende-mica-andesite, in places mingled with a good deal of pyroxene- andesite, both augite and hypersthene be- ing recognized, sometimes one and some- times the other predominating. Much of the brecciated material is similar in mineral composition to the Ishawooa intrusive bodies, which will be discussed later. Nearly all of this material is fragmental, and the greater part of it is made up of coarse and fine tuffs. Frequently the con- tact between the light-colored acid breccia and the still later basic breccia is sharply drawn, the latter filling up depressions and levelling the accidented surfaces of the former, which occur at varying altitudes. In most instances the line of demarcation is not so sharply drawn, and not infre- quently there is a mingling of material, as if there had been a pouring-out of the later rock before the complete cessation and SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 22%. closing-up of the more acid centers of eruption. Occasionally these light-colored rocks, from what appear to be local centers, lie directly upon basic breccia made up of basaltic bowlders and cementing tufts of the earlier series, without the intervening basalts. Overlying these acid breccias there poured forth from numerous yents a second great volume of basic rocks and agglomerates, 2,000 to 3,000 feet in thick- ness, bearing a close resemblance to the earlier basic rocks. They are found over the southern portion of the Absarokas, usually resting upon the basalts, the late acid breccias being, as before mentioned, restricted to a limited region of ‘country. Indeed, the second series of breccias forms the top of nearly all the high plateaus and the summits of the more prominent points. Cross-sections exposed in deep canyons re- veal grand escarpments of both breccias, with intervening monotonous sheets of ba- salts. Viewed in a broad way, these two series of breccias are singularly alike, and apparently the conditions governing their eruptions were much the same. If we are to draw any distinctions, it may be said that the early breccias are apt to be sco- raceous and slaggy and more chaotic in their tumultuous accumulation. The later breccia is more regular and distinctly bedded, and is almost wholly made up of both coarse and fine fragmental material, carrying large bowlders that could not have been thrown a great distance from the dis- charging vents. Bowlders weighing a ton or more are by no means uncommon. In general, it may be said of these later brec- cias that the coarsest material lies near the present crest of the range, and is seen to grow finer and more uniform, with distinct bedding, as one travels either east or west. To this rule, however, there are marked exceptions. Following the late basie breccia, basalt tables are found here and there capping the MARkc# 24, 1899. ] crest of the main ridge along the southern portion of the range. Probably they are all remnants of one continuous flow. They are best observed when seen eastward from Mountain Basin, when they present a cas- tellated appearance, capping the coarser and lighter-colored rocks. In general habit they resemble the earlier basalt sheets, and, except for their position, have little to dis- tinguish them from other similar flows. The part they play in the present configura- tion of the plateau is insignificant. The interest lies in the fact that these basalts complete a second cycle of eruption, which built up the Absarokas by the accumula- tion of successive flows of extrusive lavas, and that with them, so far as we have any positive record, the last phase of a long- continued series of eruptions came to a close. That the piling-up of this eruptive ma- terial lasted through a long period of time is clearly established. In the first place, the early acid breccias show evidences of considerable denudation before the pouring- out of later lavas which now occupy the eroded areas. Notinfrequently depressions may be seen filled with water-laid silts and fine gravels, which were afterwards covered by fresh outflows of breccia. Similar water- laid deposits may be observed in all the breccias, but they especially characterize the early basic series along the east side of the range, where the former existence of large lakes and ponds is manifest, with sediments of volcanic material over 200 feet in thickness deposited in comparatively quiet waters. In certain localities the basalts appear to be the result of fitful dis- charge and slow building-up from numer- ous vents. The thinning and thickening of beds in various directions, the overlapping of thin beds from different centers, and the frequently chilled surfaces of vesicular basalt, all point to a slow accumulation of the ejected lava. Occasionally in basaltic SCIENCE. 431 cliffs between lava sheets may be seen thin beds of volcanic sands and gravels, wind- strewn over an exposed surface before be- ing buried beneath fresh flows. Nowhere were interbedded layers of clay or earthy beds of decomposed rock observed, but such deposits are, I think, exceptional in most basalt areas. While the gradual building-up of the plateaus from fresh accumulation was steadily in progress, erosion was constantly at work upon the surface; and, although volcanic fires ceased long ago, erosion has been going on steadily ever since. One of the most remarkable and puzzling features of the country are the areas of undoubted water-worn volcanic material, with its smooth and polished bowlders. Accumu- lations through floods and freshets abound ; and, besides the evidence of ancient lakes and ponds found dotted over the surface, there are strong grounds for the belief that upon the upland existed broad rivers which carried the water-laid material across the plateau to the plain below. All this re- quired a long time for its accomplishment. Turning now to the land vegetation, con- vincing arguments are found not only for determining the age of the rocks, but for demonstrating that the eruptions lasted throughout a long continued period of ac- tivity. It is doubtful if any other known region in the world offers such a promising field of research, showing the relationship between plant life and volcanic eruptions, as is to be found in the Absarokas. In solving these problems the geologist is greatly indebted to the paleobotanist. From time to time extensive collections of fossil plants have been made, indicating a rich and varied flora. Portions of the region have been visited by our distinguished fel- low members, Professor L. F. Ward and Professor F. H. Knowlton. All of the col- lections have been referred to Professor Knowlton, who has made an exhaustive 432 study of the material, and his researches are now in press. For specific determina- tions of these plants I refer you to his mon- ograph. Already over 150 species of plants have been identified. The early acid breccias have yielded a terrestrial vegetation regarded as of earlier age than that obtained from the superim- posed lavas. It has furnished a grouping of species so closely allied to the flora found in the Fort Union beds, near the junction of the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers, that the two floras are regarded as identical in age, and consequently referred to the Kocene period. From these acid breccias eighty species have been identified, and twelve of them were previously only known as belonging to the Fort Union hori- zon. Still others are common to both localities, but are found elsewhere as well. About one-half of the species are new to science, but according to Professor Knowl- ton their biological affinities relate them closely to the Fort Union flora. A second grouping of fossil plants, designated for convenience the intermediate flora, flour- ished at a time when the early acid breccia had about ceased to be emitted; at least they occur near the base of the lower basic breccia in beds indicating a mingling of both types of rock. In all probability they represent a flora which flourished in quies- cent times, during a transition period from one series of eruptions to another, but fore- shadowing a period of basic eruptions. This flora is of the highest geological signifi- ance, since it indicates a great duration of voleanic activity, with a change of cli- matic and physical conditions. This inter- mediate flora embraces about thirty species, of which only two or three are as yet known in the acid breccias. About the same num- ber have been recognized as common to the basic breccias, but the evident affinities of the grouping are such that the flora asa whole is apparently more closely allied to SCIENCE, [N. 8S. Vou. IX. No. 221. the overlying than to the underlying rocks. For this reason it is referred to the base of the Miocene period and is regarded as older than the flora of the auriferous gravels of California. The vegetation which flourished during the period of the basie breccias was, like the breccias themselves, widely distrib- uted over the mountains wherever mud and silts were present to furnish a suitable soil. Nowhere can it be better studied than at the fossil forest of Specimen Ridge, in the Yellowstone Park, first explored by Professor W. H. Holmes over twenty-five years ago. Since that time other localities have been discovered, and quite recently beds holding leaf impressions of a similar flora have been found on the east side of the mountains. At the fossil forest precipitous walls expose nearly 2,000 feet of horizontal beds of breccias, silts and mud flows, in part laid down by floods and freshets and in part deposited by quiet waters. From base to summit at frequent intervals a ter- restrial vegetation has sprung up and flour- ished, only in turn to be destroyed by re- newed lava streams. In one of these buried forests a stump of a still-standing coniferous tree measures 10 feet in diameter and is surrounded by many fallen logs long since preserved by silicification. If one considers the length of time it takes for any vegeta- tion to spring up on an arid lava field and the great age of many of these trees, the time necessary to build up a series of such forests one above another can hardly be overestimated. That there were long periods of rest between the outpourings of the lava seems evident. Throughout this 2,000 feet of erupted material it has been found impossible as yet to discriminate be- tween vegetation found at the base of the cliffs and that interbedded with the lavas at the summit. This implies similar cli- matic conditions during the time demanded to renew and develop a varied flora between Marcu 24, 1899. ] successive layers of tuffs and muds. It may be well to state that all this probably took place before the period of basalt erup- tions. This flora has yielded seventy spe- cies, and is regarded as markedly different from that of the earlier breccia, and of later age. As a grouping it shows the closest affinity to the auriferous gravels of Califor- nia, many of the species being identical, while still others have the closest resem- blance to species found only in the gravels. It has been named the Lamar flora, and referred, like the auriferous gravels, to the upper Miocene period. Both the late acid and the late basic breccias have recently yielded, well-preserved leaf impressions, proving the existence of a more or less luxuriant flora in all the great periods of breccia eruptions. Such fragmentary ma- terial as has been found in these later rocks agrees with plants preserved in the early breccia at Fossil Forest, and, therefore, has been correlated with the Lamar flora of upper Miocene age. It was a vegetation essentially characterized by deciduous foli- age. Several species of magnolias, aralias and other equally important groups which are marked features of the auriferous gravels flourished on these volcanic slopes. Specimens of Aralia notata occur widely dis- tributed, and the leaves of some of them are supposed to have measured 3 feet in length by 2 in breadth. Associated with them are leaves provisionally referred to the genus Artocarpus, indicating the pres- ence of the breadfruit tree. According to Professor Knowlton, this flora is extra- tropical and may be compared in many ways to the vegetation as seen to-day in southern Mississippi and the Gulf coast. He says: ‘It is obvious that the present flora of the Yellowstone National Park has comparatively little relation to the Tertiary flora and cannot be considered as a descend- ant of it. It is also clear that the climatic conditions must have greatly changed. The SCIENCE. Tertiary flora appears to have originated, or at least to have had its affinities, at the south, while the present flora is evidently of northern origin.” On the slopes of Overlook Mountain, in the center of the range, nearly 11,000 feet above the present sea level, occurs a pros- trate log, preserved by silicification, meas- uring 2 feet in diameter at its base. Not far distant other logs are found, and in the silts occur impressions of deciduous leaves. From this locality four species of plants have been determined as identical with species found in the fossil forest, among them an Aralia notata. In a personal communication Professor Ward informs me that in his opinion the flora of this region grew virtually at sea level. While I recognize his eminent authority in such matters, I am hardly pre- pared to accept such a radical view, but I cordially welcome this expression of opin- ion because it in a measure corroborates my own belief that the silts and ashes on which the flora of Overlook Mountain flourished were laid down at a much lower level than that at which they are now found. Briefly summarizing the facts brought out by a study of the fossil flora and their bear- ing upon the geology, it is, I think, indis- putable that the flora affords abundant evi- dence of a great range of Tertiary time during the period of volcanic eruptions, even if geologists do hesitate to accept the pre- cise determinations of the age of the differ- ent floras and their geological sequence. This luxuriant terrestrial vegetation, de- veloped through thousands ‘of feet of lava beds, tends to confirm the view that the accumulation of this erupted material was an exceedingly slow process. Again, the character of the vegetation lends a forcible argument to the belief that the entire region must have been elevated since the develop- ment of so varied an extra-tropical vegeta- tion. For my part, I desire to pay tribute 434 to the great value of the fossil flora as an aid in deciphering the geological history of the Absarokas. Its interest and impor- tance cannot be overestimated. Only brief allusions have been made as yet to the intrusive bodies, although they play a most important part in the build- ing-up of the Absarokas. Although such bodies in the form of dikes probably cut the breccias from time to time, it is clearly evident that all the large intrusions, to- gether with the greater part of the dikes, were forced upward and into the breccias at two well-defined periods of eruption. The first of these periods was in part contem- poraneous with the early basalt flows, and in part followed them. The second fol- lowed the late basic breccia and basalts, and, so far as can be told, completed the final chapter in the geological history of the immediate region. It is possible that later eruptions took place and that the material ejected was removed by erosion, but of this there is no positive record other than a few isolated patches of rhyolite which do not bear directly upon the prob- lems before us and which may be regarded as outliers of the rhyolite of the Park plateau. It does not follow that the in- trusions of either period were contempora- neous in age, but simply that they belong to a certain phase of the eruptive energy. Dikes may cut an earlier series of intru- sives, and subsequently other dikes may intersect those which preceded them. For the purpose of clearly discriminating between these two groups of rocks, the one that followed*the early basic breccia has been named the Sunlight intrusives, from their remarkable exposures along Sunlight Creek and valley, while the later group has been named the Ishawooa intrusives, from the canyon of that name, where the complexity of their occurrences forms one of the most striking features of that impres- sive gorge. In mineral composition the SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. Sunlight intrusives range from a quartz- augite-andesite, through transition forms of syenite and diorite, to orthoclase-gabbro. The large body at the head of Sunlight Creek is mainly a syenite with associated monzonites and diorites. On Closed Creek, in Crandall Basin, the intrusive body con- sists for the most part of orthoclase, gabbro and diorite. The series as a whole shows an association of the minerals augite, plagio- clase and orthoclase, with quartz and biotite in its more siliceous members, and olivine and hypersthene in its basic mem- bers. In general, the Sunlight intrusives are more diversified in chemical composi- tion than those of the Ishawooa group. The latter are more siliceous, carrying less of magnesia and alkalies, and the coarsely crystalline masses are much more like normal diorite, diorite-porphyry, granite, granite-porphyry and andesite-porphyry. Of the Sunlight intrusive bodies the one situated near the source of Sunlight Creek, in the central portion of the range, is the most impressive, and at the same time the most typical in its occurrence. It measures nearly 3 miles in length and occupies the basins of all the deep glacial amphitheatres on the north side of Stinkingwater River, while all the high intervening ridges sepa- rating the basins consist of indurated breccia. Similar rocks are exposed in the Silvertip Basin, on the south side of the peak, and in all probability they form part of one continuous body. The Crandall Basin stock, under Hur- ricane Mesa, exposed by the erosion of Closed Creek, has far less lateral ex- pansion, but rises for nearly 3,000 feet above its base. Dikes radiate from all the large intrusive bodies, but nowhere else is their number so great and the part they play so strongly marked as in the region of the Sunlight stock. These dikes are by no means all connected with the large stocks seen at the surface, but may be observed in Marcu 24, 1899.7 great force at a number of localities in the early breccia along the east side of the range, far removed from any recognized crystalline body. Wherever these early breccias occur dikes are apt to be a marked feature of the country, in contradistinction to the country occupied by the latter breccias. These dikes consist mainly of orthoclase basalts, which Professor Iddings, from his microscopical studies, has divided into ab- sarokites, shoshonites and banakites, de- pending upon their varying mineral and chemical composition. In the field it seems impossible as yet to differentiate between them, and so far as can be told they present the same mode of occurrence. For most geological purposes they may be grouped together under the general term of absaro- kites. They form a connecting link be- tween many of the eruptions in the early basalt sheets and the Sunlight intrusives. They are closely related to the syenites and monzonites of the Sunlight intrusive stock. Both these dikes and sheets occur over ex- tensive areas. Leaving for the present the Sunlight in- trusives, let us take up the Ishawooa in- trusives, which I select in order the more easily to bring out in detail certain facts bearing upon the origin of both types of in- trusive rocks. Of the many intrusive bodies, Needle Mountain, in the southern end of the Absarokas, is the most imposing and instructive of them all. At the base runs the Shoshone River, through one of the most rugged and picturesque canyons to be found in northern Wyoming. This great stock, which stretches along the val- ley for nearly four miles, rises abruptly 4,000 feet above the stream bed, from an elevation of 7,000 feet above sea level. It is overlain by 1,000 feet of partially in- durated and metamorphosed breccia. From the rounded summit of this commanding peak the breccias may be seen stretching far to the west on the opposite canyon wall, SCIENCE. 435 thence across Thoroughfare Plateau and on to the higher regions of Wind River Plateau, where they lie nearly horizontal at an elevation approximately the same as that of Needle Mountain itself. Upon this latter plateau the Shoshone River finds its sources, and in its rapid descent of 5,000 feet before reaching Needle Mountain ex- poses large, irregular stocks of indefinite outline piercing the breccias. Looking eastward from Needle Moun- tain, the breccias extend as far as the eye can reach in the direction of the broad, open plain beyond. The massive stock of Needle Mountain consists essentially of diorite, quartz-diorite and diorite-porphyry, cut by numerous narrow dikes of appar- ently differentiated products of the same molten magma. Offshoots and apophyses from the parent stock pierce the surround- ing breccia, and a number of small dikes penetrate the overlying breccia. From these dikes sheets of granite-porphyry stretch out into the breccias, and on the spurs of the mountain erosion has worn them bare, leaving them exposed as the surface rock. The stock is found on the opposite side of the canyon, rising high above the stream and capped by the ever- present breccia. Bordering the diorite stock the breccias are indurated, crushed, and so altered that not infrequently it is impossible to discriminate between breccias and intrusive stocks without the aid of the microscope. Dr. Jaggar has shown that many of these fine-grained rocks are al- tered mud and silts and metamorphosed breccias. From Needle Mountain to Mount Chit- tenden, in the Yellowstone Park, a dis- tance of over fifty miles, there extends in a northwest direction a remarkable and probably a continuous belt of intrusive rocks. These intrusive bodies occur: as stocks, sheets, bosses and dikes, varying from irregular-shaped masses of stupen- 456 dous proportions, two and three miles in width and several thousand feet in height, to narrow dikes and seams traceable along the canyon walls for only a few feet and often disconnected at the surface from any other body. A short distance north of Needle Mountain, but on the opposite side of the canyon, another great stock rises precipitously above the stream bed, and it is clearly evident that its rela- tion to the breccias are in every way similar to those observed at Needle Moun- tain. Between these two massive bodies smaller outcrops of diorite and diorite- porphyry are exposed in lateral ravines on the mountain sides, and the network of dikes trending in every direction points conclusively to the fact that these intrusive bodies belong to one and the same stock. Dislocated and indurated bodies of breccia are found upon the mountain spurs, but the overlying capping of breccia peacefully crowns it all. From this point northward, following along the line of the powerful intrusions, each dissecting canyon, where it cuts the in- trusive masses, lays bare numerous expo- sures of crystalline rocks which have forced their way upward into the breccias, and, following lines of least resistance, have spread out in all directions with a marvel- ous complexity of form and outline. Some of the stocks penetrating the breccia have attained elevations slightly above the pres- ent level of the plateau, but most of them failed to reach so high a position. Wherever they have reached the top of the plateau their tendency is to spread out in sheets, which now form the exposed surface of spurs and ridges. Many of these inter- bedded sheets are directly connected with some of the larger stocks, but others show no such relationship at the surface and stand out quite independently of them. Oc- casionally the sheets bulge up with irreg- ular outline; others are dome-shaped, de- SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. 1X. No. 221. veloping laccolithic form. Vertical dikes cutting the interbedded breccias pass into sheets, and later again assume the condi- tions of normal vertical dikes. The vari- able character of the breccia, sometimes compact and uniform and at others made up of an incoherent mass of silts and ash, tends to constant change in the upward movement of the molten magma. The gorges of both Cabin Creek and Can- yon Creek expose similar rocks, with ac- companying phenomena of strain and rup- ture. Ishawooa Canyon, one of the most rugged of these incisive trenches, presents varied modifications of eruptive energy, a bold stock, Clouds Home, piercing the brec- cias with an irregular outline from the bottom of the canyon to the top of the plateau. One of the finest examples of a massive interbedded sheet extends for a mile or more along the canyon wall. Sim- ilar phenomena present themselves in Wapiti Canyon, where four tributary streams, uniting to make the river, have cut down in the intrusive masses in a most instructive manner. Near the sources of Eagle Creek diorite and andesite-porphyry are again laid bare, and thenee, trending across the crest of the range, extend as far as Sylvan Pass, where coarsely crystalline diorite and diorite-porphyries come to the surface for the last time in an exposure nearly a mile in length. Beyond this point eruptive energy gradually dies out, and is only shown by the presence of a few power- ful dikes noticeable for their uniformity and persistency. ( A distinctive feature along this entire line of intrusive rock is the belt of indurated breccia which accompanies it. Near the larger stocks the alteration of the breccia is especially noticeable, and not infre- quently it is difficult to discriminate be- tween the stock masses and the metamor- phosed material. The mode of weathering is so unlike that of the ordinary breccia, Marcu 24, 1899. ] and the transitions are so gradual, that it is by no means easy to define the outlines of the intrusive masses without personal in- spection. Although never haying been followed as a continuous body, owing to the nature of the topography, the zone of induration is one of the marked features of the region, and under favorable conditions may be traced in the canyon walls for fifty miles, with a width in places of more than one-half mile. Another important and significant feature is the inclination of the breccias away from some well-defined axis or central ridge. They do not as a rule arch over any single powerful protrusion, but present every indication of a broad anticlinal structure, with the piled-up lavas inclined toward the west and southwest on one side and toward the east and northeast on the other. Between the more massive bodies that have been forced upward to elevations above the general level there may be found areas of indurated breccia, traversed by a labyrinth of dikes and veins in their efforts to force their way upward. Without entering into petrographic de- tails, a few words in addition to what has already been said seem necessary. Granites and diorites are seldom met with other than in connection with the large uniform stocks. As most of these stocks are only partially exposed, their volume can only be a matter of conjecture, but in all the larger bodies, such as Needle Mountain, the rock is essentially that of a medium-grained diorite or diorite-porphyry. A true granitic structure is by no means uncommon. Most of the powerful intrusions, as regards their crystalline structure, may be classed as granular. The great bulk of these crystal- line rocks apparently carry some little groundmass. Porphyritic structure, with little groundmass, is a characteristic feature, with transitions into andesite-porphyry and andesite. Many similar bodies of indefinite outline, only partially exposed by erosion SCIENCE. 437 of the canyon walls, areandesites. Indeed, all the relatively small bodies are andesitic in habit, and the same is true of the many outlying bodies away from the general north- west-southeast trend of the intruded rocks. A field study of these rocks of vary- ing degrees of crystallization shows clearly that they were all exposed to virtually the same degree of pressure of overlying rock, and that their structural differences were not dependent primarily upon pressure from above. Many of these andesitic masses are much smaller than the diorite bodies and occur at much lower levels below the superimposed load. All observations upon the geological relations of these in- trusives to the breccias tend to show that their structural differences are dependent far more upon the chilling effect of the sur- rounding rock and the rate of cooling than upon the pressure of the overlying rock. Geologists and petrographers have been for a long time investigating the structural differences and mineral variations of igneous rocks. Of these philosophical investigators Professor Iddings stands in the foremost rank. Juan exhaustive petrographic study of the Crandall Basin intrusive body and its complex system of radial dikes of vary- ing composition he reaches the conclusion that they have all been derived from the same parent molten magma, but crystal- lized under different conditions. With this conclusion I heartily agree. Dr. Jaggar, who has been at work upon a petrograph- ical study of the intrusive rocks of the rest of the Absaroka Range, has reached a similar conclusion as regards the Ishawooa intrusive stock and associated sheets and dikes, and believes that they were derived from a common molten magma, which is quite in accord with geological observations in the field. From these observations, thus briefly and imperfectly stated, the conclusion seems inevitable that the Isha- wooa intrusive, for its entire length of fifty 438 miles, represents a continuous ridge, the result of the consolidation of a molten magma intruded into the breccias. Erosion has as yet laid bare only the more elevated portions and some of the connecting links. If a trained geologist were to stand on any one of the more prominent points in the Absarokas his attention would, first of all, be attracted by the vast amount of frag- mental ejectamenta lying with apparent horizontality in every direction. Closer observation would impress him with the bedded nature of much of this material and the action which running water had played in disintegrating the lava and rounding the andesitic and basaltic bowlders. If, by chance, he had acquainted himself with the huge stocks exposed in the canyons, know- ing the power of dense crystalline rocks to withstand atmospheric agencies better than the easily disintegrating breccias, he would be surprised to find that none of the larger ones towered above the plateau in com- manding peaks. At one or two localities they attain the present level of the plateau, but do not rise much above it, and usually give evidence of the dying out of the energy which forced the magmaupward. As these intrusive stocks are overlain by breccia sometimes 1,000 feet in thickness, it is diffi- cult to see how they ever could have been centers of powerful extrusive eruption. In an address delivered before the British Association for the Advancement of Science in September, 1893, Professor Iddings took the ground that the Crandall Basin stock was the core of a grand volcano, from which issued the breccias, silts and tuffs which have built up the north end of the range, while the gabbros and diorites repre- sent the coarsely crystalline development of that portion of the magma which cooled at great depths beneath the surface. He re- constructed a voleano to a height of 10,000 feet above the plateau, and subsequently re- moved by erosion every vestige of the SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. volcano down to the summit of Hurricane Mesa, the present level of the plateau. He likens it, in magnitude and in the processes by which it was built up, to the volcanoes of Autna and Vesuvius. An abstract of the address was. published in the Journal of Geology for September and October, 1893, and in a forthcoming report on the geology of the Yellowstone National Park a detailed description of the Crandall stock will be found, together with the results of his ad- mirable petrographic studies of the rocks, to which allusion has already been made. After what has been said, it seems hardly necessary to add that with these geological views of Professor Iddlings I do not agree. My interpretation of the history of this re- gion may possibly call forth the friendly criticism that this address is an account of the early Tertiary volcanoes of the Ab- sarokas with the volcanoes left out. For such criticism there may be some slight ground ; but, while I fail to see any evi- dence of the building-up of such volcanic piles as Vesuvius and /Mtna, or, as I should prefer to put it, volcanoes of the type of Rainier, Hood or Shasta, there was dis- played intense explosive energy accom- panied by immense volumes of steam and the piling-up of a vast block of lavas from many centers of activity. Instances of such explosive energy may be seen at Chaos Mountain, but the material thrown out yielded readily to atmospheric agencies and soon became spread out over the entire re- gion. The whole area of the late acid brec- cia suggests several powerful vents for the ejectment of fragmental material and the partial wearing-away of mounds and ridges of the heaped-up accumulations. It is pos- sible that before the Sunlight and Ishawooa intrusives were forced upward volcanoes existed, but that any one or two of them dominated the region and influenced the topographical configuration of the Absaro- kas is exceedingly doubtful. There is noth- Marcu 24, 1899.] ing to indicate the characteristic slopes of a great voleano. Within the Yellowstone Park and just west of the Absarokas occurs a fine example of a voleano, situated near the intersection of the prolongation of the Ishawooa intru- sive body and the fault along the southern slope of the Snowy Range. Mount Wash- burne is the culminating point of the vol- cano, which consists almost wholly of fragmental early basic breccia. From a well-recognized crater, since partially filled with rhyolite, the erupted material has been thrown out in every direction, building up true voleanic slopes encircling a central dis- charging vent. Such a structure I have never been able to recognize in the Absa- rokas. Mount Sheridan, in the Park, is an- other large volcano, but this is a Pliocene eruption consisting wholly of rhyolite, and is one of the sources of the great body of rhyolite which built up the Park plateau probably long after the Absarokas ceased to be a center of volcanic action. Of all known regions of eruptive energy within historical times, Iceland in many ways affords the best field for comparison of the voleanic phenomena of to-day with conditions as they existed during the early Tertiary time in the Absarokas. Iceland is one of the active centers of eruption on a stupendous scale. It offers a continuous voleanic history throughout Pleistocene time, and dates back to the early Miocene, as is indicated by its fossil flora. In early Tertiary time the island was a region of profound faulting, and it is supposed to have been separated from the mainland during that period. Dr. Thoroddsen, the Icelandic geologist, has published in Euro- pean scientific journals most interesting accounts of his explorations over the less- known regions of the island. The most complete and instructive of these accounts which has come to my attention was pub- lished by the Stockholm Society of Science SCIENCE. 439 in 1888. Notwithstanding the volcanoes of majestic proportions which contribute so much to the scenic grandeur of Iceland, and which must give to all geologists who have seen them a profound sense of the power of volcanic energy, Dr. Thoroddsen, who has lived among them, protests against the idea that they were built up like Vesu- vius or Aitna. He says: ‘‘The vast lava waste of Odadahraun was produced by the eruption of over twenty volcanoes, and per- haps many of the oldest centers of eruption that contributed to the formation of this desert Lave become obliterated by later lava streams. When one recalls geological text-book descriptions of modern volcanoes and their activity, it is nearly always Vesu- vius that everywhere turns up like a spectre, whereas the regular voleanic cone composed of alternating lavas and tuffs is rather rare in Iceland.” The country which he is describing may be about one-half the size of the Absaroka Range, but I have no maps or accurate data for determining the area. Again, later, he says: ‘Only a few old volcanoes are found having this form. In Iceland it is very gen- erally found that the fissure has not given rise to the formation of any real volcano. The lava there has sometimes welled out along the entire length of the fissure with- out the formation of a crater, but mostly there has been formed a series of low slag cones at the points where the magna, by reason of the form of the fissure or for some other cause, found it easiest to break forth. Such rows of craters are found in all vol- canic regions of Iceland.’”’ Another notice- able feature, even in the active regions of Iceland, is the ease with which sources of eruption may become obliterated by fresh flows from neighboring vents of discharge. According to Dr. Thoroddsen the famous Heckla itself is a long ridge built up by a chain of small craters along a line of fissure. Sir Archibald Geikie, in his admirable 440) work on the Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain, in comparing the voleanic phenom- ena of the Icelandic eruptions with those exhibited by the basalt plateaus of the British Isles, remarks: ‘It is, therefore, to the Icelandic types of fissure eruption, and not to great central composite cones, like Vesuvius or Avtna, that we must look for the modern analogies that would best serve as commentary and explanation for the latest chapter in the long voleanic history of the British Isles.” In comparing volcanic areas of Iceland with the phenomena exhibited in the Ab- saroka Range there is one striking differ- ence to be noted. In the former thé ex- travasated molten magma consists largely of basaltic flows, while in the latter one is constantly impressed by the enormous amount of brecciated rock emitted. It is estimated that four-fifths of these extrusive rocks which make up the range consist of coarse and fine breccias, silts and related ejectamenta. Dead Indian Peak, one of the dominating points of the range, rises more than 6,000 feet above the valley, pre- senting layers of breccia which in the ag- gregate measure nearly one mile in thick- ness. It is a very conservative estimate to place the volume of breccia at one-half mile in thickness over the entire region under discussion, which, it should be remembered, embraces not much less than 4,000 square miles. This only allows for erosion an amount equal to the highest plateau sum- mit, but it is sufficient to give one an idea of its vast bulk. That the denudation from the top of the existing plateau was very considerable is unquestioned, but there exist, I think, no reliable data upon which to base even an approximate estimate of the amount. Possibly the country was at one time covered with a mantle of basalt, which, withstanding erosion, would, of course, protect the friable volcanic material throughout a long period. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 221. It is evident that the granular rocks re- quired for their uniform crystallization an overlying load of greater or less depth. For my own part, 1am more or less skeptical as to the need of an immense thickness of over- lying material to develop such uniform con- solidation as is generally supposed to be necessary to produce the so-called plutonic rocks. At Needle Mountain the medium- grained granular diorite for the entire 4,000 feet of rock face is apparently the same throughout, whereas only a short distance from the mass and ata lower level small bodies of rock in cooling have developed a characteristic andesitic structure. It must be borne in mind that all this material, of varied mineral composition, grouped together under the designation of breccias, was congealed and crystallized be- fore it was hurled out by explosive action. This means stupendous crushing and crunching of the mass as it was forced up- ward, and disturbances of the first magni- tude, which must have had their origin in great crustal movements. Whence came this enormous mass of brecciated rock ? Twice during the long period of their eruptions these breccias had been vaded by enormous bodies of granular rock which had elevated the entire Absaroka Range, an elevation that was phenomenal in its nature and formed a part of the great series of orogenic movement which uplifted the northern Cordillera. This uplift was closely related to the post-Laramie move- ment, which was one of the most profound and far-reaching orogenic disturbances any- where recognized by geologists. Throughout this address the large in- dividual protrusions into the breccia have been alluded to as stocks, but I regard them as the more elevated portions of a great complex of crystalline rocks under- lying at least a large part of this region of country. Where the underlying molten magma was subjected to the severest pres- in- MARCH 24, 1899. | sure the material was squeezed upward to higher levels, following lines of least resist- ance, and consolidated at greater or less depths beneath the surface. This upward movement was probably coincident with the crustal movements that elevated the entire Absaroka Range. +The line of Ishawooa intrusives marks the trend of one such up- ward movement of molten magma, which for the most part congealed without finding egress to the surface. That a portion of the magma may have been pushed upward through fissures and vents and discharged as surface flows of andesite is possible, but of such flows, if they existed, no positive evidence remains. Conditions somewhat similar to those found in the Absarokas are described by Pro- fessor Adolph Stelzner as occurring in the Andes of Argentina. He describes granites, diorties and syenites as penetrating the andesitic tuffs and lavas of Tertiary age, and as cooling under a heavy load of superim- posed material. He does not regard these massive crystalline bodies as conduits of vol- canoes, but as large stocks formed independ- ently of such vents. He refers to them as taking part in the great orogenic uplift which elevated the Cordillera of South America, an uplift which began in Jurassic time, lasted through the Mesozoic, and continued through the greater part of the Tertiary. In the discussions of voleanic phenomena found throughout geological literature, cir- cular vents of great depth seem to be re- garded as indispensable and are supposed to furnish an open door for the molten mag- mas, permitting them to take a straight shoot from the eternal depths to daylight. In this way geologists certainly avoid many perplexing physical problems which con- front us in the case of stocks and laccoliths penetrating sedimentary rocks and stopping far short of the surface. In speaking of areas of igneous rocks, one almost hesitates to use the term laccoliths, so universally is SCIENCE. 441 it referred to in its relation to sedimentary rocks. For my part, it seems far more reasonable to look for such intrusive bodies in areas of igneous rock than in regions of sedimentation. That large intrusive bodies came to a standstill without any surficial manifestations, in the Absarokas, is, I think, fairly well determined. Two years ago it was my good fortune to cross the Cascade Range at a number of localities and to climb far above timber line _ the slopes of Mount Rainier, in Washing- ton; Mount Hood, in Oregon, and Mount Shasta, in California. From these com- manding points comprehensive panoramic views were obtained over a broad field of igneous rock. Majestic and impressive as are these volcanoes, and grand in their iso- lation, I could but feel that back of them all lay earlier chapters in the Tertiary his- tory of voleanic energy on the Pacific side of the Cordillera ; that these powerful vol- canoes were but a late expression of the intensity of the eruptive energy, and that still earlier volcanic masses had in some way taken part in the orogenic disturbances of an earlier Tertiary time. So, on the east side of the great Cordillera, the early Tertiary fires long since ceased to glow in the Absarokas, and the center of volcanic energy moved westward and built up on different lines the broad rhyolite plateau of the Yellowstone Park, a plateau strongly contrasted with the Absarokas in the al- most entire absence of breccias. The work of such investigators as Emmons and Cross in Colorado and Weed and Pirsson in Mon- tana is slowly but surely solving the prob- lems of the post-Cretaceous uplift in the northern Cordillera, and, it will, I think, finally be shown that the crystalline rocks consolidated below the surface have played an important part in bringing about the Cordilleran revolution. On a bright crisp autumnal day in 1897 I left the Absarokas by the way of that 442 most interesting of valleys, Clark’s Fork of the Yellowstone, still impressed with the many unsolved problems connected with the geology of the range. JI at first visited the region in the expectation of finding a partially submerged range of Paleozoic and Mesozoic sediments. If ever such range existed, it had completely disappeared by profound subsidence. I then looked for the roots of some powerful dominating volcano which had been the source of the varying breccias, but this also I failed to discover. In its stead, if I interpret the facts cor- rectly, I found penetrating the breccias the towering domes and pinnacles of granular and porphyritic rocks, which in some far- distant day, when denudation has removed a greater part of the overlying mass, may be found to form one connected body which erosion has already so far laid bare as to indicate that they all form a part of one broad complex of coarsely crystalline rock of early Tertiary age. ARNOLD HAGUE. U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, WASHINGTON, D. C. THE PHYSIOLOGICAL BASIS OF LIFE.* Ir we demand a physiological process cor- responding to every possible variation of the content of consciousness the structure of the brain seems far too uniform to furnish a sufficient manifoldness of functions. The mere number of elements cannot be de- cisive ; if they are all functionally coordi- nated they can offer merely the basis for co- ordinated psychical functions. If we have psychical functions of different orders it would not help us even if we had some millions more of the uniform elements. It would be useless to deny that here exists a great difficulty for our present psychology ; the only question is whether this difficulty really opposes the demands and supposi- MENTAL *Read before the joint meeting of the Psycho- logical Association and the Physiologicai Society. SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. tions of psychophysical parallelism or whether it means that the usual theories of to-day are inadequate and must be im- proved. It seems to me that the latter is the case, and that hypotheses can be con- structed by which all demands of psychology ean be satisfied without the usual sacrifice of consistency. The situation is the follow- ing: The whole scheme of the physiologists operates to-day in a manifoldness of two dimensions: they think the conscious phe- nomena as dependent upon brain excite- ments which can vary firstly with regard to their localities and secondly with regard to their quantitative amount. These two variations then correspond to the quality of the mental element and to its intensity. In the acoustical center, for instance, the dif- ferent pitch of the tone sensations corre- sponds to locally different ganglion cells, the different intensities of the same tone sensation to the quantity of the excitement. Association fibers whose functions are not directly accompanied by conscious experi- ences connect these millions of psychophys- ical elementary centers in a way which is imagined on the model of the peripheral nerve. No serious attempt has been made to transcend this simple scheme. Certainly recent have brought many propositions to replace the simple physio- logical association fiber which connects the psychophysical centers by more complicated systems—theories, for instance, in regard to the opening and closing of the connecting paths or in regard to special association cen- ters or special mediating cell groups—but these and others stick to the old principle that the final psychophysical process corre- sponds to the strength and locality of a sensory stimulation or of its equivalent re- production, whatever may have brought about and combined the excitements. Tt is true that it has been sometimes sug- gested that the same ganglion cell may go discussions Manrcn 24, 1899. ] over also into qualitatively different states of excitement, and thus allow an unlimited manifoldness of new psychophysical varia- tions. But it is clear that to accept such an hypothesis means to give up all the ad- vantages of brain localization. The com- plicatedness of the cell would be in itself sufficient to give ground to the idea that its molecules may reach some millions of dif- ferent local combinations, and if every new combination corresponds to a sensation all the tones and colors and smells and many other things may go on in one cell. But, then, itis,of course,our duty to explain those connections and successions of different states in one cell, and that would lead to thinking the cell itself as constructed with millions of paths just like a miniature brain; in short, all the difficulties would be trans- planted into the unknown structure of the cell. If we, on the other hand, do not enter into such speculations the acceptance of qualitive changes in the cell would bring us to the same point as if we were satisfied to speak of qualitative changes of the brain in general. It would not solve the problem, but merely ignore it, and, therefore, such an, additional hypothesis cannot have weight. The only theory which brings in a really new factor is the theory of innervation feelings. This well-known theory claims that one special group of conscious facts, namely, the feelings of effort and impulse, are not sensations and, therefore, not par- allel to the sensory excitements, but are activities of consciousness and parallel to the physiological innervation of a central motor path. Atthis point, of course, comes in at once the opposition of the philo- sophical claim that every psychical fact must be a content of consciousness, and made up of sensations, that is, of possible elements of idea, to become describable and explainable at all. The so-called active consciousness, the philosopher must hold, has nothing to do with an activity of the SCIENCE. 445 consciousness itself, as consciousness means, from the psychological standpoint, only the kind of existence of psychical objects. It cannot do anything, it cannot have differ- ent degrees and functions, it only becomes conscious of its contents, and all variations are variations of the content, which must be analyzed without remainder into ele- ments which are theoretically coordinated with the elements of ideas, that is, with the sensations, while consciousness is only the general condition for their existence. But also the empirical analysis and experiment of the practical psychologist are in this case in the greatest harmony with such philo- sophical claims and opposed to the innerva- tion theory. The psychologist can show empirically that this so-called feeling of effort is merely a group of sensations like other sensations, reproduced joint and muscle sensations which precede the action and have the réle of representing the im- pulse merely on account of the fact that their anticipation makes inhibitory associa- tions still possible. It would thus from this point of view also be illogical to think the psychophysical basis of these sensations different in principle from that of other sen- sations. If the other sensations are accom- paniments of sensory excitements in the brain the feelings of impulse cannot claim an exceptional position. But are quality and intensity really the only differences between the given sensa- tions? Can the whole manifoldness of the content of consciousness really be deter- mined by variations in these two directions only? Certainly not; the sensations can vary even when quality and intensity re- main constant. Asan illustration we may think, for instance, of one variation which is clearly not to be compared with a change in kind and strength of the sensation ; namely, the variation of vividness. Vivid- ness is not identical with intensity ; the vivid impression of a weak sound and the 444 unvivid impression of a stronge”sound are in ho way interchangeable. If the ticking of the clock in my room becomes less and less vivid for me the more I become absorbed in my work, till it finally disappears, it can- not be compared with the experience which results when the clock to which I give my full attention is brought farther and farther away. The white impression, when it loses vividness, does not become gray and finally black, nor the large size small, nor the hot lukewarm. Vividness is a third di- mension in the system of psychiéal’ eles ments, and the psychologist who postulates complete parallelism has the right to de- mand that the physiologist show the cor responding process. .There are other sides of the sensation for which the same is true ; they share with vividness the more subjec- tive character of the variation, as, for in- stance, the feeling tone of the sensation or its pastness and presentness. Other varia- tions bring such subjective factors into the complexes of sensations without a possibility of understanding them. from the combina- tion of different kinds only ; for instance, the subjective shade of ideas we believe or the abstractedness of ideas in logical thoughts. In short, the sensations and their combinations show besides kind, strength and vividness still other varia- tions which may best be called the values of the sensations and of their complexes. Is the typical theory of modern physiolog- ical psychology, which, as we have seen, operates merely with the local differences of the cells and the quantitative differences of their excitement, ever able to find physio- logical variations which correspond to the vividness and to the values of the sensa- tions? An examination without prejudice must necessarily deny this question. Here lies the deeper spring for the latent opposition which the psychophysiological claims find in modern psychology. Here are facts, the SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 221: opponents say, which find no physiological counterpart, and we must, therefore, ac- knowledge the existence of psychological processes which have nothing to do with the physiological machinery. The vividness, for instance, is fully explained if we accept the view that the brain determines the kind and strength of the sensation, while a phys- iologically independent subject turns the attention more or less to the sensation. The more this attention acts the more vivid the sensation ; in a similar way the subjec- tive acts would determine the feeling tone of the sensation by selection or rejection, and so on. » While the usual theory reduces all to the mere association of locally sepa- rated excitements, such a theory thus emphasizes the view that the physio- logically determined functions must be sup- plemented by an apperceiving subject which takes attitudes. We may call the one the association theory, the other the appercep- tion theory. We have acknowledged that the association theory is insufficient to solve the whole problem, but it is hardly neces- sary to emphasize that the apperception theory seeks the solution from the start in a logically impossible direction, and is thus still more mistaken than the association theory. The apperception theory, whatever its special label and make-up may be, does not see that the renunciation of a physiological basis for every psychical fact means resign- ing the causal explanation altogether, as psychical facts as such cannot be linked directly by causality, and that resigning the causal aspect means giving up the only point of view which comes in question for the psychologist. If those apperceptive functions are seriously conceived without physiological basis they represent a mani- foldness which can be linked merely by the teleological categories of the practical life, and we sink back to the subjectifying view which controls the reality of life, but which MAnRrcH 24, 1899. ] is in principle replaced by the objectifying view as soon as the experience of the sub- ject is acknowledged as a series of psycho- logical objects. But does this bankruptcy of all varieties of apperception theories necessarily force us back to the association theory? I do not think so. The demand of the association theory that every psychosis should be ac- companied by a neurosis cannot be given up, but this neurosis may be thought in a richer way than in the scheme of the asso- ciationists. It seems to me, indeed, that the physiological theory works to-day with an abstract scheme with which no observa- tion agrees. We do not know of a cen- tripetal stimulation which does not go over into centrifugal impulses. The studies on tonicity and actions of voluntary muscles, on the functions of glands and blood vessels, on tendon reflex centers, and so on, show how every psychophysical state discharges itself into centrifugal functions. And yet these perceivable peripheral effects are, of course, merely a small part of the centrif- ugal impulses which really start from the end stations of the sensory channel, as most of them probably produce only new disposi- tions in lower motor centers without going directly over into movement, and others may fade away in the unlimited division of the discharge in the ramification of the sys- tem. Those milliards of fibers are not merely the wires to pull a few hundred muscles ; no, the centrifugal system repre- sents certainly a most complex hierarchy of motor centers too, and the special final mus- cle impulse is merely the last outcome of a very complex cooperation of very many fac- tors in the centrifugal system. Manifoldas the incoming nerve currents must be, thus, also the possibilities of centrifugal dis- charge, and the dispositions in the nervous motor system determine the degrees in which the ganglion cells can transform the centripetal into centrifugal stimulation. It SCIENCE. 445 is thus not only the foregoing sensory pro- cess, but in exactly the same degree also the special situation of the motor system, its openness and closedness, which governs the process in the center. Whether the special efferent channel is open or plugged implies absolutely different central processes in spite of the same afferent stimulus. Here we have, then, a new factor on the physiological side which is ignored in the usual scheme that makes the psychical facts dependent upon the sensory processes only and considers the centrifugal action of the brain as a later effect which begins when the psychophysical function is over. There is no central sensory process which is not the beginning of an action too, and this cen- trifugal part of the central process neces- sarily varies the accompanying psychical fact also. As here the action of the center becomes the essential factor in the psycho- physical process, we may call this view an action theory as over against the association and apperception theories of the day. ‘The action theory agrees, then, with the asso- ciationism in the postulate that there is no psychical variation without variation on the physiological side and with the appercep- tionism in the conviction that the mere as- sociation of sensory brain processes is in- sufficient to play the counterpart to the subjective variation of the psychical facts as vividness and values of the sensations. Tt tries to combine the legitimate points in both views, and claims that every psychical sensation as element of the content of con- sciousness is the accompaniment of the physical process by which a centripetal stim- ulation becomes transformed into a centrif- ugal impulse. This central process thus clearly depends upon four factors: firstly, upon the local situation of the sensory track ; secondly, upon the quantitative amount of the in- coming current; thirdly, upon the local situation of the outgoing discharge ; and 446 fourthly, upon the quantitative amount of the discharge. The first two factors are, of course, determined by the incoming current, which can be replaced by an intracortical stimulation from an associated center, while the last two factors are determined by the dispositions of the centrifugal system. The association theory, which considers the first two factors alone, thinks them parallel to the kind and strength of the sensation. The action theory accepts this interpretation and adds that the two other factors determine the values and the vividness of the sensation—the values par- allel to the local situation of the discharge, the vividness to the openness of the cen- trifugal channel, and thus to the intensity of the discharge. If the centrifugal discharge is inhibited, the channel closed, then the sensory process goes on as before, but the impression is un- vivid, unperceived, while it may become vivid later as soon as the hindrance of the discharge disappears. The inhibition of ideas which remains unexplainable to the associationists would then mean that a special path of discharge is closed, and thus the idea which needs that discharge for its vividness cannot come to existence; the hypnotizer’s words, for instance, close such channels. Only discharges, actions, can be antagonistic and thus under mutual inhibi- tion ; ideas in themselves may be logically contradictory, but not psychologically, while one action makes the antagonistic action, in- deed, impossible, and the inhibition of ideas results merely from the inhibition of dis- charges. If this view is correct it is clear that while we strictly deny the existence of special innervation sensations we can now say that every sensation without excep- tion is physiologically an innervation sensa- tion, as it must have reached some degree of vividness to exist psychologically at all. With regard to the local situation of the motor discharge the manifoldness of pos- SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. LX. No. 221. sibilities is evident. The channels may be closed in one direction, but open in others ; the actually resulting discharge must be the product of the situation in the whole cen- trifugal system, with its milliards of rami- fications, and the same sensory stimulus may thus under a thousand different condi- tions produce a thousand different centrifu- gal waves, all, perhaps, with the same in- tensity. The vividness would then be always the same, and yet the difference of locality in the discharge must give new features to the psychical element. A few cases as illustrations must be sufficient. We may instance the shades of time-direc- tion ; the same idea may have the subjec- tive character of past, present and future. It corresponds to three types of discharge : the discharge which does not include action on the object any more appears as past ; that which produces action as present, and that which prepares the action as future. In this group belong also the feeling tones: the pleasurable shade of feeling based on the discharge towards the extensors ; the un- pleasant feelings based on the innervation of the flexors. Here belong the differences between mere perception and apperception, as in the one case the discharge is deter- mined by the impression alone, in the other case by associations also. Here belong the characteristics of the abstract concep- tion which may be represented by the same sensational qualities which would form a concrete idea and yet has a new subjective tone because the cen- trifugal discharge is for the concrete idea a specialized impulse, for the conception a general impulse which would suit all objects thought under the conception. Here be- longs, also, the feeling of belief which characterizes the judgment; the judgment differs psychophysically from the mere idea in the fact that the ideas discharge them- selves in a new tonicity, a new set of the lower motor centers, creating thus a new MARcH 24, 1899. ] disposition for later reactions. To be sure, many of these discharges lead finally to muscle contractions which bring with them centripetal sensations from the joints, the muscles, the tendons, and these muscle and joint sensations themselves then become a part in the idea, for instance, of time, of space, of feeling. But the new part only reinforces the general tone which is given in the general discharge, and gives to it only the exact detail which gets its charac- ter just through the blending of these sen- sations of completed reactions with the accompaniments of the central discharge. A consistent psychology thus may start with the following principles: It considers all variations of mental life as variations of the content of consciousness, and this con- tent as a complex object, including in this first presupposition a complicated trans- formation of the real inner life, a transfor- mation by which the subjectifying view of real life is denied for the causal psychological system. Every content of consciousness is further considered as a complex of sensa- tions, that is, of possible elements of per- ceptive ideas. Every sensation is con- sidered as having a fourfold manifoldness, varying in kind, in strength, in vividness and in value. The physiological basis of every sensation, and thus of every psychical element, is the physical process by which a centripetal stimulation becomes transformed into a centrifugal impulse, the kind depend- ing upon the locality of the centripetal channel, the strength upon the quantity of the stimulus, the value upon the locality of the centrifugal channel, and the vividness upon the quantity of the discharge. Huco MUNSTERBERG. HARVARD UNIVERSITY. SOPHUS LIE. On the eighteenth of February, 1899, the greatest mathematician in the world, Sophus Lie, died at Christiania in Norway. SCIENCE. 447 He was essentially a geometer, though applying his splendid powers of space cre- ation to questions of analysis. From Lie comes the idea that every system of geom- etry is characterized by its group. In or- dinary geometry a surface is a locus of points ; in Lie’s Kugel-geometrie it is the ag- gregate of spheres touching this surface. By a simple correlation of this sphere- geometry with Pluecker’s line-geometry, Lie reached results as unexpected as elegant. The transition from this line-geometry to this sphere-geometry was an example of contact-transformations. Now contact-transformations find appli- cation in the theory of partial differential equations, whereby this theory is vastly clarified. Old problems were settled as sweepingly as new problems were created and solved. Again, with his Theorie der Transforma- tionsgruppen, Lie changed the very face and fashion of modern mathematics. A magnificent application of his theory of continuous groups is to the general prob- lem of non-Euclidean geometry as formu- lated by Helmholtz. To this was awarded the great Lobachévski Prize. Not even this award could sufficiently emphasize the epoch-making importance of Lie’s work in the evolution of geometry. Moreover, the foundations of all philoso- phy are involved. To know the non-Eu- clidean geometry involves abandonment of the position that axioms as to their concrete content are necessities of the inner intui- tion; likewise abandonment of the position that axioms are derivable from experience alone. Lie said that in the whole of modern mathematics the weightiest part is the theory of differential equations, and, true to this conviction, it has always been his aim to deepen and advance this theory. Now it may justly be maintained that in his theory of transformation groups Lie has 448 himself created the most important of the newer departments of mathematics. By the introduction of his concept of con- tinuous groups of transformations he put the isolated integration theories of former mathematicians upon a common basis. The masterly reach of Lie’s genius is illustrated by his encompassment of the fundamentally important theory of differential invariants associated with the English names Cayley, Cockle, Sylvester, Forsyth. Thirteen years ago Sylvester announced his conception of ‘ Reciprocants,’ a body of differential invariants not for a group, but for a mere interchange of variables. A number of Englishmen thereupon took up investigations about orthogonal, linear and projective groups, groups in whose trans- formations interchanges of variables occur as particular cases, and whose differential invariants are consequently classes of re- ciprocants, and of the analogues of recipro- eants, when more variables than two are considered. Now all these investigations were long subsequent to Lie’s consideration of the groups in question as leading cases of a general conception. Thus they were merely secondary investigations ! Again, the theory of complex numbers appears as a part of the great ‘Theorie der Transformationsgruppen.’ Indeed, this con- tinent of ‘transformations’ opened up and penetrated with such giant steps by Lie represents the most remarkable advance which mathematics in all its entirety has made in this latter part of the century. Sophus Lie it was who made prominent the importance of the notion of group, and gave the present form to the theory of con- tinuous groups. This idea, like a brilliant dye, has now so permeated the whole fabric of mathematics that Poincaré actually finds that in Euclid ‘the idea of the group was potentially pre-existent,’ and that he had ‘some obscure instinct for it, without reach- SCIENCE, : [N.S. Vou. IX. No, 221. ing a distinct notion of it.’ Thus the last shall be first, and the first last. In personal character Lie was our ideal of a genius, approachable, outspoken, un- conventional, yet at times fierce, intractable. His work is cut short; bis influence, his fame, will broaden, will tower from day to day. y GEORGE BrucEr Hatsrep. AUSTIN, TEXAS. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. # Colour in Nature: A Study in Biology. By Marton J. Newsiern. London, John Murray. 1898. Pp. 344. On page 300 of this work we read: ‘‘We have now completed our general survey of the colours and colouring-matters of organisms. « * * That the survey as a whole is halting and incomplete must be obvious to all. We have seen that it is as yet impossible to classify pigments in a logical manner ; that most of the problems connected with the subject are en- tirely unsolved.’’ These statements are indeed true; and yet the book is an interesting and valuable one, and will be of real assistance to the working biologist. The whole subject of color in animals and plants has suffered from the fact that it con- cerns the chemist and physicist as well as the biologist, and in these days of intense special- ization it is hard to find anyone competent to treat the matter in all its aspects. Dr. New- bigin has endeavored, with some success, to take all the more important facts into consider- ation; but it is practically impossible for any one individual to have that intimate acquaint- ance with the vital phenomena of every group of living organisms which is necessary for a satisfactory discussion of their coloration. It was Darwin’s method to seek the assistance of numerous specialists in different branches, who supplied him with information which he brought together and interpreted in a masterly manner. It may be that Dr. Newbigin has not yet felt justified in asking for such help, but now that she has fairly won her spurs (if one may use such a phrase in regard to a lady) it is not un- reasonable to hope that she will adopt the Darwinian system, and eventually provide us MarcH 24, 1899. ] with an account of animal and plant coloration which will cover the ground as completely as the knowledge of the day permits. In the meanwhile, we may be grateful to her for a work which will at any rate serve as an excel- lent introduction to the subject, and as more or less of a revelation to those whose studies have been confined to a limited field. Attention is drawn to the interesting analogy between natural color-variations of organisms and the changes which can be induced in their pigments by suitable reagents. This is a mat- ter which, though well known, has not received the attention it deserves, partly because those aware of the chemical reactions have not usu- ally been familiar with the natural variations, and vice versa. It may be permissible, by way of illustration, to cite two new instances of this among the Coccideze which have just come to the writer’s notice. Icerya rileyi has a pure white ovisac, which is turned bright primrose yellow by chloroform, but regains its white color when the chloroform evaporates, A closely related form, Icerya littoralis, var. mimose, has the whole ovisac naturally of a delicate primrose yellow. The second case is more instructive. Mytilaspis concolor has ordi- narily a white scale, but on February 5, 1899, Mr. P. J. Parrott discovered a variety (IM. con- color var. viridissima, Ckll. and Parrott, ined.) in which the scales of both sexes are of a lively emerald green. This was on the campus of the Agricultural College, Mesilla Park, at the bases of stems of Atriplex canescens. The female insect itself, removed from beneath the scale, was found to be of a dark purple color, with a bright yellow patch in the anal region, and suffused crimson spots at intervals round the margins of the hind end. The purple color, when the insect was placed in caustic soda, immediately became green, but was changed back to purple by acetic acid. Now, it is evi- dent in this case that the insect must have had an acid reaction, but the pigment transferred to the scale had apparently been turned green by the ‘alkali’ salts which are known to occur in the soil at Mesilla Park. This at once re- calls the cheetopterin pigments described by Dr. Newbigin on pp. 89-91 of her work, and it may be that we have a new member of that series, SCIENCE. 449 On pp. 161-162 it is suggested that the re- semblance between certain Heliconian butter- flies and their Pierid mimics may be due, at least in part, to their relatively low organiza- tion and simple plan of coloration. In the Transactions of the Entomological Society of London, 1891, Mr. H. H. Druce published a paper on the Lycenid genus Hypochrysops, which inhabits Australia and the Malay Archi- pelago. To this paper are appended two beau- tiful colored plates, and the present writer was surprised to find that he could nearly match a number of very diverse species figured, as to color and pattern, ‘among a series of Lycenide collected in Jamaica! The resemblance per- tained only to the upper surface of the wings, the lower surfaces of the Jamaican insects being quite unlike Hypochrysops. Now the Lycenide show splendid ‘ optical’ colors, and are cer- tainly not simply organized as regards their coloration, so the suggestion made with regard to the Heliconians and Pierids would not hold. Neither, of course, is there any true mimicry, since the two sets of butterfiies occur on oppo- site sides of the world. Cases of this sort have been quoted as destructive to the theory. of the utility of mimicry among insects, but to the writer they seem only to remove the difficulty which was felt in accounting for the origin of genuinely mimetic resemblances. In a work of the kind now under review there must necessarily be details which could be adversely criticised. The writer had begun to take note of such, but it hardly seems worth while to dwell upon them. Botanists will un- doubtedly complain that the space devoted to the colors of plants is much too short, and that several of the statements therein are too general or too sweeping. It will probably be thought by many readers that if Dr. Newbigin had made more or closer observations of living animals she would have had greater respect for natural selection. And, finally, some will wonder how it is that one who has enjoyed the beautifully pure colors of living creatures can have permitted her book to be bound in such a muddy and unpleasing blue. T. D. A. CoCKERELL, MESILLA PARK, New MEXIco, February 27, 1899. 450 The Dawn of Reason, or Mental Traits in the By JAMES WEIR, M. D. Pp. xiii+ Lower Animals. New York, The Macmillan Co. 234. Price, $1.25. Dr. Weir has evidently been a close observer of animal life for many years, and his zeal has given him wider opportunities for useful obser- vation than most amateurs and many profes- sional naturalists have had. His book contains the more important of his own original observa- tions of the intelligent activities of animals, some interesting verifications of the results gained by other observers, and his opinions about the nature of animal consciousness. Everything is purposely put in as simple lan- guage as possible, and this perhaps is a suffi- cient reason for the utter neglect of many ob- servations, experiments and opinions which oppose his views. Lloyd Morgan, for instance, is nowhere mentioned, not even in the bibliog- raphy. The popular nature of Dr. Weir’s exposition prevents any discussion here of his observations on the morphology of the sense-organs of various animals, e. gy., jelly-fish, grasshoppers, beetles. He finds the marginal bodies of jelly- fish to be visual, not auditory organs, locates the auditory organs of grasshoppers in the anterior pair of legs, finds those of the Diptera to be the ‘balanciers’ of Bolles Lee, and those of the Cerambyx beetle to be in the maxillary palpi. It would certainly seem worth while for Dr. Weir to present his data in complete form soon, so that those competent may judge of the soundness of his conclusions. He gives no drawings. One cannot help lamenting the mental atti- tude which served as the inspiration to Dr. Weir’s observations of the intelligent activities of animals. He craves a high development of inentality for the animals and has his eyes open only to possible evidence of it. He likes to find keen senses better than dull ones, reason- ings than instincts, knowledge than ignorance. He psychologizes about animals as a lover might psychologize about his beloved. The disadvantages are obvious. On the other hand, there are some advantages, at least in the en- thusiasm and patient labor which perhaps are due to the eulogizing temper. Anyone inter- SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. ested in the progress of comparative psychology must wish well to a man who, without the in- centives of the professed naturalist, makes it a labor of love to watch animal life. I, for one, shall welcome such observations, even though they are more one-sided than Dr. Weir’s. His favoritism toward animals, though it has de- prived us of any records of unintelligent con- duct and perhaps prevented the repetition of some tests and even distorted facts, has still failed to injure a very considerable number of suggestive and important observations. It will pay any student of animal psychology to read the book for the sake of these. They furnish interesting, and we hope reliable, data about the adaptive reactions of micro-organisms, the for- mation by insects of new associations in re- sponse to new situations, the formation by reptiles of habits due to the association of novel sights and sounds with certain reactions, about ‘play ’ among insects, strange ‘friendships’ be- tween animals, letisimulation, the activities of the harvesting ants, ete. A sample of Dr. Weir’s keenness is his theory that the con- tinual barking of dogs at night is explainable by the supposition that they bark at an echo. This hypothesis he supports by some very striking facts. Of Dr. Weir’s opinions about the meaning of his facts there is little to be said. His mind does not move freely and surely among psycholog- ical terms or theories or deductions. Reason means for him the source of all performances above the level of instinct, and his only basis of discrimination is the difference between high and low. His only theoretical problem is as to whether or not the human mind has developed from the brute mind. It will be a birthday for animal psychology when naturalists realize that this is among the least of its problems. EDWARD THORNDIKE. WESTERN RESERVE UNIVERSITY. SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. THE December number of the Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society contains an ac- count of the October meeting of the Society, by the Secretary, Professor F, N. Cole; ‘ Con- cerning a Linear Homogeneus Group in C,,,, Variables Isomorphic to the General Linear MARCH 24, 1899. ] Homogeneous Group in m Variables,’ by Dr. L. E. Dickson; ‘A Second Locus Connected with a System of Coaxial Circles,’ by Professor Thomas F. Holgate ; ‘ Reciprocal Transforma- tions of Projective Coordinates and _ the Theorem of Ceva and Menelaos,’ by Professor Arnold Emch; ‘Notes’ ; ‘New Publications.’ The January number of the Bulletin contains a report on the ‘ Theory of Projective Invariants : The Chief Contributions of a Decade,’ by Pro- fessor H. S. White; ‘Reye’s Geometrie der Lage,’ by- Professor Charlotte Angas Scott ; ‘Burkhardt’s Theory of Functions,’ by Pro- fessor Maxime Bécher; ‘ Darboux’s Orthogonal Systems,’ by Professor Edgar Odell Lovett ; ‘The New Mathematical Encyclopedia,’ by Professor James Pierpont; ‘ Errata’ ; ‘ Notes’ ; ‘New Publications.’ The February number of the Bulletin contains an account of the Fifth Annual Meeting of the Society, by the Secre- tary ; ‘The December Meeting of the Chicago Section of the Society,’ by Professor Thomas F. Holgate; ‘Report on Recent Progress in the Theory of Groups of a Finite Order,’ by Dr. G. A. Miller; ‘ Note on Burnside’s Theory of Groups,’ by Dr. G. A. Miller; ‘On a Regu- lar Configuration of Ten Line Pairs Conjugate as to a Quadric,’ by Professor F, Morley ; ‘Shorter Notices,’ by Professors Ernest W. Brown, Edgar Odell Lovett, J. W. A. Young, Alexander Ziwet ; ‘ Notes’; ‘New Publications.’ American Chemical Journal, March: ‘On the Rearrangement of Imido-Esters,’ by H. L. Wheeler and T. B. Johnson. ‘On an Isomer of Potassium Ferricyanide,’ by J. Locke and G. H. Edwards. By treating potassium ferri- cyanide with potassium chlorate and hydro- chloric acid an isomer of this salt was obtained. An isomeric silver salt was also prepared and the reactions studied, In some cases the re- actions of the isomers are so different that the author doesnot hesitate to accept this substance, which he calls potassium /-ferricyanide, as a new form. ‘Reaction of Orthodiazobenzoic Acid with Sulphurous Acid and Copper Pow- der,’ by W. E. Henderson. Experiments were carried out to test the statements so generally found in text-books that sulphonic acids are formed from the decomposition of diazo com- pounds by sulphurous acid in the presence SCIENCE. 451 of copper powder. The results showed that, under ordinary conditions, sulphonic acids were not formed. ‘Direct Nitration of the Paraffins,’ by O. A. Worstall. The author finds that the results as given in his earlier paper on the action of nitric acid on the paraffins hold for all the paraffins studied. ‘Higher Primary Nitroparaffins,’ by R. A. Worstall. ‘The author has continued the study of the derivatives of the higher paraffins on the line suggested by Victor Meyer in his study of the lower members of the series. ‘The Action of Ethylic Oxalate on Camphor,’ by J. B. and A. Tingle. ‘Liquid Acetylene Diiodide,’ by E. H. Keiser. A second form of the three theoretically possible ones has been obtained in liquid form. ‘A Simple Color Reaction for Methyl Alcohol,’ by S. P. Mulliken and H. Scudder. The alcohol is converted into formic aldelyde by plunging a hot copper wire into it. Resorcin and sulphuric acid are then added and a characteristic color reaction follows. ‘ Re- actions for the Detection of the Nitrogroup,’ by S. P. Mulliken and E. R. Barker. The first method depends on the reduction to hydroxy- lamine and the test for this with silver nitrate, and the second on the conversion into rosa- niline. J» ELLIOTT GILPIN. THE Osprey, for January, has for its first article some interesting ‘ Notes on Eugenes fulgens’ by F. C. Willard, accompanied by a fine plate showing four nests. Next comes descriptions of the ‘Nesting of the Alaska Bald Eagle,’ by George G. Cantwell, followed by descriptions of the habits in captivity of Great Horned Owls, Barn Owls and young Short-eared Owls respectively, by M. A. Carriker, D. A. Cohen and Ludwig Kumlien. ‘A Visit to Pelican Island, Indian River, Florida,’ is de- scribed by L. W. Brownall, and the ‘ Nesting of the Black-and-White Warbler,’ by J. Warren Jacobs. Other brief articles, editorials, notes and reviews complete the number. THE leading article of the Journal of the Bos- ton Society of Medical Sciences is a series of ‘ Ob- servations upon the Elastic Tissue of Certain Human Arteries,’ by George B. Magrath. Richard M. Pearce has a paper on ‘Scarlet Fever; its Bacteriology, Gross and Minute 452 Anatomy,’ and Horace D. Arnold one on the ‘Weight of the (Normal) Heart in Adults,’ the conclusion being that the average weight for males is 290 grams and for females 260 grams. The final article, ‘A Study of the Encap- sulated Bacilli,’ by Lawrence W. Strong, finds that the gas production of these bacilli affords a valuable aid for their study and identification. THE Electrical World and the Electrical Engi- neer will be issued, hereafter, as one publication, to be known as the Electrical World and Engi- neer, under the editorship of T. Commerford Martin and W. D. Weaver. W. J. Johnston, former editor of the Hlectrical World, has retired. Dr. W. P. Wynne, F. R.S., has been elected editor of the Journal of the British Chemical Society. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. OF THE NEW YORK 1899. THE ANNUAL MEETING ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, FEBRUARY 27, AFTER the reading of the minutes of the last annual meeting, the reports of the officers for the year just closed were called for by the Pres- ident, Professor Henry F. Osborn. The Corresponding Secretary reported briefly that he had succeeded in correcting and revis- ing the list of honorary and corresponding members, after a considerable amount of cor- respondence, and that the corrected list would be published in Part I. of the volume of Annals for 1899. The Recording Secretary then pre- sented the following report, summarizing the progress and work of the Academy during the preceding year: The last year of the Academy has been ex- tremely satisfactory, and its affairs are in a much more promising condition than heretofore. Interest in our meetings has increased during the year, and the number of people cooperating in our work is much larger than ever before. During the last fiscal year there have been thirty-one meetings of the several sections, three public lectures and one public reception. The sections now organized are those of As- tronomy and Physics, Biology, Geology and Mineralogy, and of Anthropology, Psychology and Philology. The latter section has been SCIENCE, [N.S. Vou. LX. No. 221. divided into two sub-sections, for economy of effort, Particular mention should be made of the good work and increased interest in the sub-section of Anthropology and Psychology, largely due to the personal and persistent ef- forts of Dr. Boas. During the year a total of ninety-four papers has been presented before the Academy, thirty- seven new members have been elected, twelve have resigned, leaving a total of three hundred and thirty-five on the Secretary’s list, including six new life members. The Fifth Annual Recep- tion held in April last was in some ways the most successful in the history of the Academy. During the year the by-laws have been very completely revised, simplified and made work- able, particularly in such a way as to give the individual sections and sectional officers more importance in the program, and so as to reduce the number of business meetings at which the Academy must be formally organized for gen- eral business to one each month. The public lectures have been more firmly established than heretofore, and have been assigned to the various sections so that each department may be popularly represented. The printed pro- gram of the year’s meetings has been an- nounced in advance, and has been found very helpful. The publications of the Academy have been greatly improved as to quality, appearance and dignity, by the change incorporated in January last, when the Transactions were abolished. The thanks of the Academy are certainly due to our enthusiastic and very careful editor, Mr. van Ingen, for the great amount of work and care that he has put upon the publications. It is through the publications only that we are known abroad in the world, and it is very nec- essary that we should thus appear in the most favorable manner possible. The Academy is in great need of more money for publication, and our efforts should be de- voted as fully as possible to the securing of contributions for such work. We are con- tinually obliged to decline valuable scientific papers by our members because of a lack of funds for printing. This is a condition of af- fairs which should not be allowed to continue long. Marcu 24, 1899. ] It is a great pleasure to the Academy to feel that certain of the scientific wants of the city are soon to be met, owing to the encouragement given by one of our Patrons, who has always been interested in the Academy. I refer par- ticularly to the gift to the Scientific Alliance, of which the New York Academy of Sciences is the original member, of $10,000 for a scientific building, donated by Mrs. Herrman. During the coming year it is hoped to bring the several sections in touch, so as to have a uniform policy of procedure, and the manner of printing the proceedings will be simplified and unified. The report of the Treasurer showed the finances to be in a promising condition, but that the expenses too nearly equalled the in- come, and that endowments are very necessary if the work is to be increased as it should be. One of the most interesting features of the meeting was the report by the Editor of the Annals concerning the details of his work dur- ing the last year in printing the volume just finished according to the new plan as to typog- raphy, pagination, illustration and general form, which was adopted a year ago and which has proved extremely successful and gratifying. The last official report was a brief one by the retiring Librarian concerning the present con- dition of the library, which is now housed in a large room in Schermerhorn Hall, of Colum- bia University, and available for reference by ail working scientists and members of the Academy. The following list of honorary and corre- sponding members was then elected, and seven- teen resident members were made Fellows be- cause of their attainments in scientific work: HONORARY MEMBERS. Lord Rayleigh, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., Royal Institution of Great Britain, Albemarle St., Piccadilly, N. W., London. George Howard Darwin, M.A., F.R.S., Trinity College, Cambridge, Eng. CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. Dr. Louis Dollo, Musée d’Histoire Naturelle, Brus- sels, Belgium. Dr. Otto Jaekel, Kgl. Museum fiir Naturkunde, Invalidenstr. 43, Berlin. Professor Dr. Eberhard Fraas, Kgl. Naturalien Kabinet, Stuttgart, Germany. SCIENCE. 453 Professor Qr. Charles Depéret, Faculté des Sciences, Lyons, France. Dr. C. W. Andrews, British Museum of Natural History, London, England. Dr. Max Schlosser, Palaeontologische Sammlung des Staates, Alte Akademie, Munich, Germany. G. H. Boulenger, British Museum, London, Eng- land. Professor G. B. Howe, Normal College of Science, S. Kensington, London, England. Dr. Walter Innes, School of Medicine, Cairo, Egypt. Dr. A. Liversidge, Sydney, New South Wales. Professor Mansfield Merriman, Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa. Dr. Stuart Weller, University of Chicago, Chicago, Il. Professor Ludwig Boltzmann, University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria. Professor P. LaCroix, Musée d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, France. Dr. A. Smith Woodward, British Museum of Nat- ural History, London. Professor Dr. Fried. Kohlrausch, Physikalish Tech- nische Reichsanstalt, Charlottenberg, Marshstrasse 25, Berlin. Professor R. H. Traquair, Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh, Scotland. Professor W. C. Brégger, Christiania, Norway. J. G. Baker, Royal Gardens, Kew. Professor Wilhelm Ostwald, University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany. The list of officers given below was then elected by ballot : President, Henry F. Osborn. Ist Vice-President, James F. Kemp. 2d Vice-President, Chas. L. Bristol. Corresponding Secretary, William Stratford. Recording Secretary, Richard E. Dodge. Treasurer, Charles F. Cox. Librarian, Bashford Dean. Councillors, Franz Boas, Charles A. Doremus, Wil- liam Hallock, Harold Jacoby, Lawrence A. McLouth, L. M. Underwood. Curators, Harrison G. Dyar, Alexis A. Julien, George F. Kunz, Louis H. Laudy, William D. Schoonmaker. Finance Committee, Henry Dudley, John H. Hinton, Cornelius Van Brunt. The formal work of the evening was followed by the annual address of the President. Pro- fessor Osborn took for his title ‘The Succession of Mammalian Faunain America,compared with that in Europe during the Tertiary Period.’ 454 The formal meeting was followed by refresh- ments and a social gathering, which lasted until a relatively late hour. RicHARD E. DopGE, Recording Secretary. THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE 497th meeting of the Society was held on March 4th, at 8 p. m., in the assembly room of the Cosmos Club. The first paper was by Professor F. H. Bigelow on ‘The Influence of Electricity on Vegetation.’ It was stated that vegetation under the Aurora belt shows re- markable developments, due not to the length of the summer day, but to the electric cur- rents. Experiments indicate that static elec- tricity, supplied by machines, when applied to plants increases their growth about 40 per cent. Extensive trials in many places and under different conditions generally confirmed this result. The second paper was by Surgeon-General Sternberg on ‘Some Sanitary Lessons of the Late War.’ An abstract of this very interest- ing and instructive address has not yet come to hand. E. D. PRESTON, Secretary. GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. AT the 89th meeting of this Society, held in Washington, D.C., on March 8, 1899, Mr. Ar- nold Hague, U. 8. Geological Survey, exhibited a geological relief map of the Yellowstone Park and of the Absaroka Range, in northwestern Wyoming, showing some of the physical fea- tures of the latter region by means of lantern illustrations. The map is constructed on the scale of one mile to an inch, the area represented being approximately 75 miles square. The base of the model is taken at 5,000 feet above sea level, from which rise several dominating peaks showing elevations of over 12,000 feet above sea level. It requires about forty dis- tinct colors to represent the different geological formations into which the sedimentary and ig- neous rocks have been divided. All the geysers and hot springs areas are delineated, together with the regions of extinct hydro-thermal ac- tion. In the model a sharp contrast between the rhyolite plateau of Yellowstone Park of SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. Pliocene age and that of the eroded and dis- sected plateau of the Absarokas of Miocene age is clearly brought out. Mr. Hague stated that he hoped the map would be sent to the Paris Exposition next year. The lantern slides were selected to illustrate the manner in which the Absarokas were built up by the gradual accu- mulation of breccias, agglomerates and basalt flows, forced upwards from numerous fissures and vents during a long period of time, and the elevation of the range by the intrusion of pow- erful stocks of gabbro, syenite, diorite, diorite- porphyry and granite-porphyry. The character of the different breccias, the incisive trenching of the deep canyons, and the stocks, together with their associated sheets and network of dikes, were discussed. Mr. F. B. Weeks, U. S. Geological Survey, gave some observations made last summer in the course of a reconnaissance in Jackson Basin, northwest Wyoming. : The Jackson Basin, he said, occupies a de- pression within the Rocky Mountains, of Wy- oming, of 5 to 8 miles in width and 45 miles in length. The Teton range forms a lofty, pre- cipitous barrier along its western side. The valley has an elevation of 6,200 to 6,800 feet, and the Tetons rise 7,000 feet above it. The Tetons are noted for their wonderful Alpine scenery. Jackson Lake and several smaller lakes occur within the valley—all of glacial origin. The northeastern portion of the basin is covered with numerous morainal ridges and hillocks. The eastern side is buried beneath a great mass of material brought down by glacial streams. They have the forms of huge deltas, spreading out from the foothills in fan-shaped areas, several miles long and as many miles in width where they reach the Snake River. Along some of the main streams terracing has been well developed. The streams flowing over these deltas follow well-defined courses, but have a tendency to spread laterally instead of widening and deepening their beds. The Upper and Lower Gros Ventre buttes are prom- inent outliers of the Gros Ventre range. They are formed, in large part, of Paleozoic rocks, and are probably directly connected with the main range. The heavy mantle of débris makes it impossible to trace a definite connection. MARcH 24, 1899. ] The meeting closed with some remarks by Mr. W. Lindgren, U. 8. Geological Survey, on the Boise Folio (No. 45, of the Geol, Sury.), recently published. Wm. F. MoRsELL. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. ON THE MAKING OF SOLUTIONS, To THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: A remark in a recent paper by Professor Macloskie calls my at- tention afresh to a curious error which, so far as I know, is universally current in our zoological laboratories. Professor Macloskie remarks (Scr- ENCE, Vol. IX., p. 206) ‘‘a 1% solution of cane sugar in water, * * * thatis 342 prams, * * * dissolved in 34,200 grams of water.’’ In other words, a 1% solution is made by mixing 1 part of the substance to be dissolved with 100 parts of the solvent. In this conception the zoologists appear to be at one. It is sufficient to refer to any of the well-known text-books : Marshall and Hurst, ‘ Practical Zoology,’ 4th ed., p. 464; Gage, ‘The Microscope,’ 6th ed., p. 179 ; Dodge, ‘ Elementary Practical Biology,’ p. 391. Like many other text-books, Huxley and Martin’s ‘ Practical Biology’ (revised ed., p. 496), does not directly commit itself to the error, but gives directions tomake the ‘normal saline solution’ by mixing 7.5 grams of salt with a liter of water. That the normal saline solu- tion is a $% solution is directly stated by Whit- man (‘ Methods of Research,’ etc., edition of 1885, p. 207), and Lee (The Microtomist’s Vade-mecum, 4th ed., p. 263.), These citations abundantly prove that Pro- fessor Macloskie’s conception of a 1% solu- tion corresponds with that of other zoologists. If, however, we ask a chemist how such a solu- tion is made, the reply willbe: ‘‘ Dissolve one part of salt, sugar, or whatever the substance may be, in ninety-nine parts of the solvent.’’ And that this is logically correct becomes self- evident upon amoment’s thought. A 1% solu- tion of HCl, as all will agree, consists of one part of the acid to ninety-nine parts of water. Why should the fact that in one case we deal with a solid, in the other with a liquid, alter the case ? It would seem that unless, or until the zoolo- gists come into agreement with the chemists, 1 SCIENCE. 455 every investigator in publishing his researches should make a point of preventing ambiguity by stating whether his 1%, 5%, 20% solutions of solids are compounded on the logical or the zoological plan. INTAEAM CURE Gon WELLESLEY COLLEGE, March 6, 1899. THE ORIGIN OF NIGHTMARE. OVER and over again when a child I was for years the victim at night of a certain form of mild nightmare, so that it came to be to my fearful imagination no insignificant part of my unpleasant experiences. This nightmare always took the form of a great wave of some- thing gradually rolling towards me and finally engulfing and oppressing me to a painful ex- tent. It would roll up a huge shapeless mass of no particular material, but always irresist- ibly towards me helpless and overwhelmed. Most often it finally appeared to be a huge soft pillow or even formless feather bed, but without color or other qualities save that of engulfing and terrifying. At its worst on vari- ous occasions this mass as it rolled up became a huge fat boar, defined as such, however, only subconsciously, but always dreadful in its power to overwhelm me. All this was years ago. One night recently, as I was falling asleep in bed in alighted room, I became gradually aware of that sensation which compression of a nerve produces, a vague and quite indefinite sense of discomfort localized only in the region about my head and arms, but in my state of somnolence only a growing sensation of discomfort press- ing on my consciousness. Increasing steadily, it finally began to awaken me, and I then became distinctly conscious of the well-remem- bered nightmare of my childhood beginning to approach. With the noise in the room I was now sufficiently awake to be interested in this fa- miliar visitor, and I lay still deliberately. Grad- ually the mass rolled up towards me exactly as of yore, with no terror in its coming now, until finally it was upon me and all about me op- pressively. .I very slightly moved my arm (upon which my head was lying), and the night- mare was for the moment lost sight of in the sensations now localized there. I opened my eyes and instantly the whole experience vanished, closed them and it instantly returned 456 in allits force and peculiarities. Over and over again this little experiment was performed with- out variation in its results, until, finally, satis- fied, I moved my head off my arm and stretched my arm out of its cramped position, and felt no more this béte noir of earlier days, now again returned, bringing with it emphatic and unmistakable explanation of its cause. Give: ASTRONOMICAL NOTES. A NEW SATELLITE OF SATURN. A NEW satellite of the planet Saturn has been discovered by Professor William H. Pickering at the Harvard College Observatory. This satellite is three and a half times as distant from Saturn as Iapetus, the outermost satellite hitherto known. The period is about seventeen months, and the magnitude fifteen and a half. The satellite appears upon four plates taken at the Arequipa Station with the Bruce Photo- graphic Telescope. The last discovery among the satellites of Saturn was made half a century ago, in September, 1848, by Professor George P. Bond, at that time Director of the Harvard College Observatory. EDWARD C. PICKERING. HARVARD COLLEGE OBSERVATORY, CAMBRIDGE, Mass., March 17, 1899. NOTES ON PHYSICS. THE NERNST LAMP. THE electric lamp recently invented by Nernst, as has been stated in this JOURNAL, con- sists of a small rod of magnesia which is heated to brilliant incandescence by an electric current which is pushed through it by an electromotive force of several hundreds of volts. The rod must be heated nearly to a red heat by a blow- pipe or other independent means before it passes sufficient current to operate. A number of these lamps have been made in the Physical Laboratory at Bethlehem, Pa. It has been found that a rod of pure magnesia can scarcely be started even with 1,000 volts anda good blow pipe. The surrounding air becomes electrically too weak to withstand the high elec- tromotive force at a temperature lower than SCIENCE, [N.S. Voz. IX. No. 221. that required to make the rod a sufficiently good conductor. This is true even when the rod has been heated to softness beforehand in a tem- porary mounting. The conductivity of the rod may be com- pletely controlled by mixing with the magnesia varying amounts of silica and of fusible silicates. A satisfactory lamp is made as follows: Pure calcined magnesia (heavy) is thoroughly mixed with two or three per cent. of powdered silica, one or two per cent. of magnesium sulphate, and one per cent. or less of sodium or potassium silicate (water glass). The mixture is dried until it is just moist enough to pack under pres- sure. A small piece of brass tubing is lined with aroll of several thicknesses of stiff writing paper, and the mixture is tamped into this tube. The tube is then baked until the paper is burned, when the rod of magnesia may be re- moved. This rod is then laid upon a bed of magnesia (powdered lime would, perhaps, answer) and by means of carbon terminals an alternating current is passed through the rod, heating it first to redness by a blow pipe. With some care avery hard and compact rod of mag- nesia is thus formed which is then ground to a thin rod with large grooved ends. Platinum wire is wound on these grooved ends and, if de- sired, cement made of water glass and powdered magnesia may be used to cover the platinum. The two platinum wire terminals may then be bound to the sides of a small glass tube as a support. A lamp made in this way may be started easily, although its resistance rises slowly with continued use, owing, perhaps, to the vol- atilization of the potassium or sodium silicate. ~ Calcium silicate would, perhaps, be more satis- factory in this respect. A very striking experiment may be performed with a piece of glass tubing several inches long wound with copper terminals at its ends. The tube begins to pass considerable current at a low red heat, with a few hundreds of volts, and is quickly melted by the current. A thin-walled tube half an inch or more in diameter is best, and it should be heated along one side only so that the cool portion of the tube may for a short time serve as a support for the hot conductive portion. W.S. F. Manrcw 24, 1899. ] PYROELECTRICITY AND PIBZOELECTRICITY. W. Vorer (Wiedemann’s Annalen, No. 18, 1898) shows that the electrification of certain crystals by heating (pyroelectricity) and the electrification by deformation (piézoelectricity) are in general one and the same phenomenon, and that it is only in such a crystal as tourma- lin, which has a single axis distinguished from all other axes by characteristic physical proper- ties, that pyroelectricity is not due wholly to the deformation accompanying arise of temperature. Professor Voigt also points out that a plate of tourmalin can be used to generate accurately known electric charges by subjecting it to measured compression, and he gives the results of a determination of an electrostatic capacity based upon the known charge generated by a tourmalin plate and the known e. m. f. of a standard cell. W.S. F. THE ROTARY CONVERTER. In two short articles in the Electrical World, for December 17th and 24th, Mr. C. P. Stein- metz gives a quite complete discussion of the theory and action of the rotary converter, a machine used to convert alternating current into direct current, mainly in connection with long distance transmission. Mr. Steinmetz’s papers are, almost without exception, very difficult to read for the reason, chiefly, that he always gives a great deal of precise information about difficult subjects not generally understood. The present paper cannot, of course, be abstracted, but it is mentioned for the reason that Mr. Stein- metz deserves to be more generally known as one of the foremost electricians of our time ; that he is ascientific electrician isa matter of course. W.S. F. THE TELESCOPE-MIRROR-SCALE METHOD.* Proressor 8. W. HoLMAN has given in the Technology Quarterly, for September, 1898, a most complete and usable discussion of the tele- scope-mirror-scale method for measuring angu- lar deflections. Almost at the very beginning of the paper a list of the fourteen instrumental errors is given, together with directions for making the adjustments which are necessary *Published separately by John Wiley & Sons, New York. Price, 75 cents. SCIENCE. 457 to reduce each error to a prescribed value, Following this is a general discussion of each error of adjustment and a derivation of the error in angle due to each. Most physicists have, of course, looked into the detailed theory of the telescope-mirror-scale method in spite of the fact that the literature on the subject is not generally accessible, but the habitual use of the method for rough measurements makes one lose sight of a dozen or more of the adjustments and precautions which are necessary in accurate work, and, therefore, almost every physicist will find this pamphlet of Professor Holman’s a useful reminder when the need arises to use the method with all the precision it is capa- ble of. IWayooneky. NOTES ON INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Some time ago a committee was appointed by the German Chemical Society to formulate an atomic-weight table which should serve as a basis for practical use in analytical calculations. This committee consisted of Professors Landolt, Ostwald and Seubert, and has recently brought in areport which has been widely published. With three exceptions, the decimals in the atomic weights are given only as far as the last figure is practically correct. The weights as far as given agree in general with those pub- lished by Professer F. W. Clarke. The most interesting point in connection with the table is that the basis used is the atomic weight of oxygen = 16. It is now a number of years since Dr. F. P. Venable and others in this country and abroad uttered strong protests against the use of hydrogen = 1 as a standard, especially since the atomic weights with few exceptions are determined with reference to oxygen, and at that time the ratio between hydrogen and oxygen was uncertain. Now that this ratio has been, thanks to Professor Morley, rendered almost certain to three decimal places, it is still unnecessary and unscientific to bring in even this little uncertainty, which in the elements of high atomic weight amounts to quite an appreciable quantity. Professor Seu- bert has been one of the strongest advocates of the basis H = 1, and it is noteworthy that he has agreed to the committee report. In the report Seubert says that, while H =1 is in 458 principle the most correct and natural, he agrees to the report chiefly because with O = 16 many of the weights most frequently used in calcula- tions are represented by whole numbers, and hence these numbers are most conveniently used. Landolt adds that he hopes this report will lead to an international agreement as to the figures used. In arecent paper in the Journal fiir praktische Chemie, W. Hidmann describes the action of metallic magnesium upon compounds contain- ing nitrogen, especially upon the cyanids. At a red heat almost all compounds, inorganic and organic, which contain nitrogen are decomposed, generally with the formation of magnesium ni- trid, Mg,N,. The cyanids of the alkalies and al- kaline earths are decomposed without explosion, the carbid of the metal being formed. This, Eid- mann says, shows that the ordinarily accepted formula of the cyanids, e. g., Bat mi is correct. In the case of those cyanids which decompose at a red heat, as those of zinc, nickel, lead, copper, etc., the reaction with mag- nesium is more violent and decomposition into magnesium nitrid, carbon and the metal ensues. In the case of those cyanids, as those of silver and mercury, which decompose below ared heat the liberated cyanogen reacts with magnesium with explosive violence. ~ A SERIES of analyses of waters from wells near the sea-shore are published by P. Guichard in the Bulletin Société Chimique. The water in these wells rises and falls with the tide, while the composition of the water leads to the con- clusion that there is no direct connection be- tween the wells and the sea, and, hence, it fol- lows, according to the author, that subterranean waters must be affected by the moon, even as the ocean. This conclusion will, doubtless, find many to dissent from it. A DESCRIPTION is given in the Pharmaceu- tische Zeitung by Alfred Zucker of the manu- facture of whitelead by electrolysis, at Dell- briick, according to the Luckow process. The electrolyte is a 13% solution of 80% sodium chlorid and 20% sodium carbonate. The anode is soft lead, the kathode hard lead. The current is 0.5 ampére per square centimeter at SCIENCE. fur. [N. 8. Von. IX. No. 221. 2 volts. Water and carbon dioxid are carefully added as the electrolysis proceeds. With care as to the strength of the electrolyte, a purity of whitelead is obtained not hitherto reached. The hygienic regulations of the factory are worthy of mention. Every operative receives daily one liter of fresh milk, and at the conclu- sion of his daily work must clean very thor- oughly his hands, finger nails, ete. In addition he receives Glauber’s salts, and every fortnight must take a complete warm bath in water which contains a certain amount of liver of sul- By these precautions all cases of satur- nine poisoning have been avoided for several years. ALTHOUGH not under the head of inorganic chemistry, mention may be permitted of a de- scription of the manufacture of artificial silk in arecent number of the Zeitschrift fiir Angewandte Chemie from the pen of H. Wyss-Naef. The first practical.use of the process was in 1889. The raw material is carded cotton which is first converted into nitrocellulose by a bath of strong nitric and sulfuric acids. After washing and drying it is dissolved in a mixture of alcohol andether. This collodion is then spun through openings .08 mm. diameter. The alcohol and ether evaporate almost instantly on spinning and the material is carefully dried. It is then treated by a secret process to reduce the nitro groups, ammonium sulfid being probably the reducing agent used. The silk is then bleached with chlorin and is ready for the market. J. L. H. CURRENT NOTES ON METEOROLOGY. THE THEORY OF CYCLONES AND ANTICYCLONES. A PUBLICATION of unusual interest, contain- ing conclusions of the greatest importance in meteorology, has been issued as Bulletin No. 1 (1899), of the Blue Hill Meteorological Obser- vatory (‘Studies of Cyclonic and Anticyclonic Phenomena with Kites,’ by H. Helm Clayton). This is a study of the results obtained during the kite flights of September 21st—24th and of November 24th—25th last, and it will aid ma- terially towards once more strengthening belief in the older Ferrel, or convectional theory of cyclones and anticyclones, as opposed to the newer Hann, or driven theory. Lack of space Marcu 24, 1899. ] prevents mention of many of the striking facts set forth in this Bulletin. The flights of Sep- tember 21st-24th brought down records from altitudes of 2,000 to 3,400 meters, ina well- marked anticyclone, and in a succeeding cy- clone which followed the same track. The temperature near the center of the anticyclone was the same at 2,100 meters as at 1,200 meters, and the humidity at the greater altitudes was . excessively low. These results agree with those previously found in similar conditions. The axis of the anticyclone was inclined backwards, the high pressure occurring later at high than at low levels. Up to 3,000 meters the temper- ature of the air was higher on the day of the cyclone than on the day of the anticyclone—a normal condition at Blue Hill, as previous kite ascents have shown. A further notable discovery is that cyclonic and anticyclonic circulations observed at the earth’s surface in this latitude do not seem to embrace any air movement at greater altitudes than 2,000 meters, except in front of cyclones. Above 2,000 meters there seem to be other poorly developed cyclones and anticyclones, with their centers at entirely dif- ferent places from those on the earth’s surface, and with different wind circulations. On November 24th—25th the kite meteoro- graph was sent up near the center of a cyclone and in a succeeding anticyclone. From sea- level to 2,800 meters the temperature was 13°-24° F. higher on the day of the cyclone (November 24th) than on the following day. The results of the observations on November 24th-25th also go to show that when the cold in the rear of asurface cyclone is exceptionally severe, the axis of the cyclone is inclined back- ward so sharply that the circulation breaks into two or more systems. Thus there come to exist asurface cyclone, a mid-air cyclone and an upper-air cyclone. On November 25th, at 3,000 meters, there existed a cold-center cy- clone, in which the air had a descending com- ponent of motion, as indicated by the low humidity. The results of the careful study made by Mr. Clayton lead him to the view that the convec- tional theory of cyclones isthe trueone. This Bulletin again bears evidence to the admirable work which is being done by the staff of the ‘ited Tierra del Fuego in 1896. SCIENCE. 459 Blue Hill Observatory, and to the important contributions which Mr, Clayton and his assist- ants, with Mr. Rotch’s liberal support, have made to meteorology. CARBONIC ACID IN DEATH GULCH, THE amount of carbonic acid in the atmos- phere, which, under ordinary conditions, aver- ages about 0.03%, may, in exceptional circum- stances, attain a considerably higher percentage. In certain volcanic districts the amount of car- bonic acid may be large enough to cause the death of animals which stray into the hollows where, owing to its density, the gas collects. The Grotto del Cane, near Naples, is a region of this sort. Another is Death Gulch, in the Yellowstone National Park. In an account of a recent trip in the Park, in Appleton’s Popular Science Monthly for February, Jaggar reports his discovery, in Death Gulch, of the carcasses of eight bears, all of which had doubtless been asphyxiated by the excessive amount of car- bonic acid in the air. R. DEC. Warp. HARVARD UNIVERSITY. ZOOLOGICAL NOTES. NEOMYLODON LISTAI. Dr. EINAR LONNBERG describes at length * some portions of skin found in a cave at Eber- hardt, near Last Hope Inlet, 51° 35’ 8., 72° 38” W., in the Territorio de Magallanes, Chile, and obtained by the Swedish expedition which vis- The cave, lo- cated a few kilometers from the coast and about 500 feet above sea-level, was about 600 feet deep and 150 feet wide at the entrance. It was dis- covered by some farm laborers, who promptly de- stroyed the human skeletons found in the cave, although they fortunately preserved some pieces of thick, strange-looking skin, and the sheath of a claw found partly imbedded in the stalag- mitic deposit of the floor. The claw and two pieces of skin were secured by Nordenskjold ; the smaller piece measured about 715 cm.; the larger, irregular in shape, 50 > 76 cm., is be- lieved to be from the left fore leg. The small * Reprint from Wissenschaftl. Ergebnisse Schwedischen Expedition nach den Magellanslindern unter leitung von Otto Nordenskjold. 460 SCIENCE. fragment of skin is 1 em. thick covered, exter- nally with coarse, dirty yellowish hair, and in- ternally so thickly set with rounded ossicles as to suggest a cobblestone pavement. The inner surface of the larger piece does not show any ossicles, but in the freshly-cut margin they are apparent, although small and completely im- bedded in the skin; the hair on this fragment is from 5 to 9 cm. long. Under the microscope a transverse section of this hair is seen to be solid, lacking the central pith usually present, and on comparison with the hairs of various South American edentates its greatest likeness is found in the central axis of the hair of Bradypus. The microscopical structure of the ossicles, which is described at length by Dr. Lonnberg, is strikingly like that of the ossicles of the true fossil Mylodon. The claw, 104 mm. long by 34 wide, is considered to belong to Neo- mylodon, as there is no existing South American mammal provided with similar claws, and is be- lieved to have belonged on a hind foot. The animal is estimated to have been at least 6 feet long and 4 feet or so high at the shoulder. After a careful consideration Dr. Lonnberg comes to the conclusion that, while Neomylodon was con- temporaneous with early man and was used as food, it certainly does not exist at present, be- cause it is absolutely impossible for it to have eluded the sharp eyes of the native Indians; neither is it identical with the animal that Ramon Listai is said to have shot at. It will be noted that the conditions under which the skin was preserved are very similar to those which led to the preservation of portions of the skin and feathers of Dinornis. MSVAS Tu: SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. THE, Second International Conference on a Catalogue of Scientific Literature requested the delegates from the countries represented to take steps for the formation of committees to study the various questions relating to the Cata- logue, and for the United States the following committee has been named: Dr. J. 8. Billings, Professor Simon Newcomb, Dr. Theodore N. Gill, Professor H. P. Bowditch, Dr. Robert Fletcher, Mr. Clement W. Andrews and Dr. Cyrus Adler. Different universities and scien- [N. 8. Vou. IX. No. 221. tific societies have been invited to form com- mittees to report upon the questions involved. THE appointment of Mr. Herbert Putnam as Librarian of the National Library will be wel- comed by all friends of science and learning. It is well known that Mr. Putnam has excel- lently administered the Public Library of Min- neapolis and the Boston Public Library, and will undoubtedly make the National Library what he has himself said it should be, ‘‘ the fore- most library in the United States, a national library, the largest in the United States, a model and example of assisting the work of scholarship in the United States.’? Men of science are directly interested in this appoint- ment, as the great collection of scientific books of the Smithsonian Institution is deposited in the Library. Dr. THOMAS J. SEE, recently appointed pro- fessor of mathematics in the Naval Observa- tory, has been designated as Chief of the Nau- tical Almanac. PROFESSOR PATRICK GEDDES, of Edinburgh, is at present visiting the United States with a view to sociological and other studies. Profes- sor Geddes is well known for his accomplish- ments and versatility in biological science and for his efforts to improve sociological conditions in Edinburgh. Mr. G. F. Stout, recently appointed Wilde lecturer on mental philosophy at Oxford, and Mr. Charles Stewart, Curator of the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, London, have been given the degree of LL.D. by the Univer- sity of Aberdeen. THE Stockholm Society for Geology and Geography has awarded its Vega medal to Professor Georg Schweinfurth, of Berlin. THE Leopoldinisch-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher, of Halle, has awarded the Cothenius gold medal to Dr. F. Zirkel, professor of mineralogy in the Univer- sity of Leipzig. Proressor A. H. SAYCE, of Oxford Univer- sity, has been appointed Gifford lecturer in Aberdeen University for 1900-1902. ® PROFESSOR BURDON SAUNDERSON gave the Croonian lecture before the Royal Society on MARCH 24, 1899. ] March 16th, on ‘The Electric Concomitants of Motion in Animals and Plants.’ PROFESSOR JEBB, of Cambridge, will deliver the Romanes lecture at Oxford, June 7th, his subject being ‘Humanism and Education.’ THE following Friday evening discourses are being given before the Royal Institution, Lon- don: March 10th, ‘Measuring Extreme Tem- peratures,’ by Professor H. L. Callendar, F.R.S.; March 17th, ‘The Electric Fish of the Nile,’ by Professor Francis Gotch, F.R.S8.; and on March 24th, ‘Transparency and Opacity,’ by Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S. Proressor C. C. GEoRGESON, of the Depart- ment of Agriculture, has left Washington for Sitka to superintend investigations in experi- mental agriculture. A building will be erected at Sitka this year which will contain offices for the experiment station and for meteorological observations. Tue Lord Mayor of Liverpool entertained, on March 4th, Professor Oliver J. Lodge, in recog- nition of his haying received the Rumford medal, which is awarded biennially by the Royal Society for the most important discov- eries in heat or light. Speeches were made by the Lord Mayor; Professor Fitzgerald, of Dub- lin; Sir John Brunner ; Professor Myers, of Cambridge; Professor Ricker and Sir W. Crookes. It was announced at the dinner that Sir John Brunner had offered £5,000 towards a new building for the physical laboratory for -University College, Liverpool, which is under Professor Lodge’s direction. A STATUE in bronze of the late Dr. William Pepper, of Philadelphia, will be erected in the plaza before the City Hall. PROFESSOR JOHN COLLETT, for many years State Geologist of Indiana, died at Indian- apolis, on March 15th, aged 71 years. Dr. W. HANKEL, professor of physics in the University of Leipzig, died on February 18th, at the age of 84 years. Dr. Francis M. Macnamara died on March 5th, at the age of 57. He was formerly pro- fessor of chemistry at the Calcutta Medical Col- lege and chemical examiner to the Governor of India, where he made important investigations SCIENCE, 461 on the spread of cholera by water and on the distribution of disease. ConGREsS, in its closing hours, passed a bill containing the stipulation, ‘‘ That before Jan- uary 1, 1903, the fence around the Botanical Garden shall be removed, provided that at the first session of the Fifty-sixth Congress the Joint Committee on Library is directed to report a bill embodying a plan for removing the Botanical Garden to another location.’”? The Botanical Garden in Washington has done little for sci- ence, being administered by a Joint Committee on the Library of Congress. It is proposed to remove the Garden to a place where a larger area can be secured, and establish there a Na- tional Botanical Garden, which will probably be placed under the charge of the Department of Agriculture. THE New York City Board of Estimate and Apportionment authorized, on March 17th, an issue of bonds to the amount of $500,000, the proceeds to be used in defraying the cost of re- moving the Forty-second street reservoir and in laying the foundations for the building for the New York Public Library, Astor, Lenox and Tilden foundations. Mayor Van Wyck is re- ported to have said: ‘‘ The original request was for $150,000. We looked the matter over care- fully and concluded that such a sum would suffice only for the demolition of the reservoir. It was suggested that the first requisition for bonds under the act authorizing the construc- tion of the library be large enough to cover the cost of the foundations for the structure. The trustees of the library agreed to this, and the plans were accordingly amended. With $500,- 000 it will be possible within nine or ten months to raze the reservoir and lay the foundations. Then we shall be ready to order another issue of bonds and to prosecute the work to an early completion.’? The New York City Board of Estimate and Apportionment has also set aside $63,000 for work on the Zoological Garden in Bronx Park. Mayor VAN Wyck has given a public hear- ing on the bill passed by the Legislature author- izing the Board of Estimate and Apportionment to increase the annual appropriation for the American Museum of Natural History from 462 $90,000 to $130,000. Professor Albert 8. Bick- more, representing the Museum, and Senator Plunkitt, the introducer of the bill, declared that, on account of recent additions to the building, more money was required for its maintenance, the present allowance being in- adequate. The Mayor did not publicly declare his intentions towards the bill, but it is believed that he will sign it. THE Joint Committee of the Royal Society and the Royal Geographical Society, appointed to promote a National Antarctic Expedition, made application some time ago to the Council of the Royal Society and the Council of the British Association for grants of money in aid of the proposed expedition. The Treasurer of the Royal Society has applied, on behalf of the Council, to the Government Grant Committee for a grant of £1,000, and the Council of the British Association will recommend to the next meeting of the General Committee that a like sum be contributed by the Association. The scientific societies in Australia are moving in the matter with a view to influencing the Prem- iers of the different colonies. THE Navy Department expects to make a hydrographic survey of the Philippines. The Vixen, now on its way to Manila, will begin the work as soon as it can be spared, and it is ex- pected that the Yosemite, after making surveys about Guam, will proceed to the Philippines for this purpose. Dr. W. H. Furness and Dr. H. M. Miller have returned from an expedition to Florida, where they have been collecting fossils for the Wistar Institute of Anatomy, University of Pennsylvania. They have made collections from the limestone quarries and phosphate mines, where Dr. Leidy secured many valuable specimens. THE will of the late Herbert Stewart gives $2,000 to the American Society of Engineers for a library fund and $500 to the Engineers’ Club of New York City towards its building fund. The residue of the estate, subject to life annuities, is left to the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University for Scholarships. The amount is estimated at $40,000. A CIVIL SERVICE COMMISSION examination SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 221. will be held on April 11 and 12, 1899, for the po- sition of Soil Chemist, Division of Soils, Depart- ment of Agriculture, at a salary of $1,400 per annum. The subjects and weights are as follows: Physicalichemistnypeemwisiecicaiscedetsictelcietesets sale 20 PNOrgsanic Chemis biysetets clonelpolsysieleten eteleiereietets 20 OrganicichemIstrysseseicletatestetsmieei elses 20 Analy ticalym ethodsiteie: sects re Netaveterepaleysi seals 20 Deiterabure Of SOs! jcc sctariercictays eteiiereisiclarseststel« 10 Brenchiand! Germans c-)cjejsfetetcisiie syateceeiola = 10 MObale estate wietsrcjarsisier states cieletel slap el cfsitoretor chokes 100 On the same days an examination will be held for the position of Special Crop Culturist (Department of Agriculture). The subjects will be weighted as follows: Basis examination (first grade)............. 10 English composition and general training and CX PETLENGO rests ascyaec ste creniaiesterstaecataleveuelsreds 10 Agriculture and horticulture (general prin- ciples and practice of agriculture and horti- culture, including crop rotation, selection and breeding of variety, agricultural Chem- istry, fertilizers, treatment of plant diseases ANG INSECEEPESES) jeriersrcicievs ofeloretehaietelelercletelelese 20 French (translation into English of a selec- tion relating to the cultivation of field CLOPS) Wey stenscpeperevvereesreverskeitaveca est overs eeetana coke 10 Field crops (treatment of miscellaneous and little known field crops, including import SEALISEICS)) sare creuescncteserosatere sjatene rages etetenteeerete 30 IPTOOLTEA CITI G sis reteyarets/aleta)ctarote etsisvsieyareverereheteletete 10 Typewriting (tabulating, copying and spac- ing, and writing from dictation)........ 10 Totalicrecstersicinvscslorsro stat anovereinsieentvarerectets 100 WE have already called attention to the Volta commemoration to be held at Como dur- ing May of the present year. Como has ap- propriated $100,000 for the preliminary ex- penses. An electrical exhibition will be opened on May 14th. <10-* amp. gives easily readable Morse signals in an ordinary telephone, this being double the audible current (this presumably for a frequency of 400). He then finds that in the above case, but with fre- quency equal to 400, there is 12 10~° amp., and that hence the readable signals could be pro- duced with 250 kgm. of copper. - For satisfac- tory audible signals the frequency must be at least as high as 400, and here the undetermined effect of absorption of these waves by the ma- terial of the earth comes in. If this proves serious it may be necessary to use lower fre- quencies and other forms of receivers. A re- ceiver is described consisting of a tuned rec- tangle of wire, vibrating in a strong field, or, better, two rectangles vibrating synchronously, but in opposite directions. Such instruments are being used at Lavernock and Flat Holm as 494 SCIENCE, relays to close call-bell circuits. They are of iridio-platinum wire, 3 mils diameter and 2 by 4 em. dimensions; they have a frequency of 16 per second, and with a clearance of 2 mils .001 erg. per second is required to bring them into contact. This can be used at a distance of 10 kilometers with 4 ton of copper and would be little affected by the absorption; it has not, however, been adapted to the transmission of Morse signals. The power used by the tele- phone is more than 600 times the power used by the rectangle in this case. BiG. THE BEQUESTS OF THE LATE PROFESSOR MARSH. THE will of the late Professor Marsh leaves his entire estate to Yale University, with the exception of $10,000 to the National Academy of Sciences. Its provisions are as follows: 1. The library which he had collected is to be placed in the Yale library, and all duplicates are to be given to the library of the Peabody Museum. 2. His home and the land surround- ing it, nearly three acres on Prospect Hill, is given to the University to be used exclusively as a botanical garden ‘and for no other pur- pose.’ The garden is to be under the custody of a regularly appointed curator at a salary of $2,000. The house is either to be used as the residence of the curator or as a botanical lab- oratory, as his executors may see fit. In case the corporation does not wish to accept the house and grounds for this purpose Professor Marsh orders that they be sold and the pro- ceeds added to the residuary estate. 38. His executors are ordered to sell all his pictures, paintings, furniture, bric-a-brac, silver and Oriental collections, the proceeds to be turned over to the University. 4. The gift is made to the University of a collection of 2,000 orchids and of all of his greenhouse plants. If not needed by the University these may be sold for the bene- fit of the estate. 5. The bequest is made of all of his scientific collections in paleontology, geol- ogy, zoology and archeology, to be kept in Pea- body Museum. 6. He gives to the National Academy of Sciences of Washington $10,000 as a trust fund, ‘the income to be used and expended for promoting original research in the natural sciences.’ 7. The sum of $30,000 which, by the [N. S. Vou. IX. No. 222 terms of the will of George Peabody, Professor Marsh was authorized to dispose of in his will, is left to the corporation of Yale ‘ to be expended by the trustees of Peabody Museum in preparing for publication and publishing the results of my explorations in the West.’ 8. All the rest, resi- due and remainder of the property and estate real and personal, is given to Yale University to be used and expended by it for ‘ promoting original research in the natural sciences.’ The value of Professor Marsh’s estate is said to be about $100,000, but may not prove to be as much. It will be remembered that some- what more than a year ago Professor Marsh gave his extremely valuable collections in paleon- tology and other sciences to the University. It is estimated that these were secured at a cost of about $250,000. The Peabody Museum was given by Mr. George Peabody, Professor Marsh’s uncle, through his influence. It should also be remembered that Professor Marsh never accepted any salary from Yale University. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. THE first Hodgkins gold medal given by the Smithsonian Institution has been conferred on Professor James Dewar, F.R.S., for his work on the liquefaction of air. PROFESSOR HELMERT, of Berlin, has been elected a foreign correspondent of the Paris Academy of Sciences for the Section of Geog- raphy and Navigation. In the same section Pére Colin, founder and director of the observa- tory at Tananarivo, Madagascar, was elected a corresponding member. THE Paris Academy of Medicine has awarded its Lecaze prize (10,000 fr.) to Dr. Widal for his serum method of diagnosing typhoid fever. Ir is proposed, says the London Times, that a portrait of the late Dr. John Hopkinson should be placed in the Hopkinson Memorial Wing of the Engineering Laboratory at Cambridge Uni- versity, the cost to be defrayed by subscription. A chimney piece which Mrs. Hopkinson has presented for use in one of the principal rooms contains a panel in which such a portrait could appropriately be placed. Mr. T. B. Kennington, who painted a portrait of Dr. Hopkinson some years ago, has suggested that instead of simply 4 MARCH 31, 1899. ] copying that picture he could produce a better representation of Dr. Hopkinson as he was shortly before his death by painting an original portrait based on a recent excellent photograph and following the coloring of the previous por- trait. Subscriptions are limited to two guineas, in the expectation that a considerable number of Dr. Hopkinson’s friends not resident in the University, as well as residents, will wish to contribute. Among those who have already subscribed are the Vice-Chancellor, the Master of Peterhouse, the Master of Trinity, Sir Benjamin Baker, Sir J. Wolfe Barry, Sir Fred- erick Bramwell, Sir Douglas Fox, Sir James Kitson, Sir G. G. Stokes, Sir William White, Lord Kelvin, Lord Rayleigh and Lord Lister. Professor Ewing ig treasurer of the fund, and he will receive subscriptions, or they may be paid to the Hopkinson portrait account at Bar- clay & Co., Cambridge. THE statement sent from Washington to the press to the effect that Dr. Thomas J. See had been designated Chief of the Nautical Almanac is incorrect. Dr. See has been assigned to duty as Assistant in the Naval Observatory, but has nothing whatever to do with the Nautical Almanac office. THE funeral services of the late Professor Marsh were held in Battell Chapel, Yale Uni- versity, on March 22d. President Dwight con- ducted the ceremonies, and Professor George F. Fisher, of the Theological School, read the commemorative address. The pall-bearers were Charles D. Walcott and Arnold Hague, of Washington ; Professor Asaph Hall, Cambridge; Professor H. A. Barker, University of Penn- sylvania; and Professors William H. Brewer, Addison van Name, Edward S. Dana and Mr. George F. Eaton, of Yale. Dr. Poitier J. J. VALENTINI, a student in ancient Mexican and Central American history, and author of numerous publications, died March 16th, at St. Luke’s Hospital, New York. Dr. Valentini’s interpretation of the Mexican Calendar Stone placed him among the foremost American archeologists. He was born in Ber- lin in 1828, and received a careful training in philology from his father, an Italian teacher of languages and author of the first German- SCIENCE. 495 Italian dictionary. In 1854 Dr. Valentini went to Costa Rica, and there founded the seaport of Puerto Limon government auspices. Learning of the obscurity of the Spanish coloni- zation of Costa Rica, he returned to Ger- many to search for manuscript historical evi- dence. His first results in this line brought for him the recognition of Ph.D. from Jena. Later Dr. Valentini returned to Central Amer- ica, where, continuing his investigations, he made many expeditions to Guatemala and other parts of Central America. In this work he received government encouragement, but political disturbances prevented his Spanish and German texts from being published by the government. Recognizing that to thoroughly understand Spanish conquests the pre-Colum- bian peoples must be studied, he began work upon the glyphs of the stone monuments and codices. Thirty years ago he came to New York to make use of the greater library facili- ties here, and since that time has been promi- nent among students of Americana. The American Antiquarian Society of Worcester has published many of his papers. His most recent publication is ‘ A Study of the Voyage of Pinzon,’ printed in German in 1898. The major part of his notes and MSS. remain un- published. under HARLAN I. SMITH. Dr. OLIVER Marcy, professor of natural history in Northwestern University, and dean, died at Evanston, Ill., on March 19th. He was a Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society, a member of the American Ornithologists’ Union, and of other scientific societies. PROFESSOR GUSTAV WIEDEMANN, professor of physics and chemistry in the University of Leipzig, well known for his contributions to electricity and magnetism, has died. Masor J. Evans, professor of pathology in the Calcutta Medical College, died on March 13th from the plague. He is believed to have contracted the disease while engaged upon the post-mortem examination of a plague patient. AMERICAN men of science should see that the decimal system of weights and measures is maintained in Cuba, Porto Rico and the Philip- pines. It is the first principle of colonial gov- 496 ernment to respect the customs of the native peoples, and we certainly should not fail to do this in a case where their customs are better than our own. AN appropriation of $170,000 has been passed by the Massachusetts House for the extermina- tion of the Gypsy moth. THE German Reichstag has made a grant of 60,000 Marks for Professor Robert Koch’s ap- proaching expedition to the tropics to investi- gate the nature and origin of malaria. Ir is said that Mr. Andrew Carnegie is pre- pared to give the Pittsburg Carnegie Library $1,000,000 endowment and $500,000 additional for improvements when the city authorities have appropriated $3,500,000 for Shenly Park. By the death of Mrs. A. H. Colson a bequest of $25,000 for the library of Stafford, Conn., becomes available. THE Ohio State University announces for the summer of 1899 the maintenance of a lake lab- oratory at Sandusky, the purpose of which is to provide laboratory facilities to any who may wish to engage in the study of the numerous forms of life there accessible. No courses of instruction are designed and no laboratory fees are charged, the special purpose being to pro- vide opportunities for investigation. Still, the opportunities for mutual improvement among a circle of earnest workers, by comparison of methods, discussion of results and exchange of ideas, are too evident to need mention. The variety of life accessible is unsurpassed, as the lake, river, extensive bays and marshes afford a basis for life conditions of great richness. The laboratory is provided with tables, aquaria, boat and other essentials, and necessary seines, dredges, nets, etc., will be available when needed. Rooms and board may be had con- venient to the laboratory at very moderate prices, and as, aside from the attractive loca- tions along shore, the beauties of Kelley’s, and Put-in Bay Islands are readily accessible by boat the opportunities are most favorable to combine a few weeks of earnest study with the recreations of a summer outing. Each investi- gator will be expected to provide his own mi- croscope, microtome and such special appli- ances as he may need in his particular investi- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 229. gation, unless otherwise arranged, but will be supplied with the usual reagents, glassware, etc., and will be given entire freedom in the matter and method of his investigation, except for such necessary arrangements concerning use of boat, assignment of table aquaria, etc., as may be necessary to secure equal advantages to all. The laboratory will be open from June 15th to August 15th, or, possibly, till September Ist, if desired by a number of workers. Ad- vanced students, instructors or any persons qualified to use the facilities offered are cordi- ally invited to avail themselves of the oppor- tunity here provided. Further particulars may be had by addressing Professor Herbert Osborn, Department Zoology and Entomology, Ohio State University, Columbus. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. WE recently announced that Mr. Robert S. Brookings had offered to give $100,000 to Wash- ington University, St. Louis, on condition that $400,000 be subscribed by others. This sum has now been given and the $500,000 has been added to the endowment fund of the under- graduate department. Thisisin addition to the $450,000 given for buildings within the past six weeks as described recently in this JOURNAL. THE Woman’s College, of Baltimore, will receive between $25,000 and $50,000 as the re- siduary legatee of the late George R. Berry, of that city. Tue Teachers’ College, Columbia University, will erect, at a cost of $350,000, a bulding for its model school, the Horace Mann School. This will give, in its present buildings, more ample accommodations for the regular courses. Srx new scholarships of $100 each have been established in the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University. They will be awarded to members of the graduating class who stand highest in scholarship. Mr. W. J. BLANKINSHIP has been appointed professor of botany in the Agricultural College of Montana. | Mr. R. C. MAcCLAURIN, Fellow of St. John’s College, Cambridge, has been called to the chair of mathematics in Victoria College, New Zea- land. SCIENCE EpITORIAL CoMMITTEE: S. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WoopWARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THURSTON, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE ContE, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; 8S. H. ScuppER, Entomology; C. E. BressEy, N. L. Brirron, Botany; Henry F. Oszorn, General Biology; C. 8S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bowpitcn, Physiology ; J. S. Bruuinas, Hygiene ; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- Ton, J. W. PoweEtL, Anthropology. Fripay, Aprit 7, 1899. CONTENTS: The Fresh-Water Biological Stations of the World : PROFESSOR HENRY B. WARD............0:00c0000 497 Brunissure of the Vine and other Plants: DR. AL- BER TPH pWiOODSasaeresescencccesensstentessaceecesses ses 508 An Automatic Mercury Pump: DR. RALPH R. IPANWARIEN CRistresneaciencentsccsscrstarseatenctnacte scares: 510 Scientific Books :— Wallace on the Wonderful Century : PROFESSOR W. K. Brooks. Hueppe’s Principles of Bacteri- ology: H. W. C. Hoskins on The Elements of Graphic Statics: PROFESSOR FREDERICK N. WILSON. General. Books Received............... 511 Scientific Journals and Articles.......0.0.ccccececeeseees 517 Societies and Academies :— Chemical Society of Washington: WILLIAM H. Kruc. Geological Conference and Students’ Club of Harvard University: J. M. BOUTWELL. Tor- rey Botanical Club: E. S. BURGESS...............4. 517 Discussion and Correspondence :— Some Suggestions for Scientific Seminars and Conferences: PROFESSOR RICHARD E. DODGE. A Remarkable Sun-dog : PRoressor H. L. Os- BORN. Degrees in Science at Harvard Univer- sity : PROFESSOR J. MCKEEN CATTELL.......... 520 Scientific Appointments under the Government........ 523 Scientific Notes and News.........1..scsecsesseeceeees . 524 University and Educational News.. . 528 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended tor review should be sent to the responsible editor, Profes- sor J. McKeen Cattell. Garrison-on-Hudson N. Y. THE FRESH-WATER BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF THE WORLD.* Away back at the beginning of the inves- tigation of minute forms of life, which fol- lowed upon the invention of the microscope, * Annual address of the President before the Ne- braska Academy of Sciences at Lincoln, November 25, 1898. or shall I say discovery, for it seems to have been historically an accident, the early students searched the ditches and ponds and lakes for the organisms which constituted the objects of their study. Anton von Leeuwenhoek, whose name is familiar to you as one of the most zealous early workers among microscopic objects, enriched science by a long series of new organisms of this character. Roesel von Rosenhof, whose careful investigations on various fresh-water animals, published un- der the title of ‘Insect Diversions’ are still standard sources of information con- cerning the habits and structure of these forms, together with Swammerdam, Tremb- ley, O. F. Muller, and a whole host of others, devoted their attention almost ex- clusively to the fresh-water fauna. But this movement seems to have culminated with the appearance, in 1838, of Ehrenberg’s famous volume ‘The Infusion Animalcules as Complete Organisms.’ Extended investigations had already im- pressed zoologists with the richness of the marine fauna. Numerous animal groups of common occurrence in the sea were apparently entirely wanting in fresh water, and the astounding richness of the sub-tropical and tropical oceans with which the European investigators came early in contact on the shores of the Medi- terranean, and in the expeditions to the new lands of the Tropics, entirely over- 498 shadowed the life that had hitherto been found in pond or ditch. It is, in my opinion, also no small factor that many of the ma- rine forms which were brought to the at- tention of scientists were dazzling in their beauty of form and in the brillianey of their coloring. The quieter, more unas- suming forms of lacustrine life in temperate regions could make no corresponding im- press on the minds of the observers. So the scientific world went to the sea-shore for study and everywhere along the coast of Europe, and even in the islands of the Tropics were to be found the vacation re- sorts of scientists. This diversion of attention from the study of fresh-water life was undoubtedly aided by the fact that fifty years ago all centers of education and investigation were comparatively close to the ocean, and so it was easy for the scientist to reach the point, where, as he had learned from the reports of others, life was most abundant and varied, and at the same time, appealed to his esthetic sensibility as nothing did that he saw about him. The concentra- tion of interest on the life of the sea led to the foundation of marine stations, among which that at Naples was the first in point of time, as it always has been and is to- day, first in point of strength. But the development of educational institutions through the large continental areas and the limitations which their location imposed upon investigators connected with these institutions, together with the natural efforts of man to find a field for investiga- tion which should afford him a_ better chance than already overcrowded territory, have led again to the investigation of fresh- water life. So it was that Fritsch, in Bo- hemia, entered upon lacustrine investigation as early as 1871, while about the same time Forel, in Switzerland, was carrying on those studies published between 1874 and 1879 in a series of papers on the ‘ Fauna of the SCIENCE. [N. 8S. Von. IX. No. 223. Swiss Lakes’ culminating in the crowned memoir of the Academy of Sciences on the ‘Abyssal Fauna of the Swiss Lakes,’ that brought to the knowledge of the scientific world a hitherto unsuspected type of exist- ence and offered a new and enticing field for investigation. It was also in the same year, 1871, that Stimpson, one of the enthusiastic members of the old Chicago Academy of Sciences, conducted some dredging expeditions in the deep water of Lake Michigan, while about the same time Hoy, Milner and Forbes en- tered upon investigations at other points on these same lakes. The Chicago Academy and its collections, together with valuable manuscripts of Stimpson, were destroyed in the great fire, the U. S. Fish Commis- sion, under whose auspices the work of Hoy and Milner was inaugurated, did not pur- sue further the investigations on the lakes, and for years Forbes was the only investi- gator who occupied himself in this country with the study of lacustrine life. To his work and influence we owe beyond a doubt in our own country the awakened interest in limnobiology, and under his direction also was established the first general fresh- water biological station on this continent, of which more in another connection. The impulse toward the investigation of fresh-water life which was inaugurated by these men, gradually attracted to itself workers, slowly at first, but approximately a decade ago, with a sudden start the ranks of such were rapidly filled up. An enor- mous number of ponds and lakes, large and small, scattered over the surface of the continents, afforded an almost unlimited field for investigation, and many early studies were, to say the least, decidedly de- sultory. There were few workers who were content to confine themselves to a single locality, or to a well-defined problem. A scanty collection was made to serve as the basis of a faunal list supposed to charac- APRIL 7, 1899. ] terize the body of water in question, and the enumeration of species was regarded as the ne plus ultra of many investigators. Like the spiritless systematic zoology, which, in the work of many minor investi- gators, followed upon the example set by the great Linnaeus, so lacustrine investiga- tors in considerable number, were appar- ently satisfied to describe, as the results of brief sojourns, the fauna of a lake or lake regions, or, perhaps, even from a couple of vials of material collected by some rich patron in the course of a journey around the world, to discuss monographically the fresh-water fauna of the Fiji Islands, for instance. Under such circumstances there could be no biological study. The chief aim seemed to be to cover as much ground as possible ina short time. And what Lau- terborn said five years ago is even truer to- day in the light of our more extended ex- perience: ‘‘For the question as to the distribution of organisms, the methods so cherished even up to the present day of fishing in the greatest possible number of lakes (which recalls, in many respects, the - chase after new summits on the part of our modern high climbers—Hochtouristen !), really have only limited claim to scientific value, since through them but a very incom- plete picture of the faunal character of a water basin can be obtained.”’ The earlier investigators whose work has already been mentioned, Fritsch in Bohemia, and Forel in Switzerland, had been pursu- ing a single problem or investigating a lim- - ited locality for nearly twenty years, and they were among the first to emphasize the necessity of a modification of the prevalent tendency, and of a more formal character for lacustine work, if valuable scientific re- sults were to be expected from it. Forel was first to publish, in outline, a plan for the precise formal investigation of a body of water, in which emphasis was laid upon the necessity also of continuous and extended SCIENCE. 499 investigation, before satisfactory conclusions could be hoped for. This programme has suffered some modification in detail at the hands of various students, but, in its general features, remains the aim and desire of workers everywhere. With the apprecia- tion that such work must needs be formal, continuous and extended, came naturally the desire that stations of a permanent char- acter should be established at various points for the realization of the idea. And the first of these that were founded were of a general character, concerned with the bio- logical investigation of water as a problem of general scientific interest and importance. But almost immediately other influences made themselves felt which have led to the extension of the general idea along particu- lar lines of economic importance. Im- proved methods of fish catching and larger demands for fish food had brought various countries to the point where the drain on this kind of food supply was becoming very evident. The fish were being destroyed more rapidly than natural means could re- store their numbers, and it was felt that something must be done by governmental agency to replenish the depleted waters. The first expedient of collecting and keeping under satisfactory conditions large numbers of fish eggs until they should be hatched, and the young fry distributed through the waters, was not so successful as had been hoped. ‘The problem was too large to be attacked in such a superficial manner, and the further knowledge, which it became clear was absolutely necessary for proper handling of the question, must needs be sought through some means for the investi- gation of the conditions and determination of the steps necessary for the solution of the problem, and for carrying into effect the measures which might afford the de- sired relief. This led, first in Europe, to be sure, in connection with private enterprises for fish culture, to the establishment of bio- 500 logical experiment stations with the fish hatcheries, very much as chemical labora- tories are now necessary adjuncts of various manufacturing interests, or agricultural ex- periment stations are connected with the higher development of agricultural possi- bilities. There is, however, a still further demand which has led to the formation of institutions of the general type which we are considering. The water supply of our cities has always been a serious problem, and one of increasing interest in connection with crowded conditions in the more thickly settled countries of the world, and the bio- logical examination of the water, undertaken of necessity, has led to the organization of biological laboratories connected with the water systems of great cities, both on the continent, and in our own country. Having thus discussed the causes which have led to the establishment of limnobiolog- ical stations, we may now consider, briefly, the types which they present, and the par- ticular results which may be expected from a given sort. Of course all probable vari- ations may be found, and it is difficult to make any classification which is complete or even just, and yet, for convenience, we may divide these enterprises into a few great groups, recognizing the fact that cer- tain of them do not belong singly to any one class, but combine features of different types. But before outlining this classifica- tion, let me say that Ido not regard the existence or non-existence of a building or structure devoted to the purpose of investi- gation as a necessary mark of a biological station. Some of the most valuable contri- butions to general and special questions in this field have come from investigators or groups of investigators who have had no abiding place, while, on the other hand, stations well equipped with buildings and apparatus have in some instances, so far as can be ascertained, contributed noth- ing even after several years’ existence, to SCIENCE. [N. Vou. IX. No. 223. the progress of scientific knowledge. Ma- terial equipment is valuable, and, in gen- eral, conduces to better results, and yet it is the results themselves which finally de- termine the character of any enterprise and the position which it should hold in the esteem of the world. For the purposes of this discussion I pro- pose dividing biological stations into, first, individual resorts, second, periodic resorts, and third, permanent stations. Individual resorts are such as are characterized by the work of one or more individual investi- gators, working for the most part independ- ently, and solving their problems by virtue of their individual investigations. There are, of course, a large number of such places where some investigator has made sporadic or single efforts at the determination of the faunal character of a water basin, or has paid a number of occasional visits to such a locality for the same purpose. On the whole, these stations have accomplished comparatively little, although we find strik- ing contradictions of the general statement. They may also be of a more regular and definite character, and some of these per- sonal investigations have been most valuable in extending our present knowledge of fresh water life. It may be noted here that the permanence or regularity which contributes to the success may be either in the location of the point at which the investigations are carried out, or in the definiteness of the purpose which is followed; thus Im- hof’s investigations on the pelagic fauna of the Swiss lakes were permanent in their. value, and Zschokke’s investigation of the biological character of elevated lakes carried on at numerous points in the Alpine chain, has resulted in fundamentally important contributions to the lacustrine fauna of high altitudes. Yet neither of these was at all confined to a single locality, though limited by a definite purpose. Periodic resorts are those to which groups APRIL 7, 1899. ] of individuals are accustomed to go for a certain portion or season of the year, most commonly for a vacation period in accord- ance with which they are denominated summer or winter laboratories. The larger number of the investigators tends towards securing a more complete idea of the bio- logical problem as a whole, so that the re- sults obtained from such stations are of evident value. Yet, at the same time, it must be noted that they are distinctly in- ferior, even to many individual resorts, since during the larger portion of the year no in- vestigations are carried on and the results obtained are necessarily partial and incom- plete in their character, and hence unavail- able for the decision of the broader and more fundamental biological questions. Permanent stations are those at which operations are conducted throughout the entire year by a definite corps of observers. The continuity of their work renders their results valuable for the decision of general biological problems, and, at the same time, the permanent force which, in part, at least, is indispensable in such an institution, im- plies that the undivided attention of the observer is devoted to these problems; from this we may then expect justly that greater results will be obtained than in the case even of the best of individual resorts, since the investigators who are carying on opera- tions at these are, so far as I know, without exception, connected with educational or scientific institutions which demand at least a part of their time, and to that extent di- vide their interest and their energy. It is furthermore clear from what has been previously said that such permanent stations are of two distinct classes. First, those which may be denominated general, even though their work is of the greatest value for specia! purposes, and second, those which are distinctively technical by virtue of their association with specific enterprises. It is but natural that the different conti- SCIENCE. 5O1 nents are very unequally represented with regard to the number of stations that have been established upon them, and with re- spect to the knowledge that has been gained in reference to their fresh-water fauna and flora. Thus, our knowledge of the Aus- tralian fresh-water fauna is confined, at pres- ent, to the report of collections made by travelers, and to the investigation of speci- mens raised by Sars from dry mud which had been sent to him. Of Africa we know that fifteen years agoan expedition brought word from Lake Tanganyika that while rowing across its waters they encountered swarms of jelly-fish, while many of the gastropod shells which were brought back with them showed, in an equally striking way, their marine character. These reports have been confirmed by an expedition that has just returned, and the strikingly ma- rine complexion of the fauna of the lake ean hardly be doubted. This appears all the more strange since collections made at Lake Nyassa, which lies decidedly nearer the sea, show nothing but what is specif- ically lacustrine. Such facts point, of course, to the importance of the African fresh-water stations of the future. From various lakes of Asia, all the way from Ceylon to Siberia, numerous more or less extensive collections have been made by travelers, though there is hardly any- thing sufficiently extended to warrant the statement that a station has been located, even for a limited time, at any point, espe- cially since the collections have not been investigated by men who had made them, but have been turned over as alcoholic ma- terial to European investigators for study. We do know, however, that Lake Baikal, which is situated almost in the center of the continent, harbors a rich mollusean and crustacean fauna that is characteristically marine in its form, and is further distin- guished by possessing many sponges clearly of marine fype, and at least one species of 502 seal (Phoca), a genus which is typically oceanic. A discussion ou the meaning of these features lies far from the purpose of the present paper, but certainly such facts do point out most strikingly that the field of limnobiological investigation is not lack- ing in topics of extreme interest. From South America reports concerning the fresh water fauna are perhaps most scanty of all. Frenzel, a German investi- gator who lived many years in Argentine Republic, has published some interesting studies made while there on the Protozoa; a few isolated notices of the lacustrine fauna from various regions complete the list. From these statements it is apparent that the work done thus far outside of Europe and North America is exceedingly limited, and that for our judgment of the results in formal limnobiological investigations, we must look to the laboratories of these two continents. Among all European countries, Switzerland has furnished perhaps the great- est number of investigators and stations for limnobiology, together with the most ex- tended and valuable results, although even yet there is not in that country, so far as I can ascertain, a building exclusively devoted to the purposes of this investigation. First and foremost among these investigators may be mentioned Forel, of the University of Lausanne,* to whom reference has already been made. His investigations have been carried on for more than thirty years on Lake Geneva; to him we are indebted for the first knowledge of the abyssal fauna of a fresh-water lake, for the first extended program and plan for the investigation of such a lake, and for the first effort towards the realization of such a plan, which finds its full expression in his ‘Lac Léman,’ a monograph at present in the course of pub- * In a sense the laboratory of the University, which is located near the shore of the lake, is the building of the station, as in Wisconsin, mentioned below. SCIENCE. [N. S. Vou. IX. No. 223. lication ; the volumes which have appeared thus far treat of physical, chemical, and meteorological conditions on the lake, and are to be followed by others which will com- plete, with the flora and fauna, the entire limnologic investigation. The series will make a magnificent and permanent contri- bution to lacustrine investigation, and will . serve as a model for the work of all times. The work of Zschokke, professor at the University of Basel, has been directed as already mentioned towards the elucidation of the faunal aspect of elevated lakes. It has been carried on through many years at differents points, including the lakes of the Jura to the westward, as well as those in various regions of the Alps proper, and his papers on the fauna of elevated lakes contain the only general statement of the problem as well as of the char- acteristic features of such localities that has yet appeared. Lake Constance has been the scene in recent years of the work of numerous investigators under the guid- ance of an association for the investigation of the lake, which has its headquarters at Lindau. The published accounts of these investigations have thus far been prelimi- nary in character, and I am unable to learn whether there is a building devoted to the purposes of investigation, and whether the work is carried on throughout the entire year. This lake was the scene of early investi- gations by Weismann in 1877, and the pres- ent work which was inaugurated about 1893 is under the direction of Hofer, of the University of Munich. To Bohemia belongs the honor of having had the first definite building for lacustrine investigations in the form of the Bohemian Portable Laboratory which was constructed, in 1888, under the direction of Professor Fritsch, of the University of Prague. Refer- ence has already been made to the early work of this investigator, who, in 1871, APRIL 7, 1899. ] reported to the Academy of Sciences, in Prague, the results of the investigations of Black Sea, a small body of water in the Bohemian forest, with reference to the dis- tribution of animals according to the depth of the water and their reiation to the shore. These investigation which were extended to other lakes in the same year, are, I be- lieve, the first at least’ to be recorded that were carried. out in this way. It was, how- ever, in 1888 before Fritsch sueceeded in ob- taining funds for a small portable zoological laboratory having some twelve square me- ters of floor surface. Thestation remained at its first location four years, and was re- placed by a permanent structure when it was removed to another locality. This portable laboratory has been regularly visited at brief intervals of time by the di- rector and his associates in the three locali- ties at which it has been situated during the last ten years, and the contributions from this work constitute most valuable studies on the lacustrine biology of Bohemia. In Finland there exists the laboratory of Esbo-Lofo, on one of the small islands which, though primarily a marine station, is so favorably located with reference to bodies of fresh water that it has devoted a consid- erable portion of its energy to the investi- gation of the fresh water fauna with valua- ble results. This laboratory has beeu maintained since 1895 under the direction of Professor Levander. Its contributions are published in the ‘ Acta Societatis pro Fauna et Flora Fennica.’ One of its workers, Dr. Stenroos, has for several years individually visited Lake Nurmijarvi, one of the small inland lakes with which Fin- land is so plentifully supplied, a body of water, which though itis about two and five- tenths kilometers in length by one in width, has a maximum depth of only one meter; he has given us a very complete faunistic and biologic study of its life. Russia has recently established a station SCIENCE. 503 on Glubokoe Osero, or Deep Lake, in the Province of Moscow, under the patronage of the Imperial Russian Society for Fish Culture. The station is under the direction of Professor Zograf, of Moscow University, whose contributions to lacustrine investi- gation, have been made known especially in a paper on the lake regions of Russia from _the biologic standpoint, which was read before the International Zoological Congress in 1893. I infer that the station is a per- manent one, though probably of technical character, although precise information on these points has not been obtained. Hun- gary has maintained for some years a lacus- trine station on Lake Balaton, one of the largest fresh-water bodies of Europe, hav- ing an area of over 266 square miles, though its maximum depth appears to be only 11 meters; it is surrounded by enormous marshy areas which give thus varied con- ditions for the development of life. Several parts of the report on these investigations have already been published. In France there exists a lacustrine laboratory near’ Clermont-Ferrand, which seems to have been organized in 1893; no reports or con- tributions from the station are recorded in the bibliographical records. At Paris, Drs. Richard and de Guerne have investigated collections from a large number of lakes not only in France and neighboring coun- tries, but even from Algeria, Syria, the Azores and other points, and have pub- lished valuable contributions on the distri- bution of fresh-water crustacea, as well as systematic monographs of various groups. In Germany all types of stations are represented, as might be expected, from the importance of scientific study in that na- tion. Individual investigators, not a few, have examined various lakes or lake re- gions, most prominent among them being undoubtedly Apstein, whose studies on Holstein lakes have extended over many years, and whose work on fresh-water plank- 504 ton is the first general statement of the problems and of the methods used by Hen- sen in the investigation of the marine life with such success, and by Apstein first ap- plied to lacustrine investigation. Prob- ably the best known fresh-water station in the world is that on Lake Ploen also in Holstein. This was the first permanent general fresh-water station to be established in the world. It owes its inception to the energy of its present director, Dr. Zacharias, whose plan was to establish for fresh water an institution similar to the Naples marine biological station. The station opened in 1891, and since that time it has been in continuous operation, and has afforded opportunities for investigation to a large number of scientific workers both German and foreign. It is the most pretentious of all fresh-water stations, having a building two stories in height, with numerous labo- ratory rooms and equipped with abundant apparatus for collecting and investigating. From it has been published yearly, since 1893, a volume of studies, and the director has also contributed largely to other jour- nals on these problems. Two other stations in Germany owe their inception to the fishery problem, and have for their purpose more particularly the investigation of those limnologic questions which deal particularly with the life of the fishes. One of these is located at Miggelsee, near Berlin, and is conducted under the auspices of the Ger- man Fishery Association. The other, at Trachenberg, is under the auspices of the Silesian Fisheries’ Association. Both have made important contributions to the bio- logical questions concerned in fish culture. All the North American stations which are known to me lie within the limits of the United States, and they represent all the various types of such institutions. A con- siderable number of workers have reported isolated investigations of lakes in all parts of the country from Maine to California. SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. 1X. No, 223. Among the most important of these occa- sional observations are those made by Forbes on the fauna of elevated lakes in the Rocky Mountains. The observations which he has recorded were made in the course of a preliminary investigation of these lakes by the United States Fish Commission, and constitute the only information on record with reference to the lakes of the country west of the Missouri river. There are but two localities which may be listed, however, as individual resorts sufficiently regularly visited to entitle them to more particular mention in this place. Green Lake, in Wisconsin, has been carefully studied by Professor Marsh, of Ripon College, and his work has yielded valuable information with reference to the vertical distribution of the erustacea and with regard to the deep water fauna of the lake. Here he was able to confirm the observation of Stimpson, on Lake Michigan, that there are found in the deep waters of our large lakes crustacea of a purely marine type. At Lake Mendota, in Wisconsin, on the shores of which is lo- cated the State University, a careful inves- tigation, extending over a very considerable number of years, has been carried on by Professor Birge of the University. The re- sults which he has obtained with reference to the distribution, both vertical and sea- sonal, have been published by the Wiscon- sin Academy and are not only the most extensive, but beyond all comparison the most precise investigation which has been made on this problem. Of course, in one sense, this station has no building, but the scientific laboratory of the University, standing within a stone’s throw of the shore of the lake, affords op- portunities which are not surpassed at any fresh-water station in the world. Quite a number of periodic resorts of the type of summer laboratories are to be found in various parts of the country. Some of these are merely summer schools, such as APRIL 7, 1899. ] the biological laboratory of the Chautauqua College of Liberal Arts, on Lake Chautau- qua. Others are both for teaching and for investigation, while only a small number are exclusively devoted to the investigation of limnologic problems from one standpoint or another. The University of Minnesota has maintained at Gull Lake, near the cen- ter of the State, a laboratory for summer work by members of the University, and for the prosecution of the natural history sur- vey of the State under the direction of Professor Nachtrieb, of the University. The State University of Ohio has conducted, since 1896,a lake laboratory near Sandusky, on Lake Erie. It occupies one of the State fish hatcheries, and is supplied with the necessary apparatus by joint action of the University and State Fish Commission. Its purpose is to afford a convenient point of work for the members of the University, and also to aid in the prosecution of the State Biological Survey, which is being car- ried on by the Ohio Academy of Sciences. The immense stretches of shallow water, marshy regions, and protected areas, to- gether with the varied character of shore and the open lake within. easy reaching dis- tance, serve to make Sandusky perhaps the most favorable place on Lake ‘Erie for the study of the fresh-water fauna and flora. The station was closed a year ago, owing to the death of the Director, Professor Kelli- cott. In 1895 the University of Indiana opened a Biological Station on the shore of Turkey Lake in the northern part of the State, un- der the direction of Professor Eigenmann of the University; a constantly increasing number of students has visited the station each summer. The majority of them have been teachers of the State engaged in the prosecution of work to equip them for their teaching, but others have also assisted in carrying out a general survey of the lake fauna and in the collection of material to SCIENCE, 505 illustrate annual variation and associated problems. For comparison, collections have been made from adjacent lakes connected with other water basins. In the coming year the station is to be moved to the shores of Winona Lake, some 18 miles from the present location, where two building are to be constructed for its use by the Winona Assembly. The contributions from the laboratory have been published in the Pro- ceedings of the Indiana Academy. For a number of years the Michigan Fish Commission maintained a force of a few scientific investigators and assistants in con- ducting a biological examination of the in- land lakes of the State, under the direction of Professor Reighard of the University of Michigan. In 1893 it was determined to transfer the seat of operations from inland waters to one of the Great Lakes, and by virtue, both of its convenient location and of its importance as a famous spawning ground of the lake fish, which had, how- ever, almost ceased to visit it, Lake St. Clair was decided upon as the locality for the first year and the laboratory was located on a small bay at the northwest shore of the lake. The party consisted of half a dozen scientific workers whose attention was ex- clusively devoted each to his particular field, and the results of the survey were published in bulletins of the Michigan Fish Commission. In 1894 the station was moved to Charlevoix, a famous fishing region on the eastern shore of Lake Michigan, and, owing to the absence of Professor Reighard, in Europe, I was requested to take charge of the work. The scientific force and the methods of work were similar to those of the preceding year, but the location brought us in contact, not only with shallow waters, but also with the deeper regions of Lake Michigan, and the party made investiga- tions and collections of a precise character in the deepest fresh water which has as yet been investigated by such methods. The 506 results of the summer’s work were published in a bulletin of the Commission. Unfavor- able financial conditions compelled the sus- pension of the work on the part of the Michigan Fish Commission, but American investigators owe much to the impetus which has been given to such work through their agency. For many years the U.S. Fish Commis- sion has been urged to establish on the Great Lakes a biological station similar to that which has long been maintained on the ocean, at Woods Hole, Mass. Finally, a year ago,a prelininary survey was under- taken with a view to deciding the advisa- bility of such a movement and Professor Reighard was requested to assume the leadership of the enterprise. The U. 5S. Fish Hatchery at Put-in-Bay, a small island in the center of the west end of Lake Erie, was selected as the seat of operations and a party of scientific workers spent two months in studying the fauna and flora of the adjacent waters. It is to be hoped that this work may develop into a permanent experiment station on the Great Lakes. Among permanent American stations of a technical character, the Experimental Filter Station of the Massachusetts Board of Health, located at Lawrence, is the best known as it is also, perhaps, the most famous of its kind in the world. It has been in continuous operation since 1887 and has conducted extended experiments on the biological examination of drinking waters; the methods worked out in con- nection with them are now standard for such purposes. Similar technical labora- tories are in operation in Boston, Lynn, Worcester and other cities ; but in most of them the biological examination of waters is only a secondary function. The Mount Prospect Laboratory, organized recently in connection with the Brooklyn Water Works, and placed under the direction of Mr. G. C. Whipple, whose contributions to limno- SCIENCE. [N.S.)) Von. DX. “No! 223: biologic questions are well known, is more particularly devoted to the investigation of questions connected with the character of the water supply. Numerous samples taken from all the sources of the city’s sup- ply are subjected each week to physical, chemical, microscopical, and bacteriological examinations, and the quality of the water controlled thereby, since the reports made to the chief engineer serve to guide him in the choice of the sources from which the water isdrawn. The results of such studies are also of great importance in general lim- nologic questions. The University of Illinois was extremely fortunate in having associated with it, by statute, a state laboratory of natural his- tory which has been engaged for many years in a natural history survey of the State. Under the direction of Professor Forbes, whose pioneer work on the lake fauna has already been noted, particular attention was paid to such questions as the food of fresh water fishes, and the distribution of various groups of fresh water organisms, so that both by preliminary work, and in the person of its director, the state laboratory was pecu- liarly fitted for the successful inauguration of an Illinois Biological Station which be- came possible under state grant in 1894. The laboratory secured a permanent super- intendent in the person of Dr. Kofoid a year. later, and work has been carried on continu- ously by a permanent force since that date. The laboratory was unique in its inception since the director, Dr. Forbes, conceived the idea of locating it on a river system rather than as all previous stations on a lake, and it was not only the first in the world, but is yet the only station which has peculiarly attacked the problems of such a system. The Illinois river and its dependent waters were selected as the field of opera- tions and Havanna, Ill., as the center of work. The river here presents in its cut- offs, bayous, shallow, marshy tracts, sandy APRIL 7, 1899. ] areas with wooded margins and regions of spring fed waters, and with the enormous extent of land covered at high water, a va- riety of conditions which it must be con- fessed could not be surpassed, and hardly equalled elsewhere.. The abundance and variety of the flora and fauna, both in the higher and lower forms of life, demonstrate the good judgment exercised in the choice of locality. A noteworthy feature in the equipment of this station, and so far as I know, one that is unique, is the floating laboratory which enables an easy transfer of operations to other points, where work can be carried on for comparison or contrast, with equipment and environment as satis- factory as that which exists ina permanent building, but with the flexibility and facility of movement which characterizes field studies. The work has been conducted un- interruptedly for more than three years, and the results include studies on the in- sects and their development, on the earth- worms, on the Protozoa and rotifers, on various groups of crustaceans and general investigations on plankton methods and on the distribution of the plankton, while some work has also been done on the plant life of water. These studies have been pub- lished in the Bulletin of the Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Let us consider, in conclusion, the func- tion and future development of these insti- tutions. It is perfectly clear that the work of the different types of fresh-water sta- tions will vary somewhat with the class, and Zacharias has outlined carefully the differences in the work of the fixed and of the movable stations. But these are, after all, minor differences. All stations, whether fixed or movable, have really three objects : teaching, investigating, experimenting, ob- jects which may be subserved directly or indirectly, or in both ways, by each one of them. It is unquestionably true that the tendency within recent years has been to SCIENCE. 5O7 make the university trained scientist a lab- oratory man, unacquainted with work out of doors and among living things. This has reacted unfavorably upon his teaching powers, and thus indirectly upon the entire schoolsystem. Not that subjects in natural history are not better taught in our second- ary schools than they were twenty years ago, when, in truth, they were hardly taught at all, but that the naturalist to-day is not trained as an outdoor observer and is little capable of handling himself and his work in a new environment. As Forbes says: “Tt is, in fact, the biological station, wisely and liberally managed, which is to restore to us what is best in the naturalist of the old school united to what is best in the lab- oratory student of the new.’’ Thus, both through the influence of the investigators in the case of those stations which do not carry on directly any educational work, and through the teaching of those which do conduct summer instructional courses, new life will be instilled into the teaching of natural history throughout our country. In the second place, the fresh-water sta- tion is a center for investigation with all its stimulating effects on the individual thus brought in contact with problems of Nature and efforts for their solution, and in the contributions to the advancement of knowl- edge which are the fruits of a careful work on the part of its attachés. All that has been said of the advantages of marine sta- tions applies equally well to fresh-water laboratories, together with the added ad- vantages that their accessibility brings these advantages to considerable regions which would otherwise be entirely without them by virtue of their distance from the sea. It is unnecessary that I should emphasize further this phase of the question, or dwell upon the greater simplicity of biological conditions in fresh-water over those which exist in the ocean. These factors have been forcibly presented by many writers. 508 Finally, the fresh-water station should be above all things an experimental one, and in this direction the most valuable re- sults are to be looked for, both from the general scientific and from the technical standpoint. To thescientist, this needs no demonstration ; but it is essential that the importance of such work, especially for fish culture, be more widely understood. The advance in agricultural methods in the United States is unquestionably due in large part to the development of a splendid series of agricultural experiment stations in which agricultural problems have been sub- jected to intensive experimentation. Con- trasted with this, conditions in fish culture present almost the opposite extreme. Fish eggs have been hatched in enormous num- bers, but what is known of their subsequent history or what has been done to insure the safe development to maturity of the fish ? Present methods have reached their limit and the subject must be attacked from a different standpoint. Fish culture should receive by the liberality of state and nation the same favors that have been extended to agriculture, the use of permanent and well- equipped experiment stations where trained workers shall devote their time and energy to the solution of its problems. 'horough- ness and continuity are essential, for these problems really deal with all conditions of existence in the water. Of what does the food of each fish consist, where is it found and in what amount, how may it be in- creased and improved ; to what extent and how can the number of fish be multiplied, and how far is this profitable ; what are the best kinds of fish and what new varieties can be produced? These are a few of the many questions to be solved. The problems outlined are indeed vast, and yet we may be confident that their so- lution lies easily within the power of the human intellect, for they are all paralleled in the history of the agricultural develop- SCIENCE, (N.S. Von. IX. No. 223. ment of the race; and man, relying upon his success in the past, may go forward with supreme confidence to the attainment of their solution in this new field. Henry B. Warp. ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA. BRUNISSURE OF THE VINE AND OTHER PLANTS. Since the publication, in 1892, of the pa- pers by Viala and Sauvageau describing Brunissure of the Vine and the California Vine disease as due to Plasmodiophora vitis (Viala et Sauv.) and P. californica (Viala et Sauv.) much interest has been mani- fested in these supposed new parasites. F. Debray and A. Brive in Revue de Viticul- ture, 1895, claimed to have found the para- site in a large number of plants belonging to numerous families and genera. They made a new genus for the organism calling it Pseudocommis vitis. By far the best work, however, has been done by Viala and Sau- vageau. A full discussion of their work with bibliography may be found in ‘ Les Maladies de la Vigne, par Pierre Viala, Tro- isiéme édition 1893, pp. 400-413. Any one who has observed for himself the pecu- liar structures described would most likely decide at once that they must belong, or be at least closely related, to the genus Plas- modiophora. The peculiar vacuolate plas- modium-like structures may be best studied, following the directions of Viala (in Mal- adies de la Vigne), by slowly clearing the sections or tissues in dilute eau de javelle. The protoplasm of the host cell is said to be dissolved, while that of the plasmodes re- mains for a long time unattacked. The plasmodes may then be colored with iodine or other stains, bringing out their structure very sharply. I have recently repeated these experiments very carefully and find everything described by Viala and Sau- vageau in Vitis and also as described by APRIL 7, 1899.] ‘Debray in other plants. In fact, the phe- nomena can be produced in all plants so far as I have examined, whether healthy or dis- eased, especially in cells containing chloro- phyll. I obtained the plasmode structures readily in leaves and stems of Vitis, Ialiwm harrisii, Tobacco, Tomato, Rose and Hyacinth and in Spirogyra cells. If one watches the ac- tion of eau de javelle closely under the mi- croscope a slight plasmolysis of the cells is first seen which may increase or afterwards - disappear. The chloroplasts swell and be- come colorless and unite with each other, and usually with the rest of the protein, into an amorphous mass almost transpar- ent. This mass after a time contracts into a single vacuolate plasmodium-like struc- ture or into several such structures in each cell. These become highly refractive and remain without much change for several hours or disappear, according to the strength of the reagent. In this stage the plasmodes may be coagulated with alcohol or iodine and stained and permanently mounted in glycerine containing alcohol or iodine. If dilute glycerine or pure water is added be- fore coagulation the plasmode structures swell, lose their high refraction and _ be- come amorphous. In coagulation these formations behave like any albuminoid substance. Their formation, however, is entirely different from the separation of active albumen in the cell by the addi- tion of an aqueous solution of caffeine as described by Dr. Loew. This difference will be discussed in a fuller paper now in preparation. The action of the eau de ja- velle is most likely an oxidation in the pres- ence of an alkali. Changes of the kind de- scribed are not produced by a mixture of sodium chloride 5% and sodium hydrate 1% or of either of these acting alone. A phenomenon quite similar, however, is pro- duced in the Lily if the tissues are first soaked in peroxide of hydrogen till discol- ored and sections then mounted in sodium SCIENCE. 509 chloride 5% and sodium hydrate1%. The cell contents then quickly swell and be- come amorphous, and highly refractive- plasmode structures separate out. These gradually disappear if not coagulated with iodine or alcohol. In the latter case they behave as do the similar structures pro- duced by the eau de javelle. If the theory is correct that these changes are pro- duced by an oxidation of the chloroplasts and other cell contents in an alkaline me- dium it explains why such structures, or a reticulate form of them, usually appear in cells which slowly die and become brown around the punctures of aphids in the leaf of the Bermuda lily. Numerous tests made by the writer have shown that plants which react in this manner to aphis punctures contain much larger quantities of oxidizing enzyme than plants which do not so react. The presence of the substance injected into the wound by the aphis probably causes the neighboring cells to increase still more in oxidizing enzyme until the presence of the latter in excessive quantity destroys or oxi- dizes the chloroplasts. The cell slowly dies, and the rest of the cell contents may then be attacked. A brownish shrunken amor- phous mass is left. On the addition of dilute potassium hydrate or sodium hydrate to sections from such spots the oxidized protoplasm in the cells which have turned brown swells up and becomes a reticulated or vacuolate mass, such as is often obtained with the eau de javelle or the peroxide of hydrogen and sodium hydrate. It is quite likely, therefore, that plasmode structures would be formed by an alkali in any cells that had previously become oxidized either from the presence of oxidizing enzyme in themselves or from any other cause. These observations indicate quite decidedly that the supposed Plasmodiophora vitis or Pseudocommis vitis are nothing but micro- chemical reactions, brought on by oxidations and the influence of an alkali upon the en- 510 tire protein contents of cells, especially upon chloroplasts. ; A complete account of the work with il- lustrations will be published soon. Apert F. Woops. DIVISION OF VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY AND PatHoLtocy, U. 8. Dept. AGRICULTURE. AN AUTOMATIC MERCURY PUMP. AurHoucH there is nothing especially new in regard to the pump proper, the method of electrical control may be suffi- ciently novel to warrant a brief description. 410 Volts The pump proper is a modification of a common form of Geissler pump. It con- sists of a long glass tube, about 14 inches in diameter, which has a mercury trap and a small glass valve at the top. The bottom of the tube is drawn down and dips into a SCIENCE. ° [N.S. Vou. LX. No. 223. flask filled with mercury. A tight joint is made between the flask and pump by a rub- ber stopper. This stopper also serves asa flexible support for the body of the pump. The exhaust tube is sealed into the pump just above the point at which the pump passes into the flask. The arrangement is best shown by the figure. The tube to be exhausted is attached to the pump, through a drying bulb filled with anhydrous phosphorie acid, by a simple ground joint with a mercury seal. The valve at the top of the pump is ground to <= > | Trop made of capillary tube tanan bore Vatue, Fr fecth Drying Rute, Gyound jars uath antreury seal Refay Solenoid. Three urany coche tonmyuaod>d fit its seat and so weighted by filling with mercury that it closes, leaving sufficient mercury above it to form a tight joint. Di- mensions which give very satisfactory re- sults are shown on the figure, Suction is applied permanently to the top of the pump APRIL 7, 1899. ] above the valve. The mercury in the pump is raised or lowered by applying atmos- pheric pressure or suction to the flask. The suction necessary to operate the pump is obtained by a small watbr-jet pump giving a vacuum of about 28 inches. A pump with the valve alone will work fairly well, except that occasionally, when the quantity of air taken out at each stroke becomes small, a little bubble will cling to the valve and refuse to pass out of the pump. To avoid this, a trap is added below the valve to prevent any air which might fail to pass the valve from returning to the pump. The only requisite to make the pump automatic is to have some means of con- trolling a three-way cock which will apply either pressure or suction to the flask. This control is obtained electrically by making and breaking a circuit in the valve at the top, and in a float in the flask at the bottom. A permanent electrical connection is made with the mercury in the flask at the bottom. A platinum wire sealed into the tip of the valve serves to connect electrically the mercury in the valve with that in the pump. Aniron wire dips into the stem of the valve and serves as a final contact. The mercury rising in the pump first makes contact with the inside of the valve through the platinum wire. As it continues to rise the valve opens floats and ompletes the circuit by the iron wire. It will be seen that the final contact is made in the valve, and any sparking that may occur can in no way foul the mercury in the pump. When the mercury in the pump reaches its lowest level a float in the flask similar to the valve at the top closes another circuit. These two circuits control a relay which in turn controls a solenoid connected to the three-way cock. The solonoid is wound for 110 volts and takes only a small current. One or two Leclanché cells are sufficient for the relay. The electrical connections are shown in the figure. SCIENCE. 511 A pump of this form has been in use at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology for over two years, and has proved very satisfactory. It works quickly, and will give high Crookes vacuum without trou- ble. In starting the pump, the pump and whatever may be attached to it are first exhausted by the water pump to about two or three inches’ pressure. For the first few strokes, which are make by hand, the mer- cury is allowed to rise only part way in the pump. After this the necessary electrical circuits may be closed and the pump will take care of itself. In this way the dan- gerous hammering of the mercury occurring when the quantity of air taken out at each stroke is large can be avoided. I am indebted to Mr. C. L. Norton for valuable assistance in developing this pump. Ratrg R. LAWRENCE. RoGERS LABORATORY OF PHYSICS, MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. The Wonderful Century. By ALFRED RUSSELL WALLACE. As the human mind is more wonderful than anything else that we find in nature, so the greatest and most significant difference between the ‘ Wonderful Century’ and all that had gone before is an intellectual difference. It is not invention and discovery and the ex- tension of man’s dominion over nature, but the establishment of the conviction that we know no limit to this movement, that is the chief dis- tinction of our century. Among those who have, in our day, guided the thoughts of men to this conviction, future historians will. give the highest place to Lyell, and Wallace and Darwin; for no one in our century has done more than they to assure us that the scientific method is adequate; even if successive generations of ‘ philosophers’ still continue to teach that the very top and perfec- tion of human wisdom is the assertion that we know, and can know, nothing. 512 With modesty which some hold to do him less than justice, Wallace believed that Darwin so much surpassed him in strength and wisdom and in acquaintance with nature that it became his duty to devote his life to the assistance of Darwin in his efforts to extend the province of human knowledge into regions that had been declared closed. The intellectual revolution has come about, nor will the thoughtful permit Wallace’s part in bringing it about to be for- gotten; nor can we forget the generous devo- tion which chose the advancement of truth before the natural desire for recognition and dis- tinction. Noonecan suspect that such a man as Wallace has proved himself will ignore or de- preciate the share of anyone in this great work, and few chapters of his book on ‘ The Wonder- ful Century’ are more interesting than the one in which he touches, very gently and tenderly, upon the part which the ‘ philosophers’ have had in the progress of natural science. It is one thing to show that there is no logical basis for belief that species are immutable, but it is quite a different matter to show what modifies species. It was by finding out, and not by exposing the weakness in the logic of those who asserted that we never can find out, that Wallace and Darwin passed the bounds where they had been told that natural knowledge ends. Lamarck, and Chambers, and Herbert Spen- cer, and many others, even Wallace himself, had shown that there is no reason to doubt that species are mutable; but all had failed to show how the changes take place ; and many eminent men of science, as well as the general public, refused to consider beliefs which were as yet beliefs and nothing more. What educated public opinion was before the publication of the ‘Origin’ is shown, says Wallace, by the fact that neither Lamarck nor Herbert Spencer nor the author of the ‘ Ves- tiges’ had been able to make any impression upon it. The very idea of progressive develop- ment of species from other species was held to be a ‘heresy’ by such great and liberal-minded men as Sir John Herschel and Sir Charles Lyell; the latter writer declaring, in the earlier editions of his great work, that the facts of geology are ‘ fatal to the theory of progressive SCIENCE. [N. S. Von. IX. No. 223. development.’ The whole literary and scientific worlds were violently opposed to all such theo- ries, and altogether disbelieved in the possibility of establishing them. It had been so long the custom to treat species as special creations, and the mode of their creation as the ‘ mystery of mysteries,’ that it had come to be considered not only presumptuous, but almost impious, for any individual to profess to have lifted the veil from what was held to be the greatest and most mysterious of Nature’s secrets. Wallace tells us, ‘ The Wonderful Century,’ p. 139, that after he had studied what had been written, and even after he had himself written about the mutability of species: ‘‘I had no conception of how or why each new form had come into existence with all its beautiful adap- tations to its special mode of life; and though the subject was continually being pondered over, no light came to me till three years later (February, 1858), under somewhat peculiar circumstances. I was then living at Ternate, in the Moluccas, and was suffering from a rather severe attack of intermittent fever, which prostrated me for several hours every day dur- ing the cold and succeeding hot fits. During one of these fits, while again considering the problem of the origin of species, something led me to think of Malthus’ Essay on Population (which I had read about ten years before), and the ‘positive checks’—war, disease, famine, accidents, etec.—which he adduced as keeping all savage nations nearly stationary. It then occurred to me that these checks must also act upon animals, and keep down their numbers; and as they increase so much faster than man does, while their numbers are always nearly or quite stationary, it was clear that these checks in their case must be far more powerful, since a number equal to the whole increase must be cut off by them each year. While vaguely thinking how this would affect any species, there suddenly flashed upon me the idea of the survival of the fittest—that the indi- viduals removed by these checks must be, on the whole, inferior to those that survived. Then, considering the variations continually oc- curring in every fresh generation of animals or plants, and the changes of climate, of food, of enemies always in progress, the whole method APRIL 7, 1899. ] of specific modification became clear to me, and in the two hours of my fit I had thought out the main points of the theory.’’ If this had been only a fortunate guess it would have little interest, for no one cares to ask whether Empedocles, or Wells, or Mathew, or Darwin, or Herbert Spencor, or Wallace first had this happy thought. It was because Wallace had spent years of hard work in gath- ering facts and in pondering them that he was able to see that this sudden product of his ‘ fit’ was worthy of further examination, and be- cause he devoted the rest of his life to its ap- plication to new discoveries that he is held to be the joint discoverer of the law of Natural Selection. The origin of species by means of natural se- lection is now universally accepted as a demon- strated principle. ‘‘This,’’ says Wallace, ‘is, of course, partly due to the colossal work of Herbert Spencer; but for one reader of his works there are probably ten of Darwin’s, and the es- tablishment of the theory of the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection is wholly Darwin’s work. That book, together with those which succeeded it, has so firmly established the doc- trine of progressive development of species by the ordinary processes of multiplication and variation that there is now, I believe, scarcely a single living naturalist who doubts it. Prob- ably so complete a change’ of educated opinion, on a question of such vast difficulty and com- plexity, was never before effected in so short a time. It not only places the name of Darwin on a ievel with that of Newton, but his work will always be considered as one of the greatest, if not the very greatest, of the scientific achievements of the nineteenth century, rich as that century has been in great discoveries in every department of physical science.”’ To this we must add that, so long as the ‘ Origin of Species’ holds its place on the shelves of students, close beside it we shall find the ‘Malay Archipelago ;’ for the writer of this review has.no doubt that Wallace will be one of those to whom future generations will say: ‘Friend, Go up higher.’’ W. K. Brooks. JOHNS HopKINS UNIVERSITY, BALTIMORE. SCIENCE, 515 The Principles of Bacteriology. NAND HUEPPE. By Dr. FErpI- Translated by PROFESSOR E. O. JorDAN. Chicago, The Open Court Publishing Co. Pp. 455. American bacteriologists certainly owe a debt of gratitude to Professor Jordan for putting into clear English this valuable contribution to the science of bacteriology of Professor Hueppe, of Prague. Hueppe’s contribution to bacteri- ology in this volume is no ordinary one. The book is not simply a review of facts, but is de- cidedly original. From the first to the last the author and his opinions are decidedly in eyi- dence. Whether or not one is inclined to agree with him in all his conclusions, no one will question the force of the arguments with which he upholds his opinions. After giving some general information in re- gard to bacteria (in which the author accepts the conclusion that the tuberculous bacillus is not a bacterium at all) he deals in successive chapters with the vital phenomena of bacteria, pathogenic bacteria, the cause of infectious dis- eases, cure by combating the cause, immunity, prevention and history. The chapter upon vital phenomena of bacteria is especially valu- able, since it treats, ina comprehensive manner, of the somewhat obscure subject of the chem- istry of bacterial poisons and bacterial nu- trients. But the most suggestive part of the work be- gins with the chapter upon the cause of infec- tious disease. Here he sets himself in opposi- tion to the school of Koch by denying that bacteria can in any proper sense be regarded as the cause of disease, and especially repudiating the idea that definite species of bateria are the ‘specific’ cause of ‘specific’ diseases. No one can question Hueppe’s thorough acquaintance with the facts of modern bacteriology, and it seems a little strange that he can hold a position so gener- ally at variance with that of most bacteriolo- gists. But we soon learn that his position is not so different from that of Koch as at first ap- pears, and perhaps not so different as Hueppe triesto make it appear. Hueppe is, of course, fully aware that diseases are produced in ani- mals by inoculating them with certain bacteria cultures. His criticism is simply against the claim that they are the cause of the disease and 514 SCIENCE. that definite species cause definite diseases. That they provoke diseases he recognizes ; that they cause them he denies. His own position is essentially as follows: Disease and health alike are attributes of the activity of living cells. Health is the result of the normal activity and disease of the abnormal activity of these cells, and it is hardly more correct to say that dis- ease is caused by bacteria than to say that health is caused by their absence. Disease is a process, not an entity, and is really caused by some condition of the living cells which makes them liable to act abnormally when stimu- lated. No disease can appear in the body except such as are predisposed in the living cells. The bacteria serve as a stimulus just as the spark serves as a stimulus for gun- powder. The spark is not the cause of the explosion, though it may excite it. There isa certain amount of resistance to be overcome before the cells will start to act abnormally, and the bacteria simply overcome this resistance. We are learning to appreciate more and more fully that one animal may be predisposed to a disease while another is more resistant, a fact in itself which shows that we are speaking very loosely when we say that the bacteria cause the disease. According to Hueppe disease is the result of a number of factors of unequal weight. External conditions constitute one factor, the condition of the body cells a second, and the presence of certain bacteria a third. When together they produce disease. Break the chain as one link and there is no disease. The school of Koch has paid attention to one of these links, the school of Virchow to the sec- ond, while Petinkoffer is trying to study the third, 7. e., external conditions. Hueppe in- sists that neither one causes the disease, but all three together. Disease is a vital activity, and while bacteria are needed to stimulate it they don’t properly cause it. This conception, of course, largely deter- mines the position which Hueppe takes in the other topics considered. The question of com- bating the disease by combating the bacteria is only one side of the matter. Prevention in- volves something more than simply looking after the bacteria. Hygienic measures are mis- [N.S. Von. IX. No. 223. directed if they look simply toward the destruc- tion of bacteria. The disinfecting mania which developed a few years ago he regards as exag- gerated and largely needless. Hygienic measures in the past have been very useful and produced a decided improvement in public health, but this has not been because they have destroyed the ‘specific’ bacteria. Rarely do we succeed in this object. Sanitariums for tuberculosis pay little attention to the matter of germs. The success has resulted from the fact that hygienic measures and cleanliness, together with fresh air and sunlight, have improved the general health, given the cells greater vitality and made the individual less disposed to acquire the dis- ease. They are successful because they have been directed to the second link in the chain rather than the third. It is a question whether his position is quite so much at variance with generally accepted belief as Hueppe is inclined to think. In de- nying that distinct bacteria are ‘specific’ he fails satisfactorily to reconcile this position with the fact that definite species do provoke definite diseases. He fails to make it clear just how the bacteria act to produce distinct dis- eases if they are not specific. It is a somewhat curious position to assume that the silk worms have always had a special predisposition to pebrine, but that this disposition only appeared when the pebrine organism made its appear- ance, especially as it appears that all individuals yield to the attacks of this germ. But appar- ently Hueppe would assume that the animals have had this predisposition to a disease which never had a chance to develop until the proper organism produced the stimulus. Hueppe has perhaps just as truly overdrawn the case from his point of view as Koch did from his own standpoint. But certainly all bacteriologists may read with profit this somewhat new set- ting-forth of the problem of bacterial diseases, and Hueppe is certainly to be thanked for bring- ing forward so forcibly the part which the vital activity of the organism plays in the matter of disease. He has certainly done a valuable ser- vice in pointing out that the problem of the physician and bacteriologist is to be directed toward the man and not the bacterium. H. W. C. APRIL 7, 1899.] The Elements of Graphic Statics. By L. M. Hos- KINS, Professor of Applied Mechanics in the Leland Stanford Jr. University. New York, The Macmillan Company. 1899. Revised Edition. Pp. viii + 199, and eight plates. The character of works under the head of Graphical Statics varies between that extreme of which Cremona’s treatise may be regarded as typical, in which the name can be regarded as scarcely more than a peg on which to hang a large amount of theoretical projective-geometry matter, and the opposite extreme, where we may place the work before us, characterized, as it is, by intense practicality and general avoidance of everything of merely theoretic or historic interest. The favorable impression made upon one by the mechanical excellence of Professor Hoskins’ book is further confirmed by a careful examination of the text. Avoiding the error of Culmann in presuppos- ing too much information on the part of his students as to projective relations and graphic methods, the author lays his own foundation on which to build, treating the subject more, how- ever, as a branch of mechanics than of geometry. To this his Part I. is devoted, and it would seem impossible to set forth the fundamentals more clearly and concisely than in the fifty pages de- voted thereto. Familiarity with analytics and the calculus is assumed for the remainder of the work. Bow’s convenient system of notation is em- ployed throughout. Excluding entirely from the book any con- sideration of structures whose discussion in- volves the theory of elasticity, the hundred pages constituting Part II. are devoted to the usual problems of beams and of bridge and roof trusses. We have not at hand a copy of the original edition for comparison with the revision, but as Professor Hoskins’ preface in- dicates that the principal changes are in this section we state them in this connection in his own words: ‘‘In the present revised edition no change has been made in general plan, and few changes in the treatment adopted, except in the portions relating to beams and trusses carrying moving loads. These portions have been wholly re-written. It is believed that a substantial improvement has been made upon SCIENCE. 515 the methods hitherto used, particularly in the criterion for determining the position of a given load-series which causes maximum stress in any member of a truss. The improvement consists in generalization, which is believed to be gained without sacrifice of simplicity. The graphical method of applying the criterion in the case of trusses with parallel chords has been fully treated by Professor H. T. Eddy. The method here given applies without the restriction to parallel chords. The algebraic statement of the same criterion, as given in Art. 152, is also believed to be a useful generalization of the methods hitherto used. Whether the algebraic or the graphical treatment is preferred, a method is useful in proportion to its generality, pro- vided this does not involve a loss of simplicity. There is a decided advantage in the use of a single general equation applicable to any mem- ber of any truss, instead of several particular equations, each applicable to a special member or to aspecial form of truss.’’ That this general- ization will be cordially weleomed and availed of by the profession may safely be predicted. Part III. gives graphic methods of determin- ing centers of gravity and the moments of in- ertia of plane areas, witha discussion of inertia- curves, carried as far as the practical engineer will ordinarily need. Eight clear, double-page plates complete the work, and one’s only re- gret in viewing them is that they cannot face the text describing them, to the saving of the student’s time and temper. We notice that the author uses a term, ‘complanar’ (whether he suggests it or not is not evident), which we trust will not supplant the generally accepted ‘con-plane,’ which is con- sistent with the other equally self-explanatory terms con-focal, con-axial, etc., and needs no modification. The book is a thoroughly good one preém- inently for the class-room, and a course in it should be a pleasure alike to pupil and in- structor. Frep’x N. WILLson. PRINCETON UNIVERSITY. GENERAL. PROFESSOR MARTIN’S books on The Human Body are in many ways models in the presenta- 516 tion of a difficult subject. We are glad to re- ceive ‘The Briefer Course’ (Holt), revised by Professor G. W. Fitz, of Harvard University, and to commend it cordially. The book has been corrected throughout and a chapter added on growthand nutrition. The three apendices, which occupy nearly one fourth of the book, are all open to criticism. They are on ‘Emer- gencies,’ ‘ Alcohol and Tobacco’ and ‘ Demon- strations and Experiments.’ ‘ Emergencies’ make up part of the examination in physiology which may be taken for entrance to Harvard College, but it is not evident that a school boy will profit intellectually or practically by being told how to treat apoplexy. The demonstra- tions and experiments, also part of the Har- vard examination, may in their present form be useful for the teacher, but scarcely for the student. The reviser states that the appendix on narcotics is retained against his judgment. The injurious effects of nar- cotics must by foolish laws be taught in most public school courses on physiology; but it would be possible to prepare a statement that would be scientifically correct, even though its teaching might be ethically obnoxious. The statements in this book are not exactly incor- rect, but they would produce false impressions on young students. The results of excess are pictured, and the boy is left to infer that the final state of his father, who drinks a glass of wine for dinner, will be delirium tremens. But the boy will be more likely to conclude that physiology is not an ‘exact’ science. Minerva, ‘A Yearbook of the Learned World,’ is indispensable to the editor and useful to every one who wishes to keep informed on the progress of edyeation and science. As is well known, the book contains accounts of uni- versities, libraries, museums, learned societies, etc., throughout the world. The names of over 25,000 officers of these institutions are given, and with an accuracy that is truly re- markable. The eighth volume, 1899, which reaches us from Messrs. Lemcke and Buechner (12 Broadway, New York City), is thoroughly revised from official sources, and is enlarged and improved in several respects, including the addition of a number of Canadian institutions. Programs of the various international scientific SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 223: congresses are promised for next year. The importance of the great universities of the world cannot be judged from the number of students, as the data are not comparable, but in this respect the order of the first ten is given as follows : Paris, 12,047 ; Berlin, 10,306; Mad- rid, 6,143 ; Vienna, 5,710; Naples, 5,103; Mos- cow, 4,461; Budapesth, 4,407; Munich, 3,997 ; Harvard, 3,674; St. Petersburg, 8,615. Asa matter of fact, Harvard, with over 5,000 stu- dents all told, is probably now the fourth in size of the universities of the world, being sur- passed only by Paris, Berlinand Vienna. There are thirty universities having over 2,000 stu- dents, and, of these, nine are in the United States, four in Russia and in Great Britain, three in France, in Germany and in Austria- Hungary, two in Italy and one in Spain and in Greece. ANOTHER useful work of reference is Who's Who? edited by Mr. Douglas Sladen and pub- lished by Black in London and by Macmillan in New York. It contains brief bibliographies of people talked about in Great Britain, including all the leading men of science and a complete list of the members of the Royal Society. Americans are also noticed, but only in small numbers. Presidents Gilman and Harper are included, but not President Eliot. The late Professor Marsh is the only American man of science whose name we have noted. BOOKS RECEIVED. Report of the Seventh Meeting of the Australasian Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science, held at Sydney. Edited by A. LIVERSIDGE. Sydney, Published by the Association, Pp. lii+1161. 10s. 6d. Eléments de Botanique. PH. VAN TIEGHEM. Paris, Masson et Cie. 1898. 3d edition, revised and enlarged. Vol. I., pp. xvi+559. Vol. II., pp. xv+ 612. The Fairy Land of Science. New York, D. Appleton & Co. 252. How to Know the Ferns. FRANCIS THEODORA PAR- sons. New York, Charles Scribner’s Sons. 1899. Pp. xiv+210. $1.50. Papers and Addresses. lege, 1896-1898. Ithaca, N. Y. ARABELLA B. BUCKLEY 1899. Pp. x+ N. Y. State Veterinary Col- 1898. APRIL 7, 1899. ] GrorG Hor- 1899. Pp. 118. Die Continuitiit der Atomverkettung. MANN. Jena, Gustav Fischer. Mark 3. Text-Book of Physies—Sound. J. H. PoyntTrine and J. J. TuHomson. London, Charles Griflings & Company ; Philadelphia, J. B. Lippincott & Co. Pp. x+163, SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. THE American Journal of Science contains the following articles : Glacial Lakes Newberry, Warren and Dana, in Central New York, H. L. FAIRCHILD. Rapid Method for the Determination of the Amount of Soluble Mineral Matter in a Soil, T. H. MEANS. New Type of Telescope Objective especially adapted for Spectroscopic Use, C. S. HASTINGS. Phenocrysts of Intrusive Igneous Rocks, L. V. PIRSSON. Occurrence, Origin and Chemical Composition of Chromite, J. H. PRATT. Influence of Hydrochloric Acid in Titrations by Sodium Thiosulphate, J. T. Norton, Jr. Rock-forming Biotites and Amphiboles, H. W. TURNER. One Little Known and one Hitherto Unknown Species of Saurocephalus, O. P. Hay. Some American Fossil Cycads, G. R. WIELAND. THE American Geologist for April opens with an extended article by Professor William M. Davis on the peneplain, being a reply to an article by Professor Tarr in a previous issue of the journal. Professor Davis writes from Cannes, France. Following are articles: By Professor George E. Ladd, on the Cretaceous Clays of Middle Georgia; by Professor H. N. Winchell, on the optical characters of Jackson- ite, and by Professor C. H. Hitchcock, giving an account of his observations in Australasia. THE Journal of the Boston Society of Medical Sciences contains a paper by Dr. Franklin G. White on ‘Blood Cultures in Septicemia, Pneu- monia, Meningitis and Chronic Disease,’ in which, among the conclusions reached, is that the detection of specific bacteria in the blood in | cases of sepsis and pneumonia gives an un- favorable prognosis. A brief but interesting article by E. H. Bradford treats of the ‘Move- ment of the Front ofthe Foot in Walking ;’ and Dr. John Dane follows with a ‘ Report of Some Studies upon the Arch of the Foot in Infancy, ’ showing that this arch is present in infants but is masked by a sustaining pad of fat. SCIENCE. 517 THE frontispiece of the Osprey for February isa plate of the Hairy Woodpecker by Fuertes ; the first article, ‘ Notes from North Dakota, ’ by E. S. Rolfe treats of egg collecting in the vicinity of Devil’s Lake. Mr. Geo. F. Bren- inger has an article on ‘Gambel’s Quail;’ and Rev. W. F. Henninger discusses ‘ The Scourge of Egg Collecting’ in a manner perhaps a little over-zealous, but with an array of facts that merit serious consideration. The feature of the number is Dr. Gill’s long letter headed ‘A Great Work Proposed,’ wherein he lays before the readers at some length a number of sugges- tions for a new history of North American birds. The publication of the Osprey for March brings this magazine down to date; Julia 8. Robins contributes an article on Wilson enti- tled ‘Behind the Wedding Veil,’ and Witmer Stone follows with a too short paper on ‘An Old Case of Skins and its Associations,’ being notes on one of the earliest ornithological collections in the United States. In ‘Snap Shots with Pen and Camera,’ E. S. Rolfe gives us half a dozen views of birds and nests, with accompanying text. ‘The Gourdheads in the Cypress Swamp of Missouri,’ by Otto Widmann, tells of the habits of the Wood Ibis, gourdhead being a local name for this bird. W. B. Davis has some suggestive notes on ‘Odd Actions of Birds Un- explained,’ and the customary notes, editorials and reviews complete this unusually good number. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. CHEMICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE regular meeting was held on February i), alii he) The first paper of the evening was read by Mr. F. D. Simons, and was entitled ‘The De- tection of Caramel Coloring Matter in Spirits and Vinegar,’ by C. A. Crampton and F. D. Simons. The paper states that the two principal tests given in the books for the detection of caramel coloring matter are, first, the reduction of Fehling’s solution, and second, the precipita- tion of the caramel by means of paraldehyde. Neither of these tests has given satisfactory re- sults in the hands of the authors. 518 It was found that fuller’s earth had a se- lective affinity for caramel coloring matter in spirits, while the natural color derived from wood was but slightly affected. The test is made by beating up twenty-five grams of the earth with fifty ec. of the sample to be tested, allowing it to stand for thirty minutes at room temperature, and filtering. The color before and after treament is observed by means of Levibond’s tintometer or other form of good colorimeter, and the amount of color removed ascertained in this way. The test was applied to all the samples of spirits available in the laboratory of internal revenue, positive results being obtained in all eases. A series of 40 samples known to be naturally colored gave an average of 14.6 per cent. of color removed, while 18 samples of spirit known to be colored with caramel aver- aged 44.7 per cent. of color removed. The test was also applied to a few samples of vinegar, with good results. The second paper of the evening was read by Dr. David T. Day, and was entitled ‘ Charac- teristics of Iridosmium in the United States.’ A demand has lately arisen for this mate- rial as a source of osmium, with which it is pro- posed to impregnate the filaments of incandes- cent lights, with most beneficial results as to the amount of light supplied by a given current and the increased life of the lamp. The problem, of supplying a large amount of osmiridium is a most fascinating one and has led to much study in the localities of the West where platinum metals have been found. The results show that plat- inum is much more generally distributed through ‘the western placer mines than was supposed and that there are localities containing so-called crude platinum, in which osmiridium is found. A sample sent from the Oregon beach contained as high as 99 per cent. of osmiridium. The Hay Fork District, in Trinity county, California, Junction City, and more especially the whole Pacific Coast beach, isa most interesting field of search because the platinum is mixed with much osmiridium. It can be said in general that nearly all the crude platinum sand contains os- miridium in greater or less quantity, according to the analyses of a great number of sands made by Dr. Waldron Shapleigh, for the Welsbach SCIENCE. (N.S. Von, LX. No. 223. Light Company. An interesting exception is the Granite Creek District, of British Columbia. A curious form of osmiridium was noted at the Chapman Mine, near Junction City, California, where nuggets } inch in diameter, when treated with warm dilute nitro-hydrochlorie acid, yield platinum in solution and flakes of osmiridium. The separation of the platinum from the os- miridium is readily accomplished by means of nitro-hydrochloric acid, and the separation of osmic acid from the residue is quite simple by the ordinary process of passing chlorine over the osmiridium mixed with salt. The purification of the osmie acid is now effected by redistilla- tion, but it is probable that these methods will be much improved within the next few months. It is probable that 2,000 ozs. of the material will be obtained during 1899. The last paper of the evening was read by Dr. Day, and was entitled ‘Uses of Fuller’s Earth as a Filtering Medium.’ In 1892 an effort was made by the Owl Cigar Manufacturing Company at Quincy, Florida, to manufacture brick from a peculiar cream-colored clay found on their property. Instead of baking hard, it exfoliated in a pecu- liar manner and caused some comment from an Alsatian cigar-maker in the employ of the com- pany, who noticed this clay and called atten- tion to its close resemblance to German fuller’s earth. This led to an inquiry as to its value as fuller’s earth, at a time when the lubricating oil companies were looking for domestic fuller’s earth to replace animal charcoal as a means of lightening the color of lubricating oils by filtra- tion. The earth proved very suitable, and its use extended in this direction as well as to some extent in the bleaching of vegetable oils. But for the latter purpose the imported fuller’s earth is still approved. The number of samples of clays which have been called fuller’s earth and sent to the consumers for examination since that date is almost beyond belief. It has been shown that fuller’s earth is quite widely scat- tered in the northwestern counties of Florida and the adjacent counties of Georgia. In the latter region the fact that it grades into chalce- dony makes it more probable that the fuller’s earth isa chemical precipitate, and thisis further indicated by the replacement of calcium car- APRIL 7, 1899. ] bonate by the silica in many shells found asso- ciated with the fuller’s earth. The Florida and English fuller’s earth dif- fer greatly in appearance and to some extentin chemical composition. English fuller’s earth has found its analogue in the material discoy- ered at Fairburn, near Rapid City, South Da- kota, and Valentine, Nebraska. It is altogether probable that further developments will make ' the material from these places an important article for use in bleaching cotton-seed oil. There is an interesting difference in the methods of testing the Florida fuller’s earth as compared with the English. It isthe constant practice of the lubricating oil companies simply to fill large, slightly conical cylinders with the fuller’s earth, ground to about 40 mesh, through which the oil is filtered at about the temperature equal to that of boiling water. At first the filtrate is perfectly colorless and, strange to say, lighter in specific gravity and more fluid than the un- filtered oil, a fact which will probably be made use of in chemical separations of the future. Dr. Day is now using this in investigating oils. Ful- ler’s earth is used for bleaching refined, golden cotton-seed oil to a light straw color. When the resultant is to be used for white products, such as lard substitutes, the fuller’s earth is ground to a fine powder and stirred into the oil slightly above the temperature of boiling water. After a thorough mixing by agitation for a few moments the bleached oil is simply filtered through bag presses. Perhaps the most inter- esting feature of this use of fuller’s earth is the very slight difference in the two varieties of fuller’s earth in regard to their bleaching ca- pacity, which leads to their acceptance or re- jection. Little regard is paid to chemical anal- ysis, but the tests made by filtration, on a small scale, are most severe.’’ WILLIAM H. KRrua. GEOLOGICAL CONFERENCE AND STUDENTS’ CLUB OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY. Students’ Geological Club, February 28, 1899. In considering the ‘ Law of the Migration of Divides,’ Mr. J. M. Boutwell developed this law as stated by Cambell (Journal of Geology, TV, 580), and discussed the amendment to it SCIENCE. 519 which has been offered by Smith (18th Annual Report, U. S. Geological Survey, Part II., 472). Mr. H. T. Burr described ‘A Drainage Pe- culiarity in Androscoggin, Maine.’ Andros- coggin Lake, the last of a chain which drain into Androscoggin River near North Leeds, Maine, contains a unique delta, which is situated, not at the head of the lake, but at the outlet. The preglacial valley which the lake occu- pies is blocked just below the foot of the lake by glacial débris, which forces the outlet stream to flow backward, against the slope of the country, into the Androscoggin. Thus the fall between the lake and the Androscoggin is so small that at times of flood this main river rises so high as to reverse the flow of the out- letstream, At such times a flood of mud-laden water pours into the lake and deposits its load. Under normal conditions the outflow is incom- petent to remove the material thus brought in. Accordingly the delta has grown, and is still growing, against the normal course of the cur- rent. Geological Conference, March 7, 1899. Pro- fessor J. E. Wolff communicated his discovery of ‘Hardystonite, a New Mineral from Frank- lin Furnace.’ The specimen of ore containing the mineral came from a new working of the Parker Shaft, at about the nine-hundred-foot level. The mineral is tetragonal, and its gen- eral formula is ZnCa,Si,0;.. A complete descrip- tion will be given in the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Dr. Charles Palache described ‘ A Method of Enlarging Diagrams,’ which has been devel- oped in the Harvard Mineralogical Laboratory within the last few months. It purpose is for preparing large diagrams, from small, straight- line, text diagrams, for lecture use. The instru- ment used is a megascope made by Fuess. This consists of two sets of three mirrors, which con- centrate light upon the diagram. From that the light is reflected through a double-convex lens, which projects the image upon a screen. The diagram is then obtained by tracing the image, thus enlarged to any desired size, and by inking in this tracing. This method possesses a double advantage over photographic enlargements in that it affords a far more satisfactory product and is much cheaper. 520 Dr. A. S. Eakle presented ‘ Notes on Some Rocks from the Fiji Islands.’ The collection, which included both igneous and sedimentary rocks from about twenty of the smaller volcanic islands, was made by Mr. Alexander Agassiz during his recent studies in that region. The specimens of eruptive rocks were found to in- clude hornblende andesites, augite andesites, hypersthene andesites and basalts. J. M. BouTWELL, Recording Secretary. TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB, JANUARY 95, 1899. Dr. N. L. Brirron presented a report on the progress of the New York Botanical Garden, with exhibition of photographs. Dr. Britton said that during 1898 the species cultivated in the Garden at Bronx Park have reached 2,119, a gain of 700 on the previous year. The fru- ticetum, on the plain northeast of the Museum building, was begun in October, and now in- cludes 195 species. The arboretum has been increased to 178 species, including those native to the tract. A viticetum is in preparation, to be planted next spring, including rock-ledges, and a rustic arbor about 600 feet long, now nearly completed. An additional nursery space near the southern corner of the tract was pre- pared in the spring, and planted partly with Siberian cuttings. Border screens are now planted around the entire tract except to the south. A complete record of all plants grown is kept by means of a card catalogue. From every plant which flowers on the ground an herbarium specimen is made; and these are classified in a special herbarium, useful already in satisfying inquiries. The use of the green- house on the Columbia University grounds at Morningside Heights was granted in 1896, and is still very important to the Garden. This is the old greenhouse built in 1857 by Mr. S. Hen- shaw for the Bloomingdale Asylum, and is one of the oldest greenhouses still standing in the United States. . Progress on the Museum building has been active, and it is thought it will be ready for oc- cupation by midsummer. The Power House is nearly ready to put into operation. A sub- way from this to the Museum is under construc- tion. A stable, toolhouse, etc., have been SCIENCE. {N.S. Vou. IX. No. 223. finished. The range of horticultural houses is planned to contain 18 houses; the contract for 7 of these has been signed, and ground was formally broken for them on January 8, 1899. Important work has been done toward improving the drainage of the Herbaceous Grounds, and a great deal of grading, and the terraces about the Museum have been begun. The Lorillard Mansion is now used as a police station-house, occupied by more than 65 offi- cers, making a new and wholesome water-sup- ply necessary. This has now been finished. The Hemlock Forest remains in healthy con- dition ; only three trees have died in the last three years. The Museum is planned to provide in the basement a lecture-room seating 900; on the first floor a collection of plant-products, with models and photographs ; on the second, a sci- entific collection for expert use, including a mounted collection of the local flora on swing- ing panels; followed by herbarium and laborato- ries on the top floor. The herbarium already includes 30,000 speci- mens. Through the liberality of Mr. Cornelius Vanderbilt, Mr. and Mrs. Heller are now mak- ing collections in Porto Rico. Messrs. P. A. Rydberg and Ernest Bessey made collections in 1897 in Montana, through the liberality of Mr. W. E. Dodge. The results will soon appear as a Flora of Montana, forming the first volume of the Memoirs of the New York Botanical Garden. E. 8. BuRGEss, Secretary. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. SOME SUGGESTIONS FOR SCIENTIFIC’ SEMINARS AND CONFERENCES. TO THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: I feel that an experience of several years as a respectful and regular listener to scientific papers by young and old students, at college seminars or confer- ences, and at annual or periodic meetings of societies, gives me the basis for certain general- izations, without leaving me open to the criti- cism of judging from insufficient data. The principal generalization I should like to offer is to the effect that our scientific students in colleges and professional schools do not re- APRIL 7, 1899. ] ceive sufficient training in the public presenta- tion of their ideas, whether those ideas be original or borrowed. Most advanced scientific students in our colleges are obliged to attend and take part in seminars or conferences, at which their colleagues and teachers are sup- posed to criticise any scientific papers that may be presented. So far as my experience goes, the criticism is apt to be almost wholly as to scientific accuracy, with but little thought of several other points that are of vital impor- tance. I fear teachers and professors are too apt to tolerate poor order, poor English and a ‘dead-and-alive’ manner of speaking, thinking the unfortunate beginner will gain wisdom by experience. Judging from my own experience and the comments of others, I would say that our scientific workers often fail to carry their point and to win public sympathy for their work and cause because in their public utterances they do not follow rational lines of procedure. They are very apt: (1) to present an unorganized and apparently unrelated series of facts—their plan is rambling; (2) not to choose and emphasize the important points, probably because of lack of training in measuring the comparative worth of facts; (8) to use poor and inexcusable Eng- lish; (4) to speak in a dazed sort of way, as though they themselves were not thoroughly convinced, as yet, of the truth of their results ; (5) not to address the audience, a map or a blackboard under their influence being as in- spiring as the audience, and much less embar- rassing ; (6) not to divide their time so as to complete their presentation within reasonable limits, thus causing weariness and restlessness on part of audience ; (7) not to make good use of illustrative material in the way of maps, diagrams, specimens, lantern slides, ete. Now the remedy for these serious failures that few men can outgrow seems to me to be largely in the hands of our college and scientific school teachers, and I would like to see a plan adopted in college seminars that would not allow a student to appear before his colleagues and masters until his plan of procedure had been censored, along the lines I have suggested, by some one of experience in public utterance. The student should also receive criticism SCIENCE. 521 after his paper, so as to bring out the weak points in his argument or manner, thus min- imizing the possibility of an equal failure at his next appearance. Such criticism does not kill individuality, but strengthens it, and cer- tainly gives the student a greater confidence in and respect for his teachers. Should our col- leges and scientific schools uniformly adopt such a method of training, our scientific gather- ings ten years hence would not be so largely composed of specialists and those who attend from duty and with considerable sacrifice. It would also be much easier to secure public sup- port for scientific work were more of our lead- ers able to win the interest of the public, with- out becoming merely ‘popular lecturers,’ by whom scientific accuracy is apt to be sacrificed for the sake of impressiveness. Such work as I have suggested for our teach- ers takes much time and energy and seems at first not to pay ; but immediate returns are not always the best, and there is no work on the part of a teacher that can give greater satisfac- tion in the long run than that which has helped beginners to make the most of their latent powers. RIcHARD E. DODGE. TEACHERS COLLEGE, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. A REMARKABLE SUN-DOG. THE appended diagram is an attempt to record the appearance presented by a rare and remark- able ‘sun-dog’ seen at Hamline, Minnesota, at 9:50 a. m., on February 10th. It was a very Sic wate an eas & 522 cold and damp morning; the air was not clear, and there was a film of thin clouds over all the sky. The weather records at St. Paul Observa- tory, five miles distant from Hamline, indicated, S. E. 6 miles per hour for the wind, 29.50 as the Barograph reading of the barometric pressure, and 20 degrees below zero as the thermograph reading of the temperature. The two ‘sun-dogs’ proper were g and h of the figure and were so brilliant that it was painful to look at them, and a line of intense light stretched from them outwards toward dandc. There were two cir- cles surrounding the sun ; one, the inner one, was complete; the other was nearly so, but dipped below the horizon. There were arcs of two cir- cles turned from the sun at a and 5b, and at these points there was a display of prismatic colors. The large outer circle looked much like a rainbow, especially near the horizon. This latter fact seemed connected with the fact that there was almost moisture enough in the air to constitute a very fine snow. H. L. Osporn. HAMLINE UNIVERSITY, St. PAuL, MINN., February 20, 1899. DEGREES IN SCIENCE AT HARVARD UNIVERSITY. HARVARD UNIVERSITY conferred for the first time last year the degree of ‘ Master of Science.’ As the creation of this degree appears at first sight to be a new recoguition of science, it may be desirable to point out that there are aspects under which it is, in fact, harmful to science and a retrograde movement in that university to which we look for guidance. It is, indeed, logical to have a degree between the S. B. and S. D. parallel to the A. M., but it would be equally logical and,in my opinion, far better to abolish the S. B. and 8. D. The composition of the Lawrence Scientific School of Harvard University is not made less heterogeneous by giving all its graduates the same degree. Some of the students are pursu- ing studies in applied science exactly parallel to those of the schools of medicine, law and theol- ogy, and should on graduation be given a tech- nical degree signifying the profession that they have been trained to practice, i. e., C.E., civil engineer, etc. Others of the students are follow- ing the same scientific studies as may be elected SCIENCE. [N. 8. Von. IX. No. 223. by students of the college who receive the A.B, The difference is that the Lawrence Scientific School may be entered with an inadequate prep- aration. Fortunately, plans have been adopted that will gradually raise the requirements for admission to the Scientific School to substantial equality with those of the college. At present consequently the 8. B., in its sense of a liberal education based upon science, means, as com- pared with the A. B. for the same studies, an inadequate preparation ; later it will signify a secondary education without Latin. Students of Harvard College, as of the Great English universities, may now take the A.B. without any study of Latin or Greek at the University. This freedom of election has, as President Eliot points out in his last annual re- port, maintained at Harvard the relative nu- merical importance of the traditional degree better than in any other American institution. The A.B.is becoming almost obsolete in our great State universities. Thus at California last year among 191 bachelors only 380 were in arts, at Wisconsin among 173 only 13, ete. I regard this as unfortunate as the Ph.B. and 8.B. at these universities means simply a liberal edu- cation without Greek or without Latin and Greek. It seems to me more consistent to give the A.B. for liberal studies as is done at Har- vard, Johns Hopkins, Columbia, Cornell and the English universities. But of these univer- sities only Cornell is sufficiently logical to ad- mit that a liberal education is possible without ‘small Latin’ inthe preparatory school. Presi- dent Eliot will anticipate the course of educa- tional progress, as he has so often done, if he will transfer the required study of English to the preparatory school, as he aims to do, and will secure the admission of students to Har- vard College without Latin. The S.B., S.M. and §.D. would then be superfluous as degrees for liberal studies. I regard them as useless altogether, except that it might’ be desirable to give the Sc.B., simultaneously with a technical scientific degree and to maintain Sc.D. and Litt.D. as honorary degrees. In the English universities Se. refers to science, while B.S. and M.S. refer to surgery, consequently Sc. rather than 8. should beused. - At Harvard the A.M. and the Ph.D. are APRIL 7, 1899. ] given for advanced work to Bachelors of Arts, and the 8.D,, and since last year the $.M., to Bachelors of Science. The S8.D. is given for ex- actly the same, scientific research and study as the Ph.D., and means the same thing, except that it is in addition a certificate of a poor pre- paratory education. It isno wonder that it is not popular, having been awarded only once in the past three years, while the Ph.D. has been awarded sixty-nine times. If a student comes to Harvard from a Western university, having studied Latin throughout his college course and received a Ph.B., he is apparently not eligible for the Ph.D. What would be done with a stu- dent coming with the A.B. from Cornell, but never having studied Latin, I do not know. The maintenance at Harvard of the 8.M. and $.D. as second-rate degrees appears to be a needless limitation of the usefulness of its graduate school, and a wounding of science in the house of its friends. . J. McKEEN CATTELL. CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. SCIENTIFIC APPOINTMENTS UNDER THE GOVERNMENT. WE have received notice of civil service ex- aminations as follows: On May 9th for Assistant Chief, Division of Agrostology, Department of Agriculture. (Salary $1,800 per annum.) The subjects and weights are as follows: EPA OTOSLOLONViaueccsseecssecsacccescestesieessneecsrerercns 2. Replies to letters on agrostology 3. German and French translation 4. Botany (major), or Chemistry (minor), (See Sec- tion 67, ‘ Assistants, Department of Agriculture, Departmental Service,’ page 45 of the Manual of Examinations, revised to January 1, 1899)......... 20 At the same time an examination will be held for the position of Assistant in the Division of Agrostology at a salary of $1,200. The sub- jects and weights being : PAO TOStOl OO Vamesasaasdsaccccnectooccatereerses BEE CORREE EE 50 2. Translation from one foreign language (Spanish, French, German, or Italian) SweWabinmpLranslatlonwercedemessescecsecessnceascsererses 4. Botany (minor), (See section 67, ‘ Assistants, Department of Agriculture, Departmental Service,’ SCIENCE. 523 page 35 of the Manual of Examinations, revised to January 1, 1899)............0...cececnecesscecenccerseeenecess 15 5. Education and experience ............---eeeeeeeees 15 On May Ist an eligible register will be estab- lished for the position of Irrigation Expert, office of Experiment Stations, Department of Agriculture, at a salary of $2,500 per annum. Subjects and weights are as follows : 1. A statement of the education, training and technical experience af the competitor.........-....-++ 30 2. A statement of the competitor’s experience asau administrative officer, with special reference to irri- gation laws and regulations. .........02-.0:eseeeeeeeeeee eee 30 3. A thesis of not less than three thousand words ona topic relating to irrigation .............-seeeeeeeee ees 20 4. A statement of not more than three thousand words setting forth a plan of irrigation investigations in the arid regions of the United States for the benefit of the farmers of those regions...........sseeesee essere eee 20 Tt will not be necessary for applicants to ap- pear at any place for examination, but the statements and theses required may be prepared by the competitors at their homes upon forms which will be furnished by the United States Civil Service Commission upon request. Com- petitors will be required to furnish sworn state- ments as to the integrity of the work submitted by them. Under similar conditions and on the same day an eligible register will be established for the position of tobacco expert to the Department of Agriculture. The subjects and weights are as follows: 1. Experience, including complete statement of per- sonal experience in connection with the development of the tobacco industry of Florida............-..-.....6+ 30 2. Administrative ability, including a full state- ment of personal experience in the administration of work connected with the growth, purchase, manipu- lation and marketing of the Florida tobacco.......... 30 3. Two theses, of two thousand to four thousand words in length, on subjects relating to the tobacco AN GUSH Yee essa sae esas nenet ae teSeeceastlestereseuetneat sats 40 On May 9th and 10th an examination will be held for the position of computor in the Nauti- cal Almanac office, the subjects and weights being : mA re brasessstsacscueesccteaccecpssheansecncenetce se acae 15 BOE NES TOT NGL 8 anes ponicporidodsuaddubdeoooponodopucdotmbEnads 10 3. Plane and spherical astronmy................-+. 20 4, Elements of differential and integral calculus 10 524 Dem LOPATILD IMS jeanerersestrcsecuecs sseeiecassieacee se snes 25 6. Spherical astronomy........5..2....ecssesceeesceees 20 Further information regarding these positions and blanks for applications may be obtained from the U.S. Civil Service Commission, Wash- ington, D. C. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. THE National Academy of Sciences will hold its stated annual meeting, beginning on Tues- day, April 18th. AT the annual meeting of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific on March 25th the sec- ond award of its Bruce Gold Medal was an- nounced. It was conferred upon Dr. Arthur Auwers, of Berlin. Srk WILLIAM TURNER, professor of anatomy in the University of Edinburgh, has been elected President of the British Association for the Bradford meeting of 1900. Ir is announced that Mr. Llewellyn W. Longstaff, a member of the Royal Geographical Society of London, has contributed $125,000 towards the fund for the British Antarctic ex- pedition. Dr. L. L. HUBBARD has resigned the position of State Geologist of Michigan. The American Geologist states that he has taken this action owing to the delay of the State Board of Audi- tors in authorizing the publication of the Re- ports of the Survey. Dr. E. V. WILLCox has resigned his position as zoologist and entomologist in the Montana Agricultural College and Station to accept a position in the office of Experiment Stations in the place of Dr. F. C. Kenyon, resigned. Dr. Willcox will have charge of the departments of zoology, entomology and veterinary science of the Experiment Station Record. Mr. LE GRAND Powers, of Minnesota, has been appointed Chief Statistician in charge of agricultural statistics, and Mr. William C., Hunt, of Massachusetts, has been given charge of the statistics of population in the twelfth census. Mr. Hunt held the same position in the census of 1890. Mr. Powers is Chief of the Minnesota Bureau of Labor. M. Frinou has been elected an associate of the Paris Academy of Medicine in the place of SCLENCE, [N.S. Vou. IX. No 223. the late Dr. Worms. M. Filhol is a member of the Paris Academy of Sciences, and has pub- lished important memoirs in anatomy, zoology and paleontology. Proressor Lurci CREMONA, professor of mathematics at the University of Rome, and Professor Alexander Karpinski, St. Petersburg, Director of the Russian Geological Survey, have been elected foreign members of the Bel- gian Academy of Sciences. Dr. T. Gricor Bropre, lecturer on physi- ology at St. Thomas’s Hospital Medical School, has been nominated by the Laboratories Com- mittee of the Royal Colleges of Physicians and Surgeons to be Director of the Research Lab- oratories on the Thames Embankment. Mr. E. E. GREEN, the well-known Ceylon entomologist, has been appointed Government Entomologist on the staff of the Agricultural Department of that island; with residence at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Peradeniya. He is about to visit England, and will return to Ceylon to take up his work about September. For many years Mr. Green has been doing ad- mirable work on the insects of Ceylon, with especial regard to injurious species, and a better selection could not have been made for the new position. Dr. WALTER R. HARPER, of Sydney, New South Wales, starts this month on a trip in the New Hebrides to investigate the somatology and folk-lore of that group. We are informed by him that the museums of Australia, although new, have already secured some remarkable collections representative of Australian eth- nology. The museum at Sydney, under the curatorship of R. Etheridge, and the one at Adelaide in charge of Dr. Stirling, are especially good owing to the interest of their curators in ethnology. Lately the Western government sent a collecting party into the interior under the leadership of Mr. Alex. Morton, Curator of the Tasinanian Museum. This expedition was successful and secured among other things a series of carved bull-roarers, which are sacred objects there. Lack of funds hampers the work in Australia as elsewhere, and the field is yet largely unknown. Much valuable material re- mains to be investigated even in the Eastern APRIL 7, 1899. ] colonies, while Northwest Queensland is es- pecially rich. Mr. HJALMAR LunpBoHM, of the Geological Survey of Sweden, is now in the United States, with a view to studying the deposits of iron ore. Dr. BENJAMIN M. DvuGGAR, instructor in botany (plant physiology) at Cornell Univer- sity and Assistant Cryptogamic Botanist of the Experiment Station, sailed on March 22d from New York for Hurope. He will spend the year abroad in study, principally with Dr. Pfeffer in the laboratories for plant physiology at Leipzig, and with Dr. George Klebs. He will attend the meeting of the British Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science during September. Mr. Duggar received the degree of Doctor of Philosophy at Cornell University last June. He will return in a year to resume his work at Cornell. A MARBLE bust of the late I. H. Lapham, the geologist, was, as we learn from the Amer- ican Geologist, unveiled in the public museum of Milwaukee on March 7th. It was presented by Mr. John Marr. Several addresses were made, including one on the life and work of Lapham by Mr. John Johnston. A MONUMENT to Pasteur will be unveiled and a Pasteur Institute opened at Lille on April 9th. A MONUMENT will be erected in October to Charles Mare Sauria, said to be the original in- venter of lucifer matches, at St. Lothair, a small village in the Jura, where he spent his life as a country physician. Dr. ANGELO KNorR, docent in the Veteri- nary School of Munich, died on February 22d, from acute glanders contracted in the course of an experimental research on mallein. Miss ELIZABETH Brown, of Cirencester, Eng- land, who made valuable contributions to as- tronomy, died on March 6th. She observed the total eclipses of the sun in 1887, 1889 and 1896, and had published both scientific and popular accounts of the solar phenomena. WE regret also to record the deaths of Dr. Wilhelm vy. Miller, professor in the Institute of Technology and member of the Academy of Sciences of Munich; of Dr. Friedrich y. Lih- SCIENCE. 525 mann, the mathematician, at Stralsund ; of Dr. Charles Fortuun, the mineralogist, in London, and of P. y. Alfr. Feuilleaubois, known for his researches on fungi, at Fontainbleau. A REUTER dispatch, dated March 16th, states that the steamer ‘Southern Cross’ has ar rived at Port Chalmers from Victoria Land, where she landed M. Borchgrevink and the other members of the Antarctic expedition. The explorers are 11 in number. Mr. A. W. AnTHONY and his party, who have been making collections for the Smith- sonian Institution, have been wrecked off the coast of Lower California. No lives were lost, but the collections could not be saved. THE Union Pacific Railway offers to trans- port geologists and paleontologists without charge from Chicago or San Francisco to Wy- oming, for the purpose of making explorations during the coming summer. AN expedition under Lieutenant Koslow is being sent by the Russian Geographical Society to make explorations in Central Asia. It will cross the Nanschu Mountains and explore the upper waters of the Yellow River. M. H. R. Dumonr has left to the Paris So- ciety of Geography a travelling fund that will yield 1,000 fr. per annum. A RADIOGRAPHIC institute has been opened at Madrid under the direction of Dr. Mezquita. It is said to have cost $400,000. THE French Congress of Learned Societies met at Toulouse on April 4th under the presi- dency of M. Levasseur. AT the March meeting of the French Astro- nomical Society M. Cornu made an address on the applications of physics to astronomy. M. Flammarion, the Secretary, reported that a number of astronomers had written saying that they had seen the phases of Venus with the naked eye, the possibility of which has been denied. The air throughout Europe has been unusually clear for a long time. THE first international congress of physicians connected with life insurance companies will be held at Brussels from the 25th to the 30th of next September. All Europe and the United States will be represented at this congress, 526 SCIENCE. which proposes to establish universal formulas for the examination of persons desiring to be insured. ON March 18th the Austrian Society of Engi- neers celebrated its jubilee in the Municipal Council Chamber, Vienna, under the presi- dency of Mr. F. Berger. Nature says that there was a large attendance of members, and representatives of sixty six kindred societies presented addresses. Congratulatory speeches were delivered by the Austrian Minister of Rail- ways; the Minister of Commerce; the Governor of Lower Austria; the Secretary of the Iron and Steel Institute, London; the Secretary of the French Society of Civil Engineers, Paris, and the Secretary of the Society of German Engineers, Berlin. A paper was then read by Mr. A. Ricker on the part taken by the Austrian Society of Engineers in the technical progress of the past fifty years. The Austrian Society is a very influential one. Atits founda- tion in 1848 it numbered seventy-nine mem- bers ; at the present time there are 2,388. THE inaugural course of the Charles F. Deems lectureship foundation will be given by Professor James Iverach, D.D., of Aberdeen, on Mondays and Wednesdays at 10:30 a. m., beginning on April 3d at University Building, Washington Square. The endowment of $15,- 000 given by the American Institute of Christian Philosophy to the New York University pro- vides for lectures on science and philosophy in their relation to religion. Mr. Rircuiez, President of the British Board of Trade, received at the House of Commons on March 22d a deputation of representatives from the Decimal Association, chambers of commerce, educational institutions and trade unions, who urged upon the government the compulsory adoption of the metric system of weights and measures on January 1, 1901. The importance of this measure was urged by Sir Samuel Mon- tague, Sir Henry Roscoe, Sir E. S. Hill and others. Mr. Ritchie in reply said that the gov- ernment had done much by making the metric system legal and by introducing it in the schools, but did not think that public opinion warranted its compulsory adoption. The resolutions passed by the associated chambers of commerce was as [N.S. Von. 1X. No. 223. follows: ‘‘ That, in view of the time wasted in teaching a system of weights and measures which, according to the First Lord of the Treasury, is ‘arbitrary, perverse and utterly irrational,’ and in the opinion of Her Majesty’s Consuls is responsible for great injury to British trade, this association urges Her Majesty’s gov- ernment to introduce into and endeavor to carry through Parliament as speedily as possible a bill providing that the use of the metric system of weights and measures shall be compulsory in this country within two years from the pass- ing of the bill, and suggests that meanwhile the system should be adopted in all specifications for government contracts.’’ THe Eclipse Expedition to Japan under Professor Todd, two years ago, founded at Esashi a publie library, in return for courtesies shown the expedition. Professor Todd is now sending to this library, through the legation at Washington, acollection of books part of which have been given by a number of representative American publishers. THE original manuscripts of surveys of Van Diemen’s Land, made between 1821 and 1836, were sold recently at the rooms of Messrs. Hodgson, London, for $250. Tue Companie Générale Transatlantique is establishing a service of carrier pigeons, which it is believed will announce the arrival of steam- ships twelve hours earlier than is at present possible. Nature states that a dinner which took place at the Fishmongers’ Hall on March 14th pos- sesses especial interest on account of the fact that it was given in honor of science, and that the guests included a great number of scientific men, among them being the Presidents of the following societies and scientific bodies: Royal, Royal Horticultural, Royal College of Phy- sicians, Royal Geographical, Dermatological, Royal Microscopical, Victoria Institute, Royal Statistical, Royal College of Surgeons, Royal Astronomical, Zoological, Linnean, Chemical, Entomological, Philological and Clinical. The toast of the evening was ‘Science,’ and was proposed in an eloquent speech by the Prime Warden, Mr. J. A. Travers, who pointed out the great advance science had made in the last APRIL 7, 1899.] twelve years; he recommended, further, the special study of preventive medicine, to ensure for Great Britain a safer footing in foreign climates. Lord Lister responded to the toast, and urged City Companies to support pure sci- ence; he referred also to the help they had rendered the Jenner Institute. Sir William MacCormaec then proposed the health of the Prime Warden. is THE Railway and Engineering Journal reports that the War Department is arranging to make a test of the Marconi system of wireless teleg- raphy. The two experimental stations se- lected are the roof of the State, War and Navy Building and Fort Myer, across the Potomac, the distance being six miles. The government has purchased the necessary instruments and experiments will be conducted by Col. James Allen and Lieut. George D. Squire. AT a recent meeting of the Royal Geograph- ical Society a paper on ‘Exploration in the Canadian Rockies: A Search for Mount Hooker and Mount Brown’ was read by Professor Nor- man Collie, F.R.S. According to the London Times Professor Collie’s paper dealt with two journeys taken during 1897 and 1898 through that part of the Canadian Rockies that lies be- tween the Kicking Horse Pass on the south and the source of the Athabasca River on the north. The most interesting problem connected with the first journey which presented itself to Pro- fessor Collie and his party was whether a lofty mountain—probably 14,000 ft. to 15,000 ft.— seen from the slopes of Mount Freshfield, from which it lay distant about 30 miles in a north- westerly direction, might be Mount Brown or Mount Hooker, which were supposed to be 16,000 ft. and 15,000 ft. high respectively. Pro- fessor Coleman, in 1893, starting from Morley, had arrived at the true Athabasca Pass, found the historic Committee’s Punch-bowl, and his brother had climbed the highest peak on the north, presumably Mount Brown. This peak he found to be only 9,000 ft. The question pre- sented itself: Could he have been mistaken or was it possible that there existed two Athabasca Passes ? Professor Collie and his companion re- turned to their camp on the Saskatchewan Pass without having solved the question of either SCIENCE. 527 Mounts Brown or Hooker, or the Committee’s Punch-bowl. It was finally settled on the re- turn to England by reference to the journal of David Douglas, the naturalist, dealing with his journey over the Athabasca Pass. From the authentic account of the two mountains there given it was seen that the credit of hay- ing settled with accuracy the real height of the peaks belonged to Professor Coleman. For nearly 70 years they had been masquerading in every map as the highest peaks in the Rocky Mountains. No doubt now remained as to where Brown and Hooker and the Punch- bowl were. That Douglas climbed a peak 17,000 ft. high in an afternoon (as narrated in his account) was impossible; the Mount Brown of Professor Coleman, 9,000 ft. high, was much more likely. There was only one Athabasca Pass, and on each side of its sum- mit might be found a peak—Mount Brown, 1,000 ft. high, on the north—the higher of the two—and Mount Hooker on the south. Be- tween them lay a small tarn, 20 ft. in diameter —the Committee’s Punch-bowl. The peaks to the south, amongst which the party wandered last August, were, therefore, new, and they probably constituted the highest point of the Canadian Rocky Mountain system. THE British Medical Journal states that the tenth meeting of the International Congress of Hygiene will be held in Paris in August, 1900. The division of hygiene will comprise seven sections as follows: 1. Microbiology and Para- sitology applied to hygiene. M. Laveran is President and M. Netter Secretary of this Sec- tion, in which the questions to be discussed are the measurement of the activity of serums; the prophylaxis and preventive treatment of diph- theria; meat poisoning, its causes and the means of its prevention; pathogenic microbes in soil and water (cholera, typhoid fever and other diseases); the part played by water and by vegetables in the etiology of intestinal hel- minthiasis. 2. Chemical and veterinary sciences applied to hygiene; alimentary hygiene, in which the questions to be discussed are tinned provisions and the means of preventing acci- dents ; unification of international control ; the establishment of a general and uniform system of inspection of slaughter houses, etc. 38. En- 528 gineering and architecture applied to hygiene, in which the question to be discussed is the pro- tection of water supplies. 4. Personal hygiene, in which the question to be discussed is conta- gious patients from the hospital point of view. 5. Industrial and professional hygiene. 6. Mili- tary, naval and colonial hygiene, in which the question to be discussed is the means of ensur- ing the purity of water from the point of view of colonial hygiene. 7. General and interna- tional hygiene (prophylaxis of communicable diseases ; sanitary administration and legisla- tion), in which the questions to be discussed are the prophylaxis of tuberculosis in regard to in- dividuals, families, etc.; the compulsory notifi- cation of communicable diseases, its necessary consequences (isolation, disinfection) and its re- sults in different countries ; the prophylaxis of syphilis; and the international prophylaxis of yellow fever. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. Mr. Joun D. ROCKEFELLER has offered $100,000 to Denison University, Granville, O., if the friends of the institution will, within the next year, raise the sum of $150,000. Mrs. Simon Rerp, of Lake Forest, has ex- pressed her intention of giving to Lake Forest University a chapel and a library. THE further sum of £25,000 has been offered for the Birmingham University on condition that £225,000 are obtained within a year. The amount already promised is £135,000. Proressor Louis F. HENDERSON, professor of botany in the University of Idaho, at Moscow, Idaho, has recently donated to the botanical department of Cornell University a complete set of his duplicates of the phanerogams and ferns of Idaho. Over 900 species were con- tained in the collection, making it one of the most valuable single local collections that the University has received. Professor Henderson is an alumnus of Cornell University, class of 7A. PROFESSOR W. v. BrANCOo, of Hohenheim, has been called to the chair of geology and paleontology in the University of Berlin, as successor to Professor Dames. SCIENCE. [N. S. Von. IX. No. 223. CHARLES EDWARD ST. JOHN, PH.D., has been appointed to the professorship of physics and astronomy in Oberlin College. Mr. JosrepH BARCROFT has been elected Fel- low of King’s College, Cambridge. His chief work has been in physiology. ALEXANDER ANDERSON, professor of natural philosophy in Queen’s College, Galway, has been appointed President of the institution. Ir is said that the candidates for the chair of physiology at Edinburgh, vacant by the death of Professor Rutherford, include Professor E. A. Schafer, Dr. William Stirling, Dr. D. N. Paton, Dr. E. Waymouth Reid, Dr. E. W. W. Carlier and Dr. G. N. Stewart. M. Henri MoissAn has published for the Council of the University of Paris a report on its work during the year 1897-8. The increase in the number of students at periods of six years is shown in the accompanying table : 1885-86. 1891-92. 1897-08. MedICINGtscensraesieaccies 3.696 4.250 4.494 Tid Wiseaseersnescscseacarase 3.786 4.111 4.607 (Pharmacyeaerssecscesnsase 1.767 1.547 1.790 etbersit veto tescee tun. 928 1.185 1.989 SClEMCES Re ctesccseseseese 467 655 1.370 Protestant Theology... 35 36 95 eTOba lem acunetasicase 10.679 11.784 14.346 It will be noticed that the growth in the num- ber of students of science is the greatest, and the increase has been more than maintained during the present year, being 127 as compared with 85in letters. It should be recollected that there are many important institutions for higher education in Paris—The Collége de France, The Museum of Natural History, The School of Mines, the Normal College, The Polytechnic Institute, The School of Fine Arts, The Pasteur Institute, etc.—not included in the University. Paris is thus’ certainly the world’s largest educational center, but the provincial universi- ties are less important than the corresponding institutions in other countries. The gifts to the university during the year, about $30,000, appear small in comparison with those to American institutions. There are only 202 scholarships, which: is also relatively fewer than in America and in Great Britain. SClgNCE EDITORIAL CoMMITTEE: S. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WooDWwARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THuRsTON, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE Conte, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; §. H. ScuppER, Entomology; C. E. BessEy, N. L. Brirron, Botany; HENRY F. OsBorN, General Biology; C. 8. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bowprrcu, Physiology; J. 8S. Brutines, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- TON, J. W. Powe, Anthropology. Fripay, Aprit 14, 1899. CONTENTS: A Sage in Science: PRESIDENT DAVID STARR JJ} BDA pocobododbonosacandancd oaodongoraneadoncocbadnunals 529 Field-Work of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition in 1898 :— ; The Indians of Western Washington: DR. Liv- INGSTON FARRAND. Archeological Investiga- tions on the North Pacific Coast of America: HARLAN I. Smiry. Archeological Investiga- tions on the Amoor River: GERARD FOWKE......- 532 On Biological Text-Books and Teachers: O. F. (IO caso docsoacao sdonodasound dadandcoddocaacnanpdce Haborotod 541 Scientific Books :— Hastings and Beach’s Text-Book of General Physics: PROFESSOR J. 8. AMES. Marr’s Prin- ciples of Stratigraphical Geology: PROFESSOR Henry 8. WILLIAMS. Mason on the Exami- nation of Water: PROFESSOR EDWIN O. JoR- DAN. in our Proceedings (15-388) and in Screncg, IIT., January 17,1896; was mentioned in several journals and listed in the ‘ Literatur’ in the Anatomischer Anzeiger. Yet in Septem- ber, 1898, practically an entire number of that periodical, twenty-five pages, was oc- cupied by an article on that subject pur- porting to tabulate and discuss the methods employed in all parts of the world. The whole United States is credited with an article by Mall (Anzeiger, 1896, 769-775) and (in a footnote) a ‘ Note’ by Keiller in the Texas Medical Journal, 1891-2, VE, p. 425. VIII. That terms consisting of a single word each constitute even the majority of the names preferred by me or adopted by this Association a year ago.—Whatever their abstract prefer- ‘ ences, the members of the Committee realize the impossibility of framing such a nomen- clature. Two years ago (‘Neural Terms,’ § 153 et seq.) I showed by statistics the baselessness of the misapprehension and characterized it as a ‘terminologic phantasm erected by the Germans between themselves and the American Committees.’ More recently, however, the same notion has reappeared in several reviews of a text- book of nervous diseases, commonly with approval, expressed or implied, of the sup- posed condition. The impression was prob- ably gained from the fact that the author of the book, like myself, prefers single-word APRIL 21, 1899. ] names for as many as possible of the parts most frequently mentioned. Nevertheless, the misapprehension on this point ought to be corrected. The facts are : First, out of about 540 neural terms in the B. N. A. at least 40, about one-fourteenth, are mononyms. Secondly, in the ‘Majority Report’, in Tables C and D, are enumerated 274 terms differing more or less from those adopted by the Gesellschaft; the mononyms num- ber only 103. IX. That eminence as an anatomist neces- sarily implies either the capacity or the dispost- tion to deal wisely with questions of nomencla- ture.—Upon this point I quote from ‘Con- cluding Remarks’ in ‘Neural Terms,’ p. 329: Caution in Publishing New Terms.—It is true that words needlessly introduced into anatomy have no such embarrassing permanency as is conventionally assigned to synonyms in systematic zodlogy. Never- theless, for a time at least, they encumber current publications and dictionaries. Hence, however neces- sary and legitimate they may seem to the framer, neither a new term, nor an old one in a new sense, should be actually published without prolonged con- sideration, and consultation with at least four indi- viduals representing as many categories of possible critics: (qa) an investigator of the same general sub- ject; (0) an experienced teacher; (c¢) an earnest stu- dent; (d) a philologic expert whose admiration for the past has not blinded him to the needs of the pre- sent and the future. Method of Introduction of New Terms.—As urgently recommended by the A. A. A. S. Committee on Bio- logical Nomenclature, whenever a technical word is used for the first time the author should give in a special note: (a) the Latin form; (b) the etymol- ogy; (¢) the proper adopted form or paronym for his own language, with the adjective, etc., when applica- ble; (d) as concise and precise a definition as pos- sible. X. That among the terms included in the ‘ Majority Report’ any considerable number have been specifically condemned by the Anatom- ische Gesellschaft or its authorized representa- tives. XI. That the grounds of such objections as have been offered are really sound and sufficient. SCIENCE. 569 XII. That the condemnation of a term by an anatomic authority disproves either its intrinsic fitness or its promise of vitality.—On this point there need be adduced only the cases of radius and ulna, which Robert Hunter de- nounced as ‘ ridiculous.’ XIII. That the anatomy of the future is to be based upon the structure and erect attitude of the human body.—The anatomists of the future will be zodtomists first and anthropotomists afterward. XIV. That every anatomic term should be an absolute idionym, 1. €., perfectly explicit in itself. —Since this requirement is implied in the objections to aula, etc., by Koélliker, and to medipedunculus by His,* there may be prop- erly adduced from the B. N. A. the follow- ing terms, whose explicitness is conditioned upon either the context or the actual addi- tion of the words here set in brackets : clivus [occipitalis], and [sphenoidalis]; pro- cessus coronoideus [ulne] and [mandibule]; processus styloideus [radii], [ulne], and [ossis temporalis]. Unless, indeed, it be granted that a certain degree of explicitness is afforded by the context, every one of the thousands of names of the parts of the human body should be increased by the phrase corporis humant. XV. That the occasional employment, by a member of an Association, or even by a member of its Comittee on Nomenclature, of terms other than those adopted by them is, in itself, evidence of deliberate intention.—For example, after using conariwm for fifteen years in place of ‘pineal body,’ etc., now that the argu- ments of Spitzka and H. F. Osborn have converted me to epiphysis, conarium occa- sionally gets itself spoken. Indeed, it is easy for me to understand that an unin- tended but familiar word may be written, re-written, and even overlooked in the proof. The frequency of such lapses could be shown, if necessary, by letters from numer- *As stated and briefly discussed in ‘ Neural Terms,’ pp. 282-289. 570 ous correspondents in reply to the query, free from all critical or proselytic tenor, as to whether a given term was used inten- tionally or by inadvertence. XVI. That there is ‘imminent danger of the formation of a peculiar anatomic vocabulary in America such as seriously to impede scientific intercourse with other countries..—The unsub- stantiality of the grounds of this misappre- hension may be recognized in the impartial discussion by the brothers Herrick a year ago.* They conclude that there is no rea- son for serious alarm on this score. XVII. That the fundamental principles and characteristic features of the simplified nomencla- ture can be attributed to any individual in such degree as to warrant calling it by his name.—In correcting this misapprehension no false modesty shall lead me to belittle what I have done. On the contrary, to the ‘ Sum- mary of my terminologic progress,’ already published in ‘Neural Terms,’ etc. (pp. 227-237), there shall be added here two items overlooked when that was printed : 1. That the defects of encephalic ter- minology had been recognized by me as early as 1878 may be seen from the follow- ing paragraph in a popular lecture on ‘ The brain and the present scientific aspects of phrenology,’ delivered January 21st, before the ‘ American Institute,’ and reported in the New York Tribune of January 22d and in the ‘ Tribune Extra,’ No. 3: “CAs if these natural hindrances were not enough, the old anatomists fenced in the parts of the brain with the most fanciful and prodigious titles. Cere- drum is well enough ; the cerebellum, being only one- eighth as large, has a longer name, while medulla ob- longata, hippocampus minor, tubercula quadrigemina, processus e cerebello ad testes, and iter e tertio ad ventricu- lun quartum represent such insignificant parts of the brain as to suggest a suspicion that the nomenclature was established upon no other principle than that of in inverse ratio between the size of an organ and the length of its title. At any rate, these fearful names * Inquiries regarding tendencies current in neu- rological literature ;) Jour. Comp. Neurology, VIL., 162-168, December, 1897. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 225. are stumbling-blocks to the student and an almost perfect hindrance to popular knowledge of the brain ; no doubt this pleases the ghosts of the old anatom- ical fathers, and is equally agreeable to many of the present day, both in and out of the profession, with whom Latin is a synonym for learning, and ponder- osity of words for profundity of wisdom.”’ 2. My actual efforts toward the simplifica- tion of the nomenclature of the brain com- menced in 1880, in the preparation of a paper read before the American Association for the Advancement of Science on the 28th of August. The paper was never written out in full, and apparently no abstract was furnished for publication in the Proceedings. Somewhat inadequate and erroneous re- ports were printed in the Boston Daily Ad- vertiser of August 30th, and in the New York Medical Record of September 18th. But here is a duplicate of the abstract furnished in advance to the Secretary of the Associa- tion, and I venture to read it as a contribu- tion to the history of the subject now before us: ‘PARTIAL REVISION OF THE NOMENCLATURE OF THE BRAIN. ‘A. Introductory: The progress of anatomy is im- peded by the defects of nomenclature. These defects have been admitted by several anatomists, and a few have endeavored to remedy them. As stated by Pye- Smith, ‘the nomenclature of the brain stands morein need of revision than that of any other part.’ ‘©B. Nature of the Defects: (1) General. In com- mon with that of the rest of the body, the nomencla- ture of the brain lacks precision as to the position and direction of parts. (2) In particular the number of synonyms is very large. Most writers employ some names which are vernacular or merely descriptive. Most technical names are compound ; many of the single ones are inconveniently long, and some of them are indecent. “CG. Special Obstacles to a Reform: (1) The difficulty of ascertaining the priority of terms. (2) The ten- dency of each nation to adopt purely vernacular terms which have been proposed or incidentally em- ployed by eminent anatomists of that nation. “TD. Principles Forming the Basis of this Revision : (1) Technical terms are the tools of thought, and the best workman uses the best tools. (2) Terms of classical origin are to be preferred. (3) Priority of APRIL 21, 1899. ] employment is to be regarded, but should not over- bear all other considerations. (4) Of two terms equally acceptable in other respects, to select the shorter. (5) Preference for names of general appli- cation over those which have an exclusive application to man or the other primates. (6) To convert some compound terms into simple ones, either by dropping unessential words or by the substitution of prefixes for adjectives. (7) For terms of position, to discard all which refer to the horizon or to the natural atti- tude of man, and to adopt those which refer to the longitudinal axis of the vertebrate body. (8) For terms of relative position and direction, to employ those used for position with the termination ad. ““E. The Paper Will Indicate: (1) The terms pro- posed and their abbreviations. (2) The principal synonyms. (3) The originators of the terms and synonyms and the dates of their first employment so far as ascertained. (4) The terms which should be wholly discarded. (5) The new terms for new parts, the new terms for parts already known, the new forms of old terms. (6) The subordination of parts to wholes by differences in the kinds of type.”’ There were present Harrison Allen, Simon H. Gage, Charles 8. Minot and probably other members of this Association ; the sur- vivors will recall that on cloth sheets were written in parallel columns certain names in common use, together with those which were proposed to replace them. Amongst these were pons for ‘pons Varolii;’ insula for ‘in- sula Reillii ;’ thalamus for ‘thalamus opti- cus ;’ callosum and striatum for ‘ corpus eal- losum’ and ‘corpus striatum ;’ precommis- sura for ‘commissura anterior ;’ myelon for ‘medulla spinalis,’ and cornu dorsale, for ‘cornu posterius.’ This paper constituted the proton (the primordium, or ‘ Anlage,’ if you prefer) of my own subsequent contribu- tions, and likewise, so far as I knew at the time, of the simplified nomenclature in America. Proud as I am of these early propositions, and glad as I should be if they and their subsequent elaborations had been at once unprecedented and sufficient, nevertheless truth, justice and the peculiar conditions now confronting us alike impel me upon this occasion to insist even more distinctly SCIENCE. Ok Or than hitherto upon the extent to which the ideas and even the specific terms had been anticipated by four other anatomists in this country and in England. Already in the spring of 1880, although quite unknown to me, there had been pub- lished a paper by E. C. Spitzka, ‘The Central Tubular Gray’ (Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, April, 1880), containing (p. 75, note) the following pregnant para- graph: “Tt would add much to the clearness of our ter- minology, in my opinion, if the adjectives anterior ‘and posterior were to be discarded. Physiologists and anatomists are so often forced to deal with the nerve axes of lower animals, in whom what is with man the anterior root becomes inferior, and what is in the former posterior becomes superior, that they have either been confused themselves or have written confusedly, or finally have, to avoid all misunder- standing, utilized the terms applicable to man alone also for quadrupeds. The nervous axis, however, oc- cupies one definite position, which should determine the topographical designations. What in man is the anterior, and in quadrupeds the inferior, root or cornu is always ventral; while what in the former is poste- rior, and the latter superior, is always dorsal. The present treatise is not the proper place for renovating nomenclature, but I have thought it well to call at- tention to the matter in passing, and in anticipation of a work on comparative neural morphology which I have in preparation.’’ , The concluding words are italicized by me in order that there may be the more fully appreciated the generosity, indeed self-abnegation, exhibited in Dr. Spitzka’s commentary* upon my longer paper} of the following year : “Tt is with mingled pleasure and profit that I have read the very suggestive paper on cerebral no- menclature contributed to your last issues by Profes- sor Wilder. Some of the suggestions which he has made have been latent in my own mind for years, * Letter on nomenclature, SCIENCE, April 9, 1881. Also in Jour. Nerv. and Mental Dis., July, 1881, 661— 662. ; {+A partial revision of anatomical nomenclature, with especial reference to that of the brain, SCIENCE, II., 1881, pp. 122-126, 133-138, March. Also Jour. Nerv. and Mental. Dis., July, 1881, 652-661. 572 but I have lacked the courage [time ?] to bring them before my colleagues. Now that he has broken ground, those who prefer a rational nomenclature to one which, like the present reigning one, is based upon erroneous principles, or rather on no principles at all, will be rejoiced at the precedent thus set for innovations. * * * He who has himself been com- pelled to labor under the curse of the old system, the beneath, below, under, in front of, inside, external, be- tween, etc., will look upon. the simple ventral, dorsal, lateral, mesal, cephalic, proximal, caudal, distal, ete.’ as so many boons. I have no hesitation in saying that the labor of the anatomical student will be di- minished fully one-half when this nomenclature shall have been definitely adopted. * * * In proceeding to comment on some of the terms proposed by Pro- fessor Wilder, I wish it to be distinctly understood that I do so merely tentatively and to promote dis- cussion ; in so doing I feel certain that I am carrying out that writer’s wishes. It is but just to state that the majority of the terms cannot be discussed ; they are perfection and simplicity combined.’’ Had Dr. Spitzka completed his proposed work he would doubtless have called atten- tion to our three British predecessors, John Barclay, Richard Owen and P. H. Pye- Smith. The first, as long ago as 1803, in ‘A New Anatomical Nomenclature,’ proposed the un- ambiguous descriptive terms, dorsal, lateral? proximal, with their adverbial forms, dorsad, laterad and prowimad, and thus laid the foundation for an intrinsic toponymy. In 1846 Owen published (‘ Report on the Vertebrate Skeleton,’ p. 171) what I have elsewhere (‘ Neural Terms,’ § 51) called the ‘immortal paragraph,’ wherein the various phrases for the spinal portion of the central nervous system were replaced by the single word, myelon. Twenty years later he ut- tered (‘ Anatomy of Vertebrates,’ I., 294) a declaration which some of us are disposed to regard as an inspired prophecy : ‘“ Whoever will carry out the application of neat substantive names to the homologous parts of the en- cephalon will perform a good work in true anatomy.’’ In the third volume of the same work (1868, p. 136) is a list of the cerebral fissures designated, in most cases, by adjectives of asingle word each, e. g., sub- frontal. SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 225 The paper of Pye-Smith (fortunately still spared to us) was entitled ‘Suggestions on Some Points of Anatomical Nomencla- ture,’ and appeared in 1877 (Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, XII., 154-175, Oc- tober, 1877). After enunciating certain sound general prnciples, he declared that ‘the nomenclature of the brain stands more in need of revision than that of any other part,’ and made several specific suggestions some of which have been adopted by the three American Associations and the Ana- tomische Gesellschaft : “The term optic thalamus is a misleading and cum- brous abbreviation of the proper name thalamus ner- vorum opticorum, and the name thalamus, without qualification, is at once distinctive, convenient, and free from a false suggestion as to the function of the part. * * * Of all the synonyms of the Hippocampus minor (Ergot of Morand, eminentia unciformis, collicu- lus, unguis, calcar avis) the last is the most distinc- tive, and brings it at once into relation with the cal- carine fissure. The Hippocampus major may then drop the adjective, as well as its synonym of cornu am- The pineal and pituitary bodies are more con- veniently called conariuwm and hypophysis. * * * The word Pons ( Varolii) might well be restricted to the great transverse commissure of the cerebellum. * * * Insula is a far more distinctive name than any pro- posed to replace it.’’ Pye-Smith also prefers vagus to ‘ pneumogastricus.’ (p. 162). Those who have done me the honor to read any one of my longer papers on this subject will recall my repeated acknowledgments of indebtedness to these three English anato- mists. Not to mention earlier publications, in 1889, in the article ‘ Anatomical Termi- nology’ (‘Reference Handbook of the Medical Sciences,’ VIII. , 520-522), Profes- sor Gage and I collected from all sources accessible to us ‘ Aphorisms respecting No- menclature;’ the most prolific sources were the three just named. At the third meet- ing of this Association, in Boston, December, 1890, I read a paper the title of which was “Owen’s Nomenclature of the Brain,’ and which included this paragraph : ‘Tn none of the above-designated publications or in those of other anatomists does it now seem to the monis. APRIL 21, 1899.] writer that there has been adequate recognition of the terminological precepts and examples that occur in the works of Professor Richard Owen, and the writer takes this opportunity to express his constantly in- creasing sense of obligation in this regard ; had space permitted he would gladly have increased the num- ber and length of the selections from Professor Owen’s writings which are embraced among the ‘ Aphorisms respecting Nomenclature’ on pp. 520-522 of the article ‘ Anatomical Terminology.’ ”’ In this connection may appropriately be mentioned two later but highly significant British contributions toward a simplified and international system of nomenclature. 1. The Latin names for the encephalic seginents.—In the seventh edition of Quain’s ‘Anatomy’, edited by William Sharpey, Al- len Thompson and John Cleland, in Vol. II., dated 1867, the five ‘fundamental parts’ {corresponding to what I have called ‘defini- tive segments’) are named prosencephalon, diencephalon, mesencephalon, epencephalon, and metencephalon; and in a foot-note these terms are declared to be ‘‘adopted as appli- cable to the principal secondary divisions of the primordial medullary tube, and as corresponding to the commonly received names of the German embryologists, viz., Vorderhirn, Zwischenhirn, Mittelhirn, Hinter- hirn, and Nachhirn ; or their less-used Eng- lish translations, viz., forebrain, interbrain, midbrain, hindbrain, and afterbrain.’’ Notwithstanding several public requests for information as to the source of the Latin segmental names, the historic facts recorded in the above extract were ascertained by me only within the past week; I prefer to be- lieve that they were unknown to the No- menclatur Commission and to the Anatom- ische Gesellschaft at the time of the selec- tion and adoption of the Latin names for the encephalic segments as given in the B. N. A. Even, then, however, since the same Latin terms were repeated in the sub- sequent editions of Quain (1877-1882), I am compelled to regard the transference of metencephalon from the ultimate segment to SCIENCE. 573 the penultimate, and its replacement by myelencephalon, as constituting a violation of scientific ethics that merits the severest rep- robation. * 2. Mononymic designations of the en- cephalic cavities.—In August, 1882, wholly unaware of my prior suggestion to the same effect (Screncr, March, 1881), the late T. Jeffery Parker, professor in Otago Univer- sity, New Zealand, proposed compounds of the Greek zo:Aéa, with the prepositions, etc., already employed in the segmental names ; e. g-, mesocele, prosocele, ete. Our mutual gratification and encouragement at the ap- proximate coincidence led to a cordial cor- respondence that continued until his death. Besides the publications enumerated in the Bibliography of‘ Neural Terms,’ Parker used celian compounds in two papers on the Apteryx (1890 and 1892) and in the ‘Text- book of Zoology’ by himself and Professor Haswell (1897). XVIII. That, even in its earliest and cru- dest form, the ‘system’ sometimes called by my name could fairly be characterized as ‘generally repulsive’ and as having ‘not the slightest chance: of general adoption.’ {—On this point it is sufficient to introduce the following letter f from Oliver Wendell Holmes, whose point of view was at once that of the literary critic and the experienced teacher of anat- omy in a medical school : ‘* Boston, May 3, 1881. ‘DEAR Dr. WILDER: I have read carefully your paper on Nomenclature. I entirely approve of it as an attempt, an attempt which I hope will be partially successful, for no such sweeping change is, I think, ever adopted asa whole. But I am struck with the * The intrinsic merits of various segmental names have been discussed by me in ‘Neural Terms,’ etc., 326-328, and in the Proceedings of this Association for the ninth session, May, 1897, 28-29. + These phrases occur in the ‘Minority Report.? {As a whole or in part this notable document has been printed previously in SCIENCE, May 28, 1881 ; in ‘The Brain of the Cat,’ Amer. Philos. Soc., Proceedings, XIX., p. 530, 1881; ‘Anatomical Technology,’ 1882, p. 11; ‘Neural Terms’, p. 237. 574 reasonableness of the system of changes which you propose, and the fitness of many of the special terms you have suggested. “The last thing an old teacher wants is, as you know full well, a new set of terms for a familiar set of objects. It is hard instructing ancient canine in- dividuals in new devices. It is hard teaching old professors new tricks. So my approbation of your attempt is a sic vos non vobis case so far as I am con- cerned. ‘What you have to do is to keep agitating the sub- ject ; to go on training your students to the new terms, some of which you or others will doubtless see reasons for changing ; to improve as far as possible, fill up blanks, perhaps get up asmall manual in which the new terms shall be practically applied, and have faith that sooner or later the best part of your innovations will find their way into scientific use. The plan is an excellent one ; it isa new garment which will fit Science well, if that capricious and fantastic and old- fashioned dressing lady can only be induced to try it on. ‘* Always very truly yours, ‘“OLIVER WENDELL HoLMEs.”’ XIX. That, at the present stage of the sub- ject, it is possible for any individual, however impartial and well informed, to wholly avert the possibility of misapprehension or even injustice, in attempting to indicate the attitude of living anat- omists toward the simplified nomenclature. —My impartiality may perhaps be challenged, but I am at least familiar with current lit- erature in this respect; moreover, since 1880 I have preserved all letters in which the matter is considered. Probably no one agrees with me absolutely and in every re- spect. On the other hand, even some frankly avowed opponents now assent to what they would have regarded as quite heretical a few years ago.* XX. That whatever misapprehension may ex- ist in this country or abroad as to the degree in which the terms or principles advocated by me are indorsed by others can be justly ascribed to either unfounded declarations or intimations on my part, or to the omission of definite efforts to avert or *In the verbal presentation of a paper at this meeting Professor Dwight designated the costiferous vertebra as thoracic rather than dorsal, with a consist- ency both gratifying and encouraging. SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 225. remove such misapprehension.—The enumera- tion of the conditions that led to the prepa- ration of ‘ Neural Terms’ included (p. 217) the following sentence: ‘I particularly de- sire to free the committees, their individual members, and the associations which they represent, from responsibilities not yet as- sumed by them.” More or less explicit and emphatic affirmations to the same effect oc- cur on pp. 278, 295, 299 and 301.* XXI. That ‘ most scholars are repelled by’ my ‘ fantastic terms and defects of literary form.’— This assertion occurs in the ‘review’ (No. 6), and presumably refers to the ‘system’ in its present or recent state. The position taken is apparently impregnable, since for every one who has declared his adhesion there might be named a score who have said nothing about it. Seriously, however, it is not easy to discuss such a proposition with- out adducing evidence that might fairly be challenged by one side or the other. At any rate, in the present connection I shall omit my more or less intimate friends and correspondents, living and dead ; Harrison Allen, W. R. Birdsall, Oliver Wendell Holmes, Joseph Leidy, and E. C. Seguin ; William Browning, Joseph Collins, Elliott Coues, H. H. Donaldson, F. H. Gerrish, *At the meeting of the American Medical Associa- tion in Philadelphia, June, 1897, the Section on Neu- rology and Medical Jurisprudence adopted the follow- ing resolution, recommended by the Committee on the Address of the Chairman, W. J. Herdman : “ Resolved, That the Section of Neurology and Medical Jurisprudence endorse the neural terms adopted by the American Neurological Association, the Association of American Anatomists, and the American Association for the Advancement of Science, and so far as practical recommend their use in the work of the section. C. K. MILs, C. H. HUGHEs, HAROLD N. MoyvER.’’ Since the action above recorded was taken in June, 1897, it does not, of course, apply to the subsequent adoptions by this Association at the tenth and eleventh sessions ; Dec., 1897, and Dec., 1898. APRIL 21, 1899. ] George M. Gould, the brothers Herrick, G. S. Huntington, C. K. Mills, W. J. Herd- man, H. F. Osborn, C. E. Riggs, D. K. Shute, Sorenson, Spitzka, O. S. Strong, W. G. Tight, C. H. Turner, A. F. Witmer and R. Ramsay Wright; also past or present pupils or colleagues, T. E. Clark, P. A. Fish, S. H. Gage, Mrs. Gage, G. 8. Hopkins, O. D. Humpbrey, A. T. Kerr, B. F. Kingsbury, W. C. Krauss, T. B. Stowell and B. B. Stroud. I have now, I think, eliminated all whose more or less complete adoption or approval of my ‘system’ might be ascribed in some degree to personal considerations.* There has lately been afforded me, how- ever, the desired opportunity of collating the impressions of asomewhat homogeneous group of scholars, quite unlikely to have been influenced by a disinclination to antag- onize my views. Through the courtesy of *Curiously enough, in the single instance of the apparent operation of personal influence, the indi- vidual was of German descent and we had met put once. Prior to our meeting in December, 1895, I prepared a typewritten list of the neural terms that had been adopted earlier in the year by the Anatomische Gesellschaft, and in parallel columns added those preferred by me. Copies of this list were sent to members of the Association ag a basis for the anticipated discussion. In January the late Dr. Carl Heitzmann, in acknowledging his copy, accounted at the same time for his absence from the meeting: ‘‘My intention was to urge the ac- ceptance of the nomenclature adopted by the German Anatomical Society, deficient as it is, simply to ob- tain uniformity. * * * Personally I cannot vote against you; hence I rather abstain from coming to the meetings till this matter will be settled.’’ My response was as follows: ‘‘ Your letter affects me deeply, and were my efforts toward the improve- ment of anatomical nomenclature for my own sake or for the present at all it would go far to deter me from further persistence. But I never lose sight of the fact that we of to-day, and even the honored workers of the past, are few and insignificant as compared with our successors, and I do not mean to be reproached by them for failing to do what Ican. Do not refrain from writing, publishing or voting against me accord- ing to your convictions. It will come out right in the end.”’ SCIENCE. 575 the author of a recent American text-book on ‘The Nervous System and its Diseases,’ in which the simplified nomenclature is fully and expressly employed, I have been enabled to read all the reviews of it that have thus far appeared. For the sake of homogeneity I have excluded two non-med- ical journals, the Revue Newrologique, which says nothing on the subject of nomencla- ture, and the Journal of Comparative Neurol- ogy, which, upon the whole, is favorable. This leaves thirty reviews of a book in- tended for students; reviews written by practitioners, some of them well-known ex- perts and also teachers of neurology. As such, upon general principles, any modifica- tion of the current terminology must be more or less unwelcome to them. Upon the basis of their attitude toward the simplified nomenclature the reviews fall naturally into four groups, viz.: A, those that ignore the subject (8, about 27 per cent.) ; B, those that merely mention it (6, 20. per cent.) ; C, those that condemn the introduction of the simplified terms more or less decidedly (6, 20 per cent.) ; D, those that commend it (10, 33 per cent.). With- out going so far as to reverse the Scriptural saying and claim that ‘he who is not against us is with us,’ we may infer that the four- teen reviewers in groups A and B were at least not ‘repelled’ by the simplified terms; on the contrary, many of them call atten- tion to the clearness and accuracy of the anatomic and embryologic sections of the book where, of course, the terms are most conspicuous. In category C I have included one that might, without réal unfairness, have been left in category B; in the Colorado Medical Journal, after characterizing the anatomic portion of the work as ‘ especially excellent,’ Dr. Eskridge simply expresses the ‘ fear that the new nomenclature will not meet with general favor.’ The six antagonistic reviews are con- 576 tained in the Pacific Record of Medicine and Surgery, the London Lancet, the Colorado Medical Journal, the American Journal of In- sanity, the New York Medical Record and the Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease. I quote from the last two as highly influential and representative. The Record says: “There is to be found an ample, clear and thor- oughly scientific treatment of the anatomy of the nervous system. * * * Weare not in thorough sympathy with nomenclatural cataclysms, and feel that frequently the old and familiar is clothed in new terms for the sake of lending an air of novelty and apparent gloss of ‘science.’ Still in the biological sciences nomenclature forms one of the most impor- tant landmarks of progress, especially when by it new and wider conceptions are gained. We believe, how- ever, that in the adoption of the Wilder terminology the author has departed from a healthy historical conservatism, but this is, perhaps, an academic mat- ter after all.”’ The foregoing contains so many qualifi- cations as to leave its purport somewhat in doubt ; indeed, one may imagine its writer, as he finished it, exclaiming, with the Con- gressman, ‘ Where am I at?’ The remarks of Dr. B. Sachs in the Jour- nal of Nervous and Mental Disease are more explicit, and I should be glad to reproduce them in full; on the present occasion ex- tracts must suffice: “‘Ttis to be feared that the student will not be grateful for the introduction of the new cerebral ter- minology of Wilder and Gage. While recognizing the full merits of the new nomenclature and appre- ciating the benefits conferred upon the comparative anatomist and the comparative embryologist, the truth is, the student of neurology does not need it. * * * * Tt has been suggested that children should begin the study of brain anatomy. The plan is a good one with reference to this nomenclature ; the only way to acquire it is to acquire it early in life, when the cortical cells are ready for the reception of any and all auditory impressions. We have no doubt that in the course of time some of these names will be adopted by general consent ; but it will be well along in the next century before the system, as a whole, will come into use.’’ Upon the whole I find myself less de- pressed by the objections of Dr. Sachs than SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 225. encouraged by his almost startling forecast. He is young enough for me to venture the prediction that ‘ well along in the next cen- tury’ he will be surrounded by colleagues and pupils who, according to my plan,* commenced the practical study of the brain in the primary school, and who, by the aid of the simplified nomenclature, learned twice as rapidly as ourselves. Among the ten favorable reviews the most elaborate is in the Journal of the Amer- ican Medical Association (August 20, 1898). That in the New York Medical Jowrnal (May 21, 1898) concludes thus: “We are very glad that the author has had the courage to introduce these terms, believing, as we do, in their correctness and in the need of their becoming familiar.”’ I refrain from reading the other reviewst in Group D, mainly because the expressions therein complimentary to myself are em- barrassingly numerous and emphatic. In view of this evidence those who contend that ‘most scholars are repelled by my fan- tastic terms and defects of literary form’ would seem called upon to either withdraw that claim as a misapprehension or to mod- ify materially the commonly accepted defi- nition of medical and scientific scholarship. XXII. That ‘barbarisms’ constitute an ob- jectionable feature of my ‘system.’—Upon the supposition that by barbarisms are here meant hybrid words, this point was some- what fully discussed in ‘ Neural Terms,’ p. 290. Since the criticism was offered by the * The desirability and feasibility of the acquisition of some real and accurate knowledge of the brain by precollegiate scholars. Amer. Soc. Naturalists Records, p. 31, 1896 ; ScrENCE, December 17, 1897. + The St. Lowis Medical and Surgical Journal ( April, 1898); (Portland, Oregon) Medical Sentinel (April, 1898); (Detroit) Medical Age (April 11, 1898); Can- ada Lancct (May, 1898); Richmond (Va.) Journal of Practice (May, 1898); Buffalo Medical Journal (June, 1898); University (of Pa.) Medical Magazine (Septem- ber, 1898); North Carolina Medical Journal (Septem- ber, 1898). APRIL 21, 1899.] chairman of the Nomenclatur Commission, Professor Kolliker, it might naturally be inferred that the list of terms adopted by that body is free from hybrid words. Yet not only does the B. N. A. contain several such, but certain of them are less eupho- nious than most of those for which I am responsible. Comparison is invited between the Greco-Latin combinations in the two following groups, the first from my list, the second from the B. N. A.; in each case the Greek element is printed in italics: Meta- tela, diatela, paratela, metaplexus, diaplexus, paraplexus, ectocinerea, entocinerea, hemice- rebrum, hemzseptum ; epidurale, mesovaricus, parumbilicales, parolfactorius, suprachoriot- dea,* pterygopalatinus, pterygomandibularis, phrenicocostalis, sphenopalatinum, sphenodc- cipitalis, occipitomastoidea, squamosomas- toidea. ; XXIII. That progress toward the right so- lution of the questions involved is really facili- tated by general denunciations of a given system or its advocates.—The attitude of some may be likened to that of the child in the lines : “*T do not love thee, Dr. Fell, The reason why I cannot tell, But this alone I know full well, I do not love thee, Dr. Fell.” History will record whether such con- servatives shall rank with heroic defenders of law and order, or be rated among the Canutes of science, their utterances, in re- spect to nomenclature, remembered mainly as ‘things one would rather have left un- said.’ History will likewise record whether some others, including, of course, the fra- mers of the ‘ Majority Report,’ shall be meta- phorically ‘hanged, drawn and quartered’ *In Table IV., p. 290 of ‘Neural Terms’ (likewise in Biological Lectures, p. 158) suprachorioidea was printed without the first (and, as it seems to me, superfluous) 7; also, most regrettably, there was in- cluded in the list perichorioideale, a wholly Greek combination. SCIENCE, 577 as rebels, or, notwithstanding errors of judgment, credited with leaving the path- way of future students of anatomy smoother than they found it themselves. XXIV. That the English-speaking anatomists who have been laboring long for the simplification of nomenclature are called wpon to submit in- definitely to animadversions based wpon inertia, lack of information, misapprehension, or undue deference to the adverse pronunciamentos of scien- tific potentates abroad.—Speaking for myself alone, the spirit in which I prefer to meet hostile criticism is fairly exemplified in my reply (NV. Y. Medical Record, Oct. 2, 1886, 389-390) to an article in a leading medical journal containing an egregious and inex- cusable misstatement that might readily have led uninformed readers to question the soundness of allmy proposals. That article, however, although upon the editorial page, was evidently prepared in haste. But such extenuation will scarcely be urged in the case of the publication numbered 6 in the list in the note on p. 566. This is a review of an article (no. 5), and to avoid confu- sion I shall speak of the ‘article’ and its ‘author,’ of the ‘review’ and the ‘re- viewer.’ The review contains this passage: ‘Some of the peculiarities of the Wilder system are then briefly discussed [in the article], attention being called to its disre- gard of the ordinary principles of language formation as exemplified by Ist. The muti- lation of words as by using * * * hippo- camp * for hippocampus major.”’ *JIn the original this is ‘chippocamp’. The re- viewer promptly assured me that the mistake was the printer’s and that it would be ‘corrected wherever possible’. I assume that the copies of SCIENCE sent by him to others were emended like that received by me. But, so far as Iam aware, no public correction has been made. Under some circumstances this might be regarded as superfluous. But it must be borne in mind that unjustifiable verbifaction constituted the very substance of the indictment; hence the situation was as if John Doe accused Richard Roe publicly of 578 SCIENCE, It may be doubted whether scientific literature can furnish a single sentence of equal length containing so many erroneous * statements and implications. For clear dis- crimination the several points shall be put in the form of questions: 1. In the article purporting to be the source of the criticism quoted is there men- tioned either the word hippocamp or any other word representing a comparable ety- mologic category ? In that article, beyond the reproduction of reports including the words hippocampus and hippocampus major, the single reference is as follows (translated) : ‘‘Wilder holds that there is no longer ground for retaining avis with calcar, a term which is to be used in place of hippocampus minor. If this be granted, then naturally the major of hippocampus major ean be dropped. ‘The writer approves of these changes.’’ 2. Is the reviewer himself on record as preferring the apparently alternative term, ‘hippocampus major,’ to hippocampus ? The reviewer, as a member of our Com- mittee on Anatomical Nomenclature, signed the first report, in 1889, which recom- mended the replacement of ‘hippocampus major’ by hippocampus. . Since this change was also adopted in 1895 by the Anatom- ische Gesellschaft, I have not supposed that its abandonmert was embraced within the proposition of the ‘ Minority Report’ that the Association should ‘ reconsider its acts from the beginning.’ 3. Has the word hippocamp ever been used or proposed by me in any other status than passing counterfeit money; as if the nature of one of Roe’s occupations at the time rendered it particularly desirable that his character be unimpeached; as if part of the evidence against him were a spurious coin that had been dropped into his pocket accidentally by an employee of Doe himself; and, finally, as if Doe held adequate reparation to be made by confining the admission of the mistake to the officers of the law and his personal friends. Nevertheless, in order that the issues before us may be kept free of all points upon which there may beroom for diversity of opinion, this mischance shall be hereafter ignored. [N.S. Vou. IX.. No. 225. that of a national, English form (Anglo- paronym) of the international, Latin hip- pocampus ? The negative answer to this may be found in various publications during the last fifteen years. Among the fuller and more accessible presentations are these passages from ‘Neural Terms’ (pp. 231-232, 226): ‘* Each anatomist prefers to employ terms belonging to his own language ; at the same time he prefers that others should employ Latin terms with which he is already familiar. Sea horse, Cheval marin and See- pferd are synonyms (in the broader sense, 742), but to either an Englishman, a Frenchman or a German, two of them are foreign words and unacceptable. Hippocampus is distinctly a Latin word, and the fre- quent occurrence of such imparts a pedantic charac- ter to either discourse or written page. Hippocamp, | hippocampe, hippocampo, and Hippokamp are as dis- tinetly national forms of the common international antecedent (not to invoke the original Greek inroxaproc), and are readily recognized by all, while yet conforming to the ‘genius’ of each language.’’ 4. Does the reduction of hippocampus to hippocamp represent a group of cases so nu- merous in even my complete list of neural terms as to constitute a prominent feature of what is called my ‘ system ?’ The list embraces about 440 terms; besides hippocamp there are just two cases in which I have been apparently the first to Angli- cize Latin words by dropping the last sylla- ble, the inflected ending; viz., myelon, myel, and encephalon, encephal (and its com- pounds). 5. If, finally, every one of the 440 Latin terms happened to consist of a single word ending in either a, ma, us, on, is, wm, or tum, and if I had proposed that English-speak- ing anatomists should customarily omit those syllables, would that render the ‘ sys- tem’ open to the charge of ‘mutilation of words’ or ‘ disregard of the ordinary prin- ciples of language formation ?’ For a negative answer to this question we need not look beyond the limits of the re- view itself, the language of which is pre- ( ri) APRIL 21, 1899.] sumed to be sanctioned by the authoritative journal in which it is printed. All of the following English words occurring therein differ from their Latin (or Latinized) ante- cedents in the omission of the inflected syllable: Form, system, barbarism, act, public, defect, subject, natural, official, dis- tinct, historic, artificial, peculiar, human. If to these be added a few equally familiar, viz., arm, aqueduct, oviduct, tract, exit and stomach, it will be conceded, I trust, that hippocamp is in irreproachable etymologic company. Indeed, we may now adopt the affirma- tive attitude and declare that among all the principles of language formation no one is better established or more generally recog- nized by scholars than that certain Latin words may be Anglicized by the elision of the ultima.* I gladly forbear further direct and specific comment upon the case of hippocamp, but its more general aspects may be indicated in the three following queries : 1. Does scientific comity (which is com- parable in some respects with what is called “senatorial courtesy ’) render it incumbent upon the author of an article to refrain from disavowing responsibility for unjust state- ments wrongly attributed to him by a re- viewer ? 2. Should editorial regard for the privi- leges of writers tolerate the publication of unsound linguistic allegations that bring discredit upon American scholarship ? 3. Is it probable that further assaults upon the simplified nomenclature from the etymologic standpoint will redound to the advancement of knowledge or the credit of the assailants ? * This is simply one of several well-known ways of converting Latin words into English ; others are enumerated in ‘ Anatomical Terminology ’ ( Reference Handbook of the Medical Sciences, VIII., 527) ; for all such processes of word-adoption the term pa- ronymy (from tapwvuuia, the formation of one word from another by inflection or slight change) was pro- posed by me in 1885. SCIENCE. 579 XXV. That, saving perhaps in the case of such German anatomists as read English with difficulty, the amount and nature of the informa- tion contained in the article numbered 5 in the note to p. 566 over and above what was already accessible to them in my own publications com- pensates for the misapprehensions likely to be oc- easioned by it. XXVI. That efforts toward the establishment of an international nomenclature should be abandoned because of the arrogance of individ- uals or committees of particular nations,—As an evidence of the existence of a real discour- agement in this respect I quote from a re- cent private letter from a well-known nat- uralist : “‘T am nota believer in international codperation, since it generally means that one nation has it all its own way.’’ If we read between the lines and recall the epigram, ‘Man and woman are one, but the man is the one,’ it may be imagined that my pessimistic correspondent adum- brates the doctrine, ‘As to Anatomic No- menclature all nations are one—but Ger- many is the one.’ XXVIII. That, in estimating the probability of the soundness and eventual adoption of my terminologic proposals, there should be taken into account only on even mainly the terms that are new or otherwise less acceptable, rather than those respecting which my adoption antedates that of the Anatomische Gesellschaft.—Let us grant, for the sake of argument, that my aula, porta, cimbia, mesocelia, metatela, metaporus and the like are doomed to ‘innocuous desuetude ;’ shall the folly of their vain in- troduction outweigh the evidences of sane prevision exhibited between’ the years of 1880 and 1895 in the deliberate and inde- pendent choice, among abundant and per- plexing synonyms, of, for example, the following: Palliwm, gyrus, fissura, insula, centralis (rather than Rolandi), collateralis, calearina, paracentralis, praecuneus, cuneus, hippocampus, fornix, thalamus, hypophysis, di- 580 encephalon, tegmentum, vermis, nodulus, floccu- lus, pons, lemniscus, obex, oliva, clava and vagus 2° XXVIII. That the originality of the B. N. A. (the Nomenclature adopted at Baselin 1895 by the Anatomische Ctesellschaft) is to be meas- ured by the manifestation therein of non-ac- quaintance with what had been proposed or ac- complished by English-speaking anatomists.—To be more explicit, I repeat here a paragraph from ‘Neural Terms’ (§ 276) referring to the action of American Committees between 1889 and 1892 : “ Although the specific terms included in these recommendations are few, they exemplify all the commendable features of the German report. Indeed, T fail to discover in the latter any general statement, principle, rule or suggestion that had not already been set forth with at least equal accuracy, clearness and force in the writings of British and American anato- mists prior to 1895.”’ XXIX. That-indijference or even hostility to terminologic improvement, especially wpon the part of the older generation, should be thought either surprising or discouraging.—The first point was conceded by me in 1881: ‘The trained anatomist shrinks from an unfamiliar word as from an unworn boot; the trials of his own pupilage are but vaguely’ remembered ; each day there seems more to be done, and less time in which to do it ; nor is it to be expected that he will be at- tracted spontaneously toward the consideration that his own personal convenience and preferences, and even those of all his distinguished contemporaries, should be held of little moment as compared with the advantages which reform may insure to the vastly more numerous anatomical workers of the future.”’ The second point is covered by the review in the Philadelphia Polyclinic, which I have included in Category B (xxi.): “« While some of our friends across the Atlantic may possibly consider this too radical a departure from long-established customs, the author of the book be- lieves that time and familiarity with the terms will justify the course he has followed.’’ XXX. That action upon the general subject should be indefinitely postponed.—This is the hour and you are the men. Let not the SCIENCE. [N. 8. Vou. IX. No. 225. ‘ fools rush in, because the ‘angels’ of this Association ‘fear to tread.’ XXXI. That it is incumbent upon this As- sociation to decide immediately upon the names for all parts of the body or even for all parts of the central nervous system.—In a matter of such moment precipitation is to be avoided. XXXII. That there are contemplated by the majority of the Committee, or by any member thereof, with regard to the names of the other parts of the body, changes comparable in num- ber and extent with what have been proposed for the central nervous system.* XXXIII. That members of the Association shouid content themselves with simply awaiting the operation of the law of the survival of the jittest.—Upon this point I quote again the brothers Herrick. The conclusion of their article, ‘Inquiries,’ etc., reads: “The unification of our nomenclature is to be ac- complished, if at all, by a process of survival of the fittest among competing terms at the hands of our working anatomists rather than by legislative enact- ment. Yet the international discussions now in prog- ress may do much to further this end.’’ I trust they will pardon me for attaching the greater significance to the final conces- sion. The subject before us is preéminently one that concerns mind rather than mat- ter; and its determination should be reached not so much through the operation of numbers or force as by the exercise of the highest human qualities, deliberation, self- restraint, and consideration for others. XXXIV. That members of this Association should defer to what is called ‘general usage.’— Of all so-called leaders, the most incapable, blundering, and dangerous is ‘ General Usage’. He stands for thoughtless imita- tion, the residuum of the ape in humanity; for senseless and indecorous fashions, the caprices of the demi-monde; for superstition and hysteria, the attributes of the mob; for *See, for example, the report submitted and adopted at this session ; SCIENCE, March 3, 1899, p. 321; also, Phil. Med. Journal, Feb. 25th, and Jour. Comp. Neurology, ix., No. 1. APRIL 21, 1899. ] slang, the language of the street hoodlum and of his deliberate imitator, the college ‘sport’; and, finally, in science, for the larger part of the current nomenclature of the brain. As scholarly anatomists it is at once our prerogative and our duty to scru- tinize and reflect, and to deal with the language of our science in the same spirit and with the same discrimination that we maintain in regard to the parts of the body and the generalizations concerning them. It may be that a crisis has been reached ; that this is the turning-point. If defeat awaits us, let there be no doubt as to my attitude. Let me be regarded as the chief offender, and let the group of terms advo- cated by me be derided as ‘ Wilder’s Scien- tific Volapuk.’ But if, rather, despite errors and reverses, we are in the end to overcome inertia and prejudice, then I trust that the labors and sacrifices of so many English- speaking anatomists for the simplification of anatomic nomenclature may be recog- nized in the designation: ‘The Anglo- American System.’ Indeed, whatever be the fate of any par- ticular set of terms, of this I am assured : that system will ultimately prevail which is approved and used by anatomists of the English-speaking race—the composite, all- absorbing, expanding, dominating race of the future. In no spirit of national self-glorification, much less with any personal animosity, but rather as a friendly injunction to prepare for the inevitable, I shall not object if por- tions of this address (for all of which, be it understood, I alone am responsible) are in- terpreted as a declaration of intellectual independence ; as a claim for the recogni- tion of what is done in England and Amer- ica upon the basis of its intrinsic value ; and as a protest against an indifference which in some instances has seemed to lack even that semblance of consideration which at least was commonly maintained during SCIENCE. 581 the manifestation, a generation ago, of what an American scholar characterized as a ‘certain condescension observable among foreigners.’ Let me conclude with a passage in more cheerful vein: ‘“‘ When the first little wave of the rising tide comes creeping up the shore the sun derides her, and the dry sand drinks her, and her frightened sisters pull her back- ward, and yet again she escapes; and still her expostulating sisters cling to her skirts, and the rabble of waves behind cry out against her boldness, and all the depths of the ocean seem rising to drag her down. And now the second rank of waves, who would have died of shame at being the first, have unwillingly passed the earlier mark of the little wave that led them ; and now you may float in your ship, for lo! the tide is full. So it is with all systems of re- form; though the pioneers be derided, the great needs of humanity behind push on to triumphant acquisition of the new order of things.”’ Burt G. WILDER. CORNELL UNIVERSITY. THE BREEDING OF ANIMALS AT WOODS HOLE DURING THE MONTH OF SEP- TEMBER, 1898. Wirs the month of September the record of the breeding habits of the summer fauna practically closes. Very few of the species continue to breed into October. The auf- trieb, though less rich in species, is at the beginning of the month similar to that of late August, but after the first week the number of forms steadily decreases. It consists for the most part of crustacean larvee, the bulk of the material being brachy- uran and eupagurid. The temperature of the water was con- stant at 72° F. for the first week. It then fell steadily until the 25th, when it reached 65° F., and remained at this point until the 582 close of the month. from 1.0208 to 1.0225. Vertebrata. The fishes present no fea- tures of special interest, as the summer forms are still present, and no species is breeding. The surface skimmings show a few fry at intervals. On the 20th one or two larval flatfish, in which the eyes had just begun to migrate, were taken. About the 25th three smooth dogfish, Galeus canis, which had been confined in the ‘ Pool,’ were killed, and twenty-seven embryos, 10 to 11 cm. long, were found in the oviducets. Crustacea. None of the adult brachyura examined were breeding. Zoéz were con- spicuous in the auftrieb during the early part of the month, and later various mega- lops were abundant. The zoéa of Callinectes hastatus was the most abundant form, lasting about two weeks. The megalops of this species was plentiful at all times, particularly on the 18th. Specimens in the laboratory changed to the beautifully-spotted ‘first adult’ on September 27th, 29th, and October 3d. An- other zoéa (which I have not identified) was very abundant in the latter part of August and the first week of September, disappearing about the 11th. It resembles the zoéa of Callinectes, but has a longer rostrum and dorsal spine, and the exopodite of the antenna is a straight blade as long as the rostrum. Among the Anomura, the larvee of Hippa had disappeared on September 4th. Eupa- gurid zoéze swarmed in August and the first week in September, and were present in decreasing numbers throughout the month. The ‘glaucothoé-stage’ was abun- dant at all times. Data relating to the breeding of Eupagurus bernhardus and E. pollicaris are scanty, but the few females of the latter species which were examined were without eggs. LH. annulipes was brought in on the 4th, when a few were bearing eggs in early stages of development. Females of The density varied SCIENCE. (N.S. Vou. IX. No. 225. E. longicarpus with eggs were taken as late as the 13th. Among the Macroura, specimens of Vir- bius zostericola had eggs in the later stages on the llth. Larve and young adults, ranging in length from 5 mm. to 10 or 15 mm., were present in the skim- mings. Those of small size persisted throughout the month. Palemonetes vul- garis was not breeding, but the larve (mostly the ‘fifth’ and ‘sixth’ stages of Faxon) were occasionally taken, and to- ward the end of the month several of the ‘first adult stage ’ were found. A specimen of Crangon vulgaris with eggs was obtained on the 19th. Heteromysis, dredged at Vine- yard Haven on the 12th, and off Nobska Point about a week later, had well-ad- vanced eggs in the brood-pouch. No adult Isopoda were examined, but immature IJdotea robusta and I. irrorata, ranging in length from 2 mm. upward, frequently appeared in the skimmings. Among the Amphipoda, a minute form, apparently a species of Montagua, was very common among the hydroids. On Septem- ber 21st nearly all were carrying eggs in various stages of development. Many Ca- prelle obtained at the same time bore em- bryos approaching maturity. Squilla larvee (5 mm. long) appeared at intervals throughout the month. Copepods were abundant at all times. Diastylis was taken in the evening and is apparently at- tracted by any artificial light. On the 12th a number of ‘Goose Barnacles’ had eggs in all the later embryonic stages, and some began to liberate nauplii about this date. Mollusea. Sceycotypus continued to de- posit its ‘ege-strings’ during the first two weeks of the month. The breeding period of Crepidula fornicata hadclosed, but onthe19th I found a few specimens of Crepidula plana with eggs in early cleavage stages. The breeding period of Littorina littorea in Ameri- can waters is not known. On the 20th great APRIL 21, 1899. ] numbers of young, about one millimeter in diameter, were found on the rocks at Nobska Point. During the latter part of August and the early part of September, Veligers, all apparently of one species, were conspicu- ous in the surface skimmings ; these disap- peared at about the time that the young Tittorina were found. Vermes. Mr. R. H. Johnson found Bugula turrita liberating embryos, even after the middle of the month. Small specimens of Nereis limbata and cer- tain allied forms occurred sparingly in the auftrieb. _ On the evening of the 30th Autolytus was still fairly abundant, and many of the females were carrying eggs in early stages of development. Rhyncobolus and Diopatra were not breeding. Celenterata. With the exception of one or two minute forms, no Medusze were found. Gonionemus was abundant in the Eel Pond, and specimens brought into the laboratory about the middle of the month extruded eggs. The greater part of these eggs did not reach the blastula, and none de- veloped beyond this stage. Ctenophores Mnemiopsis, very conspicuous in late August, appeared inincreasing numbers during Sep- tember. Obelia, with a few ripe gonangia, was obtained on the.21st. Pennaria tiarella formed the bulk of the abundant hydroid- growths on the Fish Commission wharves, although a Erudendiuwm, probably E. ramo- sum, was plentiful. Here and there small patches of Plumularia tenella were found. East Chop and Edgartown were visited on the 12th. At the former place there were few colonies of Pennaria, but a great abun- ‘ dance of Eudendrium and Plumularia. At Edgartown I did not find either Pennaria or Eudendrium, but Plumularia occurred in dense masses, which literally covered the submerged woodwork of the wharves. At Woods Hole the colonies of Plumularia were small and sterile, while at the other localities they were large and provided with SCIENCE. 583 gonangia in the various stages of develop- ment. The Hudendrium and Pennaria bore me- dusa-buds in all stages, and the latter species remained in fruit as late as the 21st, and perhaps later. M. T. THompson. ECONOMICS IN MANUFACTURES. One of the most difficult problems in practical economics, in the whole range of modern industrial systems, is that of se- curing a just and satisfactory method of insuring fair exchange of labor for capital or wages where large bodies of workmen are to be employed. Cooperation and in- numerable plans of‘ piece-work ’ and ‘profit- sharing’ have been proposed, and none have, in practice, been found either in the abstract entirely equitable or wholly satis- factory to the employer as securing sufficient output from his always burdensome invest- ments, profit on his sales, or a contented and fair-minded relation between himself and his employés; nor has any system been found which fully satisfies the workman in either extent of total compensation, oppor- tunity to secure compensation proportioned to his exertions and ability, or in abstract equity in distribution of profits. One of the most promising of the later plans for a fair and honest and satisfactory distribution of profits and a very effective stimulus of the right spirit in both em- ployer and employé was described, as a first experiment, to the American Society of Mechanical Engiueers, some years ago, by Mr. F. A. Halsey, then or earlier manager of the Canadian Rand Drill Co., at Sher- brooke, Quebec, Canada. Mr. Halsey called his plan ‘The Premium Plan of Paying for Labor,’ and the title is indicative of its na- ture.* The author of this system now reports the outcome of a considerable number of * Trans. Am. Soc. Mech. Eng’rs ; Vol. XII. 584 experiments in its employment, some by important and famous manufacturers of various mechanical devices, from the steam- engine to the machine-tool. The following abstract is based upon his account of these later experiences, as given in the American Machinist, with extended tables of data and results.* The plan has been in use eight years, and has come into use, ina number of establish- ments, sufficiently to give ample experience in is workings. Curiously enough, how- ever, although devised for the benefit of the workmen, mainly and primarily, and invariably promising them gain, it has as in- variably been received with suspicion and reluctance by them, and in at least one case has been opposed by the trade-unions of the place. In all but a single case, how- ever, it has proved entirely successful in the accomplishment of its purpose—the promo- tion of the wage-earning power of the men and of the dividend-paying power of the es- tablishment ; sharing profits while stimula- ting ambition and increasing output. It gives the workman increased day’s wages ; it gives the employer increased output from his works, at reduced cost and increasing profits, shared with those who make them possible. The workman gains directly, day by day; the employer not only gains, di- rectly, by increased output from the same number of men, but also indirectly and in an exceedingly important degree, often, through the increased earning power of his capital, invested in plantand in funds. Piece-work has not been wholly success- ful, and in too many cases the selfishness and greed of the employer, seeking to mo- nopolize all the profit, compels the work- man to accept a rate which makes his day’s work no more profitable to him when work- ing under high-pressure than when doing an ordinary day’s work at fixed wages at such a rate that he can sustain that amount * March 9, 1899. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 225. of production indefinitely. Where properly adopted and adjusted, it is a vast improve- ment upon the older plan. Mr. Halsey’s plan puts a premium upon increasing pro- duction, in such manner that both employer and employé are inevitably alike advan- taged, and skill and industry and steady work secure proportional reward. It in- volves something of the principle of the common bargain by which a salesman is given a fixed and moderate salary plus a stated percentage on sales. Under this new plan the employer offers a workman a premium, perhaps ten cents, for each hour by which the production of a certain piece is reduced below that of the observed nor- mal average or below an assumed period of time ; the day’s wage being that of the time and place, as fixed by ordinary circum- stances in the market, and without control, usually, by either party to the bargain. Suppose that pay to be three dollars a day and an hour to be saved in a piece ordinarily requiring just a day’s work for its production. The proprietor gains the hour and his thirty cents otherwise paid as wages for the hour; he loses ten cents premium ; he gains in rate of output of the establishment, and so makes it possible to secure larger returns through more effec- tive use of all other capital than the ‘ wages fund’ The workman gains his ten cents and the privilege of adding an extra hour’s work on a new ‘job.’ Thus both parties gain. Had the premium been fifteen cents the money-gain would have netted both equal amounts, fifteen cents, per day. Thus, as in Table I., we sometimes actually find enormous gains possible through the in- genuity of the workman in finding ways of reducing time of production, as by increased personal activity, or by securing deeper cuts and higher speed of cutting, or less time in putting the piece in place or in replacing it by its successor, etc. The writer has known of a case in which the APRIL 21, 1899.] cost of an important machine was reduced by such expedients from $250 to about $75, TABLE I.—OPERATION OF THE PREMIUM PLAN. 1 2 3 4 5 d| 8 é|#ut \agst Sse pee sere scl ak sis S 8 se gure ae? SoS a S| AA ooh al Hours. liaise 10 $3.00 $0. $3.00 $0.30 9 2.70 -10 2.80 dll 8 2.40 -20 2.60 .320 uf 2.10 30 2.40 || 343, 6 1.80 -40 2.20 366 5 1.50 50 2.00 -40 Table II. is taken from the books of one of this establishments actually employing this ‘premium plan,’ and shows a gain of more than one half, in this particular in- stance, in time of production—in produc- tivity, in fact—in the works, of just double wages for the workman, per piece produced, and a net increase in day’s wages of eighteen per cent.; while the gain to the company was very much greater through its operation upon the interest and mainte- nance accounts. SCIENCE. 585 In another actual case where the parts reported upon all belonged to a single con- tract, and comprised the whole contract, the gains of the workmen were 29 per cent. on the day’s wages, 25 per cent. on the piece, and the time of production of each piece averaged a reduction of 63 per cent. These figures are astonishing; but they mark the enormous difference between the productivity of a man working under the old conditions of the day’s-work plan, with- out incentive to either good work or to doing his best in continuous labor, and the premium-system, which is likely to give ambition, energy and productiveness to the most stolid. In this table Cases 41 to 44 are records made where both parties doubted the possibility of any gain at all One case was made by an apprentice boy and the standard was based on the work of an ex- perienced workman. Another case gives illustrations of successive gains with prac- tice on successive pieces. All illustrate large and equitably-shared gains over the old system of day’s wages. Everything depends, however, upon an equitable basis of inauguration. It is bet- TABLE II.—RESULTS OF APPLYING THE PREMIUM PLAN TO MISCELLANEOUS WORK. RATIOS OF TOTALS. Newtime 44 New wages per piece 50 New wages per day _ 118 Old time 100 Old wages per piece 100 Old wages perday. 100 RATIOS OF TOTALS WITH 46 OMITTED. New time 76 New wages per piece 88 New wages perday _ 118 Old time 100 _ production of over 900 pieces by each method. Old wages per piece 100 100 Note that while this table deals with small parts it also deals with large lots. The ratios at the bottom compare the pie Mais PREMIUM PLAN | ola | New | ola | New f TORK i ai _| wages | Wages wages|wages NATURE OF WORK. Operation wae per| Nowotl mime ney No. of |cost per|cost per per per pes. in i pes. in| piece | piece ay ay piece lot piece lot Hours Hours 41. Long T-shaped piece cast-iron. -|Chuck, Drill & Ream 125 300 089 300 | $ .0275 | $ .0258 $2.82 42. Parker size cast-iron 6 remarraima 178 200 112 200 -0492 -0317 2.84 A) ic ane 8 | i fi ch 275 | 100 175 100 | 0605} .0533| 2.20| 3.06 44, Md corre CSth damibee x S KolaiecHamtoe 366 100 -183 100 0805 -0624 | 2.20) 3.41 45. Cast-iron wedge. Plane 3.5 2 8.25 4 805 “792 2.30 2.44 46. Box-shaped castii Oblique planing b 1 21. 1 14.00 6.25 2.50 2.98 47. Cast-iron wedge |Plane 8.75 2 2.62 4 825 727 2.20 | 2.76 48. Small pulleys, ca: Chuck Drill& Ream 18 100 : 3 100 045 0417 2.50 3.20 49. Spindle steel.. Grind 3 sizes 6_ 50 -36 50 144 09 2.40 2.50 50. Small head sto .|Mill 8 operations 45 50 +32 50 1237 -0925 | 2.75] 2.90 ALG AIK) acdpedeqoapeocodonen) — |b" 1 ceadaaadéage §5:424" | oc eee 28.239 |||\'slonise $16.1604| $8.1664 $24.45 |$28.91 Totalseomittin SAG he cle3. The ques- tions in natural science refer to: (1) the geolog- ical formations at Comblain au Pont, and whether these are Devonian or Carboniferous ; (2) the physical modifications produced in min- erals by pressure ; (3) the organization and de- velopment of the platoda ; (4) the presence of a nucleus in the Sehizophyta; (5) the Devonian flora of Belgium. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. ASSISTANTS IN PHYSIOLOGY IN HARVARD MED- ICAL SCHOOL. Two of the four positions offered by the Har- vard Medical School to properly qualified men desirious of training in physiological research SCIENCE, 631 and in the management of large laboratory classes in experimental physiology are not yet filled for the next collegiate year. Holders of these positions give more than half the day to research. The remaining time is spent during the first four months in learning laboratory methods and during the last four months in di- recting the laboratory work of the medical students, two hundred of whom work from two to three hours daily for sixteen weeks in ex- perimental physiology. The fundamental ex- periments in physiology done by two hundred men working at one time present every variety of results and impart a training in observation and administration not to be acquired in other ways. Much too may be learned by association ; from six to ten men are constantly engaged in research in the laboratory of physiology, and in the departments of anatomy, histology, pathology, physiology and physiological chem- istry, all of which have their laboratories in the medical school building, are more than thirty instructors. No charge of any kind is made, either for the training in physiological research and in teaching or for the use of animals and other material. Four of the eight investiga- tions already made by holders of these positions have appeared in the American Journal of Physi ology, and the others will be published shortly. In addition to these opportunities the school gives each assistant four hundred dollars for superintending the class work in experimental physiology three hours daily during sixteen weeks. Applications for these positions should be made to Dr. H. P. Bowditch, Harvard Medical School, 688 Boylston Street, Boston, Mass. GENERAL, ‘ Tue following gifts and bequests to educa- tional institutions have been made since our last issue: $50,000 to Oberlin College for a chemical laboratory ; $8,000 to Vassar College by the will of Mrs. Luther Elthing for the founding of a scholarship; $6,000 from Miss Emily H. Bourne for the establishment of schol- arships in Barnard College; $10,000 to the Catholic University of Washington by the will of Miss Mary Moran, and a conditional gift of 632 $30,000 to Yankton College, S. D., from D. K. Pearson. FOREIGN journals report that the late W. J. Astrakoff has bequeathed to the University of Moscow a sum ofa million roubles, on condition that it shall be expended upon the foundation of a ‘ Moscow University for Women,’ with three faculties—mathematics, medicine and natural science. He requires that it shall be placed under the direct administration of the Ministry of Public Education and the program corre- spond exactly with that of the University for men. THE Mechanical Hall of the University of West Virginia was destroyed by fire on March 4th. The building was insured for $28,000, and the loss beyond this sum is not great. The building will be immediately replaced. THE present state of affairs in the Russian universities in extremely serious. Not only has the University at St. Petersburg been closed for some time, but similar conditions exist at Moscow, Kieff, Kharkoff, Odessa, Kasan, Tomsk and Warsaw, and in most of the tech- nical institutes. More than 30,000 young men who will soon form an important part ofthe in- tellectual class in Russia are affected. The troubles began by a demonstration against the Rector of the University of St. Petersburg, which was followed by an encounter with the police in which Cossack whips were used upon the students. The Russian government ap- pears to sympathize to a certain extent with the students, and an investigation has been ordered. Tue statement in the daily press to the effect that Dr. J. L. Wortmann has been elected by the Yale corporation professor of paleontology and Curator of the Peabody Museum is in- correct. It is, however, probable that the work in paleontology will be in some way divided between Professor C. E. Beecher, of Yale Uni- versity, and Dr. J. L. Wortmann. Mr. J. ArrHuR THOMPSON has been ap- pointed professor of natural history in the Uni- versity of Aberdeen in succession to the late Professor Nicholson. Dr. RopeRT Murr has been elected to the vacant professorship of pathology in the Uni- versity of Glasgow. Dr. Muir was last year SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. EX. No. 226. called from a lectureship at Edinburgh to the professorship of pathology at St. Andrews. He has published important contributions especially on the pathology of the blood and of the bone- marrow. Mr. W. A. MurRiuy has been appointed As- sistant Cryptogamic Botanist of the Cornell University Experiment Station for one year, during the absence, in Europe, of Dr. B. M. Duggar. Mr. Murrill is a graduate of the Washington and Lee University, and of the Virginia Agricultural College. He entered upon graduate study at Cornell University two years ago, when he was appointed scholar in botany. During the last year he held one of the positions of graduate assistant in botany at Cornell. He is still continuing graduate work. EpGar BUCKINGHAM, associate in physics and physical chemistry in Bryn Mawr College, has resigned his position. J. H. McCracken, assistant professor of philosophy in New York University, has been elected President of Westminster College. TWENTY-SIX fellowships have been announced in the University of Pennsylvania, of which the following were given in the sciences: Reap- pointments—Philosophy, H. B. Alexander ; Mathematics, R. H. Vivian. New appoint- ments—Mathematics and Astronomy, U. 8. Hanna ; Physics, H. S. Conrad ; Chemistry, T. M. Taylor, M. B. MacDonald ; Zoology, J. R. Murlin, C. B. Thompson ; Pedagogy, I. B. Mc- Neal. Dr. Dante E, Rosa, of Turin, has been ap- pointed associate professor of comparative anatomy in the University at Sassari; Profes- sor Bergen, of Munich, has been made professor of geology and mineralogy in the School of Min- ing at Klausthal. Dr. Solomon, docent in mineralogy at the University of Heidelberg, has been promoted to an assistant professorship. Dr. W.-Wien, associate professor of physics at the . Institute of Technology at Aix, has been called to a full professorship at the University at Giessen. Dr. Eggeling has qualified as docent in comparative anatomy and embryology in the University at Strassburg, and Dr. Zermelo as docent in mathematics and theoretical phys- ics in the University at Giessen. SCIENCE EDITORIAL CoMMITTEE: 8. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WoopwARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THuRsToN, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE ContE, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; HENRY F. OsBoRN, Paleontology ; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; 8. H. ScupDER, Entomology; C. E. Brssry, N. L. BRITTON, Botany; C. 8. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bowpitcu, Physiology; J. S. Bryrnas, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- TON, J. W. POWELL, Anthropology. Fripay, May 5, 1899. CONTENTS: “Observations of the Planet Mars:’ PROFESSOR G. SCHIAPAREDUG feeccsccstsessssneseassorssacsssecuesestess 633 Dr, Alexander Graham Bell on the Development by Selection of Supernumerary Mamme in Sheep. (GWathPPlaten Va) ccc sadtsccssessestetcetensetnesess 637 Latest Voleanie Eruptions of the Pacific Coast: J. SBDINTERAreccscccesscccscnscencnsscrevsececcteceersescse 639 The Prospective Place of the Solar Azimuth Tables in the Problem of Accelerating Ocean Transit: G. W. LITTLEHALES Some New American Fossil Fishes: C. R. EASTMAN. 642 Rapidity of Sand-Plain Growth: M. L. FULLER.. 643 Proposed Survey of the Nile.......cccccscrcscsreosecvesene 644 Scientific Books :— Evans on Birds: DR. J. A. ALLEN. Dav- enport’s Experimental Morphology : PROFESSOR T. H. MorGAN. Verworn’s General Physiology : PROFESSOR D. T. MAcDouGAL. General........ 647 Scientifie Journals and Articles.......cccscceecececseceees 651 Societies and Academies :-— The Philosophical Society of Washington: E. D. PRESTON. The Entomological Society of Wash- ington: DR. L. O. Howarp. The New York Academy of Sciences ; Section of Astronomy and Physics: DR. WM. S. Day. The New York Section of the American Chemical Society: DR. DURAND WiOODMAND ccseccsresstesiesdstssccsscsssee: 652 Discussion and Correspondence :— Messrs. Lehmann and Hansen on Telepathy: PROFESSOR WILLIAM JAMES. Two Correc- tions: PROFESSOR BURT G. WILDER.............- 654 Notes on Physics :— A New Theory of the Zeeman Effect ; Daylight- Phosphorescence VAG STsC 9D sjeerseccaeseshsscecesss ss 655 Notes on Inorganic Chemistry: J. L. Hu...... eee 656 Current Notes on Meteorology : Blue Hill Observatory Bulletins ; Snow Rollers ; A Course in Meteorology at Ohio State University ; Climate of the Congo Free State: R. DEC. WARD. 657 A New Marine Biological Laboratory: DR. HUGH INL FSIO GY: Pe ooqscoadzoaadoce: LoonoossosqasoadoedBadaadadegas 658 Theory of the Steam Engine: PRoressor Rk. H. ANTE HORE SIILONNT -haanpbudcabsdbadoooridcdaaccn sdodasoopdanndadag 659 The Philadelphia Exposition Of 1900.....1cscececeeeees 659 Scientific Notes and News.........scccsececececscavsescecers 660, University and Educational News.........c:cecvereceeeee 664 ‘ OBSERVATIONS OF THE PLANET MARS.’* Tuis is the first volume of a series which promises to be important for the physical study of the planets. It contains a detailed account of the observations made on the planet Mars during an interval of ten months (June, 1894—March, 1895) by Mr. Percival Lowell and his two collaborators, W. H. Pickering and A. E. Douglass. The observatory, especially constructed near the small town of Flagstaff, occupies a central position in the great plateau of Arizona, at an elevation of 7,250 feet above the level of the sea, in latitude 35° 11’ and longitude 111° 40’ west of Greenwich. The choice of that location has been justified by the success attained. During the six months from June to November, 1894, the planet could be observed on nearly every day. On two days out of three it was possible to re- cord useful observations of difficult objects. The atmospheric conditions prevailing dur- ing that period (and often during the fol- lowing winter as well) are sufficiently char- acterized by the discovery of a great number of details unknown to previous observers. These observations suffice to give an idea of the optical perfection of the instrument em- ployed, which had an objective by Brashear, * Annals of the Lowell Observatory. Vol. I.—Ob- servations of the Planet Mars during the opposition of 1894-95, made at Flagstaff, Arizona. Percival Lowell, Director of the Observatory. Boston and New York, Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 1898. Pp. xii+- 392. Large quarto. Plates, xxi. 634 of 18 inches aperture and 315} inches focal length. The magnifying powers used were commonly 440 and 617; an eye-piece of power 820 served for the micrometric meas- urements. Among the auxiliary instru- ments we mention an Arago polariscope, which has been employed, perhaps for the first time, upon Mars by W. H. Pickering at Flagstaff ; also a scale of very fine lines of different sizes, which served for the com- parison and estimation of the size and in- tensity of the lines observed on the planet. The very numerous and varied observa- tions which form the contents of the pres- ent volume have led to many results, the most important of which have been an- nounced by Mr. Lowell in his book ‘ Mars,’ published in 1895. That book contains many discussions and theories of great in- terest as to the physical constitution of the planet and its atmosphere, its habitability, and as to the most plausible manner of ex- plaining the curious phenomena which have been observed. The substance of those re- searches and of those discussions has been reproduced in the present volume. The readers of ScrencE have been made familiar with them by the critical analysis of them given by Professor W. W. Campbell in the number for August 21, 1896. I have, therefore, not occupied myself with the theoretical and hypothetical portions, and I am able to confine myself to the observa- tions. In view of their great variety, I shall be obliged to limit myself to the con- sideration of some of the more character- istic points. First, as to the polar spots and their periodic variations, which are known to be analogous to those of our polar snows. The manner of development of the polar caps and the phases of their increase are entirely unknown, and it is probable that they will always remain so; for during the period of their increase they are for the most part or wholly enveloped in the night SCIENCE. [N. &. Vou. IX. No. 227. of the pole. But the process of their dis- solution can be followed without much diffi- culty when the inclination of the planet’s equator with respect to our line of vision approaches the maximum value possible, which occurred in 1894. As for that, the observers at Flagstaff have been able to study the phenomena of the southern spot from the beginning of June, when its di- ameter was about 55°, up toits total (or nearly total) destruction, which occurred toward the end of October. They were able to follow the changes of its size and shape, its division into several parts by the large black band, and to estab- lish further the persistence of certain parts isolated from the greater body. They also observed the changes of color which took place in the surrounding dark regions. Plate II., page 46, gives the definitive re- sults of that investigation, which, in com- parison with similar work hitherto, suffi- ciently shows the superiority of the means with which Mars has been visually studied at Flagstaff. I may be permitted to express here the conviction that it is by the exact and persevering study of the polar spots of Mars that we shall some day arrive ata sound knowledge of the physical nature of that planet, and the interpretation of its singular phenomena. I shall even venture to say thatif the southerncap is very instruc- tive in that respect, the northern cap is still more so. In fact, the latter develops toa large extent over the regions of a yellow color which it is customary to call conti- nents. The obscure band which reaches to its edge has a direct relation to the system of canals and lakes surrounding it. In the same measure as the white spot diminishes under the influence of the solar rays, there take place in the neighboring regions very considerable changes, the connection of which with the successive phases of the cap is evident. The facts that I was able te May 5, 1899.] establish during the oppositions of 1886 and 1888 make me very strongly wish that the northern cap could be studied by the observers at Flagstaff with the same suc- cess as the southern. A considerable portion of the work is de- voted to the phenomenon which is called, according to usage, the canals of Mars, the nature of which is still entirely obscure, despite the theories, oftentimes pretty and very ingenious, which they have occasioned. Mr. Lowell has given a description of these singular formations which seems to me to conform to the truth in the great ma- jority of cases. He has succeeded in show- ing their character quite well in his draw- ings. See plates I, IV, V, VI. If thereis any defect here, it is that the differences of the size and intensity of the different canals are not indicated with sufficient clearness. Ihave had occasion to gain some experi- ence in that line of work, and I have no hesitation in saying that this part of the observations at Flagstaff seems to me to be worthy of the greatest consideration. Be- tween the south pole and the thirtieth par- allel of north latitude (three-quarters of the whole surface of the planet) previous ob- servers have more or less clearly recognized the existence of 70 or 80 canals. At the Lowell Observatory that number has at one stroke been increased to nearly 200, without counting those whose existence could not be satisfactorily verified. The record of ob- servations of these objects made from June 6, 1894, to April 3, 1895, occupies no less than 85 pages. Frequently 20 or 30 canals could be seen together. In less than an hour, on the night of October 6th, 42 were made out ona portion of the planet which did not amount to a quarter of the whole surface. All three observers took part in the work. The newly discovered canals naturally be- long to the most difficult class, and a certain number of them have since been verified by two European observers, Leo Brenner at SCIENCE. 635 Lussinpiccolo and Cerulli at Teramo. I greatly regret that Iam unable to add my own name to those, but my eye no longer has the power necessary for successfully carrying out such difficult observations. Several canals were observed in a state of gemination, among others Ganges, Nectar, Euphrates and Phison. On the 8th of October Mr. Douglass made the very curious and remarkable observation of the gemination of the Lacus Solis, which seemed to be divided in two by a luminous band on the extension of Nectar. JI made a similar observation in 1890, but then the luminous band was on the prolongation of Eosphoros. The same thing is being observed by M. Cerulli at Teramo during the current op- position of 1899. As a result of these numerous discoveries and other subsequent ones, as well as future ones, areography is coming to find itself in a condition which may be called an em- barrassment of riches. The network of canals has become so complex that there begins to be considerable difficulty in orient- ing oneself. Imagine three or four hun- dred of these lines traced all together over a globe of but a few seconds of apparent diameter! The identity of lines seen by different observers at almost the same place is very often doubtful. The difficulty of seeing well and of precisely locating the coordinates of the two extremities may easily give rise to ambiguity and errors. Add to this the frequent changes which the lines undergo in their aspect and their de- gree of visibility ; being now fine and sharp, and again large and diffuse; sometimes double, often entirely invisible—and one is no longer astonished to see the same line, observed by two different men in a slightly different manner, regarded by them as two distinct objects ; or, on the other hand, to see two essentially different objects con- founded as a single one. The _ better remedy for avoiding these inconveniences 636 would be to give up the doubtful objects, and to make as complete and exact a study as possible upon those canals best known and most easily observed, following with- out interruption the variations of their aspect and of their course, and basing de- ductions upon precise measures. Precise measures ! the thing most necessary and at the same time the most difficult, which ought to receive more attention from skilled observers. The proportion of new discoveries at Flagstaff on the small dark spots called lakes (Mr. Lowell’s oases) is relatively still more considerable. Prior to the opposition of 1894 ten to twelve of these formations were known. Mr. Lowell gives a cata- logue of more than forty of them. He has shown that in most cases these oases are arranged in regular series on the routes of the longer canals. It is quite probable that minute dark spots, more or less readily visible, must exist at all points of intersection of any two canals. There is still another class of objects on which the Flagstaff observers have insti- tuted the first thorough research. These are the black lines which furrow the darker portions of the surface of Mars and are ordinarily called the seas. Some lines of that sort had been noticed before, and even a form of gemination had been established for two of them.* In general, previous observers had believed that they saw here lines of the greatest faintness rather than true canals; in only a very few special cases did they succeed in tracing the two edges distinctly. At Flagstaff these lines have been observed and reproduced with much care by Mr. Douglass, who seems to *See on my map of 1882 the two parallel lines which include between them the large island called Noachis ; one of these is named Prasodes on Cerulli’s map. See also the two lines which flank the right side of Syrtis Jiagna on my drawing of June 20, 1890, published by Flammarion (Za Planéte Mars, p. 476). SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 227. have a very sensitive and well-trained eye for that sort of objects. From measures of position angles he traced on two maps their course in the dark regions of the planet and their connection with the canals of the yel- low region. See plates XII and XIII. The third chapter of the volume is also the work of Mr. Douglass, and deals with a class of observations which are almost un- known, except for some essays in this direc- tion at Nice and at the Lick Observatory in 1890 and 1892. I refer to the irregu- larities which have been very often noticed at the terminator, 7. e.,on the line which at any instant separates the obscure from the illuminated hemisphere. These are very evident when the phase is considerable, near the quadratures. In by far the greater majority of cases these irregularities are merely optical illusions caused by the dif- ferent proportion of the oblique solar illu- mination returned to us in the different regions traversed by the terminator. But there seem to be certain of these irregular- ities which can only be explained by the presence of elevations or depressions on the surface of Mars. Still others seem to de- pend upon the presence of very high clouds. These investigations are of much interest, not only from their possible bearing on the topography and orography of Mars, but also from the point of view of the physical his- tory of the planet and its atmosphere. The work is enriched by a large number of drawings of Mars, some of which are really excellent even from an artistic point of view. See especially plates I and IV. We have seen nothing as beautiful since the drawings made by Mr. Green on his expedition to Madeira in 1877. We can recognize here not only the geometrical con- figurations and the varieties of light and shade, but we can also get some idea of the magnificent coloration observed on the planet. The chart placed at the end of the vol-- SCIENCE. N. S., Vou. IX., PLATE V. Fic. 4. Ewe born 1892, nipples increased by selective breeding. Fic. 1. Normal milk-bag of ewe showing two nipples. Fic. 5. Ewe born 1893, nipples increased by selective breeding. Fic. 2. One rudimentary extra nipple.—A Sport. Fic. 3. Two rudimentary extra nipples. — A Fic. 6. Ewe born 1895, nipples of equal size in- Sport. creased by selective breeding. BELL ON THE DEVELOPMENT BY SELECTION OF SUPERNUMERARY MAMME IN SHEEP. May 5, 1899.] ume is a simple schematic representation, I venture even to say a little too schematic: Each object is designated by a number, and the corresponding name is to be sought in the special tables of regions, canals and oases. This makes the use of the chart troublesome and comparison with other charts inconvenient. All the large and small canals, of whatever degree of impor- tance and visibility, are treated in a uniform manner and are represented by lines of equal intensity; and the same with the oases, with the exception of the largest one of all, called the Lake of the Sun. It is not easy to recognize promptly on the chart many of the objects which are ordinarily seen at the first glance and which are fa- mniliar to areographers. Such objects as Indus, Oxus, Ganges, Cyclops, Trivium and Elisium must be sought in an inextricable maze of lines. We have here not a simple index, but one which in use requires itself an index. I will close this incomplete description of the work on Mars at Flagstaff with the expression of a hope and a wish, namely, that so important a publication shoula not be limited to a single opposition. The exact and complete knowledge of Martian phenomena demands that the planet should be examined under all possible inclinations of its axis and during all seasons of its year. This requires observations continued at least through seven consecutive opposi- tions. I say, ‘at least,’ for if the terrestrial seasons are far from following the annual period with mathematical precision, the phenomena of Mars seem still more diver- gent; and the existence of other periods, longer and more complex, ought to be in- cluded among the possibilities. Neverthe- less, I think that if we could have before us seven volumes similar to the one under review, and corresponding to a complete cycle of seven oppositions, many facts would be revealed of which we are at pres- SCIENCE. 637 ent ignorant, and many others of which we have at present only dubious indications ; especially would this be the case if the seven volumes were the work of the same observers. I therefore hope and wish, as do many others, that Mr. Percival Lowell may be in a position to continue the work so happily begun ; that he will soon publish the results of the observations during the opposition of 1896-97, and that the same means which he has employed for the study of the southern hemisphere of Mars may be applied to the still more important obser- vation of the phenomena of the northern hemisphere.* G. ScHIAPARELLI. MILAN, March 1, 1899. ON THE DEVELOPMENT BY SELECTION OF SUPERNUMERARY MAMM2 IN SHEEP.+ In the year 1890 Dr. Bell found that 50 % of the lambs born upon his farm in Nova Scotia were twins, and he made an exam- ination of the mothers in order to ascertain whether the twin-bearing ewes differed in any noticeable degree from those which produced single lambs. Thirty-three per cent. of the twin-bearing ewes were found to possess supernumerary mamme ina more or less rudimentary con- dition, whereas among the ewes having single lambs only 22% possesssed the pecul- iarity ; 43 % of the ewes having supernu- merary mamme bore twin lambs, whereas only 30% of the normally-nippled ewes had twins. Although the absolute numbers were far too small to yield reliable percentages, they afforded some ground for the idea that the extra-nippled ewes were more fertile than the others ; and Dr. Bell thought it would be interesting to ascertain (1) whether by - * Translated from the author’s MS. in French by E. BOR. ft Abstract of a paper read before the National Academy of Sciences at Washington, D. C., April 19, 1899, by Alexander Graham Bell. 638 selective breeding the supernumerary mam- me could be developed from their rudi- mentary condition into real functional nip- ples yielding milk, and (2) whether in this ease the fertility of the ewes would be in- creased. In the autumn of 1890 his shepherd, Mr. John McKillop, made an examination of the mammz of 890 sheep belonging to farmers in the island of Cape Breton, Nova Scotia. In 811 cases, or 91%, the sheep were normally nippled, having only two nipples each. In 79 cases, or 9%, super- numerary Mamme were present in a more or less developed condition. Some of these ‘sheep had three nipples, others four, a few five, and one ewe had six nipples. In 52 cases, or 6%, the extra nipples were so rudi- mentary as to resemble pimples upon the milk bag. In 27 cases, or 3%, the extra- nipples, though much inferior in size to the ordinary-nipples, seemed to be sufficiently developed to be functional ; and most of these sheep were purchased by Dr. Bell and added to his flock. Dr. Bell presented statistics showing the results of ten years selective breeding for supernumerary mamme. The following tables show the number and percentage of lambs born each year having 2, 3, 4,5 or 6 nipples, and the accompanying chart ex- hibits the percentages in graphical form : TABLE I. Number of Lambs born each year from 1890 to 1899. Years of | Total Number of Mammze Birth Lambs 9 3 4 ae 6 1890 ; 71 59 4 Be epee 1891 78 38 10 30 — 1892 71 29 5 36 1 — 1893 67 15 HE 45 — 1894 22 4 3 15 — = 1895 26 —_— 1 24 il ae 1896 27 —_— _— 23 Bp tial 1897 34 — 1 ii 3 3 1898 37 —_— — 26 5 6 1899 41 — 1 26 6 8 SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 227. TABLE II. Percentage of Lambs born each year from 1890 to 1899. Number of Mammeze Year of Total Birth | Lambs 2 3 4 5 6 1890 | 100% | 83% 6% | 11% | —— | —— 1891 | 100 ‘* 49 ** TsO eteh —— 1892 | 100 ‘‘ ANUSe Ciceit eodies 1% | —— 1893 | 100 ‘‘ Pp Ogee | —— 9 1894.) 100/**)) 18 “* =) 14* | 68 ¢ Te 1895 | 100 ‘‘ —— AES iy QQieé 4% 1896 | 100 ‘‘ —— Shue ildate 4% 1897 | 100 ‘‘ — Shella Oh ae te (igh 18983-10053 ——— — | 70'S | 14** | 16% 1899 | 100 ‘‘ — SEO MIOS we iL oncen eo Ques a H H + | A+ Fr] Ere a ar an - BE EEEEEEIREE H a PREECE EE aa f a f a Hr CI ey 4a t H- 1 n +} - HEE PEREEEEEEE EEE EEEEEELEEEE A He H Sretiaceestss haaseenaeeeie™t it C cH EEL E9 st EEE : A E apa E H HEH Cel + Graphical Chart showing the percentage of lambs born each year from 1890 to 1899 having 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 nipples (See Table II.). In the autumn of 1893 the flock was cut down very severely, and only those ewes were retained which had supernumerary mamme in a functional condition. This accounts for the small number of lambs born in 1894. Since that time no ewe lambs have been retained excepting those having extra nipples large enough to yield milk. No normally-nippled lambs (2-nippled) have been born in the flock since 1894. Three-nippled lambs are gradually disap- May 5, 1899.] pearing. Four-nippled lambs increased from 11% in 1890 to 92% in 1895, since which time the percentage has gradually fallen, the four-nippled lambs being re- placed by five and six-nippled lambs. The first six-nippled lamb was born in 1896, and the percentage has increased from 4% in 1896 to 20% in 1899. Dr. Bell claimed that his statistics showed that he had produced by selection a breed of sheep possessing supernumerary mamme as a normal condition. Figures are given on Plate V. show- ing the normal milk-bag of a ewe, extra nipples occurring as sports and the extra nipples obtained by selective breeding. LATEST VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS OF THE PA- CIFIC COAST. Tue date of the last voleanic eruption on the Pacific coast of the United States, ex- clusive of Alaska, has long been a matter of doubt, and will probably remain so for many years to come. Speaking geologic- ally, much of the material in the great vol- eanic field of the Northwest, including a large part of Oregon and Washington, with portions of California, Idaho and Wyo- ming, is of comparatively recent eruption. The outbursts may have begun in the Eo- cene, were most violent and extensive dur- ing the Miocene and Pliocene, and, dimin- ishing in vigor, extended, perhaps, up to the borders of the historical period. In Alaska, however, there have been eruptions from Bogoslov, St. Augustin and other volcanoes as late as 1883 and even later, and there can be no question concerning the reliabil- ity of the testimony. G. F. Becker gives a list (U.S. G.S., 18th Ann. Rept., Part III., p. 14) of over forty volcanoes in Alaska which have been reported active within his- torical times. The evidence, so far as the Pacific States are concerned, is given chiefly by Professor J.D. Whitney (The United States, 1889, p. SCIENCE. 639 114), Major C. E. Dutton (Scrrncr, Vol. VI., p. 46), Professor George Davidson (Science, Vol. VI., p. 262), and Dr. H. A. Harkness, (Proc. of the Cal. Acad. of Sci., Vol. V., p. 408). Although there are no new facts at hand definitely fixing the date of the last eruption in that region, there has recently come to my attention some in- formation having a bearing upon other evi- dence. Last summer Mr. Frederick V. Coville, Botanist of the Department of Agriculture, while studying the flora of Mt. St. Helens, in Washington, found some _ interesting fragments of charcoal, which he transmitted to the Director of the U. 8. Geological Sur- vey, with the following letter: “*T collected two pieces of coniferous charcoal at the point where the trail from Lake Merrill to Mt. St. Helens crosses the Kalama River. Each came from a short charred piece of tree trunk about two feet long and a foot in diameter. My attention was first called to them by Colonel J. J. Hawkins, of Portland. The pieces of charcoal were caught with other fresh drift material brought down the Calama from Mt. St Helen’s in last spring’s flood. They were charred all the way to the center as evenly and thoroughly as the fragments sent you. ‘« The character of the charcoal, which need not be described in detail here, is such as at first to suggest that it was made in a very carefully prepared kiln. There are, however, no charcoal pits in the region, and the charcoal from forest fires has a very different character. It is evident from the peculiarities of the flora of Mt. St. Helens, and from its limited erosion, that it is a mountain of very recent volcanic origin. Among other phenomena presented by it was one which, although it did not come under my own ob- servation, is well substantiated by people of the re- gion, and furnishes an explanation of the peculiar sections of charred logs found at the crossing of the Kalama. The phenomena described is the occurrence of molds of tree trunks at various points in the lava flows about the base of Mt. St. Helens. In some places these molds occur in large numbers and lie in the beds in either a horizontal or a vertical position. They are sometimes thirty feet in length, and bear the impress of the bark of the tree in the minutest de- tails. Though I was unable to visit the places where these tree molds occur, I talked with at least half a dozen men who had seen these casts, but none of 640 them had seen charred wood or bark in the holes. Presumably charcoal was formed only where the lava flow so completely covered the trees as to shut out the air, and the pieces found had been eroded by the Kalama River from wholly submerged molds.”’ Mr. Coville’s conclusion as to the forma- tion of the charcoal is probably correct. Mr. F. H. Knowlton, who studied the struc- ture of the charcoal, recognizes the wood as Douglas spruce (Pseudotsuga mucronata). At- tention was called (Nat. Geog. Mag., Vol. VIII., p. 226) several years ago to the tree molds or tree wells by Captain P. Elliott. Through Mr. J. H. West, of Woodland, Washington, Mr. F. A. Walpole, one of Mr. Coville’s assistants, secured a piece of the basaltic lava from one of these tree molds three feet in diameter. The piece of lava shows the impressions of the bark in great detail. In the hope of obtain- ing some evidence concerning the age of the lava flow associated with the tree molds and charcoal I entered into corre- spondence with Mr. West, who reports charred logs at least forty yards up the slope from the high-water mark of Kalama River. One of the charred logs is twenty- eight inches in diameter, and some of them are partly woody, not having been com- pletely converted into charcoal. Near the River at one point the charred logs are found under six feet of sand and gravel, on which are now growing fir trees having a diameter of three feet. Some of the charred logs, therefore, appear to be at least 100 years old, for a fir three feet in diameter would prob- ably require at least that length of time to attain its present size. If this be true it is probable that some of the charred logs are not the result of the last eruption of St. Helens, but of an earlier one. There is historical evidence furnished by Fremont (Memoirs, p. 282) to the effect that Mt. St. Helens and also Mt. Baker were in eruption November 23, 1843. At that time a light fall of ashes occurred at the Dalles, Oregon, SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 227. on the Columbia, fifty miles from Mt. St. Helens, which was then noted as being in a, state of eruption. Rev. Mr. Brewer collected . some of the ashes and gave them to General Fremont, who visited the Dalles a year later. Mt. Baker is thought to have been in erup- tion at the same time, arid the natives re- port that the fish in the Skagit River were killed by its ashes. Mr. 8. F. Emmons gives: (Jour. of the Am. Gleog. Soc., Vol. IX., p. 53) the testimony of a former Hudson Bay trader who saw an eruption of Mt. St. Helens in the winter of 1841-2. It is hoped that the question may be settled sometime in the near future by a geological survey of both Mt. St. Helens and Mt. Baker. While it may not be possible to es- tablish the date exactly, the geological re- cords upon the mountain slope are likely to: be such as to give the relative age with cer- tainty. The case of the cinder cone, ten miles northeast of Lassen Peak, California, may be noted as an example of the results of investigation in the field. Professor Harkness was of the opinion that the erup- tion occurred in January, 1850. The fresh- ness of the material was so striking that Major Dutton and I, who visited the region in 1885, were at first of the same opinion, but fuller investigation, an account of which is published in the U. 8. Geological Survey Bulletin No. 79, shows conclusively that. the explosive eruption from the cinder cone must have occurred long before the begin- ning of the present century. J.S. DILLER. U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, WASHINGTON, D. C., April 22, 1899. THE PROSPECTIVE PLACE OF THE SOLAR AZIMUTH TABLES IN THE PROBLEM OF ACCELERATING OCEAN TRANSIT. Tr is not generally recognized that science, employing the mathematician and the engi- neer alike in the problem of shortening the duration of ocean transit, has accomplished May 5, 1899.] as much by causing ships to go fewer miles as by causing them to go faster. This generation is familiar with the part that has been played by steam propulsion in increasing the speed of ships, but, besides the increase in the rate of travel, modern motive power, by making possible a depar- ture from the old meteorological routes, has had another and a greater effect in the progress of the universal policy of civilized nations to accelerate transit from place to place to the utmost possible extent. When the wind was the sole motor of ocean-going vessels the best economy was realized by passing through regions of favorable meteor- ological conditions without reference to the directness of the route. Thus, in sail- ing from Europe to the United States, it was customary to pass southward along the eastern shores of the Atlantic to the ‘Cape Verde Islands, and thence westward through the trade-wind region along the route followed by Columbus on his first voyage to the New World, and finally northward into the region of prevailing westerly winds and along the western shores of the Atlantic to the point of desti- nation. In making this voyage, ships trav- ersed 4,400 miles in passing between ports that were only 2,400 miles apart on the surface of the earth. Under steam, even if they go no faster, ships may yet get farther toward the port of destination in a given time because the winds and currents may be disregarded, and they may be navigated over the oceans along great circles of the earth. The increasing recognition among mari- ners of the sound principle of conducting a ship along the arc of the great circle joining the points of departure and destination and the expanding sense of the advantages to be gained by a knowledge of this branch of nautical science have greatly heightened the value of methods which place the bene- fits of the knowledge and use of the great- SCIENCE. 641 circle track at the service of the mari- ner without the labor of the calculations which are necessary to find the series of courses to be steered. Inasmuch as great- circle courses alter continuously in proceed- ing along the track, it becomes necessary to know the latitude and longitude of the ship in order to determine the course to be fol- lowed. At the present day there are con- venient means for determining at sea the longitude as well as the latitude, but before the early part of the present century these means did not exist, and great-circle sail- ing was impracticable. The general lack of the application of the principles of the great circle in later times, and even in the present generation, seems to have resulted not from the want of recognizing that the shortest distance between any two places on the earth’s surface is the distance along the are of the great circle passing between them, nor that the great-circle course is the only true course and that the courses in Mercator and parallel sailing are circuitous, nor yet to a due appreciation of the advan- tages to be gained by a knowledge of the great-circle course as a means for obtaining the most advantageous track in windward sailing; but to the tedious operations which have been necessary, and to the want of concise methods for rendering these benefits readily available. The solution, every time the course must be determined, of a spherical triangle in which the two sides and the included angle are given is a formidable operation for a mariner as compared with the measure- ment on a compass diagram of the direction of the straight line representing the circuit- ous path of the ship’s track on the Merca- tor chart. At page 662 of the ninth edition of a work on Practical Navigation by Cap- tain Lecky, of the Royal Naval Reserve of Great Britain, there is a section entitled ‘Great Circle Courses found from Bur- wood’s Tables,’ which has doubtless been 642 SCIENCE. read with profit by thousands, for it states that “‘ to find the great-circle courses from the azimuth tables you have only to regard the latitude of the port bound to as declina- tion, and the difference of longitude, turned into time, as the hour-angle. The latitude of the ship you take from the top of the page as usual.’’ But the author goes on to remark that, as Burwood’s solar azimuth tables ex- tend only to twenty-three degrees of decli- nation, this ready-made method is only ap- plicable when the place of destination is within the tropics. It may be of value, therefore, to point out that the solar-azimuth tables are universally applicable for finding great-circle courses, because all great circles pass into the trop- ics, and, if the problem of finding the courses is with reference to a great-circle track between a point of departure and a point of destination, both lying outside of the tropics, it is only necessary to find a point lying on the prolongation of the great-circle are beyond the point of actual destination and within the tropics, and treat this point as the place of destination in finding the courses. The longitude of the selected point within the tropics may be found without any cal- culation by simply prolonging the straight line representing the great circle upon a gnomonic chart. By this combination of the gnomonic chart and the azimuth tables the courses upon a great circle track may be determined with very great facility. To illustrate, take the problem of finding the initial course on a voyage by the great circle route from Bergen, in latitude 60° N. and longitude 5° E., to the Strait of Belle Isle, in latitude 52° 1’ 2” N. and longitude 55° W. On a copy of a gnomonic chart, such as Godfray’s, draw a straight line between the geographical positions above stated and extend it beyond the latter into the tropics. It will be found to intersect the 20th degree parallel of latitude in longi- [N. S. Von. IX. No. 227. tude 90° W., or 95° from the meridian of the point of departure. Entering the azi- muth table at latitude 60°, under declina- tion 20°, and opposite hour-angle 95° or 6h. 20m., we find the required course to be N. 75° -31' W. G. W. LitTLEHALEs. SOME NEW AMERICAN FOSSIL FISHES.* Tue following new occurrences of fossil fishes were reported: (1) A species of Cladodus, scarcely distinguishable from C. striatus Ag. in the Corniferous Limestone of Ohio. (2) Thelodus-like scales from same horizon. (3) A pair of naturally associated pectoral spines of Macheracanthus from the Hamilton, near Buffalo, N. Y. (4) A pty- chopterygian pectoral fin from Naples Shale of the same locality. (5) Two new species of Diplodus from Upper Devonian near Chi- cago, Ill. (6) Teeth of Phebodus from Keokuk Limestone of Iowa and Permian of Nebraska. (7) Largest known spine of Stethacanthus (length over 35 cm.) from Keokuk Group, Iowa. (8) A complete fin, spines and shagreen scales of a new and very large species of Acanthodes, a genus not hitherto met with in the United States, from Coal Measures of Mazon Creek, Ill. (9) Pholidophorus americanus sp. nov., also belonging to a genus new to this coun- try, founded on very perfect material dis- covered by N. H. Darton, of the U.S. Geological Survey, in the Jura of the Black Hills, South Dakota. Photographs of the new Jurassic fishes were exhibited and their specific characters summarized as follows: Gracefully fusi- form, upwards of 15 em. long, the head forming about one-fourth the total length and slightly less than maximum depth of trunk ; dorsal arising behind pelvic fins ; scales not serrated, thin, smooth, nearly rhomboidal, overlapping; flank series not * Abstract of a paper read before the Boston So- ciety of Natural History, March 15, 1899. May 5, 1899.] especially deepened. This places them among the more primitive members of the genus, and hence would seem to indicate a Lower Jurassic horizon. ; The distribution of American Devonian fishes was discussed with reference to those of other countries. During the Lower De- vonian there was none, and in the Upper scarcely any intermingling of United States and Canadian vertebrate faunas, but those of Canada and Great Britain belonged to a distinct province. Corniferous fishes of Ohio and New York are most nearly related to those of the Middle Devonian of con- tinental Europe, especially the Eifel, Bo- hemia, etc. The Hamilton faunas of New York and the Mississippian region, includ- ing Manitoba, are the direct successors of the Corniferous, but the Chemung of both eastern and western regions (or its equiva- lent) contains a remarkable mixture of in- digenous types and intruders from all direc- tions. Intercommunication between eastern Canada and Great Britain, Spitzbergen, etc., became general for the first time dur- ing this period. The transition between Devonian and Carboniferous faune is now known to be more gradual than was for- merly supposed. The only natural basis of family classifi- cation among Arthrodires was held to be through comparison of the sutures of cranial and dorsal shields, the differences in denti- tion being of only secondary importance. Degeneracy of the latter in Titanichthys, etc., is paralleled by that in certain toothless whales (Mesoplodon,etc.). Cranial osteology of Homosteus and Heterosteus compel their removal from Coccosteide to form a separate family called Homosteide. In this family the so-called antero-dorso-lateral corre- sponds to the like-named element in Di- nichthys and Titanichthys plus the clavicular. The latter plate functioned as a support for the gills,and hence may be interpreted asa modified branchiostegal apparatus, but in SCIENCE. 643 no sense as a part of the shoulder-girdle. There is no evidence that any of the Ar- throdires. possessed pectoral fins. The ob- vious resemblance of this group to Ostraco- derms, with implied relationship, is lost sight of through its removal by Woodward to the Dipnoi, and there seems to be suf- ficient evidence for regarding the Arthrodira as a distinct sub-class, of equal rank with Lung-fishes, Teleostomi, etc., as already suggested by Dean. Caries R. EASTMAN. RAPIDITY OF SAND-PLAIN GROWTH.* THE undisturbed character of the strati- fied deposits making up the sand-plains, taken in connection with the absence, or at most, the very slight development of con- structional back-sets, indicates, as was early pointed out by Davis, a stationary ice margin during the period of deposition. It follows, thérefore, that their formation must have been extremely rapid, and the natural conclusion is that they represent the de- posits of a single summer’s period of melt- ing, an interval not over eight months in length. It occurred to me that a calculation based upon the conditions now existing in the large glaciers of Alaska might give some indication as to the probability of such estimates, or at least would be of interest in this connection. To make this calculation it is simply necessary to divide the bulk of the sedi- ments by the daily discharge of detritus by the glacial stream which deposited them. This involves factors which are usually very difficult to determine, but at the sand-plain near the railroad station at Barrington, R. I., the conditions are almost ideally per- fect, and admit of the determination with considerable accuracy of both the bulk of * Abstract of paper read before Boston Society of Natural History, February 15, 1899. 644 SCIENCE, the sediment and the size and velocity of the stream transporting it. Owing to the fact that observations as to the amounts of the fine clay-like detritus of glacial streams are more numerous and reliable than those upon the coarser material, the bulk of the contemporaneous clays was taken as a basis of calculation, rather than the sand-plain itself. In estimating the load of the glacial stream, I have taken the maximum value of 13 grams per liter, given by Reid for the Muir Glacier (the highest value on record ),as the one which, in all probability, would most nearly correspond to the load of a glacial stream during the closing stages of the continental ice sheet. At the time of the formation of the Bar- rington clays the Jand stood at a level of at least forty feet below that at present exist- ing, and the deposition took place in an in- closed bay, having the ice sheet as_ its northern boundary, a ridge of till and modified drift for its eastern boundary, and an earlier sand-plain as its southern boundary. On the west was a broad and deep opening, connecting with Narragansett Bay, and admitting of a complete com- mingling of the salt and fresh waters. Into this inclosed bay flowed a stream with a width, as indicated by its esker, of 150 feet, a depth of some 20 feet, and an average velocity of not over 5 feet per second. On the assumption that the amount of sedi- ment was 13 grams per liter, the daily dis- charge of clayey material would have been some 526,500 tons per day. Experiments recently conducted by Pro- fessor W. O. Crosby in connection with professional work for the Metropolitan Water Board of Massachusetts, the results of which he has kindly placed at my dis- posal, indicate that material such as the clay beds are essentially composed of, 7.e., quartz-flour, settles with great rapidity, and it can be shown that practically the entire amount of sediment brought in by [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 227. the glacial stream must have been deposited within the inclosed bay described. The clays cover about a square mile in area, have a maximum thickness of 60 feet, and a total bulk of 95,300,000 tons. Divid- ing this bulk by the daily discharge of sedi- ment by the glacial stream (526,500 tons), the time of deposition of the clays is indi- cated to have been 181 days, or almost ex- actly six months. The Barrington deposits probably repre- sent very nearly average conditions ; hence a period of six months seems a fair estimate of time for the formation of a simple sand- plain of moderate size. In the case of large plains, with areas of several or many square miles, the period of deposition may be con- sidered as extending over more than one season of melting, there being in the mean- time either no retreat of the ice margin ora retreat so slight that the intervening space was completely filled and the sand-plains united into a single compound plain. Myron L. FuLuer. PROPOSED SURVEY OF THE NILE.* THE Egyptian government has agreed to undertake a survey of the Nile with the object of determining the species of fishes inhabiting its waters. It is due in the first instance to the efforts and energetic action of Dr. John Anderson, F.R.8., who has al- ready done so much to enlarge our knowl- edge of the fauna of Egypt that this impor- tant project, to which so much scientific interest is attached, has now taken definite shape. A memorandum prepared by him, setting forth his proposals for the survey and the lines of his scheme for carrying it out, received the approval of Lord Lister, Presi- dent of the Royal Society ; Professor E. Ray Lankester, Director of the Natural History Departments of the British Museum; Dr. A. Ginther, President of the Linnzean Society, and Mr. P. L. Sclater, Secretary of the *“From the London Times. May 5, 1899.] Zoological Society, and was then forwarded by him to Lord Cromer, to be submitted to the Egyptian government, with a strong recommendation for its favorable consider- ation from these eminent scientific men. The Trustees of the British Museum further- more gave the scheme their powerful and influential support, and intimated their willingness to assist in a practical manner by undertaking to supply the necessary collecting-boxes, with alcohol to fill them. An essential feature of the scheme is that the fishes collected are to be sent to London to be studied and determined by Mr. Bou- lenger, the ichthyologist on the staff of the Museum, and the Trustees have, it is un- derstood, agreed to give him every facility for doing this, thus practically placing the services of their officer at the disposal of the Egyptian government for the purpose for the three years which it is estimated will be required to accomplish the survey. Our knowledge of the fishes of the Nile appears to be very imperfect. It may be said to have taken its origin in 1750, when Hasselquist described thirteen species found in the Deltaic area or in its immediate prox- imity. In 1847 sixty probably represented the number of known species. In 1861-63 Petherick made, at Dr. Gunther’s request, a collection of fishes from the Nile for the British Museum. The specimens were ob- tained at Cairo, Khartum and Gondokoro, and were described by Dr. Giinther in an appendix to Petherick’s ‘ Travels,’ published in 1889. The collection contained eighteen new additions to the fauna, and raised the number of known species to eighty-two. Since 1869 the fishes of the Nile have been almost completely neglected. At present about ninety species are known to inhabit the river, but this number, considering the vast extent of its waterway and the very diverse physical conditions which charac- terize many parts of its course, cannot be considered as at all approaching finality. SCIENCE. 645, The collections hitherto made from the Nile have principally been obtained from below the First Cataract; indeed, Ruppell and Petherick are the only two collectors who had opportunities to investigate the river above Assuan. The former distin- guished traveler and naturalist largely col- lected in lower Egypt, and not a few of Petherick’s specimens were from the same region. In Dr. Ginther’s account of this collection only six species were distinctly recorded as coming from Gondokoro, Khar- tum and the White Nile, while thirteen, besides the foregoing six, species were stated to belong properly to the reach of the Nile above the Sixth Cataract. Here it may be observed that, while we possess a fragmen- tary knowledge of the species from Khartum southwards, the immense tract of the Nile from the First to the Sixth Cataract re- mains practically untouched. Morever, as within the next few years a change will be effected in the distribution of the Nile waters by the construction of the controlling powers now in course of erection at Phile and Assiut, and as other similar structures or dams are likely to fol- low towards the south, all of which are cer- tain ultimately to limit more or less the range of certain species of fishes, it is much to be desired that, before any of these tri- umphs of the Department of Irrigation have been completed, we should be placed in possession of the main features and present condition of the piscine flora of the great reaches of the river. The present time is also extremely oppor- tune for the commencement of the proposed investigation, since the authorities of the Congo Free State have satisfactorily inau- gurated a survey of theCongo. Mr. G. A. Boulenger has been entrusted, with the sanction of the Trustees of the British Mu- seum, with the description of the fishes of the Congo for the Congo Free State, and, as his services will be at the disposal of the 646 SCIENCE. Egyptian government for the Nile explora- tion, the two surveys should mutually ben- efit each other. The materials afforded by the one cannot but throw light upon those of the other, many of the species of the two great rivers being closely allied. As regards the scope and working of the survey, it is suggested, as a preliminary step, that a series of stations should be established along the river, extending, at intervals, from the Delta to Lado, in the territory Ieased by the Egyptian govern- ment to the Congo Free State, and as far to the south of this as possible. Instructions for collecting fishes, written in English and Arabic, will be sent to some responsible official in each of these localities, accom- panied by a collecting box and alcohol, sup- plied by the British Museum, while the ser- vices of fishermen and others will be en- listed in the work, a fair price being paid to them for the fishes they collect. Dr. Keatinge, the officer in charge of the Museum of Natural History of the Medical School of Cairo, has been entrusted with the general supervision of the service of the survey. He will see to the reception of the collecting materials from the British Mu- seum, to their distribution to the different stations, to their reception when returned filled with fishes, and to forwarding them to London. The actual superintendence of the working of the survey is to be under- taken by an officer, who will be constantly on the river at all seasons, visiting the dif- ferent stations, inspecting the collections formed, making sure that everything pos- sible is being done to obtain fishes, and gen- erally satisfying himself that the specimens are properly preserved, and that they are fairly representative. He will also par- ticularly note the physical characters of the river at each station, find out as much as possible about the habits of the fishes, the depth at which they are found, the general character of the river bed, the seasons in [N. S. Von. TX. No. 227. which the fishes breed, and the nature of their food. He will further be required to satisfy himself that the native names have been correctly recorded in Arabic and rightly applied. Mr. Leonard Loat has been appointed to this responsible post of superintendent of the survey, and on him will devolve the task of seeing that the work is carried out in a thoroughly efficient manner. He left London a short time ago for Cairo, and has already commenced operations on Lake Menzaleh. During the first year it is pro- posed to carry the investigation as far as Wady Halfa; in the second year the river will be worked between Wady Halfa and Berber, and in the third year it is hoped to continue the survey to Sobat, and, if con- ditions are favorable, through the sudd and rapids between Lado and Dufile, and, ulti- mately, perhaps to carry the exploration of the river to its origin in the Albert Nyanza. In this connection it may be stated that the assistance of the authorities of the Congo Free State has been invited, and an assur- ance of their hearty cooperation has, it is understood, been received informally, leav- ing no room for doubt that an official ex- pression to the same effect will be shortly forthcoming. These are the lines on which the projected survey of the Nile is to be conducted. It is obvious that, apart from the mere knowl- edge of how many species of fishes exist in the river, great economic questions will come to the front when their life-history is studied. Also it is hoped that the survey may help to elucidate many problems re- lating to the fishes sculptured on the ancient monuments of Egypt. Dr. Anderson is tak- ing special pains to obtain drawings of as many of these fish forms as possible, and he regards it as not improbable that a scientific investigation of the fishes obtained in the river will lead to an identification of many of the species represented in stone. These May 5, 1899.] ‘questions, however, can never be usefully determined until there exists on record a basis on which to work, in the form of a detailed description on each species accom- panied, as far as practicable, by a figure. The scheme, therefore, includes provision for the publication of the scientific results in a book uniform with the sumptuous vol- ume which Dr. Anderson has recently issued on the ‘ Reptiles and Batrachians of Egypt.’ This work forms the first volume of the ‘Zoology of Egypt.’ He is at present en- gaged in working out the collections of mammals on which the second volume will be based. The‘ Fishes of the Nile’ will form the third volume of this monumental record of the fauna of the country. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. Birds. By A. H. Evans, M.A., Clare College, Cambridge. London, Macmillan & Co., Lim- ited; New York, The Macmillan Company. 1899. 8vo. 144 text cuts. Pp. xvi-+ 635, Price, $3.50. Mr. Evans’s ‘Birds’ forms Vol. IX. of the *Cambridge Natural History,’ and is intended as a popular systematic review of the class Aves. In a volume of 650 pages itis, of course, impossible to treat in much detail any of the one hundred and thirty odd families of birds, or to particularize respecting many of the 12,- 000 to 13,000 or more species now recognized by systematists. It would seem, however, that a little more space might have been profitably given to the generalities of the subject, asstruc- ture, classification, geographical distribution, migration, etc., all of which is compressed into the short space of twenty-two pages, of which three are devoted to the terminology of the ex- ternal parts of a bird. The remarks on classi- fication and geographical distribution are mainly historical. Mr. Evans adopts, with ‘some slight modifications,’ Dr. Gadow’s scheme of classification and Sclater’s scheme of geograph- ical areas. In referring to the wide differences of opinion among authorities on the subject of genera and species he says: ‘‘It cannot be denied that genera and species are merely SCIENCE. 647 ‘convenient bundles,’ and that divisions of either, if carried too far, defeat the object for which classification is intended. Genera are only more distinct from species, and species from races, because the intervening links have disappeared ; and if we could have before us the complete series which, according to the doctrine of evolution, has at some time existed neither genus nor species would be capable of definition any more than races in many cases; while the same, remark will apply to the larger groups.’’ While such statements are not new they have not been presented in popular . works, the lay reader being allowed to retain the old idea of the tangible nature of generic and specific groups. The tendency among certain systematists to recognize subspecies on the basis of the slightest recognizable differences leads naturally to the multiplication of genera, and the increase of subfamilies, etc., to con- form, so to speak, to the new unit of measure- ment consequentupon the recognition, in nomen- clature, of the grade of differentiation that is considered as a sufficient basis for ‘ races’ or subspecies. It is to this, doubtless, that Mr. Evans alludes as being likely to ‘defeat the object for which classification was intended.’ _ Beginning with Archxopteryx, and ending with the Finches, the various groups of birds are passed briefly in review. The characters of the ordinal, subordinal and family groups are succinctly stated, and some little account is given of the number, distribution and habits of the species, the latter usually in general terms. Very little is said about any particular species, though sometimes a characteristic member of a group is taken as the subject of more definite remark, or in cases where the number of species is so few that something may be said of each. The reader may be thus often disappointed, in seeking information regarding particular species, to find little, if any, reference to the ob- ject of his search. Ina work of the dimensions of the present volume this must be inevitable, yet it will prove a convenient source of information on the general subject of bird life throughout the world. References to more de- tailed accounts of species or groups of particular interest are, however, often supplied in foot notes. Only about.one-sixth of the work is de- 648 voted to the Passeriformes, which nearly equal in number of species the rest of the class, only a few pages being allotted to even the larger families; and the various generic groups are mentioned, as a rule, only by their technical generic names. The book isthus evidently not really adapted to beginners, nor wholly suited to the general reader, though apparently de- signed ‘not only for the tyro in ornithology, but also for the traveller or resident in foreign parts interested in the subject.’ The wood- cuts that quite fully illustrate the text are, for the most part, excellent, and prepared especially for the work by G. E. Lodge ; others are famil- iar through frequent previous use. Consider- ing the limitation of space imposed for the sub- ject, the author has, perhaps, supplied all that could be rightfully expected, and has certainly shown himself to be ‘up to date’ in all of the essentials of his subject. Jay Any A. Experimental Morphology. By CHARLES B. DAv- ENPORT. New York and London, The Mac- millan Company. 1899. Part Second. Pp. 228. The second part of Davenport's Experimental Morphology that has just appeared deals en- tirely with phenomena of growth. The first volume described the effects of chemical and physical agents upon protoplosm, and it is in- tended to devote the third volume to cell-di- vision and the fourth to differentiation. The author states that it is the aim of this series “so to exhibit our present knowledge in the field of experimental morphology as to indi- cate the direction for further research.’ The present volume gives a clear, brief state- ment of what is known in regard to growth in plants and animals. Most of the illustrations are taken from plant physiology, and it may, there- fore, be questioned whether a zoologist is in position to summarize so large and important a field of botanical research, but in justification it should be stated that Davenport has attempted to deal with the subject from a common biolog- ical standpoint. In reading this volume one cannot fail to be impressed by the enormous difference in our knowledge of growth-phenomena in plants and SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 227. animals. The subjects dealt with cover one of the most interesting fields of biological study— the responses of organisms to their surround- ings and the relation of these responses to the conditions of life under which the form is liv- ing or has lived in the past. The introductory chapter is intended to give an idea of normal growth. Organic growth is defined as increase in volume—‘ it is not development, not differen- tiation and not increase in mass.’ A broad defi- nition of this sort, while convenient to include a large number of changes resulting in ‘an in- crease in volume,’ may lead to difficulties if an attempt is made to find a common explanation of all the phenomena included in the definition, for the processes that take place in plants and animals that produce an increase in volume may be entirely different in their nature. The author has skillfully avoided this pitfall in most cases, although at times one cannot but feel that a most heterogeneous collection of facts has been included in the same category. The first chapter (XI.) deals with the effects of chemical agents on growth, and gives in com- pact form a large amount of useful information. In most cases the action of the substance seems to be purely physiological and only secondarily formative. It is not obvious why so much space should be given to pure plant physiology. It is, no doubt, difficult to draw the line between substances that act as foods and others that produce growth, since the latter often (but not always) depend on the former. An admirable account of the rdle of water in growth is given in Chapter XII. Here the au- thor has some new facts that bear on the problem. In the next chapter, dealing with the effect of density of the medium on growth, the results are summed up as showing that ‘the diminution or growth is proportional to the osmotic action of the medium.’ It is possible, however, that the effect is due also, in part, to the direct injurious action of the salts used to increase the density of the fluids. If due to osmotic action alone, then, the results that fol- low when different substances are used should be in proportion to their osmotic equivalents, but the few facts that are given do not entirely support this general conclusion. In Chapter XIV. the effect of molar agents is May 5, 1899.] dealt with. The effects of rough shaking on bacteria and of tensions and torsions on plant tissues are described. Nothing is said in re- gard to the changes that take place in bones, as aresult of displacement, etc. The closing of wounded surfaces (in Stentor and Hydra) is said to ‘ be grossly mechanical.’ Imay add from observations of my own that, in some cases at least (in Tubularia and in the embryo of Rana), the closing of the wound after injury cannot be explained as grossly mechanical, but is due rather to a movement of the living cells in re- sponse to a stimulus. The action of parts of plants in response to contact and the general phenomena of bending in seedlings, etc., can scarcely be included in a definition of growth, even as broadly defined by the author, for while there is an increase in volume on one side there may be a corre- sponding decrease on the opposite side, the vol- ume of the whole plant or part remaining ap- proximately the same. A brief account of the effect of gravity is given in Chapter XV. Two classes of effects are distinguished, the first mechanical, ‘‘ due to gravity, acting on the growing organ as_ it might on any other heavy body. The second is a vital effect, having no immediate, direct physical relation to the cause.’’ Itseemsa little obscure to state that a vital effect has ‘no im- mediate, direct physical relation to the cause.’ That the connection is a causal connection, even if a remote one, few will be bold enough to deny. The distinction that the author wishes to make is, perhaps, fairly clear, but the words may easily lead to a misconception of what is meant by vital effects. Again, on page 417 (in Chapter XVII., dealing with the effect of light upon growth), the author concludes, after showing that the eggs of many (but not all) animals are sheltered from sunlight, ‘ that, in general, growth does not take place in nature in full sunlight.’ It is obvious that in many cases the eggs deposited in the dark are better concealed, and it is not improbable that this may account for their development in the dark. Under these conditions they would become at- tuned to the absence of light. The more rapid growth of plants in the dark is described in de- tail, the effect of colored light on the growth of SCIENCE. 649) animals and plants, and the direction of growth in reponse to light, are discussed at some length. The effect of heat on growth, as well as on the direction of growth (in plants), is dealt with - in Chapter XVIII. The interesting fact is pointed out that under certain conditions the bending of a plant towards the source of heat cannot be explained as the direct result of the heat causing growth on the warmer side, since the concave side is the one turned towards the source of heat. This experiment may well make one question whether or not these phe- nomena of bending are growth phenomena in the ordinary use of the terms. In the concluding chapter the cooperation of several factors in normal growth is analyzed. A clear summary of the work of Semper and de Varigny on the growth of water-snails in a con- fined space is given. There is some excellent matter in the few pages of this chapter, al- though here and there one may find fault with the expression rather than with the general sense. The attunement or acclimatization of an organism to its surroundings is emphasized. A tentative hypothesis to account for the at- tunement is offered. This attempt to construct a possible explanation brings clearly to light that the author pictures to himself these ‘ vital phenomena’ as chemical responses to external agents. The contrast, therefore, so often made in the text between physical and vital effects would seem to be a difference between physical and chemical reactions. If anything more than this is intended it is not included in the final at- tempt at an explanation, although it is stated on a preceding page that the ‘specific effects’ cannot at present be accounted for by known chemical processes, ‘but result from peculiari- ties of the specific protoplasms which depend largely upon the past history of each kind of protoplasm.’ If we have taken issue with the author on a few points it is only because in these the book appears incomplete or imperfect. Taken as a whole it is a valuable addition to our text-books, and the author is to be congrat- ulated on having performed so difficult and arduous a task with success. The careful and exact summaries that are given will be of use to those not having access to the original papers. 650 SCIENCE. The book contains many tables compiled from various sources. The data are generally given in the form of curves so that a large amount of information may be comprised in a single dia- gram. ‘The clear and judicial discussion of the topics makes the book a model of its kind. Especially praiseworthy is the absence of the rash speculation so predominant in biological literature of recent years. T. H. MorGan. BRYN MAwWR COLLEGE. General Physiology. By PRoFESsSOR MAx VER- WorRN. ‘Translated and edited from the second edition (1897) by Proressor F. 8. Ler. New York, Macmillan & Co. 1899. Pp. xvi+616. 285 figures. The subject-matter of this book is arranged in five chapters with headings as follows: The aims and methods of physiological research, living substance, elementary vital phenomena, the conditions of life, stimuli and their action, and the mechanism of life. The English edi- tion is very happily rendered, and is character- ized by an extremely small residuum of Teu- tonic idioms, while the privileges of the editor have been very skillfully but sparingly exer- cised. The book is chiefly concerned with the cell as such and as organism, and it seems to the writer that it hardly justifies the resounding title of ‘General Physiology, or the Science of Life.’ It is usually unfair to pass judgment upon the nature of a work from any single paragraph which may be required in a review, but the closing sentences of the volume are fairly indicative of the author’s conception of his subject. ‘‘ The cell is the element of living substance. All living substance exists in cells, and all of the functions of living substance originate in the elementary vital phenomena of cells. Hence, if the task of the physiolo- gist lies in the explanation of vital phenom- ena, general physiology can be only cell- physiology.’’ These sentences are faultlessly rhetorical, but they do not exhibit an unas- sailable logic, at least from the point of view of the botanist, or the physiologist interested in the general properties of organisms. The work of investigators upon the physiology and organization of the protoplasm of plants [N.S. Vou. 1X. No, 227. has been somewhat more uniformly developed, and the results attained have been given a wider interpretation than similar efforts in the animal world ; hence the value of this volume as a reactionary protest against the minute and. profitless specializations which have absorbed so much of the energy of the animal physiolo- gist is not so apparent to the plant physiologist. The latter feels no need for a return to investi- gations in cell-physiology, since his researches upon all the more important activities of vege- tal protoplasm have been extended to cover material of the widest range of morphological and physiological differentiation, and have been an investigation of principles rather than a study of the functions of special tissues. Without reference to the above, the book is a very valuable and welcome addition to the library and laboratory accessories of the plant physiologist, not for what it contains about plants, for the paragraphs devoted to these or- ganisms are teeming with errors and omissions, or are badly antiquated, but for its comprehen- sive treatment of the composition and elemen- tary activities of protoplasm, and the metabolic and directive reactions to stimuli, and the sec- tions devoted to these subjects are well executed. The historical sketch of the development and methods of physiological research, as well as the metaphysical discussions of the conditions of life properly belong here, although they do not constitute the most valuable or striking part of the book. It appears to the reviewer that the physiolog- ical aspects of the form and size of the cell are but scantily touched upon ; that the réle and dis- tribution of inorganic matter in the cell does not take into account the greater mass of the availa- ble information on that subject, while secretion, absorption and election of food do not receive deserved attention. The fatuous distinction of ferments into ‘ organized’ and ‘unorganized’ bodies bids fair to be immortal, since it is con- tinued here and in many other prominent texts recently issued, although yeast, the well-worn example of the ‘ organized ferments,’ has been found to secrete definite enzymes, as is doubt- less the case with all ferment organisms. It is certainly antiquated to quote Sachs to the effect that starch is the first ‘visible product’ of the May 5, 1899.] activity of the chlorophyllaceous cell in the sunlight. The curvature of twining stems is not thigmotaxis (p. 443). The use of the phrase ‘conduction of a stimulus’ to indicate the trans- mission of an impulse from the point of recep- tion of the stimulus to a reaction zone is a mistake resulting from the literal translation of ‘Reizleitung.’ The German word ‘ Reiz’ hay- ing a broad meaning which permits its use to designate both the stimulus and the stimulus- effect. ‘Every change in the external condi- tions of an organism constitutes a stimulus ;’ but itis to be presumed that no one would mean that these changes in the intensity of external energy, rather than the shock of such change, are transmitted by nerves or other conducting mechanisms. Perhaps the most remarkable omission in the entire work is that which occurs in the discus- sion of the history of death. No attention is given to the aging or senescence of cells, and there is no mention of any example of the plant cell in the histolytic processes, or metamorphic death, although this phenomenon is of such im- portance that all types of plants furnish dead cells from normal atrophies and degenerations, while in the higher types the greater bulk of the plant-body is made up of dead cells. The greater number of the faults enumerated above would be due to the inaccessibility of the botanical literature to the animal physiologist, and are of such nature that they may be easily eliminated from future editions. The book has a long period of usefulness before it. It is stimulating and suggestive, and will do much to broaden investigation upon both the animal and vegetal organism ; a purpose it would ac- complish equally well under its proper title of ‘The Physiology of the Cell.’ D. T. MacDouGat. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA. GENERAL. THE last Legislature of the State of Arkansas provided for the printing of the hitherto unpub- lished reports of Dr. J. C. Branner, formerly State Geologist of that State. There are five volumes of these reports, viz: (1) Coal; (2) Lower Coal Measures; (8) Clays, Kaolins and Bauxites; (4) Zinc ‘and Lead; (5) Report on SCIENCE. 651 the general geology of the State. Provisions were also made for printing new editions of the reports already out. THE sixth volume of Biological Lectures from the Wood’s Holl Laboratory, in the press of Messrs. Ginn & Co., will contain : ‘The Structure of Protoplasm,’ E. B. Wilson. ‘Cell-Lineage and Ancestral Reminiscence,’ E. B. Wilson. ‘Adaptation in Cleavage,’ Frank R. Lillie. ‘Protoplasmic Movement asa Factor of Differentia- tion,’ Edwin G. Conklin. ‘Equal and Unequal Cleavage,’ A. L. Treadwell. ‘Cell Origin of the Prototroch,’ A. D. Mead. ‘Relation of the Axis of the Embryo to the First Cleavage Plane,’ Cornelia M. Clapp. ‘Observations on Various Nucleolar Structures of the Cell,’ Thomas H. Montgomery, Jr. ‘Protoplasmic Contractility and Phosphorescence,’ 8. Watasé. ‘Some Problems of Regeneration,’ T. H. Morgan. ‘The Elimination of the Unfit,’ H. C. Bumpus. ‘Heredity of Coloration in Fishes,’ Jacques Loeb. ‘Do the Reactions of Lower Animals, Due to Injury, Indicate Pain Sensations,’ W. W. Norman. ‘North American Ruminant-like Animals,’ W. B. Scott. ‘Caspar Friedrich Wolff and the Theoria Genera- tionis,’ W. M. Wheeler. ‘Animal Behavior,’ C. O. Whitman. MM. GEorGES CARRE and C. Naud have be- gun the publication of a series of scientific mono- graphs under the editorial direction of leading French men of science. MM. Appell, Cornu, d’Arsonval, Friedel, Lippmann, Moissan, Poin- cearé and Potter are responsible for the physical and mathematical sciences and MM. Balbiani, d@’ Arsonval, Filhol, Fouqué, Gaudry, Guignard, Marey and Milne-Edwards for the biological sciences. The numbers so far issued are as follows: ‘Les Oscillations Electriques,’ by M. Poincaré{ ‘La Specificite Cellulaire,’ by M. Bard ; ‘La Sexualité,’ by M. le Dantec. SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. THE papers in the American Journal of Science for May are as follows : ‘Some Experiments with Endothermic Gases,’ by W. G. Mixter. ‘Hypothesis to explain the partial non-explosive Combination of Explosive Gases and Gaseous Mix- tures,’ by W. G. Mixter. 652 SCIENCE. ‘Occurrence of Paleotrochis in Volcanic Rocks in Mexico,’ by H. 8. Williams. ‘Origin of Paleotrochis,’ by J. S. Diller. ‘Association of Argillaceous Rocks with Quartz Veins in the Region of Diamantina, Brazil,’ by O. A. Derby. Goldschmidtite, a New Mineral,’ by W. H. Hobbs ; ‘Hydromica from New Jersey,’ by F. W. Clarke and N. H. Darton. ‘Powellite Crystals from Michigan,’ by C. Palache. ‘Volatilization of the Iron Chlorides in Analysis, and the Separation of the Oxides of Iron and Alu- minum,’ by F. A. Gooch and F. 8. Havens. ‘ Descriptions of imperfectly known and new Actini- ans, with Critical Notes on other Species, V,’ by A. E. Verrill. ‘Preliminary Note as to the Cause of Root-Pres- sure,’ by R. G. Leavitt. ‘Study of some American Fossil Cycads, Part III.,’ by G. R. Wieland. Professor L. V. Pirsson, who holds the chair of geology in the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, has become an associate editor of the Journal in the place of the late Professor Marsh. AFTER the close of the current volume, in April, the Zoological Bulletin, edited by Profes- sors Whitman and Wheeler, of the University of Chicago and published by Messrs. Ginn & Co., will be continued under the title the Biological Bulletin and be published under the auspices of the Marine Biological Laboratory. The scope of the Bulletin will be enlarged so as to include General Biology, Physiology and Botany. It will further include occasional re- views and reports of work and lectures at the Laboratory. The Bulletin ‘will be open, as heretofore, to scientific contributions from any source. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE 500th meeting of the Society was cele- brated on April 15th by a dinner at Rauscher’s. About fifty members were present. After coffee had been served, the President, Mr. O. H. Tittmann, in his usual felicitous manner, called on the past Presidents of the Society who had honored the banquet by their presence. Seven were present, namely, Newcomb, Harkness, Eastman, Dall, Clarke, Baker and Bigelow. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 227. Interesting remarks were made by each of these gentlemen, on the past history of the Society, its relation to present scientific progress, and its future sphere of usefulness. Informal inter- course was had for a short time after adjourn- ment. E. D. PRESTON, Secretary. ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON, APRIL 18, 1899. UNDER the head of Exhibition of Specimens and Short Notes, Mr. Howard exhibited a vial full of specimens of a species of a Peripatus just received from some unknown correspondent in Trinidad. Mr. Schwarz showed a specimen of Chrysina erubescens Bates. The determination he said was somewhat doubtful, but probably correct. The species is a distinct Central American form, but the specimens showed were found in Madera Canyon, south Arizona. The insect is probably a grape feeder. Dr. Dyar showed specimens of Megalopyge krugti, Dew., collected by Mr. Busck in Porto Rico. The larva was described by Dewitz in his original communication, but so briefly that additional points were mentioned. Mr. Howard asked whether Mr. Busck had been stung by this larva, and Mr. Busck re- plied that the first one which he found had fallen on the back of his hand and produced severe pain and inflammation which lasted for three days. The first paper of the evening was read by Mr. Schwarz and consisted of a continuation of the Hubbard correspondence from the South- west.» The letter read at this meeting con- tained a discussion of the insect fauna of Dasy- lirion wheeleri. In discussion Mr. Pollard asked whether the agave and other large plants of that region have similar insect fauna. Mr. Schwarz replied that the agave is the only liliaceous plant of that region which has an in- sect enemy which attacks it when healthy. This is a lepidopterous larva of the genus Megathymus. The communication was briefly discussed by Messrs. Cockerell and Ashmead, Mr. Cockerell stating that two Coccids had been found upon the Dasylirion, but that both species. May 5, 1899. ] were also found upon yuccas. Mr, Ashmead said that the Dasylirion insects were very simi- lar in character to the insects found in decaying palmetto in Florida. The next paper was by Mr. Marlatt, and in the absence of the author was read by Mr. Ben- ton. It was entitled ‘Remarks on some recent work on Coccide.’ L. O. HowARD, Secretary. THE WASHINGTON BOTANICAL CLUB. THE fifth regular meeting of the Washington Botanical Club was held April 5, 1899, at the residence of Mr. Frederick V. Coville. Professor E. L. Greene made some remarks on the occurrence of parthenogenesis in Anten- naria, apropos of Juel’s recently published in- vestigations in A. alpina. He considered the phenomenon to be well established in several of our native species. Mr. J. G. Smith presented a synopsis of a proposed revision of the genus Sitanion, a group of grasses long included under Elymus. He was able to segregate a large number of new ‘species, chiefly from Western localities. Mr. H. J. Webber gave some notes on the various forms of Zamia found in Florida. There are apparently two well-marked species, at least on the east coast, one confined to the northern, the other to the southern half of the State, while on the west coast occurs possibly a third. Neither of these species is referable to Z. integrifolia Jacq., a name under which the plants have been described in most text-books. Mr. Webber exhibited numerous photographs, pointing out remarkable differences in the shape and structure of the fertile spike. The Club extended invitations to the Phila- delphia Botanical Club and to the Torrey Botan- ical Club of New York to visit Washington for a series of botanical excursions during the last week in May. CHARLES LOUIS POLLARD, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. A MEETING of the Section was heid on April 10th, Professor M. I. Pupin, the Chairman of the Section, presiding. A paper was read by Dr. A. S. Chessin on SCIENCE. 653 ‘The Temperature of Gaseous Celestial Bodies.’ The author said, in brief, that, in view of some extravagant and baseless assertions which have appeared lately in both scientific and popular periodicals with regard to certain supposed laws of temperature in gaseous celestial bodies, it seemed proper to state the true condition of our knowledge in this direction. Dr. Chessin showed that what Dr. See assumed, in a recent article, to be a ‘fundamental law’ of nature, namely, the formula RT = a constant, in which T=the absolute temperature of the gaseous body and R = the radius, was neither a ‘ fun- damental’ nor ‘any law’ at all; in fact, the formula is the result of erroneous and superficial calculations. Dr. Chessin also gave an account of the work done by others on the question of the temperature of heavenly bodies, particularly referring to the investiga- tions of A. Ritter, in Wiedemann’s Annalen for 1878. He showed how far from applicable to actual facts most of these theoretical discus- sions and calculations are, and he drew the conclusion that at this stage of our knowledge it would be but an idle speculation to formulate any law which may govern the changes of tem- perature in heavenly bodies. He called atten- tion to one interesting case discussed by Ritter in his theoretical investigations, a case in which when y, or the ratio of the specific heat at con- stant pressure to that at constant volume, is greater than 4/3, we could have a pulsating condition of the gaseous body about a condition of equilibrium. 700 part of that developed by the condensation of the sun, and that the energy of the motion of the planets amounts to only ;1, of that resulting from the potential of the homogeneous sun upon itself. Thus nearly all the energy of the solar system has resulted from the condensation of the solar mass, I propose this evening to present the re- sults of a determination of the potential of the sun upon itself, when the mass is heterogeneous, or made up of successive layers of a uniform density, and the density follows the laws found by our countryman, Lane, just 30 years ago, for a gaseous body in convective equilibrium. The density of each layer can be found from Lane’s theory. Beginning at the center and proceeding out- ward, we can thence determine the average density of the included spheres when suc- cessive layers of known density are added. (The speaker here explained the theory of the integration which he had developed, and said that the mathematical discussion of the process would appear in the Astronom- ische Nachrichten.) From an astronomical point of view the problem to be solved is best treated by some process of mechanical quadrature ; and accordingly I have divided the radius into 40 parts, and by successive steps obtained an integral for the potential of the heterogeneous sphere upon itself, which isalmost rigorously exact. It turns out that the condensation of the heterogeneous sun MAY 26, 1899. ] has produced more heat than the homo- geneous one, in the ratio of 176,868 to 100,000. As the energy of condensation of the homogeneous sphere represents a radia- tion of 18 million years, the potential of this heterogeneous sphere would, on the same basis, sustain radiation almost exactly 32 million years. Thus the effect of most of the particles of Helmholtz’s homogeneous sphere falling towards the center to produce the heterogeneous sphere here treated is to prolong the life of the sun through an additional period of 14 million years. It has been generally held by those who have studied the theory of the sun’s energy that this fiery globe can hardly continue its activity after the diameter has shrunk to one-half its present value, which would increase the average density of the sphere eight times, and make it equal to 11.2 that of water. Jf this supposition be admitted, it wili follow that our sun has a total longevity of thirty-six million years, of which thirty-two mil- lions lie in the past and only four millions are available for the future life of the solar system. Thus eight-ninths of the available potential en- ergy of the sun has been spent, and only one- ninth is available for futwre use. This conclu- sion is based upon the assumptions : (1) That the sun’s mass is gaseous and the density follows the laws found by Lane ; (2) that shrinkage will essentially cease when the globe has attained the average density of 11.2; (3) that the ratio of the specific heat of the solar gas under constant pressure to that of the gas under constant volume is 1.4, as in common air and most terrestrial gases, and, moreover, that the average specific heat of the sun’s mass is not enormously great, so that the latent heat of cooling would become a great source of energy after shrinkage had _ entirely ceased. All these hypotheses are extremely probable, and the first two will hardly be questioned by any one. For since Wilson and Gray (Phil. Trans., 1894) find by ex- SCIENCE. 138 periment that the effective temperature of the photosphere is about 8,000° C., it will follow that the temperature of the body of the sun is very much higher. According to Lane’s theory this would make the tem- perature of the nucleus about a quarter of a million degrees Centigrade. The matter composing the body of the sun is much above the critical temperatures of all known substances, and thus is necessarily in a gaseous state, though in the nucleus it may be so far condensed, under the euor- mous pressure to which it is subjected, as to act like a solid or fluid of great viscosity. On the other hand, even though the central density be 28 times that of water, while the photosphere is rarer than the terrestrial at- mosphere, it is hardly conceivable that ap- preciable shrinkage can go on after the average density of the globe has increased to eight times its present value. For the resistances due to molecular repulsive forces must tend to overcome gravitation pressure, and thus render further contraction impos- sible. If this state be not fully realized when the sun’s radius has sunk to one-half its present value, it must yet be so fully at- tained in the greater part of the body of the sun that what further shrinkage is pos- sible in the external layers will produce little available energy for maintaining the sun’s heat. As to the average specific heat of the sun we can only say that water has the greatest specific heat of all known terrestrial sub- stances, and it is not probable that the average specific heat of the dense gases composing the sun can be enormously greater than that of the specific heats of the corresponding gases found upon our earth. Thus it is not likely that our sun can long maintain its radiation after shrinkage has ceased. From this investigation it seems that the future duration of the sun’s heat can hardly exceed four million years, and a_corre- 740 sponding limit is set for plant and animal life upon our globe. At Ae ds trot U. S. NAVAL OBSERVATORY, WASHINGTON, D. C., May 12, 1899. ON THE NEW GENUS OF LAMPREY, MACROPH- THALMIA CHILENSIS. THE preliminary account of Dr. Plate’s remarkable discovery published in the Sitz- ungsberichte der Gesellschaft Natwrforschende Freunde, Berlin (1897, No. 8, pp. 137-141), has, as far as I am aware, received no com- ment in recent literature, although there ean be little doubt that this remarkable Cyclostome has revived more of the im- portant discussions as to the position of the Cyclostomes than any publication since the time of the classic pamphlet of Professor Dohrn, ‘ Der Ursprung der Wirbelthiere.’ And morphologists will, I am sure, await im- patiently a further discussion of the anat- omy of this newly discovered type, shortly to appear in the Fauna Chilensis in the Sup- plement Volume of the Zoologische Jahr- biicher. As the preliminary account is not readily accessible, it may be noted that this re- markable lamprey has large and normally developed eyes. It measures but 107 mm. in length, is of a brilliant silver-white color, and its sides are literally compressed, as in the case of many of the typical bony fishes. The back region is blue-black, with light yellow, dusky flakes on the anterior half of the forehead. It is also noteworthy that the sides of the body are perfectly smooth, lacking the markings of the muscles, com- mon in other Cyclostomes. The nasal open- ing is slit-like, situated anterior to the eyes, and not opening in apapilla. The gill-slits are vertically compressed. The eye is of extraordinary size, 2.5 mm. in diameter, and resembles outwardly the eyes of a Teleost, with a circular pupil, 1 mm. in diameter. SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. LX. No. 230. The dentition is relatively simple, and is said to resemble that of Myxine. Plate has not as yet expressed his opinion as to the significance of his morphological prize ; but, judging from a single phrase in his paper, he appears to regard it as a form which has not assumed parasitic habits, and has, therefore, not been subjected to degen- eration. To what degree, however, will he support Dohrn’s earlier teachings, which derived the Cyclostomes from a teleost-like ancestor? In any case, this discovery will by no means simplify the difficult problem as to the relationships of the Cyclostomes in general, for it is not unnatural to assume that if one of these forms has evolved nor- mally developed eyes probably the others also may originally have possessed them, and that the present condition of cornea, lens and retina may reasonably be inter- preted as degenerate instead of primitive. On the other hand, as far as the prelim- inary account enables one to judge, it is also possible to assume that under favorable conditions the Hyperoarte may have become highly specialized to the degree, indeed, of acquiring a more teleost-like body form, to- gether with more completely developed visual structures. Itis tobe hoped that Dr. Plate has succeeded in collecting material which will throw light upon the relations of this new type from the standpoint of meta- morphosis and embryonic development. Basurorp DEan. NOTE ON THE SPAWNING SEASON OF THE EEL. Tue recent and most interesting work of the Italian naturalists Grassi, Calandruc- cio and Ercolani has added, in all essential regards, the needed information regarding the spawning time, as well as the meta- morphosis, of the eel. Ido not find, how- ever, in my review of the literature, any definite observations with regard to either May 26, 1899.] time or place of spawning of the eel in American waters, and I wish, therefore, to present a brief note on the only instance of a spawning eel which has, up to the pres- ent time, come within my notice. I had hoped to give further instances relating to this matter, but Ihave, unfortunately, been unable to secure additional data. The general interest I have always had in the spawning of the eel has led me, from time to time during the past twenty-five years, to examine the condition of the ovary in numbers of specimens which have been brought to the New York markets during various seasons. The eggs which I have, however, noticed in this material were never larger than some which I observed twenty years ago in the so- called ‘eel-fat,’ that is to say, minute ovarian eggs, measuring possibly .03 mm. in diameter. It has long been known, in a general way, that in this neighborhood the eels are usually taken in great numbers dur- ing November and December, at the time of their passage seaward down the Hudson or in Gravesend Bay; and it has always been supposed that the spawning takes place within a month or so of this time, since in the early spring the elvers (montées), which ascend the rivers, are found never measur- ing less than two inches in length. That the actual spawning-time, however, may be a much later one, seems to me now more than probable for the following reason: On May 8, 1898, my attention was brought to an eel containing ova which separated readily from the ovary and filled the cavity of the abdomen, and I am able to give the following notes relating to this very un- usual specimen. JI find it was taken at At- lantic Highlands by Lewis Morris, in rela- tively shallow water, between two and three fathoms, in a locality which is well known as an eeling ground. The color of the specimen was relatively bright, but not unusually so, nor was the eye notably SCIENCE, 741 larger than in similar specimens from the same locality. The specimen was rela- tively small, measuring 42 cm. in length, and weighed but 135 grammes. The eggs are .4 mm. in diameter. A microscopic ex- amination of the ova made by my friend, Professor Dean, of Columbia University, shows that the germinative vesicle is clearly defined, and that the egg is all but ma- ture. The ova, as I have already noted, are readily shaken free from the ovarian tissue. The distinct interest of this observation appears to be this, that the eel may, in ex- ceptional instances at least, ripen its eggs in relatively shallow water, possibly in the inlets of many of the bays and sounds, in- stead of at the great depths which the European observers have hitherto regarded as necessary for sexual maturation. As far as I am aware, the only instance of the tak- ing of a sexually matured eel has been in waters of one hundred or more fathoms in depth. In all these instances, moreover, the female eel has been of considerable size, at least half again as large as the present example. The present specimen, moreover, gives us a clue to the spawning time of the eel in our neighboring waters; in any event, it demonstrates that here the season of ovula- tion, during the month of May or there- abouts, is certainly many months later than in the Mediterranean, for in the latter locality, according to Grassi and Calan- druccio (Fischerei Zeitung, X XII., 428), the eggs can only be found between the months of September and January. I should note, however, that the possibility is not ex- cluded that the present eel was of excep- tional sexual characters, like the small ex- amples of shad showing almost ripened eggs which are sometimes taken one and even two months in advance of the regular ‘run.’ EvuGcENE G. BLACKFORD. 742 EVOLULION OF THE EMBOUCHURE IN NORTH AMERICAN INDIAN FLAGEOLETS. Instrument No. 76,164 in the U. S. Na- tional Museum, from the Cocopa Indians, is made of cane. The septum of the reed is not removed, but two small holes are burnt into the cavity, one on either side of the septum and the wood between the holes re- moved. By covering the upper hole and the intervening space between the holes with the finger and blowing in the upper end of the reed, a proper direction is given to the breath against the outer edge of the lower hole and a whistling sound is pro- duced.. Finger holes in the section below the septum enable the player to produce a variety of sounds. The second step in the development of the embouchure is illustrated by instru- ments Nos. 107,535 from Tucson, Arizona, and 11,814 from the Apache Indians, in the same Territory. Both have the same style of embouchure as the first named. Buta piece of cloth or deerskin tied over the up- per sound hole and the space between the holes takes the place of the finger in di- recting the breath. It may be noticed that in none of the flageolets mentioned has the maker sharpened the edge of the lip or hole against which the wind impinges. The third step is marked by instruments with a thin edge on the lip where the sound is made. In No. 8,429, from the Ree In- dians, one section of quill is used to re- place the finger or cloth in directing the breath, and another to form a sharp lip, and they are lashed down tight with sinew. In Nos. 72,884 and 94,005, from the Creek Indians, and in many other ex- amples, the reed is replaced by a piece of soft wood split and hollowed to imitate the interior of the cane flageolet, and the pieces then joined with gum and thongs. In these the ‘languid,’ or languette, is left in the carving and the sound holes are united by an excavation as in 1 and 2. The air SCIENCE, [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 230- channel is formed by excavating a shallow notch in the upper edge of the diaphragm, or ‘languid ;’ the lip being a thin piece of metal; the cover is a piece of wood, laid on and fastened with thong. This is usually carved and isa prominent feature in this style of flageolet commonly called ‘ court- ing flutes.’ The fourth and last step in this evolution is exemplified by No. 23,724, from the Sioux of Devil’s Lake Agency. The air passage between the two sound holes is not cut out of the diaphragm between, but a metal plate extends over and beyond both holes, and there is a rectangular slot cut out of the metal long enough to expose both holes and of the same width as the holes. The carved cap is lashed on top of the metal plate so as to form the air passage, which is bounded by the diaphragm, the edges of the metal and the underside of the wooden cap. The Ree specimen, No. 8,429, shows that the Indian flageolet was in use before the knowledge of the Europeans. This speci- men consists of a tube of hard wood. In- stead of making the embouchure like those in European whistles and flageolets, placing a plug with an air channel between it and the wall of the tube just above the sound hole, they have made a long hole or slot in the wall of the tube and plugged the bore, with the gum or wax so placed that the slot is open above and below the plug. This plug, or ‘ languid,’ is not quite even with the outer surface of the tube; the upper portion of the slot is covered with a split quill, its lower edge being even with the lower face of the plug, or ‘ languid,’ and the shallow space between the edge of the plug within the slot and the quill forms the air channel which directs the wind against the edge of another split quill lashed over the lower part of the slot to within a quarter of an inch or so of the upper quill, thus form- ing a modification of the Indian cane flageo- lets, but not of the European form at all. May 26, 1899. ] This peculiar style of the Indian flageolet T have not met with, except among the In- dians of the United States, and those chiefly west of the Mississippi. There are whistles made of bone, stone or other materials by the Indians of the United States which are of the European character and they may have been known before the coming of the Euro- peans. But the peculiar construction of the flageolet I have described is so different from the common form that I have no doubt of its entirely Indian origin. E. H. HAwtey. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. Traité élémentaire de météorologie. Par ALFRED AnGoT. Paris, Gauthier- Villars. 1899. Pp. vi+417. Price, 12 francs. Professor Angot occupies the position of meteorologist to the Freuch Bureau Central Météorologique, and is so well known to meteor- ological workers the world over, that a formal treatise from his pen will receive careful con- sideration. It. is not too much to say that Angot is to-day the foremost meteorologist in France, and as such his treatise will be con- sidered an authority in his own country. The question naturally arises : Does the book repre- sent the meteorology of to-day ? The author in his preface explains that he is not giving a complete treatise on meteorology, but merely a non-mathematical presentation of the elements of the science. The subject of meteorological instruments and their use has been excellently presented by the author in his ‘Instructions météorologique,’ and he has omitted this from his present treatise ; thus hav- ing more space to devote to the results of me- teorological observations and theories. Professor Angot remarks that little attention is paid to instruction in meteorology in the in- stitutions of learning in France, and he refers to the contrast existing in the United States, where ‘a great number of special chairs are devoted to meteorology in the high schools as well as in the universities.’ I must say that Iam surprised to learn of this activity in the study of meteorology in our country, for my SCIENCE. 743 own observation has revealed an almost utter indifference, in fact the indifference which comes from ignorance, to the claims of meteor- ology on the part of those who have the say of what shall and what shail not be taught in our schools and colleges. If there is any institu- tion in the United States, except Harvard Uni- versity, that devotes $500 a year to meteoro- logical instruction I have not yet heard of it ; and, looking at the matter from another point of view, it may be remarked that our pub- lishers who have brought out works on ele- mentary meteorology express a disinclination to have their fingers burned by a repetition of the experiment. Angot has divided his work into five books, which follow a brief introduction. Book I. treats of the Temperature; Book II. of the Atmospheric Pressure and Wind ; Book III. of the Water in the Atmosphere ; Book IV. of the Disturbances in the Atmosphere; Book V. of the Forecasting of the Weather and Meteoro- logical Periods. In the introduction the author explains the derivation of average values, the various periodic changes which occur in meteorology and the significance of interpolation. Under the heading Temperature there is given first an excellent chapter on actinometry, which is followed by the usual treatment of the periodic diurnal and annual changes of tempera- ture, and their variations with change of alti- tude, latitude and continental or oceanic sur- roundings, and the distribution of temperature over the earth’s surface. An unusually full section treating of the influence of temperature on vegetation, anda quite lengthy chapter on the temperature of the soil and water surface closes this book. The charts representing the geographical distribution of the temperature (and the other elements) show the convergence of the meridians, and are consequently an im- provement on the ordinary Mercator’s projec- tion. The treatment of the barometric pressure is especially full as regards the diurnal variation ; and, as was to have been expected, the cause of the semi-diurnal oscillation is referred to as still unknown. The general conceptions concerning the direc- 744 SCIENCE. tion, force and velocity of the wind are fully explained, but it is not until the author reaches the subject of the causes of the wind, and its re- lations with the temperature and pressure, that the reader’s greatest interest is aroused. For it is here that the modern aspect of meteorology really begins, and it is just here that the author encounters his greatest difficulties. He gives first the cause and maintenance of fluid motions as depending on the differences of pressure at the same level, and establishes the complete circuit of such movements of the air; he then proceeds to explain the meaning of the terms isobaric lines and barometric gradients. Then follow, in succession, the influence of the earth’s rotation on the movements of the air, the curve of inertia, the formation of cyclonic and anti- eyclonic whirls, and the circulation of the air around centers of warm or cold air. After this comes the general circulation of the atmosphere; the constant winds, the ‘ Trades ;’ the seasonal winds, the monsoons; the diurnal winds, the land and sea breezes, mountain winds, ete. I must confess to a feeling of disappointment upon reading this part of Professor Angot’s book. I had hoped that he would have given us a simple, clear, logical development of the air circulation somewhat after the manner of Ferrel’s theory, but which should include the views of the best European investigators. That is what we need ; but the author has contented himself with the older method of a disconnected treatment of the different features of the at- mospheric circulation, some of which have been treated in one way and some in other ways by the various investigators who first developed them. I think that all of those who have tried to present in an elementary manner the results of the later investigators concerning the ‘ cir- culation of the atmosphere’ have attempted an impossible short cut in meteorological litera- ture, and that there must first be written an advanced treatment of the subject, which can later be simplified for an elementary treatise. Until this elaborate treatise has been written I think that Ferrel’s development of the subject as given in his ‘ Popular Treatise of the Winds’ (New York, 1889) will still remain the best for presentation to the student or general reader. We must bear in mind that Ferrel preceded [N. S. Von. IX. No. 230. this popular exposition of the subject by his highly technical ‘Recent Advances in Meteor- ology.’ In Angot’s chapter on atmospheric humidity the sections on condensation and clouds deserve: special mention, and the reproduction of cloud photographs are unusually good. Under rain- fall the charts showing the continental distribu- tion of this element are valuable. The subject of meteorological optics is really too difficult for presentation in a very elemen- tary treatise on meteorology, but the author has succeeded rather better than is usual in his brief treatment of the subject. The development of the subject of cyclones, thunder-squalls and spout phenomena is very full ; but Faye’s theories are given perhaps un- due prominence from the German and Ameri- can points of view. In this, as in other recent treatises, the sub- ject of Weather Predictions has not the space devoted to it which its practical importance demands. The last chapter takes up briefly the meteor- ological periods or cycles, and cosmic influ- ences. Taking Angot’s book as a whole, there is a deliberateness of treatment of each topic which can only be attained either by the making ofa bulky volume or the exclusion of many impor- tant topics which deserve mention ; and in the reviewer’s opinion the use of the work as a text- book will be lessened thereby, but its value to the general reader will be increased. The lack of an index is, however, a most serious draw- back to the free use of the book as a work of reference, for it requires the knowledge of a specialist to be able to turn at once to minor topics by the aid of the rather full table of con- tents alone. Professor Angot’s ‘Meteorology’ is a much more important contribution to French litera- ture than it is to the world’s literature of the subject, and it will, undoubtedly, do a great amount of good in supplying French readers with information concerning the present con- dition of a subject of very rapidly increasing interest. The French meteorological literature of recent years has not been nearly as abundant as that of other countries, and we trust that oe ces MAY 26, 1899. ] this new book may arouse to action other authors and publishers, and especially such as will devote their energies to the presentation of the new meteorology. FRANK WALDO. The Genesis and Dissolution of the Faculty of Speech. A Clinical and Psychological Study of Aphasia. By JoserH Coins, M. D., Pro- fessor of Diseases of the Mind and Nervous System in the New York Post-graduate Med- ical School; Neurologist to the New York City Hospital, ete. Awarded the Alvarenga Prize of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, 1897. New York, The Macmillan Company. 1898. Pp. viii+432. This volume, to which was awarded the Alvarenga prize of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia for 1897, is a monograph of im- portance. There is no more fruitful field of investigation than the various forms of speech disturbance, for the student both of psychology and pathological anatomy. That progress has been slow is due to the fact, as Collins points out, that observation and analysis of speech de- fect has been inaccurate and post-mortem ex- aminations incomplete. If not offering very much that is new the book before us has the merit of calling attention to our deficiencies and of urging greater care in the future. The author shows from beginning to end an admi- rable grasp of his subject and a complete ac- quaintance with the literature, which he has used with skill to produce throughout an emi- nently readable and stimulating book. The monograph opens with a chapter on ‘Disorders of intellectual expression, known as aphasia.’ This is largely a discussion and criticism of terms, the outcome of which is a general classification of aphasia as follows: 1. True aphasia—-aphasia of apperception. Due to lesion of any constituent of the speech region, the zone of language. 2. Sensory aphasia. Due to lesion of the central and peripheral pathways leading to the zone of language. 83. Motor aphasia. Due to lesion of the motor pathways, over which motor impulses travel in passing to the peripheral speech musculature. 4. Compound aphasia. Any combination of two or more of these. SCIENCE, 745. Such a classification the author regards as sufficient for all practical purposes, but as a concession to established usage he makes cer- tain sub-divisions in order to avoid possible con- fusion of nomenclature. For example, he re- tains the word ‘motor’ as applied to aphasia produced by lesion of Broca’s convolution ‘solely becau-e such usage has been consecrated by time,’ and not because he believes this center to be in reality entirely motor. Following this chapter is a valuable historical sketch comprised in twenty-three pages, with a good bibliography. Charcot’s autonomous speech centers are sharply criticised, both here and later in the book, and Dejerine’s services to the subject receive the warmest appreciation, particularly because of their general opposition to Charcot’s views, Under the heading of ‘An analysis of the genesis and function of speech,’ Collins an- alyses, from the point of view of physiological psychology, the various elements which ulti- mately result in the development of the faculty of speech. It is clearly too large a subject for so cursory a handling, and on the whole is less satisfactory than the discussions which are con- cerned solely with the physical side of the pro- cess. Chapter IV. concerns itself with remarks on the anatomy of the brain, the zone of language, and the evidence regarding a special graphic motor center. Itis largely anatomical and pre- sents with clearness the facts we should know relative to the structure of the brain in gen- eral, and particularly of those parts to which are attributed special functions in regard to speech. Flechsig’s recently expressed views as to the zones of projection and the zones of association are narrated in considerable detail, because of their more or less direct bearing upon the con- ception of aphasia which the author has elab- orated. Collins is definite in his opinion that the zone of language, made up mainly of Broca’s convolution, the posterior portion of the first temporal convolution, and the angular gyrus, does not send fibers directly into the motor pro- jection tract. The Rolandic cortex must first be called upon before an idea can be expressed as speech. He is equally confident that we now have sufficient evidence to overthrow com- 746 SCIENCE. pletely Charcot’s conception of four more or less independent centers and particularly of a so-called graphic center, and that we may con- fidently maintain that the zone of language is, as it were, a unit in its action, no part of which may be seriously injured, without in a measure impairing the entire mechanism of speech. These claims are supported by much skilful analysis of reported cases, and a careful reading leaves us with the conviction of the reasonable- ness of Collins’ views. The greater part of the remainder of the book is taken up with a more detailed consideration of the varieties of speech disturbance, fre- quently and pleasantly interrupted by the nar- ration either of personal cases or of cases re- ported by others. In the discussion of motor aphasia much stress is laid upon a distinction too often overlooked, namely, that between cortical and sub-cortical motor aphasia. In the failure to recognize this distinction—and the same applies to sensory aphasia—Collins sees one of the greatest impediments to progress in our knowledge ; and, conversely, the greatest possible hope for more accurate knowledgein the future must lie in the careful microscopic study of the brains of aphasic individuals, particularly when the lesion lies beneath the cortex. The details of differential diagnosis do not concern the present review, but these chapters are to be cordially recommended to those desiring some- thing beyond a vague conception of the real problems of the future. The diagnosis, etiology, morbid anatomy, treatment and, finally, the medico-legal aspects of aphasia are discussed in a somewhat less complete form, as the scope of the book amply justifies. Collins disagrees with certain other writers as regards the responsibility of the aphasic. His contention here is that in so far as internal speech is unaffected, or put anatom- ically, if the cortical areas for stored memories are intact, a person must be regarded as re- sponsible, other things being equal. If, on the contrary, such areas are involved, e. g., the area for motor word memories, the person’s testa- mentary capacity should always be called in question. Hence, again, the extreme impor- tance of determining whether the lesion lead- ing to the speech defect be actually in the zone [N.S. Von. IX. No. 230. of language or in that part of the nerve mechanism which simply subserves the emis- sion of words—sub-cortical. In general the monograph must be regarded as a valuable contribution to American neuro- logical literature. The subject-matter is pre- sented in a scholarly way, and with a directness and certainty of his position which is char- acteristic of the author. Itis to be regretted that Bastian’s recent work should have been published too late to be fully included in Col- lins’s critical analysis. On the whole the au- thor’s conception and treatment of his subject seem to us sound and representative of the best type of scientific discussion. He gives us few pew observations, worked out with the detail, particularly after death, which he so urgently recommends, but this, no doubt, is due to lack of opportunity. The style is for the most part clear. There is, however, a constant tendency to use unnec- essarily pedantic words, for which we can find no excuse. In writing on scientific subjects simplicity of diction is surely a first requisite, and this Collins lacks. The following words and expressions are correct, it may be, but cer- tainly not well chosen : ‘ Ancientness,’ ‘ super- ambient cortex,’ ‘speechfulness,’ ‘cotton rain guard,’ ‘perishment,’ ‘disablement.’ This is, however, a minor criticism in an otherwise ex- cellent piece of work. The book is admirably printed on rather un- necessarily heavy paper and the proof reading is almost faultless. An index adds materially to its usefulness and convenience. Bie Wistelss Codex Borbonicus. Manuscrit Méxicain de la Bibliothéque Du Palais Bourbon, Livre divi- natoire et Rituel figuré. Publié en fac-sim- ile avec une commentaire explicatif par M. E.-T. Hamy. Paris, 1889. Ernest LE- ROUX, Editeur. Text pp. 1-24, introduction and 4 chapters. Plates folded screen fashion No’s. 2-88 in colors. This ancient Mexican book, formerly known as the Codex Législatif, is now published for the first time, in exact fac-simile, color, size and form. The original is on maguey paper, and MAy 26, 1899.] the drawing is the work of an artist, displaying an accuracy not seen in any of the other Mexi- can codices. It has been hidden from the world in the recesses of the library of the Chamber of Deputies, Paris. The writer had the priviledge of carefully examining it in 1895, in company with the Duke of Loubat, through whose gener- osity its publication has been made possible. The bright colors with which it was painted are still well preserved, and the whole codex isin ex- cellent condition. The first two pages and prob- ably the last two are missing, undoubtedly having been destroyed, or abstracted shortly subsequent to the conquest. The division and mutilation of the Mexican codices is a well-known fact. This book, folded screen fashion, is painted upon but one side, unlike the majority of the Pre-Columbian codices. The pages bear texts written in poor Spanish, partly explanatory of their meaning. The first 18 pages contain the Tonalamatl, the divinatory or astrological calen- dar of the Aztecs. The contents of the missing first two pages can be supplied by a study of the other ritualistic calendars, of the Codices Vati- canus 3773, Vaticanus 3738, Borgianus, Bo- logna and the Boturini-Aubin-Goupil Tonala- matl. This subject has been exhaustively treated by Dr. Ed. Seler. The Tonalamatl of the Codex Borbonicus is far more complete than any other yet published, and helps to clear up some of their obscure points. Pages 19 to 38 contain astronomical, religious and historical material of great interest, and somewhat resemble the paintings found in the Codex Telleriano Re- mensis of the National Library, Paris, and its counterpart Codex Vaticanus 3738. Pages 37 to 38 are instructive from the historical stand- point. Page 387 represents the two prophets who foretold to Montezuma the coming of the Spaniards to subdue the country. The dates: 1, Tochtli; 2, Acatl; 3, Tecpatl, 1506-7-3, ac- company these figures, and suggest that the priests had heard of the appearance of the ships of Diaz de Solis and Pinzon off the coast of Yucatan in 1506, notice of which was undoubt- edly carried to most parts of the culture area. When all the old Mexican codices are repro- duced separately then the study will be much simplified, and it is gratifying to note the progress now being made in this direction, at SCIENCE. 747 the present time several unpublished codices being in process of publication. M. H. SAVILLE. Pflanzengeographie auf Physiologischer Grund- lage. Von Dr. A. F. W. Scuimper. Mit 502 Tafeln und Abbildungen in autotypie, 5 Tafeln in Lichtdruck, und 4 geographischen Karten. Jena, Gustav Fischer. 1898. 8ve. Pp. vi+ 876. The appearance of this text marks a distine- tive period in the development of phytogeog- raphy. The treatment is primarily ecological, but the floristic is presented so fully and woven in so logically that the arrangement is strictly phytogeographical in the best sense. Such a coordinate presentation of the subject-matter is novel. The standard texts, especially such classic ones as Humboldt’s, De Candolle’s and Grisebach’s, have been almost wholly floristic, while Warming’s recent Lehrbuch der Oeko- logischen Pflanzengeographie is, of course, purely ecological. Sketches of particular floras have, likewise, been floristic in character, to the practical exclusion of the ecological standpoint. Naturally, this does not mean that the author is the first to perceive the essential relation be- tween floristic and ecology, a relation practi- cally of cause and effect. The recognition of this fact is as old as Humboldt’s first work. It does indicate, however, the advance made in systematizing and in making more thorough the methods of investigating the floral covering. The appearance of the present excellent text evidences the author’s realization of his oppor- tunity. The skillful manner in which the mat- ter is handled bespeaks no small mastery of the subject. The volume contains a number of original and suggestive ideas, only a few of which can be mentioned here. The work consists of three parts, the first treating of the factors in ecology, the second of formations and plant societies, the third of the zones and regions of the floral covering of the globe. The ecological factors considered in the first part are water, temperature, light, soil, at- mosphere and animals. The treatment of each subject is as exhaustive as can be expected in a general text, especially in consideration of the enormous mass of detail available. In thorough- 748 ness and in manner of presentation of this por- tion, the book is probably without an equal. With respect to water content as a factor, Schimper’s divisions agree with those of Warm- ing, except that he uses the term tropophyte for mesophyte to apply to all plants not hydro- phytes or xerophytes. The same criticism ap- plies here that has been made elsewhere against Warming’s mesophytes. The term is a con- venient one, but it designates an ill-defined group and is almost impossible in application. The analysis of the conditions producing xero- phytes is critical; such conditions are here grouped with reference to decrease of absorp- tion and increase of transpiration. Under the former are ranged small water content, abun- dance of salts or humic acid in the soil, low soil temperature ; under the latter, low degrees of humidity of the air, high temperature, low at- mospheric pressure, intense illumination. Cor- responding to these characteristics, xerophytic habitats are: (1) deserts and steppes, with a dry substratum and a dry atmosphere, often, also, with excessive heat and intense sunlight ; (2) rocks and tree trunks, with low water con- tent due to rapid drying; (8) sandhills, rubble, talus, with extremely porous soil; (4) seashore, solfatara, with abundant salts in solution in the soil; (5) moors, with humic acid in the soil ; (6) polar areas, either in glaciated mountain ranges orin arctic latitudes, with extremely low ground temperature ; (7) alpine mountains with rarefac- tion of the atmosphere and strong insolation. The consideration of hydrophytes and tropo- phytesis naturally much morerestricted. Schim- per regards water plants proper as descended from primitive unstable amphibious forms—a conclusion rather too theoretical to be gener- ally accepted. He closes this section with a condensed statement of the relation of water to reproduction and to dissemination. In the consideration of temperature the author expressly states that he regards this factor of primary importance. He places its treatment after that of water solely because the modifications due to the latter are more easily investigated and determined. The considera- tion of temperature extremes is followed by that of optimum temperatures, in which the work of Sachs and Haberlandt is largely drawn upon. SCIENCE. _ cellence. [N.S. Von. 1X. No. 230. Acclimatization is touched upon only briefly, for the most part with reference to Mayr’s contri- butions. For the general reader one or two re-statements are interesting: that no portion of the earth’s surface is too cold for plant life, as, with few exceptions, no portion is too hot ; that it is nowhere too dark, nowhere too bright, for plant life. There is opportunity to take ex- ception to the sweeping nature of these state- ments, but they are hardly intended to be taken as absolute. Under atmosphere is considered atmospheric pressure, air content of water and winds. The relatively much greater effect of the wind upon woody formations is pointed out, as also the influence of the wind upon transpira- tion. No mention is made, however, of the action of the wind in dune regions, sandhills and deserts, where it plays a primary réle in the determination of the floral covering. The importance of winds in pollination and dis- semination is treated briefly. The chapter upon soil as an ecological factor is very skillfully summarized. Though brief, it is so comprehensive that recapitulation is im- possible here; one can only reaffirm its ex- The influence of animals upon vege- tation has not been given as much attention as would be expected. Too little use has been made of the vast accumulation of data in this field. In many instances the ecological signifi- cance has not been fully wrought out. More- over, a large number of important biological factors in ecology, arising from the interrela- tions of plants to plants, and of plants to the physical conditions, such as vegetation pressure, zonation, layering, etc., have been entirely neglected. It is impossible to accept the author’s group- ing of formations into climatic and edaphic in the absolute way he seems tointendit. Forests, prairies and deserts are not purely, nor always primarily, determined by climatic factors. The so-called edaphic formations, determined though they are by soil characteristic, are often not formations, but zones or patches. They are but rarely coordinate with the author’s climatic formations. The conception of the facies, moreover, differs from that of Drude, which has been accepted in this country. The division of the floral covering into forests, MAY 26, 1899.] prairies or steppes and deserts is, of course, primary and affords an altogether satisfactory basis for the arrangement of the formations. The statement that the constitution of the floral covering is determined by the three factors, temperature, hydrometeors and soil, is axio- matic; one is inclined, however, to give only partial assent to the conclusion that temperature determines the flora, hydrometeors the vegeta- tion, and soil composition the formation. The analysis of the determining factors of forest, prairie and desert vegetation is excellent. Moderate frequency of precipitation is of first importance for forest vegetation. A rainy growing period is less favorable, the primary requisite being considerable water content in the soil, especially at some depth. The time of year in which the water supply is replenished is unim- portant. The latter may occur throughout the year or only periodically. In the last case the rainy season may coincide for the most part, or entirely, with the growing period, as in the tropics and in the interior of Argentina, or with a period of relative rest, as in extra-trop- ical regions with wet winters, Mediterranean countries, Chili, California, south and southwest Australia. Forests are limited only by such degrees of dryness as prohibit all other vegeta- tion, with the exception of fungi and algee. The polar limit of forested areas is determined by dry winds during the season of frosts. Sum- marizing, a climate favorable to forestation presents the following conditions: warm grow- ing period, constantly moist substratum, moist, quiet atmosphere, particularly in winter. It is unimportant whether the water content of the soil issupplied from meteoric or telluric sources, whether the precipitation is frequent or rare, coincident with the growing period or the period of rest. A climate with dry winters is unfavor- able to forests in the highest degree, since the trees are unable to recover from the transpira- tion loss of the winter. For prairies and steppes a moist substratum is unimportant, but a moist upper surface is essential. The most favorable conditions for grass vegetation are frequent, if only slight, precipitation during the growing period and coneomitant moderate warmth. Prairies are affected little by the moisture of the substratum, SCIENCE. 749 except in the case of extreme capillarity of the surface, by the dryness of the air, especially during the period of rest, and by winds. Dry- ness in the maximum of the growing period, spring and early summer, is inimical, in a high degree, to grass vegetation. Axiomatically, in a climate favorable to forestation, forests pre- dominate; in one favorable to grasses, prairies and steppes are the rule. In transition regions predominance is determined by adaptation to edaphic factors. Extreme departures from the mean favorable to forest or to prairie vegeta- tion produce deserts. It is impossible even to touch upon the third part of the volume, which constitutes by far the largest portion. It deals with the zones and regions of the vegetative covering of the earth. The latter is treated in the most exhaustive manner since Grisebach under the captions: tropical zone, temperate zone, arctic zone, montane regions and hydrophytic formations. Each zone is considered in a very logical man- ner with reference to the three main manifesta- tions of the vegetation, forest, prairie and desert. The high value of the text is greatly enhanced by the large number of fine illustra- tions. It seems impossible to commend too highly this marked feature of the book. It may be regarded as significant of the time when phytogeographical results will be embodied, for the most part, in graphic fashion, in photo- graphs, abundance-frequence indices and charts, and formational lists and contrasts. FREDERIC E. CLEMENTS. THE UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA. Victor von Richter’s Organic Chemistry. Edited by Professor R. ANscHUTz, University of Bonn. Authorized Translation by EDGAR F. Smiru, Professor of Chemistry, University of Pennsylvania. Third American from the eighth German edition. Vol. I., Chemistry of the Aliphatic Series. Philadelphia, P. Blakiston’s Sons & Co. 1899. Pp. 625. Price, $3. Anschiitz, in editing v. Richter’s ‘Organic Chemistry,’ has raised it from the rank of a good descriptive manual to a place in the front rank of books on this subject. He has had the aid of Emil Fischer in the supervision of the chapters 750 on the carbohydrates and on uric acid; of v. Baeyer, Claisen, Waitz and others on the work in their respective fields. The introduction occupies 77 pages, and among other subjects includes condensed pres- entations of the aims of physical chemistry and stereochemistry, of the work based on the optical and magnetic properties of carbon com- pounds, and of that based on measurements of conductivity. The book is written tersely and clearly. The nomenclature in common use is retained, but that recommended by the Geneva Conference is also given. The literature and historical references are abundant. Professor Smith’s translation is very good. A slip is on page 122, where wine is said to be obtained from ‘St. John’s berries ;’ a term not found in the Century Dictionary. The German word ‘Johannisbeeren’ means currants. The volume before us contains the results of the latest work on the subject, and, as the second (and last) volume on the aromatic series is promised by the publishers during the present year, the student purchasing this excellent book may feel confident that he has the last word on the subject up to the date of publication. E. RENOUF. Physical Chemistry for Beginners. By Dr. CH. VAN DEVENTER. With an Introduction by Professor J. H. VAn’t Horr. Authorized American edition from the German edition. Translated by BERTHRAM B. BoLTwoop, Pu.D., Instructor in Physical Chemistry in the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University. First edition, first thousand. New York, John Wiley & Sons; London, Chapman & Hall, Limited. 1899. Pp. 154. In the preface it is stated that ‘‘in the book at hand the author has endeavored to collect the most important results of physical chem- istry in such a manner that this important branch of modern chemistry may be accessible to those who have not made an exhaustive study of physics and mathematics. The re- quirements of students of medicine and phar- macy, as well as of elementary chemistry, have been especially considered in the preparation of this work.’’ Chapters are devoted to the fundamental SCIENCE, (N.S. Von. 1X. No. 230. laws of composition, the properties of gases?’ thermochemistry, solutions, phenomena of light and the periodic system. It would seem that a chapter on electrochemistry would add to the value of the book. The work has been used by Van’t Hoff in connection with his lectures on chemistry to students in Amsterdam, and is spoken of as having furnished him welcome assistance. The work of translation has been done with care by Dr. Boltwood, his purpose being, in part, to place in the hands of his own students a book which shall contain a clear and concise statement of the fundamental facts of physical chemistry. Harry C. JONES. BOOKS RECEIVED. Das Tierreich. tide. 7 Lieferung, Demodicide und Sarcop- G. CANESTRIUM and P. KRAMER. Pp. xvi +193. M. 9.20. 8 Lieferung, Scorpiones und Pedipalpi. KARL KRAEPELIN. Pp. xviii + 265. M. 12.60. Berlin, R. Friedlander und Sohn. 1899. Steinbruchindustrie und Steinbruchgeologie. O. HERR- MANN. Berlin, Borntraeger. 1899. Pp. xvi-+ 428. M. 10. Essai critique sur Vhypothese des atomes dans la science contemporaine. ARTHUR HANNEQUEN. Paris, Alcan. 1899. Second Edition. Pp. 457. The Newer Remedies. VIRGIL COBLENTZ. Philadel- phia, P. Blakiston’s Sons & Co. 1899. Third Edi- tion. Pp. vi+147. $1.00. The Psychology of Reasoning. ALFRED BINET. Trans- lated from the second French edition by ADAM GOWANS WHITE. Chicago, The Open Court Pub- lishing Co. 1899. Pp. 191. SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. THE first article in the American Naturalist for May is by H. 8. Jennings, and isa continua- tion of ‘Studies on Reactions to Stimuliin Uni- cellular Organisms.’ The present part, III., treats of ‘Reactions to Localized Stimuli in Spirostomum and Stentor,’ the writer reaching the conclusion that the organisms react as in- dividuals and not as substances. But while it will not do to think of their reactions as those of chemical substances, neither will it do to at- tribute to unicellular organisms the psycholog- ical powers of higher animals. Under the title of ‘Vacation Notes, II., The Northern Pacific MAy 26, 1899. ] Coast,’ Douglas H. Campbell touches on the botany of that region. W. D. Matthew con- siders the question: ‘Is the White River Tertiary an Aolian Formation,’ deciding it in the affirma- tive. F. H. Herrick describes several cases of ‘Ovum in Ovo,’ and after classifying the vari- ous methods in which such abnormalities occur presents theories which account for them. The concluding paper by T. D. A. Cockerell is ‘On the Habits and Structure of the Coccid Genus Margarodes.’ Among the editorials is one on ‘The Gypsy Moth and Economic Entomology,’ in which the ground is taken that it is not worth while to continue the present extravagant policy. The number is unusually full of brief and good reviews of recent scientific literature. THE March number of the Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society contains: ‘On Singular Points of Linear Differential Equations with Real Coefficients,’ by Professor Maxime Bocher ; ‘ The Hessian of the Cubic Surface,’ by Dr. J. I. Hutchinson; ‘On the Simple Iso- morphisms of a Hamiltonian Group to Itself,’ -by Dr. G. A. Miller; ‘Galois’s Collected Works,’ by Professor James Pierpont; ‘Three Memoirs on Geometry,’ by Professor Edgar Odell Lovett; ‘Stahl’s Abelian Functions,’ by Dr. Virgil Snyder ; ‘Calculus of Finite Differ- ences,’ by Dr. D. A. Murray ; ‘Notes’ and ‘ New Publications.’ The April number of the Bulletin contains an account of the February meeting of the American Mathematical Society, by Professor F. N. Cole; ‘Determinants of Quaternions,’ by Professor James Mills Pierce ; ‘The Largest Linear Homogeneous Group with an Invariant Pfaffian,’ by Dr. L. E. Dickson ; ‘Asymptotic Lines on Ruled Surfaces having Two Rectilinear Directrices,’ by Dr. Virgil Snyder; ‘Willson’s Graphics,’ by. Dr. J. B. Chittenden ; ‘Pascal’s Repertorium of Higher Mathematics,’ ‘D’Ocagne’s Descriptive and Infinitesimal Geometry,’ by Professor Edgar Odell Lovett ; ‘ Sophus Lie,’ translation of Pro- fessor Gaston Darboux’s notice; ‘Notes’ and ‘New Publications.’ The May number of the Bulletin contains an account of the April meet- ing of the Chicago Section of the Society, by Professor Thomas F. Holgate; ‘ An Elementary Proof that Bessel’s Functions of the Zeroth Order have an Infinite Number of Real Roots,’ SCIENCE. 751 by Professor Maxime Bécher; ‘A Generaliza- tion of Appell’s Factorial Functions,’ by Dr. E. J. Wilezynski; ‘On the Arithmetization of Mathematics,’ by Professor James Pierpont ; ‘Two Books on the Tides,’ by Professor Ernest W. Brown; ‘ Notes’ and ‘ New Publications.’ THE Annals of Mathematics will henceforward be published quarterly, beginning with the num- ber issued on October 1st, by the department of mathematics of Harvard University. Professor Ormond Stone, of the University of Virginia, who founded and for many years supported the journal, has consented to act as a member of the board of editors in codperation with Pro- fessor H. S. White, of Northwestern University, and Professors Byerly, Osgood and Bocher, of Harvard University. The editors state that their object is to conduct the journal so that it may appeal not merely to the highly trained specialist, but to the general mathematieal public of America from students of mathematics in the graduate schools of our universities up- ward. Short research articles will be welcomed, but highly technical articles will be avoided. Articles containing little or no absolutely new matter, but giving a clear presentation of some important but not readily accessible field of mathematics, or a more thorough presentation of some subject which is generally treated in an unsatisfactory manner, are especially desired. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. CHEMICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE regular meeting was held on April 138, 1899. The first paper of the evening was read by Mr. J. K. Haywood, and was entitled ‘Some Boiling-Point Curves.’ The results obtained have led to the following conclusions : I. All mixtures of the following pairs of liquids boil at temperatures between the boil- ing points of the constituents : alcohol-water, aleohol-ether, chloroform-carbon tetra-chloride, acetone-water and acetone-ether. II. A solution containing 17.5 % alcohol in carbon tetra-chloride distills without change at 65.5° approximately, under a pressure of 768.4 mm. of mercury. IfI. A solution containing 12.5 % methyl] al- 702 cohol in chloroform distills without change at 54° approximately, under a pressure of 770.2 mm. of mercury. IV. A solution containing 12-13 % methyl alcohol in acetone distills without change at 55.9°, under a pressure of 764.8 mm. of mer- cury. The boiling point of this mixture is about 0.8° below that of the constituent which is pres- ent in greatest amount. Vv. A solution containing 15-20 % of carbon tetra-chloride in acetone distills without change at a temperature but 0.05° below that of the pure acetone, and all mixtures containing more than 40 % acetone boil within one degree of the boiling point. VI. The close proximity of the boiling points of the constituents appears to be a favorable condition for the existence of a maximum or minimum point on the boiling-point curve. VII. In general one constituent remaining the same, mixtures with substances of similar chemical constitution yield similar boiling-point curves. The second paper was read by Dr. F. Kk. Cam- eron, and was entitled ‘ Boiling Points of Mix- tures.’ Dr. H. C. Bolton read an interesting paper on ‘The Development of Pneumatic Chem- istry,’ which was profusely illustrated with lantern slides. ? WILLIAM H. KRue, Secretary. GEOLOGICAL CONFERENCE AND STUDENTS’ CLUB OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY. Students’ Geological Club, April 11, 1899.—Mr. L. La. Forge reviewed Gregory’s ‘ Plan of the Earth,’ indicating several questionable steps in that writer’s recent exposition of the subject. Mr. A. W. G. Wilson described a unique lake in Ontario, which is known as Lake-on-the- Mountain. Geological Conference, April 28, 1899.—Mr. k. E. Burke communicated ‘The Discovery of Fossils in the Roxbury Conglomerate,’ and will publish on it at an early date. Under the title ‘Mineral Veins of the Mys- tic Quarries, Somerville,’ Mr. R. B. Earle re- ported the results of his studies in that field. The veins, which are almost entirely limited to SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. 1X. No. 230. a dike and a sill, are composed chiefly of cal- cite, but include small amounts of quartz, pyrite and prehnite. The speaker divided the fissures which these veins fill into five classes according to their origin, which he believed to have been by contraction of the molten magma, by earth- quakes, by tortion, by faulting or by decompo- sition. The growth and enlargement of these fissures, when once formed, was held to be mainly due to the expansive force of the vein- filling substance. Mr. G. C. Curtis exhibited a topographic model, which he has constructed, of an area lo- cated in the eastern foothills of the Cascade Range, near the great bend of the Columbia River, in Kitattas County, Washington. J. M. BOUTWELL, Recording Secretary. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. TELEPATHY ONCE MORE. To THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: Why Professor Titchener should have taken an essay which he now admits to have completely failed even to make probable its point, as an example of the ‘brilliant work’ which ‘scientific psychology’ can do in the way of destroying the telepathic superstition, may be left to be fathomed by read- ers with more understanding of the ways of ‘Science’ than I possess. Meanwhile, as one interested in mere ac- curacy, I must protest against two impressions which Professor Titchener, in your number of May 10th, seeks to leave upon the reader’s mind. The first is that whispering was first consid- ered by Professor Lehmann. It has been elab- orately discussed in the 8. P. R. Proceedings over and over again. Sidgwick’s 6-page discus- sion of it in the report of his own experiments is the basis of comparison used by Lehmann in his ampler but abortive investigation. The second of Professor Titchener’s implica- tions is that it was Lehmann who introduced number-habits, and even forced the admission of them on the recalcitrant Sidgwick. Lehmann makes no mention of number-habits. Sidgwick himself introduces them to account, not for the thought transference results, but for the many errors common to the guesses of his Subjects and May 26, 1899.] Lehmann’s; the two perhaps had the same number-habit. Does Professor Titchener seri- ously think that a number-habit in a guesser can account for the amount of coincidence be- tween the numbers which he guesses and those upon counters drawn at random out of a bag? Even in anti-telepathic Science accuracy of representation is required, and I am pleading not for telepathy, but only for accuracy. WILLIAM JAMES. ON THE WEHNELT CURRENT BREAKER, To THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: The following facts, noticed while experimenting with the Wehnelt electrolytic current breaker, may be not without interest : In order to test if the action of the breaker could be due to a spheriodal state, produced by the high temperature of the positive elec- trode, some means for measuring the tempera- ture of this electrode had to be obtained. For this purpose I used electrodes of fusible metals melting at different temperatures, the temperature of the electrode being neces- sarily less than that at which the alloy melts, if the latter remain unfused. In this way one can at least obtain the superior limit for the temperature of the electrode. Starting with a fusible alloy which melted at about 78° C., the electrode melted as soon as the circuit was closed. The next metal used melted at 96° C., and was fused an ap- preciable, though very short, time after the cur- rent was established. Finally, using an anode made of ametal which melted at 168° C., no in- dication of fusion of the electrode could be de- tected, even after the breaker had run for ten minutes at a time. This seems to show that the temperature of the electrode was far below 200°, the temperature necessary, at atmos- pheric pressure, for the production of the sphe- roidal state. The influence of self-induction on the action of the breaker was also studied, to some extent. Diminution of the self-induction in circuit di- minishes the period of the action, as is shown by the heightened pitch of the sound produced. But absence of all self-induction prevents wholly the working of the breaker. Thecell was used in a circuit composed of a storage battery, non- SCIENCE. risss) inductive electrolytic resistances and wires wound non-inductively. With this arrange- ment no interruption of the current could be produced, though the electromotive force was raised to thirty volts and the current to eighteen amperes. As soon, however, as a coil with self-induction was put in the circuit the action of the breaker recommenced. Induction in the circuit is essential to the action of this form of interrupter. Howarp McCLENAHAN,. PHYSICAL DEPARTMENT, PRINCETON UNIVERSITY. THERMODYNAMIC ACTION OF ‘STEAM-GAS.’ ONE of the most valuable papers recently published in the fields of applied science is that which has just been reprinted from the Revue de Mécanique of the last year, the work of Profes- sor Sinigagalia, a well-known author in that field.* This is the latest and, in many respects, the most complete discussion of a supremely impor- tant subject ; one to which the minds of men of science and engineers the world over are now again turning after a period of many years, during which the thermodynamic promise of gain in efficiency in the steam-engine through the conversion of a vapor into a gas by this process of superheating had been almost univer- sally believed to be more than counterbalanced by the very serious difficulties met in the earlier days in the attempt to profit by it. Changes have taken place during the last generation which are now thought by many authorities to have largely reduced the obstructions formerly seemingly fatal to a great thermodynamic ad- vance. In the practical thermodynamic operation of the steam-engine, as M. Bertrand has remarked, there is no such thing as ‘saturated vapor,’ as that term is customarily employed by the thermodynamists. The working fluid is always, in fact, a mixture of vapor and its liquid, ina *Application de la Surchauffe aux Machines 4 Va- peur par M. Francois Sinigaglia, Professeur agrégé des Ingénieurs de Naples; Ingénieur-Directeur de 1’ Association des Propriétaires d’Appareils 4 Vapeur dans les Province napolitaines. Extrait de la Revue de Mécanique (1897-98); Paris, V’ve Ch. Dunod, Edi- teur, 1898. 7TO4 state of instability as to quality. The investi- gations of the ‘théorie générique’ made by Ran- kine, Clausius, Zeuner and others resulted in establishment of no rational expressions for the actual heat-exchanges of the real, as distin- guished from the ideal, engine, and Hirn’s ‘théorié expérimentale,’ as developed by that great investigator and his disciples, is still the only resort of the student of the curious extra- thermodynamic processes accompanying the thermodynamic operation of the engine. Superheating has come to be looked upon, not as method of giving superior thermody- namic action, but as simply a provision for reduc- ing internal wastes due to heat-exchanges be- tween the steam and the metal surrounding it. Its effectiveness was recognized as early as Trevethick’s time (1828 or earlier) and became well understood about the middle of the cen- tury ; since which time numerous inventions have been made, looking to its utilization, few giving any promise of success. The Alsatian school has revealed very completely the method and the effect of its adoption, and it has come to be well understood that its province is simply to reduce that form of waste known as ‘initial condensation’ or ‘cylinder condensation.’ Its successful use would effect the suppression of those losses in such manner, in the words of Dwelshauvers-Dery, as to give maximum effi- ciency by securing the exhaust of the steam from the engine in the dry and saturated condi- tion. This is, in his opinion, the practical criterion of most perfect action. The actual gain has been found by Hirn to be, in several eases studied by him experimentally, from 20 to nearly 50 per cent., with a superheat amount- ing to from 210°C. to 245°C. The nearest ap- proximation yet reported to the ideal, purely thermodynamic, case has been effected by this means—particularly, of late, by Schmidt. The failures of the past have been due to difficulties in securing an apparatus which can- not be rapidly injured by excess of heat in presence of superheated vapor of water, and a system of lubrication of the cylinder and piston eapable of working satisfactorily at the tem- peratures attained in effective superheating. The latter obstacle is now overcome, largely, by the use of the high-test mineral oils ; the former SCIENCE, [N.S. VoL. LX. No. 230. remains a serious obstruction. The increasing steam-pressures of our day also reduce both the need and the availability of increasing super- heat. The results of successful superheating exhibit themselves both at the engine and at the boiler, and, as with multiple-cylinder engines, the gain at the boiler in economical employment of fuel is greater than that at the engine through a more perfect thermodynamic action; for the reduc- tion of the demand for steam at the engine re- sults in an increased economy in the produc- tion of such steam through the larger propor- tion of heating surface to weight of steam produced. Thus a gain of 20 per cent. at the engine may be accompanied by a gain of 22 per cent. or more in fuel as measured at the boiler. The desirable amount of superheat is that which will prevent the condensation of the vapor en- tering the steam-cylinder and insure its rejection as saturated vapor at exhaust. The apparatus employed by various inventors and investigators in this field, from 1850 to our own time is described at considerable length by M. Sinigaglia, and the results of experiment are recited. In many instances, recently, particu- larly, it is reported that no serious inconven- iences were met with in the application of this system ; in other cases much trouble and some- times serious accidents resulted, due to the ‘burning’ of the apparatus and its yielding, thus weakened, to the pressure. Messrs. Lud- wig and Weber obtained, in an extensive series of experiments in Alsace, some very encourag- ing figures. An average gain of 7.5 per cent., net, was secured by moderate superheat (44°C.). Messrs. Walther-Meunier, and Ludwig, later, reported a gain of 13 to 15 per cent. from a super- heat of somewhat greater amount. Schwoerer obtained a gain in efficiency of 15 to 18 per cent. by superheating 68°C. Hirsch reports similar figures from an equal amount of gasifica- tionin a marineapparatus. Schroeter obtained gains of 10 per cent. and more in a very elab- orate and detailed investigation, in which the superheat amounted to 60°C. The most re- markable results reported are those of Schmidt, who, by adopting an enormous portion of super- heating to heating surface (six to one), secureda superheat of 190°C., and at another time, witha May 26, 1899. ] comparatively smail apparatus, secured the highest record yet established. With another engine a gain in weight of steam supplied the engine amounting to nearly 40 per cent. was effected, and in weight of fuel 28 per cent ; the difference being due, obviously, to the fact that each unit-weight of steam carried an abnormal quantity of stored heat. Professor Sinigaglia concludes : 1. Superheating vapor is irrefutably proved to be the most effective system of reduction of internal wastes of heat in the steam-engine. 2. The higher the degree of superheating at- tainable, the nearer does the thermodynamic result approximate that indicated by pure theory and by the formulas of thermodynamics. 3. From the industrial point of view, it is necessary to note the gain, not at the engine, but in fuel demanded at the boiler, and the ap- paratus of vaporization and of gasification must be efficient and durable. 4. The final test is in the study of the finan- cial aspect of the operation. “Mais, aujourd’hui, les installations nom- breuses de |’ Alsace et del’ Allemagne ont donné des résultats si remarkables qu’on finira par vaincre les derniéres difficultés qui s’opposent 4 une application générale de Ja surchautffe aux machines 4 vapeur. Ce sera le meilleur hom- mage rendu A Hirn et 4 son école.’’ R. H. THursron. THE REMOVAL OF DR. WORTMAN TO THE CARNEGIE MUSEUM. Dr. J. L. WoRTMAN, of the American Museum of Natural History, has been called to take charge of the new collections of Vertebrate fossils in the Carnegie Museum at Pittsburgh, and has resigned his position in the American Museum in order to enter upon his new duties. The finest portions of the Cope collection of Fossil Mammals were made by Dr. Wortman previous to his connection with the Army Med- ical Museum in Washington. Since 1890 he has had charge of most of the parties sent out from the American Museum for Fossil Mammals and Reptiles and has conducted these explorations with extraordinary success. A very large part, therefore, of the collections in the Department SOIENCE. mer ( Or of Vertebrate Paleontology are due to the energy and intelligence of Dr. Wortman and his assistants in the field. His field work has been carried on almost exclusively during the summer months, and he has been occupied dur- ing the winters in the preparation of a series of bulletins based chiefly upon the field collections, many of which have attracted wide attention. Notable among these are the papers upon the Skeleton of Patriofelis, the Anatomy of Agrio- cherus, the revision of all the early species of horses, and a geological paper upon the Stra- tigraphy of. the White River Beds. The most important of his original contributions in the series is, however, that upon the ‘ Origin of the Sloths,’ based chiefly upon the fortunate dis- covery of the foot of Psittacotheriwum in the Torrejon beds of New Mexico. Dr. Wortman’s latest paper, now in press, is upon the Ancestry of the Dogs, in which he successfully demon- strates the direct phylogenetic relationship be- tween the Canide and of certain dog-like Creo- donts. Dr. Wortman’s services to the Museum are greatly appreciated and his resignation has been accepted with much regret. He carries with him the best wishes of his friends for his suc- cess in his new undertaking. EES OF SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. Proressor F. L. O. WApDsworTH has been appointed by the managers of the Western Pennsylvania University, Director of the Alle- gheny Observatory, succeeding in the position Professors Keeler and Langley. Professor Wadsworth has been connected with Yerkes Observatory since its opening and was pre- viously at the Astrophysical Observatory of the Smithsonian Institution. UNDER authority of the Secretary of the Treasury, the Superintendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey has effected a reorganization in that Bureau in such a way as to relieve the head of the Bureau of a certain amount of the routine work and to insure also a more direct supervision of the field work. The following officers have been appointed: Assistant Super- intendent, Mr. O. H. Tittman; Assistant in charge of the Office, Mr, Andrew Braid ; In- 706 spector of Field Work in Hydrography and Topography, Mr. H. G. Ogden; Inspector of Field Work in Geodesy, Mr. John F. Hayford ; Inspector of Field Work in Terrestrial Magnet- ism, Dr. L. A. Bauer. M. PRILLEUX, known for his researches on the parasitic diseases of plants, has been elected a member of the Section of Botany of the Paris Academy of Sciences. The other candidates nominated by the Section were MM. Bureau, Maxime, Cornu, Renault and Zeiller. THREE botanists—Professors E. Pfitzer, of Heidelberg ; O. Brefeld, of Mumster, and E. Warmung, of Copenhagen—have been elected corresponding members of the Berlin Academy of Sciences. Mr. W. H. PREECE, C.B., F.R.S., has ac- cepted the presidency of the 18th Congress of the Sanitary Institute, to be held in Southamp- ton from August 29th to September 2d. CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY has conferred the degree of Doctor in Science, honoris causa, on Alexander Kowalevsky, professor of zoology in the Imperial University, St. Petersburg. THE Prince of Monaco has been elected an honorary member of the Royal Geographical Society of London. Mr. Puirie THomAs MAIN, Fellow of St. Johns College, Cambridge, died on May 5th. He lectured on chemistry at St. John’s College and did much to promote the study of natural science in the College and in the University. He was also the author of a treatise on astronomy which has passed through several editions. Mr. Henry WILLIAM JACKSON, a retired sur- geon, died at Louth, Lincolnshire, on May 14th, aged 67 years. He founded the Lewisham and Blackheath Scientific Association and was in- terested in anthropology and astronomy, being a member of the London and Paris Anthropo- logical Societies and a Fellow of the Royal Astro- nomical Society: THROUGH some as yet unknown ‘accident,’ the annual appropriation for the N. Y. State Weather Service were stricken out of the appropriation bill, April 24th Jast, and it is thus apparently impossible to continue a series of observations, SCIENCE. [N. 8S. Von. IX. No. 230. meteorological and agricultural, that has been carried on without interruption for a genera- tion. In this service, which has its headquar- ters at Ithaca, in the College of Civil Engineer- ing, nearly 2,500 persons are engaged without cost to the State, including the Director of that College, who is also the Director of the Service. The work of the Bureau has been largely in the interests of the farmers of the State, and the compilation of weekly ‘Crop Bulletins,’ and the maintenance of a weather-signal station, which operates in conjunction with the U.S. Bureau at Washington, has been considered an important service to the whole Commonwealth. The minute appropriations hitherto made, but $4,500 per annum, by the great State of New York have been eprtirely inadequate to the op- portunities of the Bureau; but the volunteer labor of a corps whose services, if fully compen- sated, would amount to probably over a quarter of a million of dollars annually have gone far to make up for the defect. Even if re-estab- lished, this interruption for a single year will make a break in the files which can never be repaired and which may deprive the State of previously interested, and even enthusiastic, observers by so disheartening them that they will not resume their connection with the sys- tem; thus destroying stations having records of a length approximating thirty years. A MEETING was held on May 20th, at Co- lumbia University, for the purpose of discussing the formation of an American Physical Society, which would hold meetings in New York for the reading and discussion of papers. The meeting was called by the following committee of physicists, representing important American universities: Professor A. G. Webster, Clark University, Worcester; Professor J. S. Ames, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore ; Profes- sor E. L. Nichols, Cornell University, Ithaca ; Professor Carl Barus, Brown University, Provi- dence; Professor M. I. Pupin, Columbia Uni- versity, New York; Professor B. O. Peirce, Harvard University, Cambridge ; Professor W. F. Magie, Princeton University, Princeton. It is intended that the new organization shall be for this country what the Physical Society is for England and the Deutsche physikalische Gesell- schaft for Germany. May 26, 1899. | THE Council of the American Chemical So- ciety has authorized the establishment of a sec- tion to be known as the Philadelphia Section, with headquarters in Philadelphia, Pa., having a territory with a radius of sixty miles from the Philadelphia City Hall. THE foundation-stone of the extension of South Kensington Museum, henceforward_ to be known as the Victoria and Albert Museum, was laid by Queen Victoria on May 17th. Several members of the royal family, foreign diplomatists and members of both Houses of Parliament were among those attending. The Duke of Devonshire, the Home Secretary, and Mr. Akers-Douglas took a prominent part in the proceedings. The Prince of Wales assisted the Queen in the actual laying of the founda- tion-stone. A BILL has been introduced into the British Parliament for establishing a Department of Agriculture and other Industries and Technical Instruction in Ireland, and for other purposes -conected therewith. THE United States Civil Service Commission announces that applicants for the position of Inspector of Standards (Office of Standard Weights and Measures), U. 8. Coast and Geo- detic Survey (Treasury Department), at a salary of $3,000 per annum, will be permitted to file their applications as late as July 15, 1899, in- stead of June 1, 1899, as previously announced. Tue Examiners of the U. 8. Civil Service Examination for a ‘‘Sloyd Teacher’’ in the Indian Service (Dept. Interior) failed to find candidates, April 11th. The examination will now be held June 6th-7th and the successful applicant will receive 8600 per annum for teach- ing ‘‘ basket Sloyd’’ and carving. Mayor VAN WyckE, of New York, has signed the resolution of the Municipal Assembly pro- viding for the issue of $500,000 bonds to defray the expenses of removing the old reservoir from Bryant Park and building the foundations for the new library. The contract for the work will be let immediately by the Board of Esti- mate, and the work of tearing down the reser- voir will be begun as soon as practicable. AN anonymous gift of $25,000 has been made to Long Island College Hospital for the endow- SCIENCE. 757 ment of a fellowship in the department of pa thology. The gift is to be known as the Van Cott Fellowship, in honor of Dr. Joshua Van Cott, the director of the laboratory. THE French Chamber of Deputies has voted an annual appropriation of 92,000 fr. for the publication of the Photographic Atlas of the Stars. THE French Association for the Advancement of Science will meet at Boulogne on the 14th of September, 1899. As we have already stated, the British Association will meet at the same time at Dover, the meetings of the two Associa- tions having been arranged so as to provide for an exchange of hospitalities. THE Indian Plague Commission has returned to London and is continuing its meetings in that city. THE daily papers report that a letter from Andrée has been found on the northeast coast of Iceland and has been forwarded, as addressed, to Gothenburg, Sweden. AN exhibition is being arranged at The Hague to illustrate what was accomplished by the Netherlands prior to the present century in navigation, discoveries, trade and _ fisheries. Those in America who possess objects that might be useful for exhibition are requested to com- municate with the Honorary Secretary, Mr. G. P. Van Hecking Colenbrander, The Hague. WE learn from the London Times that the two royal gold medals of the Royal Geographical Society have this year been awarded to two Frenchmen, both of them distinguished explo- rers. Only one French explorer, Francis Gar- nier, has hitherto figured on the Society’s list of honors, and only one other Frenchman, Elisée Reclus. The founder’s medal has this year been awarded to Captain Binger, who in the years 1887-89 carried out an extensive series of explorations in the vast area included in the bend of the Niger. During these jour- neys Captain Binger explored much country previously unknown, took numerous astro- nomical observations on which to base a map of the region, and in other departments of geog- raphy did a great amount of work of high scientific value. The results of Captain Bin- ger’s explorations were published in 1892 in 758 two large volumes, with one large map and sev- eral smaller maps and sections and numerous valuable illustrations, which form the chief au- thority on the geography of the region with which they deal. The patron’s medal has been awarded to M. Foureau for his explorations in the Sahara during the last twelve years. In his journey to Insalah in 1890 he travelled over 1,500 miles and fixed the latitudes and longi- tudes of 35 places; in 1891 he penetrated far- ther into the Sahara than any other explorer since the Flatters mission, and determined the positions of 41 places; in 1893 he penetrated as far as the Tassili plateau ; in 1894-95 he again covered much new ground and made numerous astronomical observations to fix positions, be- sides making researches in physical geography, geology and botany ; in 1896 and in his present journey he contributed still further to geograph- ical knowledge. The whole comprises an amount of continuous scientific work under great difficulties which places M. Foureau in the first rank of African explorers. Few men have done so much to elucidate the topography and the physical geography of the Sahara. The Murchison award has been given to Mr. Albert Armitage for his valuable scientific observations and for his sledge journeys with Mr. Jackson in Franz Josef Land; the Gill memorial to the Hon. David Carnegie for his journey across the Western Australian desert from Coolgardie to Hall’s Creek and back by a different route, thus traversing the desert twice ; the Cuthbert Peek grant to Dr. Nathorst for his important scientific exploration of the Spitzbergen Islands and the seas between Spitzbergen and Green- land; the Back grant to Captain Sykes for his three journeys through Persia, during which he has made important corrections and additiors to the map of that country and done much to clear up the geography of Marco Polo. These honors will be awarded at the anniversary meeting of the Society on June 5th, and at the same time the American Ambassador will pre- sent to Sir John Murray the gold medal of the American Geographical Society for his valuable contributions to scientific geography. THE 30th annual meeting of the Iron and Steel Institute of Great Britain was opened on May 4th in the hall of the Institution of Civil SCIENCE, [N.S. Vou. 1X. No. 230. Engineers, Westminster. The chair was oc- cupied in the first instance by the retiring President, Mr. Edward P. Martin, who intro- duced his successor, Sir William Roberts-Aus- ten, who delivered the inaugural address. The report of the Council for the past year was read by the Secretary, Mr. Bennett H. Brough, and showed that during 1898 the number of mem- bers was increased by 98, the total number on the roll at the end of the year being 1,522. With 57 members elected at the present meeting the total numerical strength of the Institute was brought up to 1,579. To the list of honor- ary members the names of King Oscar II. of Sweden and Norway and Baron Gustav Tamm, Governor-General of Stockholm and President of the Association of Swedish Ironmasters, were added during the past year. The annual din- ner was held on the evening of May 4th, at which speeches were made by the Chairman, Sir William Roberts-Austen ; Mr. Horace Seymour, Deputy-Master of the Mint ; Sir William White, Director of Naval Construction ; Sir H. Bracken- bury, Director-General of Ordnance ; Professor Riicker, Lord Lister, Lord Strathcona, Mr. Preece and others. THE Sixth International Congress on Com- mercial Education opened at Venice on May 4th, under the presidency of Signor Pascolata. It will next meet at Paris on August 26, 1900. THE report of the Council presented at the seventieth anniversary meeting of the Zoolog- ical Society of London stated that the number of Fellows on December 31, 1898, was 3,185, showing an increase of 27 during the past year, and the number of Fellows on the roll was in excess of what it had been in any year since 1885. The total income during the past year had been £29,208, being £495 more than that of 1897, and £8,357 in excess of the average dur- ing the preceding ten years. The increase in the income was attributable to the larger amounts received for admission fees, composi- tions and subscriptions, and also to the aug- mentation of the miscellaneous receipts caused by a contribution of Mr. Walter Rothschild, M.P., towards the outlay on the new tortoise house, built in 1898. The ordinary expendi- ture of the Society for 1898 had amounted to MAY 26, 1899. ] £25,979, which was an increase of £649 over that for 1897. A sum of £3,718 had also been paid to extraordinary expenditure, having been devoted mainly to the construction of new buildings in the gardens and to the acquisition of a young male giraffe, which, although it ar- rived in apparently good health, did not, un- fortunately, live long in the gardens. After payment of the ordinary and extraordinary ex- penditure a balance of £1,584 had been carried forward. The number of visitors to the gar- dens in 1898 had been 710,848, being 6,707 less than the corresponding number in 1897, The number of animals living in the gardens on December 81st last was 2,656, of which 818 were mammals, 1,363 birds and 475 reptiles and batrachians. CoNnSUL-GENERAL HoLioway, of St. Peters_ burg, sends to the Department of State, under date of March 28, 1899, translation of an article from the ‘Novoe Vremia’ of the 17th instant, referring to the first trip of the new 10,000-ton ice boat recently built in England for the pur- pose of keeping the ports of St. Petersburg and Riga open during the winter months, as follows : The ice boat Ermak arrived at Cronstadt March 5th-17th. This boat was made after plans pre- pared by Admiral Makaroff and built in Eng- land. Owing to the fogs, it had to remain two days in Belt. Near Reval it met with very thick ice, but still continued moving at 7 knots per hour. Near Seskei it met with large fields of ice, from 9 to 10 feet above the water line. Here the Ermak could not move on; but, with the aid of its machinery, it ac- quired a swinging motion, and the water running out of a special apparatus in the boat melted the ice under the vessel, which moved on, dispersing the ice mountains. The ice boat presses on the ice with its prow; the screw that is under it lets out water, which softens the ice, and the movement of the screw makes the ice go under it and breaks it into rather small pieces. This ice boat has no keel and should, therefore, be subject to great rolling, but, in order to avoid this, there is a receptacle in the hull of the vessel, filled with water, which is arranged in such a way that the water does not allow the vessel to sway too much one side or the other, and keeps it in equilibrium. The SCIENCE. 709 boat was met at Cronstadt with great triumph and music. Hundreds of people went out to meet it, running alongside of it on the ice. The ice boat belongs as yet to the Ministry of Finance. It is at the same time a passenger boat, a freight boat and a tug boat. It can accommodate nineteen first- class passengers, for which it has a fine cabin, decorated with imperial portraits, with double windows, double illuminators, and a special ventilator, which lets warm air into the cabin. The walls are of oak. The boat is lighted by electricity. On March 31st the Consul-General adds: ‘‘ The new iceboat Hrmak left Cronstadt on the 25th of March and opened the port of Reval, plowing through from 16 to 18 feet of ice, releasing three commercial steamers that were frozen fast some distance from the shore. On the morning of March 27th the Ermak left Reval, clearing the way to the sea for four vessels. During the first four days of the Er- mak’s arrival at Russian ports she released. sixteen vessels from the ice and opened the way for them to proceed to sea.’’ UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. Mr. SAMUEL CuPPLEs has increased his gift of $150,000 for a building for Washington Uni- versity, St. Louis, to $250,000 for two buildings. Mr. MAXWELL SOMMERVILLE has presented to the University of Pennsylvania his collection of engraved gems and ethnological collections, said to be of the value of $600,000. THE Jewish Chronicle publishes full details of the bequests of Baroness de Hirsch. They amount in all to about $9,000,000, which is distributed chiefly among Hebrew charities throughout the world. The bequests include 7,000,000 fr. to the Teachers’ Training School of the Hebrew Alliance at Paris and 3,000,000: fr. for elementary education in Galicia. NECESSARY alterations are being made in the physical laboratory of Western Reserve Univer- sity in order to erect an observatory upon it. The University has recently received a gift of a ten-inch refractor made by Messrs. Warner and Swasey. Mr. Samuel Mather, the donor of the laboratory, has offered to bear the expense of mounting the instrument. 760 HARVARD University has recently received two collections of shells which are at present being made ready for exhibition. One of these, given to the University by the heirs of Warren Delano, was made by Mr. Ballestier at the be- ginning of the present century and consists of specimens from the East Indies. The other is a very complete collection of ‘American land shells made by Mr. E. Ellsworth Call. THE Committee of Birmingham University announced, on May 18th, that the conditions at- tached to Andrew Carnegie’s offer of $250,000 to the institution had been fulfilled, the sub- scriptions having reached $1,272,900. Mr. Chamberlain had also received a letter from the anonymous donor who had already given $187,- 500, offering an additional $62,500 if the pro- posed endowment is increased to $1,500,000. In view of the large increase in the number of students attending the Institute of Tech- nology at Darmstadt, the sum of 1,137,000 Marks has been appropriated to enlarge the buildings and 45,700 Marks for equipment. In addition to these improvements, an engineering laboratory will be erected at a cost of 270,000 Marks. OxFoRD and Cambridge Universities have offered to admit to the privileges of affiliation graduates of McGill University and all matricu- lated students who have completed two aca- demicai years of study at McGill and have passed the intermediate examination for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. These terms, if accepted by the McGill corporation, will permit an under- graduate who has passed the intermediate ex- amination to take his degree at Oxford or Cam- bridge in two years. A COMMISSION has been established to take charge of the relations between the City and the University of Paris. It consists of members of the Municipal Council and officers of the University, with M. Gréard, Vice-Rector of the University, as President. Dr. Hugo MUNsTERBERG, professor of psy- chology at Harvard University, will deliver the commencement address at the Women’s Col- lege of Baltimore, his subject being ‘The Rela- tion of Psychology to General Education.’ SCIENCE. (N.S. Vou. TX. No. 230. PROFESSOR ALFRED CoRNU, the eminent French physicist, has been appointed Rede lec- turer in Cambridge University for the coming year. PROFESSOR EpwARD H. KEISER, for the last fourteen years professor in chemistry at Bryn Mawr College, has accepted the professorship of chemistry in Washington University to sueceed Professor Charles R. Sanger, who has been ap- pointed to a position in the chemical depart- ment of Harvard University. Dr. Howarp AYRES, professor of biology in the University of Missouri, has been elected President of the University of Cincinnati. Dr. F. C. Ferry has been appointed assistant professor of mathematics, and Dr. W. Waidner instructor in physics, in Williams College. Dr. C. E. St. JoHN has been appointed pro- fessor of physics and astronomy in Oberlin College, and Dr. L. Dickson has been promoted to a professorship of mathematics in the Uni- versity of California. Dr. F. H. SArForD, instructor in mathe- matics at Harvard University, has been ap- pointed assistant professor of mathematics and mathematical physics at the University of Cin- cinnati to succeed Professor L. A. Bauer, whose appointment as Chief of the newly-established Division of Terrestrial Magnetism of the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey we announced last week. THE table at the biological laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor, provided for by the John D. Jones Scholarship of Columbia University, has been filled by the appointment of Mr. John C. Torrey. H. C. Surface, of Cornell University, has been chosen to be the first beneficiary of the Dyckman fund for biological research. Mr. Surface is well known for his work on the fishes of New York State. THE Babbot Fellowship of Vassar College has been awarded to Miss Anne Moore, assistant in biology. Miss Moore will spend next year in studying biology at Chicago University. Av the University of Berlin, Dr. S. Schwen- dener, professor of botany, has celebrated his 70th birthday, and Dr. H. Munk, professor of physiology, his 60th birthday. SCIENCE EDITORIAL CoMMITTEE: 8S. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WoopwARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THURSTON, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LEContTE, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; HENRY F. OsBORN, Paleontology ; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; 8S. H. ScupDER, Entomology; C. E. BressEy, N. L. BRITTON, Botany; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bowpitcu, Physiology; J. S. Brutinas, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- TON, J. W. PowELL, Anthropology. Fripay, JUNE 2, 1899. CONTENTS: ‘The International Catalogue of Scientific Literature —Second Conference (I): DR. CyRus ADLER.... 761 -Color- Weakness and Color-Blindness: DR. E. W. SCRIPTURMEstessscsscesssstanttinectseecscecsscastectntees T7 American Climatological Association: DR. GUY EUENS DIAS Wien scnnene sen anchoncscassacssnsenscenstusecencst 774 Scientific Books :— Some Smithsonian Publications: F. A. BATHER, Creighton’s Introductory Logic: DR. GEORGE Scientific Towrnals and Articles 2....cscceccseceveeeeeees 783 Societies and Academies :— American Physical Society: PROFESSOR A. G. WEBSTER. The Biological Society of Washing- ton: Dr. O. F. Cook. Geological Conference and Students’ Club of Harvard University > J. M. BouTWELL. The Academy of Science of St. Louis: PROFESSOR WILLIAM TRELEASE......... 784 Discussion and Correspondence :— The Telepathic Question: PROFESSOR E. B. MITCHENER rvcescsscersensscseoscsesesseceresctencsecess 787 Current Notes on Meteorology :— Climatic Changes on the Pacifie Coast; Wave Clouds; Recent Publications: R. DEC. WARD. 787 A Bryological Memorial Meeting.......1cccccceceeeseeees 788 Scientific Notes and News........ssreccccersccscesevsceccees 788 University and Educational News......1...61ccceeeeeeees 791 MSS. intended or publication and books, etc., intended for review should be sent to the responsible editor, Profes- -sor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson N. Y. THE INTERNATIONAL CATALOGUE OF SCI- ENTIFIC LITERATURE.—SECOND CONFERENCE. Ne In Scrence for August 6, 1897 I gave an account of the steps which led to the hold- ing of the first Conference on an Interna- tional Conference of Scientific Literature, and a somewhat detailed description of the Proceedings of the Conference.* At the invitation of the editor of Screncg, I shall describe below the work done since that time to reach a working plan for this most important undertaking. The first Conference, in July, 1896, had reached certain definite conclusions, which may be briefly stated as follows: (a) That it was desirable to publish a catalogue of scientific literature by means of some inter- national organization; (>) that the cata- logue was to be primarily for the scientific investigator ; (c) that papers were to be indexed according to subject-matter; (d) that the catalogue should comprise all pub- lished original contributions to science ;(e) that the catalogue be issued in the double form of slips and books. The Conference passed a resolution to the effect ‘that the Royal Society be requested to form a committee to study all questions re- lating to the Catalogue referred to it by the Conference, or remaining undecided at the close of the present sittings of the Confer- * The article was also published in separate form. 762 ence, and report thereon to the governments concerned.’’ It was also left to the Com- mittee ‘‘ to suggest such details as will ren- der the Catalogue of the greatest possible use to those unfamiliar with English.” In accordance with the terms of these resolutions, the Royal Society appointed, in November, 1896, a Committee, with Profes- sor Henry E. Armstrong as Chairman, which presented a report on March 30, 1898. This report consisted of a series of proposed regulations for the conduct of the Catalogue, a provisional financial statement, and schedules of the various sciences. Inas- much as this report formed, in a large meas- ure, the basis of the discussion and resolu- tions of the second Conference, it seems de- sirable to present an outline of its contents. Schedules of Classification. Authorized schedules are to be prepared for the several branches of science included in the Cata- logue; each of these to be indicated by a Roman capital letter known as the Regis- tration letter ; the division in each sched- ule to be indicated by numerical symbols called Registration numbers; when desi- rable, an alphabetical index of the several headings be appended to each schedule. Card Catalogue. For each communica- tion to be indexed at least one slip called Primary slip shall be prepared containing title entry, subject entry, registration sym- bols and significant words. These slips are to be prepared by the bureaus established in the various countries (regional bureaus), which will transmit them to the Central Bureau as rapidly as possible. When a primary slip bears more than one subject entry or registration number copies of secondary slips shall be prepared. Slips of standard size, stoutness and color are to be printed for issue to subscribers, each slip to be revised by an expert official of the Central Bureau. Book Catalogue. At determined regular ‘intervals the Central Bureau shall issue, in SCIENCE. [N. S. Von. IX. No. 231. book form, an author’s and subject index of the literature published within that period. This Book Catalogue shall be obtainable in parts corresponding to the several sciences or in divisions of such parts. After the first issue of the Book Catalogue the Com- mittee of Referees are to be consulted as to the desirability of making changes in the classification. International Council. This shall be con- stituted by one representative of each Re- gional Bureau and shall be the governing body of the Catalogue. It shall appoint its own Chairman and Secretary, and shall meet in London at least once in three years ; this Council is to be the supreme authority for all matters belonging to the Central Bureau, and is to report its doings to the Regional Bureaus. International Committee of Referees. The International Council shall appoint, for each science included in the Catalogue, five per- sons skilled in that science to form an In- ternational Committee of Referees. The members shall be appointed in such a way that one retires each year. These commit- tees shall be consulted by the Director of the Central Bureau on al] questions of classification not provided for by the regu- lations. The Central Bureau is to be composed of a paid staff, consisting of (1) a General Director, (2) for each branch of science a skilled assistant, (3) clerks. There is also to be a Consultation Committee, consisting of persons representing the several sciences: and residing in or near London. The next portion of the report is explana- tory of the schedules of classification. Itis expressly stated that the schedules are put forward as illustrations of feasible methods. of classifying the several sciences and not as: final or authoritative. A detailed account of the method of the work of the Central Bureau is given, which need not be entered upon here. JUNE 2, 1899.] Financial Statement. It is estimated that about 40,000 communications will have to be analyzed and indexed per annum. If there are on an average 3 analytical slips for each entry this would make 160,000 slips per annum, or about 530 for each working day. It is further estimated that the Book Catalogue will amount to 16 vol- umes per annum. Book Catalogue. The estimated cost of the Book Catalogue (counting an edition of 500 copies) is £5,450, which would be covered by a subscription to 350 sets at £1 per volume. Slips or Card Catalogue. If but a single or primary slip is considered the additional expense would be £3,076, and allowing £1,000 saving on printing the book it would require 130 complete subscriptions at £16 to cover this expense. If the full, or analytical-slip, catalogue be prepared 120,- 000 additional slips would have to be dealt with per annum and 171 institutions would have to pay £35 to cover the cost, which would, however, slightly reduce the cost of the primary slips. It would, of course, be provided that portions of the catalogue could be subscribed for separately. The following table furnishes a clear idea of the expenses and charges : SOIENCE. 163 to cover the expenditure, whereas if the Slip Catalogue were published as well the ex- penditure would probably be beyond the sum which can reasonably be expected to be raised. In view of this conclusion the Committee raises the question as to whether a pri- mary slip might not be sufficent, whether a monthly bulletin in book form would serve the purpose, or, should the entire Slip Cata- logue be desired, whether a ‘sustenation ’ fund could be raised to meet the difficulty. The need of a guarantee fund amounting to about £6,000 is also pointed out. The remainder of the report is taken up with the schedules, which cannot be dis- cussed here. Anticipating somewhat be- fore coming to the’ Conference, it may be well to mention that in November, 1898, the Committee issued a memorandum on the systems of classification and registration proposed. It is explained that the minute subdivision was adopted because if the cards accumulated several years the num- ber under each head might grow so large as to make it a work of great labor to search through them. Should the Card Catalogue be abandoned the number of divisions might be considerably reduced in the an- nual volumes, though it would be desirable Least remunerative) Average subscrip- Maximum subscrip- dost number of com- tion to single tion to single ao aD * \plete subscriptions. science. science. OD Book Catalogue (1,000 (0) NES) posocuacéaeg5ac000 £5,590 £350 LL On 10 £2 0 0 £16 Primary Slip Catalogue (200Kcopies))ea-sset---- 3,075 130 100 P76 15 Secondary Slip Cata- logue (200 copies)..... 5,992 171 25 0 AiO 35 £14,657 = £4 5 0 £8 5 0 £66. Less saving on use of | FINO PEl-c---cnsccsness * 1,000 _ | £13,657 The Committee expressed the opinion that if the Book Catalogue alone were pub- lished the subscription might be expected to retain them in the volumes ranging, over decimal periods, if such were published. System of Registration. — Each principal 764 SCIENCE, science is indicated by a letter. The divi- sions of each science are numbered. These divisions can be subdivided by the use of significant words or symbols. This plan is explained in detail and de- fended. As a further evidence that the Committee did not consider its schedules final it has issued a revised schedule of Physiology (Animal). THE CONFERENCE. The second Conference, which, like the first, was summoned by the British gov- ernment, was attended by the following delegates, many of whom had participated in the first Conference : Austria. Professor L. Boltzmann ( Kaiserliche Akad- emie der Wissenschaften, Vienna). Professor E. Weiss ( Kaiserliche Akademie der Wis- senschaften, Vienna). Belgium. Chevalier Descamps (Membre de ]’Acad. Royale de Belgique, Président de 1’Office Inter- national de Bibliographe, Brussels). M. Paul Otlet (Secrétaire-General de 1’ Office Inter- national de Bibliographie, Brussels). M. H. La Fontaine (Directeur de l’Office Interna- tional de Bibliographie, Brussels). France. Professor G. Darboux (Membre de I’Insti- tut de France). Dr. J. Deniker (Bibliothécaire du Muséum d’His- toire Naturelle). Professor E. Mascart (Membre de l’Institut de France). Germany. Professor Dr. Klein (Geheimer Regier- ungs-Rath, University of Gottingen). Hungary. Dr. August Heller (Librarian, Ungarische Akademie, Buda-Pesth). Dr. Theodore Duka (Member of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences). Japan. Professor Einosuke Yamaguchi (Imperial University of Kioto). Mexico. Seior Don Francisco de] Paso y Troncoso, Netherlands. Professor D. J. Korteweg (Universi- teit, Amsterdam). Norway. Dr. Jérgen Brunchorst (Secretary, Ber- genske Museum), Sweden. Dr. E. W. Dahlgren (Librarian, Kong]. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademie, Stockholm). Switzerland. Dr. Jean Henry Graf (President, Com- mission de la Bibliotheque Nationale Suisse. ) Dr. Jean Bernoulli (Librarian, Commission de la Bibliothcque Nationale Suisse). (N.S. Von. LX. No. 231. United Kingdom. Representing the Government : The Right Hon. Sir John E. Gorst, Q. C., M. P., F. R. 8. (Vice-President of the Committee of Council on Education). Representing the Royal Society of London : Professor Michael Foster, Sec. R. S. Professor Arthur W. Ricker, Sec. R.S. Professor H. E. Armstrong, F. R. 8. Sir J. Norman Lockyer, K. C. B., F. R. S. Dr. Ludwig Mond, F. R. 8S. United States. Dr. Cyrus Adler (Librarian, Smith- sonian Institution, Washington). Cape Colony. Roland Trimen, Esq., F. R. S. India. Lieut.-General Sir R. Strachey, G. C.S.L., Ty Rass Dr. W. T. Blanford, F. R. S. Natal. Sir Walter Peace, K.C. M. G. (Agent-Gen- eral for Natal). New Zealand. The Hon. W. P. Reaves (Agent-Gen- eral for New Zealand). Queensland. The Hon. Sir Horace Tozer, K. C. M. G. ( Agent-General for Queensland). The Conference met Tuesday, October 11, 1898, in the rooms of the Society of An- tiquaries (Burlington House) the rooms of the Royal Society not being available, as they were undergoing repairs. Sir John Gorst, President of the previous Conference took the chair, and on motion of Professor Darboux (France) was elected President. Professor Korteweg (Netherlands) was elected Secretary for the German language, M. La Fontaine (Belgium) for French, and Professor Armstrong for English. Three short-hand reporters, one for each language, assisted the Secretaries. Professor Michael Foster then stated that invitations to the Conference had been is- sued through the Foreign Office, and gave a list of the acceptances.* The Greek gov- ernment regreted that they were unable to appoint delegates; + the Russian govern- ment did ‘not consider it necessary to be represented by a spetial delegate.’ The Danish government took the same view, * List is given above. {+ The Russian government has since requested the appointment of a representative on the International Committee. JUNE 2, 1899.] being satisfied that it could follow the mat- ter from the verbatim reports issued. The German government, ou October 4th, re- quested a postponement owing to the diffi- culty of appointing delegates, but it was not possible to arrange for this. Professor Klein, of Gottingen, representing Germany, arrived the second day of the Conference. The time of meeting was then arranged and a resolution agreed to ‘That each dele- gate shall have a vote in deciding all ques- tions brought before the Conference,’ it being understood that the decisions of the Conference did not bind the respective gov- ernments. It was further agreed that Eng- lish, German and French be the official languages of the Conference, but that any delegate might employ any other language, provided he supply a written translation into one of the official languages. Professor Foster then formally laid before the Conference, on behalf of the Royal So- ciety, the report summarized above, and Professor Riicker, in explaining the report, gave it as his opinion that the secondary cards entailed too great an expenditure and should be given up. Dr. Deniker (France) thought the question to be discussed was whether it was better to publish the Cata- logue in the form of volumes or cards. Professor Darboux was opposed to giving up ecards which rendered great service to scholars. He thought it best to discuss the scientific questions first and leave this mat- ter to the body which would be charged with the actual workings of the Catalogue. M. Otlet (Belgium) considered that the order of subjects was threefold: (1) scien- tific, (2) technical—relative to the method of employing the cards, and (3) financial. Dr. Graf (Switzerland) dissented, holding that the matter should be taken up in the order indicated by the Royal Society, inas- much as the financial questions depended upon whether the Catalogue should be is- sued in both book and card form. He added SCIENCE. 765 that his government had given him in- structions to advocate the double form. Dr. Heller (Hungary) also expressed himself in favor of the double form. Dr. Brunchorst (Norway) agreed in principle, but thought at the beginning the Catalogue could only be issued in book form. Profes- sor Boltzmann (Austria) thought that for the present only the book form and primary slips were feasible. Professor Darboux pointed out that it was at least necessary for the various Bu- reaus to prepare the Catalogue in slip form and send it to London. The financial question was: Could this Card Catalogue be published? If it could it would be done ; if not it could be consulted in London. Dr. Adler pointed out that if the com- plete Card Catalogue were published the subscription fee would by no means cover the entire cost to a library ; an additional sum for furniture to provide for it, as well as for the arrangement and care would have to be taken into account, as well as the space required, making the total cost of the whole Catalogue and its maintenance to each institution subscribing about £200 per annum. Dr. Deniker thought the statement as to the space, cost, etc., exaggerated, and for- mulated the proposition: ‘‘ The Conference decides in principle for the publication of the Catalogue in the double form of vol- umes and cards ;’’ after further discussion this resolution was agreed to. The report of the Committee of the Royal Society was then taken up seriatim and it was agreed after a brief discussion as to the form ‘ That schedules of classification shall be authorized for the several branches of science which it is decided to include in the Catalogue.’ Professor Foster then moved that ‘‘ Each of the sciences for which a separate schedule of classification is provided be indicated by a Roman capital letter (hereafter called 766 a registration letter) as a registration sym- bol, namely, as follows: A. Mathematics. B. Astronomy. C. Meteorology. D. Physics. KE. Crystallography. I. Chemistry. G. Mineralogy. H. Geology (including Petrology). J. Geography. K. Paleontology. L. Zoology (including Anatomy). M. Botany. N. Physiology (including Pharmacology and Experi- mental Pathology). O. Bacteriology. P. Psychology. Q. Anthropology.” Dr. Bernoulli (Switzerland) pointed out that the plan of dividing the Natural History sciences into several groups was a departure from systems already in exist- ence. Dr. Heller (Hungary) did not entirely agree as to the wisdom of the division; he pointed out that in the course of years cer- tain institutions and publications had grown up which treated several of the subjects named. Under this plan the publications would be entirely separated. If, however, this was necessary he would advocate a still further division and suggested the separa- tion of Anatomy from Zoology. Professor Weiss (Austria) suggested that the question be divided, first, as to whether registration letters be used, and second, how the several sciences should be arranged among them. This being agreed to, the original proposition was withdrawn. Professor Darboux pointed out that in the list of sciences Geography was given, whereas it was his understanding that the first Conference intended to include. only mathematical and physical geography. Professor Weiss indicated the difficulty in agreeing upon an absolutely definite list, due partly to the different development SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 231. some of the sciences had taken in England and on the Continent. The specialists of the Vienna Academy had suggested that human anatomy should be separated from zoology. No doubt similar suggestions would come from other countries on special points. He, therefore, advised that a small commission be formed by the Royal Society which might consult various specialists and secure a coordinated scheme. Dr. Deniker thought too much stress was being laid on the matter. It was his opin- ion that if Pharmacology were to be in- troduced it should be as a separate science, with a special letter, pointing out at the same time that it was an applied science and not in accordance with the original program, which was to include only pure science. M. Otlet propounded several questions in the hope of eliciting information as to how the work of the Committee had been done, and M. Darboux pointed out that the science of Mechanics was put down as a sec- tion of Physics. He considered Mechanics a fundamental science and thought it should have an independent section. Professor Armstrong stated in reply that practical considerations had come into play. For each separate science a separate series of boxes would have to be kept, and they provided as many letters as they thought separate boxes would be required. The separate letters were prepared purely for office purposes. The scheme of Geography was, he admitted, purely from the English point of view. The Committee had no communication with foreign academies, but consulted individuals. It desired, how- ever, that foreign individuals and academies should have the opportunity of examining the schedules. Professor Michael Foster stated that the sub-committee which drew up the schedule for Physiology put itself in communication with distinguished and practiced physiologists in other lands, and JUNE 2, 1899. ] that they were now attempting to put the schedule into practical use. He added for the whole Committee that they did not maintain the schedules in their entirety. Professor Armstrong pointed out that the introduction of a special science like Me- chanics was contemplated and was entirely possible under the scheme. He quoted the following from the report: ‘‘ It will be neces- sary to provide a separate volume, to be sold apart, for each science to be distin- guished by a registration letter; and in some sciences, Zoology in particular, there will, doubtless, be a demand for separate volumes dealing with special sections of a science.” ‘‘The extent to which the sub- division of the Book Catalogue into parts is carried will necessarily depend on the de- mand arising in practice.” Mr. Otlet thought that the matter had been somewhat cleared up and favored the subdivision referred to. Anthropology, he said, comprehended nearly all the sciences not included in the other sciences—such as theology, anthropometry, questions rela- tive to the various human races, their in- dustrial occupations, ete.—-the concomitant subjects would be nourishment, and hence agriculture, costume, hunting, navigation, etc. Under communication of ideas gram- mar and the sciences connected with it would come in history, religion, supersti- tion, sociology, slavery, social organiza- tions, all of which would have to be con- sidered. M. Korteweg said that the subdivision of sciences would also create great difficul- ties; he favored the exclusion of Political Geography. Professor Darboux said that he was in practical accord with what had been said, but still thought that Mechanics should form a separate class. Dr. Graf de- sired that Anatomy be separated from Zoology and be placed in a separate class. Dr. Boltzmann suggested that the first class be General Science. Meteorology, he SCIENCE. 767 thought, should be connected with Physical Geography. Chemistry should stand be- tween Crystallography and Mineralogy. Anatomy should be in a separate class. The questions raised concerning Mechanics and Anthropology were of great importance, but he thought that the Conference was not ripe for their solution. Professor Armstrong said that the ques- tion raised about Mechanics was a practical one, whereas the definition of the limits of Geography and Anthropology was a scien- tific matter, and suggested that the latter be dealt with first. Dr. Heller suggested, instead of the term Geography, that of Geo-Physics ; this would include physical geography and meteorol- ogy and exclude political geography. He thought, too, that experimental psychology might be included under Anthropology. Professor Armstrong, to bring the discus- sion to a conclusion, moved that Geography be- limited to mathematical and physical geography, to the exclusion of political and general geography. In doing so he pointed out, however, that this action might lead to the Geographical Catalogue, being of no use to the general geographical stu- dent and not being subscribed for. Dr. Adler stated that travels were of great importance to naturalists and anthro- pologists and had been included in the Bib- liography published by the German Geo- graphical Society. Dr. Duka also favored their retention, but Dr. Mond dissented, holding that this view deviated from the original intention of the Catalogue. The motion to limit the scope of Geography as above stated finally prevailed. After a brief discussion by Professors Armstrong, Boltzmann, Darboux and Deni- ker, a resolution was adopted that after Zoology, Anatomy be entered on the list as a separate subject. The following resolution was then unani- mously agreed to: 768 SCIENCE. LN. &. Von. IX. No. 231. “Tt is proposed that a separate schedule be pro- vided for each of the following branches of science : Mathematics, Astronomy, Meteorology, Physics, Crystallography, Chemistry, Mineralogy, Geology (including Petrology), Geography (Mathematical and Physical, excluding Political and General) Pale- ontology, Anatomy, Zoology Botany, Physiology (in- eluding Pharmacology and Experimental Pathology ), Bacteriology, Psychology and Anthropology.” The next question taken up was that of the Registration Symbols. Professor Dar- boux objected to voting on a resolution naming specifically the letters for each sci- ence. He thought that it was a detail of execution and would change the character of the Conference if matters of such sec- ondary importance were discussed. Professor Armstrong, in accordance with this suggestion, presented a motion as fol- lows: ‘That each of the sciences, for which a separate schedule of classification is provided, shall be indicated by a symbol.” Professor Korteweg thought that the ques- tion involved that of many different sys- tems of classifications and various schemes of symbols, but Professor Armstrong pointed out, in reply, that if the resolution passed it would not bind the bureau to any particular symbols. M. Deniker thought that the question did not have the importance attrib- uted to it—that the symbols were simply a practical scheme for securing order in the publication and handling of the cards. M. Otlet was inclined to lay more stress on the question ; he thought they were not simply a matter for the convenience of the clerks, but would become useful to librarians and scientific men. The resolution was then adopted. The next question taken up was the regu- lations concerning the preparation of the cards or slips. These regulations refer not to the Catalogue itself so much as to the preparation of the Catalogue. Professor Foster moved that, ‘“‘ For each communica- tion to be indexed, at least one slip, to be called a ‘Primary slip,’ shall be prepared, on which shall be either printed, or type- written, or legibly hand-written in Roman script: Title entries, the author’s name,. and the full title of the communication in the original language alone if the language be either English or French, German or Latin.”’ In the case of other languages the title shall be translated into English, or such other of the above four languages as may be determined by the Regional Bureau concerned ; but in such case the original title shall be added when the language is one which can be conveniently printed. Professor Foster presented this with an amendment to the effect that Italian should be added to the languages named. Dr. Brunchorst thought it best to have but three languages and omit Latin and Italian, holding that there were very few publications in Latin and that its introduc- tion was not important. He further made the interesting statement that within a few years the Latin language will have disap- peared from use in Norway, and that there would probably be no public school in Nor- way in which Latin could be studied. Pro- fessor Rucker stated that, although the title of a paper might be given in Latin, it did not follow that the subject-entry should be in that language. Professor Foster added that Latin was introduced chiefly in the in- terest of zoologists. Mr. Triman, delegate from Cape Colony, thought it important: to retain it. Dr. Adler held that every title should be given in the language in which the paper is written, without any ex- ception whatsoever. Professors Foster and Armstrong both pointed out that some translation of titles was necessary, but Dr. Adler stated that,while translations of titles might be given when necessary, the original title should also be given, either in the original character or in a transliteration. It was agreed to omit Italian but retain Latin, and the first part of the resolution was then carried. JUNE 2, 1899. ] The next proposition under discussion was as follows: ‘In the case of other Jan- guages the title shall be translated into English, or such other of the above five languages as may be determined by the Regional Bureau concerned, but in such ease the original title shall be added when the language is one which can be conven- iently printed.” Dr. Adler suggested that instead of the last phrase the resolution shall read : ‘“ In ‘such cases the original title shall be added ; if convenient it shall be printed in the original script, otherwise in Roman script.” Professor Foster inquired of the Japanese delegate whether the Japanese language could be conveniently written in Roman Script and whether educated Japanese could read transliterations of Japanese, and re- ceived an affirmative reply. The amend- ment was then unanimously agreed to. The question arose in connection with this matter as to the meaning of the term ‘regional bureau,’ and Professor Rucker explained that it had been decided to em- ploy this term instead of the word ‘ Na- tional’ because it might happen that one nation, as, for instance, the British Empire, may have more than one bureau, whereas some of the smaller countries, like Holland and Belgium, might unite in a single bureau. If there was any objection, he said, to ‘ re- gional,’ the term ‘ Collecting Bureau’ might be employed. M. Otlet desired to add to the resolution the phrase‘ to diminish the number of necessary translations,’ which he pointed out as being extremely desirable, but the President thought this question might be more conveniently raised at a later stage. The entire resolution as amended was then carried. Professor Foster then moved that ‘‘the title shall be followed by every necessary refer- ence, including the year of publication, and -such other symbols as may be determined.” SCIENCE. 769 The next resolution was “‘ Subject- entries, indicating, as briefly as possible, the par- ticular subjects to which the communica- tion refers. Every effort shall be made to restrict the number of these subject-eutries. Such subject-entries shall be given only in the original language of the communica- tion if this be one of the five previously referred to, but in other cases in English, or in such other language as has been used in translating the title.” M. LaFontaine pointed out what seemed to him certain inconsistencies in subject- , entries presented in the schedules, and thought that the idea of the subject-entries was not fully understood, but both Pro- fessors Foster and Armstrong combatted this idea. Dr. Adler pointed out the diffi- culty of grouping the subject-entries satis- factorily in view of the fact that the analysis could be made in five languages, but Pro- fessor Rucker explained that the alphabet- ical arrangement would be according to English words. Chevalier Descamps stated that the book issue would require the repetition of titles, and that on the whole it would be more eco- nomical to repeat them entire. To this suggestion Professor Armstrong agreed, pointing out that its necessity had been recognized by the Committee. M. Deniker inquired as to the relative value of the terms subject-entry and catch- word. Was the subject-entry to be sub- ordinated to the significant word, or vice Professor Foster explained that the subject-entry was to give ap idea what the paper was about, the symbols to aid in keeping the Card Catalogue in order, and the significant words to aid the student who did not carry the symbol in his mind. M. Deniker replied that it was now clear to him that what was proposed was not simply a catalogue, but an analysis. What limits he asked, would be imposed. Thus four or five subject-entries might be given versa ? 770 in describing a single memoir. While recognizing the usefulness of these, he thought some limit would have to be con- sidered. Professor Foster replied that for three years past the Royal Society had requested each author to give an analysis of his paper in such form that it might serve as a sub- ject-index, and that in a large majority of cases it had been found possible to limit the analysis to three subject-entries. Professor Rucker pointed out that signifi- cant words would serve as a sort of tempo- rary expedient where a sudden interest sprang up in some new discovery, instancing the Rontgen rays. After some further discus- sion the resolution as to subject-entries was carried unanimously (the Belgian dele- gates abstaining from voting). Professor Armstrong then moved that “registration symbols, in accordance with those in the schedules of classification, shall be entered upon the slips in some conspic- uous manner, and upon a uniform plan.” He explained that at the first Conference schedules in accordance with the decimal system had been prepared and submitted, and that the Conference had decided against them. The plan now proposed is distinctly not the Dewey system. The figures given have no absolute value, and are solely for the purpose of enabling librarians to sort the cards and arrange the material. This point was emphasized by Professor Rucker, who stated that in a system in which the numbers had an absolute value the method was equivalent to starting a new language, and he did not believe that the average scientific man would learn a language for such a purpose. Chevalier Descamps addressed himself to the question of classification. He recognized the serious attention which had been given to the subject by the Royal Society, but said that the Society was not the first to take up the study which had been pursued by a large SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No, 231- number of authors, men of science and practical men. To provoke a general de- bate on classification seemed inopportune. He had pointed out in 1896 the pos- sibility of a bibliographical classification based on the decimal system. This did not: meet with favor, and the Royal Society had endeavored to produce a purely scientific classification. For its labors it merited the most profound recognition, but he regretted. that the Royal Society had not explained the ideas which underlay its schedules. To. be good a_ bibliographical classification should be both stable and elastic. The adoption of a mixed system of symbols, and more especially the lack of identity of meaning of the same symbols in the differ- ent sciences, seemed regrettable. He saw no objection to giving symbols a definite signifi- cance. The statement of Chevalier Descamps (of which the above is but a brief abstract) brought from Professsor Riicker an argu- ment which probably expressed the opinion of most of the scientific men present, and is accordingly given in full : “TY think it would be desirable if I say a few words with regard to the very interest- ing remarks with which Chevalier Descamps has favored us. I think we must all agree that the questions he has raised are ques- tions of the greatest interest to any one who has attempted to take any share in a work of this sort. But I very much regret, speaking for myself, that I find myself at variance with him on several fundamental points. In the first place, he urges us to adopt the scientific system of classification, which shall not change from five years to: five years, or ten years to ten years, but which shall hold good for all time, or for a very long period of time. One of the very great advantages of our system is that we recognize that science is a growing subject. The notation that fits it to-day will not fit it next year, or ten years hence. Let us JUNE 2, 1899. ] suppose scientific knowledge had sooner led us to recognize the close relation of elec- tricity and light. Surely the mode of di- vision would be quite different. The defi- nition of Zoology before and after Darwin would have been different. A classification which then appeared to be scientific would now be recognized as inadequate. The very first thing we must recognize is that our scientific knowledge is imperfect and grow- ing, and we must adopt a system capable of easy modification as our knowledge in- creases. Another point which Chevalier Descamps made was that we adopt different methods with regard to different sciences ; in some cases the numbers are followed by symbols ; in some cases the numbers are separated by a hyphen, and soon. We have gone into this question as scientific men, and, although perfectly ready to submit the result of our work to the criticism of other scientific men, we do believe that the plan that suits best one science will not suit an- other. Take one example. Take, for in- stance, Zoology. There is the question of arrangement of the subject in accordance | with the species of animals, and the question of arrangement with regard to the geographical distribution. Here are two ideas to which there is nothing similar in physics or chemistry. It would be disastrous if we attempt to force all these sciences to adopt the same method. If two things are essentially different, we do not apply the same principles to both. In the last place, Chevalier Descamps says the main object of classification is to tell us where to find a particular object with which we are dealing. I do not much believe in the average memory of scientific men being able to grasp a large number of numbers. I believe it is much easier to find the place by using symbols, which are more distinct than a large number is from a small one. Significant words which are for temporary use have their own meaning. You find them SCIENCE. 7 ca | alphabetically. I do think, on the question of general principle, thatit is very desirable that the Conference should express an opinion as to whether or not they think the symbols are to be devised in such a way as to help the memory or to find the place ; secondly, whether they do or do not hold the view that the plan good for one science is good for all, and whether it is desirable to attempt to plan a scheme in the belief that it will hold good for all time.” Dr. Bernoulli said that after hearing the statements in favor of the two systems he wished to add that the decimal system was in actual working order in Switzerland, and that its practical utility had been demon- strated there. He considered it superior to the system proposed by the Royal So- ciety, although originally he had been an opponent of the decimal system. M. Deniker replied that it was necessary to consult an alphabetic index to use the decimal-system catalogue. He favored a methodical or subject catalogue alphabet- ically arranged. Cyrus ADLER. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. (To be Concluded.) COLOR-WEAKNESS AND COLOR-BLINDNESS. Ir is generally accepted as a well estab- lished fact that the traveling public is fully protected by the present tests for color-blind- ness to which railway employees and pilots are subjected. Yetseveral of the mysterious accidents that have occurred during the last two years might be explained on the supposition of color-blindness on the part of responsible lookouts. In fact, I believe myself in position to prove that persons of dangerously defective color-vision actually do pass the regular tests and obtain posi- tions where their defects are continual dangers to public welfare. In the first place, I have at the present time among my students one who is abso- 172 SCIENCE. lutely perfect at the wool-test. He can match wools with incredible precision at any distance away; he is, nevertheless, color-blind. This case is typical of a class of persons with eyes abnormally acute for differences in color, but yet with only two fundamental sensations instead of three. In the second place, I have had among my students those who possessed perfect color-vision for near objects or bright ob- jects, but who were practically color-blind for weakly illuminated or distant objects. These persons possess the typical three fundamental color sensations, but have one of them weaker than the normal. A per- son of this kind may pass the wool-test with the utmost perfection if the test is performed close by, but will fail if the wools are removed to a distance of 20 or 30 feet. This peculiar defect I take the liberty of terming ‘ color-weakness.’ The first stu- dent of this kind that I examined passed the wool-test close at hand and yet was un- able to distinguish red and green lanterns a few hundred yards away. Cases similar to this have been reported by the British Marine Examiner, Edridge-Green. Among other cases he quotes a letter from an engi- neer containing the following statement: ““T have been on the railway for thirty years and I can tell you the card-tests and wool-tests are not a bit of good. Why, sir, T had a mate that passed them all, but we had to pitch into another train over it. He couldn’t tell a red from a green light at night in a bit of a fog.”’ To eliminate both these classes of persons we must have a method of testing on quite different principles from the usual ones. In the first place, the sorting of Celicate shades of colors, according to likeness, must be replaced by naming certain fundamental and familiar colors. The sorting of wools is a quite unusual and perplexing task to a man brought up in a railway yard and on shipboard. It putsa nervous man at quite (N.S. Von. IX. No. 231. a disadvantage; it furnishes the unsuc- cessful candidate with the excuse that the judgment required was so unlike any he had made before that he failed from nervous- ness; and, finally, itis not a guarantee that all who pass are not color-blind. The nam- ing of colors should—as Donders proposed —-be rigidly required. The engineer or the pilot in his daily routine is not called upon to match colors, but to decide whether a light is red, green or white; he should be tested on just this point. The color-blind student referred to above who can pass the wool-test to perfection fails at once when called upon to name the wools. The nam- ing of delicate and perhaps unusual shades should, however, not be required; the colors to be named should be the three fa- miliar ones: red, green and white, so manipulated that every possible chance for confusion is presented. The second necessity for eliminating danger is that of an absolutely certain test which shall detect both the color-blind and the color-weak. Acting on the basis of suggestions from the work of Donders and of Edridge-Green, I have devised a test that meets this requirement as well as the first one. The instrument * which I have invented may be termed the ‘color sight tester’ or the ‘ color sense tester.’ In general appear- ance it resembles an ophthalmoscope. On the side toward the person tested, Fig. 1, there are three windows of glass, numbered 1,2 and 3, respectively. The opposite side of the tester, Fig. 2, consists of a movable disk carrying twelve glasses of different colors. As this disk is turned by the finger of the operator the various colors appear behind the three windows. At each movement of the disk the subject calls off the colors seen * For those interested in obtaining the Color-Sight Tester I will say that I have made arrangements to have it made by the Chicago Laboratory Supply and Scale Co., Chicago. JUNE 2, 1899. ] at the windows. The windows, 1, 2 and 3, are, however, fitted with gray glasses. No. 1 carries a very dark smoked glass; all colors seen through it will be dark. No. 2 carries a piece of ground glass, showing all colors in full brightness. No. 3 carries a light smoked glass. There are thus thirty- six possible combinations of the colors. The twelve glasses are, however, mainly reds, greens and grays. A suitable arrangement of the colors Fig. 1. gives direct simultaneous comparisons of reds, greens and grays of different shades. The well-known confusion by color-blind persons of dark greens with reds, greens with gray, etc., are exactly imitated, and the instrument gives a decisive test for color-blindness. Its peculiar advantage, however, lies in the fact that it presents SCIENCE. 713 reds, greens and grays simultaneously in a large number of different shades of inten- sity. The light of a green lantern, at dif- ferent distances or in a fog, is simulated by the green behind the different grays ; at the same time a white light is also changed. The color-weak person to whom weak green is the same as gray (white at a distance) is utterly confused and thinks that the weak- ened green is gray (white) and the dark gray is green. Fie. 2. The actual test is performed in the fol- lowing manner. The tester is held toward a window, at about 25 feet from the person tested. The operator begins with any chance position of the glasses, and asks the person tested to tell the colors seen through the three glasses, Nos. 1, 2 and 3. He an- swers, forexample: ‘‘ No. lis dark red; No. 774 SCIENCE, 2 is gray; No. 3 is green.’’? The operator records from the back of the tester the let- ters indicating what glasses were actually used. If he finds that A, D and G were opposite the glasses Nos. 1, 2 and 3 he records: A 1, dark red; D 2, gray; G 3, green. The disk is then turned to some other position ; the colors are again named, aud the operator records the names used. For example, the result might be: “No. 1 is dark green ; No. 2 is white; No. 3 is red ;”’ and the record would read: G 1, dark green; J 2, white; A 3, red. Still another record might give: J 1, dark gray; A 2, red; D 3, medium gray. Similar records are made for all combinations. Of course, the person tested knows nothing concerning the records made. A comparison with a list of the true colors for each position de- termines whether the test has been passed or not. The three records just cited were all ob- tained from the red glass, A ; the gray glass, D; the green glass, G, and the ground glass, J,in combination with the dark gray, No.1; the ground glass, No. 2, and the medium gray, No. 8. Those familiar with color- blindness will notice that these combina- tions place side by side the colors most con- fused. The records can be taken by any one, and, on the supposition that the record has been honestly obtained and that the instru- ment has not been tampered with after leaving the central office, the comparison is mechanical. There is none of the skillful manipulation required in the wool-test and ' none of the uncertainty attaching to its re- sults. The only instruction given to the subject is: ‘* Name the colors ;” the results render the decision with mechanical cer- tainty. One of the testers is in use on one of the English railways, another on the central division of the New York Central Railroad. From the former I have not yet heard, but (N.S. Vou. 1X. No. 231. the examiner on the latter reports that since using the tester he has found men who get through the wool-test, but are caught by the tester. On the other hand, he states that ‘ the men examined say that this test is more like the signals they are used to seeing every day on the road, and is, therefore, fairer than to ask them to pick out a lot of delicately tinted pieces of yarn.” An experience of several years seems to justify the following claims for the color- sense tester: 1. It detects with unerring precision both the color-blind and the color-weak. 2. It is a perfectly fair test for the men concerned and injures no man by requiring an unfamiliar judgment. 3. It requires but a very small fraction of the time used on the wool-test. 4, Its decisions are self-evident and un- questionable. E. W. Scripture. PSYCHOLOGICAL LABORATORY, YALE UNIVERSITY, May 7, 1899. AMERICAN CLIMATOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION. Tuesixteenth annual meeting of the Amer- ican Climatological Association was held in New York City on May 9th and 10th at the hall of the New York Academy of Med- icine. About fifty members were in attend- ance from all portions of the United States. Twenty-five papers were read upon subjects pertaining to climatology, hydrology and diseases of the respiratory and circulatory organs. These papers, which will appear in the annual volume of the Transactions, were as follows: ‘Presidential Address,’ by Dr. Beverley Robinson, ~ of New York. ‘Treatment of Consumption by Air and Light in Colorado,’ by Dr. Charles F. Gardiner, of Colorado Springs. ‘Tntermediate Altitude for the Consumptive,’ by Dr. B. P. Anderson, of Colorado Springs. JUNE 2, 1899. ] ‘The Contagiousness of Phthisis Pulmonalis,’ by Dr. E. L. Shurly, of Detroit. ‘Climate in Relation to Renal Disease,’ by Dr. J. B. Walker, of Philadelphia. ‘Climate as it affects the Skin and its Diseases,’ by Dr. L. D. Bulkley, of New York. ‘Hygienics of the Skin,’ by Dr. L. D. Judd, of Philadelphia. ‘Hydrotheraphy in the Treatment of Insomnia,’ by Dr. Irwin H. Hance, of Lakewood. ‘Altitude and Heart Disease,’ with report of cases, by Dr. R. H. Babcock, of Chicago. ‘Prognosis in Chronic Valvular Affections of the Heart,’ by N. 8. Davis, Jr., of Chicago. ‘Treatment of the Cardiac Asthenia of Pneu- monia,’ by Dr. H. L. Elsner, of Syracuse. ‘Empyema from a Surgical Standpoint,’ by Dr. Johh C. Munro, of Boston. ‘Traumatic Rupture of the Heart, without Pene- tration of the Chest Wall,’ with a case, by Dr. Richard C. Newton, of Montclair. ‘Cold Wave of February, 1899,’ by Dr. Guy Hins- dale, of Philadelphia. Other papers by Drs. R. G. Curtin, C. F. MceGahan, Harold Williams, F. H. Williams, E. O. Otis and V. Y. Bowditch, S. G. Bonney and H. 8. Anders. The annual dinner of the Association was held at the Manhattan Hotel, at which the President, Dr. Beverley Robinson, of New York, presided. On the following day the Association made a visit to the Loomis Sanitarium in Liberty, Sullivan County, New York. This institution was founded 1895 in memory of Dr. Alfred L. Loomis, the first President of the Association, for the treatment of tuberculosis. It has a favorable situation, 2,300 feet above tide, and is 120 miles from New York, on the Ontario and Western Railway. The re- markable success which has attended its work has been due in great measure to its physician in charge, Dr. J. E. Stubbert, liberally aided by the philanthropic support of Mr. J. Pierpont Morgan and the ladies who are associated in its management. The scientific work of the Climatological Association tends to the better knowledge of the various American climates and health resorts and their employment in the treat- ment of disease. SCIENCE, 775 The subject of tuberculosis is now re- ceiving universal attention by the medical profession, and the public are being inter- ested in measures looking to its prevention and restriction. It is encouraging to note that in all our large cities the mortality from this disease is gradually falling, and through societies of this kind knowledge is disseminated which affords the public greater protection and prolongs life. The resources of New York and Pennsylvania for the climatic treatment of pulmonary disease are not so well known as they should be. Neither are the mineral springs of the United States fully understood and intelli- gently used. The Transactions of the Climatological Association, now numbering fifteen volumes, have contributed in no small degree to the better knowledge of this extensive subject. The following officers were elected for the ensuing year: President, Dr. A. Jacobi, of New York; Vice-Presidents, Dr. R. H. Babcock, of Chicago, and Dr. John W. Brannan, of New York; Secretary, Dr. Guy Hinsdale, of Philadelphia ; Representa- tive to the Executive Committee of the Congress of American Physicians and Sur- geons, Dr. F. I. Knight, of Boston. The next meeting will be held in Wash- ington in May, 1900. Guy HinspAtz, Secretary. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. SOME SMITHSONIAN PUBLICATIONS. Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, showing the operations, expenditures and conditions of the Institution to July, 1896. 8vo, lii+ 728 pp., lxi pls. Wash- ington, 1898. [Received by the Bureau of International Exchanges, January 25, 1899. ] Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, showing the operations, expenditures and conditions of the Institution for the year ending June 30, 1896. Report of the U. S. National Museum. 8vo, xxiv + 1108 pp-, excviiipls. Washington, 1898. [? 1899.] 776 Proceedings of the United States National Museum. Volume XX. Published under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution S8vo, xii+ 932 pp., xevii pls. Washiugton, 1898. [? 1899. ] : The activities and influence of the Smithso- nian Institution have so extended that, instead of a modest Report of some hundred pages, its annual publishing output comprises several bulky octavo volumes. It is only 15 years since the Report of the United States National Museum was issued in distinct covers from that of the Smithsonian Institution. And now, to judge from the copy submitted for review, even this has reached limits that transcend the binder’s art, andsuggest that a further division into volumes would be beneficial. The line of division is obvious, for the Reports both of the Smithsonian and of the Museum owe their present thickness chiefly to the articles of gen- eral interest which are printed after the annual official statements. The public is, doubtless, grateful for these admirable articles, but its gratitude would be increased were they pre- sented in more convenient form, The numer- ous readers that will be found for Mr. Thomas Wilson’s richly illustrated account of ‘ Prehis- toric Art’ will not wish to be weighted with lengthy lists of accessions to the library, of new species described by the Museum staff, or of specimens sent to the Museum for identification. On the other hand, the professional museum- curator, who doubtless keeps the richly sugges- tive, one might say the classical, reports of the Smithsonian officials at hand for reference, will soon find his available space choked up with reprints of papers that he either has no longing for or already has in their original form. The present Appendices to the Administrative Reports have, itis true, grown in a natural man- ner, on the one hand out of the summaries of progress in science that used to be attempted by the Smithsonian, and on the other hand out of short accounts or catalogues of specimens in the National Museum. Moreover, there may besome- thing in the terms of the appropriation by Con- gress that renders the present mode of publica- tion an official necessity. In such case a strong expression of the value attached at home and abroad to the several sections of these Reports, SCIENCE. [N. S. Vou. IX. No. 231. and of the inconvenience resulting from their union, may do something to facilitate a change. There is another argument in favor of the proposed separation. The information con- tained in these reports is as out of date as that in an ordinary science text-book. The world looks for more actuality in news that come from the United States. There is little in this ‘Report of the U. 8. National Museum for the year ending June 30, 1896’ that the intelligent readers of SCIENCE did not know nearly three years since. We all knew that ‘‘ Under an order issued by the President on May 6, 1896, the National Museum [with the other depart- ments of the Smithsonian Institution] was made subject to the law regulating appointments and promotions in the Civil Service of the United States.’? We have read all about the govern- ment exhibit at the Atlanta Exposition in Brown Goode’s contemporaneous report. We have mourned for Professor C. V. Riley and Mr. R. E. Earll, and, alas! for the writer of their obit- uary notices, here reprinted from ScrENCE. We have heard enough—perhaps too much—about Alaska and the seal fisheries of Bering Sea. There is little left but the statistics previously referred to. And since the letter of transmittal is dated August 8, 1896, why should we have to await these 284 pages for two years and a half? The reason appears to lie in the elabo- rate papers contained in Part II., which, it is obvious, could not have been published in 1896. Internal evidence shows that Mr. Thomas Wil- son’s attactive work on Prehistoric Art, of 340 pages, 75 plates and 3825 text-figures, was not completed in manuscript before 1897. Mr. Stewart Culin’s fascinating account of the origin of chess and playing cards has an intro- ductory note dated August, 1897, and contains quotations from matter printed in that year. The equally interesting account of the exhibit of Biblical Antiquities at the Atlanta Exposi- tion, by Drs. C. Adler and I. M. Casanowicz, contains more than one such reference. It is not likely that Dr. Walter Hough’s exhaustive monograph on the lamp of the Eskimo was ready for the printer before the articles that precede it. Why should not all these have been issued separately, or at least reserved for the 1897 Report ? JUNE 2, 1899.] To write any comprehensive review of the extraordinarily diverse matter in the three volumes before us would be impossible for a single individual, however unlimited his time. The papers following the Smithsonian Report are representative of the various branches of science, and the general reader will gain from them a fair idea of what is now being done by scientific workers. Most of them have appeared elsewhere, but English-speakers will be glad to have the translations of Dr. L. Kénigsberger on ‘ The Investigations of Hermann von Helm- holtz on the Fundamental Principles of Mathe- matics and Mechanics,’ Professor A. Cornu on ‘Physical phenomena of the upper regions of the atmosphere,’ O. Wiener on ‘Color pho- tography by means of body colors, and Me- chanical color adaptation in nature,’ Dr. Heim on ‘The biologic relations between plants and ants,’ H. Meyer on ‘Bows and arrows in Central Brazil,’ and J. de Morgan’s ‘Account of the work of the service of an- tiquities of Egypt and of the Egyptian Insti- tute during the years 1892, 1893 and 1894.’ As an example of work carried out under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution, we are presented with Dr. J. Walter Fewkes’ ‘ Pre- liminary account of an expedition to the Pueblo ruins near Winslow, Arizona, in 1896,’ which expedition, it may be noted, accomplished its work some weeks after the annual report was transmitted to Congress. Other communica- tions that appear to be published here for the first time are: ‘Was primitive man a modern savage ?’ by Talcott Williams ; ‘Memorial of Dr. Joseph M. Toner,’ by Ainsworth R. Spofford, and ‘ William Bower Taylor,’ by W. J. Rhees. The rest of the articles are reprints, mainly from the Proceedings of the Royal Institution of Great Britain and from SCIENCE. The more technical papers based on the col- lections in the U. S. National Museum are con- tained in Vol. XX., of the Proceedings of the Museum. In pursuance of the excellent policy pursued by the Institution, these have already been issued in pamphlet form, so as not to delay the publication of important scientific novelties. But it is to be wished that this policy could be carried into effect in a more practical manner. Let us take two examples. The volume opens SCIENCE. ee with an elaborate and (thanks to the Elizabeth Thompson fund) richly illustrated work on the Rocky Mountain locust and its allies, entitled ‘Revision of the Orthopteran group Melanopli (Acridiidee), with special reference to North American forms,’ by that eminent entomologist: and bibliographer, 8S. H. Scudder. The work contains numerous new species and new genera. A key to the genera is given, and is said to have been ‘issued in advance in the Proceed- ings of the American Academy ;’ but from be- ginning to end no hint is given as to the pre- vious publication of the paper as a whole, and 9 workers ont of 10 would be as likely as not to give it the date of the bound volume, which the title-page states to be 1898, but which, one may hazard a guess, was really 1899.* The tenth worker might have received the previously is- sued separate copy of Mr. Scudder’s paper, though it was unknown to the laborious com- piler of the section Insecta in the Zoological Record for 1897—a somewhat important fact in in this connection ; or he might chance to see - in the table of contents the affixed date, ‘De- cember 28, 1897.’ Is this date intended for the- date of previous publication? If so, a state- ment to that effect should have been repeated! at the beginning or end of the article itself. Even the previously issued separate copies of these articles do not bear the exact date. The paper wrappers give the year (truthfully, let us hope !), but what we have been led to expect from American systematists is at least the month, if not the day or even the hour of pub- lication, printed on the sheet itself. In the second example that we shall take, matters are more complicated. No. 1132 is ‘ Preliminary diagnoses of new mammals* * * * from the Mexican border * * *’ by Dr. E. A. Mearns. The competition between the describers of spe- cies in this class is now so keen that the de- mand for dates isimperative. The Smithsonian meets the appeal with its wonted generosity. It gives three dates: the date of the bound volume, 1898 [or 1899]; ‘Advance sheets, March 5, 1897 ;’ and again, ‘January 19, 1898.’ What, then, is the date of Neotoma cumulator *At any rate the volume has not yet been received by the British Museum (Natural History), 22 April, 1899. its SCIENCE. Mearns? The date of the advance sheets is, in this case, given with the paper itself, and they are described as ‘published.’ Butifso, there can be no meaning in the date ‘January 19, 1898.’ If, on the other hand, ‘January, 19, 1898,’ is regarded by the Secretary to the Smithsonian as the date of publication, then the advance sheets must be ruled out of court. What do you mean by ‘advance sheets,’ anyway? Are they proofs under revision ? Are they to be had by the public? Can they substantiate a claim of ten or eleven months’ priority? These ques- tions are not rhetorical. We want to know. The ever-green preliminary notice is nuisance enough; but a preliminary notice that ranges vaguely between March, 1897, and February, 1899, ought to be snuffed out by its own ab- surdity. To turn from these vexed and vexing ques- tions to the papers themselves—After Dr. Scudder’s monograph, which occupies nearly half the volume, the more important are Pro- fessor E. Linton’s ‘ Notes on Cestode and Trem- atode parasites of fishes,’ Professor Dean C. Worcester’s and Dr. F. 8. Bourns’ ‘ Contribu- tions to Philippine Ornithology,’ Walter Faxon’s ‘Observations on the Astacide in the U.S. National Museum and in the Museum of Comparative Zoology [Cambridge, Mass.], with descriptions of new species,’ Professor C. P. Gillette on ‘American leaf-hoppers of the sub- family Typhlocybine,’ Professor A. E. Verrill’s and Miss K. J. Bush’s ‘ Revision of the deep- water Mollusca of the Atlantic coast of North America, with descriptions of new genera and species. PartI., Bivalvia.’ From these and the lesser papers in the volume it is clear that the U.S. National Museum plays an effective part in the advancement, no less than in the diffu- sion, of knowledge ; and the high proportion of contributions from others than those on the staff indicates a total absence of that dog-in-the manger quality which often finds a congenial home in establishments of this kind. Indeed, if there is one character more praise- worthy than another in these records of work done it is thespirit of helpfulness and fraternal cooperation that animates the whole. The con- centration of the national collections in one group of buildings, the association of the PNaS:) iViOn. xs INOW 231. Museum with an institution of such world-wide scope as the Smithsonian, the proximity of other administrative and scientific departments of the government, all tend to foster this spirit. Nevertheless, its development, as we see from the example of other cities, is not a necessary consequence ; it needs cultivation. In Wash- ington its growth is due less to favoring circum- stances than to the high character and ideals of the men connected with the Smithsonian Insti- tution, and notably of recent years to the charming personality and unwearying efforts of the late Assistant Secretary. A remarkable instance of this appears in the list of the scien- tific and administrative staff, which comprises among the Curators or Assistant Curators no less than 28 described as ‘Honorary, and serv- ing without salary.’ The work done by these unpaid curators is no mere amusement; they take their share in the drudgery of registration, labelling and cleaning. It is true that the majority of them receive pay from the govern- ment in other capacities ; but this emphasizes the point, for rivalry rather than cooperation between the various departments is the rule in most other countries. The gain, of course, is not wholly on the side of the Museum. In harmony with these principles of mutual aid, the Museum differs from many national museums in its custom of sending out large quantities of material. Partly this is in connec- tion with local exhibitions, and this branch of the Museum’s activity may be compared to that of the Loan Section of the British Science and Art Department. Further, specimens are lent to scientific workers freely and in large quanti- ties. Presumably this applies, not to specimens of historic interest, but te material in the re- serve collection. No doubt some damage is done and some specimens may be lost in conse- quence of these operations. For all that, the Museum is a gainer, on the one hand by the © awakening of national interest and the increased number of its correspondents, on the other through the elaboration of its material by specialists in all parts of the world. Apropos of correspondents, those of the Smith- sonian and the Museum are perhaps numerous enough already. Every citizen of the United States seems to be as tenacious of his right to > JUNE 2, 1899. ] ‘question the officers on any subject under the sun as he is of his right to shake hands with the President. The list of specimens sent to the Museum for identification during the year fills 24 columns. About 10,000 letters seem to have been received and replied to. The concholo- gists alone had to identify over 3,000 species and to write over 1,000 pages of correspondence. Defensive measures have become necessary. Circular 47, U. S. National Museum, stipulates that the material must be sent free of expense to the Museum, unless otherwise agreed upon, and that the localities from which the specimens _Were obtained must be given. The Museum reserves the right to retain, except under special arrangement, specimens needed to com- plete the national collection. There are many other points in these Reports one would like to discuss did one not feel the information to be a little out of date. Attention may, however, be directed to Dr. J. M. Flint’s account of methods for the public exhibition of microscopic objects (Rep. U. S. N. M., pp. 96, 97, pls. i-iv.). There are two forms of ap- paratus ; in both an ordinary microscope is em- ployed, but in one the objects are fixed ona rotating disc, while in the other ordinary glass slips are attached by brass clips to an endless linen band passing over rollers. ‘‘ Microscopes copied from the original here described have been in use for several years, and no irre- mediable difficulties have been found in the way of their perfectly successful operation.’’ An ap- paratus of this kind has been in use at the Hamburg Natural History Museum for some years ; but few, if any, other museums have followed this example. Perhaps Dr. Flint’s account may induce them to adopt this method of overcoming the difficulty of exhibiting very minute objects. The foregoing is only one in- stance of the improvements in museum tech- nique that are constantly being introduced by the energetic officers of the U. S. National Museum. It is the detailed account of such matters that makes the Report of permanent value to other museum-curators, while it evinces the hearty interest taken in their work by all members of the staff. F. A. BATHER. NATURAL HISTORY MUSEUM, Lonpon, 8. W. SCIENCE. tas) Introductory Logic. By JAMES EDWIN CREIGH- ToN. The Macmillan Company. The aims of this book, as indicated in the preface, are three. It is intended for an ele- mentary college text-book; it is founded on a belief in the value of the traditional ‘ formal’ logic, and hence on a desire to conserve, just so far as may be, the forms and exercises of that logic ; and the author hopes, before he has done, to have presented likewise a genuinely modern theory of thought. The first purpose, of course, must be kept in mind in judging ultimately both the omissions of the work and all the ad- missions into it that occur in the way of obvious reflection and simple enlarging comment. The aim of saving the greater body of the old log- ical teachings, is one which — provided only writer or teacher knows how to breathe again into the material some of the ancient Socratic living practicality and fresh keenness—the ma- jority among instructors of raw classes would still approve of. Their most critical query, therefore, touching this phase of Professor Creighton’s work, would be : How far is this en- deavor reconciled with the author’s third chief aim, that of satisfying also, in his expositions, the requirements of modern scientific truth and orderly completeness? And here, in this at- tempt of combining and correlating, in a purely elementary treatise, the methods, content and advantages both of the old logic and a newer one, is plainly intended to lie the special feature of our book; as here, indeed, would appear to be afforded, to any writer, his most distinet oppor- tunity for achieving a marked success, if not even his most valid reason for writing at all. For here—it would seem at least—is the largest room for competition with a number of most excellent text-books already outstanding. Thus, on the one side, Minto’s Logic is an al- most ideally satisfactory beginner’s-manual, save in the important circumstance that. it hardly more than informs the student of the existence of the modern profounder theory of thought ; while, on the other hand, a work like —say even Bosanquet’s Essentials of Logic, with all its incomplete expression and the tension in its style—presents the broad outlines of the organic view of thought with an admirable philosophic ability, but too far ignores, to ful- 780 SCIENCE. fill entirely the uses of an ordinary introduction, the traditional staple of logic. These simple analyses and operations, as a matter of fact, besides retaining still a certain real point and meaning, would deserve some special consider- ation if only from the circumstance that, the new branch of induction aside, they are sub- stantially what, in the popular notion and even in the common run of handbooks, will be always confronting the student as logic, sole and simple. Professor Creighton commendably would recognize these facts more completely than Dr. Bosanquet has cared to do. The first two chapters of his book Professor Creighton devotes to an Introduction. The definition of logic, with which he sets out, suf- fice it to say, is thoroughly modern in spirit. So, too, his differentiation of the function and , materials of logic from those of psychology is carried out in a modern, and, moreover, a soundly practical way. In both these con- nections it would, indeed, have been in- structive to have been given some moderately searching review of the effect of different con- ceptions of the real nature of thought ; but this, doubtless, was a topic felt to lie outside the scope of the book. On the venerable theme whether or not logic is an art as well as a science, the author expresses himself thus: The analyses of logic are capable of a practical ap- plication, but not to the extent of constituting an art. Thinking is too flexible to enable us, on the basis of our theoretical knowl- edge, to lay down, as we can in photography or even in medicine, rules for its definite guid- ance. It is possible to prescribe only the gen- eral conditions that must be observed in reason- ing correctly.—The question here of our agree- ment or otherwise will largely be a verbal one as to how an artis to be defined. Professor Creighton himself speaks of the Aristotelian logic, in the ordinary representation, as perhaps more properly described as an art. Still, it may be suspected whether Professor Creighton’s general denial of a strict art-character to logic does not hinder him, in his subsequent exposi- tion of the old syllogistic logic (his exposition, but not the admirable ‘exercises’ he has ap- pended at the close of the volume), from quite giving due emphasis to those exercises in So- Vou. 1X. No. 231. [N. 8. cratic ‘dialectic’ and ‘induction,’ in interpre tation, definition and the like, wherein, rather than in the operation of mere abstract formulas —A’s and E’s, 8’s and M’s, Baroko’s and Bo- kardo’s—lies the best discipline of ‘formal’ logic. But even more is it to be feared whether the conventional presentation of the old logic, which, as we shall see, Professor Creighton for the most part follows—whether this presenta- tion, either in fulness or in order and method, can meet the requirements of science in the rig- orous modern sense, and must not rather seek its sole justification in a paramount simple ar- tistic than a strictly scientific interest and char- acter. The second chapter of the Introduction is very appropriately a historical sketch. A cry- ing need in the maze of contemporary logical doctrine is a simple but accurate and all- around elucidation for the student—if only for the sake of enabling him to approach the litera- ture intelligently—- of the various connections and distinctions of logical standpoints and so-called departments ; and of all methods, moreover, of effecting this end, the historical can hardly be denied to be the easiest and most enlighten- ing. Professor Creighton undertakes such a his- torical explanation with reference to Deduc- tion, Induction and the ‘New’ logic; and his sketch is concise and bright—so far as it goes at all. Thus his account of the origin, develop- ment and respective functions historically of the Aristotelian and the inductive logics is ani- mated, to the point, and for the most part very satisfactory. When, however, we come to that logic out of whose point of view his own treat- ment is to be determined, he merely says that: it has arisen under the influence of Hegel, but how it has done so, and what Hegel’s logic it- self is like, or what are its antecedents back to Kant or, perchance, to Plato—all this is utterly passed over. Assuredly this failure of the au- thor’s, after he has devoted ten pages to the origins and evolution of a logic (the syllogistic). which he does not accept, at least as final, to provide some account of the historical begin- nings and course of growth of that conception which he does accept as adequate, is to be set down as a defect not remedied even by the sys- tematic exposition of this truer view which we JUNE 2, 1899. ] get in Part ILI. of our book. How very difficult it is to put simply, and yetin orderly truth, the history of that fruitful notion of thought and logic which Professor Creighton adopts, every- one must appreciate who has endeavored to teach it; but then, in the degree that this his- | tory is essential for our students, its difficulty, as already remarked, is just a writer’s best op- portunity, and his best justification for adding one more book to the many. A more thorough preliminary working out of the development from the old to a new logic would have been not only helpful to the stu- dent, but of service to the author himself. For, in his desire to accord to the old logic that due recognition which consitutes one of his prime objects, he feels obliged, apparently, in the exposition of ‘Syllogism,’ which makes up Part I. of our book, to reproduce in the main also the old conventional, half-false order of topics—Terms, Propositions, Immediate Infer- ence, Syllogism, Fallacies—and the old narrow, distorted theoretical descriptions, with a fuller truth of relationships pointed out only inciden- tally or forgotten altogether. In Chapter I. of this same part, some general precautions are, indeed, put forward; but the author himself does not live up to them ; how much less will the thoughtless student! As an extreme illus- tration of failure of fidelity to the interests of the higher standpoint and a reversion, for the time-being, to olden easy-going, slipshod meth- ods, may be cited the treatment of Terms. We are abruptly informed (p. 46)—‘‘wie aus der Pistole’’—-that ‘‘ the first divisions which we have to notice is that into Singular or Individual, General and Collective terms.’’ These being defined in the familiar way, we are given the further divisions into abstract and concrete, positive and negative, absolute and relative ; which distinctions, it should be said, particu- larly that of abstract and concrete, are handled very well from the point of view of the old- time ‘art of logic.’ What, though, of ‘new’ theory of thought is there in this (p. 52) ?— ‘¢ Positive (terms) express the existence * * *, A Negative term indicates the absence * * *, Words which are positive in form, are, however, often negative in meaning * * *.’? Orwhat in this (p. 55)?—‘‘ The nature of everything is SCIENCE. 781 largely [sic] determined by the nature of the things with which it stands in relation * * *. It is, however, possible to make a distinctiow be- tween words which are the names of things com- paratively [sic] independent and * * *.’’ It is but in keeping to find this chapter ending with the subject of extension and intension of terms, 7. e., With that which ought to form the beginning of the treatment of such distinctions as individual and general, collective and material, etc. Now, to be sure, all this can be no result of a sheer ignorance of the spirit and demands of modern logic. Part III. sufficiently shows the contrary ; and even in this same first Part we are given a chapter such as that on hypothetical and disjunctive arguments, one that is fertilized throughout by organic reflections, and, in con- sequence, is the freshest, most interesting and best of this entire section of the book. Or perhaps it would be juster to say that Professor Creighton knows quite generally how to be in- teresting, as also to be neat and concise, and, in most matters, pedagogically tactful. His only difficulty isan unresolved conflict of ideals— of the elementary practical interest of the old logic, with the theoretic one of exhibiting the doctrines of this logic under a wider scientific point of view. In this conflict, now the one end and now the other, is lost sight of; but herewith, of course, the author’s great purpose of satisfying the requirements of both old and new logic goes just so far by the board. The faults of Part I., however, are in sharp contrast with the merits of Part II. The latter is, by all odds, the best-done portion of the book. Here, too, perhaps, there might still be room for acompleter working-out of systematic impli- cations and relations ; and there remains, after all the author’s great deductions, too orthodox an assent to the ‘Five Methods’ of Mill; nevertheless, Professor Creighton here plants himself, everything considered, on modern ground, and in the attitude of live thought, with the result of giving us one of the very best introductory treatments of Induction that we possess. Aside from the difficulty of corre- lation that must arise for the student from his not having previously been given a genuine theory of thought deductively regarded, but only the mechanics of scholastic syllogistic—the 782 true relation of induction to deduction is both made clear in an introductory chapter and soundly adhered to afterwards. These are throughout described, not as two distinet things, but as distinguished phases of one and the same total activity of thought; deduction throwing an explicit emphasis upon the particularizing and synthetic aspect, while induction emphasizes the analytic and generalizing sides. The nature and distinction, likewise, of observation and ex- planation are very adequately set forth in the introductory chapter. Observation, the author earnestly enforces, is not a mere staring at facts : ‘““To observe well it is necessary to be more or less definitely conscious of what one is looking for ; etc., etc.’’ Though he reserves the express assertion of the influence of hypothesis on even preliminary observation to a later chapter, it is implied throughout. Naturally, therefore, the difference, too, between observation and expla- nation is regarded not as absolute, but as largely a mere convenient one—of the final articulate bringing to bear of reason on experience, in contradistinction from an earlier half-groping stage of the same thing. So, likewise, of course, the goal of induction is conceived to lie, not in a mere empirical, passive gleaning of causal connections and generalities, but in the com- pletion of that explanation we have just been speaking of—the active expansion of the living system of self-conscious human reason for and by the inclusion of the facts under investigation. After the introductory chapter come three others on Methods of Obseryvation—the first dealing with Enumeration and Statistics, the two others with the Determination of Causal Relations—under which head is given an expo- sition of the Methods of Mill. All this is well done, though, as already suggested, the simple acceptance of Mill’s ‘methods’ as undisputed descriptions of the actual procedure of science is open to grave dissent. However, there is no failure to point out the drawbacks of the several methods separately ; nor is the author in any sense guilty of treating them as being more than what at best they are—mere methods of observ- ing, that is to say, methods not for the final solution of scientific problems, but, as Welton has aptly put it, methods merely for suggest- ing hypotheses. The two chapters on Methods SCIENCE. (N.S. Vou. IX. No. 231. of Explanation—the first on Analogy and the second on The Use of Hypotheses—as_ well as the concluding chapter on Fallacies of In- ductive Reasoning, call for no comment. All are very good pieces of work. Part III. deals with The Nature of Thought. Starting from the view of thought as an organ- ism, and of knowledge as a passage not from the inward and known to the outside and un- known, but always from a previous partial knowledge to one of greater perfection, the au- thor goes on to point out that thought and knowledge unfold or develop in accordance with the general laws of evolution ; that this devel- opment is a progressive process both of differ- entiation and integration ; that the different in- tellectual operations, as conception, judgment and inference, or induction and deduction, are not separate processes, but stages in one and the same activity ; and that the nature of this activity is essentially discoverable in its sim- plest and most elementary form, the judgment ; —for the concept is not the original element, out of which judgment is afterwards compounded, but is only the series of judgments that have already been made and that serve as the start- ing-point for new judgments. Judgment, ac- cordingly, is the main theme of this present subdivision of our study. The chief characteristics of judgment as the type of all thought and knowledge are: (1) its universality (claim of truth for everybody) ; (2): its necessity (not a mere psychological compul- sion, but one arising from the dependence of judgment on grounds) ; (8) that it is always both synthetic and analytic ; (4) that it is construct- ive of asystem of knowledge. In this connection,. however, require to be considered also the so- called ‘Three Lawsof Thought.’ As very com- monly put, these pretended supreme ‘axioms’ of judgment are altogether false. Rightly for- mulated, though, they are real laws of thought, in the sense of being implied in and descriptive of the thought-procegss as just set forth. (The topic of laws of thought in general, or of Cate- gories, Professor Creighton does not enter upon.) The development of judgment, from a merely felt to a conscious necessity, gives rise to types- of judgment. The succession of these is traced on broadly Hegelian lines, from quality JUNE 2, 1899. ] through quantity (enumeration and measure) and causal connection (stages in this latter conception being pointed out), to the completed form of individuality (which is that of unified system). The chapter on The Nature of Inference re- quires no special comment, except that the solution offered of the old paradox: How can the mind pass from the known to the unknown? —to the effect that there is no such passage, there being ‘‘alwaysa certain amount of identity between the two ends of the process ’’ [p. 326] —is hardly searching. Should not questions of this sort, if taken hold of at all, be handled with a certain thoroughness, even where it is jnexpert novices that one has to reckon for? The concluding chapter, likewise, on Rational and Empirical Theories, calls for no discussion, its spirit beining manifest from what has been already related, and its upshot, in the rejection of either attitude in abstraction, sound, notwith- standing that the rationalism described is rather that of Descartes than the profounder doctrine of Kant. Of this Part as a whole, this much only need be said. So far as it really proceeds, it is ex- cellent and, doubtless, gives the entire book a value immeasurably beyond that of the dry, shallow, old-fashioned inanual. And yet a ques- tioning does arise, just how far the practically total avoidance of direct issue with the more fundamental difficulties concerning thought— the refusal to dip even lightly into the deeper waters of philosophy—is an advantage even for beginners, beginners of the sort who are ready to read such a book as this at all? For may it not be doubted if a bright student can fail— and is it not to be hoped that he shall not fail —to be perplexed by a groping perception of problems, a mere definite pointing out of which, or a mere hint towards whose solution, would have been of the greatest help to him, but which here are quite ignored? Surely our fear should be, not of bringing our pupils, when need is, into the labyrinths of metaphysic, but of our- selves not proving clear-sighted guides therein. However, in this point it may be that our judg- ments must turn on individual notions of how completely logic can and ought to be cut off from metaphysics. SCIENCE. 783. Evidently in this work Professor Creighton has not given us the ‘definitive’ text-book— if there be any sense in the shallow favorite phrase. His book does not closely approximate its design. What he has produced is this, a book with a good many good things in it. These require a stricter organization ; in parts, some supplementation; in other parts (per- haps), a pushing deeper back into philosophy ; and, in one section, a considerable correcting. Yet with all these drawbacks—granted a teacher capable of coping with them—Professor Creighton’s book is not unsuited, as an: intro- duction, to become a very useful one; rather it undoubtedly is, as pointing in a wholly de- sirable direction, one of the very best on the market. GEORGE REBEC. SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. THE Journal of Geology, February—March, 1899. The first paper is by Henry 8. Washing- ton, and is the third installment of the series relating to ‘The Petrographical Province of Essex County, Mass.,’ pp. 105-122. Dr. Wash- ington treats of the rocks occurring in dikes, viz: Aplite, quartz-syenite-porphyry, paisanite, sdlvsbergite and tinguaite. The series is to be continued. B. Shimek, ‘The Distribution of Loess Fossils,’ pp. 122-141. The author em- phasizes certain important points in the charac- ter and distribution of the fossil shells found in the loess, basing his conclusions on facts ob- served in connection with existing land shells. His observations confirm the Aolian origin of the Western loess. H. W. Turner, ‘Granitic Rocks of the Sierra Nevada,’ pp. 141-163. This is an important addition to our knowledge of the general petrography of the granitoid rocks of the Sierras. Types embracing true granites, grano-diorites, quartz-monzonites, soda-aplites, quartz-diorite-aplites and pegma- tites we described with many analysis. Under the studies for students the development and geological relations of the mammalia are out- lined by E. C. Case. Editorials and a valuable summary of ‘ Current Pre-Cambian Literature,’ by C. K. Leith, close the number. The latter contributions are particularly to be commended, 784 as they afford excellent summaries and temper- ate and judicial comments. WE are glad to note that owing to its in- creasing circulation the publishers of Science Abstracts (Spon & Chamberlain, New York) have been able to make a reduction in the price. The journal, issued monthly under the direction of the Institution of Electrical Engi- neers and the Physical Society of London, is performing a very important service for the ad- vancement of science. The first volume con- tained 1,423 abstracts and thus gives a full sur- vey of the progress of physics and electrical engineering. The advantages both pure and applied science gain by cooperation in the pub- cation of this journal are evident on almost every page. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. In response to a circular sent out to physicists by a committee representing seven institutions, a meeting was held on Saturday, May 20th, at 10:30 a. m., at Columbia University, New York, for the purpose of organizing a Physical So- ciety. Thirty-eight persons were present, rep- resenting seventeen institutions, as follows: Wesleyan University, 2; New York, 2; Yale, 8; Cornell, 5; Columbia, 7; Pennsylvania, 2 ; Bryn Mawr, 2; Vassar, 2; Princeton, 2; Am- herst, 1; Mt. Holyoke, 2; Smith, 1; Harvard, 2; Vermont, 1; Swarthmore, 2; Clark, 1; U. §. Weather Bureau, 1. Letters had been re- ceived by the committee from many physicists in all parts of the country, expressing approval- of the organization and a willingness to join. Professor Pupin welcomed the physicists pres- ent on behalf of Columbia University, and intro- duced Professor Cooley, of Vassar, the senior member present, as Chairman of the meeting. Professor Webster was elected Secretary, and addressed the meeting in explanation of the pur- pose of the call. Reports of communications received by members of the committee were made by the Secretary and by Professors Magie, Nichols and Pupin. On motion of Professor Rosa, it was voted that a Physical Society be organized. On motion of Professor Magie, it was voted that a committee be appointed to draft a constitution for the Society. On motion of Professor Magie, it was voted that the meet- SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. IX. No. 231. ings be held in New York, except in special cases. An amendment offered by Professor Nichols was adopted, to the effect that the meeting express the willingness of the Society to establish local sub-sections meeting in other cities when ademand shall arise. After arather lengthy discussion, an amendment proposed by Professor Pupin was adopted, to the effect that the meeting express the sentiment of the So- ciety to cultivate the closest relations with Sec- tion B of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, and to contribute by everything in its power to the success of the Association. Upon motion of Professor Magie, it was voted that a bulletin be published by the Society. Professors Webster, Nichols, Magie, Peirce, Hallock and Pupin were elected as the committee to draft a constitution. The meet- ing adjourned at 12:30 and partook of lunch kindly provided by representatives of Columbia University. The session was resumed at 2:20 p. m., and the constitution submitted by the committee was adopted. All the above notes were therein embodied. A list of nominations for officers was reported by the same committee, and the following were unanimously elected: Presi- dent, Professor H. A. Rowland, of Johns Hop- kins ; Vice-President, Professor A. A. Michel- son, of Chicago; Secretary, Professor Ernest Merritt, of Cornell; Treasurer, Professor Wm. Hallock, of Columbia. Nominations were then made from the floor for members of the Council who, with the officers, are to have the general management of the Society, and the following were elected: Professors A. G. Webster, of Clark; J. S. Ames, of Johns Hopkins; H. 8. Carhart, of Michigan; B. O. Peirce, of Har- vard; W. F. Magie, of Princeton; E. L. Nichols, of Cornell; M. I. Pupin, of Columbia. It was voted that the election of new mem- bers be made by the Council ; that the annual fee be five dollars; that there be no initiation fee, and that four meetings be held annually. The constitution provides that the name of the Society shall be the American Physical So- ciety, and that its object shall be the advance- ment and diffusion of the knowledge of physics. A circular will soon be issued containing the text of the complete constitution, which will be JUNE 2, 1899. ] sent to physicists generally, and provision will be made that those voting upon it by mail shall be received as original members of the Society. The first regular meeting will be held in Octo- ber. Already about a hundred members are assured, and it is hoped that the Society may eventually contain all leading American physicists and take a prominent place among our scientific societies. A. G. WEBSTER, Secretary pro tem. THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE 304th regular meeting was held March 11th. The program consisted of an illus- trated lecture on the general physiographical and biological features of Puerto Rico by Dr. R. T. Hill, of the U. S. Geological Survey. The mountain and drainage systems were explained and classified, and the relations of the various geological formations and the resulting soils to the flora and agricultural resources of the island were pointed out. The lecture was supplemented by informal accounts from Dr. B. W. Evermann, of the U. S. Fish Commission, and Mr, A. B. Baker, of the Zoological Park, who had recently returned from Puerto Rico. Dr. Evermann stated that the coasts are almost everywhere abrupt and rocky, and that the water is generally agitated by a powerful surf. The result of these conditions is that only those types could survive which were adapted for life in deep water or which were fitted by habits and structure to secure protection among the rocks. This applies not only to the fishes, but to the molluscs, crustacea, algee and other groups, all classes of aquatic organisms having received the attention of the expedition. The fresh-water fish fauna is not extensive and has been derived independently from marine groups, having no connection with the fresh-water forms of the continent. Dr. Evermann also explained the methods of the native fisherman and ex- hibited examples of traps and decoys for fishes and turtles. Mr. Baker noticed some additional points re- garding the geography and physiography of the island and the almost complete destruction of the forests, which has had a disastrous effect SCIENCE. 785 upon the fauna, having more less completely exterminated some species and caused profound changes in the habits of others. At the 305th regular meeting, March 25th, Dr. T. S. Palmer traced the history of the in- troduction of the English sparrow into the United States and its subsequent gradual dis- tribution throughout temperate North America. The case of the mongoose in Jamaica, Puerto Rico and Hawaii was also considered, together with accounts of other accidental or intentional importations of mammals or birds, and the general conclusion was drawn that once re- moved from the natural conditions and checks of its original habitat it is impossible to know in advance of the experiment what the utility or injury of any given species will be, and hence such experiments should be undertaken withthe greatest caution. The speaker con- sidered the introduction of game birds attended with less danger on account of the fact that they would more easily be kept under control by human agency. Mr. M. B. Waite exhibited specimens illus- trating ‘ The Effects of the Recent Severe Cold on Vegetation,’ and described the processes at- tending the freezing of plant cells, explaining that sudden thawing caused death in many in- stances because the protoplasm of the cells was unable to reabsorb the water lost in freezing. The extent of recent injuries to fruit trees and ornamental and native plants was then touched upon and subsequently discussed by several members. Mr. F. A. Lucas then read a paper on the ‘Mental Traits of the Fur Seal,’ saying that it had a practical bearing on the question as to whether or not the fur seal was likely to change its habits owing to the presence of man on the islands where it bred. The behavior of the seals on the drives and killing grounds was described as showing the low grade of the ani- mal’s intellect and its inability to think for itself. The female seals were said to take little interest in their offspring and to show no affec- tion, while the sight and smell of blood seemed to produce no effect on the animals. The con- clusion reached was that the fur seal isa creature of instinct and not guided to any extent by reason; that its habits, having been formed by 786 SCIENCE. the slow process of natural selection, were not likely to be changed. The general impression that the seal is a very intelligent animal was thought to be partly explainable by the fact that its non migratory relatives, such as the sea lion and the hair seal, are in reality much more adaptable, not being possessed of the powerful and unyarying instincts of the fur seal. O. F. Coox, Secretary. GEOLOGICAL CONFERENCE AND STUDENTS’ CLUB OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY. Students’ Geological Club, February 14, 1899. Mr. A. W. G. Wilson gave a ‘ Demonstration of Mineral Determination by Volatile Iodide Coatings.’ After presenting a brief réswmé of Dr. Haanel’s paper ‘On the Application of Hydriodic Acid as a Blowpipe Reagent,’ he de- monstrated the use of plaster of paris tablets as supports, and of hydriodic acid as a reagent for the determination of a number of the common and some of the rarer elements. Geological Conference, February 21, 1899. Mr. J. E. Woodman spoke on ‘Notes on the Glacial Geology of Nova Scotia.’ The Province is divided into two parts by fairly sharp boundaries. In the south is the lake region, characterized by till, without distinct form, or in the form of moraines and occasional drumlins, and a little stratified drift. In the north, lakes are largely absent, and there is a considerable amount of stratified drift, with few morainal deposits. In thecenter, near the northern edge of the lake region, drumlins of a very elongate form are abundant. Throughout the country the direction of ice- movement was controlled by pre-Pleistocene topography to an extent seldom seen in New England. Thus, in Cornwallis and Annapolis valleys the ice followed the same lines as present drainage ; in the center of the Province it ran southward, and along the north shore east of Pictou it ran eastward. The short distance of carriage of much of the drift is noticeable. Changes in the character of the drift follow quite closely those of the larger features of bed-rock geology. The center and eastern part of the Province (N.S. Vou. IX. No. 231. shows little stratified drift. The northwestern portion shows a considerable amount, chiefly in the form of eskers and kame-terraces. Many fine eskers can be followed on the road from Yarmouth to Windsor, but east of there few occur. The absence of coarse material in the central part of the peninsula is very noticeable. “Few surface boulders are seen along the rail- road line after leaving the lake and morainic country at Windsor Junction, until well on toward the Strait of Canso, where a few mo- rainic accumulations were noted. All along the north coast the drumlins are indistinct in out- line, being, with very few exceptions, mere drumlinoid hills. In the Strait, ice-motion changed from east to south along the now sunken valley. In Cape Breton the obedience of ice-motion to topography is still more marked. The mass appears to have moved, in the interior, from the low region of the Bras d’Or lakes north- ward along the valleys of rivers which now flow south. This motion did not continue far, and the higher parts of the islands are all un- glaciated. On the west and northwest coast the ice affected only the bordering Carbonifer- ous lowland, penetrated a very short distance up the wider valleys, and left the central pene- plain, on granite and schist, untouched. J. M. BouTWELL, Recording Secretary. THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCE OF ST. LOUIS. AT the meeting of the Academy of Science of St. Louis, on the evening of May 15, 1899, thirty persons present, the Secretary presented, by title, a paper by Professor F. E. Nipher, on ‘Temperatures of Gaseous Nebule.’ Professor EK, M. Shepard exhibited an inter- esting series of lantern slides and ethnological specimens procured by him during a recent ex- tended trip through the islands of the South Pacific, especially New Zealand, Fijiand Samoa, illustrating the natural history and ethnology of those islands. Two persons were proposed for active mem- bership in the Academy. WILLIAM TRELEASE, Recording Secretary. JUNE 2, 1899. ] DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. THE TELEPATHIC QUESTION. To THE EDITOR OF SCIENCE: When a scien- tific discussion degenerates into protest and im- putation of motive it is probably time for the discusion to stop. But I wish to state, in self defence, that I do not ‘seek to leave upon the reader’s mind’ the two impressions to which Professor James refers. I do not say that Leh- mann first considered whispering ; I say that he was the first thoroughly to investigate it. There is a difference. I do not imply that Lehmann introduced number-habits ; I say that the next step in advance beyond him is an exhaustive study of number habits. Again, there is a dif- ference. EK. B. TITCHENER. CURRENT NOTES ON METEOROLOGY. CLIMATIC CHANGES ON THE PACIFIC COAST, IN the National Geographic Magazine for May the question of climatic changes on the Pacific coast is discussed by J. B. Leiberg, under the title: ‘Is Climatic Aridity impending on the Pacific Slope? The Testimony of the Forest.’ The most important results of the study are as follows: The arid, non-forested plains of eastern Oregon yield silicified remains of arbo- rescent vegetation nearly or quite identical with existing species on adjacent areas, thus proving the presence of forest growth on these timber- less lands at no very remote period. On the semi-arid tracts the forest, although consisting of species capable of enduring dry climatic con- ditions, show everywhere a persistent and gradual dwindling in extent and density. In the subhumid forest there is a slow and appar- ently ineffectual adaptative evolution of smaller forms of the various species to replace the larger ones which require more moisture for their growth. In the humid forest the same phenomena are found. So far as the evidence derived from a study of the forest conditions is concerned, there seems to bea fairly well defined change of climate in progress on our Pacific coast, from a more humid to a less humid. In the same number of the National Geographic Magazine, Ganett, in a paper entitled ‘The Red- wood Forest of the Pacific Coast,’ states that SCIENCE. 787 “everything appears to indicate that for some reason, probably a progressive drying of the climate, the present environment is not favor- able to the growth of redwood, and that with the clearing away of the present forests the end of the species as a source of lumber will be at hand.”’ WAVE CLOUDS. THE formation of waves between different strata of the atmosphere was carefully studied and described by von Helmholtz. These waves become visible only when clouds are formed in them at those points where condensation takes place, but undoubtedly invisible waves occur very commonly in our atmosphere. The ap- pearance of clouds in parallel lines across the sky is an indication of the presence of atmos- pheric waves. In the Februry number of the Monthly Weather Review, A. J. Henry, of the U.S. Weather Bureau at Washington, presents five excellent views, reproduced from photo- graphs, of alto-cumulus cloud rolls, observed at on November 28, 1898, and on January 27, 1899. The views of November 28d are especially interesting as showing the gradual dissolution of the clouds. METEOROLOGICAL WORK IN ALASKA. THE Central Station of the Alaskan Section of the Climate and Crop Service of the Weather Bureau has been transferred from Sitka to Eagle, on the Yukon, near the British line. The Chief of the Weather Bureau hopes, by this change, to facilitate the establishment of meteorological stations in the region of the upper Yukon, where, owing to poor facilities for communica- tion, it was found impossible to establish such stations when the headquarters of the Service were at Sitka. RECENT PUBLICATIONS. Measurement of Precipitation. C. F. MARVIN, U. 8S. Department of Agriculture, Weather Bureau. Circular E, Instrument Division. 8vo. Washington, D. C., 1899. Pp. 28. A pamphlet of instruction for the measure- ment and registration of precipitation by means of the standard instruments of the Weather Bureau. Ninth Annual Report of the Board of Directors of the New Jersey Weather Service, 1898. E. W. 788 SCIENCE, McGann, 8vo. Trenton, N. J., 1899. Pp. 205. This Report contains a relief map of New Jersey, prepared by the Geological Survey of the State, with the note: ‘‘The influ- ence of the diversified topography of New Jersey upon its climate is apparent by com- paring this relief map with the temperature and rainfall charts which follow.’’ This plan of publishing topographic maps of the differ- ent States in the Annual Reports of the Weather Services is an excellent one, and should be generally adopted. Rivers of Oregon, Washington, Idaho and Western Montana. B.S. PAcur. River Bulletin No. I., 1899, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, Weather Bureau. Portland Ore., 1899. This valuable Bulletin, the first of its series, concerns the precipitation over the Pacific Northwest and the possibility of high water from the melting snow in the mountains. It contains a general forecast of the probable height of the Columbia River in May and June, as dependent upon the temperature conditions and the resulting more or less rapid melting of the snow on the mountains. Monthly Rainfall Chart for Fifty Years at San Francisco. Compiled by HERMAN SCHUSSLER, C. E. Published by the Central Pacific Rail- road Company. A graphic representation ofthe monthly rain- falls for each year during the past fifty years. R. DEC. WARD. HARVARD UNIVERSITY. A BRYOLOGICAL MEMORIAL MEETING. CoLuMBus was the home for many years of William §. Sullivant and Leo Lesquereux, two names which will awaken love and reverence from all students of North American mosses and hepatics. It is twenty-six years since Sulli- vant died, and this last quarter of a century has seen a marked extension of the limits of bryo- logical study and a large increase in the number of students. It seems a fitting time and place to take a survey of the field, review the past and make plans for the future. Hence it is proposed to make the coming meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, which is to be held at Columbus, the occasion for a Memorial Day in honor of the [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 231. Nestors of American Bryology and to call on all botanists and scientific magazines to help to make the occasion a memorable success. It is proposed to present a series of papers, illus- trated by photographs, specimens and wicro- scopical slides, books and pamphlets under the following topics : Historical papers and collections showing the bryological work of Hedwig, Palisot de Beau- vois, Michaux, Muhlenberg, Bridel, Torrey, Drummond, Hooker and Wilson, Greville, Sullivant and Lesquereux, James and Watson, Austin, Ravenel, Wolle, Eaton, Faxon and Miller; supplementing these there will be shown collections of specimens, macroscopic and microscopic, illustrating the monographic work of recent American students. If foreign students who have worked on North America bryophytes can be persuaded to cooperate with us the following will be asked to contribute: Bescherelle, Brotherus, Cardot, Dixon, Kindberg, Mitten, Pearson, Roll, Stephani and Warnstorf. An effort will be made to secure the loan of type specimens and illustrations from the fol- lowing sources: The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Academy of Sciences of New York, Columbia University, The National Museum, The Ohio State University, The Uni- versity of Wisconsin and Yale University, as well as from private collections. It is also in- tended to exhibit any portraits, autograph let- ters and type specimens and drawings of special interest, which may be loaned for the occasion, as well as presentation copies of books and pamphlets. The following committee of organization will gladly answer questions and give assistance to those who wish to contribute : Professor Charles R. Barnes, University of Chicago; Mrs. N. L. Britton, New York Botanical Gardens ; Profes- sor W. A. Kellerman, Ohio State University ;. Dr. George G. Kennedy, Readville, Mass.; Pro- fessor L. M. Underwood, Columbia University. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. THE Royal Institution of Great Britain, in commemoration of its centenary, has elected a number of honorary members, including Profes- sors 8. P. Langley, Carl Barus, A. A. Michel- JUNE 2, 1899. ] son, R. H. Thurston, J. S. Ames and George F. Barker, and President W. L. Wilson. THE American delegates to the Congress of Tuberculosis now meeting at Berlin are Dr. Boyd, of the Navy ; Dr. Vaughan, of the Ma- rine Hospital Service ; Dr. De Schweinitz, of Department of Agriculture ; Dr Stiles, scientific attaché to the embassy at Berlin. Mr. FRANK A. FLOWER, Chief Statistician of the State of Wisconsin, has been appointed Chief of the Agricultural Division of the Census. OxForRD University has conferred the honor- ary degree of M.A. upon Mr. Roland Trimen, F.R.S., formerly Curator of the South African Museum, Cape Town, and late President of the Entomological Society of London. Lorp JAMES, of Hereford, has been elected chairman of the governing body of the Imperial Institute, London, in the room of the late Lord Herschel. PROFESSOR GEORGE F. BARKER, of the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, and Professor Carl Barus, of Brown University, are among the American delegates attending the Jubilee of Sir George Stokes, of Cambridge. PRESIDENT WILLIAM L. WILSON, of Washing- ton and Lee University, has been chosen by the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution to repre- sent them at the approaching celebration of the centennial of the Royal Institution of Great Britain. THE St. Petersburg Geographical Society has awarded its great gold medal to Dr. G. Radde, Director of the Caucasian Museum at Tiflis. MaAJor Ross, who has recently been appointed lecturer at the newly established school of tropical diseases at University College, Liver- pool, has given a lecture before the Biological So- ciety of that city on the relations of the malarial parasite to the mosquito, to which his own re- searches have been such an important contribu- tion. THE death is announced of Sir Frederick McCoy, F.R.S8., professor of natural sciences at Melbourne University. We learn from the London Times that he was born in Dublin in 1823 and that he was educated for the medical profession at Dublin and Cambridge Universi- ties, but early devoted himself to natural SCIENCE. 789 science. Sir R. Griffith invited him to make the paleontological investigations for the Geo- logical map of Ireland for the boundary survey, the results of which he published in 1844. Afterwards he joined the Imperial Geological Survey of Ireland, and Sir R. Peel’s govern- ment appointed him professor of geology in the Queen’s University in 1850. Professor McCoy undertook, in conjunction with Professor Sedg- wick, a large work on paleozoic rocks and fossils based on the Woodwardian collection at Cambridge. In 1854 he was appointed the first professor of natural science in Melbourne University, and held the chair till his death. His services to Victoria were considerable, no- tably in regard to the Geological Survey of the colony, as a member of various commissions, and as the founder of the Melbourne National Museum. In 1880 he was elected F.R.S., and was one of the first to receive the honorary de- gree D.Sc. from Cambridge. In 1886 he was made a C.M.G., and in 1891 he was promoted to be K.C.M.G. Sir F. McCoy also received the Order of the Crown of Italy from King Victor Emanuel, the Emperor of Austria’s great gold medal for arts and sciences, the Murchison medal of the Geological Society of London, and many similar distinctions. Dr. Lupwic STRUMPELL, professor of phil- osophy and pedagogy at Leipzig, has died at the age of 87 years. He was an eminent repre- sentative of the Herbartian School. Mr. H. B. HEWerson, an eminent English oculist, has died at the age of 49 years. He was the author of numerous scientific contri- butions, being a member of the Zoological, Linnean and Geographical Societies and a member of the Ornithologists’ Union. Dr. THEODOR VON HEssLING, formerly pro- fessor of anatomy in the University of Munich, has died at the age of 83 years. THE Rey. T. Neville Hutchinson, died on May 6th at the age of 73 years. Mr. Hutchinson was science master at Rugby from 1866-83 and did much to introduce the study of science in the English public schools. THE Secretaries of the Sections of the Amer- ican Association for the Advancement of Science are sending to members notices of the Colum- 790 SCIENCE. bus meeting, which opens on August 21st. It is hoped that good programs may be arranged for the various sections at an early date. THROUGH elections at the annual meeting on May 19th, and designations at the ensuing meeting of the Board of Managers, the organ- ization of the National Geographic Society for the ensuing year was made as follows: Presi- dent, Alexander Graham Bell; Vice-President, W J McGee; Treasurer, Henry Gannett; Re- cording Secretary, F. H. Newell; Corresponding Secretary, Willis L. Moore ; Foreign Secretary, Eliza Ruhamah Scidmore ; additional members of the Board, Marcus Baker, Charles J. Bell, Henry F. Blount, F. V. Coville, G. K. Gilbert, General A. W. Greely, Assistant Secretary David J. Hill, John Hyde, 8. H. Kauffmann, Director C. Hart Merriam, Superintendent W. B. Powell, Superintendent Henry S. Pritchett and J. Stanley- Brown. ; THE 12th International Congress of Oriental- ists will meet at Rome on October 12, 1899. Cards of membership ($4.00) may be obtained from Mr. Cyrus Adler, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. THE New York State Civil Service Commis- sion announces that examinations will be held on June 9th and 10th, which will include the position of assistant in zoology in the State Mu- seum, with a salary of $900; the positions of sanitary, electrical and heating experts in the office of the State Architect, with salaries from $1,200 to $1,500; and the position of bridge de- signer and inspector in the State Engineer’s Office, with a salary of from $1,800 to $2,400. The examination for an assistant in dietary ex- periments has been postponed to June 10th. Dr. DANIEL G. BRINTON, professor of Amer- ican archeology and linguistics at the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, has presented to the University his collection of books and manu- scripts relating to the aboriginal languages of North and South America. The collection rep- resents a work of accumulation of twenty-five years, and embraces about 2,000 volumes, in addition to nearly 200 volumes of bound and indexed pamphlets bearing on the ethnology of the American Indians. Many of the manu- scripts are unique. A number of the printed [N.S: Von. IX. No. 231. volumes are rare or unique and of considerable bibliographical importance. The collection of works on the hieroglyphic writings of the natives of this country embraces nearly every publication on the subject. The special feature of the library is that it covers the whole Amer- ican field, North, Central and South, and was formed for the special purpose of comparative study. THE collection of shells of the late Mr. Henry D. Van Nostrand, recently given to Columbia University, is well known among malacologists as one of the most valuable of private collections in the country ; it contains the larger and better portion of the land shells of the West Indies col- lected by Thomas Bland, including many types, together with many of the rarest specimens of the Perry Expedition. THE Technical Education Board of the Lon- don County Council is cooperating with the Asylums Committee in offering a scholarship of £150 a year, tenable for two years, for students of either sex (preferably qualified practitioners), to enable them to carry on investigations into the preventible causes of insanity. The scholar will carry on investigations in the pathological laboratory attached to Claybury Asylum. Proressor A, G. NATHORST, of the Imperial Museum of Natural History of Stockholm, with several scientific companions, sailed ‘from Hel- singfors on May 25th to search along the north- east coast of Greenland for Andrée. Professor Nathorst hopes to meet the Fram with Cap- tain Otto Sverdrup. Mr. A. C. HARRISON, Jr., Mr. W. H. Fur- ness and Dr. H. M. Hiller, who recently returned from an exploration of Borneo, with collections for the University of Pennsylvania, are about to start on another expedition. They expect to make explorations in the northern part of Bur- mah and make archeological and ethnological collections. WE announced last week the laying of the foundation stone of the new building which is to complete the South Kensington Museum, hereafter to be officially known as the Victoria and Albert Museum. This building will con- tain the art and industrial collections, while new buildings for the Royal College of Science JUNE 2, 1899.] will be begun at once. The sum of £300,000 has been appropriated for these buildings, which will occupy a position directly facing the Im- perial Institute. THE new building erected in the Dublin Zo- ological Gardens in memory of the late Profes- sor Samuel Haughton was formally opened on May 19th by the Lord-Lieutenant, in the pres- ence of a large gathering. Field-Marshal Lord Roberts, President of the Royal Zoological So- ciety, described the purpose of the meeting and said that the new building was intended as a tribute to the memory of Dr. Haughton, whose name was intimately connected with many of the leading institutions in Dublin, but with none more closely than with the Royal Zoolog- ical Society, of which he had been five years President and 21 years Honorary Secretary. THE City of Philadelphia has appointed a committee of expert engineers consisting of Rudolph Hering, of New York, Samuel Gray, of Providence, R. I., and Joseph L. Wilson, of Philadelphia, to make an investigation of the water supply of Philadelphia. AN institute for the study of tropical medicine will be established at Berlin, with Dr. Koch as Director. THE Electrical World abstracts from. English journals an account of the early work of Pro- fessor Huges (inventor of the microphone), in wireless telegraphy by means of etheric waves; it appears to be the first published account of his experiments, which were made in 1879. He was experimenting with his microphone and in- duction balance, and found that the microphone produced a sound in the receiver even when it was placed several feet distant from the coils through which an intermittent current was pass- ing and not in any other way connected. He found that the whole atmosphere, even in sev- eral rooms distant from there, would be invisibly changed and that this could be noticed with a microphone and telephone receiver. He ex- perimented on the best form of receiver for these invisible electric rays, which he found would pass over great distances through walls, etc. He found that carbon contacts or a piece of coke resting on bright steel were very sensi- tive and self restoring receivers. A loose con- SCIENCE. 794 tact between metals, while equally sensitive, required restoring. He also used the micro- phone as a relay in detecting such rays. He endeavored to discover the best receiver so as to utilize such waves for the transmission of messages. He showed his experiments to a number of well-known physicists at that time. The distance was 60 feet in the building, but he also took the instrument on the street, and walked away from the transmitter, obtaining signals up to 500 yards. He claimed the exist- ence of the waves at that time, but was unable to convince others of their presence. He also calls attention to still earlier experiments of Professor Henry, of Princeton (U. S.), which were published by the Smithsonian Institution, Vol. I., p. 203, the date being probably about 1850; he magnetized a needle in a coil 30 feet distant ; also by a discharge of lightning eight miles distant. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. THE election of Professor Arthur T. Hadley to the presidency of Yale University by the Cor- poration on May 25th marks the beginning of a new era in the development of a great univer- sity. Yale has adhered more closely than most of our larger institutions to the clerical and classical traditions of the American college, and President Hadley, while conserving what is good, will undoubtedly use his influence to make Yale, as a university,the equal of Harvard. Like the Presidents of Harvard, Johns Hopkins and Stanford Universities, President Hadley may be claimed as a man of science, his work on railway transportation and other subjects being strictly scientific in character, CLARK University proposes to celebrate its decennial by special exercises beginning on July 5th. These will include lectures by emi- nent foreign men of science. Invitations to speak having been accepted by M. Emile Picard, professor of mathematics at the University of Paris and a member of the Institute; Dr. An- gelo Mosso, professor of physiology at the Uni- versity of Turin ; and Dr. Santiago Ramon y Cajal, professor of histology and pathological anatomy at the University in Madrid. A SPECIAL course in the fundamental problems of geology intended particularly for college: 792 teachers will be offered during the first term of the summer quarter (July 1 to August 10, 1899) at the University of Chicago by Professor T. ©. Chamberlin. This will embrace a discus- sion of the chief problems of geology involving basal principles and fundamental modes of in- terpretation. While old views will not ignored, a special feature of the course will be a rela- tively new series of working hypotheses based upon the accretion theory of the earth’s origin. These hypotheses will be carried out to their practical applications in the unsolved problems of geology and be made the basis of new modes of interpretation of geological history. The course will embrace an exposition of the stages of expansional, restrictional and provincial life evolution in the earth’s history and the con- ditions controlling them. The functions of base-levels, sea-shelves, epicontinental seas, and continental stages of quiescence and readjust- ment in the control of life evolution, will be set forth. Parallel with the above there will be given a course in glacial geology involving a discussion of principles, the phenomena and modes of interpretation. These courses will be offered for the coming summer only, in response to an expressed desire for them. The usual courses in general geology and physiology, and in field and laboratory work, will be given by Professor Salisbury, aided by Messrs. Goode, Atwood, Calhoun and Finch. THE Rhode Island College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts, with the cooperation of Hon. Thomas B. Stockwell, State Commissioner of Public Schools, and Dr. Horace S. Tarbell, Superintendent of Schools in Providence, pro- poses to open a summer school for nature study at Kingston, R. I., from July 5 to 19, 1899, provided forty applicants are enrolled before June 1st. A general summer school is not contemplated, and the work offered by the various departments constitutes a single course dealing solely with local phenomena in their adaptability to the teaching of nature study. The distinctive feature will be the study of living nature. On the excursions attention will be directed to special facts and illustrations in botany, zoology, geography and mineralogy, and to the manner in which chemical, physical and biological laws are utilized by practical SCIENCE, (N.S. Von. IX. No. 231. application to horticulture and agriculture. The evenings will be devoted to general lectures bearing upon nature and upon methods of teaching nature study. Among those who have consented to aid by conducting excursions, conferences and lectures are Professors H. C. Bumpus, E. G. Conklin, H. W. Conn, C. B. Davenport and W. M. Wheeler. THE Women’s Medical College of New York will be closed at the end of the year, when the thirty-first annual commencement will be cele- brated. When the College was established there was no opportunity for women to secure a med- ical education, but Johns Hopkins and Cornell having admitted women to their medical schools it has been decided that a special med- ical school for women is unnecessary. The in- firmary for women and children will be con- tinued, and the buildings of the College will be used for graduate work. THE medical faculty of the University of Pennsylvania has made nominations as follows: Dr. James Tyson, professor of clinical medicine, to the chair of medicine, vacant by the death of the late Dr. Pepper; Dr. John H. Musser and Dr. Alfred Stangel, to be professors of clin- ical medicine; Dr. Judson Daland, Dr. M. Howard Fussell, Dr. John K. Mitchell and Dr. Frederick A. Packard to be assistant pro- fessors of medicine, and Dr. G. Davis to be as- sistant professor of applied anatomy. Dr. C. E. BEECHER, professor of historical geology in Yale University, has been appointed to succeed the late Professor O. C. Marsh as Curator of the Geological Collections of the Pea- body Museum. Professor Beecher has been made a member of the Executive Council of the Museum. At the University of Kansas the following appointments have been recently made: W. R. Crane, of Janesville, Wis., to be assistant pro- fessor of mining engineering; Thomas M. Gardner, of Mitchell, Ind., to be assistant pro- fessor of mechanical drawing; Dr. Ida Hyde, of Cambridge, Mass., to be assistant professor of zoology; Hamilton P. Cady, of Ithaca, N. Y., to be assistant professor of chemistry, and Charles L. Searcy, of the College of Montana, to be assistant professor of civil engineering. SCIENCE ‘EDITORIAL ComMITTEE: S. NEwcomsB, Mathematics; R. S. WoopWARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING, Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics; R. H. THuRsTON, Engineering; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; J. LE Conte, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography; HENRY F. OSBORN, Paleontology ; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology; S. H. ScuDDER, Entomology; C. E. Brssry, N. L. Britron, Botany; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. Bownpitcu, Physiology; J. S. Bruitrnes, Hygiene; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology; DANIEL G. BRIN- ton, J. W. PoweLL, Anthropology. Fripay, JUNE 9, 1899. CONTENTS: Senatorial Investigation of Food Adulteration......... 793 Amerind—A Designation for the Aboriginal Tribes of the American Hemisphere........:cscssesecseeeenees 795 Exploring Expedition to the Mid-Pacifie Ocean: DR. HUGH M. SMITH.....:........00-0scceeeeeeecenes 796 The Scientific Study of Irrigation: Dr. A. C TN RU ksoosugbooaeustos abokbodhdauaba henacsmenncshicaacdohoos 798 ‘The International Catalogue of Scientifie Literature —Second Conference (II.): DR. Cyrus ADLER.. 799 A Double Instrument and a Double Method for the Measurement of Sound: Dkr. B. F. SHARPE..... 808 New York State Science Teachers Association: DR. BRAN KLIN Wa BARROWS: .i00.s00escresssssearensces 811 Scientifie Books :— Urkunden zur Geschichte der nichteuklidischen ' Geometrie: PROFESSOR GEORGE BRUCE HAL- STED. Lachman’s The Spirit of Organic Chem- istry: DR. JAMES F. Norris. Allen’s Com- mercial Organic Analysis: PROFESSOR W. A. INOWES = Bookseheceived:nesste% as well as the early. It seems clear that the mental work of the school day does not produce any marked decrease in the ability to do further work. The data here given are somewhat influ- enced by certain factors, though not by practice. These factors will be fully dis- cussed in a later report. The multiplication, spelling and figure tests when given to about 300 children in another city showed the following results: The multiplication test was given to 156 children early and to 154 later. When evaluated for 153 children the results show the latter to have done 863% as much work, to have made 14;5% more mistakes. Taking together the work of all the children tested (594, 297 early, 297 late), we find that the children who did the work late did 2,%,% more work, and made exactly the same number of mistakes. The spelling test was given to 135 early and 128 late. When evaluated for 127 children the results show the latter to have worked through 92,5 % as many lines, to have marked ;°, of 1% more words, and to have marked wrongly 87 % as many words. Taking together the work of all the chil- dren tested, we find that those who did the work late worked through 94,°, % as many 10 lines, marked 1,3, % more words and marked wrongly 93,5 % as many. The figure test was given to 156 chil- dren early and to 152 late. After reducing the results of the 156 to a basis of 152 we find that those who had the tests late did 17 % better. Taking together the work of all the chil- dren tested, we find that those who had the test late did almost 2% better than those who had it early. Besides these three tests, which are of the same sort as some of those given to the first lot of children, there was given to this sec- ond lot a test with letters similar to the SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 234. figure test. This test was given to 140 children early and to an equal number late. Those doing the work late did 97 % as well as those who had it early. The factors mentioned as influencing the work of the first set of children were largely counterbalanced by factors at work in the second ; one, however, should be mentioned. A certain circumstance probably lessened the work of one class (of 30) of the first lot of children during an early spelling test. So the early work in this test should prob- ably be reckoned about 2% higher. On the whole these additional data render more probable our previous conclusion that “‘the mental work of the school day does not produce any decrease in the ability to do mental work.’’ A glance at the follow- ing table, which summarizes the more im- portant data, shows this better perhaps than the detailed accounts already given. Toate | Nos of Scholars Ratio of Teteute Early Multiplication. | 297 102°, % Spelling. | 273 101°; % Figures. | 295 102 % Nonsense syllables. | 147 98 % Form. | 145 94.8, % Letters. | 140 99 % Epwarp THORNDIKE. WESTERN RESERVE UNIVERSITY, CLEVELAND, OHIO. THE INTERNATIONAL CATALOGUE OF SCIEN- TIFIC LITERATURE. PHYSICS. Tue plan proposed is to issue a book catalogue once in five years, arranged ac- cording to both subjects and authors, and to issue also, from week to week, two sets of card catalogues—one according to subjects and the other according to authors. sti- mates are given of the proposed cost of this ; and various alternatives are proposed, such as the issuing of a book catalogue by itself, or a book catalogue and an author card catalogue. It is estimated that each arti- JUNE 23, 1899. ] cle will require four entries, on an average one according to the author, the others ac- cording to the subjects treated of in the paper. It is proposed also to print, at the head of each of the cards or slips, distinctive sym- bols to indicate the science and particular sub-division of the science to which the paper refers. There can be no doubt but that, to satisfy the needs of workers in laboratories, the plan of having a card catalogue of subjects is by far the most satisfactory. A book catalogue would be practically useless ex- cept to a student looking up references for historical reasons, and should, therefore, be kept in a general library, and not in a laboratory library. For the use of workers in laboratories the subject card catalogue would be of the greatest importance, as everyone knows who has ever kept one. It is of great use to the director of the labora- tory in the saving of time and brain matter, because he no longer needs to remember all articles which have appeared, and to the student or investigator in keeping him in- formed of all that is going on in his particu- lar line of work. From the standpoint, then, of Physics there can be no doubt but that it would be desirable for the Interna- tional Committee to print all three cata- logues, the book catalogue and the two card catalogues ; and of these the card catalogues should be kept, it seems best, in the labora- tory itself, or at least in such a situation as to be ready for use by all the students. No suggestions are asked by the Commit- tee concerning the division of the sciences or the classification proposed ; and, in fact, this matter is of secondary importance. The plan is to have the assistants and the clerks in the Central Office in London make a division of the titles according to subjects and to label the cards and slips in some definite way; so that anyone, although ignorant of the subject-matter, can arrange SCIENCE. 865 the cards easily and quickly when they are received. Each. card in Physics is to be marked with the letter ‘D,’ and each subject card is to have, further, a number, such as ‘5410,’ which signifies the particular sub- division to which the subject has reference. In this particular case the 5 would indicate the primary division, ‘ Light ;’ the 4 the sub- division, ‘ Polarization ;’ the 10 the special subject, ‘Methods of Producing Polarized Radiation.’ According to this system Physics is divi- ded into seven ‘primary divisions,’ so- called, namely: Bibliography and Dynamics; Heat; Mechanical and Thermal Effects of Contact and Mixture; Vibrations, Waves and Sound ; Theories of the Constitution of the Ether and of Matter; Light, including Invisible Radiation ; Electro-magnetism. ‘Bibliography and Dynamics’ is sub- divided into seven sections: Bibliography of Physics ; Dynamics in General ;. Dynamics of a Particle and Rigid Dynamics ; Elas- ticity ; Hardness, Friction and Viscosity ; Dynamics of Fluids; Measurements of Dynamical Quantities: ‘Heat’ is divided into seven sections : Temperature and Thermometry ; Calorim- etry; Determination of the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat; Fundamental Laws of Thermodynamics ; Thermal Conduction and Convection; Changes of Volume and of State (Experiment and Theory); Radia- tion. ‘Mechanical and Thermal Effects of Con- tact or Mixture’ is. divided into five sec- tions: Friction ; Capillarity ; Diffusion ; Transpiration and Mechanical Perme- ability ; Imbibition and Surface Condensa- tion of Gases; Solution and Osmose. ‘Vibrations, Waves and Sound’ is di- vided into five sections: Theory and Obser- vation of Harmonic Vibrations ; Theory of Wave Motion; Sound; The Sensation of Sound ; The Physical Basis of Music. 866 SCIENCE. ‘Light, including Invisible Radiation,’ is divided into six sections: Geometrical Opties and Photometry ; Velocity, Wave- length, Energy, etc., of Radiation ; Inter- ference and Diffraction ; Reflection and Refraction ; Polarization ; The Emission of Radiation, Phosphorescence, etc. ‘ Electro-magnetism ’ is divided into eight sections: Electric and Magnetic Units ; Electrostatics; Magnetism; The Electric Current; Electrolysis; Electrodynamics ; Electric Discharge ; Terrestrial Magnetism; The Compass, Earth Currents. These sections are divided further into 270 sub-divisions. The cards are to go to the subscribers fully labelled, the marking being done by expert assistants in London. On being received they can be filed away in suitable cases by a clerk, no expert knowledge being required. With a suit- able key as to symbols any desired reference can be found quickly, and the work being done in any subject can be ascertained easily. Anysystem of classification, there- fore, which is extensive, definite, and free from ambiguity, will be satisfactory. In the main, the systems proposed by the Committee of the Royal Society are most satisfactory ; and the labor expended in per. fecting them in the different sciences, al- though enormous, will be fully repaid. Unfortunately, the classification in Physics does not entirely satisfy the require- ments demanded. The primary divisions are not altogether logical, nor is the classifi- cation of certain subjects; but this is com- paratively immaterial. In some cases it would undoubtedy be well still further to sub-divide a subject. For instance, the sub-divison devoted to the ‘discharge in rarefied gases,’ or the one de- voted to the ‘measurements of wave-lengths by optical and photographic methods.’ In other cases this process has been carried toofar. For instance, there is no particular reason why a special sub-division should be [N. S. Vou. IX. No. 234. given to the ‘vapor pressure near curved surfaces.’ Again, certain subjects seem to be en- tirely omitted, such as ‘ spectrum analysis ;’ the ‘effect of different external causes on wave-lengths,’ such as the Zeeman effect and the pressure effect ; the ‘numerical re- lations between the lines of any one spec- trum and between the spectra of different elements ;’ ‘ Doppler’s principle ;’ the ‘ laws of radiation and absorption ;’ ‘ forced vibra- tions and resonance ;’ the ‘laws of steady currents as distinct from alternating cur- rents ;’ ‘heat effects of currents ;’ ‘ photog- raphy ;’ ete. There are sections which are almost identical, such as the ‘vibration of strings and rods’ under ‘ Sound’ and the ‘ dynamics of flexible strings’ under ‘ Elasticity.’ It is hardly an accepted fact that the Hall ef- fect is due to changes in specific resistance, and, therefore, one would not necessarily, place it in that section. Again, in speak- ing of dynamies, the word center of inertia or center of mass is preferable to center of gravity. The name ‘Electro-magnetism ’ is not a particularly happy one for the last primary division. The only points of importance in the classification which need be criticised, however, are, I think, the omissions, the other matters being of very little importance, owing to the fact that the classification has a key, and the fact that anyone can, there- fore, easily find the reference which he de- sires. It would increase, however, the value of the catalogue if the scheme of classification could be somewhat remodeled, and I venture to express the hope that some action of this kind may be taken before the recommendations of the committee are ac- cepted by the countries concerned in the proposal. There has been no plan proposed in re- cent years which seems to be of so great importance to the students of Physics JUNE 23, 1899.] throughout the world as this, and it is earnestly to be desired that enough countries and enough universities and libraries will subscribe to the enterprise to make it possible for the Central Committee to pub- lish the book and the card catalogues. J.S. AMEs. JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY. CHEMISTRY. Ir the object of arranging titles of books in a bibliography in certain groups or classes is to enable readers and investi- gators to find more readily an article on a given subject, then the anonymous Commit- tee that drew up the schedule of classifica- tion for Chemistry in the Report of the Royal Society’s International Catalogue Committee has made an almost total failure. Two methods were open to the Commit- tee appointed to devise a classification scheme for Chemistry, either to adopt an arbitrary system, in which symbols uni- formly indicate definite subjects, or to adopt the dictionary plan, in which specific words are arranged alphabetically. The latter plan has, in our opinion, great and incon- testable advantages over the former, but-as the Committee chose to adopt the first named method the second cannot be here considered. The provisional plan which was submit- ted to the delegates at the Conference of the International Catalogue Committee, held in London, October, 1898, forms Sec- tion F, of the general scheme printed in a small volume, very difficult for others than delegates to obtain. The grand divisions, with their registration symbols, are as fol- lows: (No number) Chemical Bibliography. 0100 Chemistry (Specific) of the Elements. 0900 Laboratory Procedure. 1000 Organic (Carbon) Chemistry (Specific). 1010 Hydrocarbons. 1100 Alcohols and Ethers. 1200 Acids. 1300 Aldehydes and Ketones. SCIENCE. 867 1400 Carbohydrates ; Glucosides ; Resins. 1500 Amino- and Azo-Compounds. 1600 Mixed Cycloids. 1700 Organo-Metallic and allied Compounds. 1890 Alkaloids. 1900 Proteids. 2000 Coloured Compounds. 2500 Operations in Organic Chemistry. 3000 Analytical Chemistry. 3900 Theoretical and Physical Chemistry. 4000 Physiological Chemistry. These grand divisions are sub-divided so as to provide a class and asymbol for every substance known to the chemist or awaiting discovery ; at least such is the intention. Chemical Bibliography is divided into six groups, to wit: 0000 Philosophy. 0010 History. 0020 Biography. 0030 Dictionaries, collected works, monographs, and text-books. 0040 Pedagogy. 0050 Addresses, lectures, essays and theses. Curiously, no symbol is provided for bib- liographies of chemistry, a topic that must have been prominent in the minds of the persons on the Committee. The second grand division ‘0100 Chem- istry of the Elements’ is intended to em- brace ‘all specifically chemical subject- matter, and such other entries as may be desirable, relating to the elements generally, excepting carbon.’’ In this category the elements are arranged alphabetically and to each a symbol is given, thus : 0110 (Al) Aluminium. 0120 (Sb) Antimony. 0130 (A) Argon. * * * * * 0200 (Cd) Cadmium. 0210 (Cs) Cesium. * * % * * 0250 (Cl) Chlorine. 0260 (Cr) Chromium. * * * * * 0800 (Va) Vanadium. 0810 (Yt) Ytterbium. 0820 (Y) Yttrium. 0830 (Zn) Zine. 0840 (Zr) Zirconium. 868 Students, and even older chemists, who find difficulty in recalling the atomic weights of common elements will scarcely welcome the proposition to give to each ele- ment another factor, though in the case of antimony this objection disappears. This alphabetical arrangement of the ele- ments prevents carrying out one of the prime objects of classification, namely, the grouping of related matters ; thus 0270 = Cobalt, 0500 = Nickel, 0690 = Sulphur, 0710 = Tellurium. The natural group Ba, Ca and Sr, have re- spectively the unrelated numbers 0150, 0220 and 0680. Surely the elements might have been arranged systematically, so that related bodies would have contiguous sym- bols. Annexed to the table of elements are in- structions for sub-dividing entries and the following paragraph: ‘‘ Specific entries re- lating to the halogens collectively shall be arranged in Division 0250 under Halogens.’’ This mixing of a word-heading with nu- merical symbols is a weak feature to be again noticed. The instructions for entering titles in sub-divisions of 0100 include the following paragraph: ‘‘ Entries relating to com- pounds, which in the Slip Catalogue bear the number and symbol of the dominant element, together with the symbol of the secondary constituent, or dominant second constituent, shall be printed in the sub- division of their second constituent.” If we understand aright this rather obscure sentence, it provides for writing on slips according to one rule and for printing them in book-form according to another rule; sodium chloride would appear, therefore, under the symbol for sodium in the written slips and under chlorine in the printed volume ! A second paragraph provides that “ refer- ences to hydroxides, acids and salts shall be entered under the oxide, and corre- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. IX. No. 234. sponding sulphur compounds under the sulphide.” A third paragraph reads as follows: ‘‘ (d) In each sub-division the entries shall be arranged in such order that those relating, a, to the history or origin of the substance come first, and following these, in the order mentioned, those relating, /, to its prepara- tion or manufacture; 7, to its structure, or of a theoretical nature ; 4, to its interactions or use ; «, to its compounds—these five sev- eral sections being denoted by the letters a, By 7, 6, €.”? ; Passing without comment this non-pars- able English (which occurs elsewhere in the report), the scheme introduces another arbitrary feature, Greek letters for specific subjects, which is an admission that the numerical plan is found insufficient ; though it need not be, provided decimals were used, a plan which does not seem to be con- templated by the Committee. The sugges- tion is even made that “ it would be possible to carry the analysis still farther by means of symbols, such as ¢, z, and so forth, to indicate physical properties, crystalline form, ete.’”’ The writers of this review ven- ture to suggest that when the Greek alpha- bet is exhausted the Hebrew will come in handy. This mixture of numerical symbols with word-headings is again resorted to in di- vision ‘0930 Operations in inorganic chem- istry,’ where it is suggested that ‘‘ entries shall be made under significant headings, such as dissolution (sic) and _ solvents, crystallization, distillation, * * * oxi- dation, electrolysis, furnace operations, etc., arranged alphabetically.” To organic chemistry the symbol 1000 is assigned, under which all entries shall be arranged that relate to the subject gen- erally ; substitution derivatives of the com- pounds included in each of the numbered divisions—especially haloid and allied de- rivatives—shall, as far as possible, be en- JUNE 23, 1899. ] tered under the compounds from which they are derived. The next paragraph provides that ‘ entries under the name of a substance may, if necessary, be sub-divided in the same way as that proposed for inorganic substances.” . Hydrocarbons receive the numerical sym- bol 1010, and the scheme for indicating their substitution derivatives leads to amaz- ing propositions ; the general group is di- vided thus : 1010 Hydrocarbons. 1020 Parafiins. 1030 Unsaturated Open-Chain Hydrocarbons. 1040 Benzenoid Hydrocarbons. 1050 Reduced Benzenoid Hydrocarbons (Terpenes, ete. ). 1060 Unclassified Hydrocarbons. “« Kach of these divisions shall be sub-di- vided (excepting 1010 and 1020) into isologous groups, in each of which com- pounds shall be entered in homologous order.”’ Then follow two new arbitrary signs for distinguishing derivatives ; these are full-faced numerals, 2, 4, etc., used to indicate homologous series C,H,,_,, C,H,, 4, and the full-faced letter C, with exponents attached to indicate the number of carbon atoms in a given compound. Applying this scheme to nitropropane (CH,.CH,.CH,.(NO,) ) it will receive the registration symbol 1020.C,.NO,; allene (C,:C:CH,) will be indicated by the symbol 1030.2.C,, and bromotuluene (C,H,.CH,.Br) will be indicated by 1040.6.C,. Br. This plan of assigning to definite chem- ical bodies arbitrary symbols resembling in structure well-established formule is most objectionable ; if carried out it would prove vexatious to chemists and of no practical value to librarians. To alcohols and ethers the symbol 1100 is assigned ; to acids, 1200; each of these groups is sub-divided exactly as are the hydrocarbons, but the symbols of the sub- divisions do not harmonize. Since paraf- SCIENCE. 869 fins = 1020, ‘ols’ should have been 1120, and acids 1220 (instead of 1110 and 1210). In the paragraph on acids provision is made for indicating the number of oxy- gen atoms, the character of the acid and the basicity by numbers, to which ol, al, on, id or cy shall be appended, ac- cording to the origin of the acid. ‘‘ Thus, lactic acid would be marked 1210.C,0, (Lol), and protocatechuic acid, 1230.8.C,0, (1.2.01).”” Here, again, we have registra- tion symbols resembling in a general way chemical formule, yet they do not show the constitution nor even suggest the name of the substance. Number 1440 is given to carbohydrates other than mono-, di- and trisaccharides and 1450 to glucosides and 1460 to resins, and it is provided that compounds belonging to these divisions shall be entered alphabet- ically ; this is again a departure from the numerical plan. Another rule provides that ‘‘ under alkaloids (1800) a list shall be given of vegeto-alkaloids, together with the Latin names of the plants from which they have been obtained, arranged in the alphabetical order of the plant names.” Chemists not versed in botany would find this arrangement a puzzling one. Again, ‘‘ alkaloids derived from plants (1810) and from animals (1820) shall be arranged alphabetically.”’ Division 2000 is styled ‘Coloured com- pounds’ [!], a singular misnomer for com- pounds used in dyeing ; yet another division, 2010,is called ‘Coloured substances,not dye- stuffs,’ and division 2020 is named ‘dye- stuffs.’ Provision is made for sub-dividing these categories thus: ‘2010 into Hydro- carbons (coloured), Alcohols (coloured), Ketones (coloured), ete.; 2020 into Azo dyes * * * dye-stuffs of vegetable origin, unclassified dyes,’’ arranged alphabetically in each sub-division. The rules concerning the entries of the sub-divisions of 3000, Analytical Chem- 870 istry, also lack uniformity, clearness and exactness ; ‘‘ division 3200 shall include all entries relating to the determination of in- dividual elements in their compounds and in mixtures, excluding determinations of atomic weights’? which belong to division 3500 (theoretical and physical chemistry). “Division 3300 shall include all entries relating to the determination of individual compounds, e. g., alkaloids, carbohydrates * 7K > but excluding gases. If necessary gravimetric, volumetric, electrolytic, phys- ical, etc., methods may be distinguished by letters, such as g, v, ete.’”’ ‘ Division 3400 (Applied Analysis) shall include all entries relating to the analysis of composite materials, such as drugs, foods, soils, waters and technical products generally, arranged under appropriate significant headings.” The remaining divisions, 3500, Theoret- ical and Physical Chemistry, and 4000, Physiological Chemistry, must be passed ; the specimens given are sufficiently numer- ous. A study of this remarkable scheme of classification shows that the Committee failed to recognize the fact that classifica- tion and notation are two distinct things, and that a notation need have no relation to the character of the class to which the notation is given. To differentiate the houses in a city, street and number are given; ‘120 Grand Avenue’ suffices to dis- tinguish a given house, and it is not neces- sary to construct a symbol indicating the number of stories, the number of windows and the color of the paint in order to recog- nize the address. Accompanying the schedule of classifica- tion is a specimem page giving illustrations of the way in which these rules should be applied; the examples bring out forcibly the absurdities of the conglomerate method proposed. The paper on Argon, by Lord Rayleigh and W. Ramsay, receives the Kabbalistic formula ‘0100. 7.¢,’ but, if we SCIENCE. (N.S. Von. IX. No. 234. understand rightly the Committee’s rules, the numerals should be 0130, which stands for argon. An article by J. J. Sudborough and L. L. Lloyd, on ‘Stereoisomerism as affecting formation of etheral salts from unsaturated acids,’ is assigned simply the number 3500 ; when, however, the same paper is entered under a different title, namely : ‘ Etherifica- tion of stereoisomeric unsaturated acids a criterion of structure,’ it has the number 12007; when, on the other hand, this paper is catalogued as: ‘Cinnamic and allied acids as a criterion of structure, Etherification of,’ the catalogue slip must bear the symbol 1230.10.€,0,5. To a chemist the formula of cinnamic acid C,H,.CH:CH,.CO,H has a definite meaning, and we protest against a system that introduces symbols, analogous in ap- pearance, yet wholly misleading as respects the composition. An examination of the schedule of classifi- cation of Chemistry proposed by the Inter- national Catalogue Committee shows that it consists of a medley of several methods. The system includes : 1. Numbers, full-face and inferiors, used for several distinct purposes. . Roman capitals, to denote component elements. 3. Roman lower-case, to denote kind of chemical process. Italic letters in parenthesis, to denote basicity of acids. . Greek lower-case letters. . Word-headings arranged alphabetically. . Special provisions ; exceptions to rules. In 1772, at Ulm, was printed a thin octavo, having the title ‘ Medicinisch-chymisch und alchemistisches Oraculum,’ which contains a key to over two thousand symbols and kabbalistic figures found in alchemical manuscripts and books ; the book is curious and instructive, as well as really service- able to antiquarian chemists. The number bo iP ou “Io JUNE 23, 1899. ] of synonyms for a given substance is large ; alum has twenty-six; aqua fortis, twenty- two ; mercury, thirty-eight; a pound weight, eight, and cream of tartar is cred- ited with thirty-two; the symbols have an uncouth appearance, but are hardly more fanciful than those proposed by the Com- mittee on the International Catalogue. Should their schedule of classification pre- vail, a new edition of the ‘ Alchemical Oracle’ would soon become a necessity. H. Carrineaton Bourton, Wiiiam P. Currer. METEOROLOGY. Tue schedules of classification in meteor- ology proposed by the International Cata- logue Committee of the Royal Society seem to be fairly well adapted to secure the objects sought by the International Conference on the bibliography of science. I do not understand that the Conference or the Committee has in mind any attempt at a philosophical classification of human knowledge as embodied in the publications of scientific societies. On the contrary, their object is merely to collect together in London all possible titles of scientific works, and to so arrange these that the clerks of the Royal Society may easily copy out all the titles on any given subject that may be called for by any student or investigator. For instance, under the head of ‘ Earth Temperature,’ No. 2,100, there may be 10,000 titles and cards ; these will be sub- divided into a number of divisions, prob- ably according to special aspects and according to the countries or stations. Each of these sub-divisions may have a vumber between 2,100 and 2,199, or, if more sub-divisions are needed, they will be between 21,000 and 21,999. Of course, the ease with which a clerk picks out the cards that belong to a given subject desired by the student depends, first, upon the minute- ness of this sub-classification, and, sec- SCIENCE. 871 ondly, upon the accuracy with which the content of a memoir is expressed by its own title. This latter is the béte noir of all classification by titles, and there is no rem- edy for it except that the bibliographer ex- amine the original memoir itself, page by page. In this respect the Royal Society must depend upon the thoroughness of those who send titles to it. The Society is simply the central office, or agent, for all the other societies and men in the scientific world. Every card thatis sent to it should have inscribed on it the one or more sub- divisions into which it falls. If these sub- divisions do not appear on the preliminary schedules of classification that have been sent out for criticism and suggestion, then they will be inserted as fast as needed. It seems to me that the method adopted by the Conference and the Royal Society will work just as well as any other that could be suggested, and will be a great boon to science if kept up during the next century. Of course, it will require at least ten years of experience for us to begin to appreciate either its defects or ad- vantages. Fortunately, so far as regards meteorology, the Weather Bureau has the great international bibliography, started in 1881 under my personal supervision and already partially published. The classifi- cation adopted therein by Mr. C. J. Sawyer, after consultation with all the recognized experts of Europe and America, embraces many details not specifically mentioned in the schedule of the Royal Society, and is found very convenient when once the stu- dent has become slightly familiar with it. It endeavored to attain greater elasticity by adopting a mixture of capital and small letters, Roman and Arabic numerals, in or- der to designate the various divisions and sub-divisions. Thus we have IBlb to designate the Aristotelian works on meteor- ology in general, whereas the Royal Society classification would, undoubtedly, designate 872 SCIENCE. these as 0002, or, possibly, 00021. There is very little to choose between the two meth- ods except as to the ease in writing, speak- ing and printing. As to the classification or arrangement of subjects, my personal preference would be strongly in favor of a simple dictionary catalogue. CLEVELAND ABBE. _ THE STOKES JUBILEE. On June 1 and 2, 1899, the University of Cambridge celebrated the fiftieth anni- versary of the appointment of Sir George Gabriel Stokes to the Lucasian professor- ship of mathematics in that institution. During the half century of his connection with Cambridge, Professor Stokes has dis- tinguished himself by a remarkable series of investigations in the fields of hydrome- chanics, physical geodesy, elasticity, the undulatory theory of light, and pure mathe- matics. His activity has continued down to the present date, one of his most recent papers dealing with the mechanical proper- ties of the X-rays. The celebration of so rare an event in academic life,and the eagerness of educa- tional and scientific institutions to render homage to so eminent a man, naturally brought together a large body of special- ists in the mathematico-physical sciences. About 400 delegates and other guests were present. Nearly all of these were en- tertained either in the colleges or in the homes of members of the professorial staff. Thus was it made easy for the stranger within the gates of this renowned University to see much of its inner life and to enjoy in the fullest degree its charming hospitality. The ceremonies began on the afternoon of June 1st, with the Rede Lecture, delivered in the Senate House, by Professor Cornu, on ‘The wave theory of light ; its influence on modern physics.’ This was delivered with admirable clearness in French. In the [N. S. Von. IX. No. 234. evening following a conversazione was held in Fitzwilliam Museum, and busts of Sir George Stokes were presented to the Uni- versity and to Pembroke College (that of Stokes) by Lord Kelvin. On the morning of June 2d the delegates and guests were received in the Senate House by the Vice-Chancellor and the dele- gates presented the addresses sent by the various academic and scientific institutions. There were about seventy such addresses, so that it was essential to dispense with the formal reading of them in most cases. Pro- fessor Stokes responded briefly and with great modesty to these addresses, saying that they made him feel that in his long life he ought to have accomplished much more; but, he added, humorously: If I had done more I probably should not have lived to celebrate this jubilee. On the afternoon of June 2d the address of the University of Cambridge and a gold medal were presented to Sir George Stokes; and immediately thereafter the degree of Doctor in Science, honoris causa, was conferred on the following distin- guished men of science: Marie Alfred Cornu, professor of experimental physics in the Ecole Polytechnique, Paris; Jean Gaston Darboux, dean of the faculty of sciences in the University of Paris; Albert Abraham Michelson, professor of experi- mental physics in the University of Chi- cago; Magnus Gustav Mittag-Lefiler, pro- fessor of pure mathematics, Stockholm ; Georg Herman Quincke, professor of ex- perimental physics in the University of Heidelberg ; and Woldemar Voigt, profes- sor of mathematical physics in the Univer- sity of Gottingen. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. A Text-Book of Physics—Sound. By J. H. Poryn TING and J. J. THomson. London, Charles Griffin & Co. 1899. Pp. 163. This is the first one of five volumes in JUNE 23, 1899.] course of preparation by the authors, the others relating to ‘Properties of Matter,’ ‘Heat,’ ‘Magnetism and Electricity,’ and ‘ Light,’ re- spectively. These text-books are intended ‘‘ chiefly for the use of students who lay most stress on the study of the experimental part of physics, and who have not yet reached the stage at which the reading of advanced treatises on special subjects is desirable.’’ The nature of sound and its chief characteristics are first considered in a chapter that is wholly free of mathematics. The velocity of sound in air aud other mediais then discussed, the reflection and refraction of sound, frequency and pitch of notes, resonance and forced oscillations, the analysis of vibra- tions by Fourier’s theorem, the transverse vibrations of stretched cords, longitudinal vi- brations in pipes and other air cavities, vibra- tion of rods, plates and membranes, the Trevelyan rocker, sensitive flames and musical sand. The last chapter is on the superposition of waves, with application to the physical basis of concord and discord, and on combination tones. The distinguished authors are so well known for their original and accurate work as investi- gators that the critic who is in search of mis- takes will find little to note, beyond a very small number of obvious typographical errors. In the descriptive parts the style is clear and the paragraphing is good. SINGLE Copiks, 15 cts. VoL. IX. No. 214. FRipDAy, FEBRUARY 3, 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00. Static Machines for all purposes. X=Ray Apparatus and Supplies. SEND FOR BULLETIN No. 24. SWETT & LEWIS CO. 9 Bromfield St., Boston, Mass. FOSSILS The attention of Teachers of Geology and Physiography is © called to our systematic collections of Fossils; $20.00 and upwards. We also make up Special Collections to illustrate the different text-books. Our new circular on AMERICAN PALAEOZOIC CORALS, BRACHIOPOD AND TRILOBITE MopELs, will be mailed on request. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, ROCHESTER, N. Y. MINIATURE INCANDESCENT LAMPS. MINIATURE LAMP RECEPTACLES. X-RAY TUBES AND APPARATUS. FLUOROSCOPES. Catalogues on Application. Edison Decorative and Miniature Lamp Department, (GENERAL ELECTRIC CompPany,) HARRISON, N. J. Biddle’s Bulletin for 1899 ~22222222220a, I began to publish this eight-page paper in April, 1898. It has not changed in size but there is improvement in quality, I hope. For 1899 I shall try to make it still more interesting. A) 4 - It should prove of real value (much greater than the cost of a yearly subscription) to all who “4 ay are interested in Scientific Apparatus— Physical Apparatus, Electrical Measuring Instruments, a Projection Apparatus, X-Ray Apparatus, Psychological Apparatus, Storage Batteries, ete: ¥ Li Some have received the BULLETIN free until now but I can’t be expected to keep that up. W 3 The subscription price-is 50 cents a year. It should be remitted at once for 1899. Sample copy 4 a upon request. W ay \ - Seeeanise is JAMES G. BIDDLE, @ a Scientific and Electrical Instruments. 909 Drexel Building, Philadelphia M4 “WSSSSSSSESSES SSE SSS SSS SESS SSS SS SESE SSS ESSE SEES ESE SESS eeccecesee il SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. READY FEBRUARY 1ST A Flistory of Physics In its Elementary Branches, including the Evolution of Physical Laboratories By FLORIAN CAJORI, Ph.D. Professor of Physics in Colorado College. Cloth, Crown 8vo, $1.60 met. This brief popular history gives in broad outline the development of the science of physics from an- tiquity to the present time. It contains also a more complete statement than is found elsewhere of the evo- lution of physical laboratories in Europe and America. The book, while of interest to the general reader, is primarily intended for students and teachers of physics. The conviction is growing that, by a judicious in- troduction of historical matter, a science can be made more attractive. Moreover, the general view of the de- velopment of the human intellect which the history of a science affords is in itself stimulating and liberal- izing. In the announcement of Ostwald’s Klassiker der Exakten Wissenschaften we read as follows. ‘‘ While by the present methods of teaching, a knowledge of science in its present state of advancement is imparted very successfully, eminent and farsighted men have repeatedly been obliged to point out a defect which too often attaches to the present scientific education of our youth. J is the absence of the historical sense and the want of knowledge of the great researches upon which the edifice of science rests.’’ It is hoped that the present volume may assist in remedying the defect so clearly pointed out by Pro- fessor Ostwald. BY THE SAME AUTHOR A A History of History of Mathematics Elementary Mathematics Cloth, 12mo, $1.50. “4 most instructive, and at the same time a very “What we have a right to expect in such a hand- | readable piece of work, full of curious facts.’’ book is an agreeable narrative of the most material —The Bookman. events in the history of mathematics, and this Pro- “By no means an abridged edition of The History fessor Cajori incontestably supplies. The book was | of Mathematics. It isan entirely new book, giving a much wanted.’’—The Nation. | somewhat detailed account of the rise and progress of Arithmetic, Algebra and Geometry. The book should be read by all teachers of these subjects, and by mathematical students generally.’’ —American Mathematical Monthly. Cloth, 8vo, $3.50. “4 scholarship both wide and deep is manifest in this History of Mathematics which the author has in- fused with his own ardor in this department of science.’’—Journal of Education. ““The product of wide and scholarly research. . . “To the student with a love for mathematical | For its historical facts and its suggestiveness, this science this book will be as entertaining as a ro- | work should be read carefully by all students and mancee.’’—The Transcript, Boston. teachers of mathematies.’’—The Dial, Chicago. Send for the New Announcement List, and List of Issues of 1898, by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Publishers, New York SCIENCE Bee ik Fripay, Fesruary 10, 1899. cee oars: ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00. STANDARDS OF RESISTANCE To no branch of the instrument business have we given more attention than to the pro- duction of Standards of Resistance. A completely equipped testing laboratory is devoted exclusively to resistance work. It is free from vibration and external influences and its temperature entirely under control. Our facilities and experience enable us to secure results of the highest accuracy, and the constant verification of our standards warrants us, in claiming for our comparisons, absolute reliability. Send for descriptive circular, No. 254. ie Queen Wheatston Bridge (Anthony Form). SENT ON APPLICATION ’ Catalogue T Electrical Test Instruments 120 pages Catalogue I Physical Apparatus 150 pages Catalogue I=20 Physical Laboratory Supplies 180 pages Catalogue I-90 Commercial Electrical Instruments 48 pages Circular 214 Lord Kelvin’s Electrical Instruments 20 pages Circular 244 Cable Testing Apparatus 40 pages Circular 264 Queen X=Ray Apparatus 24 pages Circular 364 The Queen-Acme Testing Set 20 pages QUEEN & CoO.,, inc. Electrical and Scientific Instrument Works OE RU maMESTO CCE Goccuis 1010 CHESTNUT ST., PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A. il SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. JUST READY A History of Physics In its Elementary Branches, including the Evolution of Physical Laboratories By FLORIAN CAJORI, Ph.D. Professor of Physics in Colorado College. Cloth, Crown 8vo, $1.60 net. This brief popular history gives in broad outline the development of the science of physics from an- tiquity to the present time. It contains also a more complete statement than is found elsewhere of the evo- lution of physical laboratories in Europe and America. primarily intended for students and teachers of physics. troduction of historical matter, a science can be made more attractive. The book, while of interest to the general reader, is The conviction is growing that, by a judicious in- Moreover, the general view of the de- velopment of the human intellect which the history of a science affords is in itself stimulating and liberal- izing. In the announcement of Ostwald’s Klassiker der Exakten Wissenschaften we read as follows . “ While by the present methods of teaching, a knowledge of science in its present state of advancement is imparted very successfully, eminent and farsighted men have repeatedly been obliged to point out a defect which too often attaches to the present scientific education of our youth. It is the absence of the historical sense and the want of knowledge of the great researches upon which the edifice of science rests.’? It is hoped that the present volume may assist in remedying the defect so elearly pointed out by Pro- fessor Ostwald. BY THE SAME AUTHOR A History of Mathematics Cloth, 8vo, $350 ‘* What we have a right to expect in such a hand- book is an agreeable narrative of the most material events in the history of mathematics, and this Pro- fessor Cajori incontestably supplies. The book was much wanted.’’—The Nation. ‘* 4 scholarship both wide and deep is manifest in this History of Mathematics which the author has in- fused with his own ardor in this department of science.’’—Journal of Education. “To the student with a love for mathematical science this book will be as entertaining as a ro- mance.’’—The Transcript, Boston. | of Mathematics. A History of Elementary Mathematics Cloth, 12mo, $1 50 “A most instructive, and at the same time a very readable piece of work, full of curious facts.’’ —The Bookman. “By no means an abridged edition of The History It is an entirely new book, giving a somewhat detailed account of the rise and progress of Arithmetic, Algebra and Geometry. The book should be read by all teachers of these subjects, and by mathematical students generally.”’ —American Mathematical Monthly. ““The product of wide and scholarly research. . . For its historical facts and its suggestiveness, this work should be read carefully by all students and teachers of mathematics.’’—The Dial, Chicago. Send for the New Announcement List, and List of Issues of 1898, by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Publishers. New York 16 _sSCIENCE : SINGLE CoPiEs, 15 cTs, Vou. IX. No. 216. FRIDAY ’ FEBRUARY LG, 1899. ANNUAL Sao, $5.00. Chemical and Physical Apparatus CHEMICALLY PURE ACIDS AND CHEMICALS SELLING AGENTS FOR Spencer iby Baker & Lens Gals = Adamson Company Chemical Co. and and Carl Desmoutis, Zeiss, Lemaire & Co.’s Jena 4 Platinum Microscopes ; a Dishes and Crucibles SOLE AGENTS FOR SCHOTT & GENOSSEN, JENA NORMAL GLASS SCHLEICHER & SCHULL’S CHEM. PURE FILTERS SCHMIDT & HAENSCH’S OPTICAL APPARATUS MAX KOHL’S PHYSICAL APPARATUS es EIMER & AMEND 22 205, 207, 209, 211 Third Ave. NEW YORK ul SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. SOME OF THE PUBLICATIONS The W. J. Johnston Company The Electrical World. An Illustrated Weekly Review of Current Progress in Electricity and its Practical Applications. Annual sub- scription. $3.00 Dictionary of Electrical Words, Terms and Phrases. By Edwin J. Houston, Ph.D. Fourth edition. Greatly enlarged. 10,042 words and terms defined : 12,073 defini- tions ; 990 double column octavo pages; 582 illustrations. an indispensable reference book, not only for electri- cians, but for everyone interested in current progress. $7.0 Shop and Road Testing of Dynamos Ae Motors. By Eugene C. Parham and John Shedd. Practical and thorough. 526 pages. $2.00 Electro-Dynamic Machinery. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E, Kennelly, D.Sc. A text-book on continuous- -current dynamo- -electrie ma- chinery for electric-engineering students of all grades. 331 pages, 232 illustrations. $2.50 Practical Calculation of Dynamo-Elec- tric Machines. A Manual for Electrical and Mechanical Engineers, and a Text-book for Students of Electrotechnics. By, A. E. Wiener. 683 pages, 375 illustrations. 2.50 Gerard’s Electricity. With chapters by Dr. Louis Duncan, C. P. Steinmetz, A. E. Kennelly and Dr. Cary T. Hutchinson. ‘Translated under the direction of Dr. Louis Duncan. 392 pages, 112 illustrations. Asa beautifully clear treatise for students on the theory of electricity and magnetism as well as a résumé for engineers of electrical theories that have a practical bearing, the work of Professor Gerard hasbeen without a rivalin any language. $2.50 Electrical Power Transmission. By Dr. Louis Bell, Ph, D. Uniform with Crosby & Bell’s “Electric Railway.’ Essentially practical in its charac- ter. Cloth. $2.50 The Theory and Calculation of Alter- nating Current Phenomena. By Chas. Proteus Steinmetz. Contains the very latest knowledge relating to alternate current phenomena, vouch of which is original with the author, and here ap- pears for the first time in book form. $2.50 Electric Lighting Specifications. For the use of Engineers and Architects. Third edition entirely re-written. By E. A. Merrill. 231 pages. $1.50 Electricity One Hundred Years Ago and To-day. By Edwin J. Houston, Ph.D. 190 pages, illustrated. Alternating Electric Currents. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 #) $1.00 Electric Heating. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Se. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 Magnetism. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 Electro-Therapeutics. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. New Edition. Enlarged by addition of chapter on X- Rays (Electro-Technical Series). $1.00 Electric Are Lighting. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00: Electric Incandescent Lighting. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 The Electric Motor. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Se. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Electric Street Railways. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 The Electric Telephone. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Electric Telegraphy. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Alternating Electric Currents. Their Generation, Measurement, Distribution and Ap- plication. Authorized American edition. By Gisbert Kapp. 166 pages. 37 illustrations, 2 plates. $1.00 Electric Railway Motors. By Nelson W. Perry. 256 pages. Many illustrations. $ Original Papers on Dynamo Machinery and Allied Subjects. Authorized American Edition. By John Hopkinson, F.R.S. 249 pages. 98 illustrations. $1.00 Experiments with Alternating Currents of High Potential and High Frequency. By Nikola Tesla. 146 pages. 35 illustrations. $1.00 Lectures on the Electro-Magnet. Authorized American edition. By Professor Sylvanus P. Thompson, 287 pages. 75 illustrations. $1.00 Dynamo and Motor Building for Ama- teurs. With Working Drawings. By Lieutenant C. D. Park- hurst. $1.00 Copies of any of the above books, or any other electrical book published, will be sent by mail, POSTAGE PREPAID, to any address in the world, on receipt of price. THE W. J. JOHNSTON COMPANY, 9 Murray Street, New York SCIENCE NEW SERIES, = = / YC SINGLE Copigs, 15 crs. VoL. IX. No. 217. Fripay, FEBRUARY 24, 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00. THE JOURNAL OF Applied Microscopy MONTHLY, ILLUSTRATED Subscription, $1.00 Per Year. Foreign, $1.25 The Journal deals only with the practical side of Microscopical Techni- queand Apparatus. It contains a large amount of original matter from the best writers in all the fields in which the Microscope is used. Reviews, abstracts and notices of foreign literature put the reader in touch with the whole field of foreign and domestic work. While the most advanced methods are recorded, there are series of articles especially for beginners. SAMPLE COPIES MAILED FREE PUBLICATION DEPARTMENT: Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., ROCHESTER, N. Y. il SCTENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. SOME OF THE PUBLICATIONS The W. J.J ohnston Company The Electrical World. An Illustrated Weekly Review of Current Progress in Electricity and its Practical Applications. Annual sub- scription. $3.00 Dictionary of Electrical Words, Terms and Phrases. By Edwin J. Houston, Ph.D. Fourth edition. Greatly enlarged. 10,042 words and terms defined ; 12,073 defini- tions ; 990 double column octayo pages; 582 illustrations. an indispensable reference book, not only for electri- cians, but for everyone interested in current progress. $7.00 Shop and Road Testing of Dynamos and Motors. By Eugene C. Parham and John Shedd. Practical and thorough. 526 pages. $2.00 Electro-Dynamic Machinery. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. A text-book on continuous-current dynamo-electric ma- chinery for electric-engineering students of all grades. 331 pages, 232 illustrations. $2.50 Practical Calculation of Dynamo-Elec- tric Machines. A Manual for Electrical and Mechanical Engineers, and a Text-book for Students of Electrotechnics. By A. E. Wiener. 683 pages, 375 illustrations. : 2.50 Gerard’s Electricity. With chapters by Dr. Louis Duncan, C. P. Steinmetz, A. E. Kennelly and Dr. Cary T. Hutchinson. Translated under the direction of Dr. Louis Duncan. 392 pages, 112 illustrations. Asa beautifully clear treatise for students on the theory of electricity and magnetism as well as a résumé for engineers of electrical theories that have a practical bearing, the work of Professor Gerard has been without a rivalin any language. $2.50 Electrical Power Transmission. By Dr. Louis Bell, Ph.D. Uniform with Crosby & Bell’s “Electric Railway.’ Essentially practical in its charac- ter. Cloth. $2.50 The Theory and Calculation of Alter- nating Current Phenomena. By Chas. Proteus Steinmetz. Contains the very latest knowledge relating to alternate current phenomena, much of which is original with the author, and here ap- pears for the first time in book form. $2.50 Electric Lighting Specifications. For the use of Engineers and Architects. Third edition entirely re-written. By E. A. Merrill. 231 pages. $1.50 Electricity One Hundred Years Ago and To-day. By Edwin J. Houston, Ph.D. 190 pages, illustrated. $1.00 Alternating Electric Currents. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 Lf on Electric Heating. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 Magnetism. ; By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series. ) $1.00 Electro-Therapeutics. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Se New Edition. Enlarged by addition of chapter on X- Rays (Electro-Technical Series). $1.00 Electric Are Lighting. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Se. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Electric Incandescent Lighting. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 The Electric Motor. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Electric Street Railways. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 The Electric Telephone. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Electric Telegraphy. By E. J. Houston, Ph.D., and A. E. Kennelly, D.Sc. (Electro-Technical Series.) $1.00 Alternating Electric Currents. Their Generation, Measurement, Distribution and Ap- plication. Authorized American edition. By Gisbert Kapp. 166 pages. 37 illustrations, 2 plates. $1.00 Electric Railway Motors. By Nelson W. Perry. 256 pages. Many illustrations. $1.00 ©riginal Papers on Dynamo Machinery and Allied Subjects. Authorized American Edition. By John Hopkinson, F.R.S. 249 pages. 98 illustrations. $1.00 Experiments with Alternating Currents of High Potential and High Frequency. By Nikola Tesla. 146 pages. 35 illustrations. $1.00 Lectures on the Electro=-Magnet. Authorized American edition. By Professor Sylvanus P. Thompson. 287 pages. 75 illustrations. $1.00 Dynamo and Motor Building for Ama- teurs. With Working Drawings. By Lieutenant C. D. Park- hurst. $1.00 Copies of any of the above books, or any other electrical book published, will be sent by mail, POSTAGE PREPAID, to any address in the world, on receipt of price. THE W. J. JOHNSTON COMPANY, 9 Murray Street, New York CIENCE NEw SERIES. 9 SINGLE COPIES, 15 CTS. VoL. IX. No. 218. Fripay, Marcu Vv, 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00. Static Machines X=Ray Apparatus for all purposes. SEND FOR BULLETIN No. 24. and Supplies SWEET & LEWIS CO., 9 Bromfield St., Boston, Mass. FOSSILS The attention of Teachers of Geology and Physiography is ® called to our systematic collections of Fossils; $20.00 and upwards. We also make up Special Collections to illustrate the different text-books. Our new circular on AMERICAN PALAEOZOIC CORALS, BRACHIOPOD AND TRILOBITE MODELS, will be mailed on request. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, ROCHESTER, N. Y. MINIATURE INCANDESCENT LAMPS. MINIATURE LAMP RECEPTACLES. X-RAY TUBES AND APPARATUS. FLUOROSCOPES. Catalogues on Application. Edison Decorative and Miniature Lamp Department, (GENERAL ELECTRIC ComPany,) HARRISON, N. J. P ro i e cti on A p p ar at US 7222822 eMeeaTONTCS: W & ‘For lecture purposes (and also as a source of light for Scientific Projection) the ‘Ideal’ 4 ri Lantern Style B, is to be recommended very highly. It is constructed along approved lines “4 a in every respect and is probably the most compact apparatus on the market that makes use of an v 8 Are Lamp. The Thompson 90° Arc Lamp is generally acknowledged as far more efficient % 3 than other types, producing greatly increased illumination for given consumption of energy.’’— % a Biddle’s Bulletin, January, 1899. ‘ a AM és v R Write for Pamphlet 250 J ES G. BIDDLE, w ris 909 Drexel pris Pree eats 2 i SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. The completion of ‘‘ an exceptionally valuable book.’’ —THr Hrrautp, New York. Hi , i} y ; The History or Mankind Professor FRIEDRICH RATZEL From the Second German Edition, revised. t TRANSLATED BY INTRODUCTION BY A. J. BUTLER, [1.A. E. B. TYLOR, D.C.L. With Colored Plates, Maps and Illustrations. Complete in three volumes, $12.00. _ CONTENTS. Volume I. Book I. Principles of Ethnography. Book II. The American-Pacifie Group of Races. Races of ©ceania—Australia—and Malay Islands. Cloth, Imperial Svo, $4.00. Volume II. Book II. The American-Pacifie Group (Continued. ) The Cultured Races of America—Ancient Civilized Races of America—Arctic Races. Book III. The Light Stocks of South and Central Africa. Book IV. The Negro Races. The South and East Africans. Cloth, Imperial 8vo, $4.00. Volume III. Book IV. The Negro Races (Continued. ) Africans of the Interior—West Africans. Book V. The Cultured Races of the Old World. Africans—Asiatics—Europeans. Just Ready, Cloth, Imperial Svo, $4.00. “ This work is one which will be hailed with pleasure by all interested in the diffusion of knowledge regarding man, and it may be recommended as much the best in the domain of which it treats now accessible in English.’’—ScrEnce. ‘‘ Really the only comprehensive manual of universal ethnography.’’—FREDERICK Srarr, in The American Journal of Sociology. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 66 FIFTH AVENUE NEw YORK CITY Pp oCIENCE SINGLE Copiss, 15 cts. VoL. IX. No. 219. FRIDAY, Marcu 10, 1899. ANNUAL SHER TON, $5.00" Queen Induction Coils The very extensive demand which we have had for X-Ray Apparatus has afforded us a large experience in building Induction Coils and given us occasion to make extensive experiments to perfect our line. Every detail of the coil has received careful consideration and every part has undergone improvement. We are prepared to furnish perfected types for all purposes. j Queen 15-in. Spark Induction Coil. Style A SENT ON APPLICATION CATALOGUES CIRCULARS Tv Electrical Test Instruments (120 pages) 214 Lord Kelvin’s Elect. Instruments (20 pages) I Physical Apparatus (150 pages) 244 Cable Testing Apparatus (40 pages) 1-20 Physical Laboratory Supplies (180 pages) 264 Queen X-Ray Apparatus (24 pages) 1-90 Commercial Elect. Instruments (48 pages) 264 The Queen-Acme Testing Set (20 pages ) QUEEN & CO.,, inc. Electrical and Scientific Instrument Works NEW YORK BRANCH: 5 TE Nee 1010 CHESTNUT ST., PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A. rat SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. BIinkDS By A. H. EVANS, M.A. Clare College, Cambridge Being Volume IX of the Cambridge Natural History. Edited by S. F. Harmer, Sce.D., and A. E. Sarptey. With Numerous Illustrations. Cloth Svo, $3.50 nei. A short description of the majority of the forms in many of the Families, and of the most typical or impor- tant of the innumerable species included in the large Passerine Order. Prefixed to each group is a brief sum_ mary of the structure and habits with such further particulars as may be necessary with a statement of the main fossil forms as yet recorded. “(The greatest and best book ever written about birds.’’—E..10rr Cours. A DICTIONARY OF BIRDS By PRoFEssoR ALFRED NEWTON, University of Cambridge. Assisted by Hans F. Gavow, Ph.D., F.R.S. With contributions from Ricuarp LypEKKer, author (with Sir W. H. Firower) of “ An Introduction to the Study of Mammals,’’ etc. ; Cuares 8S. Roy, Professor in the Uni versity of Cambridge ; Roserr W. Suuretpr, Late U.S. Army, Author of ‘The Mythology of the Raven,”’ etc. Complete im One Volume. Med. Svo, Price $10 vet. «Tt is a better introduction to ornithology and to ornithologists than has ever been written before . indeed it is one to lie upon the desk of every worker in this branch of natural history as an almost inexhaustible storehouse of facts he needs to know.’’—The Nation. « The most valuable and most interesting contribution ever made to the subject of which it treats.’’—Scrence. BIRDCRAFT A Field Book of Two Hundred “The Book is attractive, interesting, helpful, and 4 should be in the library of every lover of birds.” Song, Game, and Water Birds, —SCIENCE. By Mase. Oscoop Wricat. Eighty Plates by Louis AGAssiz Furrres. Small Quarto, $2.50 net. CITIZEN BIRD Scenes from Bird Life in “One of the most charming as well as most Plain English for Beginners. useful books.””—FoREST AND STREAM. By Maser Oscoop Wricut, Author of ‘‘ Tommy-Anne,”’ etc., and Dr. Exxiorr Cours, Author of ‘‘ Birds of North America.”” With over One Hundred Illustrations by Louris AGAssiz Furrtes. Cloth, Crown 8yo, $1.50 net PUBLISHED BY THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 66 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK CITY SCIENCE NEW SERIEs. "Sy Q) SINGLE Copizs, 15 cts, VoL. IX. No. 220. Frrpay, M ARCH UG 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00 Chemical and Physical Apparatus CHEMICALLY PURE ACIDS AND CHEMICALS SELLING AGENTS FOR Spencer Baker & Lens t s Adamson Company Chemical Co. and and Carl Desmoutis, 2 Zeiss, Lemaire & Co.’s Jena : Platinum Microscopes ; = Dishes and Crucibles SOLE AGENTS FOR SCHOTT & GENOSSEN, JENA NORMAL GLASS SCHLEICHER & SCHULL’S CHEM. PURE FILTERS SCHMIDT & HAENSCH’S OPTICAL APPARATUS MAX KOHL’S PHYSICAL APPARATUS ata EIMER & AMEND <3 205, 207, 209, 211 Third Ave. NEW YORK ii SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. Bik. By A. H. EVANS, M.A. Clare College, Cambridge Being Volume IX of the Cambridge Natural History. Edited by S. F. Harmer, Sc.D., and A. E. Saiptey. With Numerous Illustrations. Cloth Svo, $3.50 ne. A short description of the majority of the forms in many of the Families, and of the most typical or impor- tant of the innumerable species included in the large Passerine Order. Prefixed to each group is a brief sum mary of the structure and habits with such further particulars as may be necessary with a statement of the main fossil forms as yet recorded. “The greatest and best book ever written about birds.’’—E uiorr Cours. A DICTIONARY OF BIRDS By Proresson ALFRED NEWTON, University of Cambridge. Assisted by Hans F. Gapow, Ph.D., F.R.S. With contributions from Ricuarp LyprxKer, author (with Sir W. H. Frower) of “An Introduction to the Study of Mammals,’’ etc. ; Cuarzes 8. Roy, Professor in the Uni versity of Cambridge ; Roperr W. Suurerpt, Late U.S. Army, Author of ‘‘ The Mythology of the Raven,”’ etc. Complete in One Volume. Med. Svo, Price $10 zet. “It is a better introduction to ornithology and to ornithologists than has ever been written before indeed it is one to lie upon the desk of every worker in this branch of natural history as an almost inexhaustible storehouse of facts he needs to know.’’—The Nation. “The most valuable and most interesting contribution ever made to the subject of which it treats.’’—Scrunce. BIRDCRAFT A Field Book of Two Hundred “The Book is attractive, interesting, helpful, and fs should be in the library of every lover of birds.” ~ Song, Game, and Water Birds, —SCIENCE. By Masext Oscoop Wricar. Eighty Plates by Louis Acassiz Funrres. Small Quarto, $2.50 net. CITIZEN BIRD Scenes from Bird Life in “ One of the most charming as well as most Plain English for Beginners. useful books.”—FoREST AND STREAM. By Mazen Oscoop Wricut, Author of ‘* Tommy-Anne,’’ etc., and Dr. Entiorr Covers, Author of ‘‘ Birds of North America.” With over One Hundred Illustrations by Louis Acassiz Furrres. Cloth, Crown 8yo, $1.00 net PUBLISHED BY THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 66 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK CITY SCIENLE New SERIES. SINGLE C ES, 1 b Vou. IX. No. 221. Fripay, Marcu 24, 1899. aeeeae eee anes $5.00, THE SCIENCE SERIES Edited by PROF. J. McKEEN CATTELL, M.A., Ph.D., and F. E. BEDDARD, M.A., F.RB.S. NOW LN READINESS: EARTHQUAKES. By Major C. E. Durroy, 1.—_THE STUDY OF MAN. By Professor A. U.S.A. C. Happon, M.A., D.Sc., M.R.I.A. Fully illus- trated. 8vo. $2.00. PHYSIOGRAPHY: The Forms of the ‘CA timely and useful volume. . . . The author wields Land. By Prof. W. M. Davis, Harvard Univ. a pleasing pen, and knows how to make the subject attrac- tive. . . . The work is calculated to spread among its | THE STARS. By Prof. Stmon Newcoms, U.S.N.. readers an attraction to the science of anthropology. The ical / at . a ua .* author’s observations are exceedingly genuine, and his de- Nautical Almanac Office, and Johns Hopkins Uni scriptions are vivid.”—London Atheneum. versity. 2.—THE GROUNDWORK OF SCIENCE. | METEORS AND COMETS. By Prof. C. A. A Study of Epistemology, By Sr. Gzoran Mivarr, Youna, Princeton University. F.R.S. 8vo. $1.75. THE MEASUREMENT OF THE EARTH. 3.—_RIVERS OF NORTH AMERICA. A By President T. C. Mennennuaxt, Worcester Poly- Reading Lesson for Students of Geography and technic Institute, formerly Superintendent of the Geology. By Israrn C. Russeut, Professor of | . YU. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Geology, University of Michigan ; author of ‘‘ Lakes of North America,’’ ‘Glaciers of North America,” | ETHNIC PSYCHOLOGY. By Prof. Danren etc. Fully illustrated. 8yvo. $2.00. G. Brinton, University of Pennsylvania. A.—EARTH SCULPTURE. By Prof. James Gerkiz, F.R.S., University of Edinburgh. Fully RECENT THEORIES OF EVOLUTION. illustrated. 8y0. $2.00. By Prof. J. Marx Ba.pwin, Princeton Uniy. VOLCANOES. By Prof. T. G. Bonnny, F.R.S., | THE ANIMAL OVUM. By F. E. Bepparp, University College, London. F.R.S., Zoological Society, London. Each volume of the series will treat some department of science with ‘reference to the most recent advances, and will be contributed by an author of acknowledged authority. Every effort will be made to maintain the standard set by the first volumes, until the series shall represent the more important aspects of contemporary science. The advance of science has been so rapid, and its place in modern life has become so dominant, that it is needful to revise continually the statement -of its results, and to put these in a form that is intelligible and attractive. AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST NEW SERIES. VOL. I. NO. 1, NOW READY. The new series of the American ANTHROPOLOGIST Will be issued under the editorial management of the fol- lowing board: Dr. Frank Baker, Smithsonian Institution Washington; Dr. Franz Boss, American Museum of Natural History, New York; Dr. Daniet G. Brinton, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia; Dr. Groran M. Dawson, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa; Dr. Grorcn A. Dorsny, Meld Columbian Museum, Chicago; Prof. Witt1am H. Homes, U. 8. National Museum, Washington; Maj. J. W. Pownit, Bureau of American Ethnology, Washington ; Prof. Frepreric W. Purman, Peabody Museum, Cambridge. Secretary and Managing Editor, F. W. Hopes, 1333 F Street, Washington, D. C. The new journal will be devoted to the interests of Anthropology. Anthropology, as the science of man, appeals strongly not only to specialists, but also to other classes of intelligent readers ; yet the science is young and has not hitherto produced an adequate journal in this country. It is the aim of the editorial board to meet the need of such a journal, a need which has for some years been apparent and is steadily growing. Each number will contain 200 octavo pages, and will be fully illustrated. Issued quarterly. Subscription Price per Year, $4.00; Price of Single Numbers, $1.25. G. P. PUTNAM’S SONS, New York and London A il SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. JUST READY. The Spirit of Organic Chemistry AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CURRENT LITERATURE OF THE SUBJECT. By ARTHUR LACHMAN, Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Oregon. With an In- troduction by PAUL C. Freer, Ph.D., Professor of General Chemistry in the University of Michigan. Cloth, Crown S8vo, $1.50 net. “The Spirit of Organic Chemistry ’’ is a supplement to the standard text-book of the sub- ject ; it consists of selected chapters, historically and critically presented. With the chief object. in view of enabling its readers to follow the development of organic chemistry in the current journals, it analyzes the chief propositions of the science into their logical component problems ; interpreting the general in terms of the specific facts. The method employed is the historical ; in each case, the origin, growth, and gradual evolution of the problem are discussed in detail. The topics chosen for presentation have been selected mainly because of their adaptability to the above manner of treatment, but they will be found to include nearly all the fundamental prob- lems and conceptions of this branch of chemistry. Stereochemical doctrines, in particular, have been incorporated to an extent commensurate with their importance. No great familiarity with the subject is presupposed, the more difficult points being explained in full detail. Experimental Morphology By CHARLES BENEDICT DAVENPORT, PH.D., Instructor in Zoology in Harvard University. Parti. Errects oF CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL AGENTS ON PROTOPLASM. Cloth, Svo, $2.60. ‘‘The material which is discussed has been well digested and is well arranged . . . and the style is on the whole clear and concise. The book is a readable one and the descriptions and criticisms of methods employed in experimentation, and the bibliographical lists at the conclusion of each chapter, contribute materially to the value the book possesses for both the morphologist and physiologist.—J. P. McMUuRRICH in SCIENCE. PartIl. Errrecr or CHEMICAL AND PHysIcAL AGENTS UPON GROWTH. Cloth, 8vo. Ready this Month. $2.00 net. The widespread interest in the study of the conditions of development and its experimental control makes it certain that this book will be welcomed by a large number of students of zoology, physiology, botany and agriculture. The general arrangement of the book is the same as that of Part First. Growth is treated apart from differentiation, as one of the factors of development, and the effect of each agent both upon the rate of growth and its direction is discussed. The part played by the different chemical elements in the growing as opposed to the adult organism is con- sidered in the first chapter, where especial reference is made to the questions of the assimilation of free nitrogen and the stimulation of growth by lecithin and poisons. The important rdle of water in growth is insisted upon. The marked effect of dense solutions is demonstrated by the aid of new experiments. The hastening effects of electricity upon plant growth and the laws of the effect of light rays of different wave-length and those of temperature are inquired into. The dwarfing effects of small vessels on the size of animals reared in them is also considered. Finally the growth movements of plants in response to chemicals, moisture, contact, gravity, electricity, light and heat, are fully discussed. The tendency of the whole book, which contains consider- able original material, is away from the mechanical explanation of vital processes. Such pro- cesses are to be explained only by the action of causes more complex and remote than most phy- siologists have hitherto conceived them to be. There are 66 illustrations in this part and an index to the first and second parts. ; THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Publishers, New York SCIENCE NEW SERIEs. 9 SINGLE Copigs, 15 crs H{ 7 A a 0 , 5 Vou. IX. No. 222. FRIDAY ? Marcu 31, 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00 “Manipulation of the Microscope” A MANUAL FOR THE WORK TABLE AND A TEXT BOOK FOR THE BEGINNER IN THE USE OF THE MICROSCOPE By EDWARD BAUSCH Bound in Silk Cloth. 200 pp. Price, $1.00 “Manipulation of the Microscope” presents clearly and concisely the essential information regarding the principles, and leads to the intelligent use of the microscope. Beginning with the purpose of the microscope, the parts of the instrument are described in detail, together with the principles involved in their construction, followed by a chapter outlining requisites for work. How to work not only with the microscope, but with its various accessories, is supplemented by a chapter on advanced manipulation. Chapters on how to select and care for a microscope also contain valuable information. This book is recommended for the use of students beginning the use of the microscope in any branch of science and especially as a supplementary aid to the instruction usually given. It will also be found a valuable refer- ence book by the advanced worker. Too often the use of the microscope is begun with little or no knowledge of its construction, what the various parts are for, and their manipulation to obtain the best results. There is also, in very many cases, too great a ten- dency, even in the most advanced laboratories, to undervalue a knowledge of the proper use and care of the microscope. It is a well known fact that improper manipulation may easily lead to incorrect deductions, and the microscope will be found a much more obedient and useful servant if the user will only familiarize himself with its mechanical and optical construc- tion and the best way of keeping it in good order. BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. Rectan ROCHESTER, N. Y. NEW YORK CITY CHICAGO ii SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. JUST READY. The Arithmetic of Chemistry BEING A SIMPLE TREATMENT OF THE SUBJECT OF CHEMICAL CALCULATIONS. By JoHN WADDELL, B.Sc. (Lond.), Ph.D. (Heidelberg), D.Sc. (Edin.), formerly Assistant to the Professor of Chemistry, University of Edinburg. Cloth, r6mo, go cents net. An accurate, simple and systematic treatment of the subject, arranged so as to make the text present a continuous line of argument. Useful tables are appended, the French metric system, comparison of thermometric scales, atomic weights, equations in frequent use, four-place loga- rithms, ete. The Spirit of Organic Chemistry AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CURRENT LITERATURE OF THE SUBJECT. By ARTHUR LACHMAN, Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Oregon. With an In- troduction by PAUL C. FREER, Ph.D., Professor of General Chemistry in the University of Michigan. Cloth, Crown Svo, $1.50 net. “The Spirit of Organic Chemistry ’’ is a supplement to the standard text-book of the sub- ject ; it consists of selected chapters, historically and critically presented. With the chief object in view of enabling its readers to follow the development of organic chemistry in the current journals, it analyzes the chief propositions of the science into their logical component problems ; interpreting the general in terms of the specific facts. The method employed is the historical ; in each case, the origin, growth, and gradual evolution of the problem are discussed in detail. The topics chosen for presentation have been selected mainly because of their adaptability to the above manner of treatment, but they will be found to include nearly all the fundamental prob- lems and conceptions of this branch of chemistry. Stereochemical doctrines, in particular, have been incorporated to an extent commensurate with their importance. No great familiarity with the subject is presupposed, the more difficult points being explained in full detail. Experimental Morphology By CHARLES BENEDICT DAVENPORT, PuH.D., Instructor in Zoology in Harvard University. Part I. EFFECTS OF CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL AGENTS ON PROTOPLASM. Cloth, Svo, $2.60. ‘¢The material which is discussed has been well digested and is well arranged . . . and the style is on the whole clear and concise. The book is a readable one and the descriptions and criticisms of methods employed in experimentation, and the bibliographical lists at the conclusion of each chapter, contribute materially to the value the book possesses for both the morphologist and physiologist.—J. P. McMuRRICH in SCIENCE. | PARTI. Errecr of CHEMICAL AND PHysICAL AGENTS UPON GROWTH. Cloth, 8vo. Ready this Month. $2.00 net. The widespread interest in the study of the conditions of development and its experimental control makes it certain that this book will be welcomed by a large number of students of zoology, physiology, botany and agriculture. The general arrangement of the book is the same as that of Part First. Growth is treated apart from differentiation, as one of the factors of development, and the effect of each agent both upon the rate of growth and its direction is discussed. There are 66 illustrations in this part and an index to the first and second parts. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Publishers, New York SCIENCE NEW ee, a Fripay, APRIL le 1899. SINGLE CoPigs, 15 cTs. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00- WM. GAERTNER & G0.,"cencc'eac'sem Se, cHionco @ nnn al } =| = = a” = LEVEL TESTER. Price, $12.50 i SPECIALTIES STANDARD APPARATUS OF NEW AND IMPROVED DESIGNS ASTRONOMICAL TELESCOPES READING MICROSCOPES AND TELESCOPES DivIDING ENGINES, COMPARATORS SPECTROSCOPES BOLOMETERS GENERAL LABORATORY APPARATUS MICHELSON INTERFEROMETERS HELIOSTATS UNIVERSAL LABORATORY SUPPORTS MINIATURE INCANDESCENT LAMPS. MINIATURE LAMP RECEPTACLES. x-RAY TUBES AND APPARATUS. FLUOROSCOPES. Catalogues on Application. Edison Decorative and Miniature Lamp Department, (GENERAL ELECTRIC ComPanr,) HARRISON, N. J. S ti d Sh iF A growing interest is manifested by Conchologists in the interior structure of ec one e S. univalve mollusks as revealed by sectioning. To supply their cabinets we are furnishing shells cut on our steam diamond saws, in any desired direction, at a small advance over our regular list prices. Cut Nautilus, Murex, Voluta, Strombus, Cyprza, Cassis, Trochus, etc., etc., always in stock. Write for our circulars, naming your special field. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, 28 to 40 College Avenue, z) ROCHESTER, N. Y. BISSSISI eS ees > 2 Pes 3 iii cttcdched Bers eG), WESTON UME ras are recognized throughout the civilized world as standard. They cost more than other instruments, but results obtained are proportionately more satisfactory. I am Special Agent for the Weston Electrical Instrument Co., and solicit correspondence with all readers of ‘‘ SCIENCE”’ who require the best apparatus for electrical measurements. Catalogue X (a complete price list of Weston Instruments) mailed free upon request. JAMES G. BIDDLE 1034 Drexel Building PHILADELPHIA "SEESEESSS SESS ESSEC SESE SESSS SSS ESE SESE SESE SESE ESE SSE SS ESSE SSE ESEGES VSSSSSSSE SSS SESS SESS il SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. JUST READY. The Arithmetic of Chemistry BEING A SIMPLE TREATMENT OF THE SUBJECT OF CHEMICAL CALCULATIONS. By JoHN WADDELL, B.Sc. (Lond.), Ph.D. (Heidelberg), D.Sc. (Edin.), formerly Assistant to the Professor of Chemistry, University of Edinburg. Cloth, r6mo, go cents net. An accurate, simple and systematic treatment of the subject, arranged so as to make the text present a continuous line of argument. Useful tables are appended, the French metric system, comparison of thermometric scales, atomic weights, equations in frequent tse, four-place loga- rithms, etc. The Spirit of Organic Chemistry AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CURRENT LITERATURE OF THE SUBJECT. By ARTHUR LACHMAN, Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Oregon. With an In- troduction by PAuL C. FREER, Ph.D., Professor of General Chemistry in the University of Michigan. Cloth, Crown Svo, $1.50 “et. ‘The Spirit of Organic Chemistry ’’ is a supplement to the standard text-book of the sub- ject ; it consists of selected chapters, historically and critically presented. With the chief object in view of enabling its readers to follow the development of organic chemistry in the current journals, it analyzes the chief propositions of the science into their logical component problems ; interpreting the general in terms of the specific facts. The method employed is the historical ; in each case, the origin, growth, and gradual evolution of the problem are discussed in detail. The topics chosen for presentation have been selected mainly because of their adaptability to the above manner of treatment, but they will be found to include nearly all the fundamental prob- lems and conceptions of this branch of chemistry. Stereochemical doctrines, in particular, have been incorporated to an extent commensurate with their importance. No great familiarity with the subject is presupposed, the more difficult points being explained in full detail. Experimental Morphology By CHARLES BENEDICT DAVENPORT, PH.D., Instructor in Zoology in Harvard University. Part il. Errects oF CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL AGENTS ON PROTOPLASM. Cloth, 8vo, $2.60. ‘“'The material which is discussed has been well digested and is well arranged . . . and the style is on the whole clear and concise. The book is a readable one and the descriptions and criticisms of methods employed in experimentation, and the bibliographical lists at the conclusion of each chapter, contribute materially to the value the book possesses for both the morphologist and physiologist.—J. P. McCMuRRICH in SCIENCE. Parr Il. Errrect of CHEMICAL AND PHysICAL AGENTS UPON GROWTH. Cloth, S8vo. Ready this Month. $2.00 net. The widespread interest in the study of the conditions of development and its experimental control makes it certain that this book will be welcomed by a large number of students of zoology, physiology, botany and agriculture. The general arrangement of the book is the same as that of Part First. Growth is treated apart from differentiation, as one of the factors of development, and the effect of each agent both upon the rate of growth and its direction is discussed. There are 66 illustrations in this part and an index to the first and second parts. THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, Publishers, New York SCIENCE NEW SERIES. SID C £ VoL. IX. No. 224. Fripay, Aprin 14, 1899. aNOAE SERCatEOn. $5.00 Queen Self-Regulating X-Ray Tube Less than two years have passed since the Queen Self-Regulating X-Ray Tube was announced. It won imme- diate recognition as the most important improvement made in high vacuum tubes for the purpose of generating X-Rays. It gives the operator power to control and regulate the vacuum and he can thereby vary the penetrating power and other qualities of the X-Rays to suit the work in hand. It has, therefore, become almost universally recognized as a necessity to radiographers who wish to do rapid and reliable work, and as an absolute essential to those who would be in position to render to the surgeon all the aid their science is capable of furnishing. In autograph letters, Professor Roentgen and Lord Kelvin have paid tribute to its ‘‘ingenuity’’ and ‘most satisfac- tory’’ working qualities. We have just issued a 36-page pamphlet completely describing it and giving detailed instructions for its use, which will be sent free to inquirers. QUEEN & CO.,, inc. Optical, Electrical and Scientific Instrument Works SEIDEL St ate 1010 CHESTNUT ST., PHILADELPHIA 59 Fifth Avenue i SCIENCE.—ADVERTISEMENTS. “T began to study animals about 1857, and am still at it. My conclusions in the matter agree substantially with your own. . . . I am glad to find you keeping all metaphysical, theological, and teleological speculation out of your science. “Tt seems to me that you express a great fact when you speak of neuroplasmic as well as nerve action proper ; for otherwise we cannot account for the amount of sense an ameeba certainly possesses.”—Dr. Ettiorr Cours, Editor of The Osprey. Just Ready Cloth, Crown 8vo, $1.25 New and Original GaN fascinating book . . . his observations are of in- + FE tense interest.” — The Congregationalist, Boston. “An exhaustive and scholarly study . . . in a clear, simple and brief form.”— Louisville Times. D A W N “ Exceedingly interesting . . . wholly original.”—Lowis- ville Dispatch. “« Any one interested in the progress of comparative psy~ O F chology must wish well to a man who, without the incentives of the professed naturalist, makes it a labor of love to watch animal life. I, for one, shall weleome such observations, even R E A SO N though they are more one-sided than Dr. Weir’s. His favor- itism toward animals, though it has deprived us of any records of unintelligent conduct and perhaps prevented the repetition of some tests and even distorted facts, has still failed to infuse Mental Traits a very considerable number of suggestive and important obser- vations. It will pay any student of animal psychology to read in the the book for the sake of these. . . . A sample of Dr. Weir’s keenness is his theory that the continual barking of dogs at ° night is explainable by the supposition that they bark at an Lower Animals echo. This hypothesis he supports by some very striking facts.”,—Dr. Epwarp THORNDIKE, in Science. B “The author is a bold and independent thinker as shown | by a previous work . . . and his observations profoundly JAM ES W E| R interesting.” — The Chronicle, San Francisco. ; “ Entirely new and a valuable addition to the evidence Jr., M.D. already published by Darwin, Romanes, Lubbock, Buchner, he Kirby, Spence, and others.” — The Evening Post, Chicago. uthor of “The Physical Correlation of “The work is one of thought and indicates laborious Religious Emotion and study.” — The Times, Louisville, Ky. Seles ce “Tn this little book are gathered together a great many interesting data . . . the author has observed and experi- mented for himself and in many respects his conclusions are Cloth, cr. 8vo, $1.25 striking and novel.” —Literature. “One rises from the perusal of this fascinating book with a feeling as having heard of anew world. . . . Space will not permit further allusion to this charming book, but we advise all who are interested in such matters to obtain it.”— Public Health. THE MACMILLAN COPMPANY, Publishers, New York. SCIENCE New SERIES. 2Q¢ SINGLE CopiEs, 15 crs. Vou. IX. No. 225. FRIpAy, APRIL 21, 1899. ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, €5.00. Chemicals : Chemical Apparatus. V pue sadodsossiW ‘SSI9Z [ABD *SOIJOSSIDD Schott & Gen., Jena Laboratory Glassware. EIMER & - AMEND, New York. il SCTENCE.—AD VERTISEMENTS. The Macmillan Company’s New Books JUST READY. Defective Eyesight: The Principles of Its Relief Glasses. By D. B. Sr. Joun Roosa, M.D., LL.D., Professor Emeritus of Diseases of the Eye and Ear, Post Graduate ‘Med- ical School and Hospital; Surgeon to the Manhattan Eye and Ear Hospital, etc., etc., author of ‘A Clinical Manual of Diseases of the Eye;’’ ‘‘ Ophthalmic and Otic Memoranda;”’ ‘‘ A Practical Treatise on the Dis- eases of the Ear;’’ ‘The Old Hospital and Other Papers; ’’ ‘‘A Vest-Pocket Medical Lexicon,”’ ete. Cloth. 12mo. $1.00, net. No pains have been spared to make the manual a complete guide to the practitioner who wishes to under- stand and practice the rules for the prescription of lens for the improvement of defective sight. The book may also be interesting to educated men in all departments of life, who desire to be informed as to advances that have been made in this interesting subject, one which concerns such a large proportion of the human race. A Text Book of the Embryology Of Invertebrates. By Dr. E. Korscuett, Pro- fessor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Marburg, and Dr. K. Hrier, Pro- fessor of Zoology in the University of Berlin. Vol. I. Parifera Cuidaria, Ctenophora, Vermes, En- teropneusta, Echinodermata. Translated by Ep- warp L. Marx, Ph.D., Hersey Professor of An- atomy, and W. McM. Woopwortu, Ph.D., Harvard University. 8vo. Cloth. Pp. 484. $4.00, net. «The book has been in the hands of zoologists ‘all over the world and is recognized as an excellent and indispensable reference book.’’—Professor Jacos RriG- HARD in Science. Vol. II. Phoronidea, Bryozoa, Ectoprocta, Brachio- poda, Entoprocta, Crustacea, Palzostraca. Trans- lated by MatinpA Bernarp. Revised and Edited, with Additional Notes, by Martin F. Woopwarp, Demonstrator of Zoology, Royal College of Science. 8vo. Cloth. Pp. xv-+875. $3.00, net. The second part of a work described in the review quoted above as ‘‘so well done that the book is likely to remain for many years without a rival.’’ Part III. is in preparation. Of Man and Mammals. By Dr. Oscar Herr- wia, Professor Extraordinarius of Anatomy and Comparative Anatomy, Director of the II. Anatom- ical Institute of the University of Berlin. Trans- lated from the Third German Edition by Epwarp L. Marx, Ph.D., Hersey Professor of Anatomy in Harvard University. Second Edition, with 339 Figures in the Text and 2 Lithographic Plates. 8vo. Cloth. Pp. xvi+670. $5.25, net. ‘« While it is in details largely confined to the study of mammals, there is so much of general embryology within its covers as to give it a value as a general text- book of vertebrate embryology. As such a text-book is of the greatest value to a student and it is safe to say that at the present time there is no text-book so well de- signed to give the student a general knowledge of ver- tebrate embryology as the present one.’’—~Science. “The translator's work has been exceptionally well done, for the rendering is both accurate and smooth. . . . The work has been welcomed by all em- bryologists and is highly esteemed by them, especially on account of the admirable presentation made by the author of many of the most interesting problems with which their investigations have to deal.’’—British Med. and Surg. Journal. «Any one interested in the progress of comparative psychology THE DAWN OF REASON shall welcome such ... and important observations. THORNDIKE in Science. previous work . . «